1st Year Biology Part-1 Sc1 Biology1

BUREAU’S
HIGHER SECONDARY (+2)
BIOLOGY
|Vol.-1|
Approved by Council of Higher Secondary Education, Odisha, Bhubaneswar
[ BOARD OF WRITERS ]
Dr. Manoranjan Kar Dr. Manas Ranjan Satapathy
Formerly Professor in Botany, Lecturer in Botany,
Utkal Univeristy, Vani Vihar, Bhubaneswar Dhenkanal (Autonomous) College, Dhenkanal
Dr. Baman Chandra Acharya Dr. Subas Chandra Das
Formerly Professor in Botany, Formerly Principal,
Khalikote (Autonomous) College, Berhampur Sundergarh Women's College, Sundergarh
Dr. Basanta Kumar Choudhury Dr. Pradeep Kumar Mohanty
Formerly Reader in Botany, Presently, Editor, 'Bigyan Associate Professor in Zoology,
Diganta', Odisha Bigyan Academy, Bhubaneswar Dhenkanal (Autonomous) College, Dhenkanal
Dr. Ajay Kumar Acharya Dr. Jayakrushna Panigrahy
Reader in Botany, Swami Vivekananda Memorial Reader in Zoology, Jaydev College of Science and
(Autonomous) College, Jagatsinghpur Technology, Naharkanta, Bhubaneswar
Shri Uday Shankar Acharya Dr. Bairagi Charan Behera
Associate Professor in Botany, Reader in Zoology,
Samanta Chandra Sekhar (Autonomous) College, Puri Kendrapara (Autonomous) College, Kendrapara
Dr. Hrushikesh Nayak Dr. Maheswar Behera
Lecturer in Botany, Buxi Jagabandhu Bidyadhar Associate Professor in Zoology,
(Junior) College, Bhubaneswar Samanta Chandra Sekhar (Autonomous) College, Puri
[BOARD OF REVIWERS^
Dr. Manoranjan Kar Dr. Basanta Kumar Choudhury
Formerly Professor in Botany Formerly Reader in Botany, Presently, Editor, 'Bigyan
Utkal Univeristy, Vani Vihar, Bhubaneswar Diganta', Odisha Bigyan Academy, Bhubaneswar
Dr. Baman Chandra Acharya Dr. Subas Chandra Das

Formerly Professor in Botany Formerly Principal,
Khalikote (Autonomous) College, Berhampur Sundergarh Women's College, Sundergarh
Dr. Pradeep Kumar Mohanty

Associate Professor in Zoology
Dhenkanal (Autonomous) College, Dhenkanal
ODISHA STATE BUREAU OF TEXTBOOK PREPARATION AND PRODUCTION

Pustak Bhavan, Bhubaneswar
Published by:
THE ODISHA STATE BUREAU OF TEXTBOOK PREPARATION AND PRODUCTION
Pustak Bhavan, Bhubaneswar, Odisha, India
First Edition 2016
Publication No 183
ISBN : 978-81-8005-359-7
© Reserved by the Odisha State Bureau of Textbook Preparation and Production,

Bhubaneswar. No part of this publication may be reproduced in any form without the
prior written permission of the publisher.
Type Setting, Design & Printing:

PRINT-TECH OFFSET PVT. LTD., Bhubaneswar
Price : ? 380/- (Rupees Three Hundred Eighty Only)

FOREWORD
Modern life is changing very fast. Keeping pace with it the life science or
Biology, its syllabus and even the examination pattern in the national level has also
been restructured. Aim is to create the best manpower who can understand Biology,
the problems of modern man and other organisms perfectly well and tackle it
adequately.
The Council of Higher Secondary Education, Odisha in its maiden attempt

integrated the Botany and Zoology syllabi together, to create the new syllabus of
Biology. This has been done to inculcate the nuances of the subject in systematic
and cohenent manner as per the standard prescribed be National Council of
Education, Research & Training, New Delhi.
It gives me immense pleasure to note the publication of Bureau's Higher

Secondary (+2) Biology Vol.-I. The board of writers have done a tremendous work
in the preparation of the book with upto date concepts in very simplified version. I
am specifically thankful to Dr. B. K. Choudhury and Dr. P. K. Mohanty who have
devoted a lot of time in final proof reading, revision of chapters and setting up
labelled diagrams at the appropriate places in the book. The board of reviewers
comprising Dr. Manoranjan Kar, Dr. Baman Chandra Acharya, Dr. Basanta Kumar
Choudhury, Dr. Subash Chandra Das and Dr. Pradeep Kumar Mohanty have devoted
their valuable time in reading all the chapters, correcting the concepts and enriching
the book in all the aspects, so that it can cater to the needs of our higher secondary
students.
Firstly I thank all the employees of our Bureau and the DTP operator,
Shri Ashok Kumar Ojha and the press, Print-tech Offset Pvt. Ltd., Bhubaneswar for
the publication of the book. I am very much thankful to our Deputy Director, Shri
Biraj Bhusan Mohanty for his sincere efforts in co-ordinating in this maiden venture
of publishing a Biology book in +2 level.
My sincere thanks to the Principal Secretary in the Department of Higher

Secondary Education, Govt of Odisha for his interest in the publication of the book.
I am also grateful to the Chairman, CHSE, Odisha for awarding the Bureau the
task of preparation and publication of this Biology book. The Bureau is also indebted
to the syllabus committee for selecting the writers and recommending this book as
the one and only prescribed text book for our higher secondary students. The bureau
will humbly appreciate the constructive comments and suggestions to improve the
standard of the book.
Director
Odisha State Bureau of Textbook
Preparation and Production
Bhubaneswar
PREFACE
In the preceding centuries we have talked about space, the atmosphere and
the Earth. Our focus has been on the space explorations, we have undertaken a
through study on space technology, mining exploration, oceanic resource exploitation
and future technologies that can benefit us. As the result, all round progress and
development were evident everywhere. In this scenario of unprecedented
development, the human population doubles in matter of decades. Earlier this
doubling was occurring in the course of several millennia. Consequently, our per
capita consumption of resources increased, we domesticated wild plants for food
and animals for our multifarious requirements. The cascading effect of
overexploitation of the natural resources led to heating up of our mother Earth
beyond tolerable limits and resultant irreversible climate change. Under the above
conditions, time has come to understand the living biotic resources of this planet so
that it can be exploited under sustainable limits and enough may be left back for
our future generations.
Everyone should understand the value of all living beings, the microbes, plants
and animals and how they coexit in nature in mutual harmony for ages. Any damage
to these intricately associated living organisms and unethical interference in their
normal life cylce patterns will jeopardise our very existence.
Keeping all these facts in view, the Council of Higher Secondary Education
(CHSE), Odisha has made significant changes in the syllabi of Biology. The syllabus
has been framed exactly in the pattern of National Council of Education Research
and Training (NCERT), New Delhi. The task of writing the book was entrusted to
Odisha State Bureau of Textbook Preparation and Prdoduction, Bhubaneswar. The
board of writers and reviewers appointed by the Bureau have strived hard to write
this Biology book merging Botany and Zoology portions together so that the
beginners can have a synchronised understanding of the subject.
The book is now open for the teachers, students and other stakeholders in
Biology to assimilate the content and study materials to take on the variety of
challenges in their immediate and future life. The board of writers and reviewers
will be happy to receive valued feedback for further improvement of the book. The
concepts, ideas and contents presented in the text book are not all original. These
might have been assimilated from standard texts and other supporting materials.
The board of writers and reviewers acknowledge their gratitude to Odisha

State Bureau of Textbook Preparation and Production, Bhubaneswar, CHSE, Odisha
and Department of Higher Education, Government of Odisha for assigning the
task of writing the book.
Board of
Writers & Reviewers
BIOLOGY SYLLABUS
(To be implemented from the session 2016-17)
CLASS - XI
(Theory)
Unit-I : DIVERSITY IN LIVING WORLD (Periods 10)

1. What is living?; Biodiversity; Need for classification; Three domains of life;
Taxonomy and Systematics; Concept of species and taxonomical hierarchy;
Binomial nomenclature; Tools for study of Taxonomy- Museums, Zoos, Herbaria,
Botanical gardens.
2. Five kingdom classification; Salient features and classification of Monera, Protista
and Fungi into major groups; Lichens; Viruses and Viroids.
3. Salient features and classification of plants into major groups-Algae, Bryophytes,
Pteridophytes, Gymnosperms and Angiosperms (three to five salient and
distinguishing features and at least two examples of each category);
Angiosperms- classification up to class, characteristic features and examples.
4. Salient features and classification of animals- non-chordates up to phyla level
and chordates up to classes level (three to five salient features and at least two
examples).
Unit-II : STRUCTURAL ORGANIZATION IN ANIMALS AND PLANTS (Periods 12)

5. Morphology and modifications in plants; Tissues; Anatomy and functions of
different parts of flowering plants- Root, stem, leaf; inflorescence- cymose and
racemose; flower, fruit and seed (To be dealt along with the relevant practical of
the Practical Syllabus).
6. Animal tissues (epithelial, connective, muscular, nervous); Morphology, anatomy
and functions of different systems (digestive, circulatory, respiratory, nervous
and reproductive) of an insect (cockroach). (Brief account only).
Unit - III : CELL STRUCTURE AND FUNCTION (Periods 12)

7. Cell theory and cell as the basic unit of life; Structure of prokaryotic and eukaryotic
cell; Plant cell and animal cell; Cell envelope, cell membrane, cell wall; Cell
organelles-structure and function; Endomembrane system- endoplasmic
reticulum, Golgi bodies, lysosomes, vacuoles; mitochondria, ribosomes, plastids,
microbodies; Cytoskeleton, cilia, flagella, centrioles (ultra structure and function);
Nucleus- nuclear membrane, chromatin, nucleolus.
8. Chemical constituents of living cells: Biomolecules- structure and function of
proteins, carbohydrates, lipid, nucleic acids; Enzymes-types, properties, enzyme
action.
9. Cell division: Cell cycle, mitosis, meiosis and their significance.
Unit - IV : PLANT PHYSIOLOGY (Periods 20)
10. Transport in Plants: Movement of water, gases and nutrients; Cell to cell
transport-Diffusion, facilitated diffusion, active transport; Plant-water relations-
Imbibition, water potential, osmosis, plasmolysis; Long distance transport of
water- Absorption, apoplast, symplast, transpiration pull, root pressure and
guttation; Transpiration-Opening and closing of stomata; Uptake and translocation
of mineral nutrients-Transport of food, phloem transport, Mass flow hypothesis;
Diffusion of gases (brief mention).
11. Mineral Nutrition: Essential minerals, macro and micronutrients and their role;
Deficiency symptoms; Mineral toxicity; Elementary idea of Hydroponics as a
method to study mineral nutrition; Nitrogen metabolism- Nitrogen cycle, biological
nitrogen fixation.
12. Photosynthesis: Photosynthesis as a means of Autotrophic nutrition; Where
does photosynthesis take place; How many pigments are involved in
Photosynthesis (Elementary idea); Photochemical and biosynthetic phases of
photosynthesis; Cyclic and non-cyclic photophosphorylation; Chemiosmotic
hypothesis; Photorespiration; & and C4 pathways; Factors affecting
photosynthesis.
13. Respiration: Exchange of gases; Cellular respiration- glycolysis, fermentation
(anaerobic), TCAcycle and electron transport system (aerobic); Energy relations
-Number of ATP molecules generated; Amphibolic pathways; Respiratory
quotient.
14. Plant growth and Development: Seed germination; Phases of plant growth
and plant growth rate; Conditions of growth; Differentiation, dedifferentiation
and Adifferentiation; Sequence of developmental process in a plant cell; Growth
regulators-auxin, gibberellin, cytokinin, ethylene, ABA; Seed dormancy;
Vernalisation; Photoperiodism.
Unit-V : HUMAN PHYSIOLOGY (Periods 30)

15. Digestion and Absorption: Alimentary canal and digestive glands; Role of
digestive enzymes and gastrointestinal hormones; Peristalsis, digestion,
absorption and assimilation of proteins, carbohydrates and fats; Calorific value
of proteins, carbohydrates and fats (brief account); Egestion; Nutritional and
digestive disorders-PEM, indigestion, constipation, vomiting jaundice, diarrhea.
16. Breathing and Respiration: Respiratory organs in animals (tracheal, brancheal,
cutaneous, pulmonary); Respiratory system in humans; Mechanism of respiration
(breathing) and its regulation in humans- Exchange of gases, transport of gases,
Respiratory volumes; Disorders related to respiration- Asthma, Emphysema,
Occupational respiratory disorders.
17. Body fluids and Circulation: Composition of blood, blood groups, coagulation
of blood; Composition of lymph and its function; Human circulatory system-
Structure and working of human heart, blood vessels; Cardiac cycle, cardiac
output, ECG; Double circulation; Regulation of cardiac activity; Disorders of
circulatory system-Hypertension, Coronary artery disease, Angina pectoris, Heart
failure.
18. Excretory products and their elimination: Modes of excretion-Ammonotelism,
ureotelism, uricotelism; Human excretory system- structure and fuction;
Mechanism of Urine formation, Osmoregulation; Regulation of kidney function-
Renin-angiotensin, Atrial Natriuretic Factor, ADH and Diabetes insipidus; Role
of other organs in excretion; Disorders- Uraemia, Renal failure, Renal calculi.
Nephritis; Dialysis and artificial kidney.
19. Locomotion and Movement: Types of movement- ciliary, flagellar, muscular,
Skeletal muscle- contractile proteins and muscle contraction; Skeletal system
and its functions (To be dealt with the relevant practical of Practical Syllabus);
Joints; Disorders of muscular and skeletal system- Myasthenia gravis, Tetany,
Muscular dystrophy, Arthritis, Osteoporosis, Gout.
20. Neural control and Coordination: Neuron and nerves; Nervous system in
humans-central nervous system (brain, spinal cord), peripheral nervous system
and visceral nervous system; Generation and conduction of nerve impulse; Reflex
action; Sensory perception; Sense organs; Elementary structure and function
of eye and ear.
21. Chemical coordination and Regulation: Endocrine glands and hormones;
Human endocrine system- Hypothalamus, Pituitary, Pineal, Thyroid, Parathyroid,
Adrenal, Pancreas, Gonads; Mechanism of hormone action (Elementary Idea);
Role of hormones as messengers and regulators, Hypo- and hyperactivity and
related disorders (Common disorders e.g. Dwarfism, acromegaly, cretinism,
goiter, exopthalmic goiter, diabetes, Addison’s disease).
Imp: Diseases related to ail the human physiology systems to be taught in brief.
(NB: I b, c; II a; III and IV units are to be taught by Botany Faculty. I a, d; II b; V

units are to be taught by Zoology Faculty.)
CONTENT
UNIT - I
DIVERSITY IN THE LIVING WORLD Pages
Chapter -1 BIODIVERSITY 1 -14

Chapter - 2 CLASSIFICATION OF LIVING WORLD 15-30
Chapter - 3 CLASSIFICATION OF PLANT KINGDOM 31 -60
Chapter - 4 CLASSIFICATION OF ANIMAL KINGDOM 61 -106
UNIT - II
STRUCTURAL ORGANIZATION IN
PLANTS AND ANIMALS
Chapter - 5 PLANT MORPHOLOGY AND ANATOMY 107-239
Chapter - 6 ANIMAL TISSUES AND GROSS ANATOMICAL 240 - 294
ORGANIZATION OF COCKROACH
UNIT - III
CELL STRUCTURE AND FUNCTION
Chapter - 7 CELL STRUCTURE AND FUNCTION 295 - 346
Chapter - 8 CHEMICAL CONSTITUENTS OF LIVING CELLS 347 - 377
Chapter - 9 CELL DIVISION CYCLE 378 - 386
UNIT - IV
PLANT PHYSIOLOGY
Chapter -10 TRANSPORT IN PLANTS 387 - 421
Chapter -11 MINERAL NUTRITION 422 - 437
Chapter -12 PHTOSYNTHESIS 438 - 461
Chapter -13 RESPIRATION 462 - 475
Chapter -14 PLANT GROWTH AND DEVELOPMENT 476 - 493
UNIT-V
HUMAN PHYSIOLOGY
Chapter -15 DIGESTION AND ABSORPTION 494 - 534
Chapter -16 BREATHING AND RESPIRATION 535 - 564
Chapter -17 BODY FLUIDS AND CIRCULATION 565 - 622
Chapter -18 EXCRETORY PRODUCTS AND THEIR 623 - 647
ELIMINATION
Chapter -19 LOCOMOTION AND MOVEMENT 648 - 676
Chapter - 20 NEURAL CONTROL AND COORDINATION 677 - 721
Chapter - 21 CHEMICAL COORDINATION AND REGULATION 722 - 755
UNIT-I: DIVERSITY IN THE LIVING WORLD
CHAPTER
BIODIVERSITY
1
So far as the scientific knowledge, till date, is concerned, earth is the only planet sheltering
living organisms of diverse forms in different habitats. The evolution theory states that the earth
is created from the sun about 4.5 billion years ago and subsequently, life originated on it nearly
3.6 billion years back in sea water. As time progressed, more and more complex forms of
organisms evolved from simple forms and eukaryotes originated from prokaryotes, creating
various species of organisms such as microbes, plants and animals, in the course of organic
evolution.
1.1. WHAT IS LIVING?
Everybody easily understands the differences between the living and non-living. But it
remains a difficult task to define ‘life’. We explain the distinctive characters the living organisms
possess such as growth, movement or locomotion, digestion, respiration, excretion, reproduction
and response to stimuli and adaptation to the changing environment. Some of the internal
processes which are not perceived from outside include metabolic reactions, actions of enzymes
and hormones, functioning of the immune system and many more. Many of these phenomena
are similar in many organisms and in others are different. Combining all these, we can define
life as the condition that distinguishes animals, plants and microorganisms from inorganic and
organic physical matter and dead organisms and it is expressed by the functions stated above.
Organisms undergo continual change, till death. Some important properties of organisms are
discussed below.
(a) Metabolism : The cells of organisms contain within them diverse types of inorganic
and organic molecules of variable sizes, which make up the internal cellular environment. They
participate in thousands of different biochemical reactions to carry out diverse functions essential
for the survival of organisms. These reactions sumtotally constitute metabolism, which is further
divided into anabolism (constructive process) such as synthesis of protein molecules and
catabolism (destructive process) such as breakdown of glucose molecules in cellular respiration.
Many metabolic processes are similar in microbes, plants and animals, while some other
processes are specialized in certain groups or organisms. A metabolic reaction may be
demonstrated in the laboratory (in vitro condition). Non-living matter don’t perform such metabolic
processes.
(b) Physiological Processes : Based on the number of cells in the body, we divide
organisms into unicellular (single-celled) and multi-cellular (many-celled) types. While all the
2I Bureau’s Higher Secondary (+2) BIOLOGY -1
life processes are performed within the same cell in a unicellular organism, groups cells or
tissues or organs carry out different functions in multi-cellular organisms. On the other hand,
animals and plants also differ from each other by some functions such as intake of water and
nutrients from the soil and photosynthesis occurring in plants, but not in animals. However, the
basic design of the physiological processes remains similar to a greater extent in different
groups of organisms.
(c) Growth : Organisms have a characteristic feature of growth upto a certain age. But
in plants, the body (mass) continues to grow throughout the life. Thus, increase in body mass is
considered as growth of organisms. In unicellular organisms, the single-celled body grows only
by mass, while in multicellutar organisms there is an increase in the mass and number of cells
of the body. Through growth the organisms reach the adult stage, when they reproduce offsprings
of their kind. The organisms also repair their damaged parts or some regenerate their lost parts
through the formation of new cells by cell division. Although dead organisms do not grow, some
objects such as mountains and sand mounds grow in size by depositing materials on their
surfaces through some geophysical processes. In contrast, the organisms grow from inside.
Considering this, we can say that growth is a characteristic feature of organisms.
(d) Reproduction and Continuation of Race : For continuation of their races the
organisms reproduce and the characters of the parents pass on to their progeny in the process.
Basically, there are two types of reproductions: asexual and sexual. In asexual reproduction
only one parent is involved; while in sexual reproduction: both male and female parents are
involved. Most of the single-celled and some lower multicellular organisms reproduce by several
asexual methods. Bacteria, unicellular algae, Amoeba, etc divide by fission whereas fungi produce
large number of spores by sporulation. Yeast and Hydra create young ones by budding.
Filamentous algae, many fungi, protonema of mosses, Planaria multiply their number by
fragmentation. In higher plants and animals, the common practice of creating progeny is the
sexual method of reproduction, in which sex cells or gametes (sperm and egg) fuse to produce
a zygote, which in due course gives rise to an offspring of its own kind. However, some organisms
may not reproduce sexually due to sterility.
(e) Response to Stimuli : Another important feature of the living organisms, from
prokaryotes to the most developed eukaryote, is the ability to sense the changes happening in
their environment or surrounding. They respond to various physical, chemical and biological
stimuli, originating in their environment for safeguarding their existence. All organisms are
influenced by external stimuli such as light, temperature, water, pollutants, etc. However, in
addition to all these factors animals are affected by the presence of other organisms in their
vicinity. The organisms possess the ability to regulate the chemical substances entering into
their bodies. Plants and animals with seasonal breeding habits are affected by the photoperiod
(day length).
Biodiversity I3
A living system is more complex than the most sophisticated super computer. Whereas
the molecules individually can’t create life, their combined interactions make life possible. A
group of cells or a tissue can perform a function that a single cell can’t; a tissue can’t do a work
that an organ can and so on. All the tissues, organs and organ systems with interactions among
themselves in higher groups, constitute a functional organism. The level of organization among
the ascending order of groups of organisms is cellular grade through tissue grade to organ and
organ-system grade.
All organisms are self-replicating, self-regulating and evolving systems which have the
ability to respond to the environmental stimuli. Biology as a discipline is the study of organisms,
which encompasses Microbiology (study of microbes), Botany (study of plants) and Zoology
(study of animals).
Thus, some defining features of organisms are:
1. Metabolic reactions occur in their cells, which are essential for the survival of the
organisms.
2. Various physiological processes take place which carry out diverse functions.
3. Growth in number of cells and body mass in multicellular organisms and growth in
body mass only in unicellular organisms.
4. Both asexual and sexual methods of reproduction take place for continuation of the
race.
5. They respond to various environmental stimuli and thus possess consciousness.
1.2. BIODIVERSITY:
We observe a large number of different kinds of organisms around us, such as grass,
herbs, shrubs trees, insects, frogs, lizards, birds and human. The microorganisms present
everywhere around us can’t be seen with naked eyes, but can only be observed under
microscopes. The variety of life forms existing in nature is termed as ‘biological diversity’ or
‘biodiversity’. Broadly speaking, it is the “richness of the living species or the variation of life at
all levels of biological organization. In a finer meaning, it refers to genetic diversity, i.e. a diversity
of genes among individuals of a species and also among different species of organisms.. It also
includes the complex assemblages of communities and ecosystems. Thus, biodiversity comprises
of the totality of genes, species and ecosystems of a region. The term ‘Biological Diversity’ was
first used by Jenkins and Lovejoy (before 1975), but W G Rosen (1985) cut short the usage,
Biological Diversity and coined the term ‘Biodiversity’. E O Wilson (1988) first used the term in
one of his publications.
1.3. NEED FOR CLASSIFICATION :
There is a large number of organisms in both terrestrial and aquatic ecosystems. Each
organism constitutes a species. A study conducted by the United Nations Environment
Programme (UNEP) in 1995 estimated that there were around 13.6 millions of living species
existing on earth, out of which the biologists were able to identify only 1.75 million species. The
organisms possess unique characters, by which they are distinguished from each other. Based
on similarities of characters, the organisms are divided into groups for convinience of their
study. For example, if we say animals with hairs on the body, we understand them as mammals.
The plants bearing flowers and producing seeds enclosed within a carpel are called as
angiosperms. Some superficial characters sometimes are misleding. For example Hydra is
radially symmetrical and starfish, too is radially symmetrical. However, they are placed in different
groups based on anatomical and embryological characters. It is, therefore, important that
organisms be classified on the basis of anatomical and embryological characters, in addition to
morphological characters.
The plants and animals are identified in different names in different languages in various
parts of the world. Such names are vernacular names. It creates communication problems
among different regions of the world. For scientific study of organisms, a standardized name is
given to a particular organism that is identified throughout the world. This process of naming
organisms is called nomenclature or more appropriately as biological nomenclature. An
organism is first studied correctly before naming it and assigning a group to which it belongs.
This process is known as identification.
For the purpose of nomenclature, the biologists have prepared guidelines which are
followed by all throughout the world. The International Code for Botanical Nomenclature (ICBN)
has framed principles for assigning botanical names to plants. Similarly, recommendations
framed by the International Code of Zoological Nomenclature (ICZN) are used for naming
animals. The scientists make sure that a name assigned to an organism has not been used for
any other organism earlier.
1.4. BINOMIAL NOMENCLATURE :
As per the framed guideline, a scientific name given to an organism consists of two
distinct parts: the first part is the genus or generic name, while the second part is the species or
specific name. This system of assigning names with two parts is called Binomial Nomenclature,
which was proposed by the Swedish Naturalist Carolus Linnaeus (1707-1778). For his contribution
to the field of nomenclature and classification, Linnaeus is referred to as the Father of Taxonomy.
Some of the important rules of binomial nomenclature are mentioned below.
1. Each biological name consists of two parts : the first part is the genus or generic
name and the second, species or specific name. For example, the zoological name
of tiger is Panthera tigris and the botanical name of banyan tree is Ficus benghalensis.
Biodiversity I5
2. The first alphabet of the genus is in block capital, while that of the species is small
and both names are written in italics.
3. There is a space between the generic and specific names.
4. When written with hand, the two names are underlined separately, but in printed
materials the words are written in italics.
5. The scientific names are derived from Latin or are Latinized, irrespective of their
origin from other languages.
6. The name of the author, who first described the species, followed by the year of its
description, is mentioned after the specific epithet. The author name may be
mentioned in abbreviated form, e.g. Linnaeus as Linn. Thus the scientific name of
human is Homo sapiens Linn., 1758.
1.5. THREE DOMAINS OF LIFE :
According to the traditional system of classification introduced by Linnaeus, kingdom is

the highest category in the classification of organisms. However, Carl Woese proposed the
three domain system of biological classification in 1977, which adds a level or category in the
classification higher than the kingdom. He suggested three domains of life, such as archaea,
bacteria and eukaryota. Under each domain there are one or more kingdoms. All these domains
have distinct characteristic features that are used to identify them. For example, the system
divides prokaryotes into archaea and bacteria domains based on the fundamental differences
in the 16S rRNA genes.
The three domain system is designed with an emphasis on evolutionary lines of descent.
In this system, archaea are more closely related to eukaryotes than they are to bacteria. For
classification, an organism is first placed under a domain, then under a kingdom, and then
under different descending order of categories and finally assigned a species name.
1.5.1. Domain Archaea :
The Kingdom Archaebacteria comes under the archaea domain. The organisms are
prokaryotic, which have no nuclear membrane, have a unique biochemistry and RNA features
that separate them from bacteria. They also have a unique evolutionary history that makes
them the oldest organisms in comparison to the bacteria or eukaryote domains. The organisms
often have characteristics that allow them to survive in tough or extreme environments. Common
examples of archaea are methanogens (methane producing) acidophiles (surviving in highly
acidic environments), thermophiles (surviving in extreme heat conditions), and halophiles
(surviving in conditions of high salt concentration).
1.5.2. Domain Bacteria :
This domain is also prokaryotic and it consists of the Kingdom Eubacteria. The
organisms under this domain have diacyl glycerol diester lipid in their cell membranes, have no
nuclear membrane and contain a genome composed of bacterial rRNA. The domain contains
most pathogenic prokaryotic organisms, which have been studied extensively. Examples include
cyanobacteria (which carry out photosynthesis), bacterial pathogens (which cause tuberculosis
and several skin infections), spirochaetes (gram negative bacteria, such as that causing syphilis)
and firmicutes (gram positive bacteria, many of which are found within the human gut).
1.5.3. Domain Eukaryota :
The domain includes all eukaryotes. These are multicellular organisms which possess
nuclear membranes and contain DNA as the genetic material. Their cells contain membrane
bound organelles, such as mitochondria, endoplasmic reticulum and chloroplasts, which perform
specialized functions. Four kingdoms are included in this domain: Protista, Fungi, Plantae
and Animalia. One of the primary characteristics, which distinguishes them from prokaryotes is
that eukaryotes undergo both mitosis and meiosis. All multicellular organisms are eukaryotes,
though many but not all single celled organisms are eukaryotes.
1.6. TAXONOMY AND SYSTEMATICS :
Taxonomy is the branch of biology that deals with the collection, identification,
classification, nomenclature and preservation of organisms. This makes a detailed scientific
study of the characters, both external and internal, of an organism to find out its similarities and
dissimilarities with others, which is essential for its classification. The modern taxonomic study
also considers structure of the cell, chromosomes and genes, molecular features, embryonic
development, ecology, etc for distinguishing between closely related organisms. Taxonomists
make sure that organisms which do not share a common ancestry are not classified under the
same group. Charles Darwin proposed that all organisms existing on earth shared a common
ancestry. Taxonomy is an older branch of study than Systematics.
On the other hand, Systematics deals with the evolutionary relationships that exist
between different groups of organisms. It tries to determine the organisms and/or groups of
organisms, which share common ancestry. It is concerned with the quantum of evolutionary
changes that may have occurred among different ancestors. The word systematics has been
derived from the Latin word ‘systema’, which means systematic arrangement of the organisms.
Linnaeus titled one of his books as ‘Systema Naturae’ that enlisted about 10,000 species of
animals and plants. The scope of systematics, at present, not only includes the work of taxonomy,
but also consists of establishing relationships between organisms from evolution point of view.
This helps us to form the phylogenetic tree of life and understand the evolutionary history of life
on earth.
1.7. CONCEPT OF SPECIES AND TAXONOMICAL HIERARCHY :
Kingdom is the largest taxonomic group. It is divided and sub-divided into groups and
sub-groups based on true relationships. For example, the kingdom Animalia is divided into
Biodiversity I7
eleven animal phyla. Each phylum is divided into two or more classes and each class into
two or more orders and so on. The ultimate and indivisible unit in this system is the species.
However, on rare occasions, the species is divided into sub-species or varieties. Each of
these ranks in a taxonomic classification is known as a taxonomic category. When all the
taxonomic categories are arranged in a descending order, it forms a taxonomic hierarchy.
Thus, Kingdom is the largest category, while the species smallest. The following is a
taxonomic hierarchy exhibiting only important categories.
Kingdom
Phylum
Class
Order
Family
Genus
Species
An animal is placed in an appropriate taxonomic category, which is assigned a name.

The name of the taxonomic category forms a taxon. For example, Phylum is a taxonomic
category. It is assigned the name Coelenterata for Hydra and Chordata for human. Thus,
Phylum is a taxonomic category, while Coelenterata and Chordata are two taxa of the same
category.
As time passed on, more animals were discovered. It became difficult to put the newly
discovered animals in the existing categories. To overcome this situation, taxonomists
introduced new categories by adding prefixes, super- and sub- to the existing categories.
Consequently, sub-kingdom, super-phylum, sub-phylum, super-class, sub-class, super-order,
sub-order, super-family, sub-family etc. were introduced. These categories, which were
subsequently introduced into the hierarchy were called intermediate categories.
1.7.1. Scheme of Classification :
The scheme of classification begins with concept of a species and is a category used
in hierarchial classification.
1. Species (Plural; species): Species is defined as a group of individuals, which

have the capacity to interbreed amongst themselves to produce fertile offsprings.
This is the basic unit of classification and it helps us to understand taxonomy and
evolution. Normally, species is the lowest and indivisible taxonomic category, but
on occasions, the species is divided into sub-species, ranked as the lowest unit.
Panthera leo (Lion), Panthera tigris (Tiger), Panthera pardus (Leopard) are
species of the same Genus, Panthera. Asiatic lion is scientifically named as
Panthera leo persica Here, persica is the sub-species.
2. Genus (Plural; Genera): Two or more species having common ancestry and
similar features are grouped into a genus. Otherwise speaking, a genus is a
group of related species with common ancestry. The genus occupies a significant
position in classification. In binomial nomenclature, a species cannot be named
unless it is assigned to a genus. The genus may be monotypic or polytypic. In
monotypic, it has only a single species [e.g.; Homo sapiens (Man)]. Conversely,
in polytypic, it has many species [e.g.; Panthera leo (lion), Panthera tigris (tiger),
Panthera pardus (leopard), and Panthera onca (jaguar)].
3. Family : This category includes one or more related genera and is separated
from other related families by important and characteristic differences. The genera
Panthera (tiger, lion, leopard etc.) and Felis (cat) are included in the same family
Felidae. The family, Felidae is quite different from the family Carnivorae (dog,
fox, wolf etc.). Both families belong to the same order, Carnivora.
4. Order: It is the next higher taxonomic category and includes related families.
Families, Felidae (cat), Viverridae (civet), Hyaenidae (hyena), Canidae (dog),
Ursidae (bear) are all included in the same order Carnivora.
5. Class : This category includes two or more related orders. Orders like Insectivora
(hedgehog, mole), Chiroptera (bat), Primates (monkey and man), Rodentia (hare
and squirrel), Edentata (ant eater), Carnivora (cat and dog), Cetacea (whale and
dolphin) and Proboscidea (elephant) are included in the class Mammalia.
6. Phylum or Division (Plural; phyla): Classes of different organisms having some

common features are included under a phylum or division. The phylum Chordata
includes a number of classes like Cyclostomata, Osteichthyses, Chondricthyses,
Amphibia, Reptilia, Aves and Mammalia.
7. Kingdom : This is the highest taxonomic category. Two or more related phyla
come under one kingdom. According to the Linnaean system of classification, all
plants come under the Kingdom, Plantae, while all animals come under the
Kingdom, Animalia.
1.8. TOOLS FOR STUDY OF TAXONOMY :
Correct identification and classification of animals, plants and microbes is of vital

importance. It requires methodical and detailed study of organisms in the field as well as in the
laboratory. For such taxonomic study, collection of actual specimens of animals and plants is
very much essential. The actual specimens are throughly studied and their characters enlisted,
which then leads to their correct classification and nomenclature. It requires a thorough training
in systematics for carrying out such studies. Procedures and techniques have been formulated
for identification, preservation of the biological specimens. The information gathered on such
accounts is stored in databases and made available to others.
Biodiversity I9
Taxonomic studies on various species of organisms bear great significance considering

their usefulness in the fields of agriculture, forestry and industry. Our knowledge on various bio
resources, their diversity and measures required for their conservation are also enhanced by
these studies. The biologists need the help of some taxonomical tools or aids for carrying out
such studies. Some of these tools include museums, zoos, herbaria and botanical gardens.
1.8.1. Museums :
Biological museums contain many preserved specimens of animals and plants. Even
complete skeletons, skulls, disarticulated bones, skins and other hard parts of some animals
are also preserved here (Fig. 1.1). Educational institutions such as schools and colleges set up
their own museums for the purpose of study, reference and research. Natural history museums
also have collections and exhibits of animals, plants and ecosystems. Most of the animal
specimens are preserved in jars or containers containing preservative solutions such as formalin
and alcohol. Many plants or their parts and some animals such as insects are preserved as dry
specimens. Insects are kept in insect boxes by fixing them with pins after due processing.
Higher animals like reptiles, birds and mammals are usually preserved as surffed specimens.
The preserved specimens in the museum provide information about characters of species,
natural variations and evolutionary relationships among organisms.
Fig. 1.1 : Different preserved animal specimens and exhibits placed in a museum.
10 I Bureau’s Higher Secondary (+2) BIOLOGY -1
1.8.2. Zoos (Zoological Parks) :
These are protected places where wild animals live in enclosures under human care.
Attempts are often made to provide them with the conditions similar to natural habitats. The key
objectives of zoos are to display the animals to the public, study their behaviour and breed the
endangered species for increasing their number. Special enclosures are developed for reptiles,
birds, mammals, insects and other animals. Fishes and other aquatic life forms are kept in
aquaria and water bodies. Visitors are asked to visit the zoo by adhearing strictly to the regulations
outlined by the zoo authorities. Attempts are made to generate awareness among the visitors
for conservation of wild animals and other forms of biodiversity.
Fig. 1.2 : Nandankanan Zoological Park, Bhubaneswar
1.8.3. Herbaria :
A herbarium is a collection of plant specimens and data relating to them, which are
preserved for future taxonomic studies of plant and research. Herbaria may be placed in
specifically designed and protected houses or rooms. The specimens may be whole plants or
plant parts such as flowers, stems, leaves, seeds, and fruits that are dried, pressed and mounted
on sheets of paper. Some may also be stored in boxes or preserved in alcohol or other
preservatives. The herbarium sheets are tagged with labels carrying information such as date
and place of collection; local, English and botanical names; family of the plant; collector’s name;
etc. The sheets are catalogued according to a universal system of classification. Although a
plant looks different when it is dried, most of the key features needed for taxonomic studies can
be found in a well-prepared specimen. The oldest herbaria in the world are found in Europe,
which are more than three hundred years old.
Biodiversity I 11
Fig. 1.3 : A herbarium sheet containing various plant specimens.
1.8.4. Botanical Gardens (Botanic Gardens) (Fig. 1.4):
These are specialized gardens dedicated to the collection, cultivation and display of a
variety of living plants, labelled with their botanical names and families. There may be special
collections of rare and exotic plants as well as greenhouses and shade houses. The collections
may include big trees, shrubs, herbs, cacti and aquatic species. A botanical garden may provide
the visitors services such as
tours, educational displays,
art exhibitions, book rooms,
and in addition, open-air
theatrical and musical
performances, and other
forms of entertainment. The
plant species grown here are
referred to for the
identification of collected
specimens, and also used for
education, research and
conservation purposes. The
botanical gardens, often with
associated herbaria, are mostly run by scientific research institutions and universities. Some of
the famous botanical gardens of India include Indian Botanical Garden, Howrah, Kolkata; Lal
Bagh (Mysore State Botanical Garden), Bengaluru; National Botanical Research Institute,
Lucknow; Brindavan Garden, Mysore; Government Botanical Garden, Ooty (Tamil Nadu); and
Garden of Agri-Horticultural Society of India, Kolkata. The Indian Botanical Garden, Howrah is
the largest botanical garden in India.
12 Bureau’s Higher Secondary (+2) BIOLOGY -1
SAMPLE QUESTIONS
GROUP-A
(Objective-type Questions)
1. Choose the correct answer:

(i) How many years ago did life originate on Earth?
a. 3 billion b. 3.5 billion
c. 4 billion d. 4.5 billion
(ii) Which one of the following is a characteristic feature of living?
a. Reproduction b. Response to stimuli
c. Metabolism d. All of these
(iii) Which of these statements is wrong?
a. Breakdown of glucose molecules in respiration is catabolism.
b. Many metabolic processes are similar in microbes, plants and animals.
c. In some non-living objects metabolic processes also occur.
d. Immune system is a characteristic of living beings.
(iv) Find out the wrong one.
a. A single-celled organism grows only in mass.
b. A multicellular organism grows not only in mass, but also in number of cells.
c. Fungi produce large number of spores during reproduction.
d. Gametes fuse to produce offsprings in asexual reproduction.
(v) Identify the incorrect statement.
a. Plants are influenced by external stimuli such as light, temperature and water.
b. All organisms don’t possess consciousness.
c. Combined interactions of molecules make life to continue.
d. Organisms have the ability to regulate the chemical substances entering into
their bodies.
(vi) Richness of the living species on earth is termed as:
a. Ecosystem b. Community
c. Biodiversity d. Population
(vii) Who is referred to as the Father of Taxonomy?
a. W G Rosen b. E O Wilson
c. John Ray d. Carolus Linnaeus
Biodiversity I 13
(viii) Full form of ICBN is:

a. International Code for Botanical Nomenclature
b. International Code for Biological Nomenclature
c. International Code for Bacterial Nomenclature
d. International Code for Bryophyte Nomenclature
(ix) Who proposed the three domain system of biological classification?
a. Carl Woese b. R H Whittaker
c. Charles Darwin d. Robert Hooke
(x) In the scientific name of man, sapiens represents name of the:
a. Genus b. Species
c. Scientist d. Place
(xi) The scientific names are derived from which language?
a. English b. French
c. Latin d. Greek
(xii) Under which domain does the Kingdom Protista come?
a. Archaea b. Bacteria
c. Eukaryota d. Plantae
(xiii) Which is not true about the organisms of the domain Bacteria?
a. Have diacyl glycerol diester lipids in their cell membranes
b. Have no nuclear membrane
c. Contain a genome composed of bacterial rRNA
d. Thermophiles and halophiles come under the domain.
(xiv) Which of the following about organisms is not dealt with by Taxonomy?
a. Nomenclature b. Identification
c. Classification d. Evolutionary history
(xv) Which chemical solution is used for the preservation of organisms?
a. Nitric acid b. Formalin
c. Chloroform d. Sodium hydroxide
(xvi) Name the botanical garden present in Bengaluru.
a. Lal Bagh b. Empress Garden
c. Indian Botanic Garden d. Malampuzha Garden
(xvii) Binomial system of Nomenclature was proposed by
a. Carious Linnaeus b. R.H. Whittaker
c. Carl Woese d. J.B. Lamarck
2. Answer the following :
(i) Name the author of the book ‘Systema Naturae’.
(ii) Under which domain comes the Kingdom Animalia?
(iii) Arrange the following taxa from highest to lowest: Genus, Class, Phylum, Order.
(iv) Which botanical garden is named after Sir Jagadish Chandra Bose?
(v) Which district Nanadankanan Biological Park is situated?
GROUP-B
(Short Answer-type Questions)
1. Answer the following in three sentences each :
(i) What is taxonomical hierarchy?
(ii) Explain the concept of species.
(iii) State the usefulness of taxonomic tools.
(iv) Write down the names of the phylum, class, order and family, and the scientific
name in respect of man, housefly, mango and wheat.
(v) What are the objectives of zoological parks?
2. Differentiate between two words in the following pairs of words :

(i) Anabolism and Catabolism
(ii) Archaea and Bacteria
(iii) Taxonomy and Systematics
(iv) Genus and Species
(v) Museum and Herbarium
CLASSIFICATION OF LIVING CHAPTER
WORLD 2
Classification of Living Organisms
For systematic study of any living organism, it is primarily necessary to know where it is
placed in the living world. Is it a simple primitive organism, autotrophic or a complex and highly
developed heterotrophic organism ? What are the characters that identify its position at a
particular level in the living world ? This is called classification. Classification denotes arrangement
of living beings in specific groups on the basis of their origin, evolution, morphology, anatomy
and cytology etc. Through this method, the exact position of an organism in this living world can
be known accurately. Over the years, various systems of classification of living organisms
have been developed.
2.1. TWO KINGDOM SYSTEM
All the diverse groups of organisms are placed in two major groups called the plants and
animals from the very ancient times. Greek philosophers, Aristotle (384-322 BC) and his disciple,
Theophrastus underlined the importance of classification of the living organisms. They classified
plants and animals into subgroups on the basis of certain similarities and dissimilarities among
them. Carolus Linnaeus (1707-1778), who is known as the father of modern botany and also
the father of taxonomy, divided all the organisms into two kingdoms such as plantae and animalia
on the basis of certain structural and functional characters. For example, the plant cells have a
cell wall that exists outer to the plasma membrane. Generally, the plants have ability to synthesize
their own organic food. All the higher plants are, by and large, static and have no ability to move
from one place to another. Further the plants are less responsive to external changes in their
environment.
Animal kingdom lack the nonliving component of the cell called the cell wall. They do
not synthesize their own food and hence are dependent on the plants for food, directly
or indirectly. The animals, therefore, are heterotrophic. Animals move about freely for
various purposes like food, shelter etc. Animals react instantly to stimuli or any changes
in the environment. The Characters that separate plants from animals are given in the table
2.1.
TABLE - 2.1
Two Kingdom system of classification
SI. No. Character Plantae Animalia
1. Cell Wall Present Absent
2. Mode of nutrition Autotrophic Heterotrophic
3. Locomotion Absent * Present
4. Response to Stimuli Absent * Present
* In most cases.
Merits
1) Plants and animals were divided into two kingdoms not abruptly but based upon
specific characters.
2) It initiated a systematic methods to classify the living organisms. More and more
characters were, later, taken into consideration in order to develop better methods.
Demerits
1) This system of classification has not dealt upon the status of microorganisms in the
living world Example - Viruses, Bacteria. The reason may be the organisms were
not properly known by that time.
2) Certain organisms like slime molds and Euglena have certain characters similar to
plants and animals. Slime molds are tiny plants without cell walls whereas Euglena
are minute animals with green pigment system. Hence, their position in the living
world was uncertain.
3) The position of the prokaryotes was completely ignored.
2.2. THREE KINGDOM SYSTEM
It was proposed by a German Zoologist Ernst Haeckel (1886). This system of classification
was based upon the morphology, tissue system, nutrition pattern and functioning of the different
parts of the body of the living organisms.
He divided the living world into three kingdoms such as Protista, Animalia and Plantae
(Table 2.2). All unicellular organisms were kept in the kingdom protista, which included fungi,
protozoans, algae and bacteria. So, a separate kingdom protista was created to accommodate
all mircrobes and certain other organisms which do not fit to the plant and animal kingdoms.
Classification of Living World I 17
TABLE - 2.2
Three kingdom system of classification.
LIVING WORLD
1. Multicellular Organisms
1. Unicellular organisms 2 Morphological Complexties
2. No morphological complexities. 3. Tissue systems present
3. No tissue system. 4. Eukaryotic
4. Autotrophic or heterotrophic
5. Motile or nonmotile Autotrophic Heterotrophic
6. Prokaryotic or eukaryotic I
Kingdom - Protista. Kingdom- Plantae Kingdom-
(Plants) Animalia
(All types of Algae, Fungi,
(Animals)
Protozoa, Bacteria)
Merits
1) Recognition of the importance of the micro-organisms in the living world.
2) More characters were taken into consideration to classify the living beings.
Demerits
1) Nucleated and anucleated organisms kept together in Protista.
2) Heteotrophic bacteria and fungi placed along with autotrophic algae.
2.3. FOUR KINGDOM SYSTEM
In this system of classification of the world of living beings , a new kingdom was added to
the Haeckel’s “three kingdom system”. Acellular prokaryotes were given the status of a kingdom.
The organisms like Bacteria, and blue-green algae (now called Cyanobacteria) were included in
it. The four kingdoms were monera, protoctista, plantae and animalia. This type of classification
was purely based on cell organization and mode of nutrition.
Monera comprised of acellular organisms with no true nucleus. Their modes of nutrition
were variable being autotrophic or heterotrophic. However, single celled or multicellular eukaryotic
organisms like algae, fungi, protozoans were included under protoctista. Again the mode of
nutrition of these organisms are variable i.e. autotrophic, heterotrophic, absorptive or endozoic.
The plantae comprised of eukaryotic, multicellular, autotrophic organisms. The organisms with
similar cellular organization but heterotrophic nutrition were placed under animalia (Table 2.3).
This system of classification was proposed by Stanier and van Niel and fully developed
by Copeland in 1956.
TABLE - 2.3
Four kingdom system of classification.
Living World
SI.No. Character Monera Protoctista Plantae Animalia
1. Cell Organization Prokaryotic Eukaryotic Unicellular or Multicellular
Acellular Unicellular, Multicellular complex
Primitive Primitive complex
2. Nutrtion Autotrophic or Autotrophic or Autotrophic Heterotrophic

Heterotrophic Heterotrophic
Although this system of classification rectified certain drawbacks of the Three-kingdom

system, yet assemblage of fungi, algae and protozoan in one group was not acceptable.
2.4 FIVE KINGDOM SYSTEM OF CLASSIFICATION
American taxonomist Robert H. Whittaker proposed the Five-kingdom system of

classification of the living organisms in the year 1969. This system was based on three criteria
(a) Cellular organization : the cells may be prokaryotic or eukaryotic (b) Body organization : the
organisms with unicellular and simple structure to multicellular complex body, (c) Mode of
nutrition: from autotrophic to heterotrophic and absorptive. Ecological role of the organisms
was also taken into account in classifying the world of living beings. This system classifies the
organisms into five kingdoms namely Monera, Protista, Mycota (Fungi),Plantae and Animalia.
TABLE - 2.4
Five Kingdom System of Classification.
SI.No. Creation Organization Kingdom with Example
1. Complexity of cell Prokaryotic - acellular Monera- Bacteria, Cyanobacteria

structure
1 { Eukaryotic - Unicellular Protists- Diatoms, Slime molds
2. Mode of nutrition & Autotrophic - multicellular Plantae - Green Plants

Complexity of Body
2 Heterotrophic- multicellular Mycota or Fungi - Absorptive
organization Heterotrophic - multicellular Animalia - Ingestive
3. Ecological Role. Producer Green Plants, Monera, Protista
{ Decomposer
Consumer
Fungi, Monera, Protista
Animals
Micro-organisms were spread in the Kingdoms - Monera, Protista and Mycota. Fungi
were given the status of a separate kingdom above the protists. According to this system the
primitive prokaryotic organisms under Monera gave rise to unicellular, Protists. The kingdoms
of Mycota, Plantae and Animalia developed in three independent lines. The characteristic features
of the kingdoms are given in Table 2.4.
2.4.1. Kingdom Monera : Example - Bacteria, Cyanobacteria (Blue green algae)

(1) Unicellular organisms with no nucleus and nuclear membrane comprise this
kingdom. Besides, all the membrane bound organelles such as mitochondria,
chloroplasts, lysosomes etc. are absent from the monera cell. Photosynthetic
organisms have pigments enclosed by ingrowths of the plasma membrane.
(2) The only cytoplasmic organelle that occur in these organisms is ribosome.
(3) The major component of the cell wall is peptidoglycan.
(4) Flagellated ones have single thread like structures . The major component of it, is
flagellin with no 2+9 organization.
(5) The organisms under this group show variation in nutrition. These may be
autotrophic or heterotrophic. Many heterotrophic ones are important in causing
decay and decomposition.
(6) Sexual reproduction very rarely occurs in these organisms . Mostly the organisms
reproduce vegetatively or asexually. Sometimes genetic recombination may occur.
(7) Only a single naked chromosome is present in the cell. DNA component in it, is
circular with no chromosomal basic proteins.
Many types of bacteria are included under it.
Archaebacteria
These are most primitive bacteria, and are seen

under extreme conditions of environment such as marshy
saline soil, hot springs etc.
The cell membrane lipids are glycerol isopronyl

ethers. The cell wall lacks murein. Certain methanogenic
bacteria, extremely halophilic bacteria, thermophilic sulphur
bacteria etc. are catergorised under this group (Fig. 2.1) Fig. 2.1 : Methanogenic bacteria (an
Archaebacteria)
Eubacteria
These are true bacteria having a rigid cell wall. If motile, flagella are borne by these
organism. On the basis of nutrition, eubacteria may be autotrophic or heterotrophic. Autotrophs
may be photosynthetic or chemosynthetic.
Phototrophic autotrophs include Cyanobacteria or Blue green algae. They have

chlorophyll-a similar to higher green plants. These may have unicellular, colonial or filamentous
thallus. Cyanobacteria may occur in fresh water or marine habitats, colonial forms are surrounded
by gelatinous envelop. Some of these play important role in fixing atmospheric nitrogen. These
nitrogen fixers have specialized cells called heterocysts. Example of it are Anabaena, Nostoc
(Fig. 2.2).
Chemo synthetic autohophs

use energy obtained by oxidation
of inorganic substances such as
nitrate, ammonia, sulphur, iron etc.
These organisms do not liberate
oxygen in the synthesis of complex
building materials. However, these
play important role to regulate
nitrogen, phosphorus etc.
Heterotrophic eubacteria
occur in huge number. They may
be parasitic or saprophytic many of
them play pivotal role in ecosystem
as decomposers. Souring and curdling of milk, production organic acids, antibiotics and many
other industrial products are obtained by manipulating the activities of these organisms. They
are also causative agents of many diseases to man, animals and plant. Cholera, typhoid, tetanus,
leprosy etc are the disease caused by bacterial pathogens. They occur in variety of forms. The
major forms of such bacteria are: Cocci (circular), Bacilli (rod shaped), Vibrio (coma like) and
Spirilli (spiral) (Fig. 2.3A).
(A)
Vibrio Spirillum
Fig. 2.3 : A- Forms, B- Fisssion in bacteria
Normally bacteria under suitable conditions, reproduce by fission (Fig. 2.3B). Within a
very short time, a large number of progenies may be formed by this method. When conditions
become unsuitable, bacteria may reproduce sexually by exchanging the genetic material partially
or completely.
Mycoplasma are the smallest organisms which completely lack cell wall (Fig. 2.4) These
can live without oxygen many mycoplasma are pathogenic to humans and animals.
2.4.2. Kingdom Protista : Example -

Dinoflagellates, Euglenoids, Slime molds,
Protozoans
1. The organisms are unicellular
eukaryotes.
2. These are predominantly aquatic.
3. Cell wall when present is
constituted mainly of cellulose.
4. All membrane bound organelles
are present.
5. Flagella when present show 2+9
flagellin arrangement.
6. Nutrition in these organisms is very often photosynthetic (autotrophic).
7. Asexual and sexual reproductions occur.
8. The DNA component is associated with basic protein called histones.
The characteristics of its main representatives are :
Dinoflagellates
These are marine life forms and are photosynthetic in nature. Depending on the
dominating pigment systems of the cells these may be yellow, green, blue or red in appearance.
Photosynthetic reserves accumulate as starch or starch-like compounds. Also, it may accumulate
in the form of oils.
The cell walls are made of cellulose. The

nucleus is distinctive (Fig. 2.5). Majority of genera have
distinctive asymmetrical motile cells, biflagellate which
are morphologically unlike.
Asexual reproduction takes place by cell division

or by means of zoospores or aplanospores. Sexual
reproduction is seen in few members of Dinoflagellates.
It occurs by conjugation of gametes. Toxins released
by these organisms kill marine animals.
Euglenoids
These unicellular life forms are motile (Euglena).
Motile forms may be uniflagellate is biflagellate. These
occur in stagnant fresh water bodies.
The cells lack cell walls but

surrounded by flexible proteinaceous
pellicle (Fig. 2.6). The reserve food material
is paramylum, an insoluble form of
carbohydrate. These organisms are
photosynthetic in the presence of sunlight.
However, when deprived of sunlight,
organisms become heterotrophic.
Pigmented euglenirds have similar pigment
systems of higher plants. These organisms
can reproduce asexually or sexually.
Slime molds
The slime molds are saprophytic in
nature. They lack cell wall, hence, the
organisms have naked protoplast called
plasmodium. In certain cases, many small
naked plasmodia aggregate to form
pseudoplasmodia (Fig. 2.7)
Reproduction takes place asexually
by means of unineucleate spores, each with
a distinct cell wall. In most cases, spores
are borne within or upon fruiting bodies of Fig. 2.7 : Slime mold
definite shape. When the germinating

nonmotle spores or motile swarmers fuse
in pairs, they develop into diploid plasmodia.
Sometimes, the spores directly develop into
haploid plasmodia.
Protozoans
These are the protists which show
more animal-like features. Previously these cell membrane
were kept in the animal kingdom. There are Fig. 2.8 : Structure of an Amoeba
4 types of Protozoans.
(a) Amoeboid : These may occur in fresh water of marine or amphibious habitats.
These forms possess pseudopodia as locomotory organelle. Example : Amoeba,
Entamoeba (Fig. 2.8)
(b) Flagellated: Flagellated forms may be free living or parasitic. Example:
Trypanosoma.
ANTERIOR MACRO- MICRO-

Apical cap -
Microtubules
Mouth gullet Food ball
Fig. 2.9 : Structure of Paramaecium Fig. 2.10 : Structure of Sporozoite of Plasmodium
(c) Ciliated : These are aquatic and motile due to the presence of cilia. They have a
gullet that opens to the outside of cell surface (Fig. 2.9) The coordinated movement
of cilia cause water move into the gullet. Example: Paramecium
(d) Sporozoans : These are the infectious agents which have spore-like stages in
their life cycle. Example: Plasmodium (Fig. 2.10).
2.4.3. Kingdom - Mycota or Fungi

Example - Aspergillus, Penicillium, Saccharomyces (Yeast)
1. These are uni or multicellular - achlorophyllous, spore bearing thallophytes.
2. Major component of cell wall may be cellulose or chitin or both.
3. In most cases, multicellular, thread like structures, branched in various patterns
are called mycelia (singular - mycelium). These constitute the thallus. Individual
branches of it are called hypha (plural-hyphae).
4. These are heterotrophic, may be saprophytic or parasitic.
5. Mode of nutrition is absorptive which means the enzymes secreted by the hyphae
digest complex nutrients of the host. The simplified nutrients are then absorbed
by the organisms.
6. The reproduction may be vegetative, asexual and sexual. Asexual reproduction
takes place under favourable conditions.
7. The reserve food materials are glycogen.
The fungi are heterotrophs. When they grow on dead, decaying organic matter, the
nutrition in called saprophytic. Those live on living hosts and obtain nourishment from them, are
called parasites. They can also live on other organism with mutual benefit, i.e. as symbionts-
the classic example is algae and fungi live with one supporting other. Here, the composite
organism is called lichen. Sometimes, certain fungi live in the root systems of higher plants and
the association is called mycorrhiza.
Reproduction in fungi takes place by vegetative, asexual and sexual methods. When
the hyphae of the fungal mycelia break accidentally and new progeny can grow, then, the
vegetative method is called fragmentation.
Asexual reproduction in fungi occur by motile or nonmotile spores. The motile spores
are usually endogenously borne in sporangia and are called zoospores or sporangiospores
(Fig. 2.11a). Nonmotile spores are exogenously borne and are called conidia (Fig. 2.11b).
Since fungal thallus is predominantly haploid in nature, sexual reproduction is completed

with plasmagamy, karyogamy and meiosis.
On the basis of the morphology of the mycelium, mode of spore formation and fruiting
body formation, the kingdom fungi can be conveniently divided into 4 divisions such as
Phycomycetes, Ascomycetes, Basidiomycetes and Deuteromycetes. Besides this, there are
various other modes of classification of fungi.
Phycomycetes
Phycomycetean fungi are the primitive ones in the kingdom. They occur in aquatic,
damp moist habitats as saprophytes or may be parasites on aquatic to terrestrial organisms.
Mycelia are haploid in nature.
The mycelium is aseptate, coenocytic. The fungal wall, here, may be composed of
cellulose or chitin or both. Asexual reproduction generally occur under favourable conditions.
Asexual reproductive units such as motile zoospores or nonmotile aplanospores are borne in
specialized structures called sporangia. Sexual reproduction may be isogamous oranisogamous.
As a result of sexual reproduction, diploid zygospores are formed. When anisogamous, male
reproductive units are called antheridia or spermatia. Female reproductive organs differ from
male ones in structure and called oogonium. This difference is very much discernible in oogamous
type of reproduction. Mucor, Rhizopus (Fig. 2.12) are predominantly saprophytic. Albugo,
Peronospora (Fig. 2.13) etc are parasitic phycomycetean fungi.
Ascomycetes
These fungi typically possess asci (Singular: Asus) and ascopores, as a result of sexual
reproduction. Among large number of these fungi, Yeast (Saccharomyces) and certain yeast
like organisms are unicellular but most of

the fungi in the group are multicellular
mycelia. However, fungal mycelia are
haploid in most cases. Ascomycetean fungi
are saprophytic or parasitic- Mycelia are
branched and incompletely septate.
The asexual reproductive units

called conidia are exogenously borne on
conidiophores, the modified structures of lrHvph«
hphae. Sexual reproductive structures are Fig. 2.12 : Structure of Mucor mycelium with
Sporangium and Sporangiophore
ascopores borne inside the ascus. The asci
are organized into fruiting bodies called
ascocap. Examples: Aspergillus, Penicillium
(Fig. 2.14).
Basidiomycetes
A unique type of spore, the
basidiospore borne upon a unique type of
sporangium, the basidium is produced by
all Basidiomycetean fungi. The number of
basidiospores is usually four.
Basidiomycetes include fungi like
mushrooms, puffballs, the smuts, the rust
Fig. 2.13 : Albugo in the host plant with reproductive units
etc. These fungi grow on soil, moist wood
as saprophytes and invade plants as
parasitic smuts or rusts. The mycelium is
branched. Germination of basidiospore
leads to formation of uninucleate cells called
primary mycelia. Cells of mycelia become
binucleate very soon leading to formation
of secondary mycelia or dikaryotic mycelia.
In this condition, the paired nuclei divide
simultaneously.
Common method of vegetative

reproduction is fragmentation, the sex
Fig. 2.14 : Penicillium Mycelium with reproductive units
organs are not formed in basidiomycetes.
Plasmogamy is effeceted by fusion of vegetative cells or somatic cells of primary mycelia.
Karyogamy and meiosis result in the formation of basidiospore which are borne on basidia. The
basidia are organized into fruiting bodies called basidocarps. Common members under the
group areAgaricus (mushrooms) (Fig. 2.15a) Ustilago (smut) and Puccinia (Rust) (Fig. 2.15b).
Fig. 2.15a : Mushrooms
Deuteromycetes
Deuteromycetes are called imperfect fungi. It includes those fungi in which there is no
formation zygotes, ascospores or basidiospores. This means their sexual reproduction or perfect
stage formation is not known. Once the sexual reproduction is detected, then, these are
segregated and placed at their rightful place on the one of the above described divisions.
Examples : Altemaria, Colletotrichum etc.
Lichens
Lichen, consist of two separate entities a fungus and an alga, so intimately associated
together that they form a composite unit, called lichen. The fungus almost surrounds the algal
component and the combined growth results in such a structure and definite form that the
lichens are divided into genera and species. The algal and fungal components are respectively
called phycobionts and mycobionts. Algae synthesize the food and fungi provide shelter and
absorb mineral nuhents. Linchens can grow under very tough and adverse environmental
conditions. They are used as indicators of pollution.
2.4.4. Kingdom - Plantae
1. It includes mainly multicellular, eukaryotic and autotrophic organisms.
2. The major component of the cell wall is cellulose.
3. The cells contain few large vacuoles and no structure like centrosome.
4. These organisms are also called producers.
5. The reserve food material is generally starch.
6. Growth in higher plants is always terminal.
7. The trees generally grow being fixed to the soil.

8. Reproduction may be vegetative , asexual or sexual.

(Example : Multicellular algae, bryophytes, pteridophytes, phanerogams.)
Detailed description of the kingdom is given seprately below.
2.4.5. Kingdom-Animalia
1. All the heterotrophic multicellular organisms are under this kingdom.
2. Higher animals show organ organization.
3. Cell wall is lacking
4. Large number of small vacuoles with centrosome present in their cells. Higher
animal cells do not have vacuoles.
5. Animals mostly show locomotion .
6. Reproduction occurs in higher animals by sexual method.
7. Reserve food material is glycogen.
8. Growth occurs equally in all parts of the body.
Detailed description of the division is given separately.
Merits
1. This system of classification is based on origin and evolution of the organisms,

hence, phylogenetic one.
2. Since prokaryotes are distinctly different from all other organisms, they were given
the status of a kingdom.
3. Likewise, Fungi are organisms with cell wall but the composition of cell walls and
their physiological and nutritional properties are distinctly different. Hence, the
organisms were kept in a separate kingdom.
Demerits
1. There were various complexities in this classification. For example, one type of
organism such as, algae were spread among the Protista, Monera, and Plantae.
2. All groups are polyphyletic and not monophyletic in origin as underlined by this
classification.
3. Protista is an artificial and heterogeneous group as per this clasification. It comprises

of walled and organisms, lacking cell wall, Again, the organisms may be
photosynthetic or nonphotosynthetic.
4. No place was assigned to for the viruses.

TABLE-1.6
Character Kingdoms under 5-kingdom system.
SI. Character Monera Protista Mycota Plantae Animalia

No.
1. Cell types Prokaryote Eukaryote Eukaryote Eukaryote Eukaryote
2. Complexity Uni Unicellular Multicellular Multicellular Multicellular
Multicellular
3. Nucleus Primitive Well Well Well Well
organized organized organized organized
4. Cell Wall Noncellulosic Cellulose or Cellulose or Cellulose Absent
absent Chitin or both
5. Chloroplast Present or Present or Absent Present Absent
absent absent
6. Movement Motile or Motile Motile or Nonmotile Motile
Non-motile nonmotile
7. Tissue Absent Absent Absent Present Present
System
8. Nutrition Auto or Auto or Heterotrophic Autotrophic Heterotrophic
heterotrophic heterotrophic & absorptive
9. Ecological Producer/ Producer/ Heterotrophic Autotrophic Heterotrophic
role decomposers Decomposer /decomposer
/Consumer
10. Sexual Absent Present Present Present Present
reproduction
In all these systems of classification, viruses have posed problem in assigning them to
a specific position, hence, their status in living world is dealt separately.
2.5. VIRUSES
Russian botanist Dmitri Iwanowski (1892) discovered the viruses causing tobacco mosaic
disease. Later, W.M. Stanley (1935) isolated these agents and identified them. He concluded
that viruses are complex aggregation of only nucleic acids and proteins. These are noncellular,
ultramicroscopic structures. They grow and multiply only inside the living cells. Hence, their
status in the living world is a long vexed question. They were not even taken into consideration
in any system of classification. However, some give the viruses the status of the living beings
whereas others strongly object to it.
Living characters
1. Growth and reproduction are chief identifying characters of living beings. Viruses
possess both, they grow, reproduce and even undergo mutation.
2. Like living pathogenic organisms, they are transmissible. (Even the bacterial filter
papers, that can hold back the smallest bacteria, cannot do so for viruses. They
pass through these filters.)
3. In extremely dilute dosages, the viruses are effective in causing disease.
4. These are obligate parasites.
The viruses are hence, given the status of primitive microorganisms from which
higher forms of life have evolved.
The adherents of nonliving hypothesis have observed that (1) The viruses can be
extracted in the form of crystals from the diseased tissues. (2) They are quite inert, apparently
lifeless outside the living cell. Hence, they can be treated like any chemical agents . They can
neither metabolise nor multiply in this form. (3) They are not infective themselves. However,
once they come in contact of suitable host, they are capable of causing infection.
All these prompted the proponents of regressive theory to assume that the viruses are
degenerate microorganisms being degraded from primitive, living organisms. Therefore, viruses
are referred to as cell components.
Adherents of the theory believe that the viruses are part of the cell. The nucleic acid, is
the genetic component which have the ability to leave the cell and be transferred to other cells.
It is independent enough to pass from cell to cell and impose
its patterns on the infected host cells. Similar structures are
shown by the cellular organelles like mitochondria and
chloroplasts, but they have so strongly integrated in the
living cells that they have lost their ability of transmission
from one cell to another (Fig. 2.16).
2.5.1. Viroids
Viroids are infectious agents which are smaller than

viruses. The potato spindle tuber disease is caused due to
such entities. A free RNA with very low molecular weight
only compose it. This was first discovered T.O. Diener in
1971.
SAMPLE QUESTIONS
1. Fill in the blanks choosing appropriate answers given in the brackets.
(a) In two-kingdom system of classification----------- were ignored.
(eukaryotes, plants, prokaryotes, animals)
(b) The major component of the cell wall of bacteria is —.
(Peptidoglycan, Cellulose, Chitin, Lipoprotein)
(c) The core of the viruses are composed of —.
(Protein, Carbohydrate, Vitamins, Nucleic acid)
(d) Fungi have------- mode of nutrition.
(Absorptive, ingestive, autotrophic, epiphytic)
(e) Viruses are living because they grow and —.
(respire, reproduce, recognise hosts, transmissible)
2. Choose the correct answer from the words given in the brackets.
(a) In two kingdom system, the status of one of the following type of organisms was
ignored. (Fungi, Bacteria, Bryophytes, Pteridophytes)
(b) Three-kingdom system of classification was proposed by (Haeckel, Linnaeus,
Whittaker, Copeland).
(c) One of the following components of viruses penetrate into the host cell (protein,
capsid, nucleic acid, carbohydrates)
(d) The character which separates plants from animals is the occurrence of (ribosome,
nucleus, mitochondria, cell wall)
(e) Fungi show one of the following types of nutrition.
(Autotrophic, absorptive, ingestive, swallowing)
3. Write notes in 2 to 3 relevant and meaningful points.
(a) Two kingdom system of classification
(b) Three kingdom system of classification.
(c) Characteristic features of algae.
(d) Characteristic features of fungi.
(e) Viruses, as living beings
(f) Mycoplasma
(g) Phycomycetes
4. Differentiate in 2 to 3 relevant and meaningful points.
(a) Prokaryotes & Eukaryotes.
(b) Protista & Monera
(c) Mycota & Plantae
(d) Amoeboid protozoans and ciliated protozoans
(e) Archaebacteria and Eubacteria
5. Give an account of 5- Kingdom system of classification. Add a note on its merits and
demerits.
6. Classify the living world as per the 5 kingdom system of classification. Give important
features of each with examples. Mention the merits and demerits of the system.
CLASSIFICATION OF PLANT CHAPTER
KINGDOM 3
3.1. PLANT KINGDOM :
In the previous Chapter (1.2) the broad classification of living organisms under the “Five
Kingdom Classification” system proposed by Whittaker (1969) has been described. The five
kingdoms are Monera, Protista, Fungi, Animalia and Plantae. In this chapter, further details of
classification within the kingdom plantae have been described below. Kingodm plantae is
popularly known as plant kingdom.
We must emphasize here that our understanding of the plant kingdom has changed
overtime. The members of Fungi, Monera and Protista having distinct cell walls once included
under plant kingdom, have now been excluded from plantae under five kingdom classification.
So the cyanobacteria, referred to as blue-green algae are not Algae any more. Therefore in this
chapter the kingdom-plantae will be described under Algae, Bryophytes, Pteridophytes,
Gymnosperons and Angiosperms.
3.2. CLASSIFICATION OF PLANTS : PLANT KINGDOM
Much earlier to Whittaker’s five kingdom classifciation (1969), the time tasted and most
widely accepted traditional classification system was proposed by Eichler in 1883. According to
Eichler, the plant kingdom has been divided into two sub-kingdoms (i) Cryptogamae (non
flowering and seedless plants) and (ii) Phanerogamae (flowering and seed plants). The sub
kingdoms were further divided into divisions and classes as stated below (Table 3.1). Cryptogams
are divided into division Thallophyta, Bryophyta and Pteridophyta. The phanerogams are divided
into one division spermatophyta which futher divided into sub-divisions. Gymnosperms and
Angiosperms. The Angiosperms are divided into Monocots and Dicots.

Table-3.1
A Traditional System of Classification of plants
Kingdom Plantae
Sub-Kingdom's A. Cryptogamae (Non-flowering plants) B. Phanerogamae (Flowering plants)
Divisions^ r1 Division Spermatophyta
1. Thallophyta 2. Bryophyta 3. Pteridophyta l~—I—,

Algae
.. 1 Sub-divisions v v
1. Gymnospermae 2. Angiospermae
r~ ’...... t
Classes (i) Psilopsida (ii) Lycopsida (iii) Sphenopsida (iv) Pteropsida
I Classes J"
Classes (i) Hepaticae (ii) Anthocerotae (iii) Musci (i) Cycadopsida (.in) Gnetopsida
(iii) Coniferopsida
(i) Monocotyledons (ii) Dicotyledons
It is quite interesting to note here that, later on, certain modifications and more appropriate
terminologies appeared in literature.
(i) All archegonium (female sex organ) bearing plants were included under “Archegoniatae”
(Bryophytes, Pteridophytes and Gymnosperms).
(ii) All the plants above the level of Thallophyta were considred under the sub-kingdom-
‘Embryophyta’ (the embryo bearing plants, such as; Bryophata, Pteridophyte,
Gymnosperms and Angiosperms.
(iii) All plants having distinct vascular strands (Xylem and Phloem) were considered under
‘Tracheophyta’ (Pteridophytes Gymnosperms and Angiosperms)
(iv) All the seed bearing plants are groups under Spermatophyta.
3.3. ALGAE:
The algae are simple, thalloid, chlorphyll-bearing (green), autotrophic and largely aquatic
(both fresh water and marine) plants. They grow in a variety of habitats; moist stones, soil and
moist wood. Some of them also are seen to grow in association with fungi (Lichen) and animals
(e.g. on sloth bear)
The form and size of Algae is highly variable (Fig. 3.1 - 3.3). The size ranges from the
unicelluar microscopic forms like Chlamydomonas to colony-forming forms Volvox and to
filamentous forms like Ulothrix and Spirogyra. The brown algae (Lamniaria, Fucus, Dictyota)
and red algae (Polysiphonia) form massive thalloid plant bodies (Figs. 3.1-3.3).
Classification of Plant Kingdom I 33
The cells constituting the plant body are haploid and eukaryotic. Hence, the plant body
is a gametophyte. Generally starch is the predominant reserve food material. The vascular and
mechanical tissue are abset in Algae.
Algae reproduces by vegetative, asexual and sexual methods. Vegetative reproduction

takes place by fragmentation in which each fragment develops into a new thallus. The asexual
reproduction is by the formation of different types of spores, also commonly called zoospores.
They are flagellated, motile and on germination, give rise to new thalli. Sometimes under
unfavourable environment, non-motile spore-like alpanosporse or hypnospores may develop
and ultimately they form a new thallus when environmental conditions are congenial.
Sexual reproduction takes place by fusion of two (male and female) gametes. The
gametes may be similar in size and flagellated as in Chlamydomonas, or non-flagellated as in
Spirogyara. This type reproduction by fusion of similar gametes is called isogamous. In some
species of Chlamydomonas the two flagellated gametes are dissimilar in size and such
reproduction is called anisogamous. Fusion between one large, nonmotile (static) female gamete
and a smaller motile male gamete is called oogamous, as in Volvox and Fucus. Embryo stage
is absent in the life cyle of Algae.
The Algae are divided into three main classes : Chorophyceae (Green Algae),
Phaeophyceae (Brown Algae) and Rhodophyceae (Red Algae) (Table 3.2).
Economic importance of Algae :
(1) The algae are useful to man in many ways. At least half of the total carbon dioxide
fixation on earth is carried out by algae through the process of photosynthesis. Algae
being photosynthetic, increase the level of oxygen in their immediate environment. Algae
growing in the seas (occupying nearly 3/4 of earth’s surface) provide oxygen to all living
organisms. The carbon dioxide which forms polluted air are absorbed mostly by the
marine algae. Thus maximum air purification is done by marine algae.
(2) Algae are very important as primary producers of energy-rich compounds which form
the basis of food cycles of all aquatic animals living in fresh as well as marine water.
Spirogyra are predominantly seen in fresh water system and play important role in this
respect.
(3) As many as 70 species of marine algae like Laminaria and Sargassum are used as
food. Microcystis, commonly called kelp, is a food delicacy in Japan.
(4) Certain marine red and brown algae produce large amounts of hydrocolloids which are
water-holding colloidal substances. Algin from brown algae and carrageen from red
algae are very important for their commercial uses. Agar or sometimes called Agar-
agar is one of the commercial products synthesised form Gelidium and Gracilaria. Agar
is used in nutrient media to grow bacteria, fungi and other microbes in the laboratory. It
is also used in prepration of ice-creams and various jellies. Iodine is commercially obtained
from Fucus and Laminaria.
(5) Chlorella and Spirulina are unicellular algae, very rich in useful proteins for human body
which are used as food supplements even by space travellers.
3.3.1. Green Algae (Chlorophyceae):
The name chlorophyceae is divided from two Greek words : Chloros meaning green
and Phytos meaning plant. They include all green algae (nearly 7000 living species). Most of
them are found in fresh water and few found in marine habitat.
Acetabularia
Fig. 3.1 : Some Green Algae (Chlorophyceae)

The plant body may be unicelluar (eg. Chlamydomonas - flagellated, Chlorella - non
flagellated), colonial (eg. Volvox) or filamentous (eg. Ulothrix, Spirogyra) (Fig.3.1). They look
grass-green due to presence of the dominant pigments chlorophyll a and b. The pigments are
localized in definite chloroplasts (in the grana) which may be discoid plate-like, reticulate, cup
shaped, spiral or ribbon shaped in different species. Most of them have one or more storage
bodies known as pyrenoids. They store starch as reserve food and also contain protein. Some
algae store food in the form of oil droplets. The algal body is composed of cells with rigid cell
wall. Like plants the algal cell wall contains cellulose in the inner layer and pectose in the outer
layer.
The reproduction takes place by three methods. The vegetative reproduction takes
place by fragmentation. Asexual reproduction takes place by flagellated zoospores produced in
the zoosporangia, alpanospores, akinetes and autospores. The sexual reproduction shows
considerable variation in the type and formation of gametes (sex cells) and may be isogamous,
anisogamous or oogamous. The green algae exhibit three types of life cycles; haplontic, diplontic
and diplo-haplontic.
The commonly found green algae are Chlomydomonas, Volvox, Ulothrix, Chloralla,
Spirogyra, Cladophora (Fig. 3.1).
3.3.2. Brown Algae (Phaeophyceae):
The word Phaeophyceae is derived from two Greek words; Phaios (brown) and Phyton
(plant). The members of Phaeophyceae are called brown algae, consisting of nearly 2000
species which are found primarily in cooler marine habitats. They exhibit great variation in size
and form and range from simple branched filamentous forms (Ectocarpus) to profusely branched
forms as represented by kelps (Macrocystis) (Fig. 3.2). Macrocystis is a giant alga that reaches
a height of 40-100 meters. Unicelluar form is not seen in brown algae. The plant body is a
thallus which has not been differentiated into root, stem and leaves.
The cells composing the thallus possess chlorphyll a, chlorphyll c, carotenoids and
xanthophylls. They vary in colour from olive green to various brownish shades depending upon
the amount of pigments, xanthophyll and fuco-xanthin in them. The reserve food is stored as
complex carbohydrates in the form of laminarin and mannitol. The basic vegetaive cells have a
cell wall consisting of cellulose. Cell wall is covered on the outside by a gelatinous coating of
algin containing phycocolloids. The protoplast contains, in addition to plastids, a centrally located
vacuole and the nucleus.
The plant body is commonly attached to the substratum by a holdfast. Some free floating
forms are Sargassum and Fucus. So the plant body is composed of holdfast, stipe (a stalk) and
lamina, the leaf like photosynthetic organ (also called frond). They may have vesicles for providing
buoyancy.
Fig. 3.2 Some Brown Algae (Phaeophyceae)
Vegetative reproduction takes place by fragmentation. Asexual reproduction takes place

usually by pear-shaped biflagellate (unequal and laterally attached) zoospores in most of the
brown algae. Sexual reproduction may be isogamous, anisogamous or oogamous. Union of
gametes takes in water or within the oogonium in oogamous species. The garnets are pyriform
(pear-shaped) and each has two laterally attached flagella.
The common examples of brown algae are Ectocarpus, Dictyota, Laminaria, Sargassum,
Fucus, Macrocystis etc. (Fig. 3.2)
3.3.3. Red Algae (Rhodophyceae):
The name Rhodophyceae is derived from two Greek words; rhodo meaning red and
phyton meaning plant. The members of Rhodophyceae are called red algae, consisting of
around 5000 species. Majority of red algae are marine seaweeds found in warmer and well
lighted regions, close to surface water or seas. A few are fresh water forms (eg.
Batrachospermum). Some species are also seen at greater depths of seas (ocean) where
relatively very little ilight penetrates.
The thallus is multicellular. Some of them are having complex body organization. They
totally lack flagellated cells. They possess a pre-dominance of red pigments, r-phycoerythrin (a
phycobilin) in addition to chlorophyll-a and phycobilins (phycocyanin) in their body. They store
food as floridean starch which is very similar to amylopectin and glycogen in structure. The cell
wall is composed of sulphonated mucopolysaccharides called phycocolloids besides cellulose
and pectic substances. The most important phycobillins of red algae are agar, carageenin and
porphyrin.
Red algae reproduce vegetatively by fragmentation. Asexual reproduction takes place

by nonmotile spores called neutral spares, monospores, carpospores etc. Sexual reproduction
Fig. 3.3 : Some Red Algae (Rhodophyceae)

is of oogamoue type and takes place by non-motile gametes. The sex organs are male,
antheridium or spermatangium (contains spermatium-male gametes) and female carpogonium
a flask-shaped structure contaning female gamete. The fertilized carpogonium remains attached
to the parent plant forming a diploid structure called carposporophyte. Some red algae involve
alternation of haploid and diploid generations in their life cycle.
The common members of red algae are; Polysiphonia, Porphyra, Gracilaria, Chondrius,
Gelidium. (Fig. 3.3).
Table 3.2
Divisions of Algae and their main characteristics
Kingdom Group name Photosynthetic pigments Storage Complexity Habitat

Chlorophyll Others material of structure
Red algae a Phycobilins Special strach Unicelluar to Fresh water

(Rhodophyceae) (phycoerythrin called multicellular (some)
and floridean Brackish
phycocyanin srarch water,
Salt water
(most)
Plantae Brown algae a+c Special Mannitol Multicellular Fresh water

(Phaeophyceae) carotenoid Laminarin (River)
(fucoxanthin) (carbohydrade) Brackish and
and lipid salt water
Green algae a+b P-carotene Starch Unicellular Fresh water

(Chlorophyceae) and other to Brackish water
carotenoids multicellular Salt water
3.4. BRYOPHYTA:
The name Bryophyta has been derived from two Greek words bryon meaning moss and
phyton the plant. The Bryophytes having about 25000 species are non-vasular and first land
plants, commonly growing in moist, damp and shaded areas (habitat). They grow densely together
and often form green carpets or mats on damp soil, rocks, walls, building roofs, tree trunks, hills
especially in rainy seasons. Bryophytes are also called amphibians of the plant kingdom because
they can live in soil but are dependent on water for sexual reproduction. They play an important
role in plant succession forming biomass on bare rocks and dry soils. They help in soil formation
and are a part of xerosere.
They are small plants of both prostrate and erect habit and usually grow upto 15 cms.
(Fig.3.4). But one moss Dawsonia from Newzeland grows upto 60 cm in height.
The plant body is a green-coloured (haploid) gamephyte and not differentiated into true
stem, root and leaf. It is thallus like, avascular and attached to the substratum by unicelluar or
multicelluar rhizoids.
Fig. 3.4 : Some Bryophytes. A-B. Riccia, C-D. Marchantia (Liverworts)

E. Anthoceros (Hornworts), F. Funaria (Moss)
The gametophytic main plant body produces gametes. The male sex organs are called
antheridia (Fig. 3.6) which produce biflagellate antherozoids. The female sex organ called
archegonium, a flask shaped structure consisting of a basal venter (containing an egg, the
female gamete) and upper slightly elongated neck (Fig. 3.5). Archegonium is a structure which
is seen for the first time among the bryophytes. Therefore the bryophytes are the first archegoniate
plants found during evolution of plants.
The antherozoids are released into water where they come in contact with archegonium
of the plant. Antherozoid enters through the neck, moves upto the venter and fuses with the
egg or oognium to produce a zygote (2n). Now the zygote a diploid structure and the first cell of
the sporophyte. It does not undergo reduction division immediately, but forms the multicellular
sporophyte (2n). The sporophyte is not free living but depedent fully on the photosynthetic
gametophyte for its shelter and nourishment (food). The zygote undergoes divisions to form a
multicellualar embroyo which grows into the sporophyte. The sporophyte may be a globular
structure consisting of only sporogenous cells or it may have a particular definitive structure
having foot, seta and capsule (containing sporogenous cells). The sporogenous cells undergo
reduction division (meiosis) to produce haploid spores. The haploid spore, the first cell of
gametophytic generation germinates to produce the gametophyte.
Fig. 3.5 : Antheridum, Archegonium and lifecycle of Funaria (Moss) showing alternation of generations
The Bryophytes are divided into 3 classes; Hepaticae (The Liverworts), Anthocerotae
(Hornworts) and Musci (Mosses). Common representatives of Bryophytes are Riccia, Marchantia,
Anthoceros, Porella, Sphagnum, Funaria, Polytrichum (Fig. 3.4)
Economic importance of Bryophytes :
1. Bryophytes as land colonizers - Primarily the mosses first spread over the dry barren
areas and stablilize the soild surface and increase the water holding capacity of the soil.
Due to continuous death and decay of mosses alongwith lichens, the organic matter
content of land is increased. Thickness of soil increses in this way. The rocky and dry
land becomes suitable for growth of higher plants (herbs, shrubs and trees in sequence).
In this way, plant succession takes place in a gradual and step-wise manner and climax
forest is formed.
2. Sphagnum and Peat - Sphagnum, also called peat moss or bog moss is a perennial
aquatic moss, when established on the shores of lakes or ponds. The moss gradually
encroaches the watery areas, creep over the water and completely covers the surface
of the water-body. They secrete acids. The spreaded moss accumulates and form a
thick dark coloured compressed mat over the years called peat which when dried can
be used as fuel in place of coal. Peat is also used to cure skin diseases.
3. The mosses like Sphagnum are used as a favoured packaging material for transporting
cut flowers, living seedlings, seeds and plants. They are also used as a water retaining
constituent for preparing seedbeds and nursery stocks.
4. After proper disinfective treatments, Sphagnum has been used to replace the absorbent
cotton for dressing wound, specially during war time.
5. Medicinal uses - Marchantia polymorpha is used to cure pulmonary tubercolosis and

afflictions of liver. Extracts of M.polymorpha, Polytrichum commune are said to possess
antitumour properties. A decoction of dried Sphagnum in hot water is used by tribals for
treatment of ailments of eye and to control acute haemorrhage. P. commune is used in
removing kidney and gall bladder stone. Extracts from mosses like Polytrichum,
Sphagnum etc. have antibiotic properties against bacteria like Streptococcus, Shighella,
Salmonella and Staphylococci.
6. Bryophytes in geochemical evalution - Some bryophytes have been discovered to grow

in some areas rich in particular metals. For instance, some mosses grow in areas, very
rich in copper. Nardia scaleris grow in areas that have deposits of gypsum. Such
bryophytes are of great help to geologists for evaluation or identification of areas for
metal.
7. Ornamental I Decorative materials - Mossess are used extensively for ornamental

purposes, particularly in making floral arrangements and bouquets for gifts.
3.4.1. Hepaticae (Liverworts):
The liverworts grow usually in moist shady habitats, such as; banks of streams marshy
ground, damp soil, deep in the woods, bark of the trees and overthe surface of ground soil. The
plant body a green, prostrate, dorsiventral and thalloid gametophyte with unicelluar rhizoids for
anchoring the soil or surface of the substratum. The branching is repeatedly dichotomous and
the thallus becomes lobed to look like a liver, hence this group called liverworts (Fig. 3.4)
Asexual reproduction takes place by fragmentation of thalli or by formation of specialized

structures called gemmae. The gemmae which develop within gemma cups, are green
multicellular asexual buds. When get detached from the parent body, they germinate to form
new individuals.
Sexual reproductive organs are antheradia (male) and archegonia (female), produced
either on the same or on different thalli. The zygote formed by the union of male and female
gametes is a diploid cell and the first cell of sporophyte. Sporophyte has no or very little green
tissue and may be diffrentiated only into a special capsule or a structure having foot, seta and
capsule. Sporophyte is small and completely dependent on the gametophyte. Spores are
produced as a product of meiosis in sporogenous tissue in the capsule. Spores germinates and
produce free living gametophytes. The examples of liverworts are Riccia, Marchantia and Porella
(Fig. 3.4).
3.4.2. Anthocerotae (Hornworts):
They have dorsiventral prostrate thallus with unicellular rhizoids. Plant body is a
gametophyte which may be a simple thallus or having a leafy axis.
The sporophyte consists of capsule, seta and foot. The seta becomes much elongated
at maturity and looks like a cylindrical horn (hence the name hornwort) with some amount of
green tissue. So the sporophyte, although attached to the gametophyte completely, is partially
depended on gametophyte for nutrition.
The examples of hornworts are Anthoceros, Pellia and Riccardia (Fig.3.4)
3.4.3. Musci (Mosses):
They have erect and radially symmetrical leafy plant body (gamotophyte). The
predominant stage of life cycle of a moss is the gametophyte which consists of two distinct
stages, the protonema stage and leafy stage. The spore on germination, first develops into a
juvenile protonema, a creeping, green filamentous and branched protonema. It bears multicellular
branched rhizoids which ultimately anchors the body with soil. The leafy stage develops from
the protonema as a lateral bud. The leafy stage consists of upright slender axis bearing spirally
arranged leaves.
Vegetative reproduction is by fragmentation and budding in secondary protonema. The

sex organs are antheridia and archegonia produced at the apex of the leafy axis. After fertilization
the zygote develops into a sporophyte consisting of foot, seta and capsule. After meiotic cell
divisions of sporogenous cells, the spores are dispersed from the capsule. The sporophyte is
partially dependent on the gametophyte.
The common examples of mosses are Funaria, Polytrichum, Sphagnum etc. (Fig.
3.4, 3.5).
3.5 PETRIDOPHYTA:
The Pteridophyta (Gk: Pteris - feather, phyton - plant) commonly called the oldest,
seedless, vascular cryptogams and are represented by about 400 genera (Fossil and Living)
and more than 10000 species. They are the first vascular land (terrestrial) plants. They dominated
the forests of the carboniferous period, about 300 million years ago. The main plant body is a
sporophyte, the dominant phase of life cycle and differentiated into stem, root and leaf like
organs. They are the highest evolved cryptogams. Some tree-ferns (Cyathia, Celeotium) may
attain a height of 20 meters.
Pteridophytes are commonly found in cool, damp and shady places, though some species
grow well in sandy soil. They are found in tropical and temperate regions of the world.
The leaves in these plants are of two types; small called microphylls (e.g. Selaginella)
and larger ones called macrophylls (e.g. ferns) (Fig. 3.6). The Sporophytes bear sporangia that
are subtended by leaf like appendages called sporophylls. The sporophylls in some cases form
distinct structures called strobilus (e.g., Selaginella) or compact cone (e.g., Equisetum) (Fig.3.6).
The Sporangia produce spores by meiosis in spore mother cells. The spores develop into
inconspicuous, small but multicellular gametophytic body called prothallus which is monoecious
(bearing sex organs in the same prothallus). The prothallus is free living, mostly photosynthetic
and thalloid in nature. The gametophytic bodies require cool, damp and shady places fortheir
growth. Because of such restricted habitat requirement and need of water for fertilization, the
living pteridophytes have spread to limited or restricted and narrow geographical regions.
The gametophytes bear male and female sex organs called antheridia and archegonia
respectively. The antherozoids (male gametes) released from antheridia with the help of water
reach to the archegonium. A zygote (2n) is formed as a result of fusion of male (antherozoid)
and female gametes (egg) and forms the first cell of the sporophytic generation. Zygote develops
into multicellular well differentiated sporophyte which is the dominant phase of life cycle of
pteridophytes.
In majority of pteridophytes, the spores are of similar sizes. Such plants are called
homosporous. In Selaginella and Salvia, two kinds of spores mega or macro (large) and micro
(small) spores are formed and plants bearing such spores are called heterosporous. The mega
spores and microspores germinate to form female and male gametophytes respectively. The
female gametophytes are retained on the parent sporophytes for variable periods till the
development of roots within the female gametophyte. The zygote develops into a young
sporophyte. This is a tendency to form the seed and called seed habit. Seed habit leads to
formation of seed plants.
The plants show clear alternation of generations in their life cycle. The sporophyte and
gametophyte are autotrophic and independent of each other.
Odd leaflet
Rachis r'> Pinnae
Leaflets
Rachis Petiole
Young leaf with Persistent
circinate ptyxis leaf base
'Circinately coiled
Petiole — young leaf
Persistent roots
-Terminal bud Rhizome
leaf bases .. ..... Adventitious-------------
Rhizome - roots
D E
Fig. 3.6 : Some Pteridophytes. A. Selaginella (Club Moss), B. Equisetum (Horsetail),

C. Pteris (Fern), D. Dryopteris (Fern), E. Adiantum (Fern).
Classification of Pteridophytes :
The pteridophytes comprise of four classes.
1. Psilopsida (Psilophytes) Most of them are fossils except few living members,
e.g. Psi lot um.
2. Lycopsida (Clubmosses) They grow as prostrate aggregates like mosses, e.g.

Lycopodium, Selaginella (Fig. 3.6)
3. Sphenopsida (Horsetails) They have articulated stem with whorls of branches

and scale- like leaves. The spore producing bodies
borne at the ends of branches resemble the tail of the
horse, hence the name ‘horsetails’ e.g. Equisetum.
(Fig. 3.6)
4. Pteropsida (Ferns) Ferns are most conspicuous amphibian pteridophytes

which have underground stem (rhizome), adventitious
roots and aerial pinnately compound leaves called
fronds, e.g. Dryopteris, Cyathia, Pteris, Adiantum,
Marsilea (Fig. 3.6)
Economic importance : Afew economic uses pteridophytes are given below :
1. Lycopodium clavatum Spores used in rheumatism and cramps. Leaves are

chewed for arresting food poisoning.
2. Psilotum nudum Oily spores given to infants to cure diarrhoea.
3. Selaginella repande Root paste applied over white patches in Leprosy.
4. Equisetum The entire plant is used for cooiling gonorrhoea. The

plant paste applied in bone fractures.
5. Dryopteris cochlea Whole plant extract taken orally for snake bite. The
powdered rhizome in water is taken for rheumatism
and Leprosy.
6. Dicranopteris Fronds are used in asthma. The young fronds grinded

in milk given to remove sterility in women.
7. Adiantum Rhizome and fronds are used in wound healing, boils,

glandular swellings dysentery, ulcers and scorpion
bites. Fronds are diuretic and the decoction is given
to reduce fever.
8. Marsilea It is very rich in minerals and commonly eaten as leafy

vegetable.
3.6. GYMNOSPERMS :
The word Gymnosperm was used in 300 B.C. by Theophrastus, a pupil of Aristotle in his
book ‘Enquiry into plants’. He used this term to embrace all those plants whose seeds were
unprotected. The Gymnosperms (gymnos-naked, sperma-seeds) are plants in which the ovules
are not enclosed by any ovary wall. No ovary is present in Gymnosperms. So the seeds developed
from ovules are naked (not covered) and remain exposed before and after fertilization.
Gymnosperms and Angiosperms are grouped under Spermatophytes.
. Cycas circinnalis (After Blume)
and bipinnate compound leaves)

(After Engler and Prantl).
Young seedling of Pinus. B. Dwarf shoots of Pinus insularis

(one shown entire, others are dissected! C. A Pinus tree. , A twig of Gnetum gnemon bearing male strobili.
Fig. 3.7 : Some Gymnosperms

Gymnosperms are found throught the surface of the globe, mostly in high altitudes.
They are evergreen, some are deciduous, woody, xerophytic and include medium size to very
tall trees and shrubs. One of the tallest, a giant redwood tree is Sequoia gigantea which lives for
4000 years. Gymnosperms formed dominant vegetation on the earth about 200 million years
ago and later replaced by the angiosperms. Some of them live for thousands of years.
Gymnosperms, today are represented by nearly 70 living genera 725 species.
The main plant body is a well differentiated sporophyte (dominant phase of life cycle)
consisting of root, stem, leaves and flowers. The gametophyte is very much reduced and remains
within the sporophyte. The gametophyte is fully dependent on the sporophyte.
These perennial woody trees have stems, may be unbranched (Cycas) or profusely
branched (Pinus, Cedrus) (Fig. 3.7). Leaves (foliage leaves and scale leaves) are well adapted
to tolerate extreme temperature, water scarcity and wind. The pinnate leaves of Cycas persist
for few years. The needle-like leaves of pines (reduced surface area), sunken stomata and
thick cuticle help to reduce water loss. Roots are tap roots and in some genera (in Pinus) have
fungal association in the form of mycorrhiza. In Cycas, small specialized roots called coralloid
roots associated with nitrogen-fixing Cyanobacteria are present.
The vascular tissues are arranged into bundles just like angiosperms. However xylem
does not have vessels and phloem with no companion cells except in Gnetum.
Gymnosperms are heterosporous. They produce two kinds of haploid spores

(meiospores-as a product of meiosis), microspores and megaspores within two different types
of sporangia called microsporangia and megasporangia respectively, Again all sporangia are
borne on sprophylls (micro / or megasporophylls) which are arranged spirally along the axis to
form lax strobili or compact cones. The male (microsporangiate) cone or strobilus bears
microsporophylls and microsporangia (pollen sacs). The microspore develops into a male
gametophyte during gametophytic generation which is highly reduced and confined to a limited
number of cells, called a pollengrain. The pollen grains are released from microsporangia and
move by air currents.
The female cone (strobilus) consists of megasporophylls which bear the exposed
megasporangia called ovules. The ovules are integumented (seed coat) with an opening called
micropyle. The ovule initially is filled with nucellus (nuceller tissue). Near the micropyler end,
one of the nuceller cells gets differentiated into megaspore mother cell (2n) which divides
meiotically to form four megaspores (n). Usually one haploid megaspore develops into a
multicellular female gametophyte that forms two or more archegonia, the female sex organs
bearing female gametes (egg). The female gametophyte is completely retained within the
megasporangium or ovule, which is also dependent on the sporophytic tissue.
The pollen gains enter through the microphyle of ovule, produce pollen tubes which
grow towards archegonia and discharge the two male gametes near mouth of neck of archegonia.
One male gamete reaches the egg inside the venter, fertilization is effected and a diploid zygote
(2n) is formed. The formation of pollen tube by pollen grain during fertilization process is called
siphonogamy. Fertilization of one male gamete with the egg inside venter of achegonium results
in formation of a diploid zygote (2n).
MALE GAMETE
POLLINATION
ARCHEGONIUM
3-CELLED STAGE
OF POLLEN GRAIN
FEMALE GAMETOPHYTE SUSPENSOR
WING
FREE NUCLEAR DIVISION*

POLLEN GRA N COTYLEDONS
MICROSPORE ft
TETRAD
functional
MICROSPOROPHYLL
MEGASPORE
TETRAD OF MEGASPOROPHYLL
MEGASPORES
MICRO WING
OVULIFEROUS
SCALE SPORANGIA
BRACT
SCALE DISPERSAL
MALE'
OVULE
CONE
MEGASPOROPHYLL
SEED GERMINATING
FEMALE CONE
PLANT
Fig. 3.8 : Diagrammatic Life Cyle of a Gymnosperm, Pinus

The zygote develops into an embryo, the future sporophyte. The whole ovule develops
into the seed. Formation of many embryos within one ovule, called polyembryony is common in
pines. Seeds are not enclosed by any other outer covering like ovary wall as in case of
angiosperms. In Gymnosperms, there is no ovary. So seeds are uncovered or naked, hence
the name ‘gymnosperms’, the naked-seeded plants. They have epigeal mode of germination.
Plants show distinct alternation of generations.
Classification of Gymnosperms : Gymnosperms includes three classes

1. Cycadopsida (Cycads) - They are represented by both fossil and living members and
constitute a small group of gymnoperms. The living members are xerophytic and look
like palms having fern like leaves. Plants are dioecious, means the microporophylls and
megasporophylls are borne in separate plants. Examples: Cycas, Zamia, Macrozamia,
Bowenia.
2. Coniferopsida (Conifers) - Conifers having more than 500 living species are the most
dominant gymnosperms, mostly occurring in colder regions. The plants with their conical
canopy bear cones as their male and females reproductive structures. The plant body
has resin canals containing an aromatic, antiseptic semifluid called resin. Examples :
Pinus, Ginkkgo, Cedrus, Abies, Cupressus.
3. Gnetopsida (Gnetum and allied plants) - This group includes climbing shurbs, shurbs
and small trees. The external and internal features of Gnetum resemble angiosperms.
Reproductive organs are borne in whorls or inflorescence. They have vessels in the
xylem. Examples : Genetum, Ephedra and Welwitschia.
Economic imprtance of Gymnosperms : They are greatly valued in world because of their
importance to human beings.
1. Wood - Most of the species provide wood or timber for construction works, furniture and
house building.
2. Resins - Resins produced by mostly conifer are unaffected by water and protect against
insects. Pine gum, oil of terpentine, varnishes forwood paining, laundry soap, greases,
printing ink, printing driers, shoe polish and insecticides are manufactured from resins.
3. Essential oils and falty oil production-

(i) A fatty oil from conifer wood pulp used in manufacture of paints, soap, linoleum
and emulsifiers.
(ii) Spruce oil obtained from Abies, Picea; oil from Cryptoneria, Araucaria, Cedar;
wood oil from Thuja and various essential oils from gymnosperms (mostly pines)
are used by us in various ways.
4. Paper and Board (Cellulose and Pulp) - In USA, 85% of pulp used for paper making
come from conifers. Himalayan conifers produce excellent pulp for paper industry.
5. Food - Pine kernels preserved in honey are eaten, seeds all pines theoritically have
high food value.
6. Tannins - Tannins utilized for tranforming hides to leather. In petroleum industry, tannins
are used as dispersant to control mud during oil well drilling. Barks of many confers like
Tsuga, Sequoia, Larix, Picea contain high concentration of tannins.
7. Decoration and ornamental use - Mostly the leaves of Thuja, Araucaria, Cycas,
Cupressus are used for decoration purpose. Ginkgo is called ‘maiden hair tree’ planted
in most of Budhist temples in India, Japan, and China as ornamental tree.
8. Medicinal use - Ephedrine used as pulmonary decongestant is extracted from Ephedra.
3.7. ANGIOSPERMS :
The angiosperms are flowering plants in which seeds are enclosed with the ovary. The
ovule develops into seed and the ovary into fruit. Angisperms are exceptionally a large group of
plants consisting of 2,50,000 known species.
They are most recent and highly developed plants appeared on earth surface about
130 million years ago. Today they are the most dominant plant group and found to grow in
almost every kind of habitat. They range in size from tiny, almost microscopic Wolfia to large tall
trees of Eucalyptus over 100 meters. They may be annual, biennial or perennial herbs, shrubs
or trees.
The plant body is differentiated into stem, root and leaves. At maturity plants bear flowers
which produce fruits and seeds. The vascular tissue are arranged in the form of vascular bundles.
The xylem contains vessels and phloem has companion cells in addition to other vascular
elements.
The flowers are reproductive organs having two or one accessory whorls, perianth or
calyx and corolla and two essential whorls, androecium and gynoecium. The whorls, calyx,
corolla, androecium and gynoecium are composed of sepals, petals, stamens and carpels
respectively. (Fig. 3.9)
A stamen, the male sex organ of the flower,

consists of a slender filament and an anther at the
tip. Anther contains single or more microporangia
(inside the lobes). The sporogenous cells of
microsporangium undergo meiotic cell division to
form microspores or pollen grains (Fig.3.10). The
carpel or pistil, the female sex organ of the flower,
Fig. 3.10 : A. T.S of Mature Anther of Angiosperm, Fig. 3.12 : V.S of Angiospermic Ovule
B. Pollen grain (Microspore) and its germination (Megasporangium) showing Integuments, Nucellus,
forming male gametophyte. Embryo sac and Funiculus
consists of ovary, style and stigma (3.11). The ovary encloses one to many ovules. An ovule
consists of nucellus surrounded by two integuments with a fine opening microphyle. Pollen
grains enter into the ovule through the micropyle. Four megaspores are formed as a result of
meiotic cell division of megaspore mother cell produced by necellus. One or all the four haploid
megaspores are utilized to form a female gametophyte or embryo sac with the nucellus of
ovule. So the embryo sac contains all haploid cells and consists of (i) a three-celled egg apparatus
(one egg cell + two synergids), (ii) three antipodal cells and (iii) two polar nuclei. The two
haplaid polar nuclei fuse to form a diploid secondary nucleus.
Pollen grains after pollination

from the anthers are carried by wind
or other agencies to the stigma of the
pistil. This is called pollination. Pollen
grains germinate on the sticky surface
of the stigma and produce pollen
tubes (siphonogamy) which grow
through the tissues of stigma and style
to reach the ovlue. The pollen nucleus
divides to form two male gametes.
Ultimately pollen tubes enter egg
apparatus of the female gametophyte
or embryo sac where two male
gametes are discharged. One male
gamete fuses with the egg cell called
syngamy to form a diploid zygote and
the other fuses with diploid secondary
nucleus to form a triploid primary
endosperm nucleus (PEN). Because
there are two fusions, this event is
termed as double fertitization, an
event unique to angiosperms. The
zygote develops into the embroys or
future sporophyte. The embryo may
develop a single or two cotyledons.
The primary endosperm nucleus
develops into endosperm which provides nutrition to the growing embryo inside the ovule. The
synergids and antipodals degenerate after fertilization. During these events the ovules develop
into seeds and the ovary develops into a fuit. Atypical lifecyle is given in Fig. 3.13.
Classification :
The angiosperms are divided into two classes, (i) dicotyledons and (ii) monocotyledons.
The dicotyledons are characterized by having two cotyledons in their seeds while monocotyledons
have only one cotyledon.
Class I Dicotyledons : The members of this class have leaves with reticulate (net
like) venation, which show alternate, spiral or whorled phyllotaxy (arrangement of leaves).
The flowers are tetramerous or pentamerous having four or five members in the various
GYMNOSPERMS ANGIOSPERMS
Integument
mi
7 \
I
- Nucellus
•V’
■/i •’ • *<\
—nL_ Arche-
I f ,? I) j Gameto-
II:
X
.!» X\
ff//,/ ///. y gonium T" phyte
A
. ■ ‘TA? J
/ 11 ■ I - Gameto- __ Z_ Nucellus
phyte
Female cone
I*
Sporophyll
Ovule
m® ?
/
Ovary
— Micropyle
/ Integu-
ments
______ Ovule
Anther —// Two lobed sac

aa with pollen grains
'fits
H ' 5.1
fl *(
IJ ** ’•/
Filament -—
sacs / Anther T.S.
Cluster of male cones Microsporophyll
Stamen
.Prothallial cell
- Antheridial cell
>?< A
— iuoe nucleus / z4*

■ g'i
'' 7 --------- \\ 1 -
•J / i ft < • ''W
Winged pollen grains

Pollen grains
Fig. 3.14 : Reproductive organs of >f

G}Gymnosperms and Angiosperms
floral whorls, respectively. The vas cular bundles are open. i.e. cambium is present between
the xylem and phloem. The seeds have two cotyledons.
Class II : Monocotyledons (Mono = one, cotyledons = cotyledons) : The leaves are

simple with a parallel venation pattern. The vascular bundles are closed (cambium absent) and
scattered in the parenchyma. The flowers are trimerous (having 3 mem-bers in each floral
whorl). The seeds possess only one cotyledon. The monocotyledons have, seven series, on
the basis of the nature of perianth and condition of the ovary.
Economic importance of Angiosperms : The angiosperms provide with food, fodder,

fuel, shelter, clothings, medicines and several other commercially important products.
3.8. LIFE CYCLES AND ALTERNATION OF GENERATIONS
As we have studied in the above, it is learnt that during life cycle of any sexually
reproducing plant, there is an alternation of generations between the gamete producing haploid
gametophyte and spore producing diploid sporophyte. Three basic patterns of life cycles are (i)
Haplontic, (ii) Diplontic and (iii) Haplo-diplontic.
1. Haplontic - The dominant photosynthetic (green) phase is a free-living gametophyte.

The sporophytic generation is represented by the one celled diploid zygote. There is no
free living sporophyte which is completely dependent on gametophyte. The diploid zygote
undergoes meiosis and forms haploid spores
which in turn divide mitotically to form the
gametophyte. This is called haplontic type of life
cycle. This pattern is seen in algae, such as
Volvox, Spirogyra and many other algae.
2. Diplontic - Here the diploid sporophyte is the

green or photosynthetic, dominant and
independent phase of the life cycle. The
gametophytic phase which is fully dependant on
the sporophyte and is represented by the single
to few celled haploid gametophyte. This pattern
is called diplontic type of life cycle and seen in
all seed bearing plants (gymnosperms and
angiosperms. Fucus (an algae) has diplontic
patter of life cycle.
3. Haplo-diplontic - This is an intermediate pattern

of life cycle in which both the phases are
multicelluar and visible structures.
A dominant prostrate or erect photosynthetic

thalloid haploid gametophyte alternates with the
short-lived multicelluar sporophyte. Here the
sporophyte is totally or partially dependent on
the gametophyte for its anchorage and nutrition.
All Bryophytes show this pattern of haplo-
diplontic life cycle.
In pteridophytes, the diploid green and vascular

sporophyte is the dominant phse of life cycle. Here alternation of generation is between
multicelluar sporophytic or autotrophic and short-lived independent haploid gametophyte.
This is also haplo-diplontic pattern of life cyle. In addition to all pteridophytes, some
algal genera such as Ectocarpus, Polysiphoria and kelps exhibit haplo-diplontic pattern.
3.9. SUMMARY OF SALIENT FEATURES OF ALL PLANT GROUPS OF KINGDOM

PLANTAE
ALGAE
1. Algae are chlorophyll bearing green simple, thalloid, autotrophic, eukaryotic organisms
have dominant gametophytic haploid bodies and largely aquatic.
2. Algae usually reproduce vegetatively by fragmentation, asexually by formation of different

spores (zoopores, aplanospares, hypnospores) and sexually by formation of gametes
which may show isogemy, anisogamy or oogamy.
3. The zygote never develops into embryo and true visible alternation of generations is
absent but the life cycle pattern usually falls under haplontic type.
4. Depending on the type of pigment possessed, type of storage food materials, the algae
are divided into three major classes such as, chlorophyceae (green algae), phaeophycea
(brown algae) and Rhodophyceae (red algae). These are many other minor classes of
algae.
5. Algae are used as food (Sargassum, Macrocystis, Chlorella, Spirulina), production hydro
colloids (algin from brown algae, carrageen form red algae) and for production of agar-
agar, a gellifying substance (from red aWgae-Gelidium and Gracilaria)
BRYOPHYTA
1. Bryophytes having nonvascular, prostrate or erect, small, thallose or foliose gametophytic

bodies are the amphibians of the plant kingdom and considered as first land plants and
first archegoniates in the plant kingdom.
2. The main thallus body is a multicelluar, many cells thick, fixed to soil where they usually
grow by rhizoids or and scales and dependent on water for sexual reproduction.
3. During sexual reproduction, the male and female gametes formed in the sex organs,
antheridia and archegonia respectively, fuse to form a zygote which develops into
multicellular body, the sporophyte. It is usually consisting of foot, seta and capsule
containing haploid spores.
4. There is an alternation of generations between a gametophyte, the dominant phase of

life style and a fully dependent (on gametophyte) sporophyte which thus, exhibits a
haplo-diplontic pattern of life cycle.
5. Bryophytes are classified into (i) Hepaticae (Liverworts having prostrate dorsiventral
thallus) (ii) Anthocerotae (Hornworts, also having prostrate gametophytes with erect
horn like sporophytes) and Musci (mosses having effect upright slender axes bearing
spirally arranged leaves and sporophytes at tips)
6. Bryophytes are great land colonisers and used as peat (Sphagnum moss); medicinally
to cure kidney or gall bladder stone (Polytrichum commune), pulmonary disorders
(Marchantia polymorpha), skin diseases; packaging materials (mosses) and for
geochemical evaluation of metals.
PTERIDOPHYTES
1. The petridophytes are the first vascular land plants with independent sporophyte, the
main plant body, differentiated into stem, root and leaves with well defined vascular
tissue.
2. They have haplo-diplontic life cyle pattern where sporophyte phase is the dominant
phase of life cycle in contrast to the haploid gametophytic phase which is short lived
and reduced.
3. The haploid spores produced by sporangia borne on the sporophyte, germinate in cool
damp environment to form gametophyte and bear sex organs, the antheridia (male)
and the archegonia (female).
4. Water is required for transfer a male gametes to the archegonium where zygote is
formed after fertilization.
5. The zygote is retained in the archegonium and develops into multi-cellular embryo that
grows into a sporophyte.
6. Many pteridophytes have economic importance and in addition to decorative use (Ferns),
these have many medicinal uses, such as cure for diarrhoea (Psilotum nudum), asthma
(Dryopteris); wound healing (Adiantum), rheumatism (Dryopteris) etc.
GYMNOSPERMS
1. Gymnosperms are naked-seeded plants with well developed vascular system in which
ovules are not enclosed by any ovary wall and after fertilization seeds remain exposed.
2. The main plant body is a long-lived sporophyte differentiated into stem, leaves and
roots and alternates with the very reduced gametophytic phase, showing a diplontic
type of life cycle pattern.
3. The individual male and female cones or strobili are formed by aggregation of spirally
arranged micro and megasporophylls which develop micro sporogia and megasporangia
that, in turn, produce haploid microspores and megaspores respectively.
4. The microspore or pollen grain germinates to form pollen tube through which male
gametes are released into the ovule where it fuses egg cell present in archegonium.
5. Pollination is anemophilous and after the process of fertilization, the zygote develop
into an embryo and the ovules into seeds.
6. They have great economic importance and provide us food (pine kernels), timber (pines),
resins from pines (as varnishes, oil of terpentine, gums, greases, printing ink), tannins
for converting hides into leather (Tsuga, sequoia, Larix) medicines (Ephedrine from
Ephedra) and other very useful products.
ANGIOSPERMS
1. The angiosperms are closed seeded, most advanced (sprophytes) with highly developed
reproductive structures (stamens and carpele / pistils) and after fertilization the ovlues
develop into the seed and the ovary which encloses ovules develops into fruits.
2. The anther of stamens produces haploids pollen grains (male gametophyte) after meiosis
and ovules inside ovaries form the haploid female gametophyte or emboryo sac which
contains egg cell.
3. The male gametes formed in the male gametophyte pass through the pollen tube formed
by pollen grains entering the female gametophyte, one fuses with the egg cell (syngamy)
and the other with secondary nucleus, hence effect double fertilization, and form diploid
embryo and triploid endosperm (triple fusion) respectively.
4. Double fertilization and triple fusion are unique to angiosperms which are further classified
into dicotyledons and monocotyledons; depending upon the number of cotyledons present
in the embryo.
5. The gametophytic phase is highly reduced and fully dependent on the dominant
sporophytic plant and the life cycle pattern is diplontic.
6. Angiospermic plant provide us food, fodder, fuel, shelter, clothing, medicines and several
other commercially important products.
The angiosperms are classified into monocotyledons and dicotyledons.

SAMPLE QUESTIONS
1. Choose the correct answer from the words given bracket:
(i) One the following is a vascular cryptogam
(Bryophytes, Pteridophytes, Gymnosperms, Angiosperms)
(ii) One of the following features of Gymnosperms is seen among lower group of plants
(Seed, Ovule, Archegonium, Nucellus)
(iii) Haplontic life cycle pattern is seen in one the following plant groups.
(Algae, Angiosperms, Gymnosperms, Bryophytes)
(iv) In which of the following zygote does not give rise to embryo.
(Pteridophyte, Gymnosperms, Algae, Angiosperms)
(v) One of the following is a naked seeded plant
(Angiosperms, Gymnosperm, Bryophyta, Algae)
2. Select the correct answer of the following :

(i) Green algae possess
(a) Chlorophyll a, b (c) Chlorophyll a, Carotenes
(b) Chlorophyll a, c (d) Chlorophyll b, carotenes
(ii) Agar is obtained from
(a) Gelidium (c) Spirogyra
(b) Riccia (d) Laminaria
(iii) Colour of brown algae is due to-
(a) Carotenodis (c) Phycocyanin
(b) Phycoerythrin (d) Fucoxanthin
(iv) The largest alga out of four of the following
(a) Spirogyra (c) Macrocystis
(b) Fucus (d) Sargassum
(v) The land plants that lack vascular tissue
(a) Bryophyta (c) Pteridophyta
(b) Angiosperms (d) Cycads
(vi) Sprophyte is fully dependent and parasitic on gametophytic body is
(a) Bryophyta (c) Monocots
(b) Gymnosperm (d) Di cots
(vii) Seedless vascular plants are the
(a) Liverworts (c) Ferns
(b) Mosses (d) Monocots
(viii) Multicellular branched rhizoids and leafy gametophytes are found in

(a) All pteridophytes (c) Some pteriidophytes
(b) Bryophytes (d) Gymnosperms
(ix) Smallest angiosperms is
(a) Striga (c) Eucalyptus
(c) Wolfia (d) Nicotiana
(x) Which of the following algae is very rich in proteins.
(a) Uolthrix (c) Gelidium
(b) Chlorella (d) Oscillatoria
(xi) A seed plant having a palm like habit is
(a) Pinus (c) Cycas
(b) Gnetum (d) Ginkgo
(xii) Gymnosperms are characterized by
(a) Small leaves (c) Fruits
(b) Naked Ovules (d) Ciliated sperms
(xiii) The thallus of Riccia is
(a) Triploid (c) Diploid
(b) Haploid (d) Polyploid
(xiv) Peat is formed by
(a) Riccia (c) Sphagnum
(b) Anthoceros (d) Funaria
(xv) The sporophyte consisting of foot, seta and capsule is seen in
(a) Riccia (c) Selaginella
(b) Cycas (d) Funaria
3. Fill in the blanks.

(i) Bog moses is a common name of.
(ii) is the tallest anigosperms.
(iii) Ferns contain underground stem called.
(iv) In red algae the reserved food is.
(v) The gymnosperms areseeded plants
(vi) The angiosperms areseeded plants.
(vii) Spirally arrangedconstitute a cone.
(viii) Production of spores of different sizes is called.
(ix) There is a single cotyledon in the embryo ofclass of angiosperms.
(x) Gametophytes and sporophyte are independent of each other in.
4. Write notes on (explain briefly the following terms) :

Heterospory, Archegonium, Antheridium, Haplontic, Diplontic, Sporophyll, Embryosac,
Isogamy, Double fertilisation, Triple fusion, Protonema.
5. Differentiate between :
(i) Red algae and Brown algae
(ii) Liverworts and Moss

(iii) Bryophytes and Pteridophytes
(iv) Syngamy and Triple fusion
(v) Monocots and Dicots
(vi) Algae and Fungi
Long answer-type questions :

1. Describe the basis of classification and general characters of algae.
2. Name plant group which bear archegonia and describe the characteristic feature of first
achegoniate land plant.
3. If both Gymnosperms and Angiosperms bear seeds, then why they are classfied separately.
4. What are Gymnosperms? Describe their economic importance.
CLASSIFICATION OF ANIMAL CHAPTER
KINGDOM
Every day we come across with different kinds of animals surrounding us. We know few
of them in our local language. They differ in their structures and forms. So far over a million
species of animals have been described and they have been classified scientifically and many
of them still remain to be explored. So the need for classification becomes all the more important
to provide scientific names and to put them in right position in the animal kingdom.
4.1. METHOD OF CLASSIFICATION :
Although the animals differ in structure and form, there are some basic features common
to many in relation to the level of organization of cells; body symmetry, types of coelom and
patterns of digestive, circulatory, reproductive and nervous systems. These features are used
as the basis of animal classification and some of them are discussed hereunder.
4.1.1. Levels of Body Organisation :
All the animals in the animal kingdom are multicellular except protozoa. Since their body
consist of many cells, they show three levels of body organization such as (i) cellular level, (ii)
tissue level and (iii) organ and organ system level. For example, in sponges, the cells are
arranged as loose cell aggregates, i.e., they exhibit cellular level of organisation because most
of the life activities are performed by individual cells. On the contrary, in higher forms some
division of labour occur among the cells.Similar or nearly similar types of cells, performing the
same function are grouped into tissues. Animals possessing this feature are said to be in tissue
level of organisation (e.g., coelenterates). A still higher level of organisation, i.e., organ and
organ system level is exhibited by members of Platyhelminthes and other higher-phyla, where
tissues are grouped together into organ, and organs into organ systems. In animals like annelids,
arthropods, molluscs, echinoderms and chordates, organs have been associated to form
functional systems and each system is concerned with a specific physiological function. This
pattern is called organ system level of organisation.
Organ systems in different groups of animals exhibit various patterns of complexities.

For example, the digestive system in platyhelminths has only a single opening to the exterior
that serves both as mouth and anus, and hence, is called incomplete. A complete digestive
system has two openings, mouth and anus. Similarly, the circulatory system may be of two
types: (i) open type in which the blood is pumped out of the heart into a cavity and the cells and
tissues are directly bathed in it or (ii) closed type, in which the blood is circulated through a
series of vessels of varying diameters (arteries, veins and capillaries).
Animals can be categorised on the basis of their symmetry. Sponges are mostly
asymmetrical, i.e., any plane that passes through the centre does not divide them into equal
halves. When the plane of division passing through the central axis of the body divides the
organism into two identical halves, they are called symmetrical. The body symmetry is of two
types i.e. radial and bilateral. In radial symmetry, any plane of division passing through the
central axis of the body divides the organism into two identical halves. Coelenterates, ctenophores
and echinoderms have this kind of body symmetry [Fig. 4.1 (a)]. In bilateral symmetry like those
an annelids„arthropods, chordates, etc., only one plane of division passing through the central
axis divides the animal into two identical halves the right and left [Fig. 4.1 (b)].
4.1.2. Diploblastic and Triploblastic Organisation :
In tissue grade of animals, the cells are arranged in two or three embryonic layers i.e. an
external ectoderm, a middle mesoderm and an internal endoderm. Animals having two
germ layers like ectoderm and endoderm are called diploblastic animals, e.g., coelenterates.
Anon-cellular gelatinous layer, mesoglea, is present between the ectoderm and the endoderm
[Fig. 4.2 (a)]. Further above the scale, there is a transition between diplobastic and triploblastic
plans. Here, there is a third layer
between ectoderm and endoderm,
the mesnchyme. It contains free and
wandering cells in a gelationous
matrix (e.g., platyhelminths). In
aschelminths, there is a third layer of
muscle-like cells in between.
However, this layer does not give rise
to coelom. This group, too, is in the
transition between diploblasic and
triploblastic body plans. Triploblastic
animals have all the three germinal Fig. 4.2 : Germinal layers and body plans in animals,
(a) Diploblastic, (b) Triploblastic
layers namely ectoderm mesoderm
Classification of Animal Kingdom I 63
and endoderm, arranged concentrically from outer to inner and further more, the mesoderm
gives rise to coelom, the true body cavity, (e.g., annelids to mammals)
4.1.3. Coelom :
Presence or absence of a cavity between the body wall and the gut wall is a very important
criterion in classification. The body cavity, which is lined by mesoderm is called coelom [Fig.
4.3 (c)].The animals, in which the body cavity is absent are called acoelomates, e.g.,
platyhelminths [Fig. 4.3 (a)]. In some animals, the body cavity is not lined by mesoderm. Instead,
a layer of muscle-like cells is present between the ectoderm and endoderm. Such a body cavity
is called pseudocoelom and the animals possessing them are called pseudocoelomates,
e.g., aschelminths [Fig. 4.3 (b)].
Animals possessing coelom are called coelomates, e.g., annelids, molluscs, arthropods,
echinoderms, hemichordates and chordates.
4.1.4. Segmentation :
In some animals, the body is externally and internally divided into segments with a serial
repetition of most of the organs. For example in annelids (earthworm and leech), the body is
metamerically segmented and the phenomenon is called as metamerism. However, in higher
forms, metamerism is evident only in embryonic stages, which is secondarily lost in the adults.
4.1.5. Notochord :
Notochord is a mesodermally derived solid and cylindrical rod-like structure formed on

the dorsal side during embryonic development in some animals. Animals with notochord are
called chordates and those animals which do not posses this structure are non-chordates, e.g.,
Porifera to Hemichordala.
4.2. CLASSIFICATION OF ANIMAL KINGDOM :
The Kingdom Animalia is divided into two sub-kingdoms, parazoa and metazoa on the
basis of cell aggregation in the body.
4.2.1. SUB-KINGDOM I, PARAZOA
Phylum Porifera (Fig.4.4)
1. Animals of cellular grade of organization with incipient tissue formation. It includes

the only phylum, Porifera (L., porus, pore; ferre, to bear).
2. Sedentary and solitary or colonial.
3. No organ system, digestive tract and mouth.
4. Body is porous with many internal cavities or canals lined by flagellated cells, known
as choanocytes. The canals constitute a canal system, through which a continuous
current of water flows through the body.
5. The body wall consists of two layers: outer pinacoderm, made up of a layer of flat
cells, known as pinacocytes and inner choanoderm made up of flask-shaped
flagellated cells, known as choanocytes.
6. The two are cemented together by a mesenchyme containing a matrix and several
types of free and wandering mesenchyme cells.
7. The embryonic undifferentiating cells of the mesenchyme are known as archaeocytes.

These can differentiate into any of the adult cell types during exigency, particularly
during regeneration.
8. Endoskeleton is made up of calcareous or silicious spicules and/or sponging fibers.
9. Respiratory, excretory and nervous systems and sense organs are absent.
10. Generally hermaphrodite. Reproduction occurs by both asexual and sexual methods.
Asexual reproduction occurs by budding and gemmule formation.
11. Fertilization is internal and cross fertilization is the rule.
12. Development is direct or indirect through free swimming larvae, known as

amphiblastula and parenchymula.
13. Most have remarkable power of regeneration.
[e.g.; Leucosolenia, Sycon, Spongilla (fresh water sponge), Euplectella (Venus’ flower
basket), Hyalonema (Glass-rope sponge) and Euspongia and Hippospongia (Bath sponges)]
Porifera is divided into three classes : Calcarea, Hexactinellida and

Demospongiae.
PORIFERA
CLASS I CLASS II CLASS III

CALCAREA HEXACTI NELLI DA DEMOSPONGIAE
e.g.; Leucosolenia, e.g.; Spongilla, Euplectella e.g.; Euspongia and Hippospongia
Syon and Grantia and Hyalonema (Bath sponges)
Sycon
oscula
substratum
Euplectella Euspongia
Fig.4.4 : Representative types from Porifera
4.2.2. SUB-KINGDOM II, METAZOA
1. Animals of tissue or organ and organ system grade of organization.
2. Mouth and digestive tract are present.
It is divided into two grades, such as Radiata and Bilateria based on the primary
body symmetry
4.2.2.1. GRADE I, RADIATA :
Phylum, Coelenterata (Fig.4.5)

1. Animals with tissue grade of organization. It includes only one phylum, Cnidaria or
Coelenterata (Gr., koilos, hollow; enteron, intestine).
2. Two types of forms, such as polyp and medusa exist. Some are exclusively polypoid,
while others are medusoid. Still some others have both forms in their life cycle.
3. The primary body symmetry is radial or biradial.
4. Digestive cavity or coelenteron or gastro-vascular cavity is the only cavity in the body.
Anus is absent.
5. Diploblastic animals i.e. body wall has two primary germ layers, outer ectoderm and
inner endoderm cemented together by a non-cellular gelatinous mesogloea.
6. Interstitial cells are embryonic undifferentiated cells, present both in ectoderm and
endoderm, among other cells. These cells can differentiate into any other kind of cell
during exigency, especially during regeneration.
7. A coelenterate has a mouth encircled by tentacles, armed with stinging cells,
nematoblasts or cnidoblasts.
8. Digestion is both intra- and extra-cellular.
9. Nervous system is primitive and diffuse.
10. Reproduction is both asexual and sexual.
11. Asexual reproduction takes place by budding.
12. Development is indirect through a planula larva.
13. Some exhibit the phenomenon of polymorphism.
14. Have a remarkable power of regeneration.
[e.g.; Hydra, Obelia, Physalia (Portuguese man of war), Aurelia (Jelly fish) Adamsia
(Sea anemone), and a great variety of corals]
Coelenterata is divided into three classes : Hydrozoa, Scyphozoa and Anthozoa
or Actinozoa.
COELENTERATA
CLASS I
I
CLASS III
HYDROZOA ANTHOZOA OR ACTINOZOA
e.g.; Hydra Obelia and Physalia e.g.; Adamsia (Sea anemone) and
(Portuguese Man of war)
V
Corals
CLASS II
SCYPHOZOA
e.g.; Aurelia (Jelly fish)
tentacle
medusa buds mouth
gonotheca -gastrovascular cavity
tentacles longitudinal
mouth section of
gonangium longitudinal
hypostome ‘"section of
testis ectoderm hydranth
endoderm—
mouth
hydranth with hypostome
tentacles
contracted
grown bud
hydranth with
gonotheca - tentacles
basal disc developing M spread
medusa buds * *** hydrothecae
blastostyle
crest or sail pneumatophore perisarcajl perisarc
or float annuli **
coenosarc
hydrocaulus
gonozooids WK smaller
yv dactylozooids
gastrozooids |l |||
tentacles^dH if1 A larger
bearing f' dactylozooids hydrorrhiza
nematocysts^ |||
Obelia
Physalia
exumbrellar surface gonads gastrovascular

canals
circular
canal \
\ cinclidal tubercles
anemones
g shell of gastropod
hermit-crab /
marginal thophalium
tentacles
velarium
oral arms-
Aurelia acontia
pinnate tentacles Adamsia
anthrocodia contiguous cups or thecae
completely
retracted
polyp i
Corallium
coenenchyme^.-
Fig.4.5 : Representative types from Coelenterata

Difference between Parazoa and Metazoa :
Parazoa Metazoa
1. Includes multicellular animals, but the 1. Cells are specialized and exhibit cell
cells do not exhibit cell-cell cell cooperation among themselves.
cooperation.
2. Cellular grade of organization. 2. Tissue and organ system grade of
organization.
3. Diploblastic. 3. Triploblastic.
4. Digestive cavity is absent. 4. Digestive cavity present.
5. Canal system is present, 5. Canal system is never present,
(e.g.; Animals belonging to the Phylum (e.g.; Animals belonging to the phyla,
Porifera) Coelenterata and above in the
evolution scale)
4.2.2.2. GRADE II, BILATERIA :
1. Animals with organ system grade of organization.
2. The primary body symmetry is bilateral.
3. Anus is generally present.
Bilateria is divided into Acoelomata, Pseudocoelomata and Coelomata on the basis

of the absence or presence of a true body cavity, the coelom. We mention again that the
coelom is a cavity present between the ectoderm and endoderm and derived from and lined
by mesoderm.
1. Group I, Acoelomata :
1. Coelom is absent. The region between the digestive tract (endoderm) and body
wall (ectoderm) is filled with mesenchyme. Mesenchyme contains free and
wandering cells in a matrix. The mesenchyme cells are not organized into a germ
layer.
2. Incipiently triploblastic, since mesenchyme is not organized into mesoderm.
3. Body is unsegmented and if segmented, the youngest segment is close to the

head (e.g.; Taenia).
4. Excretory system consists of protonephridia with flame cells.
5. Acoelomata includes one phylum, Platyleminthes.

Phylum, Platyhelminthes (Gr., platys, flat or broad; helminthes, worm) (Fig.4.6):
1. Includes mostly endo-parasitic animals, commonly known as flat worms.
2. Bilaterally symmetrical acoelomate animals.
3. Two layers, ectoderm and endoderm are cemented by a mesenchyme. The

mesenchyme has embryonic undifferentiated cells, known as neoblasts, among
other cells. The neoblasts can differentiate into any other kind of cell during
exigency, especially during regeneration.
4. Endo-parasitic animals have suckers and hooks for clinging and attachment.
5. Alimentary canal may be present in some free living forms or absent in parasitic
forms. If alimentary canal is present, an anus is absent.
6. Respiratory and circulatory systems are absent. Respiration occurs by the general
surface of the body by diffusion.
7. Excretory system consists of single or paired protonephridia with flame cells or

solenocytes.
8. Nervous system is primitive with a nerve centre at the anterior end with one or
three pairs of nerve cords.
9. Generally hermaphodites. Cross fertilization in Turbellaria and Trematoda and

self fertization in Cestoda occur.
10. Development generally is indirect through one or a few larval forms.
11. Some exhibit remarkable power of regeneration.
12. Parasitic forms exhibit parasitic adaptations.
[e.g.; Planaria, Fasciola hepatica (Liver fluke), Schistosoma (Blood fluke) and Taenia
solium (Tape worm)]
Platyhelminthes is divided into three classes: Turbellaria, Trematoda and Cestoda.
PLATYHELMINTHES
V V
CLASS I CLASS II CLASS III
TURBELLARIA TREMATODA CESTODA
e.g.; PI an aria e.g-fasciola and Schistosoma e.g.; Taenia solium
anterior end mouth scolex

__neck or
area of
poliferation
immature
proglottids
strobila
excretory pore
Fasciola repatica
Planaria
Fig.4.6 : Representative types from Platyhelminthes
2. Group II, Pseudocoelomata :

1. There is a cavity between the digestive tract and body wall, but it is not lined by
mesoderm. Therefore, it is known as a pseudocoelom or pseudocoel.
2. Anus present.
3. It includes one phylum, Nemathelminthes or Aschelminthes.
Phylum, Nemathelminthes (Gr. Nematos, thread; eidos, form; helminthes, worm)

(Fig. 4.7):
1. Includes animals, possessing cylindrical body and hence, known as round worms.
2. The body is covered by a cuticle
3. The ectoderm is syncytial.
4. Longitudinal muscle fibers are present in four bands
5. Alimentary canal is more or less straight with mouth and anus present at two
extreme ends.
6. Respiratory and circulatory systems are absent. Respiration occurs by diffusion
through the general surface of the body.
7. Flame cells and nephridia are absent. Excretory system is in the form of English
alphabet H’ with longitudinal excretory canals.
8. Nervous system consists of a distinct circumenteric nerve ring, from which arise
anterior and posterior longitudinal nerves.
9. Sexes are separate, exhibiting sexual dimorphism.
10. Fertilization is internal and development is direct. The fertilized egg hatches into
an embryo, which moults four times before becoming an adult.
11. Most are endoparasites, exhibiting remarkable parasitic adaptations.
[e.g.; Ascaris lumbricoides, Ancylostoma duodenale (Hook worm), Enterobius

vermicularis (Human pin worm or thread worm) and Wuchereria bancrofti (Filarial worm)].
Buccal
capsule mouth mouth
Mouth cephalic
Mouth expansion
, anterior
pharynx -ABA oviduct
end bulb
in anterior
vulva ovary
vagina anterior
cloacal uterus
opening intestine 4
testis L- posterior
ovary
vas
deferens posterior
uterus
Female genital
aperture posterior
anus oviduct
Cloacal V seminal vesicle
aperture
pointed tail rectum
Copulatory
bursa
Anus
(a) Male (b) Female (a) Male (b) Female
Ascaris lumbricoides Ancylostoma duodenale Enterobius vermicularis
Fig.4.7: Representative types from Nemathelminthes
There is no certain agreement about the classification of Nemathelminthes. However,

some texts describe Nematoda as one single class of the phylum.
3. Group III, Coelomata:
1. Coelom is present.
2. Truly triploblastic animals.
3. Excretory organs are protonephridia with flame cells or metanephridia with or

without nephrostomes.
Coelomata is divided into Schizocoela (Protostomia) and Enterocoela

(Deuterostomia), based on the nature and origin of the coelom.
(a) Schizocoela (Protostomia):
In some texts, this group has been described as Annelid superphylum, which includes
three major phyla, Annelida, Arthropoda and Mollusca. It is characterized by:
1. The coelom is schizocoelic i.e. it originates as a cavity in the mesoderm.
2. Cleavage is spiral and determinate.
3. Blastopore becomes the mouth.

4. Skeleton, if any, is ectodermal.
5. Trochophore type of larva.
Phylum, Annelida (L., annelus, ring; Gr., eidos, ring) (Fig. 4.8):
1. Body generally elongated, cylindrical or flattened dorso-ventrally and worm-like.
2. Body is metamerically segmented.
3. There is a pre-oral muscular projection, known as the prostomium. It is not a true
body segment.
4. The first true body segment is known as peristomium, which follows the
prostomium.
5. In a majority, the locomotor structures, known as setae, are present.
6. The coelom is schizocoelic and spacious. It is filled with a coelomic fluid.
7. In aquatic forms, such as in Nereis, lateral paddle-like parapodia are present.
8. The alimentary canal is straight and simple with mouth and anus present at
opposite extremities.
9. Circulatory system is of closed type. Blood is red due to the presence of red
blood pigment dissolved in the plasma.
10. Excretion occurs by segmentally arranged nephriidia and chloragogen or yellow
cells.
11. Nervous system consists of a pair of cerebral ganglia, a sub-pharyngeal ganglion
and a ganglionated solid ventral nerve cord.
12. Usually hermaphrodites, but some are monoecious.
13. Development is direct or indirect through a trochophore larva.
[e.g.; Pheretima posthuma (Earthworm), Nereis (Clamworm or Sandworm) and
Hirudinaria granulosa (Indian cattle leech)]
Annelida is divided into three classes, Polychaeta, Oligochaeta and Hirudinea on two
counts. The first is based on the presence or absence of locomotor structures (setae or
chetae). Secondly, if setae are present, these are numerous or few.
ANNELI DA
V
CLASS I
POLYCHAETA
e.g.; Nereis
mouth x prostomium
tentacle prostomial palp anterior sucker
velum
13th segment 1st —-•

Female genital nephridiopore
pore
Genital Male genital male
papillae pore genital pore
female
genital pore
Prostamium segmental <

receptor
organs
17th
3 nephridiopore
s
(b)
Posterior sucker
(a)
Nereis Pheretima posthuma Hirudinaria granulosa

(Earthworm) (Cattle leech)
Fig.4.8 : Representative types from Annelida
Differences between pseudocoelomata and coelomata :
Pseudocoelomata Coelomata
1. Body cavity is a pseudocoelom or false 1. Body cavity is a true coelom.
coelom
2. Pseudocoelom is not lined by 2. Coelom is lined by mesoderm on both
mesoderm. sides.
3. It is derived from blastocoel of the 3. It arises as a cavity in the embryonic
embryo. mesoderm.
4. Internal organs are not suspended 4. Internal organs are suspended within
within this cavity. this cavity.
(e.g.; Animals belonging to the Phylum, (e.g.; Animals belonging to the phyla,
Nemathelminthes or Aschelminthes) Annelida and above in the evolution
scale)
Phylum, Arthropoda (Gr., arthros, jointed; podos, foot) (Fig. 4.9):

1. The body is segmented and each segment bears paired jointed appendages.
2. The body is generally divided into head, thorax and abdomen. However, in
some forms the head and thorax fuse forming a cephalothorax.
3. Jointed appendages are present.
4. The body is covered by a cuticle, made of chitin.

5. Coelom is reduced and a spacious blood-filled cavity, known as haemocoel is
present.
6. Alimentary canal is divided into fore gut, mid gut and hind gut. The mouth is
surrounded by many jointed appendages. These together constitute the mouth
parts
7. Respiration occurs by gills in aquatic forms, trachea and book lungs in air
breathing (terrestrial) forms.,
8. Circulatory system is of open type with the heart being dorsal in position.
9. Excretion occurs by malpighian tubules or green glands or coxal glands.
10. Nervous system consists of a brain lying in the head that is followed by a
ganglionated double ventral nerve cord.
11. Sexes are separate. The phenomenon of sexual dimorphism is often exhibited.
12. Reproduction is sexual and fertilization is internal.
13. Development is direct or indirect through one or a few larval stages.
[e.g.; Peripatus, Palaemon (Fresh water prawn), Pennaeus (Brackish water prawn),
Lobster, Crab, Millipedes, Centipedes, Scorpion, Spider, Limulus (King crab) Lepisma (Silver
fish), Periplaneta americana (Cockroach), Butterfly and Moth, Mosquito, House fly].
Phylum, Arthropoda is primarily divided into five classes: Onychophora, Crustacea,
Myriapoda, Arachnida and Insecta. Class, Insecta is further divided into two sub-classes:
Apterygota [includes wing-less insects, e.g.; Lepisma (Silverfish)] and Pterygota (includes
insects with wings).
ARTHROPODA
V J'
CLASS I CLASS III CLASS V
ONYCOPHORA MYRIAPODA INSECTA
e.g.; Peripatus e.g.; Millipedesand
V Centipedes V
CLASS II CLASS IV
CRUSTACEA ARACHNIDA
e.g.; Palaemon (Frsh water prawn), e.g.; Scorpion, Spider and
Pennaeus (Brackish water prawn), Lobster and Crab Limulus (King Crab)
SUB - CLASS I SUB - CLASS II

APTERYGOTA PTERYGOTA
e.g.; Primitive, wing -less insects e.g.; Insects with wings (Cockroach,
[ Lepisma (Silver fish)] Butterfly, Dragonfly, Mosquito and
Housefly
Arthrodial Cephalothorax Cephalic

Antennal spine
Hepatic spine shield
membrane
Compound eye
Rostrum Ocelli Antenna
Poison
claw
Antennule
Antenna Stigmata
Pleopods III maxillipede
Non chelate legs

Telson
II Chelate leg Walking
Uropods
Trunk
Palaemon (Fresh water prawn)
Preantenna Tubercles
Oral papilla
Claws
Mouth Claws Trunk

appendages
Peripatus
Antenna
Prothorax
Mesothorax Centipede
Metathorax
Antenna A x Great chela
Antennule
Compound
eye Carapace
Walking leg
Abdomen
Anal cercus
10th tergum- Thoracic
Styles legs
Periplaneta americana (Cockroach)
Abdomen
Crab
Fig.4.9 : Representative types from Arthropoda
Differences between pseudocoel and haemocoel
Pseudocoel Haemocoel
1. False body cavity, not lined by 1. Mesoderm-lined true body cavity, filled
mesoderm with haemolymph or blood.
2. It is derived from blastocoel of the 2. It arises as a cavity in the embryonic
embryo. mesoderm.
3. It is not filled with blood. 3. It is filled with blood or haemolymph,
(e.g.; Animals belonging to the Phylum, (e.g.; Animals belonging to the phylum,
Nemathelminthes or Aschelminthes) Arthropoda)
Phylum, Mollusca (L., mollis or molluscs, soft) (Fig. 4.10):

1. Aquatic, mostly marine but a few fresh water forms.
2. Body is secondarily unsegmented and bilaterally symmetrical. A few, like Pila, are
secondarily asymmetrical due to a phenomenon called torsion that occurs during
the development.
3. The body is divided into head, foot and visceral mass. All visceral organs
constitute the visceral mass that is covered by a fold of the body wall, known
as mantle.
4. The mantle secretes a calcareous (calcium carbonate) shell.
5. The coelom is reduced to the cavities of the pericardium and the cavities, where
gonads are present.
6. The digestive tract is simple and tubular with mouth and anus present at opposite
ends. However, in gastropods, the tract twists due to torsion and consequently,
the mouth and anus come close to each other at the anterior end.
7. Respiration, in aquatic forms, takes place by gills or ctenidia. In terrestrial forms
it occurs by pulmonary sacs.
8. Excretion is performed by a pair of kidneys.
9. Nervous system is centralized with a brain in the head, which is followed by
nerves to different parts of the visceral mass.
10. Sense organs are in the form of eyes, tentacles, osphradium and statocyst.
11. Sexes are generally separate, but some are hermaphrodites.
12. Development is direct or indirect through larval stages known as trochophore,
velliger and glochidium.
[e.g.; Pila globosa (Fresh water snail / Apple snail), Unio (Fresh water mussel), Pinctada
sps (Pearl oyester), Sepia (Cuttie fish), Loligo (Squid) and Octopus (Sea devil)]
The phylum, Mollusca is divided into six classes: Monoplacophora, Amphineura,
Scaphopoda, Gastropoda, Bivalvia or Pelecypoda and Cephalopoda.
MOLLUSCA
CLASS III CLASS V

CLASS I SCAPHOPODA PELECYPODA
MONOPLACOPHORA e.g.; Dentalium e.g.; Unio (Fresh
e.g.; Neopilina water mussel),
CLASS II Pinctada sps, (Pearl
AMPHINEURA oyster)
e.g.; Chiton CLASS IV CLASS VI
GASTROPODA CEPHALOPODA
e.g.; Pila globosa e.g.; Sepia (Cuttie
(Apple snail) fish), Loligo (Squid)
and Octopus (Sea
devil / Devil fish).
apex visceral mass

penultimate
whorl
mantle
varix
ommatophore
body eye
whorl gg| supramarginal
groove
umbilicus outer right left
lip nuchal lobe nuchal lobe
mouth or operculum
columellar lip aperture
Pila (shell with operculum)
first tentacle head foot second tentacle
Hinge ligament
A Umbo Pila (Body after removing the shell)
Lines of growth
Exhalent
siphon Shell suckers oral arms
•/ Protruded
foot
tentacle
Inhalent Mantle edge
siphon
Unio
oral arms head
collar
suckers -O' trunk or

visceral
|| hump
it suckers
lateral fin or
funnel parapodium
hectocotyl
body—l
Octopus
Fig.4.10: Representative types from Mollusca
(b) Enterocoela (Deuterostomia):
In some texts this group has been described as the Echinoderm superphylum that
includes three major phyla, Echinodermata, Hemichordata and Chordata.
1. The coelom is enterocoelic i.e. it originates as pouches from the endoderm.
2. Cleavage is radial and indeterminate.
3. Blastopore becomes the anus.
4. Skeleton is mesodermal.
5. Pluteus type of larva.

Phylum, Echinodermata (Gr., echinos, spiny; derma, skin) (Fig.4.11):

1. Exclusively marine animals having pentamerous radial symmetry. This symmetry
is considered as secondary. The primary symmetry refers to the symmetry of
their larvae, which is bilateral. This fact justifies their inclusion in the grade,
Bilateria.
2. Body shape is variable like star-shaped, globular, spherical, etc.
3. Body is with distinct oral and aboral sides. No definite head, however, is present.
4. The skin is tough and leathery bearing spines and calcareous dermal ossicles.
5. A characteristic water vascular system or ambulacral system is present with
numerous tube feet, which help in locomotion.
6. Alimentary canal is a straight or coiled tube.
7. Respiration occurs by diffusion through the body wall.
8. Blood vascular system, also known as haemal system, is of open type.
9. Excretion occurs through the body surface.
10. Nervous system is primitive
11. Sense organs are poorly developed.
12. Sexes are separate and reproduction is sexual.
13. Fertilization is external and development is indirect through characteristic larval
forms, such as bipinnaria; auricularia; pluteus, etc.
[e.g.; Antedon (Sea lily), Asterias (Star fish), Cucumaria (Sea cucumber), Echinus
(Sea urchin), Ophioderma (Brittle star)]
The phylum, Echinodermata is primarily divided into two sub-phyla, Pelmatozoa and
Eleutherozoa, based on whether the form is sedentary or free-living. Pelmatozoa is divided
into five classes, of which one, Crinoidae is living, while others are extinct. Eleutherozoa is
divided into five classes, of which four are living and one is extinct. The living classes are :
Asteroidae; Ophiuroidae; Echinoidae and Holothuroidae.
ECHINODERMATA
I I
SUB-PHYLUM I SUB-PHYLUM II
PELMATOZOA ELEUTHEROZOA
------ CLASS I ---------- CLASS I

CRI NOIDEA ASTEROIDEA
e.g.; Antedon (Sea lily) CLASS II — e.g.; Asterias (Star fish>
OPHIUROIDEA
e.g.; Brittle star ---------- CLASS III
ECHINOIDEA
e.g.; Echinus (Sea urchin)
CLASS II -V CLASS IV-------

(All extinct) HOLOTHUROIDEA
e.g.; Cucumaria CLASS V
(Sea cucumber) (Extinct)
normal dendritic
tentacles
Asterias
Antedon
Echinus Brittle star
Fig.4.11 : Representative types from Echinodermata
Differences between schizocoelic coelom and enterocoelic coelom
Schizocoelic coelom Enterocoelic coelom

1. The coelom is formed by the splitting 1. The coelom is derived from the dorso
of mesoderm bands. lateral mesodermal pouches from the
wall of the archenteron.
2. The mesoderm is derived from a 2. The mesoderm is derived from the
source other than the archenteron. archenteric roof.
3. The mesodermal cells separate off 3. The mesodermal cells remain associ
from the endoderm early during devel ated with the endoderm and separate
opment. off late during the embryonic develop
ment.
(e.g.; Animals belonging to the phyla, (e.g.; Animals belonging to the phyla,
Annelida, Arthropoda and Mollusca) Echinodermata Hemichordata and
Chordata)
Phylum, Hemichordata (Gr., hemi, half; chorda, string or cord) (Fig. 4.12):
1. Exclusively marine, solitary or colonial.
2. Triploblastic and bilaterally symmetrical.
3. Body is vermiform (worm-like), divided into proboscis, collar and trunk.
4. Coelom is enterocoelic, divided into single protocoel and paired mesocoel

and metacoel.
5. A pre-oral muscular extension, the buccal diverticulum is present. It was

considered as homologous to the notochord of chordates. However, due to its
structural dissimilarity, it is no longer considered as a notochord homologue. It is
simply termed as a stomochord. Based on this, Hemichordata is separated off
from Chordata and assigned with a phylum status and placed among non-
chordates.
6. Pharyngeal gill clefts are present in pairs in the trunk.
7. Digestive tract is well defined and the anus is terminal at the posterior end.
8. Respiration is branchial i.e. takes place by gill pouches.
9. Circulatory system is of closed type. A heart vesicle or pericardium is present

in the proboscis.
10. Excretion by a proboscis gland or glomerulus.
11. Nervous system is primitive comprising of an intra-epidermal nerve plexus.
12. Sexes are separate and fertilization is external.
13. Development is either direct or indirect through a larval form, known as tornaria
larva.
[e.g.; Balanoglossus (Tongue or Acorn worm), Saccoglossus, Cephalodiscus,

Rhabdopleura]
The phylum, Hemichordata is divided into two main classes : (1) Enteropneusta and
(2) Pterobranchia.
Phylum, Chordata :
1. The name of the phylum is so because of the presence of a notochord.
2. The notochord is a solid chord consisting of vacuolated cells surrounded by two

connective tissue sheaths.
3. In a few chordate groups, the notochord persists as such, while in a majority, it

is transformed into a vertebral column by ossification and segmentation.
i— proboscis
collar
branchio-
genital
region
HEMI CHORDATA
ridge
CLASS I
hepatic > ENTEROPNEUSTA
caecae e.g.; Balanoglossus and
hepatic Saccoglossus
region
CLASS II
PTEROBRANCHIA
e.g.; Cephalodiscus and
abdominal Rhabdopleura
region
anus
Balanoglossus
Fig.4.12: Representative types from Hemichordata
4. The pharynx is perforated by pharyngeal gill slits or clefts, which help in

respiration. In a majority of chordates, the pharyngeal gill slits are lost secondarily.
5. There is a dorsal tubular nerve cord just dorsal to the notochord. It is simple in
primitive chordates, while in higher chordates, it specializes as a brain at its
anterior end. The nervous system consists of three elements, central nervous
system or CNS (brain and the spinal cord), peripheral nervous system or PNS
(cranial and spinal nerves) and autonomic nervous system or ANS (sympathetic
and para-sympathetic nerves innervating the visceral organs).
6. Blood vascular system is of closed type. The heart is ventral in position. Barring
a few primitive chordates, the blood contains nucleated corpuscles and the red
blood corpuscles contain the red coloured respiratory pigment, haemoglobin.
7. Barring a few primitive chordates,the excretory organs are pro-, meso- or
metanephric kidneys.
8. Generally, the sexes are separate with defined sexual dimorphism.
9. Fertilization is external or internal.
10. A majority are oviparous, while some are viviparous.
11. There is a tail. A tail is a post-anal extension of the body and thus, the anus
comes to lie on the ventral side.
See Fig.4.13 for a generalized chordate plan.

Chordata is divided into three sub

phyla: Urochordata, Cephalochordata and
Craniata or Vertebrata The representatives
of Urochordata and Cephalochordata are
considered as primitive chordates and hence
are grouped together as Protochordata or
Acraniata. This classification is based on the
absence or presence of a cranium and a
vertebral column. Cranium and vertebral column are two elements of the endoskeleton of
vertebrates and both always go together i.e. wherever there is a cranium, there is a vertebral
column. Protochordates have notochord, but, the notochord does not transform into vertebral
column and therefore, are not supposed to have a cranium. This logic is enough to assign
the synonym, acraniata, to Protochordata.
Sub-phylum, Urochordata (Gr., uras, tail; chorda, string or cord) (Fig.4.14):
1. Body is sac-like, covered with a test of tunicin. Hence, the name of the group
is also mentioned as Tunicata in some texts.
2. There are two apertures : banchial and atrial. Branchial aperture opens into a
pharynx, while the atrial aperture leads from an atrial cavity or atrium.
3. The body has a peculiar symmetry i.e. the branchial aperture is considered as
the anterior end, while the opposite end is posterior. The atrial aperture is the
dorsal side, while its opposite side is ventral.
4. Notochord is absent in the adult. However, it is present in the larva and confined
to the tail region. Hence, the name of the group is Urochordata, which literally
means, tail notochord.
5. The nerve cord is also absent in the adult. The nervous system is represented
by only a dorsal ganglion and a few nerves originating from it. A full-fledged nerve
cord is present in the larva, which degenerates during metamorphosis.
6. The degeneration of both the notochord and nerve cord occurs during
metamorphosis, which has been termed as retrogressive metamorphosis.
7. The pharynx is perforated by many gill slits or clefts.
8. The interior of the pharynx is furnished with two special structures, endostyle
and dorsal lamina to facilitate ciliary or filter feeding.
9. Hermaphrodites. The male and female gonads are united into one structure.
10. Development is always indirect with a tadpole larva, known as ascidian tadpole
larva.
ANTERIOR DORSAL UROCHORDATA

branchial
aperture atrial CLASS I
aperture
---- > LARVACEA
e.g.; Oikopleuraand
test
CLASS II
—> ASCI DI ACEA
e.g.; Herd mania and
Ascidia
VENTRAL POSTERIOR CLASS III

---- > THALIACEA
foot
e.g.; Salpa and Doliolum
Herdmania
Fig. 4.14: Representative types from Urochordata
11. The larva possesses all the diagnostic chordate characters, out of which the
notochord and the nerve cord degenerate during retrogressive metamorphosis,
[e.g.; Herdmania (Sea squirt), Ascidia, Botryllus, Salpa, Doliuolum, and Oikopleura]
The sub-phylum is divided into three classes: Larvacea, Ascidiacea and Thaliacea.
Sub-phylum, Cephalochordata (Gr., kephale, head; chorda, string or cord) (Fig. 4.15):
1. Solitary, marine, burrowing in the sand or mud.
2. Body is fish-like with tapering ends.
3. Unpaired dorsal, ventral and caudal fins are present.
4. The notochord extends all along the length of the body i.e. up to the extreme
anterior end of the head, rostrum. Normally, the notochord does not extend into
the head in chordates. This is an exceptional character and this character gives
the name of the group as Cephalochordata.
5. The pharynx is perforated by gill slits or clefts.
6. The interior of the pharynx is furnished with two special structures, endostyle
and dorsal lamina to facilitate ciliary or filter feeding.
7. An ectoderm-lined atrial cavity is present, which opens to the exterior through

an atrial opening or atriopore.
8. The body is with segmented muscle or myotomes.
9. Respiration is branchial.
10. Blood-vascular system is of closed type with no heart, blood corpuscles and
blood pigment.
11. Excretion takes place by protonepridia.
12. Nervous system consists of an ill-developed brain at the anterior end which is
followed by a tubular nerve cord.
13. Sexes are separate and development is direct.
14. The group is represented by two genera, Branchiostoma (= Amphioxus) and

Asymmetron.
notochord dorsal fin rays dorsal fin
metapieurai atriopore
fold
Amphioxus
Fig.4.15: Amphioxus, a representative type from Cepholochordata
Sub-phylum, Vertebrata or Craniata (Gr., kranion, head)
All chordates barring protochordates are grouped together as Vertebrata or Craniata.

Vertebrates are characterized by the presence of the following :
1. An endoskeleton of cartilages and bones.
2. Endoskeleton is classed under: (i) axial and (ii) appendicular.
3. The axial endoskeleton is constituted by the skull (skeletal frame of the head),
vertebral column, sternum and ribs.
4. Both form the basis of the formation of the taxon, Vertebrata.
5. The vertebral column is a modification of the notochord.
6. The appendicular skeleton consists of limb bones and girdles (except fishes)
Vertebrata is divided into two super-classes : Agnatha and Gnathostomata.
Super-class, Agnatha (Gr., a, no; gnathos, jaw):
1. Fish-like marine animals.
2. Jaws are absent, hence, are known as jaw-less vertebrates.
3. Paired appendages (fins) are absent.

4. It is divided into two classes: Ostracodermi and Cyclostomata.
5. Ostracodermi includes extinct jaw-less vertebrates, while Cyclostomata represents

the living jaw-less vertebrates.
Class, Cyclostomata (Gr., cyclos, circular; stoma, mouth) (Fig.4.16):
1. Marine jaw-less vertebrates, which generally migrate to fresh water of rivers for
spawning.
2. The body is eel-like, devoid of scales.
3. Mouth is circular and remains open throughout life.
4. Paired fins are absent. However, median fins, such as dorsal, ventral and caudal
fins are present.
5. Paired naked gill openings (1-16 pairs) are present on the lateral side of the
body.
6. There is a single median nostril, hence, the name of the group is also Monorrhina.
7. Endoskeleton is cartilaginous.
8. The notochord is persistent.
9. The skull is cartilaginous and poorly developed. It is followed by a branchial

basket.
10. Sexes are separate. Gonads are singular and without gonoduct.
11. Development is direct or indirect through a characteristic larval stage,

ammocoetes.
[e.g.; Petromyzon marinus (Lamprey), Myxine glutinosa and Bdellostoma (Hag fishes)]
head trunk first dorsal fin second dorsal fin tail
Petromyzon
eye caudal fin
tentacles single external

mucous pores anus tail
gill opening
Myxine
Fig.4.16 : Representative types from Cyclostomata
Super-class, Gnathostomata (Gr., gnathos, jaw; stoma, mouth):

1. Mouth is guarded by upper and lower jaws.
2. Endoskeleton is made up of both cartilages and bones.
3. The notochord is transformed into a vertebral column that is constituted by several
vertebrae.
4. Paired appendages (fins or limbs) are present.
Differences between Agnatha and Gnathostomata
Agnatha Gnathostomata
1. Jaws are absent. 1. Defined jaws are present.
2. Mouth is circular in outline and can 2. Mouth can be closed by the jaws.
not be closed.
3. Paired appendages (paired fins) are 3. Paired appendages (paired fins or
absent. limbs) are present.
4. Cranium and vertebral column are not 4. Cranium and vertebral column are well
well developed. developed.
5. Single external nostril. 5. A pair of external nostrils.
6. Internal ear with two semicircular 6. Internal ear with three semicircular
canals. canals.
[e.g.; Animals belonging to the Class, (e.g.; Animals belonging to Classes,
Cyclostomata (Petromyzon and Pisces to Mammalia)
Myxine)]
Gnathostomata is divided into two series: Pisces and Tetrapoda.
Series, Pisces pisces, fishes) (Fig. 4.17):

1. Aquatic animals having streamlined body.
2. Body is covered by dermal scales. Scales are of several types : placoid, cycloid,
ctenoid and cosmoid.
3. Internal gills, open to outside through paired gill openings. The gill openings are
naked or covered by opercula (singular, operculum).
4. Respiration is branchial. However, in some forms (lung fishes) respiration is
pulmonary i.e. occurs by lungs in addition to being branchial.
5. Some air-brerathing fishes possess accessory respiratory organs for aerial
respiration.
6. Both median (unpaired) and paired fins are present.
7. Two pairs of paired fins, the pectoral and pelvic, characterize fishes.
8. The median fins include the dorsal, ventral and caudal fins.
9. The endoskeleton is cartilaginous or bony.
10. Lateral line system is well developed. This system functions as a rheoreceptor
i.e. it detects the direction of the water current by perceiving vibrations.
11. The heart is two chambered consisting of an atrium and a ventricle. It is venous
i.e. only deoxygenated blood circulates through it.
12. Single circulation.
13. Only the internal ear is present.
14. Kidney is mesonephros.
15. Sexes are separate. Development is indirect.
[e.g.; Scoliodon (Shark); Raja (Skate); Torpedo (Electric ray); Chimaera (Cat fish);
Neoceratodus, Protopterus and Lepidosiren (Lunf fishes); Latimeria chalumnae', Labeorohita
(Rohu); Catla catla (Bhakura); and Anabas testudineus (Climbing perch)]
The series, Pisces is divided into seven classes : Pterychthys, Coccostei, Acanthodii,
Elasmobranchii, Holocephali, Dipnoi and Teleostomi. The first three classes are extinct and
often classed together as Placodermi. The latter four classes are living. Elasmobranchii includes
all cartilaginous fishes. Holocephali is a small class and includes rat fish. It combines the
characters of both cartilaginous and bony fishes. Therefore, it is considered as a connecting
link between the two. The class Dipnoi includes lung or air-breathing fishes. There are only
three discontinuously distributed representatives of this class. Teleostomi is divided into two
sub-classes : Crossopterygii and Actinopterygii. The sub-class, Crossopterygii is very significant
from the fact that it includes fishes possessing lobed fins or archipterygeal fins. These fishes
are considered as the ancestors of the present-day land dwellers. All, except Latimeria
chalumnae, are extinct. This representative has survived millions of years without any significant
evolutionary change. Therefore, it is considered as a living fossil. In another classification, the
cartilaginous fishes and bony fishes are grouped together as Chondrichthyes and Osteichthyes,
respectively.
PISCES
1 T“
CLASS I CLASS III CLASS V v
PTERYCHTHYS ACANTHODII HOLOCEPHALI
CLASS VII
(Extinct) (Extinct) e.g.; Chimaera
TELEOSTOMI
(Cat fish)
v v
CLASS II CLASS IV CLASS VI
COCCOSTEI ELASMOBRANCHII DIPNOI
(Extinct) e.g.; Scoliodon (Shark), e.g.; Neoceratodus,
Raja (Skate), Torpedo Protopterus and
(Electric ray) Lepidosiren.
v
SUB-CLASS I SUB-CLASS II
CROSSOPTERYGII (Lobed fin fishes) ACTINOPTERYGII
e.g.; Latimeria chalumnae, Or TELEOSTOMI
Coelacanthus and Osteolepis (both e.g.; All present-day
extinct) bony fishes.
first dorsal fin

caudal second dorsal fin lateral line
snout
\external
caudal fin nostril
anal fin . gill clefts
median ventral fin Pelvlc flnpectoral fin (1 - 5) mouth
spiracle
Scoliodon electric
organ
nostril eye scales trunk dorsal fin tail
pectoral fin
pelvic fin
mouth caudal fin

pectoral fin pelvic fin first dorsal fin
second dorsal
Neoceratodus (Lung fish)
fin
caudal fin
Torpedo (Electric ray)
snout
(tubular)
nostril branchial
aperture
mouth
operculum pectoral fin
Dorsal fin dorsal fin
brood pouch
Mouth
prehensile tail
Caudal fin
Pectoral fin Operculum
Pelvic fin Hippocampus (sea horse)
sansory
Catlacatla (Rohu)
frontal eye dorsal fin lateral line
clasper
mouth caudal fin
operculum gill slit pectoral fin tail pelvic fin claspers
Fig. 4.17: Representative types from Pisces Chimaera (Rat fish)

Series, Tetrapoda (Gr., tetra, four; podos, foot):

1. Possess two pairs of appendages or limbs: a pair of fore limbs and a pair of
hind limbs.
2. The limbs are pentadactyl i.e. each possesses five digits or fingers. However,
in some tetrapods, limbs may bear less than five fingers. This is a secondary
reduction in the normal number.
Difference between Pisces and Tetrapoda :
Pisces Tetrapoda
1. Aquatic vertebrates. 1. Aquatic, terrestrial, arboreal or aerial
vertebrates.
2. Presence of paired fins (pectoral and 2. Presence of paired pentadactyl limbs
pelvic fins). (fore and hind limbs).
3. Respiration, generally, takes place by 3. Respiration, generally, takes place by
gills. lungs.
4. Generally oviparous. 4. Oviparous or ovoviviparous or
viviparous.
(e.g.; All fishes) (e.g.; Animals belonging to Classes,
Amphibia to Mammalia)
Tetrapoda is primarily divided into Anamniota and Amniota based on the absence or
presence of extra-embryonic membranes (amnion, chorion, yolk sac and allantois). Anamniota
includes the only class, Amphibia. Amniota includes three classes: Reptilia, Aves and
Mammalia.
Class, Amphibia (Gr., amphi, double or both; bios, life) (Fig. 4.18):
1. The skin is smooth and moist with mucous glands. It is naked without scales.
2. Body is divided into head, trunk and tail. There is no neck between the head and
the trunk.
3. Two pairs of pentadactyl limbs are present.
4. A pair of tympanum is present.
5. Respiration is of three types: cutaneous, bucco-pharyngeal and pulmonary.
6. Heart is three chambered with two auricles and a single ventricle.

7. The excretory organ is a pair of opisthonephric kidneys.
8. There is a cloaca, the converging chamber of the rectum and the urino-genital
ducts. The cloaca discharges out through a cloacal aperture.
9. There are ten pairs of cranial nerves.
10. Poikilothermal or cold blooded vertebrates.

11. All undergo aestivation during summer and hibernation during winter.
12. Skull is dicondylic i.e., with two occipital condyles.
13. Sexes are separate. Oviparous.
14. Eggs are without shell and laid in water.
15. Fertilization is external.
16. Development is indirect with aquatic tadpole larvae of anurans or axolotl or
the like larvae of urodeles. An aquatic larva undergoes a remarkable
metamorphosis into a terrestrial adult. Thus, amphibians spend a part of their
life cycle on land and the other in water.
17. Most amphibians exhibit the phenomenon of parental care.
18. Most urodeles exhibit the phenomenon of neoteny and paedogenesis. Neoteny
is a prolongation of the larval life and paedogenesis is the attainment of sexual
maturity during the larval life.
19. A few urodeles are permanently neotenic i.e. they fail to metamorphose and live
with larval features.
[e.g.; Ichthyophis (Blind worm), Bufo melanostictus (Common toad), Hoplobatrachus
tigerinus (=Rana tigerina) (Indian bull frog), Polypedates maculatus (Jumping frog), Ambystoma
tigrinum (Tiger salamander), Salamandra (Terrestrial salamander), Amphiuma (Congo eel),
Triton (European salamander), Necturus (Mud puppy)]
Amphibia is primarily divided into two sub-classes : Stegocephalia and Lissamphibia.
Stegocephalia includes all extinct amphibians belonging to three orders : Labyrinthodontia,
Phylospondyli and Lepospondyli. Lissamphibia includes living amphibians belonging to
three living orders : Gymnophiona or Apoda (limb-less amphibians), Anura or Salientia
(tail-less amphibians) and Urodela or Caudata (tailed amphibians).
AMPHIBIA
STEGOCEPHALIA LISSAMPHIBIA
(Extinct) (Living)
ORDER I ORDER III ORDER II

LABYRINTHODONTIA LEPOSPONDYLI ANURA or SALIENTIA
(Tail-less amphibians)
V V
e.g.; Fogs abd Toads
ORDER II ORDER I ORDER III
PHYLOSPONDYLI GYMNOPHIONA or APODA URODELA or CAUDATA
(Limb-less amphibians) (Tailed amphibians)
e.g.; Icthyophis (Blind worm) e.g.; Newts and Salamanders)
mouth
-nostril
nostril
external
gills
fore limb fore limb
Salamandra trunk
hind limb
caudal fin
nostril
eye Axolotle Larva
tympanum
adhesive
pads or discs
anus nostril
fore limb
Ichthyophis (Male)
eggs
Polypedates maculatus (Jumping frog)
nostril
nostril
Ichthyophis (Female)
fore limb
Ambystoma tigrinum nostril

snout mouth
nostril
mid dorsal line
mouth warts
ictitating tympanum
dorsal
membrane
eye parotoid gland surface
tympenum
fore limb
fingers
vent
thumb
Hoplobatrachus tigerinus (Indian bull frog)

Bufo melanostictus (Toad)
Fig.4.18 : Representative types from Amphibia

Class, Reptilia (L., repere; reptum; reptiles, to creep or to crawl) [Fig. 4.19 (a) and (b)J :
1. The skin is covered by epidermal scales, scutes or shields. Body is rough and
dry due to the absence of epidermal glands.
2. Body is divided into head, neck, trunk and tail.
3. All, except snakes and a few lizards, have pentadactyl limbs.
4. The tympanum is depressed and hence, not visible.
5. Skull is monocondylic with a single occipital condyle.
6. Besides the orbits (cavities for the eye balls), the skull bears one or two pairs
of fossae or vacuities in the temporal region known as temporal fossae. This
character forms the basis of classification of Reptilia into four sub-classes.
7. Ribs form a true sternum.
8. Respiration is pulmonary.
9. Heart is three chambered with two auricles and a single ventricle. However, in
crocodiles, the heart is four chambered with two auricles and two ventricles.
Double circulation.
10. Cold blooded animals.
11. Kidneys are metanephric.
12. Twelve pairs of cranial nerves.
13. Extra-embryonic membranes are present.
14. Typical cloaca and cloacal aperture are present.
15. Sexes are separate with distinct sexual dimorphism. The males have copulatory
organs called hemipenis.
16. Fertilization is internal and shelled cledoic eggs are laid on land.
[e.g.; Lepidochelys olivacea (Olive Ridley turtle), Chelonia mydas (Green sea turtle),
Hemidactylus flaviviridis (Wall lizard), Calotes versicolor (Garden lizard), Chamaeleon vulgaris
(Camouflaging lizard), Varanus (Monitor lizard), Heloderma (Only poisonous lizard), Hydrophis
(Sea snake), Naja naja (Bicoelate cobra), Naja kaouthia (Monocoelate cobra), Ophiophagus
hannah (King cobra), Vipera russelli (Russell’s viper), Echis carinatus (Saw-scaled viper),
Bungarus coeruleus (Common krait), Bungarus fasciatus (Banded krait), Ancistrodon
himalayanus (Himalayan pit viper), Gavialis gangeticus (Gharial), Crocodilus palustris (Mugger),
Crocodilus porosus (Marsh crocodile), Sphenodon (Tuatara)]. Sphenodon from Newzealand
is considered as a living fossil.
Reptilia is divided into four sub-classes : Anapsida, Synapsida, Euryapsida and

Diapsida based on the absence or presence of temporal fossae and if present, the number
of temporal fossae. An outline classification with examples is presented in the next page.
REPTILIA
1 1
SUB-CLASS I SUB-CLASS II SUB-CLASS III SUB-CLASS IV
ANAPSIDA SYNAPSIDA EURYAPSIDA DIAPSIDA
(All are extinct) (All are extinct)
l
ORDER
CHELONIA
(e.g.; Turtles and
Tortoises)
F“ F“
ORDER ORDER ORDER
SQUAMATA CROCODILIA RHYNCOCEPHALIA
(e.g.; Crocodiles) (e.g.;Sphenodon)
r-
SUB-ORDER
“3
SUB-ORDER
LACERTILIA OPHIDIA
(e.g.; Lizards) (e.g.; Snakes)
protrusible tongue
lllk
. ■ ; dorsal crest
Crocodilus palustris
(Marsh crocodile or Mugger)
Chamaeleon
Fig.4.19 (b): Representative types from Reptilia (Chamouflaging lizard)
Class, Aves (L., avis, bird) (Fig.4.20):

1. Body is divided into head, neck, trunk and tail.
2. Entire body is covered by feathers. Legs are covered by horny scales.
3. Jaws are modified as a horny beak. No teeth are present.
4. Fore limbs are modified as wings, covered by feathers. Digits are absent in the
fore limbs.
5. Each hind limb bears four digits, which help in walking, swimming and perching.
6. Bones are pneumatic i.e. they bear air cavities.
7. One occipital condyle in the skull.
8. Vertebrae are heterocoelous.
9. Sternum is broad having a boat shaped keel for attachment of muscle.
10. Heart is four chambered with two auricles and two ventricles.
11. The right systemic arch persists.
12. Respiration is pulmonary. The efficiency of respiration increases by the presence
of air sacs.
13. Air-filled air sacs increase buoyancy.
14. A voice box, syrinx is present.
15. Kidneys are metanephric.
16. A pecten is present in each eye. It helps in distinct vision.
17. Sexes are separate with distinct sexual dimorphism.
18. Fertilization is internal and development is external.
19. Oviparous i.e., lay shelled eggs.
20. Extra embryonic membranes appear during development.
[e.g.; Struthio camelus (Ostrich), Rhea americana (South American ostrich), Apteryx
(Kiwi), Pavo cristatus (Peacock), Psittacula (Parrot), Passer domesticus (House sparrow),
Corvus splendens (Common crow)]
Aves is divided into two sub-classes: Archaeornithes (extinct birds) and Neornithes
(both extinct and living birds). Neornithes is sub-divided into three super-orders:
Odontognathae (extinct), Palaeognathae (flightless birds) and Neognathae (Flying birds).
In old terminology, flightless and flying birds are grouped as Ratitae and Carinatae,
respectively.
AVES
f I
ARCHAEORNITHES NEORNITHES
(All extinct)
(e.g.; Archaeopteryx)
SUPER-ORDER I SUPER-ORDER II SUPER-ORDER I

ODONTOGNATHAE PALAEOGNATHAE NEOGNATHAE
(All extinct) (Flightless birds) (Flying birds)
cere
beak
throat
black
abdomen
clawed toes
tail feathers hind toe
Pigeon
head
neck beak
back
breast
wing feathers abdomen
tail feathers
clawed toes
Crow
Fig. 4.20 : Representative types from Aves

Archaeopteryx:
Archaeopteryx is a fossil bird, dug out from the upper Jurassic sediments of Bavaria,
Germany. The fossil is complete in the sense that the impressions of feathers are preserved
in it. The fossil is characterized to have possessed both reptilian and avian characters.
Some distinguishing reptilian characters are the presence of teeth in the beak and presence
of clawed digits in the wings. A few distinguishing avian characters are bipedal locomotion,
the presence of feathers, modification of the fore limbs into wings and presence of a
beak. It, thus, represents a transition between reptiles and birds. The discovery of
Archaeopteryx throws some light on the origin of birds from bipedal arboreal ancestors.
Class, Mammalia (L., mamma, breast) (Fig. 4.21):

1. The body is divided into head, neck, trunk and tail.
2. The trunk is divided into thorax and abdomen.
3. Two pairs of pentadactyl limbs are present. The digits end in nails, claws or
hooves.
4. The skin is hairy bearing sebaceous (sebum, an oily secretion) and sweat
(sudorific) glands. Hairs are secondarily lost in the order Cetacea (whales).
5. The mammary glands are present in both males and females. These are modified
sebaceous glands. In females, these are more developed than in males and
secrete milk following the birth of young ones.
6. External ear or pinna is present.
7. A diaphragm, a dome-shaped smooth muscular sheet or partition is present
between the thoracic and abdominal cavities.
8. The teeth are heterodont, thecodont and diphyodont.
9. Urinary and anal apertures are separated.
10. Heart is four chambered with double circulation.
11. The left systemic arch only persists.
12. RBCs are non-nucleated except camel and llama.
13. Kidneys are metanephric. Urinary bladder is present.
14. Brain is well developed with a convoluted cerebrum.
15. Four optic lobes, known as corpora quadrigemina are present.
16. Two cerebral hemispheres are connected by corpus callosum.
17. There are 12 pairs of cranial nerves.
18. Sexes are separate with a distinct sexual dimorphism.
19. The testes are lodged in a scrotal sac i.e. extra-abdominal. However, in a few
(whale, dolphin and elephant), it is abdominal.
20. Seminiferous tubules possess somatic cells called Sertoli cells, which nourish the
differentiating male germ cells.
21. The ovary possesses ovarian follicles in different stages of development. The
mature ovarian follicle is known as Graafian follicle.
22. Following ovulation, the graafian follicle turns into a corpuls luteum, an endocrine
structure secreting progesterone.
23. Fertilization is internal. All are viviparous except monotremes (Duck-billed
Platypus).
24. The developing young is nourished by a tissue connection between the mother
and the developing embryo. This structure is known as placenta.
[e.g.; Ornythorhynchus (Duck-billed Platypus), Tachyglossus (=Echidna) (Spiny ant

eater), Macropus (Kangroo), Didelphis (Opossum), Pteropus (Bat or Flying fox), Lemur,
Chimpanzee, Gorilla, Orang-utan, Gibbon, Homo sapiens (Human), Manis (Pangolin), Hystrix
(Porcupine), Dolphin, Sperm whale, Blue whale, Panthera leo persica (Asiatic lion), Panthera
tigris (Royal Bengal tiger), Panthera pardus (Leopard), Seal, Walrus, Elephas maximus
(Asiatic elephant), Equus domesticus (Horse), Axis axis (Spotted deer), Bos domesticus
(Cow)]
Mammalia is primarily divided into two sub-classes : Prototheria and Theria. Prototheria
includes primitive egg laying mammals, distributed in Australia, Tasmania and New Guinea.
It has only one order, Monotremata. The sub-class, Theria is sub-divided into two infra
classes : Metatheria and Eutheria. Metatheria includes ovoviviparous mammals possessing
marsupium for the nourishment of the young ones. This infra-class has also one order,
Marsupialia. Infra-class, Theria includes all modern mammals with typical mammalian
characters.
SUB-CLASS SUB-CLASS II
PROTOTHERIA THERIA
I
ORDER
I
MONOTREMATA
e.g.; Platypus and
Spiny ant eater V INFRA-CLASS II
INFRA-CLASS I EUTHERIA
METATHERIA e.g.; For examples see at the end
of general characters
I
ORDER
MARSUPIALIA
e.g.; Opossum, Kangaroo and
Bandicoot
head t vibrissae eyehead pjnna

,J tympanum
neck tail
flattened beak
nostril 'v-. < ' stripes
nostril
fore limb
web clawed digits
Platypus fore limbf
external ear scales trunk abdomen
nostril
clawed digits
Squirrel
clawed digits
Pangolin
mouth
Kangaroo
snout
Bat
Whale
Fig. 4.21 : Representative types from Mammalia

SAMPLE QUESTIONS
GROUP - A
1. Choose the correct answer :
(i) Spicules are present in the animals of the phylum.
(a) Porifera (b) Annelida
(c) Coelenterata (d) Platyhelminthes
(ii) What is common to fishes, amphibians and reptiles ?
(a) Scales (b) Shelled egg
(c) eggs (d) gills
(iii) Dolphin belongs to
(a) Amphibia (b) Mammalia
(c) Pisces (d) Reptilia
(iv) Sea horse belongs to
(a) Amphibia (b) Aves
(c) Pisces (d) Mammal
(v) Hair is absent in the mammalian order
(a) Cetacea (b) Chiroptera
(c) Primates (d) Rodentia
(vi) Asexual reproduction through gemmule formation takes place in
(a) Arthropoda (b) Coelenterata
(c) Porifera (d) Platyhelminthes
(vii) Which one of the following is a freshwater sponge ?
(a) Euplactella (b) Hyalonema
(c) Spongilla (d) Sycon
(viii) One of the following is not radially symmetrical.
(a) Hydra (b) Sea cucumber
(c) Snail (d) Starfish
(ix) Which one of the following is bilaterally symmetrical ?
(a) Jelly fish (b) Nematode
(c) Starfish (d) Sea Urchin
(x) Which of the following sets belong to class Cyclostomata ?
(a) Amphioxus & Herdmania (c) Petromyzon & Amphioxus
(b) Amphioxus & Balanoglossus (d) Petromyzon & Myxine
(xi) Annelides are :
(a) Triploblastic (c) Radially symmetrical
(b) Pseudocoelomate (d) Unsegmented
(xii) Warts are present in

(a) Amphibia (b) Mammalia
(c) Pisces (d) Reptilia
(xiii) What type of worms are the platyhelminths ?
(a) Blind worm (b) Flat worm
(c) Round worm (d) Thread worm
(xiv) In which of the following animals, a canal system is present ?
(a) Hydra (b) Starfish
(c) Sponge (d) Earthworm
(xv) The most highly advanced character in crocodile is :
(a) Four chambered heart (b) Powerful jaws
(c) Shelled eggs (d) Thecodont dentition.
(xvi) In which animal group, syrinx is present ?
(a) Aves (b) Pisces
(c) Amphibia (d) Reptilia
(xvii) Planaria, Taenia and Fasciola are
(a) Segmented (b) Coelomates
(c) Flat-worms (d) Radially symmetrical,
(xviii) Which of the following groups has largest number of species ?
(a) Aves (b) Protozoa
(c) Insecta (d) Mammalia
(xix) Find out the diploblastic animal
(a) Obelia (b) Earthworm
(c) Nereis (d) Liverfluke
(xx) In which phylum nematocysts are present ?
(a) Arthropoda (b) Annelida
(c) Mollusca (d) Coelenterata
(xxi) What type of larva is seen in Coelenterata ?
(a) Planula (b) Trochophore
(c) Tadpole (d) Redia.
(xxii) Which of the following animal group belongs to Acoelomata ?
(a) Annelida (b) Arthropoda
(c) Echinodermata (d) Platyhelminthes.
(xxiii) Which one is a pseudocoelomate ?
(a) Ascaris (b) Cockroach
(c) Starfish (d) Hydra
(xxiv) Which one is the intermediate host of Fasciola hepatica ?
(a) Cow (b) Man
(c) Pig (d) Snail
(xxv) Sexual dimorphism is seen in which phylum ?

(a) Coelenterata (b) Nemathelminthes
(c) Platyhelminthes (d) Porifera
(xxvi) In which animal the systemic aorta is seen only on the right side ?
(a) Frog (b) Crocodile
(c) Pigeon (d) Man
(xxvii) In which animal systemic aorta is present only on the left side ?
(a) Frog (b) Crocodile
(c) Pigeon (d) Man
(xxviii) Viviparity is not seen in which animal ?
(a) Bat (b) Platypus
(c) Monkey (d) Whale
(xxix) In which of the following phyla, compound eyes are present ?
(c) Echinodermata (d) mollusca
(xxx) Pentamerous radial symmetry is seen in which phylum ?
(a) Arthopoda (b) Annelida
(c) Mollusca (d) Echinodermata
(xxxi) Which one is not an acraniata (acrania) ?
(a) Herdmania (b) Balanoglossus
(c) Amphioxus (d) Petromyzon
(xxxii) What type of scale is present in cartilaginous fishes ?
(a) Cycloid (b) Ctenoid
(c) Placoid (d) Ganoid
(xxxiii) Which class of animals is not marine !?
(a) Amphibia (b) Fishes
(c) Mammalia (d) Reptilia
(xxxiv) Class Aves includes animals with
(a) Scales (b) Feathers
(c) Hair (d) Smooth skin
(xxxv) Lizards are included in which class ?
(a) Pisces (b) Amphibia
(c) Reptilia (d) Mammalia
(xxxvi) Which one is a homoiothermic animal ?
(a) Shark (b) Lung fish
(c) Cat fish (d) Dolphin
(xxxvii) Which one is a poikilothermic animal ?
(a) Crocodile (b) Seal
(c) Pigeon (d) Whale
(xxxviii) Whales are included in the same class as that of

(a) Alligator (b) Dog fish
(c) Monkeys (d) Sea horse
(xxxix) Body temperature is regulated at a constant in
(a) Cow (b) Earthworm
(c) Frog (d) Snake
(xl) A distinguishing character of chordates is :
(a) Feather (b) Hairy skin
(c) Notochord (d) Stomochord
(xli) The chief distinguishing feature of a mammal is
(a) Pinna and teeth (b) Hairy skin andoviparity
(c) Hairy skin andmammary gland (d) Mammary gland and teeth
(xlii) Which of the following is not an insect ?
(a) Earwig (b) Head louse
(c) Spider (d) Silver fish
Prawns, shrimps and lobsters belong to which class of the Arthropoda ?
(a) Arachnida (b) Crustacea
(c) Insecta (d) Myriapoda
(xliv) The animals of which phylum are aerial, aquatic and terrestrial.
(c) Echinodermata (d) Mollusca
(xlv) The most important character of a mammal is
(a) A four chamber heart (b) Presence of corpus callosum
(c) Pressence of metanephric kidney (d) Presence of thecodont teeth.
(xlvi) Find out the odd member in the group.
(a) Crocodile (b) Dolphin
(c) Lizard (d) Turtle
(xlvii) Echinoderms are exclusively
(a) Esturiarine (b) Marine
(c) Pond living (d) Riverine
(xlviii) Which one is a true terrestrial animal ?
(a) Frog (b) Salamander
(c) Tortoise (d) Toad
(xlix) The genus of midwife toad is
(a) Alytes (b) Rhacophorus
(c) Hyla (d) Pipa
(I) A rabbit shows resemblance with a frog in :
(a) Nucleated RBC (b) Dorsal tubular nerve cord
(c) Oval RBC (d) Renal Portal system.
2. Answer each of the following in one word or more words, wherever necessary :
(i) Give an example of a diploblastic animal.
(ii) What is the term used for summer sleep ?
(iii) What is the term used for winter sleep ?
(iv) What is the alternative name for cold bloodedanimals ?
(v) What is the alternative name for warm blooded animals ?
(vi) In which invertebrate phylum carapace is present ?
(vii) In which phylum medusa is present ?
(viii) In which nonchordate phylum flame cells are present ?
(ix) In which phylum manntle is present ?
(x) What are the excretory organs of annelids known as ?
(xi) What is the free floating form of coelenterates known as ?
(xii) What is the name of stinging cell of coelenterates ?
(xiii) What is the symmetry of Pila ?
(xiv) Which animals communicate by pheromones ?
(xv) Name an egg-laying mammal.
(xvi) Which jawless chordates suck blood from the fishes ?
(xvii) Which phylum do sponges belong to ?
(xviii) Which phylum does the jelly fish belong to ?
(xix) Which one is the largest phylum (in terms of number of species) of the animal
kingdom ?
(xx) The animals of which phylum are exclusively marine ?
(xxi) Which class does the blue whale belong to ?
(xxii) Which class the sea horse belongs to ?
(xxiii) Dinosaurs belong to which class ?
(xxiv) Newts and salamanders belong to which class of animals ?
(xxv) Which class does the Platypus belong to ?
(xxvi) Bats belong to which class ?
(xxvii) Which phylum do the corals belong to ?
(xxviii) Name the phylum and class of pigeon.
(xxiv) Crocodiles belong to which class ?
(xxv) To which phylum the scorpions belong ?
(xxvi) Name the phylum and class of Octopus.
(xxvii) Ascaris belongs to which phylum ?
3. Match the words of column I with those of column II.

(a) I. II.
A. Hydra i. Round worm
B. Millipede ii. Arthropoda
C. Ascaris iii. Crustacea
D. Sea urchin iv. Segmented worm
E. Leech V. Cnidaria
vi. Echinodermata
(b) A. Limbless reptile i. Lamprey
B. Jawless vertebrate ii. Salamander
C. Amphibian iii. Snake
D. Cartilaginous fish iv. Shark
E. Flightless bird V. Ostrich
(c) A. Coral i. Placoid scale

B. Echidna ii. Monotremata
C. Crab iii. Mollusca
D. Octopus iv. Coelenterata
E. Sexual dimorphism V. Amphibia
F. Cartilaginous fish vi. Nematoda
vii. Radial symmetry
viii. Crustacea
GROUP - B
1. Answer each within 50 words
(i) What do you mean by cellular grade of organization ?
(ii) What is metamerism ?
(iii) What is an archaeocyte ? What is its function ?
(iv) Why is the name of the phylum to which Hydra belongs, is Caelenterata ?
(v) Explain the meaning of Parazoa.
(vi) Which germ layer is the coelom derived from ? How many types of coelom are
there ?
(vii) In which phylum, neoblasts are present ? What is their function ?
(viii) Explain about sexual dimorphism in Ascaris.
(ix) Ennumerate three important characters of the phylum, Arthropoda.
(x) Explain about enterocoelic coelom.
(xi) Despite being radially symmetrical, echinoderms are included in the division,
Bilaria- Give reasons.
(xii) Describe about amphibious breathing habit in Pila ?

(xiii) Ennumerate three important chordate characters.
(xiv) What is retrogressive metamorphosis ?
(xv) Name two structures in the pharynx of Amphioxus, which fulfil the filter feeding
mechanism.
(xvi) Distinguish Agnatha from Gnathostomata in two important features,
(xvii) Explain the meaning of Cyclostomata.
(xviii) What is a paired fin ? How many paired fins are present in a fish ? Name them.
(xix) What is a living fossil ? Name one living fossil among fishes.
(xx) Rat fish connects cartilaginous fishes and bony fishes. Explain.
(xxi) What is the function of lateral line system ?
(xxii) What is the basis of division of Tetrapoda into Anamniota and Amniota ?
(xxiii) Explain the meaning of Tetrapoda.
(xxiv) Frogs and toads belong to the class, Amphibia- Give one reason.
(xxv) Explain neoteny and paedogenesis.
(xxvi) What is a pentadactyl limb ?
(xxvii) What is the basis of division of the class, Reptilia into four sub-classes ?
(xxviii) Give the scientific names of three crocodiles found in Orissa,
(xxix) Ennumerate three identifying features of common cobra.
(xxx) Give the scientif names of two types of Kraits.
(xxxi) What is Archaeopteryx ? Enlist four of its important characters,
(xxxii) Give the common names of two flightless birds.
(xxxiii) Name two egg laying mammals.
(xxxiv) Kangroo is known as a marsupiale mammal- Why ?
(xxxv) Name two mammals possessing nucleated erythrocytes.
(xxxvi) What do you understand by oviparous and viviparous ?
(xxxvii) What is the type of body plan in Hydra ?
(xxxviii) What is the type of body plan in sponges ?
(xxxix) What is the type of body plan in flat-worms ?
(xl) What is the type of body plan in nematodes ?
(xli) What is the type of body plan in earthworm ?
2. Differentiate between two words in the following pairs of words :

(i) Diploblastic and Triploblastic
(ii) Homoiothermic and Poikilothermic
(iii) Urochordata & Cephalochordata
(iv) Amphibia & Reptilia
(v) Agnatha & Gnathostomata
(vi) Plathyelminthes & Nemathelminthes
(vii) Chondrichthyes & Osteichthyes.

(viii) Acraniata & Craniata
(ix) Chordata & Non-chordata
(x) Annelida & Arthropoda
(xi) Gemmule & Spicule
(xii) Radial & Bilateral symmetry
(xiii) Lizard & Snake
(xiv) Protostomia & Deuterostomia
(xv) Protostomia & Deuterostomia
(xvi) Eucoelomata & Pseudocoelomata
(xvii) Enterocoelic & Shcizocoelic coelom,
(xviii) Cartilagineous fish & Bony fish
(xix) Round worm & Flat worm.
(xx) Oviparity & Viviparity
(xxi) Marsupiale & Placentale.
UNIT-II: STRUCTURAL ORGANIZATION IN PLANTS AND ANIMALS
PLANT MORPHOLOGY AND CHAPTER
ANATOMY 5
I. MORPHOLOGY
Angiosperms (Gr. Angeion : case; spermos: seeds) are a group of plants characterized
by production of flowers and formation of seed(s) within a fruit. The plant body shows a great
range in size and diversity in form. This led to the morphological and physiological differentiation
between various parts of plant body and the plant organ concept. The plant body is the sporophyte
which is made up of several fundamental parts or organs (Fig.5.1). The morphologists divide
Fig.5.1 : Parts of an Angiospermic plant (Brassica caompestris)

the plant body into three basic organs - the root, stem and leaf. The main axis of the plant body
consists of a root, normally developing under the ground, and a stem normally growing up. The
root bears a number of lateral structures similar to it and forms the root system. The stem holds
lateral appendages in the form of leaf and branch. The stem along with leaves and branches is
called the shoot and forms the shoot system. The root system and the shoot system together
constitute the vegetative body of the angiospermic pant. As the plant grows and reaches maturity,
it forms flowers, fruits and seeds. These three constitute the reproductive system of the plant
as the flower forms the fruit and seed after fertilization. The seed when germinates, gives rise
to new plant and serves the function of multiplication of the plant.
Radicle TaProot
5.1. THE ROOT: system
The root is the underground or descending

portion of the axis of the plant. The radicle of the
embryo gives rise to the root. It is nongreen and
devoid of nodes and internodes. Anatomically
branch root arises from an inner layer, i.e., pericycle.
So it is endogenous in origin. The root is positively
geotropic, negatively phototropic and positively
hydrotropic. The root developed from the radicle is
called primary root. If primary root persists and
gives rise to root system, it is called the tap root
system. The lateral branches, those coming out
from the primary root are known as secondary
roots. The branch roots coming out from the
secondary root are known as tertiary roots. The Fig.5.2 : Development of TAP-ROOT SYSTEM
in dicots: (A) Germinating Dicot seeds with
tap root branches in an acropetalous manner. Mainly growing radicle; (B) Taproot system developed
out of a radicle.
tap roots are formed in dicotyledonous plants
(Fig.5.2).
Most of the monocotyledonous plants show a differnt type of root system. In this case, although
the radicle comes out first during germination as in dicotyledons and gives rise to primary root,
this does not persist. A number of roots are developed from the base of such radicle (Fig.5.3),
e.g., Rice. Such roots behave like primary roots and are known as seminal roots. Along with
these, a tuft of fibre-like roots come out from the base of the plumule or lowermost node to form
a distinct root system, known as fibrous root system.
Plant Morphology and Anatomy I 109
ADVENTITIOUS
A root can be differentiated into four organographic FIBROUS ROOT
regions root-cap region, region of elongation, root hair ESOCOTYL

, SEMINAL
ROOT
II
region and region of maturation (Fig.5.4).
Characteristics of the root: RADICLE X
1. Root is the descending portion of the axis of the embryo

and grows away from light, and positively geotrophic. I:-
It is nongreen in colour. Exceptional cases are seen in

the aerial roots of Tinospora, in which the root is green
when exposed to light for a prolonged period. In some
epiphytic orchids and submerged roots (e.g., Trapa). II f
the roots are green in colour. A B
2. It generally does not bear buds, however, the roots of Fig.5.3 : Development of the
ADVENTITIOUS FIBROUS ROOT
Aegie, Trichosanthes bear buds for vegetative SYSTEM in monocots. (A) Rice
propagation. seedling showing radicle roots,
seminal roots, adventitous fibrous
3. At the terminal portion of the root there is a root-cap to roots on mesocotyl. (B) Ric plant with
extensive fibrous root system.
provide a protective sheath to the tender root meristem.
In Pandanus, the root-cap is distinct and multiple in
nature. In aquatic plants root pockets are present.
4. The root bears unicellualr hairs, a little behind the apex
(Fig.5.5a-d). These are having thin walls made of
cellulose and are short-lived. When older root haris
perish, newer ones are formed towards the apex.
5. Nodes and internodes are absent in the roots.
6. Lateral roots are developed from an inner layer, i.e.
pericycle. So, these are endogenous in origin.
FUNCTIONS OF THE ROOT :

1. The tap root system bearing secondary, tertiary and
other lateral roots ramify more and more in the soil and
anchors the plant very firmly.
2. Root hairs absorb water and mineral salts from the soil and send it to the upper part of the
plant.
5.1.2. KINDS OF ROOTS :

A. Tap root system :
A root system which develops from the radicle of the embryo is called tap root system. It
serves the normal functions such as anchorage and absorption.
B. Adventitious root sysem :
The root developing from any

portion of the plant other than the
radicle of the embryo is known as
adventitious root. It may develop from
the base of the stem or from any node
or internode of the branch, or even
from the leaf. They serve the normal
functions such as anchorage,
absorption and conduction of solutes
and water. Adventitious roots carrying
on normal functions are of the
following types.
(i) Fibrous roots : (Fig.5.6)

Cluster of fibre like roots developed
from the base of the plumule or from
its lower nodes are known as fibrous
roots. Such type of roots are seen in
rice, maize, etc.
(ii) Foliar roots : (Fig.5.7) These

roots develop directly from the leaf, from the petiole, or the vein. Ex. Petiole of rubber plant and
leaf margin of Bryophyllum (Fig.5.10).
(iii) Adventitious roots : (Fig.5.8) These roots develop from the nodes and sometimes from
the internodes of the stem, e.g,. Oxalis (Fig.5.9). Stem cuttings of rose, sugarcane, china rose,
marigold, etc., give rise to such type of roots.
5.1.3. MODFICATION OF ROOTS :
Roots may be modified to different shapes in order to perform special functions besides
there normal functions. Root modification is found both in tap root and adventitious root.
A. Tap root modification :
Tap root system is modified into different forms to carry out special functions such as
storage of food. Such a root is known as modified tap root. It is differentiated into following
types:
(i) Fusiform
(Fig.5.11) It is a modified
tap root. The primary root
is swollen in the middle
while both the ends
gradually taper forming a
spindle shaped structure,
e.g., Radish (Raphanus Fig.5.10 : Foliar buds
Fig.5.9 : Runner of wood-sorrel (Oxalis)
and adventitious
sativus). roots of sprout leaf plant
(Bryophyllum)
(ii) Napiform
(Fig.5.12) The hypocotyl region is considerably
swollen, becoming almost spherical and then
abruptly tapering towards the lower end, e.g.,
Turnip (Brassica campestris var. rapa) and beet
(Beta vulgaris).
(iii) Conical : (Fig.5.13) The roots swell,

FLESHY
become broad at the base and gradually taper TAP ROOT
towards apex forming a cone like structure, e.g., Fig.5.11 :
Fig.5.12 :
FLESHY
FLESHY TAP
Carrot (Daucus carota). TAP ROOTS
ROOTS
Napiform in turnip
Fusiform
(iv) Tuberous or tubercular: (Fig. 5.15) In in radish.
(A) Whole radish;
this case, the root is thick and fleshy but does A (B) Top part cut
off longitudinally
not form any definite shape, e.g., Mirabilis jalapa
(Fig.5.14).
(v) Pneumatophore: (Fig.5.15) These roots

Fig.5.13 :
grow vertically up and come out of the water or FLESHY TAP
ROOTS
marshy soil, like conical spikes. They occur in Conical in
large numbers around the tree trunk. Such roots carrot
(A) Whole carrot;
are provided with numerous pores (breathing (B) The top part
cut off
pores) through which air is taken for respiration, longitudinally
showing
e.g., Rhizophora. parctically no
B. Adventitious root modification :
Roots produced from any portion of the plant other than the radicle of embryo are called
adventitious roots. It may be changed to different forms for special functions such as storage,
mechanical support and vital functions.
(a) For storage of food :
(i) Tuberous root: In this case, adventitious roots grow from the nodes of the running
stem. These roots swell and get modified to irrregular forms, known as tuber. These
are produced singly, e.g., Sweet patato (Ipomoea batatas) (Fig. 5.16).
(ii) Fasciculated root:
In Dahlia, Asparagus the tuberous roots are developed from base of the stem in
clusters (Fig.5.17).
(iii) Nodulose root:
The underground stem produces adventious roots. Some of the slender roots become
suddenly swollen near the apex and formal nodule-like structures, e.g., Mango-ginger
(Curcuma amada) (Fig.5.18).
(iv) Moniliform or Beaded root:
Swellings are found in the root at frequent intervals. It gives rise to a beaded or
moniliform appearance, e.g., Basella, Momordica, Vitis trifolia, Dioscorea alata and
many grasses (Fig.5.19).
(v) Annulated roots :
In this type, the root has a series of ring-like swellings appearing as if formed by
number of discs placed one above another, e.g., Cephalis ipecacuanha (Fig.5.20).
(b) For mechanical support:
(i) Prop roots : The plant has a tap root system. The horizontal branches of the stem
give rise to aerial roots that hang vertically downwards. On reaching the ground,
these grow and act like pillars providing mechanical support to the plant, e.g., Ficus
benghalensis (Fig.5.21).
(ii) Stilt roots : The plants like Screwpine have their own root system, but the anchorage
is not very strong. Therefore, it develops adventitious roots from near the base of the
stem which grow obliquely downwards, act like stilt and provide mechanical support
(e.g. Pandanus) (Fig.5.22). The maize plant (Fig.5.23) also produces adventitious
roots from the lower nodes which also act in a similar way.
(iii) Climbing roots :
These are found in some climbers. Aerial roots are developed from the nodes. These
roots twine around and clasp the support and help in climbing, e.g., Betel (Piper
betel), Piper nigrum and Pothos, etc. (Fig.5.24).
pneumato-
mangrove
Fig.5.15: plant
Pneumatophores:
(A) Plants showing pneumatophore
pneumatophores;
(B) Part of
pneumatophores
showing breathing
pores norma
-------------- 1---------
Fig.5.19.
Fig.5.19.
Moniliform
roots of
Momordica
Fig.5.28:
Assimilatory
root of
Tinospora
Fig.5.29 : Floating roots of
Jussiaea repens
(iv) Clinging roots :
These roots are seen in orchids, which are developed from the stem base and enter
the crevices of the support to fix the epiphyte (Fig.5.25). It provides mechanical support
to the plant.
(v) Root buttersses : Large trees have great plank-like roots that radiate from the base
of the stem. These consist of partly root and partly stem, e.g., Bombax (Fig.5.26).
(c) For vital functions :

(i) Sucking roots or haustoria :
Cuscuta, a leafless, nongreen and parasitic plant, always grows in association with
other plants. At the point of attachment with the host plant it produces some knob like
roots known as haustoria which penetrate into the host plant and draw nourishment
(Fig.5.27).
(ii) Epiphytic roots :
Orchids are the plants which grow perched on branches of trees. They firmly attach
themselves to the trunk of suitable trees by special roots known as climbing roots.
The epiphytes also have aerial absorbing roots. They remain fleshy and grow along
with the clinging roots. They have a spongy velamen tissue which absorbs atmospheric
moisture. They also have chlorophyll and perform photosynthesis (Fig. 5.25).
(iii) Floating roots :
These roots are found in aquatic plants like Jussiaea (Fig.5.29). These are adventitious
roots developing at the nodes of the floating branches. The roots are spongy and
colourless. They remain above the water level. Being soft and spongy they store air
which help the plant in floating. They also facilitate respiration.
(iv) Assimilatory roots :
Normally roots are non-green in colour. But the adventitious roots developed from the
branches of Tinospora cordifolia being green in colour carry out photosynthesis and
are called assimilatory roots. These roots are slender, long and in hanging state (Fig.
5.29).
5.2. THE STEM :
The stem is the ascending portion of the plant body developing from the plumule of the
embryo during germination. The stem with the lateral appendages constitute the shoot system.
The skeleton of the shoot is formed by the stem. It is the aerial part of the plant, positively
phototropic, negetively geotropic and growing vertically up, while its branches grow horizontally.
The young normal stem is generally green. The stem bears leaves and flowers.
FUNCTIONS OF THE STEM :
1. Conduction : The water and mineral salts which are

absorbed by the root are conducted to the leaf by the
stem. Similarly, it conducts prepared food matrial from
the leaf to the growing regions and storage organs of
the plant body.
2. Support: It provides requisite support to the plant. It

supports the spread out branches and leaves.
3. Food manufacture : The green colouration of young

stem is due to presence of cholorophyll which
manufacture food material for the plant.
5.2.1. KINDS OF STEM :
There are different kinds of stems to perform diverse functions. They may be aerial or
underground. Aerial stems may be erect, rigid or strong in order to allow the plant to stand in an
upright position. The other category of stem is weak. The weak stem either trail on the ground
or climb on neighbouring plants or objects.
A. Strong stems :
The strong stem may be of different types. It may be caudex, when it is unbranched,
erect, cylindrical, stout and marked with scars of fallen leaves, e.g., palms (Fig.5.31). Culm
type stem with solid nodes and hollow internodes is found in bamboo (Fig.5.32). Certain
plants remain unbranched with a flowering shoot developing from the underground stem. Such
plants possess a cluster of leaves only at the base and the remainder of the stem remains
leafless. Such special aerial stems are called scape.
B. Weak stems :
Plants with weak stem require a support for growth or else they trail on the ground. It is of
the following types.
1. Trailing : It grows on the surface of the ground without rooting at the nodes. It may be
procumbent lying prostrate on the ground (e.g. Basella, Evolvulus, Fig.5.35) or
decumbent when after growing on the surface of the ground for some distance, the
growing apex rises up (e.g., Trldax, Lindenbergia, Fig.5.34). Trailing plants do not try to
climb upon any support. A trailing plant is said to be diffuse, when the stem is much
branched and the branches spread out on the ground in all directions (e.g., Boerhaavia).
2. Creeping : When the weak plants produce adventitious roots at their nodes and creep on
the ground it is said be creeping stem. These do not to climb upon any support. These are
said to be creepers, e.g., Cynodon dactylon, and Centella asiatica (Fig.5.36).
Fig.5.36.
Centella asiatica
creeping by means
of runners.
3. Climbing : These are weak stems which grow on support. Usually, they grow up and
expose their leaves to sunlight. There are different types of climbers such as : (i) twiners;
(ii) tendril climbers (iii) root climbers (iv) ramblers (v) adhesive climbers and (vi) lianas.
(i) Twiners : These are weak stems which twine round the support. The growing apex
circle round the support and such a growth movement is called circumnutation.
Normally the growing apex of the stem coils clockwise or anti clockwise around the
support, (dextrose or sinistrorse respectively) as found in Dioscorea or Clitoria.
(ii) Tendril Climbers : These make use of specialised climbing organs called tendrils
which are soft, wiry and coil like-structures. Tendrils are sensitive and capable of
growing spirally around the support when comes in contact with the latter. In many
cases, it is the aerial part of the stem modified to form tendrils, e.g., Cucurbita.
(iii) Root climbers : The weak stem can climb up by adventitious roots produced at the
nodes as in Piper betel which act as holdfast fastening the stem to the support.
(iv) Ramblers or scramblers and hook climbers : Plants like rose, cane, Artabotrys
and Lantana are having weak stems which do not actually climb, but grow over other
bushes. They have superficial outgrowths such as thorns, prickles and curved hooks,
etc. for climbing.
(v) Adhesive climbers : In some Ficus species, adhesive discs grow from climbing
roots to form carpet like growth covering steep walls. By means of these discs the
weak stems adhere to flat walls and grow up.
(vi) Lianas : These plants grow like ordinary twiners over tall trees. These are perennial
woody climbers. Once they reach the topmost part of the supporting tree and their
top leaves get sunlight, the weak stem becomes very strong, stout, and woody, e.g.,
Tinospora, species of Bauhinia and Ficus, etc.
5.2.2. THE BUD :

A bud is a compact and undeveloped young shoot in which the young rudimentary leaves
with very short internodes are closely crowded. The plumule in the embryo is the first bud and
the shoot system develops from it. The development of the leaves in a bud is in acropetal
succession (Fig.5.37). Based on their position, there are different types of bud. Normally it
occupies its position at the apex of the stem or branch which is said to be terminal or apical
(Fig.5.37). When its position is in the axil of a leaf, it is known as axillary. The elongation of
stem depends on the growth of terminal bud. When the axillary bud grows, it gives rise to
branches.
The buds may be vegetative or floral. The former on development, form vegetative
shoots and the latter, the flowers. If any extra buds develop by the side of the axillary bud, these
Present year's scar of last Scar of year

decaying shoot year's shoot before last
bud
Present year's last year's Growth of
growth growth year before last
LATERAL BUD
BRANCH OF RHIZOME
Fig.5.39 : Four-year-old rhizome of a wild plant. The apical bud will develop next
year’s shoot while growth will be continued by the lateral bud in the direction of the
arrow. The stem is therefore, sympodial.
are known as accessary buds. Sometimes, adventitious buds are developed at various other
parts of the plant such as the root (radical buds), e.g., sweet potato, or leaf (foliar buds), e.g.,
Bryophyllum or at different positions of the stem and the branches (cauline buds). The function
of all these buds are to gradually develop into new branches, and in some plants into independent
plants. Buds, which begin to grow and develop as soon as they emerge from the stem, are
called active buds. In certain cases, they remain inactive for a period, and are called dormant
buds.
A cabbage, cut longitudinally, gives a good idea about buds (Fig.5.38). Buds give rise to
branches, leaves or flowers. Its protection in plants is provided by various means:
1. Overlapping of the young leaves on the delicate growing point of the bud protect the
growing apex against sun and rain.
2. Buds are protected by covering of hairs or in some cases by resinous or gummy secretions.
3. They are protected by bud scales in some cases also, e.g., banyan, jackfruit and
Magnolia, etc.
4. There may be a coating of wax or cutin on the leaf-surface to check evaporation of water
and to prevent it from getting dry.
5.2.3. MODIFICATIONS Of STEMS :
When stems change their form to perform functions other than the normal functions, it is
said to be stem modifications. Certain stems or branches of the plant change their shapes or
forms to carry on special functions such as perennation (to survive during unfavourable
conditions), vegetative propagation, storage of food and specialised functions. There are different
types of stem modifications based on their position with respect to soil.
(A) Underground modifications :
For the purpose of storage, perennation and vegetative propagation the stems remain
under the ground. During unfavourable season, they remain dormant and when the conditions
become favourable they give off new aerial shoots. Although nongreen and are present under
the ground, they possess characteristics of stem. These are: presence of nodes and internodes,
scale leaves and adventitious roots at the nodes, presence of buds at the axils of scale laves.
The following are the different underground modifications of stems based on their shapes or
forms:
1. Rhizome:
It is provided with nodes, internodes, scale leaves and buds. The stem part creeps
horizotally under the ground and is prostrate and thick. It possesses brown scale leaves with
itself being brownish often mistaken for root. Adventitious roots are developed on the lower
surface of the node.
In turmeric (Curcuma domestica- Fig.5.39) and ginger (Zingiber officinale- Fig.5.40) it is

fleshy and branched. The apical bud gives rise to new plants on favourable condition. But the
rhizome of Canna is not fleshy. Here the internodes are long and rhizome grows horizontally by
the apical bud.
Fig.5.41.
Rootstock (vertical
rhizome) of Alocasia
indica.
Fig.5.40. Rhizome of ginger
Fig.5.43.
Bulb of onion, (A) an
entire onion showing
the lower part of dry
scale-leaves with
distinct veins, (B) an
onion cut
longitudinally; and
(C) an onion cut
transversely.
SCAR OF GERMINATING
SCAR OF sc LE LEAF YE BUD
STEM
___ B____
Fig.5.42.
Potato (A) Base of a potato plant showing
the development of potato tubers from
underground stem branches. (B) A single
tuber. Some eyes towards the rose and
have commenced development
A special type of rhizome is seen where instead of growing horizontally, it grows vertically
down. It is called rootstock, e.g., Alocasia indica (Fig.5.41).
2. Tuber:
The axil of lower leaf gives rise to underground branches. Its apices swell up into tubers
which are without any definite shape, e.g., potato (Solarium tuberosum) (Fig.5.42). It is a modified
stem due to presence of a number of ‘eyes’ or buds which can give rise to new plants. The tuber
is protected by a corky skin. Adventitious roots are absent. Sometimes, it is very much swollen
due to the heavy deposit of food material. Other examples of stem tuber are Cyperus rotundus
and Helianthus tuberosus.
3. Bulb :
Bulb is the underground stem which is conical in shape and gives rise to adventitious
roots towards the lower side. It produces fleshy scale leaves surrounding an apical bud. It
produces the leafless stem, the scape, in favourable season. In this case, food is stored in the
fleshy scale leaves. There are two types of bulbs based on the arrangement of fleshy scale
leaves: tunicated bulb and imbricate bulb. The former possesses a number of concentric
scale leaves as found in onion (Allium cepa) (Fig.5.43) and in the latter the scale leaves are not
concentric but are arranged loosely overlapping one another only at the margins, e.g., garlic
(Allium sativum). In garlic, the fleshy scale leaves remain separate.
4. Corm :
It is more or less rounded in shape, a

condensed vertical stem with a large apical bud.
It Is often somewhat flattened from top to
bottom, e.g., Amorphophallus campanulatus
(Fig.5.44). It has nodes, internodes and scale
leaves with numerous buds and adventitious Fig.5.44.Corm of
Amorphophallus
roots . It stores up the food material.
Fig.5.45.Oxalis corniculata
(B) Sub-aerial modifications : propagating by runners.
The sub-aerial stems are weak and unable to stand straight. They may be partially
subterranean. The stem is usually modified for the purpose of vegetative propagation. The
different types of sub-aerial modified stems are described as follows.
1. Runner:
It is a modified stem produced from axillary bud of the leaf. It is slender, prostrate branched
with long internodes that creep on the ground. Adventitious roots develop at the nodes. The
interode portion is said to be the runner. Due to the formation of many such runners on all sides
the plant spreads out on the ground in all directions. Runners are meant for vegetative
propagation, e.g., Oxalis (Fig.5.45),

Marsilea, Dog grass (Cynodon
dactylon) and Centella asiatica, etc.
A special kind of underground

runner is known as sobole. It is thin
and does not store food material, for
which it is not included under
rhizome, e.g., creeping grassy weed
(Agropyron) which grows under the
ground in all directions giving rise to Fig.5.46.Sobole of Agropyron Fig.5.47. Stolon of Mentha
numerous runners (Fig.5.46).
2. Stolon :
It is a branch developed at the base of the stem under the soil which at first grows upwards
and then arches down to meet the soil. A common example is Mentha sp. (Fig.5.47).
3. Offset:
This type of modification is found in aquatic plants like Pistia and Eichhornia etc. Just like
a runner it develops from the leaf axil that grows horizontally up to some extent. It bears a tuft
of leaves towards the upper side and adventitious roots towards the lower side. An offset is
short, soft, prostrate branch with leaves above and a clusters of roots below. It often breaks
away from the mother plant and grows independently again producing offset at the leaf-axil
(Fig.5.48 & 49).
4. Sucker:
Like the stolen, it is produced from the underground part of the stem. The lateral branch
grows obliquely upwards bearing adventitious roots. It produces leafy shoots when it reaches
the soil surface. A sucker is much shorter than a stolon. It strikes roots at the base either before
it separates from the mother plant or soon after. A common example is Chrysanthemum
(Fig.5.50).
C. Aerial modifications :
The above ground part of the stem is known as aerial part. Such aerial stems are modified
to carry out certain functions. At times, it is metamorphosed due to extreme modifications.
There are various kinds of aerial stem modifications.
1. Stem-tendril:
Tendril is a thin, wiry, leafless, spirally-coiled structure. It occupies the position of a leaf
axil or that of a floral bud. It helps in climbing. It is seen in Vitis, passion flower (Passiflara). In
passion flower, it is the axillary branch that is modified into tendrils (Fig.5.51). In balloon vine
Fig.5.51.Tendril of passion
flower (Passiflora)
(Cardiospermum), floral buds are modified to tendril. (Fig. 5.52). In Antigonon, it is the floral
buds that give rise to tendrils (Fig.5.53). In Gouania, the branches end in strong tendrils to
provide support to the plant (Fig.5.54).
2. Thorn :
Thorn is a hard, thick, often straight, deep seated and pointed structure. It is a
metamophosed stem because it occupies the position of bud. Mostly it arises at the leaf axil. In
Duranta (Fig.5.55), it is the axillary bud which is modified into thorn. Sometimes thorn also
bears small leaves. It is meant to provide protection to the plant. In Carissa (Fig.5.56), the
terminal bud is modified into a pair of thorns. These are distinguished from spines and prickles
being deep seated. In Flacourtia (Fig. 5.57) the thorn becomes branched.
3. Phylloclade:
It is a green, flattened or rounded stem provided with nodes, buds and spines. In Opuntia
(Fig.5.58), the leaves are modified into spines. Being green in structure, it performs the functions
of leaves. In Casuarina it is green and cylindrical and the leaves are reduced to scale leaves. It
is the characteristics of xerophytic plants to check the water loss. The leaves which are mainly
responsible for transpiration are either absent or modified. Stem becomes swollen or fattened
and green so that it can carry out photosynthetic function of the leaves. They may contain much
mucilage for retaining water. Other examples of phylloclades are Cocoloba (Fig.5.59) and
Epiphyllum (Fig. 5.60).
Cladode is a type of phylloclade found in Asparagus (Fig.5.61). It consists of one internode

only. The ultimate branchlets are of one internode only. These are cylindrical (not fleshy) and are
often mistaken for leaves. They are cladodes while leaves are modified or reduced into prickles.
These are characteristic adaptations for desert plants.
4. Bulbil :
It develops at the leaf axil due to modification of vegetative bud or floral bud. It is a
roundish multicellular structure meant for vegetative propagation. It sheds from the mother
plant and grows up into a new independent plant, e.g., Dioscorea (Fig.5.62). In Globba agave
and Onions, bulbils are seen to occur on the inflorescence (Fig.5.63) being modifications of
some flowers.
5.2.4. BRANCHING :
An angiospermic plant is differentiated into root, stem, branch, leaf, flower and fruit. The
mode of arrangement of branches on the stem is known as branching. Branching are of two
types: lateral and dichotomous. These are developed from the axillary or lateral buds. The large
branches are called boughs while the small ones are known as twigs. Branching brings about the
shape of the plant. In caudex form (Fig.5.31), the stem is unbranched bearing a crown of leaves at
the top as seen in palm and coconut. A plant is said to be excurrent (Fig. 5.64) where the apical
bud grows indefinitely producing branching strictly in acropetalous order as seen in Polyalthia
longifolia. In deliquescent type (Fig. 5.65), the growth of apical bud is suppressed while the
lateral buds develop more vigorously, giving a spreading habit to the plant as seen in banyan.
A. Lateral branching :
It is also called axillary branching because it is developed from the axis. It may be racemose
(monopodial or indefinite) or cymose (definite).
1. Racemose or monopodial branching :
In this case, the growth of the apical bud is indefinite giving rise to a straight stem. The
lateral buds grow on the lateral sides of the straight stem in an acropetal succession. The
lowest branch is the oldest and longest. Gradually, it bears shorter branches towards the upper
side assuming a pyramidal form or conical shape, e.g., Polyalthia longifolia (Fig.5.64), Casuarina,
etc.
2. Cymose branching :
The growth of the apical bud is checked while the side branches develop and grow
forming a spreading habit. When the growth of the apical bud of the plant is checked, the
lateral branches grow vigorously and the plant becomes dome shaped. This gives a
deliquescent form (Fig.5.67), e.g., Mango or Jackfruit, etc. Based on the number of lateral
strong branches produced, there are different types of cymose branching:
(i) Uniparous cyme :
Only one lateral branch is produced. So it is called uniparous or monochasial cyme. The
uniparous type of branching is a succussion of daughter axes fused together. Therefore, it
is otherwise called sympodial branching. When successive branches produced on the
same side forming a helix, it is called helicoid cyme (Fig.5.67) as in Saraca, but if these
branchings are alternate then it is said to be scorpioid cyme (Fig.5.68) as in Vitis.
(ii) Biparous cyme :
Here, two lateral branches develop at a time from the axils of two opposite leaves at
each node. This gives rise to a symmetrical shoot, said to be dichasium, e.g., Ervatamia.
Sometimes, the terminal bud remains undeveloped and the branching looks like a
dichotomy. In this case, since there are two opposite leaves at each node, it possesses
two opposite axillary buds. Therefore, two symmetrical shoots are developed, e.g.,
Mirabilisjalapa, Ervatamia divaricata, etc. (Fig.5.69).
Fig.5.58. Phylloclade of prickly Fig.5.59. Phylloclade of Fig.5.60. Phylloclade of

pear (Opuntia) Cocoloba. Epiphyllum.
(c) Multiparous cyme :
The plants with more than two leaves at each node upon suppression of development of
apical bud produce more than two branches at each node. Such a branching is called polychasial
cyme, e.g., Croton sparsiflorus.
B. Dichotomous branching :
The terminal bud divides into two, producing two branches in a forked manner. It is common
among the nonflowering plants. It may be a normal or true dichotomy (Fig.5.70) when two
forked branches formed again continue to show similar branching again and again. In some
plants, after the bifurcation is made one half grows normally while the other half is suppressed.
Successive suppression may be on the same side or on alternate sides. It is said to be sympodial
* r x4~ Deri innonnn im

rotUUUrUUIUM
X
r■
^\q \\ Z
r
1
I
B
Fig.5.67. Helicoid development of successive branches Fig.5.68.Scorpioid cyme. (A) Showing
marked 1,2, 3,4,.... (B) Pseudopodium after straightening scorpioid development of successive
up- branches marked 1,2,3,4... (B) The
pseudopodium after straighting up.
dichotomy. If the branches on one side only are suppressed, it is called helicoid dichotomy
and the plants appear coiled (Fig.5.71). If the alternate branches to the left and right are
suppressed, it is called scorpioid dichotomy (Fig. 5.72).
5.3. THE LEAF:
The leaf is the flattened, lateral outgrowth of the stem or the branch. It develops at the
node and possesses a bud at its axil. It is green in colour and a vegetative organ of the plant. It
manufactures food material and always develops in an acropetal order on the stem. These are
exogenous in origin developing from the swollen growing apex called the leaf primordia.
5.3.1. KINDS OF LEAF :
On the basis of origin and function, leaves are of following types.
A. Cotyledonary leaves :
Two cotyledons occur in dicots whereas monocots have one cotyledon. The first leaves
on the shoot are represented by the cotyledons. Usually, they contain reserve foods. The
cotyledonary leaves are fleshy and non-green, e.g., beans and gram. In monocotyledons, the
scutellum represents the cotyledon and its function is the suction of food material from the
endosperm. Cotyledonary leaves are thin and flat in Ricinus (Fig.5.73).
B. Scale leaves or cataphylls :
Scale leaves are modified leaves. They are usually brown or grey coloured membranous
structures that remain either dry, papery or fleshy. Mostly these are found in the underground
stems. Scale leaves are also found in the aerial parts of the stem as in Casuarina, Asparagus
(Fig.5.74).
C. Bract leaves or hypsophylls :
In this case, the leaves are represented by bracts which contain flower or inflorescence in
their axils. Special leaves which bear floral buds at their axils are called bract leaves. These are
usually small and green but in some, these are large and bright coloured, e.g., Bougainvillea
(Fig.5.75).
D. Prophylls :
The first few leaves of a branch often differ from the other leaves and are known as
prophylls. Usually there is one prophyll in monocots and two in dicots. Single prophyll in Citrus
and two prophylls in Aegle are represented by spines (Fig.5.76).
E. Floral leaves or sporophylls :
The sepals, petals, stamens and carpels of a flower are modified leaves. Of these, the
stamens and the carpels are considered as sporophylls as they bear spores.
F. Foliage leaves :
Normal leaves which arise from node of aerial stem as lateral appendages are called the
foliage leaves. These are usually green in colour. They perform vital functions such as
photosynthesis and transpiration.
Fig.5.71 .Plan to illustrate helicoid

dichotomy. (A) Helicoid development of
successive branches marked 1,2,3,4,... Fig.5.72.Plan to illustrate scorpioid
(B) The pseudopodium after straightening dichotomy. (A) Scorpioid development of
up. successive branches marked 1,2,3,4,...
(B) The pseudopodium after straightening
up.
Fig.5.73. Kinds of leaves : Cotyledonary

leaves of Ricinus
Bract leaves Fig.5.74. A growing shoot of Asparagus

bearing cataphylls.
Fig.5.75.Bract leaves of
Bougainvillea.
Fig.5.76. Spiny prophylls of Citrus

5.3.2. PARTS OF A LEAF :
Atypical leaf consists of three parts: Leaf base or hypopodium, petiole or mesopodium
and leaf lamina or blade or epipodium. The entire leaf is said to be phyllopodium. (Fig.5.77)
A. The leaf base (Hypopodium):
The part of the leaf attached to the stem is known as leaf base. In many mononcot plants
the leaf base expands into a sheath. When it partially clasps the stem it is called semiamplexicaul
(e.g., banana, Fig.5.78). If it clasps the stem wholly, it is called amplexicaul (e.g., grasses,
Aethusa, Fig.5.79). In plants like Caesalpinia, Clitoria and Mangifera (Fig.5.80), the leaf base is
swollen and called pulvinus. In a few cases, where the leaf bases are winged, they extend
down the stem up to the lower node. It is known as a decurrent leafbase, e.g., Symphytum
(Fig.5.81).
B. The petiole (Mesopodium):
It is the stalk of the leaf starting from leaf-base up to the origin of lamina. Sometimes it
may not develop at all. A leaf with a petiole is called petiolate and one devoid of it is sessile.
The petiole is commonly a cylindrical structure more or less circular in cross section, or grooved
having a longitudinal furrow. Different types of structural outgrowths and modifications are marked
on the petiole.
In Citrus, it becomes winged and resembles the leaf lamina (Fig.5.82). In Eichhornea, it
swells into a spongy bulb with numerous air chambers that help the plant to float (Fig.5.83). In
Clematis, the petioles are tendrillar (Fig.5.84). In Quisqualis, the leaf blades sometimes fall off
and the petiole becomes hard spines. In Acaica moniliformis, it is modified into a sickle-shape
lamina, called phyllode.
In many monocot plants of the grass family, Gramineae (Poaceae), the sessile leaves
develop some peculiar outgrowths at the junction of the sheathing leafbase and the lamina. It
looks like a tongue-shaped membranous structure on the inner surface of base and is called
the ligule. It is further strengthened by two outgrowthe from the two sides of the junction between
the sheath and lamina, known as auricles (Fig.5.85).
C. The lamina or leaf blade (Epipodium):
The lamina - flattened structure is the most important part of the leaf. It manufactures
food and it is the place where all the functions of leaf, like gaseous exchange, transpiration,
photosynthesis, etc. are performed. Leaves vary widely, mainly due to different structural aspects
of lamina. The structural aspects of lamina can be studied under the following headings:
(i) Shape :
It is the description of the form which is of various types as given below (Fig.5.86):
Acicular: needle-shaped as in pine;

Fig.5.77.Parts of a
typical leaf.
Fig.5.78.Sheathing leaf
base of banana
Fig.5.80.Mango leaf
showing pulvinus leaf
Fig.5.79.Amplexicaul sheathing leaf

base of Aethusa cynapium
Fig.5.82. Lamina
Decurrent leaf
base of
officinale
Spongy
petiole
Fig.5.83.
Swollen spongy
petiole of water
hyacinth.
Linear: Longer and slightly broad as in many grasses, Tuberose, etc.;
Lanceolate : Lens-shaped as in Nerium and Polyalthia;
Oblong : More or less rectangular as in banana;
Subulate or awl shaped : Wide at the base and narrow towards the apex as in Isoetes;
Ovate or egg-shaped : as in China rose and banyan;
Cordate or heart-shaped : as in Piper betel;
Sagittate : arrow head-shaped as in Sagittaria.
Hastate : sagittate-like, but the two basal lobes directed outwords as in some sp. of
Ipomoea;
Reniform or kidney-shaped : rounded above with a deep notch at the base as in Centella
asiatica;
Lunate : Like a half-moon with two pointed basal lobes as in Adiantum;
Obovate : wider at the apex and reverse shape of ovate as in jackfruit.
Obcordate : reverse of cordate as in Bauhinia;
Spatulate : spatula-like as in Euphorbia;
Cuneate : Wedge shaped as in Pistia;
Elliptical: Like an ellipse as in Vinca and rotund or orbicular as in Lotus.
(ii) Base of lamina :
The base of the lamina is generally studied in sessile leaf. When the leaf base surrounds
the stem like two flaps as in Calotropis, it is called auricultate (Fig.5.87). When the
auriculate base completely clasps the stem it is called amplexicaul (Fig. 5.88). When the
basal lobes fuse together after completely clasping the stem, it looks as if the stem has
perforated the leaf. This is called perfoliate (Fig. 5.89) as seen in Aloe perfoliata.
In Swerita chirayita, the bases of two opposite leaves fuse together to appear like one
leaf, through the centre of which stem has passed. It is called connate leaf base (Fig.5.90).
(iii) Margin of lamina :
The margin of the lamina may be as follows (Fig. 5.91).
(a) Entire : Margin is smooth, e.g., Banyan.
(b) Repand : Margin is wavy, e.g., Polyalthia.
(c) Serrate : Margin is toothed with teeth pointed upwards, e.g., China-rose.
(d) Bi-serrate : Margin is toothed, but each tooth again serrated, e.g., Elm tree.
(e) Retroserrate : Margin is incised like a saw but teeth pointed downwards.
Stem
Auricles
Ligule and auricles of rice

(Oryza sativa)
Fig.5.86. LAMINA SHAPES. 1. Acicular in pine; 2. Linear in grass; 3. Lanceolate in Nerium; 4. Oblong in banana; 5.
Subulate in Isoeles; 6. Oval in china-rose; 7. Cordate in betel vine; 8. Sagittate in Sagittaria; 9. Hastate in Ipomoea;
10. Reniform in Centella; 11. Lunate in Passaflora lunala; 12. Obovate in jact-fruit; 13. Obcordate in Bauhinia;
14. Spathulate in Lippia; 15. Cuneate in Pistia; 16. Elliptical in guava; 17. Rotund in water-lilly.
(f) Dentate : Margin is toothed, the teeth are pointed outwards, e.g., Water lily.
(g) Bi-dentate : Margin is toothed and each tooth again dentate.
(h) Crenate : Margin is toothed and the teeth rounded, e.g., Centella.
(i) Bi-Crenate : Margin is toothed and the teeth crenate.
(j) Spiny : Margin is pointed to form spines, e.g., Pineapple.
(k) Lobed or incised : Margin is incised into various depth and forming small lobes,
e.g., Mustard and Raphamus sativus.
(iv) Apex of lamina :
The apex of lamina is of following types (Fig.5.92):
(a) Acute : Apex is narrow and pointed forming an acute angle, e.g., Mango.
(b) Obtuse : Apex is broad angled and blunt, e.g., Banyan.
(c) Acuminate : Apex is drawn out into a long tapering tail, e.g., Ficus religiosa.
(d) Mucronate : Apex is broad but the tip forms sharp point, e.g., Vinca.
(e) Cuspidate or spiny : Apex forms a spinous structure, e.g., Phoenix, Pandanus,
palm, etc.
(f) Tendrillar: Apex is provided with a thin, wiry, coiling structure known as tendril for
climbing, e.g., Gloriosa.
(g) Cirrhose : The mucronate apex ends in a small, fine thread-like structure, e.g.,
Banana.
(h) Truncate : Apex is cut abruptly, e.g., Pahs polyphylla.
(i) Retuse : The obtuse apex is slightly notched, e.g., Pistia Clitoria.
(j) Emarginate : The obtuse apex is deeply notched, e.g., Bauhinia.
(v) Surface of lamina :
(a) Glabrous : The surface of lamina may be smooth without any hair, e.g., mango.
(b) Glaucous : The surface is covered by waxy coating, e.g., lotus, Calotropis.
(c) Scabrous : The surface is rough.
(d) Rugose : The surface is somewhat wrinkled is, e.g., Rubus rugosus.
(e) Viscose : The surface is sticky because of some excretion, e.g., Cleome viscosa.
(f) Gland-dotted : The surface is with gland dots, e.g., Lemon.
(g) Hairy : The surface is covered with hairs. Based on the different types of hairs,
it may be :
Fig.5.91. LEAF MARGIN :

1.Entire; 2. Repand; 3. Serrate; 4. Bi-serrate; 5. Retroserrate; 6. Dentate;
7. Bi-dentate; 8. Crenate; 9. Bi-crenate; 10. Spiny; 11. Lobed.
Fig.5.92. LEAF APICES : 1.Acute; 2. Acuminate; 3. Obtuse; 4. Mucronate; 5. Cuspidate;

6. Tendrillar; 7. Cirrhose; 8. Truncate; 9. Retuse; 10. Emarginate.
(i) Pubescent: hairs are soft and woolly as in Tomato,
(ii) Pilose : hairs are long, distinct and scattered as in Grewia flavescens,
(iii) Villose : hairs are long, soft and closely arranged as in Leucas aspera,
(iv) Tomentose: hairs are short, dense and cottony as in Terminalia and Calotropis, etc.
(v) Hirsute : hairs are stiff, fine and scattered as in Eclipta alba.
(vi) Hispid : hairs are long and rigid as in Cucurbita.
(h) Spinose : The surface is covered by small prickles as in Brinjal.
(vi) Texture of lamina :
Lamina of the leaves has differeent textures.
(a) Herbaceous : The leaf lamina is thin and membranous as in China-rose and Rose.
(b) Coriaceous : The leaf lamina is firm and leathery as in Mango.
(c) Succulent: The leaf lamina is soft and juicy and more or less brittle as in Kalanchoe.
5.3.3 THE STIPULES :
Stipules are the appendages or outgrowths from the leaf base. It protects the young
axillary buds. Leaf is said to be stipulate when the stipule is present, while in its absence the
leaf is exstipulate. Stipules are very common in dicotyledons but rare in monocotyledons. In
some leaves they remain as long as the lamina persists (persistent) or fall off soon after the
lamina unfolds (deciduous). Stipules may remain as a normal appendage or may be modified
to give different structures.
According to their shape, position and size, stipules are of following types :
A. Normal stipules :
(i) Free-lateral:
These are two in number, free, laterally placed at the leaf base and green in colour, e.g.,
China rose (Fig.5.77).
(ii) Adnate :
In this case, two lateral stipules grow along the petiole up to a certain height forming two
winged appearance, e.g., Rosa (Fig.5.93).
(iii) Interpetiolar:
This type of stipule is seen in plants having opposite leaves. The stipules lie between the
petioles of opposite leaves, alternating with the latter, e.g., Ixora (Fig.5.94).
(iv) Intrapetiolar:
In this case, stipules present at the base of the opposite leaves, each being at the axil of
a leaf, e.g., Ervatamia and Gardenia (Fig.5.95).
(v) Ochreate :
It forms a hollow tube like structure encircling the internode of the stem up to a certain
height along with the some part of the petiole. The stipule is membranous, e.g., Polygonum
(Fig.5.96).
B. Modified stipules :
(i) Foliaceous :
At the base of the rachis of a compound leaf, there are two large, green, leafy structures
known as foliaceous stiplue, e.g., Pisum (Fig.5.97).
(ii) Bud-scales or convolute :
These are two scaly stipules present on the two lateral sides of the leaf bases enclosing the
bud and becoming convolute in shape. When the leaves unfold, these scaly stipules fall off,
e.g., Ficus, Artocarpus (Fig. 5.98), and Magnolia, etc.
(iii) Spinous :
In this case, the stipules appear as two sharp pointed strucutres that provide protection to
the plant, e.g., Acacia, Mimosa, Zizyphus (Fig. 5.99 A,B).
(iv) Tendrillar:
The stipules develop on two sides of the petiole and becomes thin, wiry, coil like structures
helping the plant to climb;, e.g., Smilax (Fig.5.101).
(v) Stipe I:
Sometimes in compound leaf the outgrowths are found at base of the leaflets. These are
known as stipels, e.g., Clitoria, Dolichos lablab (Fig. 5.100),
5.3.4 VENATION :
Veins are rigid, linear structures. These arise from the petiole and the midrib and traverse
the leaf lamina in different directions. The veins divide and redivide to form the skeletal structure
of leaf lamina. Such ramification shows different types of arrangements in different leaves. The
ramifications are the veins and the veinlets while their arrangement is known as venation.
It serves to distribute the water and dissolved mineral salts throughout the expanded
lamina and carries the prepared food from It. It gives mechanical strength to lamina and helps
in conduction.
Fig.5.93.Adnate stipule (S) of

rose.
Fig.5.95.lntrapetiolar stipule in
Gardenia with opposite leaves
Fig.5.99.Spiny Stipules:
Fig.5.98.Convolute (A) Acacia nilotica;
(Bud-scale) in Artocarpus. (B) Zizyphus mauritiana
zz
Fig.5.101. STIPULES
Tendrillar in Smilax
Fig.5.100.Trifoliate
imparipinnate leaf of Dolichos
lablab showing stipels and
puvinus.
---------------------
divergent reticulate venation M

in cucumber.
Fig.5.102.Unicostate
reticulate venation in the
leaf of Ficus religiosa
Angiosperm leaf shows two principal types of venation. When veins and veinlets are
irregularly arranged forming a net like reticulate structure, it is called reticulate venation. When
they run parallel to each other, it is said to be parallel venation. Reticulate venation is
characteristic of dicotyledons, while the parallel venation is found in monocotyledons. However,
there are some exceptions. Among monocotyledons, Smilax, Dioscorea and a few others show
reticulate venation and among dicotyledons Calophyllum and a few others show parallel
venations.
A. Reticulate venation :
1. Unicostate or pinnate :
The strong nerve that passes from the base of the petiole to the leaf apex is known as
midrib or costa. It bears a large number of laterally placed veins. Further branching of veins are
known as veinlets. It resembles the general plan of a feather. Hence, it is called pinnate. Since
it possesses a single prominent vein, it is called unicostate. This type of venation is common in
dicotyledons like Ficus, mango, etc.(Fig.5.102)
2. Multicostate or palmate :
In this case, strong veins are more than one. These costa arise from the tip of the petiole
and proceed outwards. So, it is called multicostate or palmate type of reticulate venation. When
costa arising at the base of the leaf-blade diverge from one another towards the margin of the
leaf, never meeting with each other the venation is called reticulate, palmate and divergent
type, e.g., China rose, Castor, Cucumber (Fig.5.103). But when the costa run in a curved manner
from the base and converge towards apex, it is called reticulate, palmate and convergent
type, e.g., cinnamon, camphor (Fig.5.104).
B. Parallel venation :
In this case, the leaf has one or more prominent midribs, which gives off lateral veins that
proceed parallel to each other towards the margin or apex of the leaf-blade as in banana,
Canna, turmeric etc. (Fig. 5.105).
Parallel venation may be unicostate when there is a single prominent midrib or may be
multicostate when there are more than one. In multicostate or palmate venation, if prominent
veins (costa) originate from the base of the leaf lamina and spread out or diverge towards the
distal end of the leaf, it is known as divergent type e.g. Palm (Fig.5.107).
If the prominent veins (costa) coming out from the base of the leaf lamina and converge
towards apex, it is called convergent type e.g. grasses, rice, bamboo (Fig.5.106).
Fig.5.107.Parallel
Venation Palmate
(divergent) type in
palmyra-palm leaf.
5.3.5. SIMPLE AND COMPOUND LEAF :
A simple leaf consists of a single lamina which may be entire or incised. Such incision
does not proceed up to the mid-rib or the petiole. In a compound leaf the incison of the leaf
blade proceeds to the mid-rib or to the petiole so that the leaf lamina gets divided into several
segments called leaflets. Here the midrib is converted into rachis at the base of which there is
axillary bud like that as a simple leaf. There are two types of compound leaves such as pinnate
and palmate.
Compound leaf and branch :
A compound leaf looks similar to the branches, yet it is distinguished by the following
points:
(1) A compound leaf never bears a terminal bud which is found in case of a branch.
(2) A compound leaf, like a simple leaf always bears a bud at its axil (axillary bud) but
branches themselves occupy the axillary position of a leaf.
(3) The leaflets of a compound leaf have no axillary buds whereas the leaves borne on
a branch have axillary buds one for each.
(4) A branch consists of nodes and inter nodes, while the rachis of a compound leaf is
devoid of them.
A. Pinnately compound leaf:
A compound leaf, that bears the leaflets on lateral sides of the rachis is called pinnate.
The rachis bears the leaflets either in alternate or opposite manner. It may be of the following
types:
(i) Unipinnate :
In this case, the rachis bears the leaflets directly along its two sides as in a feather., e.g.,
Cassia, rose, Margosa, etc. When the leaflets are even in number it is said to be paripinnate,
e.g., Cassia (Fig:5.108). But if the number of leaflets is odd, it is said to be imparipinnate, e.g.,
rose. (Fig.5.108), potato, Clitoria, etc.
(ii) Bipinnate :
The main rachis is branched to give secondary rachis. The leaflets are borne on secondary
rachis, e.g., Caesalpinia, (Fig. 5.109) Mimosa, Acacia and Albizia etc. All the bipinnate compound
leaves are paripinnate.
(c) Tripinnate:
In this case, the leaf is thrice pinnate. The secondary rachis again bears tertiary rachis
that bears the leaflets. Tripinnate compound leaves are imparipinnate, e.g., Moringa (Fig. 5.
110),
(d) Decompound :
When the leaf is more than thrice pinnate, it is said to be decompound as in Carrot,
Fennel (Foeniculum vulgare) and Coriandrum, etc. (Fig. 5.111).
B. Palmately compound leaf :
In palmately compound leaf, the rachis does not develop at all so that all the leaves are
articulated to a point on the top of the petiole. The leaflets diverge from a common point like the
fingers from the palm. According to the number of leaflets, it may be of following types:
(i) Unifoliate:
In this case, a single leaflet is articulated to the winged petiole, e.g., lemon, orange and
other citrus plants (Fig.5.112).
(ii) Bifoliate:
Two leaflets articulated to the rachis, e.g., Balanites, Bignonia etc.
(c) Trifoliate:
When three leaflets are articulated to the rachis e.g.,Oxalis, Aegle (Figs. 5.113 and 114),
etc.
(d) Quadrifoliate:
Four leaflets are articulated at the tip of the petiole, e.g., Paris quadrifolia and Marsilea.
(v) Multifoliate or digitate:
Five or more leaflets are articulated to the rachis and look like spreading of fingers from
the palm, e.g., Bombax, Gynandropsis, etc.
Fig.5.108.(A) Unipinnate
(Paripinnate) (B) Unipinnate
(imparipinnate)
Fig.5.112.Unifoliate
5.3.6. MODIFICATIONS OF LEAVES :

Any change in the form of leaf or its parts- such as petiole, leaf lamina, margin, and apex,
etc. to perform some functions other than their normal functions is called modification of leaf.
Leaves of many plants are modified or metamorphosed into various structures. These are as
follows:
A. Leaf-tendrils:
Tendrils are slender, wiry, closely coiled structures which help the plant in climbing. These
are sensitive to contact with a foreign body. The terminal leaflets of Pisum or the entire leaf
lamina in Lathyrus (Fig.5.115) are transformed into tendrils. The terminal leaflet is also
transformed into leaf-tendril in Naravelia (Fig.5.117) and Bignonia. The leaf apex becomes a
tendril in Gloriosa superba (Fig.5.116). The tendril of Cucurbita is considered as a modified
prophyll.
B. Hooks :
In some species of Bignonia, (Fig:5.118), the terminal leaflets become modified into three,
very sharp and curved hooks like the nails of a cat. The leaf spines on the main branches of
Asparagus also act as hooks.
C. Leaf spines :
The leaf margin or leaf apices or entire leaf lamina may be modified to pointed structures
known as spines. These spines may be small and at the margin as in Argemone mexicana,
Pineapple, Agave, Aloe, etc. (Fig.5.119). In Opuntia, ordinary leaves are feebly developed and
soon fall off, but the minute leaves of the axillary bud are modified into spines. The entire leaf
becomes modilied into spine in barberry. In date palm, the leaf apex becomes sharp and pointed
transforming into spines. Spines provide protection to the plants.
D. Scale-leaves:
It is the characteristic feature of underground modified stems. These are thin, dry, stalkless,
membranous structures, which protect axillary buds. In Onion, these are thick and fleshy to
store water and food. In Casuarina, the scale leaves (Fig. 5.120) occur in a whorl at each node.
E. Phyllode:
The plant Australian Acacia possesses bipinnate compound leaves when in young seedling
stage. It is found that gradually the petiole or rachis becomes flattened, sickle shaped taking the
shape of a leaf with the falling of leaflets (Fig.5.121). This flattened winged petiole or rachis is known
as phyllode. It carries on all the functions of a leaf.
F. Pitcher:
It is found in one kind of insectivorous plant. Here, the leaf becomes modified into a
pitcher. The slender petiole coils like a tendril holding the pitcher vertically up. Its basal portion
is flattened like a leaf. The tip of the leaf is motdified to a lid which covers the mouth of the
pitcher. The function of the pitcher is to capture a insects and digest them. E.g., Nepenthes
(Fig.5.122).
G. Bladder:
Bladders are modified leaf, found in certain aquatic plants commonly known as bladderwort.
The leaf of the plant is very much segmented. Some of these segments are modified to form
Fig.5.119.:
A twig of
Argemone
mexicana
showing
leaf spines
Fig.5.120.:
Casuarina
stem
showing
scale leaf.
bladder like structures provided with lids. The structure is such that the aquatic animalcules can
get into the bladders but cannot come out. So, it acts as a trap-door entrance, e.g., Utricularia
(Fig. 5.123).
5.3.7. PHYLLOTAXY :
The mode of arrangement of leaves on the stem is known as phyllotaxy. There is a definite
law according to which the leaves are arranged on the stem of a particular species. There are
three categories of phyllotaxy which fall under two principal types known as cyclic and acyclic.
In acyclic phyllotaxy a single leaf is present at each node. Acyclic phyllotaxy may also be
as spiral or alternate phyllotaxy. In cyclic type, at each node there are more than one leaf. In
cyclic type, the leaves are arranged in a cycle in which the angle between adjacent leaves
known as angular divergence is the same. If there are two leaves at the node, two will be placed
opposite (i.e. at an angular distance of two right angles). If there are three leaves, the angle
between leaves in the same whorl is 120° (i.e. one third of a circle). If four, it is 90° and so on.
Cyclic type shows two distinct categories of phyllotaxy: opposite and whorled depending on
presence of two or more than two leaves at each node respectively.
(i) Alternate:
Here, a single leaf arises at each node. These alternate to each other. It is the commonest
type of phyllotaxy, e.g., mustard, sunflower, China rose, etc. (Fig.5.124). If an imaginary line is
drawn from the base of one particular leaf through the bases of the successive leaves, it forms
a spiral. This imaginary spiral line is known as genetic spiral (Fig.5.125). When looked from
top, one finds in each cycle of spiral one leaf comes to lie directly on another leaf which is
placed on a vertical line. So, on the stem one finds definite number of rows of leaves, known as
orthostichy. Alternate phyllotaxy is classified further on the basis of number of leaves in relation
to spirals. These are as follows (Fig.5.126).
1. Distichous or two ranked or 1/2 phyllotaxy :
In this case, leaves are arranged in two vertical rows. It is found that the third leaf
remains over the first while completing one spiral. Fourth leaf also stands over the second.
So, there are two leaves in each spiral. The fifth leaf stands over the first and the third and
so on, e.g., wheat, rice. In this case, the angular divergence is 180° (360° * '/2).
2. Tristichous or three-ranked or 1/3 phyllotaxy :
In tristichous phyllotaxy, there are three leaves in one spiral. The fourth leaf stands
vertically over the first one, and one cycle of the genetic spiral involves three leaves. The fifth
leaf stands over the second, the sixth over the third, and the seventh remains over the fourth
and the first. There are three orthostichies, i.e., leaves are arranged in three rows or ranks.
The mode of arrartgement in the first, fourth, seventh and tenth leaf remains in one row while
the third, sixth, ninth and twelveth in the second row and second, fifth, eighth and eleventh in
the third row, e.g., Cyperus. Here the angular divergence is 120°. (360°.x'/3).
3. Pentastichous or five-ranked or 2/5 phyllotaxy :
In this case, the leaves are arranged in five vertical rows. There are five leaves in two
spirals. The mode of arrangement is first and sixth leaf on the first orthostichy, second and
Fig.5.121.Development of phyllode in Australian Acacia. (A-D); petiole modified into phyllode; (E), rachis and
petiole together modified into a phyllode.
Fig.5.122. PITCHER PLANTS.(A) Nepenthes (the Asiatic Pitcher Plant) - One enlarged leaf showing the pitcher;
(B) Sarracenia purpurea-the North American Pitcher Plant.
Fig.5.123.Bladderwort (Utricularia) with many

small bladders, top, a bladder in section
(magnified)
seventh on the second, three and eighth on the third, fourth and ninth on fourth orthostichy.
Hence, It is called 2/5 phyllotaxy, making an angular divergence of 144° (3600x2/5). A common
example is China rose.
4. Octastichous or eight-ranked or 3/8 phyllotaxy :
The arrangement of leaves is found along eight vertical rows. The mode of arrangement
is first and ninth leaf on first row, second and tenth on second row, third and eleventh on fourth
row and so on. In this case, there are eight leaves in three spirals. Here, the angular divergenre
between two consecutive leaves is 135° (360°x3/8). A common example is Papaya.
(ii) Opposite :
When, two leaves arise at each node, and are opposite to each other, it is opposite
phyllotaxy. When one pair of leaves stand at right angle to the next upper or lower pair, the
phyllotaxy is called opposite decussate, e.g., Ocimum, Ixora, Calotropis (Fig.5.127). In some
other plants, the successive pairs are placed exactly on top of each other so that all the leaves
lie in one plane. A pair of leaves is seen to stand directly over the lower pair in the same plane.
Such an arrangement is said to be opposite superposed, e.g., Quisqualis (Fig.5.128).
(iii) Whorled or Verticillate :
Here three are more leaves, which form a whorl at each node, are arranged in a circle or
whorl, e.g., Alstonia, Allamanda, Nerium (Fig.5.129).
Leaf mosaic :
Phyllotaxy is the arrangement of leaves on the stem in such a manner that each leaf gets
adequate amount of sunlight for manufacture of food material. The arrangement allows the
leaves to secure maximum amount of sunlight with minimum amount of overlapping. Such a
condition is also obtained by a differential growth of the stalk of different leaves on the twig so
that all the leaves are brought to the same level. It resembles with a flat mosaic surface. The
leafstalks are unequal and leaves originating lower down have longer stalks. Leaves twist and
turn to fill up all the gaps where light is available, -e.g., Acalypha (Fig.5.130).
5.3.8. FUNCTIONS OF LEAF :
A. Manufacture of food :
It is the primary function of green leaves. The process is called photosynthesis by which
leaf produces food material using water and carbon dioxide in the presence of sunlight and
green pigment, chlorophyll.
B. Interchange of gases :
It takes place both for respiration and photosynthesis. There are numerous, minute
openings present on the leaves, called stomata, through which gaseous exchange takes place
between the atmosphere and the plant body.
C. Evaporation of water:
Water absorbed by the root is evaporated from the leaf surface during the day time. It
generally takes place through the stomatai openings. The phenemenon is known as transpiration.
This process allows the plant to absorb water and minerals from the soil and conduct the same
to the top of the plant.
Fig.5.126.Phyllotaxy : (A) Alternate; (B) Distichous (1/2); Fig.5.127.Opposite superposed in

(C) Tristichous (1/3); (D) Pentastichous (2/5) Quisqualis.
Fig.5.130.Leaf mosaic in Acalypha.

The lower leaves have longer petioles
so that all leaves are brought to the
Fig.5.128.Opposite superposed Fig.5.129.Verticillate (whorls of same level and are not shaded by one
in Quisqualis. three) in Nerium odorum. anothe.
5.4. INFLORESCENCE :
The shoot of angiospermic plant may have two distinct parts: vegetative and reproductive.
Generally, the reproductive part is identified as flower. The reproductive part of the shoot may
bear one or many flowers. The group of flowers present on a shoot transforms the shoot into an
axis with flowers (flowering axis). The mode of arrangement of flowers along the flowering axis
is known as inflorescence or anthotaxi.
The floral buds are developed in the reproductive phase. If the floral bud is single and
develops into a flower it is called solitary. It may either be developed at the leaf axis or at
terminal part of the plant. In former case, it is said to be solitary axillary; while in the latter, it is
termed as solitary terminal. But in many cases a cluster of flowers develop on an axis, known
as floral axis.
The floral axis bearing the flowers is known as peduncle or rachis and the stalk of individual
flower is called pedicel. The inflorescence consisting of a collection of flowers may be different
depending on the mode of arrangement of flowers- pedicellate or sessile; length of the floral
axis; and sexuality of the flower. Mainly, there are two types of inflorescences: racemose and
cymose. In some cases, special cymose and mixed racemose and cymose types of
inflorescences are marked.
5.4.1. RACEMOSE INFLORESCENCE :
In this case, floral axis never terminates by a flower. The growth of floral axis is continuous
or indefinite. The arrangement of flowers is acropetalous,. i.e., the older flowers remain towards
the base while younger flowers are found towards the apex. The opening of flowers is centripetal.
The basal or marginal older flowers open first which is followed by the upper or centrally placed
flowers.
There are various types of racemose inflorescences in which floral axis is elongated or
shortened or flattened being concave or convex. Racemose inflorescence is of the following
types.
(A) Main axis elongated :
(a) Flowers pedicellate :
(i) Raceme :
The main axis is elongated and the flowers are borne laterally. All the flowers are pedicellate
and borne acropetally. The lower older flowers in the rachis have longer pedicels, whereas, the
pedicels of upper younger flowers are comparetively shorter. This type is seen in many plants
such as Brassica (Fig. 5.1.1), Raphanus, Crotalaria, Cleome, etc.
e
•5
A B
Fig.5.1.1. (A) Raceme of Brassica;
(B) Raceme (diagrammatic presentation)
Fig.5.1.3.
(A) Spike of
Achyranthes
(B) Spike of
Polyanthes.
Fig.5.1.4.
(A) Spike (
wheat; (B)
spikelet.
Fig.5.1.6.
(A) Female
catkin of
Morus;
9 (B) Catkin
(diagrammatic
B presentation)
—spathe or
bract enclosing
the inflorescence
.fleshy end of
inflorescence
spathe
(bract)
sterile hairs
naked male
flowers
sheathing
leaf base female
flower
cut spathe
A
Fig.5.1.7. (A) Spadix of Colocasia; Fig.5.1.8. Compound
(B) Spadix (diagrammatic presentation) spadix of coconut
When the main axis is branched and the branches bear the flowers as in raceme it is
called compound raceme or panicle. These are found in Caesalpinia, Yucca (Fig.5.1.2), Litchi,
Andrographis paniculata, etc.
(b) Flowers sessile
(ii) Spike :
It is similar to raceme, excepting that the flowers are sessile (without pedicel). Examples:
Achyranthes (Fig.5.1.3), Piper longum, tuberose (Polyanthes), Adhatoda vasica, etc. In case
the floral axis is branched and sessile flowers are borne on these branches as in spike then the
inflorescence is called compound spike as seen in Amaranthus.
(iii) Spikelet or Locusta :
In the spikelet type of inflorescence, it is subtended by two bracts or glumes at the base.
It consists of one to many flowers. Each flower is borne in the axil of a bract called lemma and
a bracteole called palea. In rice, each spikelet is composed of one flower only and whole
inflorescence is like a panicle. So it is called panicle of spikelets. In wheat (Fig.5.1.4), the
multiflowered spikelets on an unbranched axis, looking like a compound spike called spike of
spikelets, are seen. Panicle of spikelets is also found in many grasses.
(iv) Strobile :
It is a type of spike consisting of sessile flowers borne on the main axis. Each flower is
borne in the axil of a persistent membranous bract, e.g., Humulus lupulus (Fig. 5.1.5).
(v) Catkin or Amentum :
It is a spike in which the floral axis is thin and weak. So the whole inflorescence is a
drooping one (hanging downward). The inflorescence axis is long and pendulous and the flowers
are unisexual, e.g., Morus (Fig.5.1.6), Acalypha. Sometimes, the pendulous axis is erect as in
the male and female catkins of Salix.
(vi) Spadix :
The floral axis is thick and fleshy and the flowers are covered by one or several brightly
coloured bracts, called spathe, e.g., Colocasia esculanta (Fig. 5.1.7), Amorphophallus titanum.
In Colocasia the female flowers are borne towards the base of the axis. Above the female
flowers some sterile flowers are borne followed by the male flowers. The top of the axis is
without flowers and is known as appendix. When the axis of spadix is branched and sessile
flowers are borne on these branches as in spadix, it is called Compound spadix, e.g., coconut
(Fig. 5.1.8).
B. Main axis is shortened :
(vii) Corymb :
Here, the main axis is short. The flowers have unequal pedicels. The lower flowers have
longer pedicels than the upper ones so that all the flowers remain more or less the same level,
e.g., Iberis, Prunus cerasus (Fig. 5.1.9). Compound corymb is seen in the inflorescence of
Pyrus terminalis (Fig. 5.1.10).
(viii) Umbel :
It is racemose type in which main axis is shortened. The flowers are borne at the tip of the
axis. The flowers have more or less equal pedicels and appear to form a cluster. This type of
umbel is called simple umbel, e.g., Centella asiatica (Fig.5.1.11) Generally the umbel is branched
and the branches arise from a single point with a whorl of bracts known as involucre. These
branches bear flowers in umbel like manner. This type of umbel is known as compound umbel,
e.g., Coriandrum (Fig.5.1.12), Foeniculum, Daucus carota and other members of the family
Umbelliferae (Apiaceae). The involucres of the secondary umbels are called involucels.
(ix) Capitate :
The rachis is shortened. Large number of sessile flowers grow from the suppressed floral
axis appearing like a globose structure. Capitate type of inflorescence is seen in many leguminous
plants like Mimosa (Fig.5.1.13), Acacia, Albizia, etc.
C. With main axis flattened to form receptacle :
(x) Capitulum or head or anthodium :
The floral axis is very much flattened forming a convex receptacle. The flowers are arranged
on the receptacle. A large number of sessile flowers(called florets) are borne on the flattened
axis (receptacle). The arrangement of flowers is in centripetal order. The whole inflorescence is
Corymb (diagrammatic)
A B
Fig.5.1.11.:(A) umbel of onion;
(B) Umbel (diagrammatic)
surrounded by a whorls of bracts (involucre), e.g., sunflower (Fig.5.1.14), marigold, and all
members of the family Compositae (Asteraceae). In some of this type of inflorescence the
marginal flowers differ from the central flowers and are known as ray florets and disc florets,
respectively. But in Chrysanthemum, the florets are of same type (homomorphic). Compound
capitulum consists of several capitula, is found in Echinops echinatus of family Compositae.
5.4.2. CYMOSE INFLORESCENCE :

The floral axis terminates with a flower. So, the growth of the floral axis is checked and
the inflorescence is limited. The arrangement of flowers is basipetalous, i.e., the terminal flower
is the oldest and younger flowers are found below it. Where the rachis is flattened, the order of
opening of flowers is centrifugal.
Solitary axillary flowers in Hibiscus and Datura are placed under cymose inflorescence.
Cymose is grouped under the following types.
(i) Uniparous or monochasial cyme :
The inflorescence axis terminates with a flower. From the base of the flower only one
lateral branch comes out which also terminates by a flower. Depending on the branching, it is of
following two types.
(a) Scorpioid cyme :
In this case, the axis terminates in a flower. The successive lateral branches develop in
a zig-zag-manner on alternate side, each of which also ends in a flower, e.g., Ranunculus
bulbosus (Fig.5.1.15), Heliotropium indicum, etc.
(b) Helicoid cyme :
The floral axis ends in a flower. The successive lateral branches develop on the same
side forming a helix, e.g., Myositis palustnis, Juncus (Fig.5.1.16), Begonia, etc.
(ii) Biparous or dichasial cyme :
The main axis terminates in a flower. Two lateral branches develop on the two sides
below the terminal flower of the main axis, each one being terminated by flower. The lateral
branches may again branch similarly on two sides in biparous manner, e.g., Ixora, Jasminum,
Nyctanthes, Clerodendron and Dianthus, (Fig.5.1.17).
(iii) Multiparous or polychasial cyme :
In this case, the main axis ends in a flower. It produces more than two lateral branches
below the base of the terminal flower, each terminating in a flower. Here the middle or central
flower opens first, e.g., Calotropis (Fig.5.1.18).
5.4.3. SPECIAL CYMOSE :

(i) Cyathium :
It consists of a cup-shaped green involucre with nectar glands on it. The central single
female flower is surrounded by a number of male flowers each represented by a single stamen.
These reduced male florets, along with a long stalked centrally placed female floret on a convex
receptacle, represent the inflorescence, e.g., Poinsettia (Euphorbia) (Fig.5.1.19).
A
A B
Fig.5.1.15. (A) Scorpioid of Ranunculus bulbosus; Fig.5.1.16. (A) Helicoid Cyme of Juncus;
(B) diagrammatic (B) diagrammatic
Fig.5.1.17.
(A) Biparous cyme of Dianthus;
(B) Diagrammatic
Fig.5.1.18.
(A) Polychasial cyme of Calotropis;
(B) Diagrammatic
(ii) Verticillaster:
Here is a long floral axis differentiated into several nodes. At each node, there are opposite
leaves acting like bracts. Inflorescence develops at each of the two opposite axils. Each
inflorescence is a condensed form of dichasial cyme, presence of which at two opposite sides
of the node forms a false whorl. The dichasial cyme subsequently is reduced to two scorpioid
cymes, e.g., Asteracanatha longifolia, Leucas aspera and Leonurus sibiricus (Fig.5.1.20).
(iii) Hypanthodium :
The floral axis forms a cup-shaped receptacle which is fleshy, almost closed and with an
apical opening known as ostiole. Flowers are arranged in the inner wall of the cup in cymose
manner, such that, flowers are not visible to outside. They are unisexual in which male flowers
are near the ostiole and female flowers are found at the base of the cup, e.g., Ficus (Fig.5.1.21).
(iv) Coenanthium :
It is just like hypanthodium. But it shows a different type of receptacle. Instead of forming
a closed structure, it becomes saucer-shaped with the margins slightly curved up, e.g., Dorstenia
(Fig. 5.1.22).
(v) Cymose capitate :
In Anthocephalus indica, although the inflorescence looks like a racemose capitate type,
the pattern of arrangement of flowers is cymose type. So it is cymose capitate type.
5.4.4. MIXED INFLORESCENCE :

The inflorescence showing both racemose and cymose pattern of arrangement of flowers
is known as mixed inflorescence. These are as follows:
(i)Mixed panicle :
In this case, the general pattern of arrangement of flowers on the main axis is like panicle,
but the top flower opens first- a characteristic feature of cymose, e.g., Ligustrum (Fig.5.1.23).
(ii) Mixed spadix :
The floral axis is elongated like racemose and covered by spathe like bracts as in spadix.
But in this case, the individual group of flowers present at each node shows cymose arrangement,
e.g., Musa (Fig.5.1.24).
(iii) Cymose umbel:
In this case, it looks like a simple umbel of racemose inflorescence but on closer
observation, it is found that the umbel is formed by the grouping together of a number of
smaller cymose inflorescences, e.g., Allium cepa, Crinum, Lantana, etc.
(iv) Cymose corymb :
Here, a number of smaller cymose clusters are arranged at the same level in a corymbose
manner, e.g., Alstonia scholaris, Holarrhena antidys.entrica, Oldenlardia corymbosa, Ixora
parvifolia (Fig.5.1.25).
Fig.5.1.19. (A) Cyathium of Euphorbia (external view); (B) Longitudinal section
Fig.5.1.22.
Coenanthium of
Dorstenia cordifoila.
Mixed spadix of banana

(A) External view
Fig.5.1.23. (B) L.S.
Mixed panicle of
Ligustrum vulgare.
(v) Thyrsus :
A number of cymose clusters borne acropetally (characteristic feature of racemose) on

an unlimited axis gives rise to thyrsus type inflorescence, e.g., grape vine (Fig.5.1.26).
5.5. FLOWER AND FLORAL PARTS :

Flower is the reproductive part of the plant. It is the most conspicuous structure of the
angiospermic plants. Morphologically, it represents a short and compact branch, the growth
of which is ceased. It develops from the floral bud. It is regarded as a metamorphosed

shoot meant essentially for reproduction of the plant.
5.5.1 PARTS OF A FLOWER :

There are four different parts of a
flower such as calyx, corolla, androecium
and gynoecium. In some cases, it grows in
the axil of a small appendage or leaf like
structure known as bract. Flower having a
bract is termed as bracteate and the flower
without a bract is said to be ebracteate.
The stalk that supports the flower is known
as pedicel. Presence of a pedicel makes
the flower pedicellate and its absence
makes it sessile. The swollen portion of the
pedicel that bears different parts of the
flower is known as receptacle or Fig.5.1.27. L.S. of a typical flower.
thalamus. The floral parts are arranged on the thalamus as the leaves are arranged on the
stem. It may be spiral or cyclic. Atypical flower shows cyclic or whorled type of phyllotaxy. The
members of the consecutive whorls alternate with one another. The plants like lotus, Magnolia,
etc., show spiral type of arrangement of floral whorls. In rose, it is spirocyclic or hemicyclic in
which the floral phyllotaxy is partly spiral and partly cyclic.
Atypical flower consists of four sets of members arranged in four successive whorls on
the thalamus (Fig. 5.1.27). The calyx is composed of sepals, corolla of petals, androecium
of stamens and gynoecium or pistil of carpels. Of these, calyx and corolla are known as
helping whorls or accessory whorls while androecium and gynoecium are called the essential
whorls or reproductive whorls. Calyx and corolla are the two outermost whorls which serve
secondary purposes like giving protection to the reproductive parts and in making the flower
attractive.The stamens of androecium are the microsporophylls and the carpels are the
megasporophylls. These are the male and female sex organs, respectively. When the calyx
and corolla cannot be distinguished and is represented only by one set of accessory members,
the whorl of such members is termed as perianth. Androecium is the third floral whorl consisting
of stamens. It is the male reproductive organ of the flower. Each stamen consists of a long
stalk-like filament and two anther lobes bearing pollen grains. The tissue that joins filament
with the anther lobes is called connective. Each anther lobe is made of two chambers called
pollen sacs or microsporangia. Thus, generally there are four microsporangia in one anther.
Similarly, the fourth and the last floral whorl, gynoecium consists of carpels (megasporophylls).
It is differentiated into ovary, style and stigma. Ovary contains some small egg shaped structures
within it, called ovules. Some of the terms used in connection with flower are given in the Table-
5.1.1
Table-5.1.1
Terms used for description of flowers
TERM MEANING EXAMPLES
Complete All the members are present in a flower China rose

Incomplete One or more of the floral members are Luff a
absent
Bisexual Both male and female sex organs Chinarose
(Perfect) are present.
Unisexual Only one reproductive whorl is present —
(imperfect)
i) Pistillate Only gynoecium is present. Luff a
ii) Staminate Only androecium is present Luff a
Monoecious Both male and female flowers are Castor, Maize
present on the same plant. Cucurbita
Dioecious Male and female flower are borne Mulberry, Betel
on two different plants. Phoenix, Papaya
Neuter A flower which does not bear the Ray florets of
androecium or gynoecium sunflower
Gynomono- Bisexual and female flowers are Some members
ecious present on the same plant. of Asteraceae
Andromono- Both bisexual and male flowers Veratrum of
ecious are present on the same plant. liliaceae
Gynodio Some plants are completely female Thymus
ecious while others bear bisexual flowers.
Androdio- Some plants are completely male —
ecious while others bear bisexual flowers.
Polygamous Staminate, pistillate and bisexual Mango
flowers develop on the same plant.
Trioecious Separate plants bear male, female Silene
and bisexual flowers.
Achlamydous Flowers are without sepals or petals Piper
Monochlamy- Flowers have only one accessary whorl. Tuberose
dous
Dichlamy- Flowers have both calyx and corolla. Pea and Rose
dous
Regular or The flower is divided into two equal Rose

Actinomorphic and symmetrical halves when cut
through any vertical plane passing
through the axis.
Irregular and Flower can be cut into two equal halves Pea, Bean, Cassia
Zygomorphic only through one vertical plane
passing through the centre
Irregular and Flowers cannot be cut into two Canna
asymmetrical symmetrical halves along any plane.
Isomerous Sepals, petals, stamens and carpels Papaver, Argemone
number is uniform,i.e., they are same or Brassica, Hibiscus
multiple of a base number (2,3,4, or 5)
Hetero The numbers of members of —
merous different whorls are different
Tetracyclic Flowers have one whorl each of calyx, —
corolla, androecium and gynoecium
Pentacyclic When there is two whorle of stamens —
or two whorls of petals.
Polycyclic If the number of whorls increases more Wild rose.
than pentacyclic condition
5.5.1. THALAMUS :
Thalamus is the direct prolongation of the pedicel and is also called torus or receptacle.
It may be elongated and conical or like an inverted cone with a spongy flat top as in lotus. It may
be slightly convex as in brinjal or as in Artabotrys, Michelia, etc. and cup-shaped as in epigynous
flowers.
In most of the flowers, thalamus has three internodes which are condensed. When it is
elongated, the first internode (between calyx and corolla) is called anthophore, the second
internode (between corolla and androecium) is called androphore or gynandrophore and the
third internode (between androecium and gynoecium) is known as gynophore. Gynophore is
seen in the flower of Capparis sepiaria (Fig.5.1.28). Androphore or gynandrophore is found in
Passiflora suberosa (Fig.5.1.29). Sometimes the thalamus projects into the ovary and the
carpels remain attached to it which a separated at maturity. This type thalamus is called
carpophore, e.g.. Foeniculum vulgare (Fig.5.1.30).
The floral leaves are inserted on the thalamus. If it is inserted successively such as calyx,
corolla, androecium and gynoecium and it is terminated by the gynoecium the flower is termed
Fig.5.1.28. Gynophore in Capparis Fig.5.1.29. Androphore in Passiflora Fig.5.1.30. Carpophore

sepiaria suberosa in Foeniculum vulgare.
Fig.5.1.31. INSERTIONS OF FLORAL LEAVES : (A) Hypogynous; (B) Perigynous with flat receptacle in
strawberry; (C) Perigynous with concave receptacle in rose; (D) Epigynous.
as hypogynous, i.e, ovary is superior. It is very common and found in Magnolia, mustard
brinjal, etc. In case of cup-shaped concave thalamus, the gynoecium is placed at the centre of
the cup. It is , called perigynous and here ovary is half superior and half inferior. The other
three whorls are inserted on the rim of the flat or the concave thalamus, e.g., peas, strawberry,
rose, etc. In the third type of insertion of the floral whorls on the thalamus, it is found that the
cup shaped thalamus may fuse with the wall of the ovary giving it the lowest position. The other
floral whorls remain above the ovary and in this case, the ovary is said to be inferior. This
condition of insertion of floral whorls, in relation to the thalamus is called epigynous, e.g.,
sunflower, guava and the unisexual pistillate orfemale flowers of Cucurbita (Fig. 5.1.31).
Table-5.1.2
Different types of bracts with examples
Type Character Examples

Leafy bracts leaf like appearance Adhatoda
Scaly bracts bracts membranous disc-florets of Sunflower
Spathe large, brightly coloured Banana, maize
enclosing infloroscence
Involucre bracts in one or more Marigold, Sunflower
whorls around a flower
or a group of flowers
Petaloid bracts coloured and showy Bougainvillea,
Glumes small, dry, scaly bracts Rice
Fig.5.1.34.Types of bracts :
(A) Leafy bracts of Adhatoda;
(B) Spathe of spadix of banana;
(C) Capitulum of sunflower
showing involucre of bracts;
Fig.5.1.32. Different types of bracts and bracteoles
5.5.2. BRACTSAND BRACTEOLES :
Bracts are special leaves from the axil of which a solitary flower or a cluster of flowers
arise. Its position is at the base of the pedicel (Table-5.1.2). Besides, bract-like or scaly
appendages are found on the pedicel. These are known as bracteoles. The bracteoles may
form a whorl just below the calyx as in China rose, in which such a whorl is known as epicalyx.
Bracts vary in size, colour and longevity. Their main function is to protect the floral bud (Fig.
5.1.32). For this purpose, sometimes they become very much enlarged enclosing the whole
cluster of flowers. When green in colour, they also manufacture food. Sometimes they become
brightly coloured in order to attract insects for pollination.
5.5.3. CALYX:
It is the lower most (or outermost) whorl

of the flower, consisting of a number of sepals.
These are usually green, somewhat resembling
small leaves. Below the calyx, in some plants,
there may be presence of epicalyx which is
regarded as bracteoles rather than parts of a
flower. In the bud stage, flower is protected by
the calyx. Like symmetry of flower, it may be
regular or irregular. If the members are free from
ABC
one another, it is termed as polysepalous or
Fig.5.1.33. (A) Ureceolate in Hyoscyamus,
dialysepalous, as seen in mustard. If the sepals Bilabiate in (B) Leonurus; (C) Leucas.
are wholly or partially united with one another
forming a tube like structure, it is called gamosepalous. Regular gamosepalous calyx may be
tubular, bell shaped, or urceolate, etc. Irregular gamosepalous calyx is generally bilabiate
(Fig.5.1.33 A, B and C)
In some, the sepals may be coloured like petals and are called petaloid. These attract
insects for pollination.
Duration of calyx :
On the basis of the length of time that the calyx remain attached to flower or fruit, the
calyx may be of different types, as shown in Table 5.1.3.
Table - 5.1.3
Types of calyx on the basis of duration attached to flowers
Caducous Calyx drops off as soon as the Papaver, Argemone, etc.

flower opens
Deciduous Calyx falls off along with Brassica
the petals (corolla)
Persistent Calyx remain attached to the fruit Solanum, Datura, etc.
Marcescent Persistent calyx assumes a Guava
shrivelled dry-up appearance
Accrescent Persistent calyx grows with the fruit Physalis, Shorea
Modification of calyx :
The sepals of calyx in some cases appear in different forms to serve different
functions other than the normal. It is due to modification of calyx. It is petaloid or petal
like in Sterculia roxburghii due to scarlet colour of calyx. Petaloid calyx is also seen in
Saraca asoca and Caesalpinia pulcherrima. The calyx is modified into hairy, scaly or
feathery structure known as pappus as in Tridax, Sunflower, etc. It is spinous in Trapa.
In Musaenda out of five sepals, four sepals are normal, but the fifth one is large and
petaloid. In some other cases, the sepal is prolonged downwards forming spurred sepals,
e.g., Delphinium, Impatiens. Different types of modified calyx are shown in Fig.5.1.34.
5.5.4. COROLLA :
It is the second (accessory) whorl of flower. Its members are called petals. The corolla
also protects the stamens and carpels in bud condition like does calyx. It is generally brightly
coloured due to the presence of anthocyanin and anthoxanthin pigments. The primary function
of corolla is to attract the insects for pollination. It is possible due to the bright colour of the
petals combined with the scent of essential oils present in it. Like calyx, the corolla may be
polypetalous or gamopetalous in which the petals may be free or united. Petals may sometimes
be green and may look like the sepals. In this case, it is termed as sepaloid as in Annona,
Polyalthia, Artabotrys, etc. In general the lower part of a petal is narrow known as claw; and the
upper part is wide, called limb. It is seen in polypetalous corolla. The claw corresponds to the
petiole, and the limb to the blade of a leaf. The polypetalous corolla is also known as
dialypetalous, while gamopetalous corolla is called sympetalous. When united, the united
portion is the corolla tube and the portion above is known as the corolla lobes. The junction
of the portion of the tube which opens into the limb is called throat.
Forms of corolla :
The form of corolla may be of various types. It depends on symmetry of corolla, free or
united condition of petal and shapes of petals. The different forms of corolla are given below.
(a) Polypetalous and regular corolla :
(i) Cruciform: It consists of four free petals, each having differentiated into claw and
limb. These are arranged in the form of a cross, e.g., mustard, radish, cabbage, etc.
(Fig.5.1.35 A).
(ii) Caryophyllaceous: This form of corolla consists of five petals. The claws are long
while the limbs of the petals are placed at right angles to the claws, e.g., Dianthus,
(Fig.5.1.35.B).
(iii) Rosaceous: It consists of five petals with very short claws or none at all. The odd
petal is anterior and the limbs spread regularly outwards, e.g., wild rose, tea etc.
(Fig.5.1.35 C).
Fig.5.1.34.Pappus in (A) Mikania scandens (Compositae); (B) Valeriana (Valerianaceae); (C) Spinous calyx in
Trapa bispinosa; (D) Spurred calyx of Impatiens balsamina; (E) Hooded calyx of monkshood (Aconitum napellus).
(b) Polypetalous and irregular corolla :

(i) Papilionaceous : Its general appearance resembles a butterfly. Out of five petals,
the posterior petal is larger than others and termed as standard or vexillum, the two
lateral ones are known as wings or alae, and the two innermost are known as the
keel or carina. These two innermost are united to form a boat-shaped cavity, e.g.,
pea, bean, gram, etc. (Fig.5.1.35 D).
(c) Gamopetalous and regular corolla :
(i) Tubular: The corolla tube is cylindrical throughout and the limbs are not spreading.
Tube is more or less equally expanded from base to apex, e.g., central florets of
sunflower (Fig.5.1.35 E)
(ii) Campanulate:
The petals are united forming a bell-shaped structure, e.g., Cucurbita (Fig.5.1.35
.F), Physalis, etc.
(iii) Infundibuliform: The corolla is funnel shaped looking like an inverted cone, e.g.,
Datura, Ipomoea, etc. (Fig.5.1.35.G).
(iv) Hypocrateriform : Gamopetalous corolla is found with a long slender tube and
expanded flat limbs placed at right angles. It is also known as salver shaped, e.g.,
Vinca rosea. (Fig.5.1.35 H).
Fig.5.1.35. Polypetalous corolla forms. (A) Cruciform in mustard (Brassica nigra); (B) Caryophyllaceous in
pink(Dianthus chinensis); (C) Rosaceous in wild rose; (D) Papilionaceous in pea; (1) Complete; (2) Corolla
dissected to show arrangement and forms of petals;
Gamopetalous corolla forms : (E) Tubular in sunflower disc floret; (F) Campanulate in Cucurbita;
(G) Infundibuliform in Ipomoea; (H) Hypocrateriform in Vinca; (I) Rotate in Nyctanthes; (J) Urceolate in
Kalanchoe; (K) Ligulate in marigold ray floret; (L) Bilabiate in Leucas; (M) Personate in snapdragon
(v) Rotate: Gamopetalous wheel shaped corolla, the tube of which is shorter than the
hypocrateriform. It has petals with a circular limb at right angles to the tube, e.g.,
Nerium, Nyctanthes (Fig.5.1.35.1).
(vi) Urceolate: The corolla tube is swollen in the middle, tapering towards both base and
apex like a spindle, e.g., Kalanchoe
(d) Gamopetalous and irregular corolla :
(i) Ligulate or strap-shaped : Here five petals are united to form a short tube at base
which is flattened on one side like a strap or tongue, e.g., the ray florets of Tagetes
Patula (Fig.5.1.35K).
(ii) Bilabiate: The corolla is gamopetalous, zygomorphic and divided into two lips upper
and lower. The mouth of corolla is wide open. The upper posterior part is formed by
the union of corolla lobes while the unequal lower anterior part is formed by the
union of three lobes. It is mostly seen in Ocimum, Leucas (Fig.5.1.35 L) and in
Asteracantha.
(iii) Personate: It is also bilipped but here the lips are placed so near to each other that
the mouth of corolla is closed. The projection of the lower lip closing the mouth is
called palate, e.g., Antirrhinum (Fig.5.1.35M).
Fig.5.1.36.Polyphyllous
petaloid perianth of Gloriosa
Fig.5.1.38.Spike of Polyanthes
In most of the monocots the accessory whorls look alike. They are not differentiated into
green calyx and coloured corolla. These are collectively known as perianth, and the individual
member are called tepal. When the tepals are green like sepals, perianth is called sepaloid,
e.g., date palm and when these are brightly coloured, it is known as petaloid, e.g., Gloriosa
superba (Fig.5.1.36). In grasses the perianth is represented by two lodicules, e.g., Rice
(Fig.5.1.37). If the perianth members are free from one another as in Gloriosa, it is termed as
polyphyllous, but when united it is called gamophyllous, e.g., Polyanthes tuberosa (Fig. 5.1.38).
Aestivation :
The arrangement of petals (and also of sepals) in bud condition with respect to its sister
segments is known as aestivation. It is of following types.
(i) Valvate: The sepals or petals meet by their edges only, e.g., sepals of Solarium.
(Fig.5.1.39A)
(ii) Twisted or contorted : When the margin of petal is overlapped by the next one and
the other margin is overlapped by the succeeding one, it gives a twisted aestivation
(Fig.5.1.39B).
(iii) Imbricate: When anyone of the petal or sepal is completely inner, one completely
outer and each of the remaining members overlap with each other, it is known as
imbricate aestivation. It is of two types:
(a) Ascending imbricate :
The posterior petal is innermost, i.e., its both margins are overlapped (Fig.5.1.39 C), e.g.,
Cassia, Bauhinia, Caesalpinia, etc.
(b) Descending imbricate/vexillary :

The posterior petal is the largest and outer most known as vexillum while the anterior
petal is innermost, is known as keel, e.g., pea, beans (Fig.5.1.39 D), etc.
(iv) Quincuncial: It is a modification of imbricate type. Out of the five petals, two are
completely internal, two completely external while the remaining one is overlapped,
e.g., Murraya (Fig.5.1.39 E)
5.5.5. ANDROECIUM :
The androecium is the male reproductive whorl of the flower. It is composed of stamens.
Each stamen consists of filament, anther and connective (Fig.5.1.40). It is the microsporophyll
consisting of anther lobes or pollen sacs. The pollen sacs are grooved longitudinally along the
ventral face of the anther forming the pollen chambers. Each pollen chamber is a microsporangium
of Arum maculatum.
Fig.5.1.40.Stamen (A) Dorsal view;

(B) Ventral view; (C) T.S. of anther st=staminode; a=another;
g=pistil
Fig.5.1.44.Branched stamen of Fig.5.1.45.Staminal corona of

Hedychium coronarium castor (after Van Tieghem) Calotropis procera
L = labellum
Fig.5.1.48. Different types of

Fig.5.1.46.Staminal corona of Fig.5.1.47. Attachment of anthers (A) connectives (A) Discrete
Eucharis amazonica Adnate (B) Basifixed (C) Dorsifixed (B) Divaricate (C) Distractile
(D) Versatile (D) Appendiculate
and contain numerous pollens or

microspores. A typical anther is dithecous
having two elongated lobes. The stamen,
therefore, bear four microsporangia or
pollen chambers. But in many cases there
are only two and sometimes these two Fig.5.1.49.Cohesion of stamens : (A) Monadelphous; (B)
pollen chambers fuse forming a mature Diadelphous; (C) Polyadelphous; (D) Syngensious; (E)
Synandrous
unilocular anther, e.g., China rose, lady’s
finger, cotton, etc. In Calotropis and orchids, the pollen grains are aggregated in a mass within a
membranous sac called pollinium. According to the number of stamens present in a flower, it
may be monandrous (Poinsettia), diandrous (Acanthaceae), triandrous (many monocots),
tetrandrous (Lamiaceae), Pentandrous (most dicots), hexandrous (rice, bamboo, etc.) or
polyandrous (Rosaceae).
(a) Filament:
The filament is a slender stalk of the stamen which bear anthers. In rare cases a stamen
may be devoid of filament (sessile), e.g., Arum maculatum (Fig.5.1.41). In some cases a stamen
may not develop any fertile anther and it is termed as staminode e.g.. Cassia and Canna. In
the flower of Canna, the showy labellum is formed of staminodes (Fig.5.1.42 & 5.1.43). When
the filament is very long, stamens come out of the flower and are termed as exserted. But, if it
remains within the flower, it is termed as inserted. The filament is ordinarily simple, but it is
branched in Ricinus (Fig.5.1.44). Filaments bearing appendages are called staminal corona. It
is horny in Calotropis (Fig.5.1.45) and cup shaped in Eucharis (Fig.5.1.46), Pancratium, etc.
The mode of attachment of filament to the anther varies. When it is attached throughout the
length at the back of the anther, it is called adnate, e.g., Magnolia and waterlily. If the filament
ends just at the base of the anther, it is called basifixed , or innate, e.g., mustard, Carex, etc.
The attachment is called dorsifixed when the filament is attached to the back of the anther,
e.g., passion-flower and Sesbania, etc. In the members of family Cyperaceae or in many grasses
the attachment is versatile in which the filament is attached at a point about the middle part of
the connective and the anthers seem to swing freely on the filament. The above types of
attachment is shown in the Fig.5.1.47. The stamens may be tetradynamous or didynamous
based on the length of filaments. In the former out of six stamens, four inner are long and two
outer are short while in the latter, two are long and two are short.
(b) Anther:
In all angiosperms, the anthers are generally bilobed and formed of four microsporangia.
It is rarely unilobed or one-chambered either by the abortion of one lobe or by the destruction of
the partition tissue separating the four chambers. The grooved ventral side of the another if
faces the gynoecium or the centre of the flower, the anther is introse but in few cases as in
Gloriosa superba, Iris, Colchicum, etc. the anther faces the petals and such an anther is termed
as extrose.
(c) Connective :
It is a patch of tissues connecting the parallel anther lobes. It may be extremely small or
not well marked and termed as discrete, e.g., sps. of Euphorbia and Adhatoda zeylanica. The
condition is divaricate when connective separates the two anther lobes from one anther, e.g.,
Tilia and Justicia gendarussa. In Salvia, the connective separates two another lobes, of which
the upper one is fertile and lower sterile. This condtion is termed as distractile. The condition
is also called appendiculate, when it bears appendages as seen in Thevetia. Different types of
connectives are shown in Fig.5.1.48.
Cohesion and adhestion of stamens :
Cohesion is defined as the fusion of the members amongst the same whorl while adhesion
is the fusion of the members with respect to the different whorls.
(a) Cohesion of stamens :
Following terms are used to describe the different conditions of cohesion of stamens
confined to different parts of stamens only.
(i) Polyandrous : The statmens are free from one another. Anthers and filaments remain
completely free.e.g, Papaver, Ranunculus, etc.
(ii) Adelphous : In this case, the filaments are fused and anthers remain free. Depending
on the bundles (fused filaments) formed; these may be of different types (Fig.5.1.49A,
B, C).
(a) Monadelphous : The filaments of stamens are fused to form one bundle while anthers
remain free, e.g., Hibiscus, Abutilon, etc.
(b) Diadelphous : The filaments are united into two bundles, anthers remaining free,
e.g., Pisum (Fig. 5.1.49 B).
STIGMA
Fig.5.1.50.Epipetalous
stamens in brinjal.
Fig.5.1.51.Gynostegium in Fig.5.1.52.Flower showing
Calotropis. gynostemium sp=opening into spur;
r=rostellum; po=pollinia; s=sepal;
p=petal; c=caudicle; d=disc.
(c) Polyadelphous : The filaments are united to form many bundles, anthers being free,
e.g., Bombax, Citrus, etc. (Fig. 5.1.49C).
(iii) Syngenesious : In this case, stamens are united by their anthers (Fig.5.1.49.D)
while filaments are free as in Asteraceae, e.g., Tridax, Helianthus, etc.
(iv) Synandrous : Here both filaments and anthers of the stamens are united (Fig. 5.1.49
E) throughout their length, e.g., Cucurbita, Lagenaria, etc.
(b) Adesion of stamens : It is the union of stamens with respect to the different whorls of the
flower (such as stamens and petals, stamens and carpels). These are of following types.
(1) Epipetalous : When stamens adhere to petals, it is called epipetalous condition e.g.,
Datura, Solanum and many other flowers (Fig.5.1.50). If it adheres to the tepals it is
termed as epiphyllous, e.g., Polyanthes tuberosa.
(2) Gynandrous : In this case, the adhesion is between

stamens and carpels as seen in the gynostegium of family
Asclepiadaceae (Fig.5.1.51) and the gynostemium of
family Orchidaceae (Fig.5.1.52).
Insertion of stamens :
Several cases arise with respect to the insertion of stamens.

When the stamens form a single whorl and the number of stamens is
equal to the number of sepals and petals, the flower is isostemonous.
Sometimes there are two whorls of stamens, the first whorl alternating
with petals and the second whorl alternating with sepals. This condition
is termed as diplostemonous. When there are two whorls of stamens of which the first whorl
is alternating with sepals and the second whorl is alternating with petals, the condition is termed
obdiplostemonous, e.g., some members of family Rutaceae (Fig.5.1.53).
5.5.6. GYNOECIUM OR PISTIL :
It is the innermost and the female reproductive whorl of the flower. It is composed of
one or more carpels or megasporophylls. A carpel is simple or monocarpellary when it
consists of a single carpel. This condition is the characteristics of family Fabaceae. But when it
is made up of more than one carpel it is termed as compound or multicarpellary. Multicarepllary
gynoecium may be apocarpous in which each carpel is free from the other or syncarpous
when all the carpels are united forming a compound gynoecium. Apocarpous condition is found
in Clematis, Ranunculus, etc., while syncarpous condition is seen in most angiosperms such as
Brassica, Hibiscus, Datura, etc. (Fig.5.1.54). Among multicarepllary conditions, there are five
types. This is based on the number of carpels. It may be bicarpellary (e.g., Mussaenda,
Coriandrum) with two corpels, tricarpellary (e.g., Allium cepa) with three, tetracarpellary (e.g.,
Fig.5.1.54. Carpels forming Gynoecium (A) External view of simple

gynoecium. (A1) Simple ovary in T.S. (B) Compound apocarpous
gynoecium (C) Compound syncarpous gynoecium. (C1) Compound
syncarpous gynoecium in T.S.
Fig.5.1.55. Atypical carpel.
Datura, Berberis) with four, pentacarpellary (e.g.,

Melia, Hibiscus) with five and multicarpellary, number
of carpels more than five (e.g, Papaver). A typical
carpel has three parts - ovary, style and stigma
Fig.5.1.56.Position of ovary on
(Fig.5.1.55) thalamus as seen in L.S. of flower
(A) Superior; (B) Semi-inferior; (C)
(a) Ovary : Inferior.
It is the lowermost swollen part containing one or more egg like bodies known as ovule.
After fertilisation, ovary transforms into fruit while ovules into seeds. So, ovules are the
predecessor of seeds.
The position of the ovary with respect to other floral whorls and classified as superior,
semi-inferior and inferior has already been discussed under thalamus (Fig.5.1.56).
Chambers in the ovary :
The ovary is only one chambered or unilocular in monocarepllary condition. Thus, in

apocarpous ovary each free carpel would be unilocular. In syncarpous ovary, it may be bilocular
Fig.5.1.57.Chambers in
JocuJe
ovary
A B C D E
(e.g., Solunum, Murraya, etc.), trilocular (e.g., Euphorbia, Musa, etc.), tetralocular (e.g.,
Ocimum, Salvia, etc.), Pentaiocular (e.g., Hibiscus, Geranium etc.) or multilocular (eg., Citrus,
Melia, etc.) (Fig.5.1.57)
Table 5.1.4
PLACENTATION
(A) Marginal The gynoecium is monocarpellary. The Pisum
placenta develops along the fused
margin (ventral suture) of the carpel.
(B) Axile The number of carpels is two or more. Hibiscus, Citrus,
The ventral suture of the carpels meet Solarium, etc.
at the centre of the ovary. So, the
ovary is multichambered. The placentae
arise from the central axis.
(C) Parietal The ovary is one-chambered. The placentae Brassica,
bearing the ovules develop on the inner wall Vanda, etc.
of the ovary. Their position corresponds to the
confluent margins of carpels and their number
corresponds to the number of carpels.
(D) Free-Central The placenta arises from the base of the ovary, Primula,
projects far into its cavity as a swollen central Dianthus, etc.
axis and bears ovules all over its surface. The
ovary is single chambered.
(E) Basal The ovary is simple and unilocular. A single Members of family
ovule is developed at the base. The placenta is Asteraceae
placed on the tip of the thalamus at the floor
of the ovary.
(F) Superficial The ovary is multicarpellary and multilocular. Nymphaea
In this case, the whole inner walls of the
chambers are lined with placental tissue so
that ovules develop all around. It is similar
to axile placentation but the ovule bearing
placentae are brone on the inner surface of
the partition walls.
The ovary contains ovules and the stalk of the ovule that attaches with the carpel is
known as placenta.
Arrangement of ovules :
In different flowers the ovules are arranged differently with their placenta in the ovary in a
characteristic definite manner which is called placentation. Different types of placentations as
mentioned in Table 5.1.4 are shown in Fig.5.1.58.
(b) Style :
The ovary protrudes to a small or long style. Style connects the ovary below and stigma
above. It is usually terminal as it originates from the top of the ovary. In some cases, the ovary
apex is deflected and the style appears to orginate from near the base (basal) or from the side
Fig.5.1.59.Lateral style Fig.5.1.60.Gynobasic style Fig.5.1.61.Branched styles
(lateral), e.g., Alchemilla and mango (Fig.5.1.59). Style may originate from the central depressed
portion of the ovary and such condition is known as gynobasic (Fig.5.1.60) as seen in the
members of family Lamiaceae. The style is usually deciduous, but in some cases it is persistent,
e.g., Naravelia, Clematis. The style of Canna is petaloid. The base of the style may be swollen
forming stylopodium as in the members of family Apiaceae. Sometimes, the style may be
branched, e.g., members of family Euphorbiaceae (Fig.5.1.61).
(c) Stigma :
Stigma is present at the top of the style. Sometimes, when there is no style, the stigma is
placed on the top of the ovary (e.g., Sambucus, Berberis, Lotus, etc.). In this case, it is termed
as sessile. The stigma is commonly rough or hairy and sticky due to secretions. In China rose,
stigmas are separated while it is bifid in Asteraceae. The
number of lobes of stigma may correspond to the number
of carpels. Monocarellary flower of family Poaceae shows
exceptions having bifid and feathery stigmas. The stigma
of Papaver is sessile as well as striate giving star like
appearance. The stigma is branched in Begonia. The three
stimgas of Crocus have funnel shaped foms. The different
types of stigmas as discussed above are given in Fig.5.1.62
(A-F).
Ovule is considered to be an integumented

Fig.5.1.64. Stigma
megasporangium (Fig.5.1.63). It is attached to the Sambucus nigra; (B) Bifid in sunflower;
placenta by a slender stalk known as funicle. The other (C) Bifid and feathery in rice; (D) Striate
and sessile in poppy; (E) Highly branched
end of the funicle is attached to the body of the ovule and in Begonia; (F) Funnel shaped in Crocus
sativus
Fig.5.1.64. Ovules (A) Orthotropous

(B) Anatropous (C) Campylotropous
Fig.5.1.63. L.S. of typical (D) Hemianatropous
anatropous ovule (E) Amphitropous (F) Circinotropous.
the point of attachment is called hilum. An ovule which is attached to the placenta directly,
without the funicle is known as sessile ovule. The funicle continues beyond the hilum and may
extend up to the base of the ovule (chalaza) forming a short ridge, called raphe. The main
body of the ovule is called nucellus. It is surrounded by two coats, the integuments. There is
no integument (ategmic) in parasitic plants like Santalum and Loranthus. A small opening is
found at the apex of of the integuments which is called micropyle. The ovule may be unitegmic
with single integument (e.g., gymnosperms, family Asteraceae and sympetalous or gamopetalous
dicotyledons), bitegmic with two integuments (e.g., monocotyledons and polypetalous
dictyledons). In addition there may be extra outgrowths in a few cases, known as Aril, a collar
like outgrowth from the base Of the ovule often form the third integument (e.g., litchi, nutmeg,
etc.) and Carcuncle, an outgrowth of the outer integument is present in the micropylar region
of some plants (e.g., castor and other members of Euphorbiaceae).
There is a large oval cell, embedded in the nucellus towards the micropylar end which
constitute the most important part of the ovule, the embryo sac.
Based on the mutual position funicle, chalaza and micropyle, the ovules may be
orthotropous, anatropous, campylotropous, hemianatropous, amphitropous or
circinotropous (Fig.5.1.64). The most common type of ovule is anatropous or reversed type
as shown in Fig.5.1.64B. In orthotropous, the ovule remains straight (e.g., family Polygonaceae,
Piperaceae, Urticaceae, etc.) In amphitropous condition, the ovule is placed at right angle to
the funicle (e.g., Ranunculus, Lemna and poppy). In campylotropous condition it is bent like a
horse-shoe, so that micropyle is brought to the chalaza (e.g., many plants of family Cruciferae,
Chenopodiaceae, Caryophyllaceae and other plants like Mirabilis).
5.6. FRUITSAND SEEDS :

The post-fertilization changes in angiosperm results in the formation of fruits and seeds.
It is found that out of two male gametes in the pollen tube, one fuses with the egg cell forming
a zygote which develops into an embryo, and the latter undergoes a series of changes to form
the seeds. Other male gamete fuses with the secondary nucleus of the embryo sac forming a
triploid endosperm. In the meantime, other parts of the ovary get transformed into the fruit. The
fruit provides necessary protection to the seed and helps in its dispersal from the mother plant
to outside, where the seed can germinate to give rise to new plant of its own kind.
5.6.1. FRUITS :
Fertilisation leads to the development of embryo inside the embryo sac of the ovule.
Along with series of changes in the embryo, the ovule is converted into the seed while the wall
of the ovary and other parts of the flower connected to it change into a fruit. Thus, fruit is
defined as ripened ovary. Its biological need is to protect the seeds by forming a case or
vessel around it. It also assists in the dispersal of seeds. Sometimes the fruits may be formed
without fertilisation. This condition is called parthenocarpy and the fruit is known as
parthenocarpic fruit.
5.6.2. PARTS OF A FRUIT:
A fruit consists of seeds and its wall is called

pericarp. The pericarp is distinguished into three
parts such as outer epicarp (the skin of ovary), the
middle mesocarp which may be pulpy (e.g., Mango,
peach, palms, etc.) and the inner endocarp which is
often very thin and membranous (e.g., Orange) or
very hard and stony (e.g., Palms, Mango) (Fig.5.2.1).
In many cases pericarp is not differentiated into three
parts. When the fruit is developed only from the
single ovary of a flower it is called true fruit. But
sometimes, the thalamus, receptacle or calyx may
also grow and form a part of the fruit. In such cases,
it is known as false fruit or spurious fruit (Pseudocarp). Some of the spurious fruits, developed
involving different parts of the flower, are described in Table 5.2.1. and deplicted in Fig. 5.2.2.
Table - 5.2.1
Spurious or false fruits
Parts of the flower other than ovary Example

in fruit formation
1. Calyx is fleshy and form the prominent part of the fruit. Dillenia
2. Thalamus grows round the ovary and becomes fleshy. Apple and pear
3. Thalamus swells up bearing the number of small fruits

on its outer convex surface. Strawberry
4. Thalamus is elongated and bears small true fruits Rose

on its inner concave surface.
5. The inferior fruit is surrounded by the dry Sun flower

thalamus and often crowned by hairs or pappus.
6. The peduncle and the thalmus grow and become

swollen and fleshy bearing below the reniform Cashew-nut
fruit developed from the ovary. (Anacardium)
7. The peduncle becomes fleshy with the actual nut

type of fruit on its top. Semecarpus
8. A number of small true fruits are fused

together to form aggregate fruit. Custard apple
9. The fruit is developed from an inflorescenc Mulberry, pineapple

jackfruit, fig and bayan
5.6.2. DIFFERENT TYPES OF DEHISCENCE :
Fruits, when ripe, may become fleshy and pulpy or dry up becoming papery or stony. The
fruits split open at maturity in order to discharge the seeds to outside. Such fruits are dry and
are called dehiscent fruits. The fruits which do not open at maturity are called indehiscent
fruits. There are various ways by which dehiscence of fruits take place. According to the mode
of opening, the different types of dehiscence marked in the fruit are given in Table - 5.2.2.
Fig.5.2.2.
False fruit
(A)T.S. of an
apple. (A1) L.S.
of an apple;
(B) Cashew nut
Tale - 5.2.2.
Dehiscence of fruits
TYPES OF DEHISCENCE Example
1. Sutural: Fruits split by the margin either ventral Calotropis, Magnolia,

or dorsal or by both. The fruits are developed Members of Fabaceae
from monocarpellary ovary. (pea, bean, etc.)
2. Loculicidal: Splitting takes place through the Hibiscus, Gossypium,

back of the loculus (or chamber) and the Abelmoschus, Adhatoda,
valves separate from the axis. So the number of Rueilia,
valves are the same as that of ovary chamber. Andrographis, etc.
Fruit is developed from polycarpellary ovary.
3. Septicidal: Dehiscence takes place through Brassica, Raphanus,

the partition walls of the multicarpellary fruits. Abroma, etc.
4. Septifragal: Splitting of multilocular fruit takes

place septicidally. In this case, septa or partition Cedrela,
walls break so that the valves fall away. The seeds Pterospermum,
are attached to the central axis of the fruit. Datura, etc.
5. Porous: Fruits split by number of little pores.

Through these pores the seeds are set free. Papaver (Poppy)
6. Transverse: The fruit bursts transversely so that

the upper part separates away from the lower. Portulaca,
Upper cap like part is blown away by wind living Celosia, etc.
the seeds exposed.
5.6.3. TYPES OF FRUITS :
All the fruits (true or spurious) are classified

into three main groups- simple, aggregate and
multiple or composite.
A. Simple fruits :
A fruit developing from a single ovary

(monocarpellary or polycarpellary syncarpous
gynoecium) of a flower is known as simple fruit. It
may be dry or fleshy. The dry fruit again is divided
into dehiscent, indehiscent and schizocarpic
(splitting) fruits.
I. Dehiscent or Capsular fruits :
The fruits of this category burst automatically

on ripening, discharging the seeds. The types of
dehiscence are given in table 5.2.2. This may be Fig.5.2.3.Types of dehiscence : (A) Sutural;
of following types. (B,B1) Loculicidal; (C,C1) Septicidal; (D-E)
Septifragal; (F) Poricidal; (G) Transverse.
(i) Legume or pod : It is a simple, dry,
dehiscent fruit. It develops from a
monocarpellary, superior, one chambered
ovary. It dehisces by both the sutures from
apex to the base, e.g., members of
Fabaceae such as Pisum, Cicer; etc.
(Fig.5.2.4A).
(ii) Follicle : It resembles legume type of fruits

being developed from monocarpellary,
unilocular, superior ovary but differs from the
legumes as it dehisces along one suture
(usually ventral) only, e.g., Calotropis. In
Calotropis, it shows a paired follicle
developing from bicarpellary ovary
(Fig.5.2.4B).
(iii) Siliqua : The fruit is developed from a

bicarpellary, syncarpous, superior ovary Fig.5.2.4. (A-F) Simple, dry, dehiscent fruits; (A)
Legume of pea; (B) Follicle of madar; (C) Siliqua
which is one chambered but appears two of mustard; (D) Silicula of Capsella; (E) Capsule
chambered due to the development of a false of cotton; (E) Capsule of cotton; (F) Capsule of
lady’s finger
partition wall known as replum. The fruit of
this type dehisces along both the sutures from the base upwards, the seeds remaining
attached to the replum, e.g., fruits of Brassicaceae such as Brassica, Raphanus, etc.
(Fig.5.2.4C).
(iv) Silicula : It resembles the siliqua type of fruit but much shorter and flattened, being
nearly as broad as its length and contains only a few seeds, e.g., Capsella bursa-pastoris,
Iberis amara etc. (Fig. 5.2.4D).
(v) Capsule : It is a many-seeded, uni-or multilocular fruit. This kind of fruit develops from a
superior (or sometimes inferior) bi-or polycarpellary ovary. It dehisces in various ways. It
may dehisce by pores (e.g., Papaver) or transversely (e.g., Celosia) or loculicidally (e.g.,
Abelmoschus esculentus) or septicidally (e.g., Linseed) or septifragally (e.g., Datura)
(Fig. 5.2.4E.F).
(vi) Pyxis : It is a capsule type of fruit which splits open transversely along a circular line. The
upper valve serves as cap, e.g., Celosia, Portulaca.
II. Indehiscent fruit or Achene fruits :
This type of fruit is simple; dry and indehiscent. Based on its development, it is divided
into the following types:
(i) Caryopsis : A small, dry, one seeded fruit, it develops from a superior, monocarpellary
ovary. In this case, the pericarp is fused with the seed-coat, e.g., members of Poaceae
such as Rice, Maize, etc., (Fig.5.2.5A).
(ii) Achene : It is similar to caryopsis but the pericarp is not completely fused. It develops
from a superior, monocarpellary ovary with the pericarp free from the seed-coat, e.g.,
Mirabilis, Potentilla, etc., (Fig.11.2.5B).
(iii) Cypsela: It is a one seeded fruit developing from bicarpellary, syncarpous, one chambered,
epigynous or inferior ovary. In this case, pericarp and seed-coat are separate, e.g.,
members of Asteraceae, such as Helianthus, annus (sunflower), Tagetespatula (Marigold)
and Dahlia, etc. (Fig.5.2.5C).
(iv) Samara : It is a simple, dry, indehiscent, one or two seeded fruit, developing from a supe
rior, bortricarpellary ovary, with flattened wing-like outgrowths, e.g., Hiptage, Dioscorea,
Acer (Fig.5.2.5 D,E). Wing-like samara is also found in the fruit of Shorea robusta. But
here the wings are dry, persistent sepals. Winged fruit of this nature is known as samaroid.
(v) Nut: It is a dry, one-chambered and one- seeded fruit developing from a superior, bi-or
polycarpellary ovary. In this case, the pericarp is hard and woody, e.g., Chestnut,
Anacardium occidentale (Cashew-nut), Trapa bispinosa (Water chestnut), Litchichinensis,
etc. (Fig.5.2 F,G). However, Coconuts and Palmyra-palms fruits are not nuts because in
Fig.5.2.5. Simple, dry indehiscent fruits : (A) Caryopsis of wheat; (B) Achene of Ranuncuius; (C)
Cypsela of sunflower; (D) Samara of Hiptage; (E) Samara of Maple; (F) Nut of water chestnut;
(G) Nut of litchi; (G1) L.S. of nut of litchi.
Fig.5.2.7. (A) Regma of

castor; (B) Regma of Hura;
(C) Carcerule of Ocimum. A B C
them endocarp becomes hard and woody. In Areca or Betel-nuts and date-palms, the
pericarp is soft (fibrous in areca-nuts and pulpy in Date-palms). It is the seed, that is stony
and not pericarp as described above. So, these fruits do not come under nut.
III. Schizocarpic or Splitting fruits :
This type of fruit breaks up into a umber of indehiscent bits called mericarp. So it is in
between dehiscent and indehiscent dry fruits since each of the mericarp discharges the seed
only on the rotting of the pericarp. There are several types of schizocarpic, dry, simple fruits.
(i) Lomentum : The fruit is legume type, but constricted or partitioned between the seeds
into a number of one-seeded parts. It usually breaks up into bits containing one or more
seeds, (e.g., Acacia, Mimosa, etc.) (Fig.5.2.6.A).
(ii) Cremocarp : It is a dry, two-seeded indehiscent, schizocarpic fruit, developed from the
inferior, bicarpellary ovary. When ripe, it splits into two mericarps. These are attached to
the carpophore (prolongation of the thalamus), e.g., Coriander, Cumin, Carrot, etc.
(Fig.5.2.6B).
(iii) Double samara : It is a type of two or more chambered winged fruit developing from
syncarpous ovary. The wings are formed out of the pericarp and the fruit breaks up into
two component parts, each enclosing a seed, e.g., Maple (Fig.5.2.6C).
(iv) Regma : It develops from polycarpellary ovary. The fruit breaks up into many components
equal to the number of carpels. Each one is called cocci, e.g., Castor (Fig.5.2.7.A),
Jatropha, Hura (Fig.5.2.7B) and Geranium, etc.
(v) Carcerulus : It is the fruit developed by the superior, bicarpellary ovary with falsely
formed four chambers and having a gynobasic style. The seeds are liberated by the
decomposition of the pericarp, e.g., Ocimum, Salvia, Abutilon, Althaea, etc. (Fig.5.2.7C).
(vi) Utricle : The fruit is one seeded developing from a bicarpellary, syncarpous, unilocular,
superior ovary. It has thin pericarp which splits open by a lid, e.g., Achyranthes, Amaranthus,
etc.
B. Fleshy fruits :
The fruits which become fleshy, remain succulent and juicy, are called fleshy fruits. Normally,
they are indehiscent, so that seeds are set free only after the decay of the pulp. This includes
the following types:
(i) Drupe (stone fruits) : It is a fleshy, one-or more-chambered and one-or more-seeded
fruit. Normally, it is one-seeded with a skinny epicarp, a fibrous and juicy mesocarp and stony
hard endocarp, e.g., Mango (Fig.5.2.8.A), Peach, and Indian plum’ (Fig.5.2.8.B). These are
called ‘stonefruits’ because of the stony hard endocarp. In case of more-seeded drupe, every
seed has got a separate endocarp around, e.g., Borassus flabellifer (Fig.5.2.8.C), It is a true
Fig.5.2.8. Drupe. (A) Mango; (B) Indian plum (Zizyphus); (C) Palmyra palm with three
shown in I.S. and T.S.; (D) T.S. of walnut fruit. Epicarp and mesocarp are not seen in
market walnut as they get peeled off.
fruit since it develops from monocarpellary or polycarpellary syncarpous and superior ovary.
In Coconut, the mesocarp is fibrous (not fleshy as in other drupes) and the edible part is the
endosperm of seed. Other examples of drupe are peach (Prunus) and country almond, etc,
(ii) Bacca or berry : It is a one or many seeded pulpy fruit. It develops from a single carpel
or more commonly from a syncarpous ovary with axile or parietal placentation. Any fleshy fruit
in which there is no hard part excepting the seeds as considered as bacca. The pericarp is
differentiated into epicarp, mesocarp and endocarp or all of these may form a pulp in which the
seeds are embedded. In the begining, the seeds are attached to the placenta; but at maturity
they are found loose in the pulp, e.g., Tomato, Grapes, Brinjal, Plantain, Guava, Papaya, etc.
One seeded berry is found in Date-palm, Artabotrys., etc. (Fig.5.2.9 A-D). There are a number
of fruits of the berry or bacca type which show some variations from the normal type. These are
noted in Table 5.2.3.
Tale - 5.2.3
Different types of berry fruits
TYPES WITH CHARACTERISTICS Example

(i) Pepo: It is a fleshy, many seeded fruit, like the berry. Member of
It develops from an inferior, one-celled or Cucurbitaceae such as
spuriously three-or more-celled syncarpous Gourd, Cucumber,
pistil with parietal placentation. The seeds are Melon, Squash, etc.
attached to the placenta. The epicarp forms a (Fig.5.2.10 A, B and D).
tough rind.
(ii) Hesperidium: It is a many-celled, fleshy fruit Members of Rutaceae

developing from a superior, multicarpellary, such as Oranges and
syncarpous, Multilocular ovary with axile placentation Lemons, etc. (Fig. 5.2.10C)
Here the endocarp projects inwards forming
distinct chambers. The epicarp and mesocarp are
fused together. The epicarp is leathery having
aromatic oils while the mesocarp is represented by
white fibers. The fused epicarp and mesocarp form
the rind. The endocarp is thin and papery. The juicy,
unilocular, succulent hairs are outgrowht of the
endocarp and form the edible part of the fruit.
(iii) Balausta : It is an inferior, many-celled and Pomegranate

many-seeded fruit developing from a multicarpellary, (Punica granatum)
syncarpous ovary. The pericarp is tough. The two (Fig5.2.10E and Fig.11.2.11)
of carpels are placed one above the other. Calyx is
persistent and found on the top. The edible part is
succulent seed-coat (testa).
(iv) Amphisarca : The fruit is formed from a superior, (Aegle)

many chambered and many-seeded ovary. Feronia limonia, etc.
The pericarp is woody. The edible part of the (Fig.5.2.12)
fruit is the inner fleshy layer of pericarp and
the placenta.
(v) Pome: It is a fruit developing from an inferior, Apple

syncarpous ovary. It is a spurious or false as it is (Malus sylvestris)
surrounded by a fleshy thalamus which is edible. and Pear (pyrus communis)
The actual fruit lies within. (Fig.5.2.13 A, B)
A comparative account between drupe and berry is given below in table 5.2.4.
Table - 5.2.4
Comparison between drupe and berry
Drupe Berry
1. Pericarp is differentiated into Pericarp is same as in drupe, but

epicarp, mesocarp and endocarp endocarp is sometimes absent.
2. It is called stone-fruit If endocarp is present,
since endocarp is hard. it is thin and membranous.
3. Seed is enclosed by endocarp. Seed is enclosed by mesocarp.
4. Exmaples are Mango, Coconut, Examples are Brinjal, Banana,
Peach, Almond, Chestnut, etc. Tomato, Chillies, etc.
C. Aggregate fruits :
When a fruit develops from a

single flower with an apocarpous pistil,
it is called aggregate fruit. Since the
carpels are free, each carpel gives rise
to a simple fruitlet. Sometimes these
fruitlets join together giving the
appearance of a single fruit. In many
other cases the fruits remain free from
one another forming a bunch of fruits
known as etaerio of fruitlets. Each
fruitlet, an etaerio may be a follicle, an
achene drupe or berry.
(i) Etaerio of follicles : Etaerio of

follicles are developed from
apocarpous, muiticarpellary
flower. It may be the development
of paired fruits (e.g., Calotropis
and Vinca), three fruits (e.g.,
/\conitum), five fruits (e.g.,
Sterculia) and many fruits (e.g.,
Michelia and Magnolia from a
single flower with free or
apocarpous pistil. In Michelia and
pericarp epicarp
B E
Fig.5.2.10. Fleshy fruits : (A) T.S. of cucumber; (B) Entire cucumber; (C) Hesperidium of lemon;
(D) Hesperidium of orange; (E) Balausta of pomegranate;
Fig.5.2.11. L.S. of
pomegranate.
Fig.5.2.12. Wood-apple
(Aegle marmelos)- an
amphisarca in T.S.
Fig.5.2.13. Pome of apple : (A)

T.S.; (B) L.S. the real fruit with its
pericrap is surrounded by a fleshy
edible thalamus. The pericarp the
epicarp and mesocarp are fleshy
while the endocarp is cartilaginous.
Fig.5.2.14. Etaerio of follicles : (A) Michelia cham-paca. The

pistil (left) develops into the aggregate fruit (right);
(B) Magnolia grandiflora fruit.
DRUPE
THALAMUS
Fig.5.2.16.Etaerio of
drupes in raspberry.
External appearance and
the same in I.S.
RACHfS
OVARY
Fig.5.2.18. Sorosis;
Jack-fruit
Magnollia, there are infinite number of carpels. As the flower matures, the thalamus
elongates and the aggregate fruit looks like a branch of fruits (Fig. 5.2. 14A&. B). In the
fruit of Asclepias, a special name has been given the conceptaculum. Here, the two
follicles are united at the base.
(ii) Etaerio of achenes : This type of fruit is very common. These fruits are clustered together
on a common thalamus. The fruitlets are provided with feathery persistent styles (e.g.,
Naravelia, Clematis) and occur in a group. The achenes remain enclosed in a hollow,
receptacular thalamus (e.g., rose) and occur on a flattop-shaped spongy thalamus (e.g.,
Lotus). The minute achenes are buried as small brown specks on a fleshy edible thalamus
of Strawberry.
(iii) Etaerio of drupes : In this case, a number of small drupes or drupels, developing from
separate carpels of a flower, are aggregated together on a fleshy thalamus, e.g., Raspberry
(Fig.5.2.16).
(iv) Etaerio of berries : It develops from an apocarpous pistil lying embedded in the fleshy
thalamus and grows into a single fruit (e.g., Anona). On the other hand, a group of distinct
and separate berries are produced in Artabotrys and Polyalthia (Fig. 5.2. 17).
D. Multiple or composite fruits :
A multiple or composite type of fruit develops from a number of flowers (inflorescence).

Such a fruit is also known as infructescence. Whole inflorescence with its component parts
takes part in the production of fruit. These fruits are of two types.
(i) Sorosis : It is a multiple fruit developing from a spike or spadix. The whole inflorescence
forms a compact mass. The flowers fused together by their succulent tepals and arranged on a
thick club-shaped rachis. The fertile fruits have edible juicy perianth leaves and the bracts form
more or less juicy chaffs around them. The spine like structures on the tough rind represent the
stigmas of the carpels. The seed is covered by a membranous testa (e.g., Artocarpus, Morus
and Pandanus). The edible part of the fruit is the fleshy and succulent perianth, flower and
bracts (Fig.5.2.18). In Morus, fleshy perianth enclose dry achenes.
There are similar structures found in other cases, but the ovaries are not conspicuous,
e.g. Ananas comos (Pineapple). The polygonal areas present on the surface represent united
ovaries of the constituent flowers of the inflorescence. The sterile bracts present on the top of
the fruit look like crown of small leaves (Fig. 5.2.19).
(ii) Syconus :
The fruit is formed from the hypanthodium type of inflorescence. It is a hollow or pear-
shaped fleshy receptacle that forms the edible part of the fruit. The inflorescence giving rise to
the fruit is also known as coenanthium. The female flowers within the closed receptacle of the
inflorescence develop achenes, forming a multiple fruit of achenes, e.g., Ficus, (Fig.5.2.20A). A
similar fruit is formed in which the coenanthium develops achenes on the open receptacle, e.g;
Dorstenia (Fig.5.2.20B).
Different parts of fruits are used as human food as noted in Table - 5.2.5.
Table - 5.2.5
Edible parts of some common fruits
Common Botanical name Type of Edible parts

English name fruit
Cashew-nut Anacardium occidentale nut Fleshy peduncle and cotyledons

Mango Mangifera indica drupe Mesocarp
Custard apple Anona reticulata etaerio of Pericarp (except apices)
Anona squamosa berries
Apple Malus sylvestris pome Fleshy thalamus
Banana Musa spp berry Mesocarp and endocarp
Fan-palm Borassus flabelifer fibrous drupe Endosperm
Coconut Cocus mucifera fibrous drupe Endosperm
Cucumber Cucumis sativus pepo Mesocarp, endocarp
and placentae
Date-plam Phoenis octylifera one-seeded Pericarp
berry
Common Botanical name Type of Edible parts

English name fruit
Dillenia Dillenia indica pseudocarp; Accrescent calyx
Fig Ficus sps. syconus Fleshy receptacle

Jack-fruit Artocarpus sorosis Bracts, perianth and seeds
infegrifolia
Grape Vitis vinifera berry Pericarp and placentae
Guava Psidium gujava berry Thalamus and pericarp
Indian plum Zizyphus mauritiana drupe Mesocarp including epicarp
Litchi Litchi chinensis one-seeded nut Starchy endosperm
Maize, rice Zea mays, Oryza sativa, caryopsis Starchy endosperm
wheat Tritium aestivum
Melon Citrullus sps. pepo Mesocarp
Orange Citrus sps. hesperidium Juicy placental hairs
Pea Pisum sativum legume Cotyledons
Pear Pyrus communis pome Fleshy thalamus
Pineapple Anans comosus sorosis Outer-portion of receptacle,
bracts and perianth
Pome-granate Punica granatum balausta Juicy outer coat of the
seed or succulent testa
Shaddock Pummelo sps. hesperidium Juicy placenta: hairs
Strawberry Fragaria vesca etaerio Succulent thalamus
of achenes
Tomato Lycopersicum sps. berry Pericarp and placentae
Wood-apple Aegle sps. berry Mesocarp, endocarp and
placentae
Walnut Juglans regia drupe Lobed cotyledons
Groundnut Arachis hypogea lomentum Seed (mainly cotyledons)
Tamarind Tamanindus indica lomentum Mesocarp
Lotus Nelumbo nucifera eataerio of Thalamus and seeds
achenes
Plum Prunus domestica drupe Epicarp and mesoscrap
II. ANATOMY OF FLOWERING PLANTS (ANGIOSPERMS)

5.7. TISSUES :
In multicellular organisms, different parts of the body like leaves, branches, fruits, flowers
carry out different functions. However, they originate from the cells. Cells after their origin get
differentiated and also associate with similar cells to carry out specific functions. A group of
cells more or less alike in form, origin and development, performing common functions, is
called a tissue. This definition may not be quite sufficient to describe the complex tissues like
xylem and phloem in higher plants. In this regard tissue can be considered from two view
points.
1. From a general anatomical point of view tissue is considered as a group of contiguous

cells and form a structural part of a plant.
2. From physiological point of view even widely different cells can constitute a tissue, for
example, xylem consists of conducting elements, supporting elements and storage elements
together forming a complex tissue.
Thus, a tissue may be defined as “a group of similar or dissimilar cells performing or

help to perform a common function or a set of related funtions, having a common origin and
development. ”
Classification of Plant Tissue
Plant tissues may be classified from the structural and funtional point of view. However,
on the basis of stages of development, plant tissues are broadly classified into two fundamental
types : Meristematic tissue and Permanent tissue.
5.7.1. Meristematic tissue :
Meristematic tissue is a group of young, immature, undifferentiated and thin walled

living cells which retain the power of continuous division. It is commonly referred to as a meristem
and occurs in the growing regions of the plant body.
5.7.1.1. Characteristic features of meristematic tissues :
The cells of the meristematic tissues are quite distinct in their cytological and physiological
characteritics from other cells. The following are the characteristics of the meristematic tissues.
(i) The constituent cells of meristematic tissue are in a state of continuous and active division.
(ii) The cells are more or less undifferentiated.
(iii) They are compactly arranged without intercellular spaces.
(iv) They are usually isodiametric in shape.

(v) They are living with abundant cytoplasm and a prominent nucleus for each.
(vi) The cell wall is thin and homogenously cellulosic.
(vii) The vacuoles are either small or absent.
(viii) Endoplasmic reticulum and mitochondria are not fully developed.
(ix) Plastids occur in proplastid stage.
(x) They show greater enzymatic activity and hence are metabolically more active.
CLASSIFICATION OF MERISTEMS
I. Meristems based on the stage or method of development:
Promeristem :
It is the first formed meristem representing the foundation stage of formation of new
developing organ. It consists of young initials and their derivatives. It is present at the of root
and stem apices. It is also known as primordial meristem or embryonic meristem.
II. Meristems based on origin :
On the the basis of origin, meristems are of two types : Primary meristem and Secondary
meristem
Primary meristem : It is derived directly from promeristem. It builds up the primary part
of the plant body. It occurs at the apices of stem, roots and primordia of leaves etc. It continues
to divide and the derivatives differentiate into permanent tissues.
Secondary meristem : It develops from primary permanent tissues which regain the
power of division i.e. it becomes meristematic at a later stage. The secondary meristem add
new cells to the primary body effecting secondary growth in thickness. Cork combium, inter
fascicular cambium, accessory cambium etc. are examples of secondary meristem.
III. Meristems based on position (Fig. 5.1):
On the basis of position in the plant body, meristems are calssified as apical meristem,
intercalary meristem and lateral meristem.
Apical meristem : The meristem that occurs at the apices of the root, stem and leaves
is known as apical meristem. It comprises either of a single apical cell or group of apical cells.
The activity of this meristem results in longitudinal growth (height) of the plant. Apical meristem
includes promeristem and primary meristem.
Fig.5.II. Apical meristem : L.S. through shoot

Fig.5.1. Position of meristems : (A) apex of Vinca, showing three-layered tunica
Longitudinal view; (B) Cross-section. and corpus beneath it.
The apical meristem exhibits a dome shaped structure with clear demarcation in outer
layers (Tunica) and the inner mass (corpus) (Fig. 5.11). The apical meristem is composed of a
small mass of cells which are alike and constitute the promeristem. The cells of the promeristem
differentiate into three regions viz. dermatogen, periblem and plerome which grow and give rise
to primary permanent tissues (Fig. 5.III).
(i) Dermatogen :
This is the single outer-most layer of cells. These divide and give rise to the epidermis of
the stem. In roots the cells of the dermatogen form a mas of small tissues called calyptrogen.
The calyptrogen is also meristematic and give rise to root cap. In dicot root, dermatogen forms
epiblema.
(ii) Periblem :
This is located internal to the dermatogen and forms the cortex of the stem and root.
(ii) Plerome:
This lies internal to the periblem. It is the central region where cells show a tendency
to elongate. These elongated cells form proaombium that gives rise to the varcular tissues
(xylem and phloem) constituting the central cylinder or stele of the stem.
Intercalary meristem :
It is placed between two permanent tissues. Actually it

» promeristem
is a part of the apical meristem which get separated from the
apex during growth. Such meristems are found in monocot
stems and leaf sheaths. They help in increasing the length of
the organ.
Lateral meristem : plerome
These meristems occur laterally on roots and stems.

periblem
The cells are rectangular and always divide in tangential plane.
The cork cambium and fascicular combium are examples of
dermatogen
lateral meristems. The new cells formed by division differentiate
into secondary tissues. These tissues lead to increase in
thickness.
IV. Meristem based on function :
Meristem may be of three types on the basis of

plerome
physiological aspects : protoderm, pro-cambium and periblem
dermatogen
fundamental or ground meristem. The primary meristem at
Fig.5.111 .L.S. of main axis
the apex of the axis is gradually differentiated into the following showing histogens
zones.
Protoderm :
It is the outermost layer which by radial division gives rise to a single layered epidermis.
Sometimes by tangential division, it forms multiple epidermis.
Procambium :
Elongated tapering cells of the growing region constitute the procambium. It produces
primary varcular tissues i.e. xylem, phloem and cambium. Procambium strands are scattered
or occur in a ring, in monocot stems and dicot stems respectively.
Fundamental or Ground Meristem :
The remainder of the meristematic tissues lying in between protoderm and procambium
constitutes fundamental or ground meristem. The cells of this region are large, thin walled and
isodiametric. It forms hypodermis, cortex, endodermis, pericycle, pith and medullary rays.
V. Meristems based on plane of division :
There are three types of meristem based on the plane of division.

Mass or block meristem :
The cells of this meristem divide in all planes to form an irregular mass. Hence it leads
to formation of structures like endosperm, young pith and cortex etc.
Plate meristem :
The cells divide in two planes (Periclinal followed by several anticlinal divisions) and
thus form plate-like structures. Plate meristem results in the formation of uniseriate epidermis
and multiseriate leaf blade.
Rib or file meristem :
Cells of this meristem divide anticlinally to form a column of cells. It results in increasing
the length of various organs. Cortex and pith in stem are formed from this meristem.
VI. Special type : Wound meristem.
These are the surrounding tissues of wound. They multiply to heal up the wound.
Induced meristem :
They are developed at the cutting regions of plant body due to the application of hormones
(Auxin). They help in initiation of root primordia as seen in Rose plants.
Hypertrophy :
This type of meristem occur in diseased tissue which multiply abnormally resulting in
formation of gull (enlarged mass of cells).
Peristemoid :
This type of meristem is represented by stomata initial, archegonial initial, hair initial etc.
Cambium :
Cambium is a type of meristematic cells. (Fig.

5.1V) This is a thin strip of primary meristem lying in
between xylem and phloem. Cambium originates from
pro-combium. It is a meristematic tissue and possesses
most of the characteristics of cells constituting a
meristem. It usually consists of a few layers of thin-walled
and roughly rectangular living cells. The nucleus is
comparatively large. Cells of cambium are in a state of
active division. Cambium cuts off xylem on one side and phloem on the other side. Cambium
restricted to vascular bundles and lying in between xylem and phloem is known as fascicular
cambium. A strip of cells adjoining fascicular combium between the vascular bundles when
becomes meristematic is known as interfascicular cambium. Cambium developing in the cortex
of stem is known as phellogen or cork-cambium. Cambium is responsible for secondary growth
in thickness of the plant Body. Summary of the classification of meristematic tissues is given
below:
Classification of Plant tissues

I
Merist ematic Permanent
— on the basic of development - Promeristem
— on the basic of origin Primary meristem

M
e
r
i — on the basic of position
< Secondary meristem
Apical meristem
s Intercalary meristem
t Lateral meristem
e
m Mass or Block meristem
a — on the basic of plane of division Plate meristem
t
i Rib or file meristem
c
— on the basic of function Protoderm
Procambium
Ground meristem
i— Simple tissue Parenchyma

P Collenchymatry
e Sclerenchymato
r
m
a — Complex tissue / Xylem
n \ Phloem
e
n
t Laticiferous tissue
I— Special & secretory
5.7.1.2. Permanent Tissues :

< Glandulartissue
These are composed of fully differentiated mature cells that have lost the power of
division. They have attained their definite form and size.
Characteristic features of permanent tissues :
(i) Cells may be living or dead.
(ii) Cell walls may be thin or thick.
(iii) Cells may contain reserve, excretory or secretory substances.
(iv) Intercellular spaces may be present or absent.
(v) Metabolic activities are relatively slow.
(vi) Vacuoles prominent.

Classification of permanent tissues :
On the basis of origin, permanent tissues are of two types (a) Primary permanent
tissues which develop from primary meristematic tissue, eg. parenchyma, collenchyma etc. (b)
Secondary permanent tissues which develop from secondary meristems, eg. secondary xylem,
secondary phloem, cork etc.
On the basis of function, permanent tissues are of the following types
(i) Photosynthetic or assimilatory tissue.
(ii) Food storing tissue.
(iii) Conducting or vascular tissue.
(iv) Secretory tissue
(v) Mechanical tissue
(vi) Protective tissue
Broadly permanent tissues are of the following three types :
(i) Simple tissues
(ii) Complex tissues
(iii) Special or Secretery tissues.
Simple tissues :
A simple tissue is made up of one type of cells forming a homogenous or uniform mass.
These are of following three types (Fig. 5.V) :
(a) Parenchyma:
The cells are more or less isodiametric. Typical parenchymatous cells are oval, spherical
or polygonal in shape. Their walls are thin and made up of cellulose. Young cells are loosely
packed with intercellular spaces. The cells have active protoplast having power of growth and
division. They may contain leucoplasts or sometimes chloroplasts. The cells contain vacuolated
cytoplasm with a distinct nucleus. They occur universally in all plants in the softer parts like
cortex; pith, mesophyll of leaves, fleshy parts of succulents, pulp of fleshy fruits etc. (Fig.5.5a).
Type of parenchyma :
(i) Normal type : They are isodiametric with intercellular spaces. They form cortex, pith etc.
(ii) Chlorenchyma : These are the parenchyma containing chloroplasts.
(iii) Aerenchyma: Parenchymatous cells with well developed air cavities forming a connected
system throughout the entire plant. They provide buoyancy to the floating hydrophytes
and also help in gaseous exchange.
(iv) Idioblast : These are the parenchyma which produce and store oil, tannins, calcium
oxalate in their vacuoles or cytoplasm.
(v) Prosenchyma : These are thick and elongated cells providing mechanical support to
the plants.
(vi) Accessory parenchyma : parenchymatons cells which become meristematic and help
in repairing wound.
Function of paranchyma :
Its function is mainly storage of food, water and mucilage. It helps in photosynthesis,
provide buoyancy to plants, helps in gaseous exchange and wound healing and regeneration
by cell division.
(b) Collenchyma :
The tissue consists of somewhat elongated living cells with inter cellular spaces much
thickened due to deposit of cellulose and pectin. The cell wall is unevenly thickened. The cells
often contain chloroplasts and thus participate in photosynthesis. Being flexible in nature,
cellenchyma gives tensile strength to the
stem. Its function is, therefore, both
mechanical and vital.
(c) Sclerenchyma :
It consists of long, narrow or short,

thick walled and lignified cells usually
pointed at both the ends. Matured cells
become dead due to loss of living
protoplast. They give rigidity and
mechanical strength to the plant body. On
the basis of variation in form, structure,
origin and development, sclerenchyma
may be either fibres or sclereids. The fibres
are pointed and needle like. They occur in
groups as sheets or cylinders in various
parts of the plant body. The sclereids are
very thick walled, hard and strongly
lignified. They are mostly isodiametric,
polyhedral short and cylindrical with narrow
cavity.
Special or Secretory tissues :
The tissues which are concerned with special functions like secretion or excretion of
different kinds of substances like resins, latex, gums, nectar etc. are called special or secretory
tissue. These tissues are of two main types.
(i) Laticiferous tissue :
These are long, thin walled living, multinucleate and profusely branched tube like tissues.
They contain milky juices called latex. Latex may contain organic substances like protein,
carbohydrates, oils, enzymes, alkaloids and some inorganic salts in emulsion or suspension
form. These tissues are irregularly distributed in parenchymatous tissues. They occur either as
latex cells or latex vessels (a) Latex cells are single, multinucleate with scanty cytoplasm. They
may be branched or unbranched without forming network. They are commonly found in
Calotropis, Catharanthus, Ficus, Euphorbia etc. (b) Latex vessels are formed by longitudinal
rows of parallel branched ducts connected with one another by partial or total dissolution of the
end walls of their branches. They are commonly found in Carica, Papaver, Argemone (Fig. 5.VI).
(ii) Glandular tissues :
These tissues are made up of glands. The glands are well organised and specialised
structures which contain some secretary or excretory products. They occur either as single
cells or in groups. Glands may be external or internal (a) External glands are superficial in nature
and formed on epidermis. They may occur as hydathodes (Fig. 5.VII), glandular hairs, nectaries
and digestive glands etc. (b) Internal glands are confined to internal tissues. They are formed
by lysis of some of the cells or by splitting of cells at middle lamella. They occur as oil glands,
mucilage secreting glands etc.
Fig.S.VI. Laticiferous ducts in sectional view

A. Euphorbia pilulifera, B. Carica papaya
5.7.1.3. Complex Tissues :

Complex tissue is an assemblage of two or more types of cells performing a common
function. It is heterogenous in nature. Xylem and phloem constitute complex permanent tissues,
(a) Xylem (Xylos = wood):
Xylem or wood is a complex tissue consisting of both living and dead cells. It forms a
part of vascular bundles. It is a conducting tissue and is composed of four elements of different
kinds:
(i) Tracheids (ii) Vessels (iii) Wood fibres and (iv) Wood parenchyma. The function of
xylem is to conduct water and mineral salts upwards from the root to the leaf. Besides, it gives
machanical strength to the plant body. (a) (b) (c) (d)
(i) Tracheids :
A single tracheid is a very elongated or tube
like cell with hard, thick and lignified walls and a large
cavity. They are devoid of protoplast and hence dead.
The end of the tracheids are tapering, blunt or chisel
like. Their walls are usually provided with one or more
rows of bordered pits. Tracheids may also be annular,
spiral, scalariform or pitted. In transvevse section they
are mostly angular, either polygonal or rectangular
(Fig.5.VIII).
In angiosperms they occur associated with
vessels. Being lignified and hard, tracheids give
strength to the plant body. Their main function is to
Fig. 5. VI11. Different types of tracheids (a) Annular
conduct water and mineral salts from the root to the (b) Spiral (c) Scalariform (d) Pitted
leaf.
(ii) Vessels or Tracheae :
Vessels are rows of elongated tube-like dead cells, placed one above the other with
their transverse or end-walls perforated. A vessel or trachea is thus, like a series of water pipes
forming a pipe-line. The cells are dead and without protoplast. They are shorter and broader
than tracheids. Their walls are thickened in various ways. Depending on the mode of thickening
verseis have received names such as annular, spiral, scalariform, reticulate and pitted (Fig.
5.IX). Vessels have been found in a majority of angiosperms and in some pteridophytes and
gymnosperms. They help to conduct water and mineral salts. They also serve the mechanical
function of strengthening the plant body.
Fig.5.IX. kinds of vessels A. annular; B. spiral; C. scalariform; D. reticulate;

E. a vessel with simple pits; F. a vessel with bordered pits.
(iii) Wood fibres or xylem fibres :
Sclerenchymatous cells associated with xylem are known as wood fibres. These are
found in both the primary and secondary xylem. They have thickened walls and obliterated
central lumen. They add mechanical strength to the xylem and the plant body as a whole.
(iv) Wood parenchyma :
Parenchymatous cells associated with xylem form the wood parenchyma. The cells are
living and possess thin cellulosic walls. They assist in the transport of water. They store starch,
oil and ergastic substances like tannins.
The first formed xylem elements are described as protoxylem and consists of annular,
spiral and scalariform vessels, and lie towards the centre of the stem. The later formed xylem is
described as metaxylem and it consists of some tracheids alon gwith reticulate and pitted vessels.
In stem, it lies away from the centre and its vessels have much bigger cavities compared to
those in the protoxylem.
Phloem
Phloem or bast is another permanent
complex tissue. It is also known as bast leptome. It
is composed of four elements (Fig. 5.X).
(i) Sieve-tubes (ii) Companion cells (iii)

Phloem parenchyma (iv) Phloem fibres.
(i) Sieve-tubes :
Sieve-tubes occur as long, slender tube-like

structures composed of elongated cells, placed end
to end. Their walls are thin and made of cellulose.
Their transverse walls are oblique and are perforated
(sieve pores) in a sieve like manner to form the sieve
plate. The protoplasmic strands of one sieve tube
pass to the adjacent sieve plate. In winter, the sieve
plates get impregnated with callus pads made up of
cellulose. On arrival of spring i.e. under the favourable
conditions the callus gets dissolved. A young sieve
tube contains nucleus, cytoplasm and other Fig.5.X. Phloem tissue from the
organelles. In old sieve tubes the callus forms a stem of Nicotian a.
permanent deposit. Its nucleus gets disintegrated but a layer of cytoplasm prevails which is
continuous through the pores. Sieve tubes conduct food materials like carbohydrates and proteins
from leaves to the storage organs and later from the storage organs to the growing regions of
the plant body.
(ii) Companion cells :
These are specialised parenchymatons cells which are closely associated with sieve
tube elements in their origin, position and function. It is living, containing dense granular cytoplasm
and large elongated nucleus. Companion cells are connected with sieve tubes by pits present
in their common longitudinal wall. The companion cells play an important role in the maintenance
of pressure gradient in the sieve tubes. They occur only in angiosperms.
(iii) Phloem parenchyma :
These are thin walled living parenchymatous cells associated with phloem tissue. They
store organic food materials but are absent in monocotyledons.
(iv) Bast fibres or phloem fibres :
Elongated sclerenchymatons cells having pointed, needle like apices occurring in the
phloem are knwon as phloem fibres or bast fibres. The walls of these fibres are usually thickened
due to the deposit of cellulose or lignin. At maturity the bast fibres lose their protoplasts and
become dead. Phloem fibres of many plants like Corchorus, Cannabis etc. are the sources of
commercial fibres.
5.7.2. THE TISSUE SYSTEM :

In higher plants tissues are arranged into different tissue systems. Sachs, a German
scientist for the first time in 1875 classified the plant tissue system into three basic categories
basing on their position and morphology. These are : (1) epidermal tissue system, (II) the
ground/fundamental tissue system, and (III) the vascular tissue system. Each system may
consists of only one or a combination of tissues that may be structurally alike or of different
nature, but perform a common function and share a common origin.
1. The Epidermal Tissue System :
The epidermal tissue system conists mainly of epidermis, stomata, the epidermal
appendages, root hairs etc. The epidermis (epiupon; dermaskin) is the outermost covering of
the primary plant body. It originates from the protoderm. In shoot, apices with distinct tunica and
corpus organization, the epidermis develops from the outer layer of tunica. The epidermis is
usually single layered but multilayered epidermis also exists as in the leaves of Ficus, Begonia,
Nerium etc. In old stems, after secondary growth epidermis is replaced by periderm. The
Fig.5.XI. Stomata A. structure of a typical stoma B. stoma of a monocot leaf

with dumbell-shaped guard cells C. sunken stoma in Nerium leaf.
epidermis is made up of elongated compactly arranged cells forming a continuous layer without
intercellular spaces except in petals of plants like Linum. The cells appear more or less rectangular
in transection. The epidermal cells are parenchymatous in nature with a large central vacuole
surrounded by a thin layer of colourless cytoplasm. The outer or exposed walls of epidermal
cell are thick and usually covered by a cuticle formed by the deposition of a waxy material
secreted by epidermal cells. The outermost layer in root is referred to as epiblema or piliferous
layer due to its structure and nature of origin. Epiblema is neither cutinised nor provided with
stomata. The epidermis in some monocots like the members of the family Poaceae contain
builliform or motor cells. These are thin walled, larger cells helping in rolling and unrolling of
the leaves by changes in their sizes, depending on the inflow and outflow of water.
Several minute openings called stomata (sing, stoma) are found in the epidermis of young,
green, aerial parts and leaves. Each opening is surrounded by a pair of guard cells (Fig .5.XI). Guard
cells, unlike epidermal cells contain chloroplasts and are responsible for the opening and closing of
stoma. Sometimes, a few neighbouring epidermal cells, in the vicinity of guard cells become
specialised in their shape, size and contents and are known as subsidiary cells. In such case, the
stomatai aperture togetherwith the guard cells and the subsidiary cells are called stomatal apparatus.
When the subsidiary cells and guard cells develop from the same mother cells then the
stomata are mesogenous (Hyplocheilic). If the subsidiary and guard cells have independent
origin the stomata are perigenous (syndetocheilic). In mesoperigenous condition, at least
one subsidiary cell has a common origin with the guard cells and the rest do not. The distribution
of stomata in leaves vary greatly. In most of the dicot leaves the stomata are confined to the
lower surface of the leaf. Such leaves are called hypostomatic. In some plants like Polygonum
amphibium, having floating leaves stomata are confined to upper surface of leaf. Such leaves
are called epistomatic. In monocots stomata are found on both surfaces such leaves are
amphistomatic. In plants growing in deserts or dry regions, stomata occur sunken in pits to
reduce excessive transpiration.
The cells of the epidermis give rise to a number of appendages which vary greatly in
their shape, structure and function. These are known as trichomes (fig. 12. 13). These
appendages may be multicellular or unicellular. The unicellular trichomes are usually simple,
unbranched and elongated structures. The multicellular trichomes and glands are made up of
several layers of cells. There are four main types of trichomes : (i) Hairs, (ii) collectors, (iii) water
vesicles or bladders and (iv) scales. The multicellular haires are associated with stem epidermis
while unicellular hairs are found on roots. Hairs can also be branched or unbranched. Collectors
are glandular hairs with multicellular stalk and head. They are found in bud scales and stipule.
Water vesicles, otherwise known as vesicular hairs are greatly distended epidermal cells storing
water. Scales are modified trichomes with discoid sheet or plate of cells mounted on stalk.
Besides trichomes epidermal emergences like spines, warts are also found in plants.
Epidermal root hairs are extensions of individual epidermal cells, which occur in a zone
just behind the tips of young growing roots. Because a root hair is simply an extension and not
a separate cell, there is no cross-wall isolating it from the epidermal cell. The root hair is formed
due to elongation of epidermal cell, and is therefore, not a protuberance or appendage. The
root hairs are ephemeral (short-lived) structures which play an important role in anchoring the
plant body in the soil and absorbing water and minerals from the soil.
I. Function:
(i) Protection of inner tissue.
(ii) Cuticularization of epidermis, checks transpiration. Presence of cuticle also

reduces heating by reflecting light to certain extent.
(iii) Stomata are responsible for exchange of gases.
(iv) Bullform cells help in rolling and unrolling of leaves thus control transpiration.
(v) Different appendages carry out specialised functions like scale for protection,
water vesicles for retention of water etc. glands for secretion etc.
(vi) Root hairs are responsible for absorption.
(vii) Epidermal hairs on seeds help in dispersal.
II. The Ground Tissue System (Fundamental Tissue System):
The ground tissue system or fundamental tissue system forms the main bulk of the
plant body. It extends from below the epidermis upto the central region. This system has various
kinds of tissues such as parenchyma, collenchyma and sclerenchyma of which parenchyma is
the most abundant. It is differentiated into following zones and sub-zones.
I. Cortex :
This is the zone that lies in between epidermis and pericycle, and is made up of primary
tissues. It varies in thickness from a few layers to many layers. In monocot stems, owing to the
presence of scattered vascular bundles, the cortex is undifferentiated and the zone is
predominantly parenchymatous. In roots the cortex consists of many layers of thin-walled
parenchyma and a distinct endodermis. In the leaves the ground tissue, consisting of thin
walled chlorenchyma is called mesophyll. In the dicotyledon stems the cortex is usually
differentiated into :
(a) hypodermis : (or outer cortex) (b) General cortex (or middle cortex) and (c)
endodermis (or innermost cortex) Hypodermis lies just below the epidermis (absent in roots),
composed of few layers of continuous or discontinuous band of collenchyma (as in dicot stems) or
sclerenchyma (as in monocot stems). The general cortex or cortical parenchyma is a few layered
thin-walled parenchymatous zone with or without chloroplasts. The cortex is composed of thin
walled, uniform, round and spherical parenchymatous cells. The cells have copious intercellular
spaces but the angular parenchymatous cells are without intercellular space. In some cases
chlorenchyma or aerenchyma may be differentiated from these cells to help in the adaptation of the
plant. The endodermis is the innermost layer, often wavy and is single layered. It often contains
numerous starch grains. In a transverse section it appears barrel shaped without intercellular spaces.
The cells show deposition of waxy materials- Suberin. On their radial walls, these appear in the
form of strips or bands which are called casparian strips (Fig. 5.XII. a,b,c). In roots, some thin
walled, rounded cells are are seen in endodermis in the proximity of protoxylem which area known
as passage cells. The passage cells allow flow of water from cortex to xylem but prevent the back
flow of water due to the thickening of radial walls and outer walls.
Function : The cortex has several primary and secondary functions. In the stem it
basically serves as a protective zone. Besides, the cortex in the stem also stores food. In roots
it mainly stores food and also helps in absorption and translocation of water.
2. Pericycle :
It forms a multi-layered zone between the endodermis and the central vascular cylinder.
Pericycle is present in both stem and root but is not found in many hydrophytes and monocot
stems. In dicot stems, it occurs as a cylinder encircling the vascular bundles and the pith.
Pericycle originates from apical meristem. Pericycle may be parenchymatous as in roots or
sclerenchymatous as in dicot stems. In dicot stems the sclerenchymatous pericycle may be
continuous or discontinuous. The scleremchyma form isolated strands which associate with the
phloem or bast of the vascular bundle in the form of a cap known as the hard bast. In roots, the
pericycle consists of a single layer of small very thin-walled, more or less barrel-shaped cells.
Function : In roots the pericycle is the seat of origin of lateral roots. In dicot roots
pericycle give rise to lateral meristem. In stems, pericycle is the seat of origin of adventitious
roots. Parenchymatous pericycle serves as storage layer.
Parenchyma
Intercellular space
Endodermis
Pericycle
Protoxylem
Phloem
Metaxylem
Fig.5.XII. (a) and (b) Endodermal cells with casparian strips in two different views,
(c) T.S. of a portion of maize root showing position of endodermis and pericycle.
3. Pith :
The central core part of the ground tissue is known as pith or medulla. It is usually made
up of thin-walled, large-celled parenchyma with or without intercellular spaces. In dicot stems,
the pith is often large and well developed. Here, it extends out-wards to the pericycle between
the vascular bundles. Each such extension of pith is a strip of parenchyma known as pith ray
or medullary ray. In dicot root, the pith is either small or absent whereas in monocot root a
distinct large pith is present. In dicot root often bigger vessels of xylem meet at the centre.
Function : It chiefly serves as the store house of several excretory substances such as
tannins, phenols, calcium oxalate etc. It also provides mechanical strength. The medullary
rays, at the time of secondary growth, become partly meristematic and produce secondary
meristem.
III. The Vascular Tissue System : (Fascicular Tissue System).
The vascular or fascicular tissue system is derived from procambium and serves as the
conducting system of plants. The vascular tissue system consists of varying number of strands
or bundles of tissues embedded in the ground tissue known as vascular bundles. Each vascular
bundle is constituted by xylem and phloem. A strip of meristematic tissue called cambium may
or may not be present in between xylem and phloem. When cambium is present the vascular
bundle is said to be open vascular bundle and when cambium is absent it is said to be closed.
Open vascular bundles are associated with dicot stem where as closed ones are seen in monocot
stem. Further, the vascular bundles are arranged in a ring in the ground tissue of dicot stem,
whereas they are scattered in the ground tissue of monocot stem.
Depending upon the organ of plants and their function in the plant body, the arrangement
of xylem and phloem differs in vascular bundles. Accordingly vascular bundles are of the following
types (Fig. 5.XIII).
(i) Radial : Vascular bundles have xylem and phloem patches arranged separately on
alternate radii. This is seen in roots.
(ii) Conjoint: Vascular bundles have xylem and phloem arranged on the same radius situated
opposite to each other. This is seen usually in stems and leaves. Conjoint vascular
bundles can again be of two types depending upon the number and position of phloem
patches.
(a) Collateral vascular bundles have one patch of phloem and one patch of xylem. They
can be either open or closed type. It is a very common type of vascular bundle seen in
stems of most dicot except the members of family cucurbitaceae and some members of
family Convolvulaceae.
(b) Bicollateral vascular bundle consists of two patches of phloem on either side of a
single patch of xylem. There are also two patches of cambium on both side of xylem.
The outer patch of phloem lying towards the periphery is separated from the xylem by
outer cambium strip. The inner patch of phloem lying towards the centre is separated
from xylem by inner strip of cambium. These vascular bundles are always open. The
outer combium is concave and the inner is plano-concave in appearance. These vascular
bundles are found in the stems of the members of family Cucurbitaceae and some
members of Convolvulaceae.
(iii) Concentric : These vascular bundles have either phloem surrounding the xylem or
xylem surrounding the phloem. This is again of two types.
(a) AmphicribralXylem lies at the centre and is surrounded by a ring of phloem. It is also
known as hadrocentric and in common in Pteridophytes like Lycopidium, Selaginella
etc.
(b) AmphivasalPhloem lies at the centre and is surrounded by xylem. It is also known as
leptocentric type. Such bundles are seen in certain monocot stem like Dracaena.
(a-i) (c-i)
phloem
Phloem
Outer cambium
Cambium
Xylem
Xylem
Inner cambium
Inner phloem
(a-ii) (b-ii)
Phloem
Cambium
Xylem
(d-i) (d-ii)
Xylem
Phloem
Phloem
Xylem
Fig.5.XIII. Various types of vascular bundles : a-i & ii. conjoint collateral open;
b.-i, ii. conjoint collateral closed; c-i/ii. Bicollateral; d-i/ii. Radial;
e-Amphicribral (f) Amphivasal.
5.7.3. ANATOMY OF STEM, ROOT AND LEAF :
Anatomy of Stem :
Generally stem forms the aerial part of the plant. It has characteristic internal organization.
The stem performs various functions and each function is carried out by a different tissue. The
detailed anatomy of stem can be studied under two headings such as dicotyledonous stem and
monocotyledonous stem.
Common anatomical features of stem :

(i) Epidermal hairs are mostly multicellular.
(ii) Cortex is differentiated into zones.
(iii) Vascular bundles are conjoint, collateral, bicollateral or concentric.
(iv) Xylem is endarch.
Common anatomical features of dicot stem :

(i) Cortex is divisible into different zones.
(ii) Hypodermis is usually collenchymatous.
(iii) Vascular bundles are arranged in a ring.
(iv) Vascular bundles are conjoint, collateral, open endarch.
(v) A distinct pith is present.
(A) Anatomy of some dicotyledonous stems :
The internal structure of dicotyledonous stems varies in different plants. Helianthus and
Cucurbita stems deseribed below.
Internal structure of stem of Helianthas annus (Sun flower) :
A thin transverse section of the stem shows following features. The outline of the cross
section of stem is circular (Fig. 5. XIV).
Epidermis :
It is the outermost layer. It consists of a single row of closely packed thin parenchymatous
cells. A thin layer of cuticle sometimes remain present on the epidermis. Epidermis bears
uniseriate multicellular hairs.
Cortex :
It occurs below the epidermis and extends up to the pericycle. It consists of three regions.
The outer hypodermis, the middle general cortex and lowermost endodermis.
(i) Hypodermis :
It occurs just below the epidermis. It consists of a few layers of collenchymatous cells.
The cells are thickened at the intercellular spaces. The cells are living and contain chloroplasts.
(ii) General cortex :
It occurs between hypodermis and endodermis. It consists of several layers of thin

walled parenchymatous cells.
(iii) Endodermis :
This is the inner most layer of cortex. It consists of a single layer of compactly arranged
barrel shaped cells. The cells of endodermis contain numerous starch grains. Thus endodermis
is referred to as starch sheath.
Pericycle :
This zone occurs in between the endodermis and the vascular tissue. It consists of
semilunar patches of sclerenchyma alternating with parenchyma. Each patch of sclerenchyma
is associated with the phloem of vascular bundles. Thus it is known as hard bast or bundle cap.
Vescular bundles :
Vascular bundles are arranged in a ring. They are separated from each other by
parenchymatous medullary rays. Each vascular bundle is conjoint, collateral and open type. It
consists of phloem, combium and xylem.
(i) Phloem : It occurs towards the periphery and consists of sievtubes, companion cells,
bast fibres and phloem parenchyma.
(ii) Cambium : It occurs in between phloem and xylem. It consists of 2-3 layers of thin
walled, small sized compact and rectangular cells.
(iii) Xylem : It occurs towards the centre and consists of tracheids, vessels, wood parenchyma
and wood fibres. Xylem is endarch i.e. protoxylem lies towards the centre, and metaxylem
towards the periphery.
BOW
Fig.5.IV. T.S. of stem of Helianthus annus : A. Ground plan B. A portion magnified.

Pith :
It occurs at the centre. It consists of round, thin walled parenchymatous cells with distinct
intercellular spaces.
Pith rays : (Medullary rays)
These are the regions radiating from pith. They occur in between the vascular bundles.
They consist of a few layers of radially elongated parenchymatous cells.
INTERNAL STRUCTURE OF STEM OF CUCURBITA MAXIMA
The outline of a cross section is wavy having ridges and furrows (Fig. 5. XV).
Epidermis : It consists of a single layer of cells. The epidermis is covered by a thin layer
of cuticle. Multicellular hairs arise from epidernal cells.
Cortex: It occurs below the epidermis and extends upto the pericycle. It consists of the
outer hypodermis, the middle general cortex and the lowermost endodermis.
(i) Hypodermis : It occurs below the epidemis, consists of 6-7 layers of
collenchymatous cells in the ridges and 2-3 layers in the furrows.
(ii) General cortex : It forms a narrow zone consisting of 2-3 layers of
chlorenchymatous cells.
(iii) Endodermis : It is the innermost layer of the cortex lying immediately outside the
pericycle. It consists of barrel shaped cells and is wavy in outline, the cells contain
starch grains.
Pericycle: It consists of 3-4 layers of thick-walled, lignified, polygonal, sclerenchymatous
cells. The general out-line of this layer is also wavy.
Vascular bundles : The vascular bundles are arranged in two rings. They are conjoint,
bicollatral and open type. The outer ring of vascular bundles are comparatively small in size and
occur opposite to ridges. The inner ring consists of larger vascular bundles which occur below
the furrows. Each vascular bundle consists of
(i) Xylem (ii) Two strips of cambium and (iii) two patches of phloem.
Phloem : Phloem occurs in two patches. The outer phloem is towards the periphery
and the inner phloem is towards the pith. The outer phloem is planoconvex and the inner one is
semilunar in shape. Phloem consists of sieve tubes, companion cells, phloem fibres and phloem
parenchyma.
Cambium : Combium occurs in two strips-the outer and the inner one on each side of
the xylem. The cells are rectangular and thin walled.
Xylem : It is located in between the two cambium patches. It consists of vessels,
tracheids, wood fibres and wood parenchyma. Xylem is endarch in nature.
Pith : It is a hollow cavity.
B. Internal structure of monocotyledon stems :
Stems of monocotyledon plants exhibit a number

of variations in their anatomy from that of dicotyledon
stems. The following distinct differences are marked in
monocot stem.
(i) The hypodermis is sclerenchymatous and

sometimes with sclerenchyma patches or
embedded vascular bundles in the
hypodermis.
(ii) There is no distinction into general cortex,
endodermis, pericycle and stelar region.
The whole mass of tissue constitutes the
ground tissue.
(iii) The vascular bundles are scattered and lie
more towards periphery than the centre.
(iv) Each vascular bundle is closed i.e. devoid
of cambium.
(v) The vascular bundle has either a
sclerenchymatous bundle sheath or bundle
cap.
(vi) Phloem parenchyma is absent.
Fig.5.XV. T.S. of cucurbits stem: A.Ground
(vii) Pith is absent. plan B. A portion magnified.
Internal structure of stem of maize (Zea mays) :

A thin transverse section of the young maize stem reveals the following internal structure
from the periphery to the centre (Fig. 5. XVIA).
(i) The outline of the stem is circular.
(ii) Epidermis : This is the outermost layer of cells which is usually single layered.
It is covered with a thick cuticle and bears few stomata.
(iii) Hypodermis : This forms a narrow zone of sclerenchyma, usually two or three
layers thick. It occurs below the epidermis.
(iv) Ground tissue : The entire tissue lying inside the epidermis, except for the
vascular bundles, is known as the ground tissue. The ground tissue is not
differentiated into cortex, endodermis, pericycle and pith. It consists of rounded
parenchymatous cells with distinct intercellular spaces.
(v) Vascular bundles : The vascular bundles are many in number and are of variable
size. They are collateral and closed and lie scattered in the ground tissue. The
Fig.5.XVI. (A) Maize stem (a scetor) in T.S.

(B) A Vascular bundle in Maize stem (magnified.)
peripheral vascular bundles are smaller in size than the central ones. Each vascular
bundle is oval and is more or less completely surrounded by a sheath of
sclerenchyma which is specially developed on the two sides - upper and lower.
The vascular bundles are conjoint, collateral, endarch and closed. The vascular
bundle consists of two parts, xylem and phloem (Fig. 5. XVIB).
(a) Xylem : The xylem consists of four distnct vessels arranged in the form of a Y, and a
small number of tracheids arranged irregularly. Two smaller vessels lying at the arm
base constitute the protoxylem. The two bigger vessels lying laterally constitute the
metaxylem, The lowermost protoxylem vessels open into a cavity called water containg
cavity. Besides, wood fibres occur associated with tracheids in between the two big
pitted vessels. Thin walled wood (or xylem) parenchyma surrounding the water containing
cavity occurs in the protoxylem.
(b) Phloem : The phloem lies outer to the xylem. It consists of sieve tube elements and
companion cells. Phloem parenchyma is absent. The outermost portion of the phloem,
which is a broken mass, is the protophloem, and the inner portion is the metaphloem.
Internal structure of stem of Canna :
A thin transuerse section of the young Canna stem shows the following internal structure
from the surface to the centre.
The stem is circular in outline (Fig. 5.XVII).
(i) Epidermis:
Epidermis consists of a single layer of tangentially elongted, cutinised and compactly

arranged cells.
Fig.5.XVII. A Portion in T.S. of flowering

scape (stem) of Canna.
(ii) Ground tissue :
It is the whole tissue that extends from the epidermal layer to the centre of the axis and
in this tissue vascular bundles are embedded. It is not differentiated into hypodermis, endodermis
and pericycle. It consists of the following regions.
Just below the epidermis 2-3 layers of compactly arranged parenchymatous cells are
present.
Inner to parenchymatous layer, a few layers of chlorenchyma cells occur.
Isolated patches of sclerenchymatous cells are seen attached to the inner side
chlorenchymatous layer. The rest of the ground tissue consists of thin walled parenchymatous
cells.
(iii) Vascular bundles :
Vascular bundles varying in shapes are distributed irregularly in the ground tissues.
More number of vascular bundles are seen towards periphery. Peripheral bundles are smaller
than the central bundles. Each vascular bundle is oval shaped and has a sclerenchymatous
bundle sheath. The vascular bundles are conjoint, collateral, endarch and closed. In the xylem
there is a large metaxylem element being surrounded by few protoxylem elements. Phloem is
present on the outer part of the vascular bundle. It does not possess phloem parenchyma.
Table - 5.1
Differences between Zea mays and Canna Stem
Stem of Zea mays Stem of Canna
1. Cuticle is thick 1. Cuticle is thin
2. Hypodermis consists of 2-3 layers 2. There occurs 2-3 layers of compactly
of sclerenchyma arranged parenchyma below the
epidermis
3. Chlorenchyma layer and patches 3. Chlorophyllous layer and patches of
of selerenchyma are absent in sclerenchyma occur in the ground
ground tissue tissue.
4. Xylem is “Y” shaped with metaxylem 4. There is a single metaxylem vessel
consisting of two wide, pitted vessels which is surrounded by protoxylem
making the arms of “Y”. Protoxylem elements.
elements are generally present at
the base of “Y”.
5. Phloem elements are present 5. Phloem elements surround the
between the forked arms of the “Y” xylem element and found on the
shaped xylem. outer part of the vascular bundle.
5.7.32. ANATOMY OF ROOTS
The internal structure of root is comparatively simple than that of the stem. It is a simple
organ and lacks any lateral appendages and nodes. The primary structure of the root in a
transverse section shows certain distinct characters.
(i) The outermost layer of the root is known as epiblema or piliferous layer. It is not covered
by cuticle.
(ii) Epidermal hairs or root hairs are unicellular
(iii) Hypodermis is absent.
(iv) Cortex is a broad zone.
(v) Endodermis is with characteristic casparian strips which occur outside the vascular
bundles.
(vi) Vascular bundles are radial.
(vii) Xylem is exarch.
The detailed anatomy of dicot and monocot roots are described separately.
(A) Dicot root:

Dicot roots show the following distinct anatomical features.
(i) Number of vascular bundles varies from 2-6.
(ii) The pith is either reduced or absent.
(iii) Old roots exhibit secondary growth.
Internal structure of young root of gram (Cicer arietinum) :
A thin transverse section of the root reveals the following internal structure under microscope
(Fig. 5. XVIII).
1. Epiblema : This is the single outermost layer of thin walled cells.
Some of these cells give rise to unicellular root hairs from their outer surface.
2. Cortex: Inner to epiblema, there occurs multilayered thin walled parenchymatous cortex
with conspicuous intercellular spaces.
3. Endodermis : The endodermis is the innermost layer of cortex. It surrounds the stele as
a cylinder. It consists of closely packed barrel shaped cells. Radial walls and inner walls
of this layer are often thickened. This thickening is known as casparian strips.
4. Pericycle : Inner to endodermis, there occurs pericycle. It consists of single layered,

thin walled small parenchymatous cells.
5. Vascular Bundles :
Xylem and phloem occuring in separate patches arranged in a ring.
Vascular bundles are four in number arranged on alternate radii.
Xylem is exarch i.e. protoxylems towards periphery and metaxylems towards centre.
The xylem consists of vessels.
The phloem consists of sieve tubes,

companion cells and phloem
parenchyma.
6. Conjunctive Tissue : The parenchy

matous cells lying between xylem and
phloem bundles is known as conjunctive
tissue.
7. Pith : Pith is absent but a very narrow

zone of parenchyma is present. In old
roots, pith is not observable.
B. Monocot root:
The roots of monocotyledons show the

following anatomical features
(i) Number of vascular bundles are

usually more than six.
(ii) The pith of monocot root is broader

than that of dicot root.
Fig. 5.XVIII. T.S. of a typical dicot root.
Table - 5.11
Anatomical differnces between stem and root.
Stem Root
1. Mostly epidermis is covered by distinct 1. Epiblema lacks cuticle.

cuticle.
2. Stem hairs are either unicellular or 2. Root hairs are unicellular. They are not
multicellular They are separated from separated from cells of epiblema by
epidermal cells by walls. walls.
3. Stomata may occur in epidermis. 3. Stomata are absent.
4. Cortex is generally differentiated into 4. Cortex is an undifferentiated mass.
zones like hypodermis, general cortex
and endodermis.
5. Hypodermis is either collenchymatous 5. Hypodermis is absent. Thick walled
or selerenchymatous. exodermis is present in some roots in
its place.
6. Endodermis lacks casparian strips, 6. Endodermis is distinct with casparian
cells of endodermis contain starch strips, Pericycle is present. Lateral roots
grains. Pericycle is not present in all arise from pericycle.
stems. Lateral branches are superficial.
They do not develop from pericycle.
7. Vascular bundles are conjoint, collateral 7. Vascular bundles are radial in
or concentric. arrangement.
8. Xylem is endarch. 8. Xylem is exarch.
Table - 5.Ill
Anatomical differences between dicot and monocot stems.
Dicot stem Monocot stem
1. Hypodermis is collenchymatous. 1. Hypodermis selerenchymatous.
2. Ground tissue system is clearly 2. Ground tissue system is not clearly
differentiated into cortex and pith. differentiateliated into cortex and pith.
3. Vascular bundles are arranged in a ring. 3. Vascular bundles are scattered in the
This is called stelar region. ground tissue system.
4. Vascular bundles are fewer in number. 4. Vascular bundles are comparatively
5. Vascular bundles are wedge shaped. more in number.
6. Vascular bundles are surrounded by 5. Vascular bundles are ellliptical or rounded
bundle sheath. 6. Vascular bundles are not surrounded
by any bundle sheath.
7. Vascular bundles are closed. 7. Vascular bundles are open.
8. Phloem parenchyma is absent. 8. Phloem parenchyma is present.
9. Pith is present. 9. Pith is absent but grand tissue is present.
Table - 5.1V
Anatomical differences between dicot root and monocot root.
Dicot root Monocot root

1. Cortex is comparatively narrow. 1. Cortex is wide.
2. Pericycle is single layered. 2. Pericycle is oftern multilayered.
3. Pericycle produces lateral roots, 3. Pericycle produces lateral roots.
cambium and cork cambium.
4. Vascular bundles ranges from two to 4. Vascular bundle are more than six in
six in number. number.
5. Xylem vessels are angular. 5. Xylem vessels are oval or rounded.
6. Pith is not well developed or absent 6. Pith is well developed.
7. Secondary growth takes place. 7. Secondary growth does not take place.
Internal structure of young root of Maize (Zea mays):
A thin transverse section of the root reveals the following internal structure under the
microscope (Fig. 5.XIX).
1. Epiblema or piliferous layer: This is the single outermost layer composed of row of
loosely-set thin walled cells with a number of unicellular root hairs.
2. Cortex : It occurs beneath epidermis. This is a many layered zone of parenchymatous

cells with conspicuous inter-cellular spaces between them.
3. Endodermis : The innermost layer of cortex is differentiated as an endodermis. The

endodermis is composed of a row of barrel-shaped closely packed cell. Radial walls and
often the inner walls develop secondary thickening, known as casparian strips.
Certain cells of endodermis remain thin walled, known as passage cells which facilitate
the movement of water from cortex to protoxylem.
4. Pericycle : This is the ring like layer lying internal to the endodermis. It is made up of
both parenchyma and sclerenchyma cells.
5. Vascular bundles : Polyarch (many in number) and radial i.e. xylems and phloem form
an equal number of separate bundles. They are arranged in a ring. Protoxylem occur
towards the periphery and metaxylems lie towards centre, i.e. xylem is exarch. Protoxylems
consist of annular and spiral vessels, and metaxylems of reticulate and pitted vessels.
6. Conjunctive tissues : The parenchyma in between xylem and phloem bundles is known
as conjunctive tissues.
7. Pith : Pith is large and central in position. It is composed of loosely arranged

parenchymatous cells containing abundant starch grain.
Fig.5.XIX. T.S. of the root of Zea mays.
5.7.3.3. ANATOMY OF LEAVES :
Leaves exhibit tissue system like stem and roots. The tissue system of leaves consists
of epidermal tissues, ground tissues, and vascular tissues. All the said tissues show a definite
pattern of arrangement with certain differences in the dicotyledons and monocotyledons. The
arrangement of leaf lamina both in dicotyledons and monocotyledons exert certain influence on
their internal structure and thus, they are being dealt under dorsiventral and isobilateral leaves
respectively.
A. Dorsiventral Leaf
Dorsiventral leaves are found in dicot plants. Here a leaf-blade is held horizontally by
the petiole. Its upper surface is directly exposed to the sun and the lower surface is less
illuminated. Because of the unequal illumination, there occurs difference between the lower
and upper sides of leaf. Thus the leaf is said to be dorsiventral.
Ficus bengalensis, Ficus religiosa, Citrus, Healianthus, Mangifera indica etc. are examples
of dorsiventral leaves.
Internal structure of leaf of Mango (Mangifera indica)
A thin transverse section passing through mid-rib region reveals the following internal
structure (Fig. 5. XX).
1) Upper Epidermis :
This consists of a single layer of cells covered by a thick cuticle. The cuticle prevents
excess loss of water from the leaf surface.
2) Lower Epidermis :
This is also a single layer with a thin cuticle. Stomata occur in between the epidermal cells.
Each stoma is surrounded by two guard cells. The guard cells contain chlorplasts. Remainder
of the epidermal cells lack chloroplast. Internal to each stoma a large cavity called the
respiratory cavity is seen. The stoma facilitates exchange of gases (Oxygen and Carbon
dioxide) between the atmosphere and the internal tissues, besides loss of water by
transpiration.
3) Mosophyll :
The ground tissue lying between the upper epidermis and the lower epidermis constitutes
the mesophyll. It is differentiated into palisade parenchyma and spongy parenchyma.
Fig.5.XX. Transverse section of a typical dorsiventral leaf.

a) Palisade Parenchyma :
It consists of 2-3 layers of cells and

occurs below the upper epidermis. The cells are
elongated and closely packed with their long axis
at right angles to the epidermis. The cells contain
a large number of chloroplasts. Thus, the
function of palisade parenchyma is synthesis of
carbohydrate by the pocross of photosynthesis.
lower vascular bundle
b) Spongy Parenchyma
B
This zone is present below the palisade
zone and extends upto the lower epidermis. Its
cells are round, oval or irregular and are loosely
arranged, enclosing numerous large intercellular
spaces and air cavities. The air spaces help in
the exchange of gases with external atmosphere.
The cells contain a few chloroplasts, which is
much less than the palisade tissue. This is why midrib
Vascular bundle
the colour of lower surface is lighter than the
upper surface of leaf.
Vascular bundles
Vascular bundles are conjoint, collateral

and closed.They are embedded in the mesophyll
tissue. Some vascular bundles are small and
some are large. Each vascular bundle is
lower epidermis
surrounded by a parenchymatous bundle sheath.
Fig. XXI. A. T.S. of maize leaf. B. T.S. of Bamboo leaf.
In case of large bundles, bundle sheath is C. T.S. of Date palm leaf.
connected with the epidermal layers by panels
of parenchyma cells. These panels are called bundle sheath extension. Larger bundles
correspond to midrib. In each bundle, xylem occurs on adaxial (i.e. upper) side of leaf, i.e.
towards the upper epidermis. Xylem is mesarch. The phloem occurs on the abaxial (i.e. lower)
side, i.e. towards the lower epidermis.
B. Isobilateral leaf
Isobilateral leaves are also called unifacial leaves. These types of leaves are seen in
most of the monocotyledons. An isobilateral leaf is more or less equally illuminated on both
sides. Maize, bamboo, date palm leaves etc. are the typical examples of isobilateral leaves. A
thin section at right angle to one or more veins reveals the following internal structure.
Internal structure of isobilateral leaf:
A typical isobilateral leaf has the following internal structure (Fig. 5.XXI).
Epidermis
The structure of both upper and lower epidermis is more or less similar. Each of the
epidermis consists of a single layer of non-chlorophyllous cells. The epidermis on either side
bears more or less an equal number of stomata and is also uniformly thickened and cutinized.
In grasses a few large, empty and colourless cells are also present at intervals on the upper
epidermis. These are called bulliform cells.
Mesophyll
The entire tissue between the upper and lower epidermis is called the mesophyll. The
mesophyll is not differentiated into palisade and spongy parenchyma.
Vascular bundles
Many vascular bundles are seen equally spaced in the mesophyll tissue. They are
arranged in a parallel manner. The size of the vascular bundles may be equal in some plants
and unequal in others. Each vascular bundle is conjoint, collateral, endarch and closed. Vascular
bundles are surrounded by a distinct parenchymatous bundles sheath (border parenchyma).
Two distinct patches of sclerenchyma are present above and below each of the large vascular
bundle and extend upto the upper and lower epidermal layers. The xylem is located towards the
upper epidermis and the phloem towards the lower epidermis.
Table - 5.V
Major anatomical differences between dorsiventral and isobilateral leaf.
Features Dorsiventral leaf Isobilateral leaf
Cuticle Thick at upper epidermis and uniform cuticle

thin at lower epidermis
Stomata More on lower surface Equal number of stomata on either side.
Upper Continuous, or few stomata Discontinuous, presence of many stomata,
Epidermis no bulliform cells bulliform cells present.
Mesophyll Differentiated into palisade Uniform and not differentiated into
Tissue parenchyma and spongy spongy and palisade parenchyma.
parenchyma
Vascular Irregularly distributed and of Regularly distributed and of almost
Bundles different sizes equal size except the central one.
Table - 5VI
Distinction between palisade and spongy parenchyma.
Palisade parenchyma Spongy parenchyma
1. Present in dorsiventral leaves Present in both dorsiventral and isobilateral

leaves.
2. Columnar cells without intercellular Rounded cell with intercellular spaces, loosely
spaces. Closely arranged arranged.
3. Contain more amount of chloroplasts contain less amount of chloroplasts.
4. No respiratory cavity Possess respiratory cavity and open to outside
through stomata.
5. Prsent below the upper epidermis Present below the palisade layer in dorsiventral
leaf and between both the epidermis in
isobilateral leaf.
5.7.4. SECONDARY GROWTH :
In most dicotyledonous stems and roots, distinct secondary growth is visible, which
increases the diameter or thickness of the stems and roots. Secondary tissues are formed due
to the activity of the lateral meristems, i.e. cambium in the stelar region and cork-cambium in
the extra-stelar region respectively. The increase in thickness due to the addition of secondary
tissues cut off by the cambium and the cork cambium in the stelar and extra-stelar regions
respectively is spoken of a secondary growth.
In general secondary growth is not marked in monocot stem. However the stems of
Dracaena. Agave Yucca etc. exhibit secondary growth. Under experimental conditions, some
leaves also exhibit secondary growth.
5.7.4.1. SECONDARY GROWHT IN DICOT STEMS :
Formation of Cambium ring The strip of cambium present between xylem and phloem
of a vascular bundle is known as fascicular or vascular cambium. At first the parenchymatous
cells of the medullary rays in a line with cambium becomes maristematic. This joins to the
fascicular cambium on either side and forms a complete ring. The cambium ring is thus partly
primary and partly secondary meristem in origin.
(A) Activity of the cambium and formation of secondary tissues
The cambial ring becomes active and begins to cut off new cells, both to-wards the
inner and outer sides. The cells cut off to-wards the outer side get differentiated into the
secondary phloem. The cells to-wards the inner side get differentiated into the secondary xylem.
The secondary phloem consists of sieve-tubes, companion cells, phloem parenchyma and
often patches of bast fibres. Many of the textile fibres of commerce such as jute, hemp, flax etc.
are the bast fibres of secondary phloem.

The secondary xylem consists of
scalariform and pitted vessels, tracheids,
wood fibres and wood parenchyma (Fig.
5.XXII).
The cambium is always more

active on the inner side than on the outer.
As a result, the xylem increases more
rapidly than the phloem and soon forms
a hard compact mass. This forms the
Fig.5.XXII. Different stages in the secondary
main bulk of the plant body. Due to the growth in a dicot stem
continued formation of secondary xylem,
both the primary and secondary phloem of the earlier years get gradually crushed.
At places, cambium forms some narrow bands of parenchyma which pass through
secondary phloem and the secondary xylem. These are the secondary medullary rays.
Fate of primary tissues
The primary xylem and primary phloem tissues are pushed inward into the pith and
outwards respectively by the continuous production of secondary tissues cut off by the cambium
ring. The primary xylem is gradually pushed inward and is found at the centre of the axis; where
as, the primary phloem, being soft in nature, gets completely crushed.
These activities in the stelar region exerts a great pressure outwordly. The cortex cells,
the pericycle and the epidermis divide anticlinally to cope up with the production of tissues in
the stelar region.
Formation of annual ring or growth ring
The activity of the cambium ring is under the control of series of physiclogical and
environmental factors. For example, in spring the cambium becomes more active and forms a
greater number of vessels with wider cavities. In winter, the temperature is low due to which the
cambium also becomes less active and forms narrow pitted vessels, tracheids and wood fibres.
The xylem (wood) formed during the spring is known as spring wood or early wood and which
is formed in winter is called autumn wood or late wood. The spring wood is lighter in colour and
exhibits low density where as the autumn (or winter) wood is darker and has higher density.
These two kinds of wood appear together, in a transverse section of the stem, as a concentric
ring known as the annual ring or growth ring. Successive annual rings are formed year after
year by the activity of the cambium. Each annual ring corresponds to one years growth. Thus
one can estimate the age of plant to some degree of accuracy by counting the total number of
annual rings. Annual rings are readily seen with

naked eye in the logs of a tree trunk (Fig. 5.XXIII).
Heart-wood and sap-wood : In old trees,

the greater part of the secondary wood is filled up
with tannins resins, gums, essential oils, etc.,
which make it hard and durable. It looks dark or
brown. This region is known as heart-wood. The
heart is dead and conduction water does not take
Fig. 5.XXIII. A, cut surface of a stem showing
place through it. The heart wood gives mechanical annual rings, B, an annual ring in section
support to the stem. The outer region of the (magnified).
secondary wood is of lighter colour and is known
as sap-wood or alburnum. It helps in conduction of water and mineral salts from the root to the
leaf.
(B) Secondary growth in extra-stelar region
Secondary growth in the extra stelar region occurs to cope with the addition of tissues in
the stelar region. It occurs in the cortex and helps in the formation of periderm. It occurs by the
formation and activities of a secondary meristem called cork cambium or phellogen.
Origin and activity of the cork-cambium or phellogen
Due to the addition of secondary phloem and secondary xylem elements, the outermost
layer of the cortex becomes highly stretched and may crack open. During this process, a few
layers of meristematic tissue arise in the cortex. This is called the cork cambium or phellogen.
The nature of cambium is secondary. Commonly it arises in the outer layers of the cortex i.e.
hypodermis. It may also arise in the epidermis itself, or in the inner layers of the cortex, or even
in the pericycle. The cork combium consists of narrow, thin-walled and roughly rectangular
cells. It is of few layers in thickness. The cork cambium cuts off cells on both the sides-cork on
the outer side and secondary cortex on its inner side. The cells of the secondary cortex are
parenchymatous in nature and often contain chloroplasts.
Cork
The new cells cut off by the cork-cambium on its outerside are roughly rectangular and
soon become suberized. They form the cork of the plant. Cork cells are dead, suberized, thick
walled and brown in colour. They are arranged in radial rows. Being suberized, cork is impervious
to air and water.
Functions of Cork
(i) It acts as a waterproof covering to the stem (ii) It also protects the plant against the
attacks of parasitic fungi, (iii) Cork cells, being dead and empty, containing air only, are bad
conductors of heat. This being so, a sudden variation in outside temperature does not affect the
internal tissues of the plant, (iv) Cork is also made use of by the plant for the healing of wounds.
(The bottle cork is obtained from the cork cells of Quercus suber.)
Bark
In restricted sense, all the dead tissues lying outside the active cork cambium constitute
the bark of the plant. It, therefore, includes the epidermis, the lenticels and cork, and sometimes
also hypodermis and a portion of the cortex depending on the position of the corkcambium.
Thus the deeper the origin of the cork-cambium, the thicker would be the bark (Fig. 5.XIV).
The term bark in a wider sense is used to describe all tissues outside the vascular
cambium of the stem.
Phellem, phelloderm and phellogen layers are collectively called periderm. Thus periderm
is a protective multilayered structure of secondary origin.
On the basis of function, two types of barks are distinguished ring bark and scale bark.
When the cork cambium appears in the form of a complete ring, the bark that is formed comes
away in a sheet; such a bark is known as the ring bark as in Betula. When the cork-combium
appears in strips the resulting bark comes away in the form of scales, such a bark is known as
the scale bark as in Psidium (guava).
!— Complementary cells.
■Phellem
■Phellogen
Phelloderm
Fig.5.26. Transverse section through lenticel
Function of bark
The bark protects the inner tissues; (i) against the attack of fungi and insects (ii) against
loss of water by evaporation and (iii) against variation of external temperature.
Lenticels
These are small aerating pores formed in the bark of stems through which gaseous
exchange takes place. Externally they appear as scars or raised portions on the surface of
stems. Lenticels are first formed below the stomata. A section through one of the scars shows
that the lenticel consists of a loose mass of small thin walled cells called complementary cells or
filling tissue.
SAMPLE QUESTIONS
A. VERY SHORT ANSWER TYPE QUESTIONS :

I. Fill in the blanks :
1. Prop root is a modified------------ .
2. In----------the adventitious root is modified for floating purpose.
3. The modified adventitious root in Tinospora is----------------.
4. The thorn of Aegle is a modified--------------.
5. Zingiber is a modified------------ .
6. Stem is negatively gootropic whereas root is--------------- phototropic.
7. Root is positively geotropic whereas stem is positively---------------- .
8. In Allium cepa the type of modified stem is a----------------.
9. The appendage present at the base of the pedicel of a flower is known as-------------.
10. The appendage present in between the base of the pedicel and thalamus is
called---------------.
11. The swollen upper portion of the pedicel in a flowers is known as----------------.
12. A plant is said to be---------- when both male and female flower are present in the same
plant.
13. A plant is said to be----------- when both androecium and gynoecium are absent.
14. When staminate, pistillate and bisexual flowers develop on the same plant, it is- said
to be---------- .
15. A flower is said to be----------- when it is divided into exactly two equal halves passing
through the centre in one position only.
16. In epigynous flower the ovary is------------ .
17. In--------- flower the thalamus is a inverted cone with spongy flat top.
18. In rose flower the development of thalamus is called-------------- .
19. Foliar nature of sepals is seen in------------ flower.
20. In banana, the bract is----------- shaped.
21. Small, dry, scaly bracts found in grass family are called-------------- .
22. When sepals are coloured like petals the calyx of the flower is said to be-----------------.
23. The calyx is known as------------when the sepals remain attached in fruit.
24. In mustard the form of corolla is------------ .
25. In Vinca the form of corolla is------------ .
26. Quincuncial type of aestivation is found in------------- plant.
27. The flower is said to be------------in which the carpels are united.
28. The placentation, in the members of family cruciferae is of---------------- type.
29. The placentation,------------- type is found in the family Compositae.
30. In Brassica, the type of inflorescnce is------------- .
31. In Oryza, the type of inflorescence is------------- .
32. In Banana, the type of inflorescence is--------------- .
33. In Coriandrum the type of inflorescence is------------- .
34. Hypanthodium type of inflorescence is found in--------------.
35. Cyathium type of inflorescence is found in------------- .
36. In family Labiatae, the type of inflorescence is-------------- .

37. In Calotropis, the type of inflorescence is------------- .
38. In cotton the fruit is------------ type.
(legume, follicle, siliqua, capsule)
39. The fruit of pomegranate is a--------------.
(berry, amphisarca, balausta, nut)
40. Coconut is a fruit which is classified as---------------.
(drupe, berry, nut, capsule)
41. A polycarpellary apocarpous pistil gives rise to----------------. kind of fruit.
(simple, aggregate, multiple pome)
42. The fruit of pineapple is known as-------------- .
(syconus, hesperidium, sorosis, balausta)

43. Caryopsis type of fruit is found in--------------.
(legume, mustard, rice, cotton)
44. Tomato is a fruit classified as------------- .
(drupe, berry, capsule, pepo)
45. Mango is a fruit which is classified as-------------- .
(drupe, berry, nut, pome)
46. Mustard is a fruit classified as------------- .
(legume, follicle, siliqua, capsule)
47. The receptacle grows, becomes fleshy and edible in---------------- .
(pome, berry, drupe, pepo)
48. Parthenocarpic fruit results when --------------.
(ovules do not develop in the ovary, more than one embryo develop in the ovule,
fruits develop without fertilisation, gametes formed without reduction division)
49. In Mimosa the fruit is------------ type.
(cremocarp, regma, carcerule, lomentum)
50. --------- type of fruit is found in sunflower.
(Caryopsis, achene, cypsela, nut)
51. The fruit of fig is known as------------- .
(syconous, hesperidium, sorosis. balausta)
52. Hiptage fruit is classified as------------- .
(caryopsis, samara, achene, cypsela)
53. The fruit of castor is known as--------------.
(Lomentum. cremocarp, regma, carcerulus)
54. The fruit of orange is known as--------------.
(drupe, berry, pepo, hesperidium)
56. The fruit develops from a hollow, pear-shaped fleshy receptacle enclosing a number
of minute seeds is known as------------- .
(drupe, berry, sorosis, syconus)
57. The edible part of apple (pome) is-------------- .
(fleshy calyx, fleshy thalamus, fleshy peduncle, fleshy ovary)
58. In Rice the edible part of fruit is------------- .

(thalamus, endocarp, placentae, starchy endosperm)
59. Companion cells are associated with
60. Numerous uascular bundles are scattered in the ground tissue ofstem.
61. Vascular bundles in which phloem is found on both sides of xylem are called
62. The inner, darker and harder portion of secondary xylem that cannot conduct water
in an older stem is calledwood.
II. Express the followings in one word :

1. The roots that develop from the base of the radicle in rice plant.
2. The root system that develops from the portions other than the radicle.
3. The modified tap root that looks like a spindle.
4. The organ of the plant that arises from the plumule.
5. A compact young shoot in which the young rudimentary leaves are covered.
6. Openings present on the leaves for gaseous exchange.
7. The membranous stipules that occur in Polygonum.
8. The type of compound leaves found in Coriandum.
9. The type of compound leaves found in Bombax.
10. The type of modification of leaf in which petiole forms a sickle shaped structure.
11. A flower in which gynoecium is present, but androecium is absent.
12. A flower which is divided into equal halves passing through the centre in any plane.
13. Male and female flowers borne on two different plants.
14. Staminate, pistillate and bisexual flowers develop on the same plant.
15. Flowers without sepals and petals.
16. The thalamus projecting into the ovary and carpels remaining attached to it and
separating at maturity.
17. Bracts form one or more whorls around a flower or a group of flowers.
18. Sepals falling off along with the petals just after fertilization.
19. Growth of calyx along with the fruit.
20. The funnel shaped corolla looking like an inverted cone.
21. Form of corolla in which the corolla tube is swollen in the middle but tapers towards
both base and apex.
22. The condition where calyx and corolla are not differentiated.
23. Stamen without fertile anthers.
24. Attachment of the anther to the filament where anthers seem to swing freely.
25. Condition where out of six stamens, four inner long and two outer short.
26. Anthers remaining free and filaments united to form one bundle.
27. Condition where stamen attached with the corolla lobes.
28. Stamens are united by their anthers while filaments are free.
29. Both filaments and anthers are untied throughout their length.
30. Condition of stamens in which the first whorl is alternating with sepals and the second
whorl is alternating with petals.
31. Syncarpous ovary, two or more chambers, centrally placed placenta bearing ovules
(Name the type of placentation).
32. In a flower out of four stamens two are outer and shorter and two are inner and
longer. What is the condition known as?
33. Monocarpellary gynoecium in which the placenta develops along the fused margin of
the carpel. (Name the type of placentation).
34. Type of racemose inflorescence found in Tridax.
55. Type of cymose inflorescence found in Ixora.
56. (a) Which is the edible part of Orange ?
(b) Which is the edible part of Cashew nut ?
(c) Which part of the Jackfruit is edible ?
(d) Which is the edible part in Coconut ?
(e) In which fruit fleshy aril is edible ?
(f) Which is the edible part in Mango ?
(g) Which is the edible part of Banana ?
(h) In Date-palm which is the edible part ?
(i) Which is the edible part in Grape ?
(j) Which mechanism helps the seeds of Amaranthus to disperse by wind ?
III. Indicate whether the following sentences are true or false.

1. Roots are negatively geotropic.
2. Tap root develops from radicle.
3. Root hairs are multicellular.
4. The root of Tinospora can manufacture its own food by photosynthesis.
5. Usually the root bears the buds.
6. Cuscuta is an example of epiphytic root.
7. Carrot is an adventitious root modification.
8. Pneumatophores provide support to the plant.
9. The stem ends in an axillary bud.
10. Stem hairs are multicellular.
11. Branches are endogenous in origin.
12. Offset is an underground stem modification.
13. Floral bud is modified into tendril in Passiflora.
14. Tendrilar stipules are seen in Smilax.
15. Leaf tendril is modified to provide protection.
16. Phyllode is a modified leaflet.
IV. Write true or false. Then correct the sentences without Changing the underlined
words.
1. Conjoint vascular bundles are those in which xylem and phloem occur in one strand.
2. In maize stem bicollateral vascular bundles are seen.
3. Vascular tissue system develops from ground meristem.
4. Epidermal tissue system originates from protoderm.
5. Endodermis is the outer layer of stele.

6. Outer layer of tunica always gives rise to epidermis.
7. Bulliform cells belong to epidermal tissue system.
8. Epistomatic leaves are generally found in hydrophytes.
9. Casparian strips are seen in pericycle layer.
10. Starch sheath refers to cells of pericycle with starch.
B. SHORT ANSWER TYPE QUESTIONS :

I. Differentiate between :
1. Thorn and spine.
2. Stem tuber and root tuber.
3. Phylloclade and phyllode.
4. Bulb and Bulbil.
5. Sucker and sucking root.
6. Stem tendril and leaf tendril.
7. Compound leaf and branch.
8. Monoecious and dioecious
9. Zygomorphy and actinomorphy
10. Monochlamydous and dichlamydous
11. Isomerous and heteromerous
12. Hypogynous end epigynous
13. Marcescent and accrescent calyx
14. Bilabiate and personate corolla
15. Twisted and imbricate aestivation
16. Tetradynamous and didynamous stamens
17. Syngenesious & synandrous stamens
18. Drupe and Berry.
19. Siliqua and Silicula
20. Dry and fleshy fruits
21. Caryopsis and cypsela
22. Cremocarp and regma
23. Pepo and pome .
24. Sorosis and syconus
25. Spongy parenchyma and palisade parenchyma.
26. Vascular bundles of Maize and Tridax.
27. Heart wood and sap wood.
28. Permanent tissues and meristematic tissues.
29. Spring wood and autumn wood.
30. Cork nand bark.
Write notes on :
Ephiphyte; Pneumatophore;
Prop root; Fasciculated root;
Offest; Sucker;
Bulbil; Phyllotaxy;
Corm; Stolon;
Phylloclade; Pitcher;
Bladder; Genetic spiral;
Gynandrophore; Carpophore;
Glumes; Vexillary aestivation;
Pollinia; Versatile stamen;
Distractile anthers; Gynostegium;
Free central placentation; Gynobasic style;
Capitulum; Spikelet;
Spadix; Verticillaster;
Hypanthodium; Cyathium;
Sorosis; Lomentum;
Cremocarp; Achene;
Pome; Syconus;
Nut; Cypsela;
Regma; Berry;
Cambium; Promeristem;
Lateral meristem; Glandular tissues;
Bark Annual ring;
Lenticels Different types of stomata;
Hydathode Trichomes;
C. LONG ANSWER TYPE QUESTIONS :

1. How many kinds of roots are there? Describe with examples.
2. What modification? Give an account of tap root modifications.
3. Discuss the different types of modified adventitious roots which perform vital
functions.
4. Define bud and describe different types of buds with examples.
5. Describe diferent types of underground modified stem.
6. Give a brief account of phyllotaxy.
7. Give an account of different types of venations.
8. What are stipules? Describe with examples different types of stipules.
9. Give an account of various leaf modifications with diagrams and examples.
10. It is commonly believed that only roots develop below the ground. How would you
prove that potato tuber is a stem and not a root ?
11. Describe the different parts of a typical flower.
12. Flower is a modified shoot- Justify the statement.
13. What is placentation ? Describe various types of placentation with examples.
14. What is inflorescence ? Describe the different types of racemose inflorescence.
15. Differentiate between racemose and cymose inflorescence. Give an account of
cymose inflorescence.
16. Give a brief account of different types of simple fruits.
17. Wnat are aggregate fruits? How is it different from composite fruits ? Describe
different types of aggregate fruits.
18. Compare the internal structure of a dicot stem with that of a dicot root.
19. Decsribe the anatomy of a typical monocot stem with labelled diagram. Point out
the differences in the structure of vascular bundles in monocot stem and dicot stem.
20. Describe the internal structure of typical dorsiventral leaf.
21. Describe the internal structure of a monocot root.
22. What is secondary growth ? Describe the successive stages of normal secondary
growth seen in dicot stems leading to the formation of annual rings. Point out the
importance of such rings.
ANIMAL TISSUES AND GROSS ANATOMICAL CHAPTER
ORGANIZATION OF COCKROACH I
A tissue is defined as an organized layers or masses of structurally similar cells

of common embryonic origin and performing a particular function. The word tissue (L.
tesere= to weave) was introduced by a French surgeon Xavier Bichat (1771-1802) who was is
presently known as the father of Histology. The branch of Biology that deals with the study of
tissues is called Histology. This word was coined by Mayer (1819). Two or more different types
of tissues unite to form larger functional units called organs.
Based on structure and functions, the animal tissues are classified into four major
types: Epithelial tissue, Connective tissue, Muscular tissue and Nervous tissue.
6.1. EPITHELIAL TISSUE (EPITHELIUM) :
The term epithelium (Gr. Epi = upon, thelio =grows) was proposed by Dutch scientist
Raysch in 18th century. It has the following features and functions.
1. The calls are many, closely placed without inter-cellular space and matrix.
2. The cells are placed upon a non-cellular gelatinous basement membrane.
3. It forms a protective covering over the body and body organs and also lines the
internal cavities.
4. Epithelium is highly regenerative, thus facilitates rapid healing of wounds.
5. It helps in secretion of various substances, absorption, excretion, respiration,
perception, transportation etc.
Types of Epithelial tissue
Based on functions, epithelial tissue is of two major categories such as covering epithelia
and glandular epithelia.
But based on the number of layers, the epithelial tissue is of the following types:
Animal Tissues and Gross Anatomical Organization of Cockroach I 241
6.1.1. Simple Epithelium :
Simple epithelium is formed of a single layer of cells. It is further classified into the
following types based on their shape size, presence or absence of cilia, secretion etc. These
are
(a) Squamous epithelium
(b) Cuboidal epithelium
(c) Columnar epithelium
(d) Ciliated epithelium
(e) Glandular epithelium
(f) Germinal epithelium
(g) Pigmented epithelium
(h) Sensory epithelium
(i) Pseudostratified epithelium
6.1.1.1. Simple squamous epithelium (Fig. 6.1 and 6.2) :
It is formed by a single layer of flat or spindle-shaped cells. The cells are closely fitted
like the tiles on a floor with serrated edges. Therefore, this epithelium is often known as
pavement epithelium. Each cell contains a centrally placed spherical nucleus.
Fig. 6.1 : Surface view of simple Fig. 6.2 : Simple squamous epithelial cells
squamous epithelium in three dimension (diagrammatic).
Occurrence: It forms the lining of various coelomic cavities (peritoneum); lining of

blood vessels (endothelium); internal lining of the heart (endocardium); and outer lining of
several organs present in peritoneal and pleural cavities; such as oesophagus, stomach,
intestine and lung (mesothelium). It also lines the Bowman’s capsule of the nephron, alveoli
of the lung, membranous labyrinth, lens of the eye and taste buds. Outermost layer of frog’s
skin is also formed of simple squamous epithelium.
Functions : It helps in protection, ultra-filtration and gaseous exchange.
6.1.1.2. Simple cuboidal epithelium (Fig. 6.3 and 6.4) :
It consists of a single layer of cubical cells, all resting on a basement membrane. The
cells are polygonal in surface view and almost of equal height and width. The nuclei are
spherical.
Occurrence: Follicles of the thyroid gland and salivary gland, lining of the ducts of
many glands, convoluted tubule of the nephron, acini of the pancreas, liver, thymus, sweat
glands, germinal epithelium of the gonads, choroid plexuses, inner part of the lens and
pigment layer of the retina.
Functions : It forms a protective layer. It is also involved in secretion, storage, excretion

and formation of gametes.
6.1.1.3. Simple columnar epithelium (Fig. 6.5 and Fig. 6.6) :
It is a layer of closely packed tall or rectangular cell. The cells are polygonal in a
surface view. The nuclei are frequently elongated in conformity with the shape of the cells.
Occurrence: These are found in the mucosal lining of stomach, large intestine and
rectum.; lining of the gall bladder and bile duct; gastric gland and vas deferens.
Functions : Secretion of digestive juice and absorption of digested food.
6.1.1.4. Ciliated epithelium :
When cuboidal and columnar epithelia bear cilia at their free ends, they are known
as ciliated epithelia. Each cilium arises from a basal granule situated in the cytoplasm of
the cell.
Occurrence: Cuboidal ciliated epithelium occurs in the neck region (junction of the
renal corpuscle and renal tubule) of the nephron. Ciliated columnar epithelium lines most of
Fig. 6.3 : Simple cuboidal epithelium in three Fig. 6.4 : Photomicrograph of simple cuboidal
dimension (diagrammatic). epithelium lining the collecting tubule.
Fig. 6.5 : Simple columnar epithelium in three Fig. 6.6 : Photomicrograph of simple
dimensions (diagrammatic). columnar epithelium
the respiratory tract, uterus and oviduct. It is also present in parts of the middle ear and
auditory tube. It is present in the ependymal lining (ependymal epithelium) of the central
canal of the spinal cord and the ventricles of the brain.
Functions : Drainage of fluid in the desired direction.
6.1.1.5. Glandular epithelium :
Some cuboidal and columnar epithelial cells are modified as gland cells engaged in
the synthesis and release of secretory products into an extra-cellular space. All glands,
whether exocrine or endocrine, are made up of glandular epithelial cells. Glands are primarily
of two types : unicellular and multicellular.
(i) Unicellular glands : Unicellular glands are modified columnar epithelial cells, which
secrete mucous. These cells are known as goblet cells. Goblet cells are found in the
mucosal lining of the gastro-intestinal tract of vertebrates. The mucous secreted by these
cells serves as a lubricant and thus protects the delicate tissues from wear and tear due to
friction.
(ii) Multi-cellular glands (Fig. 6.7): These are formed by many secretory cells.
Several of these secretory cells together constitute secretory units known as acini (singular:
acinus). The acini sink below the surface and form large multi-cellular glands. These are
classified on two counts. On the basis of the number of secretory units, they are of two
types : simple (one secretory unit) and compound (multiple secretory units) and on the
basis of the structure of acini, they are classified as tubular, alveolar and tubulo-alveolar
glands. A tubular gland has tube-like secretory unit, while in an alveolar gland, the secretory
unit is a sac- or flask-like structure, known as an alveolus. In tubulo-alveolar, both structures

are present.
(a) Simple tubular: The secretory unit is a single tube-like structure, [e.g.; intestinal
gland (Crypt of Lieberkuhn)]
(b) Simple coiled tubular: The tubular part is coiled, (e.g.; sweat gland)
(c) Simple branched tubular: The tube is branched, (e.g.; gastric gland)
(d) Simple alveolar: The glandular part is a single alveolus, (e.g.; mucous glands
in the skin of frog).
(e) Simple branched alveolar: The glandular alveolus is branched, (e.g.; sebaceous
gland)
(f) Compound tubular: Each tubular secretory unit is divided into several units,
[e.g.; intestinal mucous glands (Brunner’s gland)].
(g) Compound alveolar: Each alveolar secretory unit is divided into several units,
(e.g.; Mammary gland)
(h) Compound tubulo-alveolar: Each secretory unit consists of both tubular and
alveolar structures, (e.g.; Exocrine pancreas and salivary gland).
Glands are classified on three more counts :
Simple tubular Simple coiled Simple branched Compound tubular Simple alveolar
tubular tubular
Simple branched
alveolar Compound alveolar
Fig. 6.7 : Multicellular glands (diagrammatic)

Compound tubulo-alveolar
1. Nature of secretion
The glands are classified as serous, mucous and mixed, based on the nature of
secretion. A serous gland secretes a clear watery fluid, often containing enzymes, [e.g.;
sweat gland, intestinal gland and salivary gland (parotid gland)]. A mucous gland secretes
a viscous fluid containing a muccopolysacharide (e.g.; cardiac and pyloric glands of the
stomach). A mixed gland secretes both of the above (e.g.; gastric glands).
2. Mode of secretion
Glands are divided into three types based on the mode of secretion. In merocrine
glands (sometimes called ecrine or epicrine), the secretion is released by exocytosis without
causing a damage to the secretory cell (e.g.; exocrine pancreas, gastric gland and sweat
gland). In some glands, the apical parts of the secretory cells are shed off to discharge the
secretion. It causes a partial damage to the cells. This type of gland is described as apocrine
(e.g.; mammary gland). In some glands, the entire secretory cell disintegrates, while discharging
its secretion (e.g.; sebaceous gland). This type of gland is known as holocrine.
3. Presence or absence of ducts
Glands are of two types : exocrine and endocrine. An exocrine gland possesses well
defined ducts, thus discharging its secretion to a lumen or cavity (e.g.; exocrine pancreas,
liver and salivary gland). An endocrine gland is a ductless gland. It discharges its secretion
directly into the blood, [e.g.; pituitary, thyroid, adrenal and endocrine pancreas (islet of
Langerhans)].
6.1.1.6. Germinal epithelium:
It is a modified cuboidal epithelium (e.g.; seminiferous tubules of the testis and ovarian
follicles). These epithelial cells produce gametes through gametogenesis.
6.1.1.7. Pigmented epithelium:
It consists of columnar epithelial cells containing visual pigment (e.g.; retina of the
eye). It absorbs excess of sun light that enters into the eye.
6.1.1.8. Sensory epithelium :
It is a modified columnar epithelium. The cells bear sensory hairs at their outer
surfaces for receiving stimuli. The basal part is innervated by a nerve fibre for conveying the
impulse (e.g.; utricle, saccule and organ of corti).
6.1.1.9. Pseudo-stratified epithelium :
In this epithelium, columnar epithelial cells are present in a single layer. All cells rest
on a basement membrane, but not all of them extend to the free surface. The nuclei lie at
different heights, giving it a false stratified appearance. These cells are mostly ciliated (e.g.;
nasopharynx).
Cilia
Goblet cell
Basal cell
Basement membrane
Connective tissue
Fig. 6.8 : Photomicrograph of pseudostratified ciliated columnar

epithelium with unicellular gland cells (goblet cells).
6.1.2. Compound or stratified epithelium :

Compound epithelium has two or more layers of epithelial cells, lying one above the
other. The epithelium has a stratified or multi-layered appearance and hence, the name
stratified epithelium. It is characterized by the morphology or shape of cells of the outermost
layer. The cells of the innermost layer rest upon a basement membrane. Like the simple
epithelium, the cells are tightly packed so that there is hardly any inter-cellular space. Cells
of all layers may not have a uniform shape. For example, the inner layer of cells may be
cuboidal and columnar, while those of the outermost layer may be squamous. It is classified
as squamous, cuboidal, columnar, columnar ciliated and transitional according to the shape
of cells of the surface layer.
6.1.2.1. Stratified squamous epithelium :
Cells of the basal layer are columnar and are arranged in a single layer. The
intermediate layers have polyhedral cells, but on reaching the surface, they become squamous.
Sqamous cells
Cuboidal cells
Fig. 6.10 : Non-keratinized stratified squamous

epithelium in three dimensions (diagrammatic)
Fig. 6.11 : Photomicrograph of non-keratinized

stratified squamous epithelium
Fig. 6.12 : Photomicrograph of keratinized stratified Fig. 6.13 : Stratified columnar epithelium
squamous epithelium in three dimensions (diagrammatic)
This is again of two types : non-keratinized and keratinized. In non-keratinized epithelium

(Figs. 6.10 & 6.11), all cells are living and therefore, the surface cells are nucleated (e.g.;
lining of the oral cavity, vagina and anal canal). Conversely, in keratinized epithelium (Fig.
6.12 and 6.13), the surface cells are dead, constituting stratum corneum. This layer is
periodically cast off (e.g.; palm and sole).
6.1.2.2. Stratified cuboidal epithelium:
Out of a few layers of cells, the most superficial layer consists of cuboidal cells. This
epithelium has a limited distribution and is seen only in a few organs (e.g.; lining of ducts
of salivary gland and pancreas).
6.1.2.3. Stratiified columnar epithelium :
The cells of the outermost layer are columnar. The cells of the lower layers are
cuboidal or polyhedral (e.g.; lining of the larynx, pharynx, epiglottis and conjunctiva of the
eye).
6.1.2.4. Stratified columnar (ciliated):
Cilia are present on the free outer surface of the outermost layer of cells (e.g.; lining
of the soft palate on the nasal side).
Fig. 6.14 : Transitional epithelium in three Fig. 6.15 : Photomicrograph of transitional epithelium in
dimensions (diagrammatic). the wall of urinary bladder.
6.1.2.5. Transitional epithelium (Fig. 6.14 and 6.15) :
This occupies an intermediate position between simple epithelium and stratified

epithelium. The number of layers of cells changes with time. For example, the wall of the
distended urinary bladder has 2-3 layers of cells. However, when the bladder contracts, this
number increases to 5-6. An important feature of this epithelium is the presence of a thin
basement membrane compared to other epithelia (e.g.; wall of the urinary bladder and
ureter).
6.2. CONNECTIVE TISSUE :
Connective tissue binds, anchors, and supports various types of cells, tissues, and
organs in the body. It also forms packing around organs. In a nutshell, the connective tissue,
along with the skeletal elements, binds all parts of the body into an integrated structure. It
develops from the embryonic mesoderm. Structurally, it consists of different kinds of cells
and a considerable amount of inter-cellular material or matrix. The matrix, in turn, consists
of non-living matter such as, connective tissue fibers, ground substance and tissue fluid.
Structurally, the cells and the matrix differ in form and structure. Connective tissue is of three
basic types :
1. Connective tissue proper
2. Skeletal connective tissue
3. Fluid connective tissue.
6.2.1. Connective tissue proper:
This connective tissue connects all parts of the body together and primarily is of two
types : general type and special type. General type is further divided into loose (areolar)
and dense connective tissues. Special type is divided into reticular, adipose and pigmented
connective tissues. An outline classification is presented hereunder.
Connective tissue proper
General type Special type
Loose Dense
i l
Reticular Adipose Pigmented
or Areolar
6.2.1.1. Loose or areolar connective tissue (Fig. 6.16) :
It is more prevalent than dense connective tissue. It is characterized by a loose and

irregular arrangement of connective tissue fibers and the presence of abundant ground
substance. Several types of connective tissue cells are found in the matrix.
(a) Cells : Fibroblasts; fibrocytes; macrophages (histiocytes); adipose (fat) cells;

mast cells; plasma cells and leucocytes, such as neutrophils and eosinophils are the
main constituent cells of loose connective tissue. Fibroblasts and adipose cells are the major
constituent cells, while other cells migrate into the tissue from the blood circulation.
(i) Fibroblasts : This is the most common cell type. As the name indicates the cell
synthesizes connective tissue fibers and ground substance. Fibrocytes are inactive
or resting fibroblasts.
(ii) Macrophages (Histiocytes): These are phagocytic cells and most numerous
in the loose connective tissue. These cells engulf bacteria, which infilter into the
tissue. They also patrol the matrix and check infiltration by foreign elements.
(iii) Mast cells: These are small round or oval cells with small centrally placed
nuclei. The cytoplasm is filled with histamine. When released, histamine causes
allergic reactions
(iv) Plasma cells : These cells arise from lymphocytes and are potential antibody
forming cells.
(v) Adipose cells : Adipose (fat) cells are fat storing cells, found in varying number
in loose connective tissue. When the adipose cells predominate, the connective
tissue is known as adipose tissue.
(b) Fibers: Three types of fibers, such as collagen, elastic and reticular fibers are
found in the loose connective tissue. Collagen fibers, also known as white fibers, are tough,
fibrous proteins, present in unbranched bundles. These are most abundant and present in
almost all connective tissues. Elastic fibers, also known as yellow fibers are thin, small and
branching fibers having less tensile strength. Reticular fibers are thin and form a delicate
net-like framework.
Distribution : Loose connective tissue is distributed in varying amount throughout the

body.
Functions
1. It serves as a supporting and packing tissue.
2. It binds all tissues and organs of the body.
3. It fights and destroys invading bacteria.
6.2.1.2. Dense connective tissue: Collagen Row of

Fibres Fibrocytes
Dense connective tissue contains more densely
packed collagen fibers than loose connective tissue.
The cells are few and the ground substance is less.
It is of two types: irregular and regular. In irregular
dense connective tissue, the collagen fibers are
present irregularly [e.g.; dermis and capsule
(connective tissue sheaths) of organs]. Regular dense
connective tissue (Fig.6.17) has densely packed Fig. 6.17 : Regular dense with birous
connective tissue
parallel bundles of collagen fibers (e.g.; tendon and
ligament). A tendon is a regular dense connective
tissue connection between a bone and skeletal Reticular Reticular
Cell Matrix Fibres
muscle, while a ligament between two bones. In
both irregular and regular dense connective
tissues, fibroblasts are the most abundant cells
and are placed between collagen fiber bundles.
6.2.1.3. Reticular connective tissue (Fig.
6.18):
It is characterized by the presence of
reticular or stellate cells and reticular fibers.
The cells have reticular processes, which are
interwoven forming a reticulum or network (e.g.;
lymphoid tissue and bone marrow).
6.2.1.4. Adipose tissue :
Fig. 6.18: Reticular connective tissue
Adipose tissue is an aggregate of fat
cells or adipocytes. The adipocytes have lost
their fiber-forming function and have
assumed the function of fat storage.
Each fat cell contains a large fat droplet
and as a result, a fat cell becomes
swollen and spherical. Consequently
the nucleus is flattened and is disblaced
to the peripheral part of the cell (Fig.
6.19). Fat cells may be scattered singly
or may associate with reticular fibers
to form an adipose tissue, (e.g.; sub
cutaneous tissue). It stores excess of
fat and metabolizes it, as and when
necessary. It also helps maintain the
body temperature. Adipose tissue is
primarily of two types : white and
brown.
6.2.1.5. Pigmented connective

tissue:
In pigmented connective
tissue, the cells are filled with
black or brown pigment, usually
melanin (e.g.; choroid of the
brain and iris of the eye).
6.2.2. Skeletal connective

tissue :
The structural integrity

and shape of animals, especially
those of vertebrates is maintained by connective tissue. In the preceding section, we discussed
about an element that connects the cells, tissues, organs and organ systems. In this section,
we shall discuss about another element that provides a physical support and gives a definite
shape to the body of vertebrates. This element is another type of connective tissue i.e.
skeletal (hard or solid) connective tissue. It is primarily divided into cartilage and bone.
These two elements together constitute the skeletal system, which forms a solid frame of the
body of all vertebrates.
6.2.2.1. Cartilage :
Cartilage is a special connective tissue. It is a comparatively softer and more pliable

element of the skeletal connective tissue than bone. It is the first level of endoskeleton
formation. In some vertebrates, especially in cartilaginous fishes, it persists as such, while
in a majority, it undergoes ossification and changes into bone. However, in the endoskeleton
of vertebrates other than cartilaginous fishes, a few cartilages persist and others ossify into
bones. Therefore, it is logical to say that the endoskeleton of vertebrates consists either
exclusively of cartilages or both cartilages and bones. A cartilage, like other connective
tissues, consists of cartilage cells (chondroblasts and chondrocytes) and an inter-cellular
substance or matrix. The matrix consists of connective tissue fibers and a ground
substance. There are three types of cartilages in the body: hyaline, elastic and fibrocartilage.
This classification is based on the amount and type of fibers present in the matrix.
CARTILAGE
Hyaline cartilage Elastic cartilage Fibrocartilage

(a) Hyaline cartilage
It is the most common type of cartilage. As an embryo develops, most of the hyaline
cartilages undergo ossification or calcification by endochondral ossification and change
into bones.
Structure (Fig. 6.21): Hyaline cartilage looks bluish-white and translucent in a

fresh preparation.lt is surrounded by a peripheral layer of vascularized, dense irregular
connective tissue sheath, called perichondrium. However, the hyaline cartilage at the articular
surfaces of long bones does not possess a perichondrium. The inner layer of the perichondrium
is chondrogenic i.e. it gives rise to new chondroblasts, which secrete the matrix. As the
cartilage grows and the volume of the matrix increases, the individual chondroblasts are
trapped in fluid-filled compartments called lacunae (singular; lacuna). Inside the lacuna, a
chondroblast is known as a mature cartilage cell or chondrocyte. Some lacunae contain
more than one chondrocytes forming isogenous groups.
The cartilage matrix is produced and maintained by chondroblasts and chondrocytes.

The matrix is hydrated with high water content. It consists of small collagen and elastic fibers
in varying amounts. The ground substance consists of glycosaminoglycan-protein
aggregates, known as proteoglycans. Chondroitin sulfate and hyaluronic acid are the
more prevalent sulfated and non-sulfated glycosaminoglycan constituents of the matrix,
respectively. An adhesive glycoprotein, chondronectin binds chondroblasts and chondrocytes
and collagen fibers to proteoglycans, [e.g.; articular surface of long bones, costal cartilage
(end of rib), nose, larynx, trachea and bronchi].
(a) (b)
Fig. 6.21 : (a) Photomicrograph of the structure of hyaline cartilage and
(b) Magnified view of the inset with a lacuna containing four chondrocytes.
(b) Elastic cartilage (Fig. 6.22):
Elastic cartilage appears yellowish and opaque in fresh preparation. It is similar in

structure to hyaline cartilage, except for the presence of numerous branching elastic
fibers in its matrix. Elastic cartilage is highly flexible, (e.g.; external ear, wall of the auditory
tube and epiglottis).
(c) Fibrocartilage (Fig. 6.23):
Fibrocartilage is characterized by the presence of a large amount of irregular and

dense bundles of collagen fibers in its matrix. In contrast to hyaline and elastic cartilages,
it consists of alternating layers of cartilage matrix and thick and dense layers of collagen
fibers. The chondrocytes, present in lacunae are also disposed in parallel rows, (e.g.;
interverebral disc, pubic symphysis and some joints)
Fig. 6.23 : Photomicrograph of the structure of a fibrocartilage.
Bone :
Bone is a special connective tissue like that of the cartilage and consists of bone
forming cells, present in an inter-cellular matrix. The matrix is made up of collagen and
elastic fibers and an amorphous ground substance. Two types of bones have been recognized :
cancellous or spongy and compact or woven.
(a) Cancellous (spongy) bone [Figs. 6.24 (a) and (b)J:
Cancellous bone is relatively softer and spongy and consists of bony plates called
trabecullae (singular; trabeculus). Each trabeculus consists of a number of lamellae (singular:
lamella), between which there are lacunae containing osteocytes. A lamella is a layer of
bony material. The trabecullae enclose wide spaces that are filled with bone marrow. The
bone receives nutrition from blood vessels vascularizing the bone marrow. Thus, this bone
marrow is known as red bone marrow.
Inset magnified
Articular
\ cartilage
Spongy bone
Osteocytes
Compact bone Trabeculus

Marrow cavity
- Periosteum Marrow cavity
Endos-
teum
(a) (b)
Fig. 6.24 : Structure of cancellous (spongy) bone, (a) Spongy bone at the
end of a long bone and (b) microscopic structure of spongy bone
(b) Compact (woven) bone (Fig. 6.25):
In this type of bone, the lamellae (layers of bony material) are compactly present, so
that there is no marrow cavity. Hence, the name is compact bone. The thick bony material
surrounds a cylindrical cavity, known as marrow cavity. The marrow cavity is filled with
yellow bone marrow containing adipose cells. The bone is surrounded by a layer of fibrous
connective tissue, known as periosteum. Similarly, the marrow cavity is lined by another
layer of fibrous connective tissue sheath, the endosteum.
Inner to the periosteum and outer to the endosteum, bone forming stem cells,
known as osteoprogenitor cells are present. These cells divide and give rise to osteoblasts.
Osteoblasts are the actual bone forming cells. On forming and depositing bony material, the
osteoblasts are exhausted and turn into mature osteocytes, which are locked in lacunae
in the interior. Osteoclasts are bone resorbing macrophage-like cells. These are
superficially present in shallow concavities, known as Howship lacunae. Inner and outer to
the periosteum and endosteum, respectively, the lamellae are organized in circumferential
manner. These lamellae are known as outer and inner circumferential lamellae, respectively.
Between the two circuferential lamellae, the lamellae are organized into Haversian systems
or osteons. Between two adjoining osteons, the angular interstitial cavities are occupied by
interstitial lamellae.
Blood
vessels Concentric
Outer lamellae
circumferential
lamellae
Canaliculi Osteocytes
in
lacunae
Haversian canal
Osteon
Periosteum
Blood Marrow
vessels cavity
Blood vessel within

Volkmann’s canal Inner circumferential
lamellae
Compact bone Cancellous bone
Fig. 6.25 : Gross organization of a compact bone.
(i) Haversian sysem (Osteon) [Figs. 6.26 (a) and (b)J:
A Haversian system consists of concentric layers or rings of lamellae. Each lamella

contains singular osteocytes, trapped in lacunae. Slender processes, known as canaliculli,
radiate from each lacuna, which are occupied by slender processes of the trapped osteocyte.
The ends of the processes of neighbouring osteocytes meet within the canaliculi and have
gap junctions at the site of contact. The lamellae surround a canal called Haversian canal.
Haversian canals run predominantly along the length of the bone. However, they also
anastomoise with each other and communicate with the marrow cavity by canals called
Volkmann’s canals. (Fig.6.25).
Haversian
canal
Interstitial
lamellae Interstitial
lamellae
Haversian Cement line
system Lacunae
(a) (b)
Fig. 6.26 : Organization of compact bone, (a) A few Haversian systems and
(b) magnified view of a single Haversian system.
(ii) Bone matrix : The matrix consists of collagen fibers and organic and inorganic
compounds. Sulfated glycosaminoglycans and hyaluronic acid constitute the organic
matter of the bone. These form large proteoglycan aggregates. Glycoproteins are also
present in a considerable amount. Some bone specific glycoproteins are osteocalcin,
osteopontin and osteonectin. The inorganic constituent of the bone is calcium phosphate
[Ca3(PO )2]. It is organized into hydroxyapatite crystals [Ca10(PO4)6(OH)2], a complex salt
of calcium. Hydroxyapatite crystals lie parallel to the collagen fibers and contribute to the
lamellar appearance of the bone.
6.2.3. Fluid connective tissue :
Fluid connective tissue is a special type of connective tissue, which includes blood
and lymph. In both, different types of corpuscles (cells) are suspended in a fluid matrix,
known as the plasma. Fibers are absent.
6.2.3.1. Blood :
(a) Plasma: Plasma is the inter-cellular substance or the matrix, which does not
contain any fiber that is common to all other types of connective tissues. Its main constituent
is water with dissolved colloids and crystalloids. The water makes up around 91-92% of
the plasma. The colloids are proteins such as prothrombin and fibrinogen (blood
coagulation protein); serum albumins; serum globulins (immunoglobulins or antibodies);
and hormones. The crystalloids are the ions of sodium, potassium, calcium, magnesium,
chloride, phosphate and bicarbonate. Several other substances like glucose; amino acids;
lipids and nitrogenous waste materials, such as urea, uric acid, xanthine, creatine and
creatinine are also present in dissolved state. The yellow colour of the plasma is due to the
presence of colouring matter such as, bilirubin and carotene.
BLOOD
CELLS PLASMA
Water: 91-92%
RED BLOOD WHITE BLOOD BLOOD

CORPUSCLE CORPUSCLE (WBC) PLATELET
(RBC) or or
or LEUCOCYTE THROMBOCYTE
ERYTHROCYTE
r
ORGANIC INORGANIC
CONSTITUENTS CONSTITUENTS
e.g.-, Sodium,
Potassium, Calcium,
SERUM PROTEINS NITROGENOUS GLUCOSE, HO R MO N ES, Bicarbo nate

e.g.; albumin, WASTE MATERIALS AMINO ACIDS ANTIBODIES
globulin, e.g.; urea, uric acid, AND LIPIDS AND ENZYMES
prothrombin and creatine and
fibrinogen creatinine.
Outline classification of blood into its constituents
(b) Cells : The cells, which are also known as the formed elements are suspended
in the plasma and are of three types : red blood corpuscles (RBC) or erythrocytes, white
blood corpuscles (WBC) or leucocytes and blood platelets or thrombocytes.
(i) Red blood corpuscles (Erythrocytes): Human RBCs are biconcave disc-like red
cells [Fig. 6.20 (a)]. The central part of the cell is depressed or biconcave due to the absence
of a nucleus. All mammals, but camels; and llamas; have anucleate RBCs i.e., the RBCs
are without nuclei. The red colour is due to the presence of a red-coloured respiratory
pigment, haemoglobin. Haemoglobin is a conjugate protein (metalloprotein) containing
iron as its metallic part. It is the iron that imparts red colour to the RBC. These are most
numerous in human blood. In a healthy human, it ranges from 4.5 million to 5.5 million per
mm3 of blood. It is approximately 600 times the number of WBCs present in the blood. When
suspended in a suitable medium, the RBCs pile up one above the other forming a rouleaux
[Fig. 6.28 (c)]. RBCs maintain their normal shape only if suspended in an isotonic medium.
If the medium becomes hypotonic, the cells absorb water by endo-osmosis and swell up
and ultimately burst releasing the haemoglobin into the medium. This phenomenon is known
as haemolysis. Haemolysis results in the formation of a ruptured plasma membrane, known
as a red cell ghost. Alternately, if the RBCs are placed in a hypertonic medium, there is a
loss of water from the cells due to exo-osmosis and consequently, the cells shrink. Their
surfaces develop irregularities. This phenomenon is known as crenation and the shrunken
RBCs are often called echinocytes.
(a) (b) (c)
Fig. 6.28 : Human RBC. (a) scanning electron micrograph of human RBC;
(b) dimensions of RBC; and (c) rouleaux formation.
RBCs differentiate from the myeloid stem cells of the red bone marrow. The process
of formation of RBC is known as haemopoiesis or haematopoiesis. They have a limited
life span i.e. they are renewed every 120 days. They are destroyed in the spleen and the
haemoglobin is metabolized in the liver into bile pigment, bilirubin. Therefore, spleen is
referred to as the graveyard of RBCs.
Functions : RBCs transport molecular oxygen from the lungs to the tissues. As such,
haemoglobin is known as deoxyhaemoglobin and in combination with oxygen, it is known
as oxyhaemoglobin. One molecule of haemoglobin combines with four molecules of oxygen
in a cooperative (allosteric) manner and gets saturated. On delivering oxygen to the
tissues, it changes to deoxyhaemoglobin. Carbondioxide that is released from the tissues
gets dissolved in the blood and is carried to the lungs in different chemical combinations. A
part of the carbon dioxide is also carried by the haemoglobin as carbaminohaemoglobin.
Deficiency of haemoglobin in the blood is called anaemia. It is generally produced

due to a deficiency of iron in the diet. In this type of anaemia, the RBCs are relatively smaller
in size (microcytic). Haemolytic anaemia is caused due to an excessive destruction of
RBCs. This occurs, when the RBCs are abnormal. One such abnormality is the absence of
ankyrin, a protein of the cytoskeleton, so that the RBCs become spherical, rather than
biconcave. This abnormality is known as spherocytosis. Sickle cell anaemia is another
form, where the haemoglobin is abnormal due to an amino acid substitution in the beta
globin polypeptide. It is a single gene recessive disorder. In an exactly opposite pathological
condition to anaemia, more RBCs than normal are formed. This condition is known as
polycythemia.
(c) White blood corpuscles (Leucocytes): White blood corpuscles (WBCs) or

leucocytes are named so because they lack haemoglobin. These are nucleated blood cells
having variable shapes and sizes. Their number in human blood is much less than the
number of RBCs. In a healthy human, the number of WBC ranges from 8000 to 10000 per
mm3 of blood. Under special pathological conditions, the normal number varies considerably.
WBCs are primarily classified as granulocytes and agranulocytes based on the presence
or absence of characteristic stained granules in their cytoplasm. Depending upon the staining
characters of the granules, the granulocytes are of three types : neutrophils, eosinophils
or acidophils and basophils. Agranulocytes do not contain characteristic granules in their
cytoplasm. They are of two types : lymphocytes and monocytes. Each class of WBC has
a specific relative number or percentage as given below:
Leucocyte class Percentage

Neutrophil 60-70
Eosinophil 2- 4
Basophil >1
Lymphocyte 20-30
Monocyte 3- 8
(i) Neutrophils [Fig. 6.29 (c)J: The name is derived from neutral staining character
of the cytoplasmic granules. A neutrophil is further characterized by a multi-lobed nucleus.
(a) (b) (c)

Fig. 6.29 : Three different types of granulocytes, (a) basophil; (2) eosinophil; and (c) neutrophil.
The shape of the nucleus varies from neutrophil to neutrophil. Therefore, this WBC is
alternately known as polymorphonuclear granulocyte. In human female, the nucleus is
seen to possess an additional smaller lobe at one end. This lobe is known as drum stick.
Neutrophils have a very short life span. They circulate in the blood for approximately 10 hr
and then enter the connective tissue, where they live for another 2-3 days. As indicated in
the table above, the neutrophils are the most abundant WBC. These are attracted by
chemotactic factors secreted by bacteria at the site of infection, act as phagocytes and
engulf and digest them.
(ii) Eosinophil (acidophil) [Fig. 6.29 (b)J: The name of the WBC is derived from the
acidic staining character of the cytoplasmic granules. The cytoplasmic granules stain
specifically with eosin, an acidic dye. The nucleus is bilobed. They have a short life span.
They circulate in the blood for around 10 hr and then migrate to the connective tissue and
remain there for upto 10 days. Eosinophils are phagocytic cells with an affinity for antigen
antibody complexes formed at the site of inflammation and allergic reaction. They also
migrate to the site of parasitic infection and specifically kill helminth larvae.
(iii) Basophil [Fig. 6.29 (a)]: This granulocyte has cytoplasmic granules having basic
staining character. The nucleus is bilobed. They have a short life span and a negligible
percentage in the blood. Their function is similar to that of mast cells. Basophils store
histamine and heparin. Release of histamine causes allergic reactions and vascular changes,
which leads to fluid leakage from blood vessels. This causes severe hypersensitivity
responses and anaphylaxis.
(iv) Lymphocytes : Lymphocytes have variable life span ranging from several days
to months. They are of two types : small and large lymphocytes [Figs. 6.20 (a) & (b)]. They
play a key role in the immune response of the body. Lymphocytes mature and become
immunologically competent in thymus and bursa of Fabricius or its analogous structure.
Thymus maturing lymphocytes are called T-lymphocytes, while lymphocytes, which mature
in bursa of Fabricius or its analogous structure, are called B-lymphocytes. T-lymphocytes
act as killer cells. B-lymphocytes are stimulated to differentiate into potential antibody
secreting cells, the plasma cells.
(a) (b) (c)
Fig. 6.29 : Different types of agranulocytes. (a) small lymphocyte; (b)

large lymphocyte; and (c) monocyte.
(v) Monocyte [Fig. (c)J: There is no cytoplasmic granule. The nucleus is horse
shoe shaped. They live in the blood circulation for 2-3 days. Then they move into the
connective tissue, where they live for a few months. In the connective tissue, monocytes
become phagocytes. At the site of infection, monocytes differentiate as tissue macrophages,
which then destroy bacteria, foreign particles and cellular debris.
All WBCs differentiate from lymphoid stem cells of the bone marrow in a process
known as haemopoiesis. Under certain pathological conditions, WBCs increase or decrease
in number. The increase in number beyond normal is known as leucocytosis, while a
decrease in the number is known as leucopenia. In an acute condition, known as eukaemia,
there is an uncontrolled production of all classes of WBC in the bone marrow. Immature
WBC (WBC precursors) are seen in large number in the peripheral blood. It is a malignant,
life threatening condition.
(d) Blood platelets : Also known as thrombocytes, blood platelets are small, round,
oval or irregular disc shaped anucleate (without nucleus) cells. In an ordinary blood film, each
platelet appears to have a clear outer zone called hyalomere and a granular central zone
called granulomere. The life span is around 10 days and the normal number varies from2, 50,
000 to 5, 00, 000 per mm3 of blood. Platelets play a very important role in blood coagulation.
Platelets contain an essential enzyme, thromboplastin that is essential in initiating the blood
coagulation cascade ending in the formation of fibrin mesh. The enzyme is released from the
platelets following an injury. More than normal number of platelets (thrombocytes) causes a
pathological condition, known as thrombocytosis. Deficiency of platelets is known as
thrombocytopenia, which leads to a prolonged bleeding following a minor injury.
6.2.3.2. Lymph :
Lymph is a colourles fluid filtrate of the blood capillaries, containing the same proteins
and salts as that of the plasma, but in smaller amount. It circulates in a system of lymphatic
vessels, which are finally drained to the venous blood via the thoracic duct and right
lymphatic duct. Both T- and B-lymphocytes and other WBCs are the predominant cells of
the lymph. However, occasionally, a very insignificant proportion of RBCs are present. Following
a lipid-rich meal, the lymph is seen to contain dissolved fat globules (chylomicrons).
Lymph in the lacteal (the lymphatic channel in the intestinal wall) looks milky due to the
absorption of digested lipids into it. Such a milky fluid is known as chyle.
Lymph returns the blood proteins and other essential solutes, back to the blood, which
are filtered through the capillaries into the tissue space. Thus, it helps maintain the osmolarity
of the blood plasma. It carries the differentiated T- and B-lymphocytes to the tissues and
thus, it helps to guard each and every part of the body against microbial invasion.
6.3. MUSCULAR TISSUE :
Muscular tissue is composed predominantly of muscle cells or myocytes, which possess

two fundamental properties :
1. High degree of contraction and relaxation.
2. Conversion of chemical energy to mechanical energy, during contraction.
All cells possess some degree of contraction and relaxation. However, the muscle
cells are specially equipped to undertake the highest degree of contraction and relaxation
ever. This is due to the presence of contractile protein myofilaments : actin and myosin.
A muscle is made up of unitary structures, the muscle cells or myocytes. The

cytoplasm of a muscle cell is called sarcoplasm and the surrounding plasma membrane is
called sarcolemma. Such an elongated muscle cell is known as a muscle fiber. There are
three types of muscle : smooth, skeletal and cardiac. All, but smooth muscle cell, are
elongated. Muscles may be voluntary or involuntary from contraction and relaxation at will
point of view. For example, smooth and cardiac muscle contract and relax all throughout the
life. Their contraction and relaxation is not under the control of their will. Therefore, these
muscles come under the category of involuntary muscle. On the other hand, skeletal muscle
contracts and relaxes at will or as and when necessary. It is a voluntary muscle. Another
classification is based on the organization of the contractile protein myofilaments. In skeletal
and cardiac muscles, the protein filaments are organized in parallel bundles, thus giving a
striated appearance in stained microscopic preparation. These are therefore, called striated
muscle. The protein filaments are present in a stray manner in smooth muscle cells i.e., they
are not organized into bundles and hence, smooth muscle is classed as non-striated muscle.
Further, the bundles of protein filaments in skeletal and cardiac muscle give cross striated
or striped appearance and hence, these muscles are often referred to as striped muscle
and smooth muscle as unstriped muscle.
Smooth
muscle
cell
Nucleus
(a) (b)
Fig. 6.30 : Smooth muscle cells (myocytes), (a) Four smooth muscle cells
(diagrammatic), and (b) photomicrograph of smooth muscle cells in a section.
Thus, muscle is of three types, as noted hereunder with their gross features.
1. Smooth muscle: Involuntary, nonstriated and unstriped
2. Skeletal muscle : Voluntary, striated and striped
3. Cardiac muscle: Involuntary, striated and striped
6.3.1. Smooth muscle [Figs. 6.30(a) & (b)J:
Smooth muscle is made up of long spindle shaped muscle cells or myocytes, each
with a broad central part with tapering ends. The nucleus is oval or elongated, lies in the
broad central part.Smooth muscle cells form aggregates or bundles, known as fasciculi
(Singular fasciculus). The fasciculi are further aggregated to form layers of variable thickness.
Each fasciculus is surrounded by delicate collagen, elastic and reticular fibers, which hold all
the myocytes of the fasciculus together. The sarcoplasm contains myofibrils of protein filaments;
actin and myosin, which are disposed in a random manner. Thus, the smooth muscle cells
do not exhibit striated and striped appearance, (e.g.; wall of the alimentary canal; urinary
bladder; uterus; arteries; veins; bronchi; and ureters).
6.3.2. Skeletal muscle :
6.3.2.1. Structure : Skeletal muscle, as the name indicates, is attached to the elements
of the skeletal system, such as bones and cartilages. A skeletal muscle is surrounded by a
connective tissue sheath, the epimysium. The muscle is made up of bundles of elongated
and cylindrical muscle fibers, known as fasciculi. Each fasciculus is surrounded by a sheath,
known as perimysium and each muscle fiber is surrounded by an endomysium (Fig.6.31).
A muscle fiber consists of many myofibrils and each myofibril consists of two types
of protein myofilaments: actin and myosin (Fig.6.33). A skeletal muscle fiber is a
multinucleate elongated cell (syncytium) with a surrounding sarcolemma. The bulk of the
fiber is occupied by myofibrils. This results in the displacement of the active sarcoplasm
with the nuclei to the peripheral part. Each myofibril is surrounded by an extensive network
of endoplasmic reticulum, known as sarcoplasmic reticulum and mitochondria. The
sarcoplasmic reticulum is in the form of tubules, which join to form terminal cisternae,
present between each anisotropic (A) and isotropic (I) bands. The sarcolemma invaginates
between each A and I bands to form a transverse tubule. The sarcoplasmic reticulum in the
form of tubules and terminal cisternae and transverse tubules constitute a sarco-tubular
system (Fig. 6.32).
6.3.2.2. Structure of myofibril (Fig. 6.33): In a stained microscopic preparation, the

myofibrils are seen to exhibit alternating dark and light bands. The dark staining bands are
known as anisotropic bands (A bands), while the light staining bands are known as isotropic
bands (I bands). A myofibril contains two types of protein myofilaments : thick filaments
(myosin) and thin filaments (actin). These filaments contribute towards the bulk structure
of the myofibril. The filaments are arranged in a periodic manner. This arrangement gives
rise to the alternating A and I bands at regular intervals which imparts a striated appearance
to the skeletal muscle. The same periodicity is found in all the muscle fibers of a fasciculus,
thus giving the muscle a cross-striated or striped appearance [Figs. 6.34 (a) & (b)].
Sarcolemma
Myofibrils
Teminal
Epimysium cisternae
A band
Perimysium Transverse
tubule I band
Endomysium
Sarcoplasmic
Muscle fibres reticulum
or ce||S
~ Nerve fibre
Blood vessel Z line
FasciculusMitochondria
or fascicle Nucleus
Fig. 6.31 : Three levels of organization (muscle Fig. 6.32 : Organization of myofibrils in a muscle fiber
muscle fiber -> myofibril myofilament) of skeletal with sarcoplasmic reticulum, terminal cisternae and
muscle with respective connective tissue sheaths. transverse tubules.
Fig. 6.33 : Sub-microscopic structure of skeletal muscle. (Tn, troponin; C,

Calcium binding, I, inhibitory; and T, tropomyosin binding)
A thick line called Z-line runs across the middle of each I band. The middle of each
A band is traversed by a lighter band called the H-band. Running through the centre of the
H-band, there is a thin M-band. The stretch of the muscle fiber between two Z-lines is called
a sarcomere. The sarcomere is considered as the contracting unit of the muscle fiber. The
nerve innervating a muscle enters into it at a place called the neuro-mascular hilus.
6.3.2.3. Structure of myofilaments (Fig. 6.35): Two main types of myofilaments,

such as myosin and actin are present in the myofibril.
(a) Myosin [Fig. 6.35 (c)]: A thick or myosin filament consists of several myosin
molecules organized into a bundle that gives it a thick filamentous appearance. Each myosin
molecule has two heavy polypeptide chains, associated with two pairs of light polypeptide
chains. The heavy chains are helically coiled around each other. At the N-terminus of each
heavy chain, the polypeptide is globular forming a head [Fig. 6.35 (c)]. The head has an
ATPase activity, which binds to and hydrolyzes ATP to generate mechanical energy during
muscle contraction. The myosin molecules are oriented in opposite directions in two halves
of the thick filament so that in the middle of the thick filament, there is no head and thus,
Fibrocyte
Erythrocyte
in capillary
Myofibrils
Endomysium
Nucleus of
muscle fiber
(b)
Fig. 6.34 : Structure of a stained muscle fiber, (a) gross structure with alternating A and
I bands giving the muscle fiber a striated and striped appearance and
(b) magnified view of the inset in (a) revealing the detail structure.
this part has a lighter band-like appearance, which runs across a muscle fiber. This band has
been referred to as the H-band. Running through the middle of each H band, there is a
relatively thicker M-band or line.
(b) Actin [Fig. 6.35 (b)]: A thin or actin filament consists of two actin chains, helically
coiled around each other. Each actin chain consists of a linear array of many actin molecules.
An actin molecule is a globular protein and thus, is known as globular actin or G-actin.
A G-actin molecule has an ATPase ativity and a myosin head binding site. Several G-actins
join linearly forming a fibrous actin or F-actin. Two F-actins helically coil forming an actin
filament. During muscle contraction, the myosin heads bind to the G-actin’s myosin head
binding sites. ATP, bound to the myosin heads are hydrolyzed by the ATPase activity.
• ••
••••
• • « ••
••4•
• ♦•
Actin Myosin
Inset magnified Inset magnified
(a) A magnified view of a sarcomere with the
arrangement of thick and thin filaments (see
the upper part of the figure for a spatial
arrangement of thick and thin filaments in
relation to each other.
Troponin C (C for Ca2+ binding)
Actin
(b) Actin filament associated with (c) Structural organization of a myosin
tropomyosin and tropenin. (thick) filament.
Fig. 6.35 : Alignment of thick and thin filaments in a sarcomere. (Note

that two Z-lines demarcate a sarcomere)
Mechanical energy is generated, which slides the F-actin and Myosin over each other. Thus
the muscle contraction is effected.
There is a regularity in the arrangement of myosin and actin filaments. A myosin

filament is surrounded by six actin filaments [Upper part of Fig. 6.35 (a)]
The actin and myosin filaments are not free floating. The thin filaments are anchored
to the Z-line by a protein, called actinin. The thick filaments are anchored to the Z-lines and
M-line by a protein, called titin (Fig 6.36). Two other proteins, known as troponin and
tropomyosin also play an important role in muscle contraction. Troponin is a globular protein
consisting of three subunits : TnC (Ca2+ binding subunit), Tnl (inhibitory subunit) and TnT
Z Hine If - A band ——
[f~~'H zpne*’-■*]
>1
filament
— I I I I I I-i I
I I + I I I 4-1
i<—------------------------------------ -
M line
SARCOMERE ,
I fr I I-1J I I
,,—.,
Thick filament
Fig. 6.36 : Organization of a sarcomere with titin filaments anchoring thick (myosin) filaments to Z-lines
(tropomyosin binding subunit). Tropomyosin is a fibrous protein which covers the myosin
head binding sites in the actin in a resting muscle fiber. The role of these proteins in muscle
contraction is discussed in the Chapter-19 on locomotion and movement, (see the Section
19.3 on muscle contraction).
6.3.3. Cardiac muscle (Fig. 6.37):
6.3.3.1. Structure: Cardiac muscle is present in the wall of the heart, myocardium
and large blood vessels that are attached to the heart. It is similar to the skeletal muscle in
most of its structural organization. It consists of elongated and cylindrical muscle fibers
consisting of uni or occasionally binucleate muscle cells or myocytes. The fibers do not run
parallel to each other. They are branched and the branches anastomoise with each other
[Figs. 6.37 (a) and (b)]. Each anastomoising point is marked by the presence of a deep
staining disc-like structure called intercalated disc [Fig. 6.37 (c)]. This is a unique feature
of cardiac muscle. Each myocyte is surrounded by a sarcolemma. The nucleus is surrounded
by a perinuclear sarcoplasm. However, bulk of the sarcoplasm is peripheral and in this
Fig. 6.37 : Cardiac muscle fibers, (a) diagrammatic, (b) photomicrograph of longitudinal section
(low magnification) and (c) a part in the inset under higher magnification.
peripheral sarcoplasm, the sarcoplasmic reticulum, mitochondria and other cell organelles
are present. The interior of the cell is filled with myofilaments, such as the thick myosin and
thin actin filaments, like that in a skeletal muscle fiber.
6.4. NERVOUS TISSUE :
The nervous system is made up of a tissue that is specialized for conducting impulses
rapidly from one part of the body to the other. Specialized cells that carry out this work are
known as nerve cells or neurons. The neurons are, thus, the structural and functional units
of the nervous system. The neurons within the brain and spinal cord are supported by a host
of non-excitable cells. These cells constitute the neuroglia.
6.4.1. Structure of a neuron :
Neurons vary considerably in shape, size and other features. However, most of them
are built on a common plan. A neuron consists of a cell body that gives off a variable
number of processes called neurites.
6.4.1.1. Cell body :
The cell body is also known as the soma or perikaryon [Figs. 6.38 (a) and (b)]. It
contains a mass of cytoplasm surrounded by a plasma membrane. The cytoplasm contains
cytoplasmic organelles and a large spherical or oval nucleus at the centre with a prominent
Nucleolus
complex
Nuceus — ribosome
hillock
icrotubules Initial
and I ,\segment
microfilaments Nissl - Axon
substance
Mitochondrion
Myelin sheath
^-Dendrite
Schwann cell - '

nucleus
Dendritic spine
(a) (b)
Fig. 6.38 : Structure of a typical neuron, (a) a neuron in the CNS and
peripheral ganglion and (b) cell body (magnified)
nucleolus typical to a cell. The presence of

centrioles was debated in the past. However,
electron microscopic study has confirmed the
presence of a pair of centrioles. The cytoplasm
contains basophilic (stained with basic dye)
granular materials called Nissl body or
substance or granule. Electron microscopic
study reveals that the Nissl body contains
parallel stacks of rough endoplasmic
reticulum. The dendrites also contain rough
endoplasmic reticulum, while the axon doesn’t.
However, smooth endoplasmic reticulum is
present in all parts of the neuron (cell body,
axon and dendrites). Lysosomes are present
only in the cell body. Many slender mitochondria
are present in the cell body and dendrites.
Mitochondria also occur along the axon and
are especially numerous in the axon terminals.
The cytoplasm is traversed by a network of
fibrils called neurofibrils. These fibrils are the
microfilaments and microtubules. The Fig. 6.39 : A neuron exhibiting the structures both of
the CNS (see above the broken line) and PNS (see
centrioles may be involved in the formation and below the broken line).
maintenance of these neurofibrils.
6.4.1.2. Neurites :
The neurites are of two types: axon and dendrites.
(a) Axon : The axon is a singular long process, which arises from the cell body and
conducts the impulse away from it. It arises from a conical extension of the cell body called
axon hillock. An axon is of uniform diameter and is devoid of Nissl bodies. The axons, with
the exception of those of the central nervous system (CNS), associate with non-conducting
cells called Schwann cells. Schwann cells form and deposit an insulating lipid, known as
myelin around these axons. Myelin forms an insulating sheath around many peripheral
nerves and thus protects the adjoining tissues from developing a potential difference during
the conduction of nerve impulse. A thin layer of Schwann cell cytoplasm persists on the outer
side of the myelin sheath forming a secondary layer called neurilemma (Fig. 6.40). The
myelin is deposited in a discontinuous manner around most peripheral nerves. This results
in the formation of distinct nodes and internodes along the length of the axon. The myelin
insulated part is the internode, while the myelin free part is the node called node of Ranvier
(Fig. 6.39). These myelin-sheathed nerve fibers are known as a myelinated or medullated
nerve fibers (Fig. 6.39), while those without

myelin sheaths are non- or un-myelinated or
non-medullated fibers. The white matter of
the brain and spinal code is made up of
myelinated or medullated nerve fibers. The
axons lying in the CNS are associated with a
similar covering formed by oligodendrocytes
[Fig. 6.39]. Thus oligodendrocytes are the
myelin secreting cells in the CNS.
An axon may give off variable number

of branches. Branches that arise near the cell
body and are perpendicular to the axon are called collaterals. At its termination, the axon
breaks up into many fine branches called telodendria that may end in small swellings,
known as terminal boutons [Fig.6.38 (a)]. An axon terminates in either of the two ways. In
the CNS, its terminal part forms a junction with the dendrite of another neuron. This junction
is known as a synapse. Outside the CNS, an axon ends in an effector organ (muscle or
gland) or forms a synapse with the dendrite of another neuron in the peripheral ganglion.
(b) Dendrites : The many nerve processes, which terminate near the cell body are
known as dendrites. Dendrites are short and more numerous processes containing Nissl
bodies. These are of uneven thickness bearing small spines of variable shapes. Dendrites
carry impulses towards the cell body.
6.4.1.3 Types of neurons (Fig. 6.40):
Neurons are classified on the basis of

the number of neurites as: unipolar,
pseudounipolar, bipolar, and multipolar.
(a) Unipolar: The neuron has a cell

body followed by an axon. Dendrites are absent.
(b) Pseudounipolar: At one pole of the

cell body, there is a T-shaped branching with
an axon and a dendrite running in opposite
directions, one to the CNS and the other to the
peripheral tissue.
(c) Bipolar: The neuron has a cell body and one each of an axon and a dendrite in
opposite directions.
(d) Multipolar: The cell body has many neurites, one long axon at one pole and
several short dendrites at the other pole.
(a) (b)
(c) (d)
Fig. 6.42 : Morphology of microglial cells, (a) protoplasmic astrocyte;
(b) fibrous astrocyte; (c) microglial cells; and (d) oligodendrocytes.
Neurons are also classified on the basis of their functions as: sensory or afferent
neurons, motor or efferent neurons, and interneurons. Sensory neurons carry impulses
from the peripheral receptors (sense organs) to the CNS and motor neurons carry impulses
from the CNS to the effectors (muscle and glands). Interneurons maintain connections
between the neurons of the CNS.
6.4.2. Neuroglia :
Neuroglia (nerve glue) are the non-conducting supporting cells of the CNS. In addition
to a mechanical support, they also provide a suitable environment for an optimal functioning
of the neurons. These are of four types : astrocytes, oligodendrocytes, microglia and
ependymal cells.
6.4.2.1. Astrocytes [Figs. 6.42 (a) and (b)J: Astrocytes are small star-shaped or
stellate cells, which give off a number of fine protoplasmic processes. These are of two
types : protoplasmic astrocytes and fibrous astrocytes. Protoplasmic astrocytes are found
mainly in the grey matter of the brain. Fibrous astrocytes occur in the white matter. The
protoplasmic processes are relatively thinner and longer. Some of the protoplasmic processes,
known as vascular feet or pedicels are intimately associated with the wall of blood capillaries
and some others with the neurons. This indicates that they nourish neurons.
6.4.2.2. Oligodendrocytes : These are smaller astrocytes and have fewer processes
than astrocytes [Fig. 6.42 (d)]. Oligodendrocytes form myelin sheath around the axons in the
CNS.
6.4.2.3. Microglia : These are smallest among all the neuroglial cells [Fig. 6.42 (c)].
Their function is like that of macrophages of the connective tissue. When nervous tissue is
damaged or injured, the microglial cells migrate to the site, proliferate and remove the debris
by phagocytosis.
6.4.2.4. Ependymal cells : These are simple cuboidal or low columnar cells lining the
ventricles of the brain and the central canal of the spinal cord. The apical parts of these cells
bear microvilli and cilia. The cilia facilitate the streaming of the cerebrospinal fluid in the
central canal and ventricles. The microvilli may also have some absorptive role. Ependymal
cells are, recently, established to regenerate neurons and thus are considered are stem cells
in nervous system.
DIFFERENCES :
I. Simple epithelium Compound / Stratified epithelium
1. It consists of a single layer of epithelial 1. It consists of multiple layers of cells.

cells, all resting on a basement The lowest layer of cells rests on the
membrane. basement membrane.
2. Simple epithelium is classified as 2. The classification into compound

squamous, cuboidal, columnar and squamous, cuboidal and columnar is
pseudostatified, based on the shape of based on the shape of the uppermost or
the cells. surface layer of cells.
II Epithelial tissue Connective tissue
1. Epithelial tissue consists of 1. Connective tissue consists of

homogeneous types of cells. heterogeneous types of cells.
2. The cells are tightly packed so that there 2. The connective tissue cells are scattered
is practically no intercellular space and leaving a considerable intercellular
substance or matrix. space, filled with a large quantity of
intercellular substance or matrix.
3. Epithelial cells rest upon a basement 3. There no basement membrane.
membrane made up of a glycoprotein
substance.
4. Covers the general body surface; lines 4. Connects other types of tissues and
internal cavities, blood vessels and ducts internal organs; forms packing around
opening to the external surface and internal organs; and constitutes the
internal cavities and lumens leading to structure of bones, cartilages, blood and
the external surface. lymph.
III. Loose / Areolar connective tissue Dense connective tissue
1. There is a loose or stray disposition of 1. The cells and fibers are densely or tightly
connective tissue cells and fibers. packed.
2. Ground substance is abundant. 2. Ground substance is scanty.
3. Connective tissue cells are more diverse 3. Connective tissue cells are less diverse
consisting of fibroblasts, macrophages consisting of fibroblasts, macrophages
(histiocytes), mast cells, adipose cells, and lymphocytes.
plasma cells etc.
4. It is distributed in varying amounts in 4. It forms the packing tissue (capsule) of
different parts of the body. It is present the visceral organs. It also connects
as the sub-cutaneous tissue and bone to muscle (tendon) and bone to
connects the visceral organs of the body. bone (ligament).
IV. Tendon Ligament
1. It is made up of white collagen fibers. 1. It is made up of yellow elastic fibers.

2. It is inelastic and tough. 2. It is elastic and strong.
3. Fibroblasts are present in rows. 3. Fibroblasts are scattered.
4. Tendon connects muscle to bone. 4. Ligament connects bone to bone.
5. Tendons have more strength with limited 5. Ligaments have strength with remarkable
flexibility. flexibility.
V. Bone Cartilage
1. Bone is hard and inelastic 1. Cartilage is soft and elastic
2. The bone matrix is formed of the protein, 2. Cartilage matrix is formed of the protein,
called ossein. called chondrin.
3. Inorganic mineral salts are present in 3. Inorganic mineal salts are absent.
the matrix.
4. Osteoblasts and osteocytes are bone 4. Chondroblasts and chondrocytes are the
cells. cartilage cells.
5. Osteocytes are enclosed within laculnae 5. Chondrocytes are enclosed within
singularly, which give off fine processes, lacunae in groups of two, three or four.
called canaliculi. No canaliculae are present.
6. Osteocytes give off protoplasmic 6. Protoplasmic processes are absent.
processes.
7. Bones are vascular. 7. Cartilages are nonvascular.
8. Haversian and Volkmann’s canals are 8. Canals are absent.
present.
9. Bone marrow is present. 9. Marrow is absent.
10. Haemopoiesis occurs in the bone 10. There is no marrow and hence, no
marrow. haemopoiesis.
VI. Hyaline cartilage Elastic cartilage
1. Most common type of cartilage present 1. Cartilage present in specific parts of the
in the body. body.
2. Bluish-white in colour. 2. Yellow in colour.
3. Matrix consists mostly of fine collagen 3. Matrix consists mostly of yellow elastic
fibers and very few elastic fibers. fibers and few fine collagen fibers.
4. Present at the ends of limb bone as 4. Present in the epiglottis, pinna and tip
articular cartilages, sternum, larynx, of the nose.
tracheal rings and nasal cartilage.
VII. Blood Lymph
1. Blood is red in colour due to the 1. Lymph is colourless. No respiratory

presence of a respiratory pigment, pigment is present.
haemoglobin.
2. It is composed of plasma, RBC 2. It is composed of plasma and WBC
(erythrocytes), WBC (leucocytes) and (leucocytes) only.
platelets (thrombocytes).
3. It carries all essential materials and O2 3. It transports only fatty acid and glycerol
to the tissues and removes excretory to the liver.
wastes, other harmful materials and CO2
from the tissues.
4. Neutrophils are most abundant. 4. Lymphocytes are most abundant.
5. Contains thrombocytes and the 5. Does not have clotting or coagulation
coagulation protein, fibrinogen and function.
hence, helps in clotting or coagulation.
VII. RBC (Erythrocytes) WBC (Leucocytes)
1. RBCs are small, circular, biconcave and 1. Larger than RBC, amoeboid and
non-nucleate cells. nucleated cells.
2. Red due to the presence of 2. Colouless due to the absence of
haemoglobin. haemoglobin.
3. More numerous than WBCs i.e. vary 3. Less numerous than RBC i.e. vary from
from 4.5 to 5.5 millions I mm3. 8,000 to 10,000 / mm3.
4. Life span is approximately 120 days. 4. Life span is only a few days.
5. Carry molecular oxygen from the lungs 5. Mostly defend the body from external
to the tissues. aggression.
IX. Smooth muscle Striated muscle
1. These are involuntary, nonstriated and 1. These are voluntary, striated and striped
unstriped muscles. muscles.
2. Muscle cells are spindle shaped, 2. Muscle cells are long and cylindrical,
containing centrally placed nucleus. called muscle fibers.
3. Myofilaments (actin and myosin) are 3. Myofilaments such as actin and myosin
present in the sarcoplasm. However, are organized into regular bundles to
these are not organized into regular impart a striated appearance. The
bundles to impart a striated appearance. organization is similar in the adjacent
muscle fibers so as to impart a striped
appearance as well.
4. The nucleus is centrally placed. 4. The nuclei are shifted to the peripheral
part of the sarcoplasm due to the
presence of myofilaments in bulk.
X. Skeletal muscle Cardiac muscle
1. Attached to bones and cartilages. 1. Present in the wall of heart and the wall
of large blood vessels in the vicinity of
2. Voluntary and undergo fatigue. their entering or leaving the heart.
2. Involuntary and never undergo fatigue.
3. Muscle fibers are long and cylindrical 3. The fibers are branched. The branches
and never branch. anastomoise with each other.
4. The fibers are multinucleated (syncytial) 4. The fibers are uninucleate, occasionally
binucleated.
5. Intercalated discs are absent. 5. Intercalated discs are present at the
anastomoising points.
XI. Actin Myosin
1. Known as thin filament. 1. Known as thick filament.

2. Made up of two fibrous actins (F-actins), 2. Made up of many myosin molecules,
spirally coiled round each other. Each each with an ATP and actin binding head
fibrous actin is made by a linear chain and a tail.
of globular actins or G-actins.
3. Each G-actin has an ATP binding site 3. Myosin head has an ATPase activity,
and ATPase activity. This activity is used which hydrolyzes ATP. The energy that
to assemble F-actin from G-actins. is generated is used to from cross
bridges and slide acitn and myosin past
each other.
6.5. GENERAL ANATOMICAL ORGANISATION OF COCKROACH :

6.5.1. Digestive System of Cockroach (Fig. 6.43):
The digestive system of cockroach (Periplaneta americana) includes the alimentary canal
and digestive glands. Cockroach is omnivorous. The mouth parts are of biting and chewing
type.
6.5.1.1. Alimentary Canal (Fig. 6.43) : It is divided into three sections : (i) fore gut or
stomodaeum, (ii) mid gut or mesenteron and (iii) hind gut or proctodaeum. The fore gut is
comprised of the mouth, pharynx, oesophagus, crop and gizzard. The mouth opens into a
short tubular pharynx leading to a narrow tubular passage called oesophagus. This in turn
opens into a sac like structure called crop used for storing food. Below the crop the gizzard or
proventriculus is present. It has an outer layer of thick circular muscle and the inner lining is
raised into six prominent longitudinal folds. These folds bear chitinous teeth (Fig. 6.44). Gizzard
helps in grinding the food particles. The mid gut is a short narrow tube of uniform diameter. The
hind gut is comprised of ileum, colon and rectum. The rectum opens to the exterior through the
anus.
6.5.1.2. Digestive Glands : The digestive glands, associated with the alimentary canal,
secrete enzymes for digestion of food. These are salivary glands, hepatic caecae and mid gut
lining. There is a pair of salivary glands. Each gland has a glandular part and a sac like storing
part called reservoir. The reservoirs and the glandular parts drain through a common efferent
salivary duct which open into the pre-oral cavity at the base of hypopharynx. The gland secretes
saliva which contains enzymes like zymase and mucoid substance.
The hepatic caeca consists of 7-8 small narrow tubular structures ending blindly that
open into the anterior end of mid gut. The digestive juice secreted by the hepatic caecae contains
trypsin, proteases, peptidases, amylase, lipase etc. The inner lining of mid gut also secretes
amylase, proteolytic and lipolytic enzymes.
Fig.6.44 : Transverse section of gizzard of

cockroach showing chitinous teeth
Respiratory System of Cockroach
The respiratory system consists of ectodermal tubes or tracheae (singulartrachea),

that open through 10 pairs of openings called spiracles present on the ventro-lateral sides of
the body. The trachea divide and redivide inside the body to form finer branches called
tracheoles. The opening and closing of spiracles is regulated by the sphincters. Exchange of
gases takes place at the tracheoles by diffusion. (For more description and figures refer to
Section 16.2.2 of Chapter-16 on Breathing and Respiration.)
6.5.3. Cardio-vascular System :

Open circulation in cockroach : All insects, including cockroach possess open
circulatory systems. In an open system, the body fluid (blood) does not circulate in closed
blood vessels. It circulates in a large spacious cavity, known as haemocoel. The body fluid,
known as hemolymph is colourless containing a few amoeboid cells or corpuscles. The
haemocoel, indeed, results from an enlargement of blood vessels, whose walls are represented
by perforated membranous partitions or diaphragms, dividing the haemocoel into three large
haemolymph-filled spaces or sinuses such as a dorsal pericardial sinus, enclosing the
heart; a middle perivisceral sinus, enclosing all visceral organs; and a ventral perineural
sinus, enclosing the ventral nerve cord (Fig. 6.46). Delicate processes of the pericardial
sinus extend into the wings, while similar processes from the perineural sinus extend into the
walking legs.
Auricular values are Ventricular values are

opened and ventricular opened and auricular
values are closed values are closed
(b) (c)
Fig. 6.45: Structure of heart of cockroach, (a) Complete heart with thirteen chambers;
(b) Two chambers showing auricular valves open and ventricular valves closed and
(c) ventricular valves open and auricular valves closed.
6.5.3.1. Structure of the heart: The heart is a long and tubular structure situated in
the pericardial sinus. It consists of thirteen contractile chambers, three in the thorax and
ten in the abdomen [Fig. 6.45 (a)]. Each contractile chamber is pear-shaped, which is narrow
in front and broad behind [Figs.6.45 (b) and (c)]. The narrow anterior end of one projects into
the broad posterior end of its preceding chamber. The narrow anterior end is guarded by
ventricular valves. The heart receives blood from the surrounding pericardial sinus by
paired ostia, present at the broad posterior end. The ostia are guarded by auricular valves.
Segmental paired alary muscles are attach each tergum with the dorsal diaphragm. The
heart extends anteriorly as a narrow dorsal aorta. The blood flows from behind forward
through the heart, while in a reverse direction in the perivisceral sinus.
6.5.3.2. Circulation : When the alary muscles contract, the auricular valves open and
the ventricular valves remain closed. The haemolymph from the pericardial sinus is pumped
into the heart through the ostia. When the alary muscles relax, the auricular valves are
closed and the ventricular valves open.
The pericardial sinus receives haemolymph from the perivisceral sinus through the
perforated dorsal diaphragm. The haemolymph is forced to flow forward through the heart
and then through the dorsal aorta, it is released into the perivisceral and perineural sinuses.
The haemolymph from these two sinuses passes into the pericardial sinus through the
perforated diaphragms and thus, the circulation is complete.
6.5.4. Excretory System :
The great majority of insects are adapted for life on land. One of the major problems
of life on land is conservation of water. This problem is solved by excreting water-insoluble
uric acid.
The malpighian tubules are the chief excretory organs where as fat body, cuticle and
probably the mushroom gland of males are considered as accessory excretory organs.
6.5.4.1. Malpighian tubule (Fig. 6.47) : There are about 60-150 long, slender and
yellow blind tubules extending freely into the peri-visceral sinus from the junction of mid-gut
and the hind gut. Each tubule is about 26mm long and 0.5 mm thick. Its wall consists of
an outer covering or sheath of connective tissue and muscle fibres and an inner epithelium
of large cuboidal cells provided with a brush border surrounding a central lumen.
The nitrogenous waste products are discharged by body cells and tissues into the
haemolymph contained in the perivisceral sinus. The malpighian tubules absorb these product
from the haemolymph along with water, salts and CO2.
Fig. 6.47 : Malpighian tubules of cockroach attached to the alimentary canal
Water and bicarbonates are reabsorbed and nitrogenous waste product turn into unic
acid which is discharged into the gut and then to outside through the anus.
6.5.4.2. Fat body : A large number of fat bodies remain suspended in the haemolymph
of the perivisceral sinus. These fat bodies contain specialised cells called urate cells, which
absorb the nitrogenous wastes from the haemolymph mainly as urates from which uric acid
is formed. The uric acid, thus formed, is permanently stored in these urate cells without
being discharged out. This kind of excretion is called storage excretion.
6.5.4.3. Cuticle of exoskeleton : Cockroach undergoes moulting or ecdysis 10 to 12

times from the nymph to the adult stage, each time increasing in size. Along with the
moulted chitinous exoskeleton a small amount of nitrogenous waste is also discharged out.
6.5.4.4. Mushroom gland : This is an accessory reproductive gland in male cockroach.

Some cells of this gland are known to absorb nitrogenous waste from the haemolymph and
synthesize uric acid from it, which is discharged out along with the spermatophores.
6.5.5. Nervous System (Fig. 6.48):
Head contains a pair of supra-oesophageal ganglia, which represent the brain. From
the brain arise two cirum oesophageal connectives which pass around the oesophagus and
join with the sub-oesophageal ganglion below the oesophagus.
A double ventral nerve cord arises from the

sub-oesophageal ganglion and travels
posteriorward along the midventral line in the
perineural sinus. The nerve cord has 3 large
thoracic ganglia, one each in the thoracic segments.
There are 5 small ganglia one each in the first 5
abdominal segments. The 6th ganglion is largest,
located a little behind the 7th abdominal segment.
Each of the thoracic ganglia and first 5 abdominal
ganglia consist of fusion of 2 ganglia, whereas the
6th abdominal ganglion is formed by fusion of 3 pairs
of ganglia.
The brain, suboesophageal ganglion, the

double nerve cords and their ganglia constitute
the central nervous system (CNS) of cockroach.
Three pairs of nerves from the brain

innervate eyes, antenae and labrum. Three pairs
of nerves arising from sub-oesophageal ganglion
innervate mandibles, maxillae and labium. Nerves
from thoracic and abdominal ganglia innervate
different parts of thoracic and abdominal regions.
In addition to this, there is a frontal ganglion
in front of brain, a pair of oesophageal ganglia
and a visceral ganglion on the crop. All of them
are connected to brain through connectives and
there is a sympathetic nervous system constituted by many visceral ganglia, which innervate
the visceral organs.
Cockroach can respond to different types of stimuli due to the presence of receptors in
the body. It has a pair of compound eyes which work as photoreceptor. Tactile receptors are
present on antennae, palpi, legs, body and anal cerci. Olfactory receptors are present on
antennae. Gustatory receptors are located on maxillae. The anal cerci contain auditory
receptors.
6.5.6. Reproductive System :
Cockroaches are dioecious i.e. both sexes are separate. There is a well defined sexually
dimophic feature. The male cockroach bears a pair of anal styles which are absent in the
female and both sexes have well developed reproductive organs.
Male reproductive organs (Fig. 6.49) consist of a pair of testes lying one on each lateral
side in the 4th-6th abdominal segments. From each testis arises a thin vas deferens, which
opens into an ejaculatory duct through seminal vesicle. Both the vasa differentia pass
backward upto to the posterior end of abdomen and then bend forward to meet in the middle
and open into the ejaculatory duct. The ejaculatory duct is elongated wide median duct which
runs backward and opens out through a male gonopore situated ventral to the anus. The
junction of the vasa differentia and ejaculatory duct is surrounded by an elaborate mushroom
gland made up of numerous, compact, finger-like blind tubules, arranged in two distinct groups.
Short tubules, the utriculibreviores, forming the bulk of the gland, secrete a nourishing fluid for
the sperms.
testis
5 phallic or
conglobate gland
utriculi
majores mushroom
6 gland
utriculi
breviores
►vas deferens
duct of
conglobate gland
ejaculatory duct
^genital pouch
'xfnaie genital ^pore
gonapophyses or phaliomeret
Fig. 6.49 : Male reproductive organs of cockroach in dorsal view.

terminal
filament
> ovariole
germarium
vitellarium
X
ovary
oviduct
spermatheca 4
common oviduct
right or vagina
collaterial
gland left collaterial gland
female genital chamber'

genital pore
genital pouch
gonapophyses vestibulum
Fig. 6.50 : Female reproductive organs of cockroach in dorsal view.
The female reproductive system (Fig. 6.50) consists of a pair of large bilateral ovaries,
lying laterally in the 2nd - 6th abdominal segments. Each ovary is formed of a group of eight
ovarian tubules or ovarioles. Each ovariole consists of (i) terminal filaments for suspension of
ovariole to the body wall, (ii) germarium which contains oogonia and (iii) vitellarium, the zone
which receives the oocytes. The ovarioles contain a chain of developing ova. Oviducts of each
ovary unite into a single median oviduct (also called vagina), which opens into the genital
chamber. A pair of spermatheca is also present in the 6th segment which also opens into the
genital chamber.
SAMPLES QUESTIONS
GROUP - A
1. Chose the correct answer :
(i) Ligaments and tendons are formed of

(a) Muscular tissue (b) Epithelial tissue
(c) Connective tissue (d) Nervous tissue
(ii) Segment of the skeletal muscle fiber between two Z-lines is called
(a) A-band (b) H-band
(c) Sarcomere (d) Sarcoplasm
(iii) Schwann cells and nodes of Ranvier are present in
(a) Bone cells (b) Neurons
(c) Muscle cells (d) Chondrocytes
(iv) Notochord originates from
(a) Ectoderm (b) Meroderm
(c) Endoderm (d) None
(v) Which muscle of body works nonstop till death

(a) Unstriped (b) Skeletal
(c) Cardiac (d) Smooth
(vi) In an animal, the tissue is bathed in

(a) Calcium chloride (b) Body fluid
(c) Water (d) Sodium chloride
(vii) Voluntary muscle is present in

(a) Lung (b) Liver
(c) Heart (d) Hind limb
(viii) Non-cellular basement membrane is a feature of

(a) Epithelial tissue (b) Vascular tissue
(c) Nervous tissue (d) Connective tissue
(ix) A tissue is a group of cells having
(a) Similar cells with dissimilar function
(b) Similar cells with similar function
(c) Dissimilar cells with dissimilar function
(d) Dissimilar cells with similar function
(x) Intercellular matrix is minimum in

(a) Bone (b) Vascular tissue
(c) Muscular tissue (d) Cartilage
(xi) Blood vessels are lined internally by
(a) Ciliated epithelium (c) Squamous epithelium
(b) Columnar epithelium (d) Striated epithelium
(xii) Transitional epihelium is found
(a) Kidney (b) Urinary bladder
(c) Trachea (d) Blood vessel
(xiii) Tendon connects
(a) Muscle to Muscle (c) Bone to Muscle
(b) Bone to Bone (d) Nerve to Muscle
(xiv) Cardiac muscle is
(a) Voluntary and striated (c) Involuntary and smooth
(b) Involuntary and striated (d) Voluntary and smooth
(xv) Epithelium forming the peritoneal lining of the coelom is
(a) Squamous epithelium (c) Columnar epithelium
(b) Cuboidal epithelium (d) Glandular epithelium
Myelin sheath is a covering of
(a) Vertebrate nerve fibre (c) Insect nerve fibre
(b) Vertebrate muscle fibre (d) Venticles of heart
Nature of dendrite is
(a) Efferent (b) Afferent
(c) Both a and b (d) None of these
(xviii) Which type of connective tissue is a tendon ?
(a) Dense (b)Loose
(c) Fluid (d) Skeletal
(xix) Intercalated disc is found in
(a) Neuron (c) Skeletal muscle
(b) Junction of muscle and nerve (d) Cardiacmuscle
(xx) Larynx and Trachea contain
(a) Hyaline cartilage (b) Elastic cartilage
(c) Bone (d) Fibrocartilage
(xxi) Myoglobin is found in

(a) White muscle fibre (c) Yellow fibre
(b) Red muscle fibre (d) All of these
(xxii) Oil glands in mammal (rabbit) are found in
(a) Epidermis of skin (c) Demis of skin
(b) Mucous epithelium of skin (d) Mucous epithelium of stomach
(xxiii) Erythrocytes of frog are
(a) Non nucleated and biconcave (c) Nucleated biconcave
(b) Nucleated biconvex (d) Non nucleated biconvex
(xxiv) Nerve cells develop from
(a) Ectoderm (c) Endoderm
(b) Mesoderm (d) Ectoderm and Mesoderm
(xxv) Mammary glands are
(a) Apocrine (b) Holocrine
(c) Merocrine (d) None of these
(xxvi) Cardiac muscle contracts
(a) Quickly and is fatigued (c) Slowly and is not fatigued
(b) Quickly and is not fatigued (d) Slowly and is fatigued
(xxvii) Largest erythrocytes are found 1
(a) Man and Monkey (c) Fish and frog
(b) Amphiuma and Proteus (d) Lizard and Snake.
(xxviii) Which vitamin is essential for blood clotting
(a) Vitamin A (b) Vitamin C
(c) Vitamin K (d) Vitamin E
(xxix) Blood transports
(a) Oxygen only
(b) Respiratory gases and excretory product only
(c) Respiratory gases nutrients and excretory products
(d) Respiratory gases and nutritive substances only
(xxx) Lymph differs from blood in the
(a) Absence of RBC (b) Absence of WBC
(c) Excess of water (d) Absence of protein
(xxxi) Blood is composed of
(a) Plasma and corpuscles (c) Plasma and WBC
(b) Plasma and RBC (d) Colloid particles
(xxxii) If RBCs are kept in distilled water they will

(a) Contract (c) Remain unaffected
(b) Just swell up (d) Swell up and Burst
(xxxiii) RBCs are kept in 8% saline solution it will
(a) Burst (c) Contract
(b) Remain unaffected (d) None of them
(xxxiv) RBC will contract if kept in
(a) Isotonic soln. (c) Hypertonic solution
(b) Distilled water (d) Hypotonic solution
(xxxv) In 100 ml. of blood of adult man amount of haemoglobin is
(a) 11 gm. (b) 12.5 gm.
(c) 14 gm. (d) 20 gm.
(xxxvi) Red bone marrow occurs in
(a) Ribs (c) Ribs and cranium
(b) Ribs, sternum (d) Ribs, sternum, cranium
(xxxvii) Secretion of sebaceous gland is
(a) Holocrine (b) Apocrine
(c) Epicrine (d) Merocrine
(xxxviii) Which is a simple coiled tubular gland
(a) Salivary gland (b) Sweat gland
(c) Sebaceons gland (d) Testes
(xxxix) Haemopoietic tissue is
(a) Dense connective tissue (c) Adipose tissue
(b) Reticular tissue (d) Epithelial tissue
(xl) Harmful bacteria and other foreign bodies are destroyed by
(a) Plasma protein (c) Phagocytosis by RBC
(b) Platelets (d) Phagocytosis by WBC
(xli) Phagocytic cells in Liver are
(a) Kupffer cell (b) Chromaffin cell
(c) Mast cell (d) None of these
(xlii) Which is irregular in shape
(a) RBC (b) WBC
(c) Muscle fibre (d) Epithelial cell
An erythrocyte in mammal is without nucleus because
(a) Erythrocyte is not a cell
(b) Nucleus is not required
(c) Nucleus disappears during its formation

(d) Nucleus is absent from the begining
(xliv) Source of energy for muscle contraction is
(a) Actin (b) Myosin
(c) Actomyosin (d) ATP
(xlv) Smooth muscles are
(a) Involuntary, spindle shaped uninucleate and tapering
(b) Voluntary multinucleate and cylindrical
(c) Involuntary cylindrical and multinucleate
(d) Voluntary, branched and uninucleate
(xlvi) The fibrous connective tissue sheath of bones is known as
(a) Pericardium (b) Perichondrium
(c) Perineurium (d) Periosteum
(xlvii) Sarcolemma is a membrane present on the outer side of
(a) Nerve fibre (b) Bone
(c) Muscle fibre (d) RBC
(xlviii)Tissue covering of the body surface is
(a) Epithelial (b) Connective
(c) Muscle (d) Adipose
(xlix) White matter of the spinal cord is made up of
(a) Nerve cells (c) Myelinated nerve fibers
(b) Non myelinated nerve fibers (d) Connective tissue cells
(I) Haemopoiesis in adult human occurs in
(a) Liver and spleen (b) Liver
(c) Spleen (d) Red bone marrow
(li) In human, haemoglobin is present
(a) In the liver (c) In erythrocytes
(b) Dissolved in the blood plasma (d) In spleen
(lii) Maximum number of cell bodies (cytons) are present in
(a) Spinal cord (b) Retina
(c) Brain (d) Ganglia
(liii) If bone is kept in 5% KOH solution for some days.
(a) Be unaffected (b) Dissolve
(c) Becomes Soft and elastic (d) Break
(liv) Which salt is found in maximum quantity in bones

(a) Calcium carbonate (c) Sodium chloride
(b) Calcium phosphate (d) Magnesium chloride
(Iv) If a bone is suspended in dilute hydrochloric acid, for a few days, it
(a) becomes harder (c) becomes softer and malleable
(b) remains unaffected (d) dissolves.
(Ivi) Mast cells occur in
(a) Nervous tissue (b) Connective tissue
(c) Epithelial tissue (d) Skeletal tissue
(Ivii) Afferent nerve fibre carries nerve impulse
(a) From central nervous system to a receptor
(b) From receptor to the central nervous system
(c) From central nervous system to the effector organ
(d) From effector organs to the central nervous system.
(Iviii) Increase in the number of erythrocytes is called
(a) Polycythemia (b) Glycosuria
(c) Hyperglycemia (d) Hypoglycemia
(lix) Epithelial tissue performs the following functions
(a) Protection, secretion, absorption and respiration
(b) Protection, secretion, sensation and absorption
(c) Absorption respiration secretion and sensation
(d) All of these
(lx) The cells responsible for dissolving the bone matrix are called
(a) Osteoblasts (b) Osteoclasts
(c) Osteocytes (d) Chondrocytes
(Ixi) Colourless plasma without corpuscles and fibrinogen is also known as
(a) Chyle (b) Lymph
(c) Serum (d) Thrombus
(Ixii) Mammary glands are modified
(a) Holocrine glands (b) Endocrine glands
(c) Sebaceous glands (d) Sweat glands
(Ixiii) Horns of arhinoceros are composed of
(a) Bone (b) Cartilage
(c) Chitin (d) Keratin
(Ixiv) A nerve is nothing but a bundle of

(a) Axons (b) Dendrites
(c) Ganglia (d) Cell bodies
(Ixv) Possible functions of Nissl body is
(a) Protein synthesis (b) RNA synthesis
(c) RNA storage (d) Impulse conduction
(Ixvi) The Male cockroach is identified by the presence of
a) Anal cerci b) Long antennae
c) Anal styles d) Wingless body
(Ixvii) In cockroach or insects the excretory organs are
a) Malpighian tubules b) Nephridia
c) Malpighian corpuscles d) Flame cells
(Ixviii)Cockroach is
a) Omnivorous b) Sanguivorous
c) Insectivorous d) Carnivorous
(Ixix) The juvenile stage of cockroach is known as
a) Larva b) Pupa
c) Maggot d) Nymph
(Ixx) In cockroach, the number of spiracles is:
a) 8 pairs b) 10 pairs
c) 12 pairs d) 14 pairs
(Ixxi) The blood-filled cavity of cockroach is known as
a) Coelem b) Haemocoel
c) Enteron d) Pseudocoel
(Ixxii) Cockroach respires by:
a) Cuticle b) Lungs
c) Trachea d) Book lung
(Ixxiii)In cockroach, the main excretory product is
a) Ammonia b) urea
c) Uric acid d) Hippuric acid
(Ixxiv) Mouth parts of cockroach are of
a) Sponging type b) Piercing type
c) Sucking type d) Biting and chewing type
(Ixxv) Muscles associated with heart of cockroach are:
a) Pericardial muscles b) Striped muscles
c) Tergo-sternal muscles d) Alary muscles
(Ixxvi) The tubular heart of cockroach is composed of:

a) 6 chambers b) 9 chambers
c) 10 chambers d) 13 chambers
(Ixxvii) In cockroach nerve cord is:
a) Single, ventral, solid b) Double, ventral, solid
c) Single, ventral, hollow d) Double,ventral, hollow
(Ixxviii) Characters common in cockroach, spider and prawn is
a) Book lungs b) Jointed legs
c) Green glands d) Compound eye
(Ixxix) In cockroach, the food is crushed and strained in
a) Crop b) Gizzard
c) Mesenteron d) Hepatic caecae
(Ixxx) Blood does not transport oxygen in:
a) Bird b) Earthworm
c) Rabbit d) Cockroach
(Ixxxi) How many clitinous teeth does the gizzard of cockroach have?
a) 2 b) 4
c) 6 d) 8
(Ixxxii) In female cockroach, the 7th sternum forms a boat shaped structure called:
a) Hypogynium b) Gonopoptysis
c) Phallomere d) Podial plate
(Ixxxiii) Each ovary of cockroach is composed of:
a) 4 ovarioles b) 6 ovarioles
c) 8 ovarioles d) 16 ovarioles
(Ixxxiv) Which of the following serves as the tongue of cockroach:
a) Labium b) Maxillae
c) Mandible d) Hypopharynx
(Ixxxv) Hepatic caeca in cockroach from
a) Junction of midgut and hindgut b) Gizzard
c) Midgut d) Junction of gizzard and midgut
2. Fill in the blanks with appropriate words

(i) Life span of erythrocytes isdays.
(ii) Junction of two neurons is called
(iii) is the structural and functional unit of a muscle fiber.
(iv) are the longitudinal canals found in bone.
(v) Nissl granules are found in
(vi) Outer most layer of a cartilage is known as
(vii) Bone forming cells are called

(viii) Cell bodies of most neurons in peripherial nervous system are grouped together as
(ix) Cartilage is formed by cells, called

(x) are periodic constrictions in the axon of a myelinated nerve fiber.
(xi) Branch of the science dealing with the study of tissues is known as
(xii) Brush border cuboidal epithelial cell possessat their free ends,
(xiii) Plasma without fibrinogen is known as
(xiv) A neuron receives the nerve impulse throughand transmit it through
(xv) Heart containsmuscle.
(xvi) Transportation ofis the main function of blood which is carried by a conjugate
protein called
(xvii) Epithelial tissue lining the blood vessel is known as
(xviii)is the group of cells specialized to perform a specific function.
(xix) Haversian canal is found in
3. Answer each of the following in single word :

(i) Name a mammal having nucleated RBC.
(ii) What type of cartilage is found in the intervertebral disc ?
(iii) Name the longest cell in the body.
(iv) Which animal possesses pneumatic bone ?
(v) Who coined the term epithelium ?
(vi) Which muscle doesn’t get fatigued throughout life ?
(vii) In which cell, Nissl granules are present ?
(viii) Volkman’s canal is present in which tissue ?
(ix) Who is known as father of histology ?
(x) Name the structural and functional unit of nervous tissue.
(xi) Name the tissue connecting muscle to a bone.
(xii) What is the expanded form of RBC ?
(xiii) Name the protein which constitutes the collagen fibre.
(xiv) What type of cartilage is found in ear pinna ?
(xv) Which type of tissue does blood come under ?
(xvvi) Where are Schwann cells found ?
(xvii) Which muscle is self excitatory ?
GROUP - B
1. Answer each of the following within 50 words :
(i) What is a ligament ?
(ii) How would you obtain pavement epithelium.
(iii) Why blood does not clot in blood vessel ?
(iv) What is the advantage of having transitional epithelium in the wall of the urinary
bladder ?
(v) What do you understand by pseudostratified epithelium ?
(vi) What is the fundamental difference between spongy bone and compact bone ?
(vii) Name different types of leucocytes and ennumerate their functions,
(viii) Why have tendons and ligaments more tensile strength ?
(ix) What do you mean by involuntary muscle ?
(x) What is the difference between G-actin and F-actin ?
(xi) Describe the role of troponin and tropomyosin in skeletal muscle contraction.
(xii) How does cardiac muscle differ from skeletal muscle ?
(xiii) Name the cells, which form myelin sheaths in axons of central nervous system and
peripheral nervous systems.
(xiv) Name the macrophage associated with the nervous tissue. What is its function ?
2. Write short notes on the following :

(i) Cartilage (vii) Stratified epithelium
(ii) Bone of mammal (viii) Neuroglia
(iii) Neuron (ix) Haversian system
(iv) Cardiac muscle (x) Leucocytes
(v) Myofibril (xi) Sarcomere
(vi) Adipose tissue
3. Differentiate between the following :

(i) Axon and Dendron
(ii) Epithelial tissue and Connective tissue
(iii) Cartilage and Bone
(iv) Striated muscle and Non-striated muscle
(v) Tendon and Ligament
(vi) Muscle cell and Nerve cell
(vii) Blood and Lymph
(viii) Cardiae muscle and Skeletal muscle
(ix) Myelinated and Unmyelinated nerve fibre
(x) RBC and WBC
(xi) Areolar tissue and Adipose tissue
UNIT-III : CELL STRUCTURE AND FUNCTION
CELL STRUCTURE AND CHAPTER
FUNCTION 7
7.1. CELL THEORY AND CELL AS BASIC UNIT OF LIFE :
The diverse forms of living organisms starting from microscopic unicellular organisms
to giant multicellular ones have a common basic organization. Even early philosophers and
naturalist like Aristotle and Paracelsus could recognize this fact and concluded that all animals
and plants are composed of few ‘elements’ which are repeated in them. Lamarck observed,
“no body can have life, if its constituent parts are not formed of cell”. However, due to lack of
proper optical devices no body could actually go further to establish the cellular organization of
the body.
7.1.1. Discovery of Cell :
Discovery of cell was delayed till the development of microscopes with good resolving
powers and magnification. Unaided human eye cannot resolve objects less than 100 micrometers
apart. Most cells are too small to be visualized with unaided eye. The first microscope was built
by Zacharias Janssen and H. Janssen in 1590. It was further modified with greater magnifying
power by Galileo in 1610. However, it was a British mathematician and physicist Robert Hooke
who in 1665 explored the microscopic world under a microscope developed by him. He, for the
first time, observed perforated and porous honey comb like structures in the remains of dead
cells of a piece of cork (cork of Oak - Quercus suber). He coined the term cell for each empty
honey comb like compartment (L. Celia - hollow space). His findings were published in a book
“Micrographia” written by him. However, the term ‘cell’ is actually a misnomer as the living cell
is neither hollow nor all the cells are covered by a wall. Further studies of cells continued with
the development of sophisticated microscope. In 1673 Leeuwen-hoek for the first time observed
and described free living cells like some bacteria, protozoa, spermatozoa, RBC etc. Malpighi
(1675) and Grew (1682) observed some plant cells. Further detailed studies of cells were
interrupted till the invention of good compound microscopes, and better fixation techniques. In
1839 Czech Physiologist Johannes Purkinje observed dense complex fluid inside the cell
called protoplasm. Hugo Von Mohl (1846) confirmed this. Robert Brown (1831) found the
presence of small spherical bodies within the epidermal cells of orchid root which were later
known as nucleus. In 1838 Schwann for the first time observed the cell membrane which was
so named by Nageli and Cramer in 1855. It became clear that structurally a cell is a mass of
protoplasm bounded by a cell membrane and having at its centre a spherical body, the nucleus.
7.1.2. Cell Theory and Cell as basic unit of life :
The credit of formulation of cell theory, goes

to the German Botanist Mathias Jacob Schleiden
and Theodore Schwann, a German Zoologist. This
theory established that the cell is the basic unit of life
and can be considered as the cell doctrine as it is
essentially a fact-based statement. Schleiden in 1838
stated that all plants “are aggregates of fully
individualized, independent, separate beings, namely
the cells themselves". In 1839, Theodor Schwann
reported that all animal tissues also consist of
individual cells but animal cells lack a cell wall. Both
of them compared their findings and jointly proposed
Fig.7.1 : A primitive Microscope
developed by Robert Hooke
the cell theory in 1839 in a paper titled “Microscopic

investigations on the similarity of structure and
growth in animals and plants”. However, they did not
know the mode of origin of new cells and believed that
new cells developed spontaneously. Rudolf Virchow
(1858) observed that new cells develop from pre-existing
cells - Omnis cellula e cellula. Cell theory was modified
accordingly.
Fig.7.2 : ‘Cells’ as seen by Hooke
Fundamental features of Cell Theory

1. All organisms, plants and animals, are composed of one or more cells and their products.
2. Each cell is made up of a mass of viscous substance called protoplasm containing a
nucleus.
3. New cells arise from pre-existing ones.
4. All cells are basically similar in their physiology and chemistry.
5. Activities of an organism is the sum total of the activities of its constituent cells.
Exceptions to Cell Theory

Cell theory as proposed above is not universal and exceptions do exist:
1. Viruses are nucleoproteins, lacking internal organization and outside the host, they are
as good as dead.
Cell Structure and Function I 297
2. Protozoa like Paramaecium has unicellular, differentiated body with a mouth/gullet,

contractile vacuole and many cilia. Similarly thallophytes like Acetabularia have a
unicellular but differentiated structure like foot, stalk and cap. Cell theory does not apply
here as they seem to have abandoned cell as a mechanical and structural unit and are
regarded as acellular.
3. In some organisms like Vaucheria and Rhizopus the body is not differentiated into cells
rather they are multinucleate (coenocytes). It has been regarded that in such coenocytic
organisms, each nucleus along with protoplasm surrounding it is a wall-less cell and the
organism itself is a group of protoplasmic unit. This laid Andre Lwoff in 1962 to propose
another theory. According to this theory the entire organism is regarded as the aggregation
of unity of plan, unity of function and unity of composition.
4. Bacteria and blue green algae (cyanobacteria) have no true nucleus, instead they have
incipient nuclei.
5. In the surface cells of animal skins and cork of plants, protoplasm is replaced by non
living materials.
6. RBC of animal blood and sieve tubes of plants continue to live without nucleus.
Modern Concept of Cell Theory
1. All living organisms, plants or animals, are composed of one or more cells or their
products.
2. Cells are structural and functional units of life.
3. New cells arise from pre-existing ones.
4. All cells are basically similar in their chemistry and physiology.
5. Growth of an organism depends on the growth and multiplication of its constituent cells.
6. The function of an organism is the sum total of the function and interaction of its cells.
7. Cell is a self-contained unit.
8. In an organism the hereditary or genetic informations are stored in its cells.
Structurally a cell is defined as “a mass of protoplasm bounded by a membrane and

having at its centre a spherical body, the nucleus." But the existence of coenocytes and living
cells without nucleus has given rise to a physiological definition of cell. A. G Loewy and P.
Siekevietz in 1969 defined cell as "the smallest organized unit of any living form which is
capable of prolonged independent existence and replacement of its own substance in a suitable
environment.” Besides the cell theory, there are other theories too. The protoplasmic theory by
Schultz, (1861) states that the basic unit of organism is protoplasm, not cell. Organismal theory
by Sachs (1874) states that the body of an organism is made up of continuous mass of living
matters incompletely divided into compartments called cells.
Cell size: Generally cell size ranges from 0.1 to 20 micrometer. The smallest cell so far
found is of PPLO (pleuropneumonia like organism) or Mycoplasma gallisepticum where the
cell is 0.1 micrometer in diameter. The largest cell is the egg of Ostrich which is six inches in
diameter with shell and three inches in diameter without shell. Acetabularia, the unicellular
green alga, is about ten centimeter in length. In alga like Caulerpa the length of a cell can be up
to one meter. In animals, nerve fibers can be as long as 90cm to one meter. In general,
metabolically active cells are smaller and the cells of a particular tissue have almost the same
volume.
Cell number: Number of cell varies greatly among the organisms- a single cell in
unicellular organism to infinite number of cells in multicellular organisms. A man of 80 Kg can
have about 60 thousand billion cells. In colonial forms each type has a fixed number of cells.
For example, in green alga Pandorina each colony has 8, 16 or 32 cells.
Cell shape: The cell may be spherical, polygonal, discoid, cuboidal, columnar or spindle
like. Generally individual cells are spherical, but depending on function and organization the
shape of the cells vary. Sometimes a particular cell may undergo shape change as is seen in
the case of Amoeba and also in Leucocytes.
Cell Basic Unit
The cell acts as an autonomous, self-contained unit and is capable of performing all the
processes of life like metabolism, growth, reproduction and damage repair. The entire set of
information for fundamental processes of life is stored inside the cell so that the cell can itself
control its own activities. The cell acts as an open system exchanging matters with its environment.
The cell exchanges gases with, and absorbs nutrients from its environment. The cell derives
energy from respiration, builds up macromolecules from simpler molecules, replaces its worn-
out structures with new ones and form new cells with similar hereditary properties. The cell
controls its own physico-chemical environment by enzymes produced by it. Each cell is capable
of independent existence and has a definite life span. In multi cellular organisms the cell may
not have complete independence as there exists a division of labour among different cells of
the organism. In such organisms, cells are differentiated into specialized cells to carry out
different functions.
Totipotency
All multicellular and sexually reproducing organisms begin their lives as single cells
called zygotes formed by the union of sperms and eggs. This zygote contains all the informations
necessary for divisions and differentiation at the right time and right place so that a multicellular
organism is formed from this single cell. Based on this knowledge German botanist Gottleb
Haberlandt in 1902 gave the concept of totipotency in plants. Totipotency is the potential of
any plant cell to regenerate the entire plant. This concept of totipotency cannot be applied to
all kinds of animal cells. The somatic cell lines in animals after their differentiation to specialized
cells lose the power of division. These cells cannot be dedifferentiated to start dividing again.
But in contrast, the plant cells can exhibit totipotency when grown in artificial medium. Though
the concept of totipotency was advocated by Haberlandt, he himself could not demonstrate it.
He cultured isolated palisade tissues of leaf in Knop’s solution. The cells grew in size and lived
up to a month but failed to divide. F. C. Steward at Cornell University in 1958 placed phloem
tissue of Carrot (Daucus carota) in a liquid growth medium and observed that individual cells
broke away from tissue fragments. They often divided and developed into multicellular roots.
When he placed these roots in solid growth medium they developed into entire plants. Since
then totipotency has been demonstrated by several workers in many plants. Barring some
animal cells this phenomenon of totipotency is restricted to plants. Totipotency in plants has
several applications like micropropagations of horticultural plants, production of disease free
plants, microforestry etc.
7.2. STRUCTURE OF PROKARYOTIC AND EUKARYOTIC CELLS :
On the basis of cellular organization in living organisms two types of cells are recognized:
prokaryotic cell with no organized nucleus and eukaryotic cell with organized nucleus bound by
nuclear enevolope.Prokaryotes (Gk. Pro - primitive; Karyon - nucleus) include primitive organisms
like bacteria, cyanobacteria and mycoplasma. Eukaryotes (Gk.Eu -true) include higher
organisms.
Fig.7.3 : A Typical prokaryotic cell

Fig.7.4 : A Mycoplasma
Fig.7.5 : ACyanobacterial cell

7.2.1. Prokaryotic Cell:
Prokaryotic cells are the simplest kind of cells. The cells are smaller in size, consisting
of cytoplasm surrounded by a cell membrane and encased within a rigid cell wall(except in
Mycoplasma).These cells do not have interior compartments. These cells vary in size from
0.1 pi m - 0.25 pi m (as in Mycoplasma), a few pi m in length as in bacteria and a little larger in
Cyanobacteria.The cellular contents constitute a dense cytoplasm and a less electron dense
nuclear area but no organized nucleus. The nuclear material or prokaryotic chromosome is a
variously coiled naked DNA molecule without any histone protein and not enclosed within an
envelope. It is known as genophore or nucleoid or incipient nucleus. Some prokaryotes like
bacteria also contain extra
chromosomal, additional small
DNA entities called plasmids.
Cyanobacteria and photosynthetic
bacteria posses layered
membranes involved in
photosynthesis. These
membranes appear to be derived
from the infoldings of the cell
membrane. Membrane bound cell
organelle like mitochondria,
endoplasmic reticulum, Golgi
comlex, lysosomes etc. are
absent. Microtubules are also
absent. The prokaryotic cell
contain 70s ribosomes for protein
synthesis as compared to 80s
ribosomes in eukaryotes.
The cytoplasm does not

show streaming movement or Fig.7.6 : A Typical Animal Cell
cyclosis and spindle fibers are
never formed during cell division (refer Cell division).True vacuoles are absent. Some prokaryotes
contain flagella but the internal organization of prokaryotic flagellum is different from that of
eukaryotes. The bacterial cell divides by simple fission and both the bacteria and cyanobacteria
form resting spores to pass off adverse conditions.
7.2.2. Eukaryotic Cell:
The eukaryotic cells found in higher forms of plants and animals are far more complex
structures than procarbotic cells. The characteristic features of eukaryotic cell is the presence
of a membrane bound organized nucleus enclosing the genetic materials and also the
compartmentalization of the interior of the cell by extensive endomembrane system, (fig 6.12
& 6.13).The exterior of the cell is bound by a plasmamembrane in animal cell. The plant cells
have rigid cell walls external to plasma membranes. The cytoplasm contains a number of
membrane bound organelles like mitochondria, endoplasmic reticulum, Gogi complex,
lysosomes. Cytoskeleton, microfibrils and microtubules are found in eukaryotic cells. The
eukaryotic ribosome is 80s type.
TABLE - 7.1
Differences between prokaryotic and eukaryotic cell
Features Prokaryote Eukaryote
Cell size Generally 1-10|im in linear Generally 10-100|im in linear
dimension. dimension.
Protoplasm Relatively rigid, nonvacuolated, More fluid, vacuolated, more
resistant to dessication,osmotic sensitive to dessication,osmotic
shock and thermal denaturation. shock and thermal
denaturation.
Organelles Membrane bound organelles Membrane bound organelles like
absent. mitochondria, endoplasmic
reticulum etc. present
Nucleus True nucleus absent; no nuclear True nucleus present with nuclear
membrane,no nucleolus,no nu - membrane, nucleolus and nucleo
cleoplasm. plasm
Ribosome Small, 70s type. Large, 80s type. (organelles like
mitochondria and chloroplasts have
70s ribosomes)
Chromosome Single naked DNA without DNA organized with hitones to form
histone protein. distinct chromosomes.
Photosynthetic Membranes with chlorophyll a Chloroplasts with chlorophyll a
apparatus and phycocyanin in blue-green and b in stacked grana.
algae,bacteriochlorophyll in bacteria.
Cell wall composed of amino sugars and mur- cell wall wherever present is
amic acid cellulosic.
Flagella lack 9+2 fibrillar structure. Posseses 9+2 fibrillar structure.
Cell division No mitosis\meiosis. Cell divides By mitosis and meiosis, rarely by
by fission. fission.
Sexual process Typical sexual process lacking, Sexual process well developed.
genetic materials exchanged by
parasexual means.
Cellular movement Cytoplasmic streaming, Cytoplasmic streaming, exo- and
Only endocytosis found endo-cyclosis found.
Cytoplasam iiw Cytoplasmic

- inclusions^,
Vacuole Plasma
\ •X• membrance
o 6:
-^—Mitochondrion
Golgi ------ Cell wall
complex Middle
____lamella
Nucleolus _ ____ Endoplasmic
Chromatin reticulum
reticulum ___^-Starch grain
Nuclear ____Nuclear
pore membrance
Riosome ____ Chloroplest
---------- Lysomome
oil droplet 3-i^Cytoplasmic
inclusions
Fig.7.7 : A Typical Plant Cell
7.2.3. Plant Cell and Animal Cell :

The structures of typical animal cell and a typical plant cell are given in Fig. 7.6 and Fig.
7.7. Actually typical cells do not exist in nature as cells differ from one another. Therefore, a
typical cell is a concept where all the structures associated with different types of cells are
incorporated into single cell. Most of the components are common in both plant and animals
cell. The basic differences are given in Table 7.2.
TABLE-7.2
Differences between plant and animal cells.
Features Plant Cell Animal Cell

Size Comparatively large Comparatively small
Cell Wall It is rigid, porous, dead and cellulosic Absent
Vacuole Contains large central vacuole Mostly absent, if present small,
and scattered.
Chloroplast Green plastids present in green Absent except in some protozoa
plants. Also coloured and colourless like Euglena.
plastids found.
Centriole Generally absent except in certain lower Present

forms like motile algae and motile sex
cells of primitive plants
Cillia and Motile plant cells have cilia or flagella Present only in protozoa and
flagella spermatozoa.
Cytokinesis During cell division cytoplasm Cytoplasm divides by
divides by constriction. by cell plate formation
7.3. CELL ENVELOPE :

Some prokaryotic cells like bacteria have an external covering outside the cell wall and
cell membrane which are collectively known as cell envelope. That gelatinous envelope on the
outer surface of the cell wall is composed of only polysaccharides forming viscous layer. It is
known as slimy layer. But when nitrogenous substances are present along with polysaccharides
then it is called capsule. The slime layer of capsules protects the cell from desiccation and
antibodies. The encapsulated bacterial also remain unaffected by phagocytes. Besides some
algae have mucilaginous layers as envelope which help them in floating in aquatic habitat.
7.3.1. Cell wall :

Cell wall is a fairly rigid, protective and supportive layer surrounding the cell external to
plasma membrane of plants, bacteria, archaea, fungi and algae. It is absent in animals and
most protists. It was first observed by Robert Hooke in 1665. It is not an entirely rigid structure
as the cell wall expands due to the growth of the cell. It varies in thickness from 0.1 p m to 10
p m. In most of the cells, cell wall is present from the very beginning to the last, but in slime
molds (Myxomycetes) cell wall is present for a very short time.
The cell wall is made of different materials depending on cell type. Only plant cell walls
have cellulose which is an unbranched polysaccharide of D-Glucose linked together by |3 — 1,
4 - glycoside bonds. Bacterial cell walls are composed of peptidoglycan. The cell walls in
Archaea are composed of various substances including glycolproteins-layers,
pseudopeptidoglycan or polysaccharides. Fungi have cell walls made up of chitin and algae
have glycoprotein and polysaccharides. However, certain algae have silicic acid and often
other accessory molecules found anchored to the cell wall.
Fig.7.8 : Cell wall Showing Three Layers of Secondary Wall

in Transverse section (left) and Longitudinal section (right).
In general, the plant cell wall consists of middle lamella, primary wall and secondary
wall and is derived from the living protoplast.
Middle Lamella It is the cementing layer of

a thin amorphous substance between two adjacent
cells. This layer is the first formed layer and is laid
down during cytokinesis. The primary wall is
deposited inner to middle lamella. The surface cells
on their outer or exposed sides lack middle lamella.
It is constituted by Calcium and Magnesium
pectate. The actual structure is not clearly defined
and several models are there to explain the structure
of the middle lamella. They are, co-valently linked
crossed model, teether model, diffuse layer model
and stratified layer models. The pectic substances
of this layer are enzymatically converted to partially Fig.7.9 : Cell wall showing middle lamella
Primary wall and secondary wall
soluble substances during the ripening of fruits
causing the ripe fruits to soften. It can be done artificially by spraying strong acids.
Primary wall: This layer is laid down inner to the middle lamella. During the cell
enlargement the primary wall remains relatively thin and elastic. Thickening and rigidity come
only after the completion of cell enlargement. Major carbohydrates making up the primary wall
are cellulose, hemicelluloses and pectin. The cellulose micro fibrils are linked via hemicellulose
teethers to form the cellulose-hemicellulose net work which is embedded in pectin matrix. Out
of the three subgroups of hemicelluloses like the xylans, the mannans and the galactans, xylans
or xyloglycans is the most common in primary wall. Pectin, the polymers built up mainly of a-
D galacturonic acid fills the spaces of the matrix. In brown alga the polyuronic acid constituting
Fig.7.10 : (a) Plasmodesmata present between adjacent cells, (b) Layers of cell wall
pectin is structurally different and is called alginic acid. The cellulose micro fibrils are aligned
at all angles and are held together by hydrogen bonds to provide high tensile strength. Plant
cell walls also incorporate a number of enzymatic and structural proteins. Numerous hydrolases
have been found in cell walls including invertase, glucanases, pectin methyl esterases and
various phosphatases. Several oxidases are also present including ascorbic acid oxidase
and laccase involved in lignin formation. The most abundant structural proteins are hydroxyl
proline rich glycoprotein (HRGP) also called extensin; the arabinogalactan protein (AGP), the
glycine rich proteins (GRPS) and proline rich protein (PRP). Except GRPS the rest are
glycoproteins and contain hydroxyl-proline. Extensin connects pectin and hemicelluloses.
(A) (B)
Fig.7.11 : Arrangement of fibrils in (A) primary wall and (B) secondary wall
(c)
Fig.7.12 (c): Ultra structure of cellulose molecule
Secondary wall
In some plants and cell types, after the maximum growth is reached a secondary wall is
laid down inner to the primary wall. Unlike the Primary wall the cellulose micro fibrils are aligned
mostly in same direction and with each additional layer of the secondary wall the direction of
alignment slightly changes. The secondary wall is multilayered consisting of at least three
layers. The secondary wall is strengthened by the deposit of lignin. In general lignin is found in
mechanical and conducting (Vascular) tissues. Lignin also occurs in the cell walls of pith, roots,
fruits, buds, bark and cork. Lignins are polymers of phenyl propane residues. The lignin of
monocots, dicots and gymnosperms are structurally different. In the walls of cork and endodermal
cells a special fatty substance called suberin is deposited making the walls impermeable to
water. Another fatty substance called cutin is laid down as a distinct layer on the outside of
epidermal cell walls. This layer is known as cuticle that checks transpiration from the surface
cells. The secondary wall is laid down by a process called accretion or deposition of materials
over the surface of existing structure. Secondary walls are laid down in trachieds, vessels,
fibers and collenchymas etc. In certain tissues of gymnosperms the innermost layer of the
multilayered secondary wall is chemically different from other layers due to the presence of
xylans. This layer is then called tertiary wall. Inorganic compounds like calcium carbonates
and calcium silicate are found in the cell walls of some plants. Siliceous cell walls occur
amongst the diatoms (Algae), Equisetaceae (Pteridophyte), Cyperaceae, and Poaceae
(Angiosperms).
The growth of the cell wall takes place in two ways: (1) Intussusceptions - growth
from within. Area of the cell wall increases in this way. The primary wall is stretched and material
of secondary wall are deposited.
(ii) Apposition - growth from outside. The thickness of the cell-wall increases in this
way. Materials of secondary walls are deposited in thin layers.
The cells having secondary wall are rigid. They communicate with adjacent calls through
pits in the secondary wall that allow plasmodesmata to connect through. Pits develop as
depressions on secondary wall forming a pit chamber. The primary wall and middle lamellum
constitute the pit membrane. The pits may be simple or bordered. In simple pits the pit chamber
has uniform width. The bordered pits have flask-shaped pit chambers. The plasmodesmata are
cytoplasmic bridges between adjacent cells that develop through minute pores of cell wall.
They form a protoplasmic continuum called symplast. It is lined by plasma membrane and has
tubular extension of endoplasmic reticulum called desmotubule. Tangle in 1879 first observed
plasmodesmata and these were extensibly studied by Strasburger in 1901 .Plasmodesmata
can be simple or branched.
Function
1. Protects the cell and gives a definite shape to it
2. It provides a filtering mechanism for the cell
3. It prevents the cell from over expansion and bursting due to endosmosis.
4. It forms a protective barrier against pathogens.
5. It protects the protoplasm from mechanical injury.
6. Cell wall having cutin and suberin checks water loss from the cell.
Intercellular spaces: In mature cells three kinds of cavities or space are found, which
are of following types:
(i) Schizogenous cavities (Schizein-to split) The cell walls of mature cells separate
and form schizogenous cavities, e.g. resin canals in Pinus.
(ii) Lysigenous cavities (Lysis-breakdown) These cavities are formed by the breakdown
of cell walls, e.g. Citrus oil cavities.
(iii) Schizo-lysigenous cavities These cavities are formed both by the separation and
breakdown of cell walls e.g. protoxylem of maize.
7.3.2. Cell Membrane :
Cell membrane or plasma membrane or plasma lemma is the outer limiting membrane
in most animal cells and it lies inner to cell wall in plant cells. Many cell organelles of eukaryotic
cells also have membrane covering. Vacuoles also are separated from cytoplasm by a membrane
called tonoplast. The cell membrane or plasma membrane and the subcellular membranes
together constitute the biological membranes, or biomembranes. Biomembranes are dynamic,
quasifluid, selectively permeable and film like structure of about 7.5 nm (75 A,) in thickness.
Chemical composition
In 1895, C. Overton, applying the idea, “like dissolves the like” concluded that
biomembranes are made of lipids. He based his findings on the observations that lipid-soluble
substances entered cells much more rapidly than water-soluble substances. Twenty years later,
membranes isolated from Red Blood cells were chemically analyzed and found to be composed
of proteins as well as lipids and small amount of carbohydrates. The proportional compositions
of these substances vary from membrane to membrane. For examples, Myelin membranes
have 18% protein, 79% lipid and 3% Carbohydrates. Human erythrocyte membranes have
49% protein, 43% lipid and 8% Carbohydrates where as Spinach lamella has 70% protein, 30%
lipid and no carbohydrates. Mitochondrial inner membrane has 76% protein and 24% lipids.
The lipids found in biomembranes can be phospholipids, glycolipids, sterols, and
sphingolipids. The most abundant membrane lipids are phospholipids. About one hundred
different types of phospholipids are associated with membranes. The sterols can be cholesterols,
phytosterols and ergosterols.
The Carbohydrates are mostly associated either with lipids as glycolipids or proteins
as glycoproteins. These carbohydrates are branched or unbranched oligosaccharides of
hexoses, fucoses, hexosamines, sialic acid etc. The proteins can be structural proteins,
carrier proteins, receptor proteins or enzyme proteins. Many enzymes (about 30 or more)
are associated with biomembranes.
The ability of phospholipid to form biomembranes is built into their structures. A
phospholipid is an amphipathic/amphiatic molecule, meaning it has both a hydrophilic (water
loving) or polar region and hydrophobic (water hating) or nonpolar region. Other types of
membrane lipids are also amphipathic. In case of phospholipids except cardiolipin, two long
non polar hydrocarbon tails are attached to a hydrophilic phosphate head. The hydrophilic
regions of the lipids stay at the surface of the membrane in contact with water and the hydrophobic
regions remain inside the core of the membrane sealed away from water. The proteins may
have hydrophilic and hydrophobic regions. The hydrophilic or polar regions of protein remain
towards outside and the hydrophobic regions are folded inside the core or establish hydrophobic
interactions with core lipid portion.
protein lipid protein
955
A
Fig 7.13 : Models of cell membrane as proposed by :
A. Danielli & Davson ; B. Robertson.
Two Dutch scientists E. Gorier and F. Grendel in 1925 compared the amount of lipid
extracted from erythrocyte membranes to the total surface area of the cell and concluded that
phospholipids form a bilayer. Cell membranes are actually a bilayer, two molecules thick. Such
a bilayer could exist as a stable boundary between the two aqueous compartments (one is the
exterior of cell and the other is the cytoplasm). This bilayer arrangement of lipids shelters the
hydrophobic regions in the core of the membrane away from water and exposes the hydrophilic
regions on the surface of the membrane.
Several models have been put forward explaining the arrangement of lipids and proteins
in a biomembrane. People actually started constructing molecular models of cell-membrane
much before its structure was actually resolved under electron microscope. H. Davson and J.
Danielli in 1935 advocated the protein-lipid-protein sandwich model. As per this model the lipid
layer is sandwiched between two layers of protein. It was later modified to pleated-sheet model.
Here the proteins form continuous sheets on both sides of lipid layer. In 1950 the electron
micrographs obtained by heavy metal (osmium) staining of cell membrane showed a triple
layered structure of membrane.
There were two electron-dense bands separated by an electron transparent (unstained)

layer. Basing on this observation in 1959 J. David Robertson put forward the Unit
membrane concept. According to this concept all biological membranes have the basic
unit membrane structure of three layers-two outer electron dense layers and(.one middle
electron transparent layer. Each dense layer is constituted by protein of 15 A thickness
and the transparent layer is of bilayer of lipid of 45 A thickness.
Objections to unit membrane concept

(1) Not all membranes look trilamellar under electron microscope. The inner mitochondrial
membrane appears like row of beads.
(2) All membranes are not alike as plasma membrane is 7-8nm in thickness, mitochondrial
membrane in only 6nm.
(3) The chemical compositions of all membranes are not same. Membranes with different
functions have different chemical compositions.
(4) Membrane proteins also have hydrophobic regions. If all the proteins are placed on the
surface of the membrane then the hydrophobic regions of the proteins will be exposed to
water. This will make the membrane unstable.
Fluid-mosaic model
In 1972 S. Singer and G. Nicolson advocated a revised membrane model. According

to them a bilayer of phospholipids is not coated with solid sheets of proteins rather the proteins
are dispersed and individually inserted into the phospholipids bilayer. Only the hydrophilic portions
of the proteins protrude far enough from the bi layer to be associated with water. This arrangement
views membrane as a mosaic of protein molecules bubbling in a fluid bi-layer of lipids. This
molecular arrangement would be a stable one because it would maximize the contact of
hydrophilic regions of proteins and phospholipids with water while providing the hydrophobic
Fig. 7.14 : Fluid mosaic model of plasma membrane.

parts with a non aqueous environment. A method of preparing cells for electron microscopy
called Freeze-fracture technique has provided the most compelling evidence that proteins are
embedded in lipids. In this preparation the interior of membrane under electron microscope
gave a cobble-stoned or bumpy appearance. Other experiments proved that the bumps are
proteins in lipid bilayer. The lipids are arranged in bilayer so that their hydrophilic head groups
are towards the surface and the non-polar tails of both layers face each other at the core of the
membrane.
Depending on their arrangement the proteins found in the membrane are of two broad
categories. The extrinsic or peripheral proteins are those which do not interact directly with
the hydrophobic core of the membrane. They are usually bound to the membrane either indirectly
by interactions with integral membrane proteins or directly by interactions with lipid polar head
groups. Most Peripheral proteins are soluble in aqueous solutions and are bound to internal
membrane proteins by ionic and weak interactions. They can be easily removed from the
membrane either by solutions of high ionic strength or by chemicals that bind bivalent cations
such as Mg++. Most peripheral proteins are not solubilised by detergents since they are not
bound directly to the hydrophobic core. The proteins spectrin and ankyrin, the cytoskeletal
proteins that are bound to inner face of erythrocyte cell membrane are some examples of
extrinsic proteins. Other peripheral proteins are localized to outer surface of plasma membrane,
such as certain proteins of glycocalyx (discussed later).
The integral membrane proteins are internal membrane proteins which pass into the
lipid bilayer to different depths. They are not soluble in water and contain at least one very
hydrophobic segments of 10 to 20 amino acid long. A few intrinsic proteins are anchored to the
membrane mainly by glycophospholipids that is attached covalently to the carboxyl terminus of
the protein. They are held to the membrane by three types of interactions like hydrophobic
interactions with lipid interior, ionic interactions with polar heads of lipids or specific interactions
with defined structures of lipid. Some intrinsic proteins can span across the membrane from
outer face to inner face. These membrane spanning proteins may span the membrane only
once so that only one segment of the protein is within the membrane. These proteins are called
single pass proteins, e.g., Glycophorin of RBC. Multipass proteins span the membrane many
times so that more than one segment of the proteins are within the membrane. Bacterial
Rhodopsin spans the membrane seven times. Integral membrane proteins can be removed
from the membrane by the action of detergents which displaces the lipid bound to hydrophobic
side chains of proteins. The transmembrane or membrane spanning proteins either singly or in
groups function as tunnel proteins providing channels for diffusion of water and water soluble
substances. Some of them behave as permeases allowing facilitated diffusion. There are
transmembrane proteins involved in active transport known as carrier proteins. Some cell
surface membrane proteins act as signal receptors and on the inner side of the membrane
there are proteins which anchor the membrane to cytoskeleton.
The two faces of the membrane (the exterior and the cytoplasmic face) can be studied
separately by freeze-fracture technique. This reveals that the two faces of the membrane are
not the same. The amount and type of the proteins found on two faces are different. The
cytoskeletal anchor proteins are always towards the cytoplasmic face. The lipids also vary in
their amount and type on both the faces. On the erythrocytes membrane sphingomyelin,
phosphatydylcholine are more on outer face than on inner face. While phosphatidyl serine is
only found on the inner face. The oligosaccharides attached to glycolipids and glycoproteins
are found only on the outer surface. The proteins found on one face never flip-flop across the
membrane as such movement would be energetically unfavorable
Functions
(1) Forms the boundary of cells enclosing the semi fluid contents of the cells.
(2) Sub cellular membranes help in compartmentalization of cells in eukaryotes.
(3) Infolding of plasmalemma in bacteria form mesosomes required for nucleoid replication
and cell division.
(4) Grows over cilia and flagella, forming sheaths.
(5) Form functional complexes like tight junction in epithelial cells, gap junction between
adjacent cells for connections, plasmodesmata in plant cells, and desmosomes in epithelial
cells .
(6) Form microvilli or striated border or brush border on the free surfaces of absorbing cells,
e.g., intestinal cells, hepatic cells etc.
(7) Membrane proteins transport materials in and out of the cells
(8) Signal receptor proteins receive signals from hormones and such other chemicals and
transmit those signals to the interior of cells.
(9) Membrane proteins also act as anchor for cytoskeletal components and extra cellular
matrix.
(10) Membrane proteins on the outer face of the membrane endow the cells with individuality
to allow them to assort appropriately during differentiation.
(11) Various enzymes associated with cell and sub cellular membranes allow different chemical
reactions to be catalyzed in different parts of the cell.
7.4. CELL ORGANELLES - STRUCTURE AND FUNCTION :
Eukaryotic cells contain a number of cytoplasmic organelles associated with different

functions. These organelles may be membrane-bound like nucleus, mitochondria, chloroplasts
etc. or non-membranous like ribosome, centriole etc. The membrane bound organelles
compartmentalize the eukaryotic cells so that each compartment carries out a specific function.
This compartmentalization is absent in prokaryotes.
7.4.1. Endomembrance System :
The eukaryotic cells have an extensive network of internal membranes or endomembrane

system connecting or spreading from the outer neuclear enevelop to the cell membrane. This is
primarily reponsible for internal trafficking as well as modification of macromolecules like proteins
and lipids. This system comprises of endoplasmic reticulum, Golgi complex, lysosomes and
vacuoles functioning in a continuum.
7.4.1.1. Endoplasmic Reticulum (ER) :
The largest internal membrane system in a cell is the endoplasmic reticulum.

Endoplasmic means “within the cytoplasm” and reticulum in Latin means “a little net”. This
endo membrane system packs the interior of eukaryotic cells and is not visible under light
microscope. This was discovered independently by Porter and Thompson in 1945 and the
name was given to it by Porter. This is a compartment comprising of a network of
interconnected, closed, membrane bound vesicles dividing the cells into compartments,
channeling the passage of molecules through the interior of the cells and providing
surfaces for the synthesis of lipids and some proteins. Often it constitutes more than half
of the total membrane in a cell, although the extent of endoplasmic reticulum varies from cell to
cell. Metabolically active cells like cells of pancreas, liver and those responsible for production
of hormones and antibodies have extensive network of ER. The storage cells like the adipose
cells have simple ER only in the form of tubules. ER is absent in eggs, mature erythrsocytes,
embryonic cells and prokaryotic cells. In spermatocytes ER is reduced and present in the form
of a few vesicles. Of the many compartments in eukaryotic cells the larger two are the inner
region of the ER called cisternal space, and the region exterior to it is the cytosol. The
endoplasmic reticulum is composed of regions with ribosomes and regions without ribosomes.
The regions with ribosomes are called Rough Endoplasmic Reticulum or RER and those
without ribsomes are called Smooth Endoplasmic Reticulum or SER. The RER and SER
may be continuous with one another, with plasma membrane and with nuclear envelope. SER
is also called agranular endoplasmreticulum as it lacks ribosome on its membranes.
The synthesis of fatty acids and phospholipids occurs in SER. Although many cells have
very little SER it is abundant in hepatocytes, interstitial cells, adreno- cortical cells, muscle
cells, retinal cells etc. Enzymes in the smooth ER of hepatocytes modify or detoxify hydrophobic
chemicals such as pesticides and some carcinogens by chemically converting them into more
water soluble conjugated products that can be excreted from the body. In muscle cells smooth
ER known as Sarcoplasmic reticulum stores Ca++ to be released during muscle contraction.
In brain cells smooth ER is associated with the synthesis of male and female hormone. It is also
involved in production and storage of steroids. It also stores ions and is involved in the synthesis
of phospholipids, cholesterol, glycogen, ascorbic acid and visual pigments from vitamin A. The
SER is typically a network of tubules and serves as a transition zone from where synthetic products
of RER are passed on to Golgi after being packed in transport vesicles.
endoplasmic endoplasmic
B
Fig. 7.15 : Endoplasmic reticulum: (A) as seen in cross section, (B) a 3-D view of a part
The RER is responsible for manufacturing and transport of membrane bound and secretory
proteins. In leukocytes the RER produces antibodies. In pancreatic cells RER is involved with
Insulin production. The RER is composed of a series of flattened sacs. This flattened sac like
appearance is due to the presence of transmembrane proteins called Ribophorin I and
Ribophorin II. Ribophorins assist the attachment of ribosome to the RER membrane. A protein
translocon is present near the site of attachment of ribosome. This is a passage for the new
protein synthesized at the attached ribosome to enter into the lumen of RER.
The proteins synthesized by attached ribosomes on the surface of RER are destined to be
exported from the cell or to be sent to the lysosomes or vacuoles or to be embedded in the membrane.
All these proteins contain a special amino acid sequences called signal sequences or signal peptide.
At first the free ribosomes synthesize the signal sequences of these proteins in the cytosol. Then, a
multi subunit Ribonucleoprotein called signal receptor protein (SRP) present in cytosol recognizes
the signal. The SRP then binds to ribosome and stops further protein synthesis. The SRP - Ribosome
complex is then guided to the surface of RER. The ribosome is then bound to Rough ER membrane
through interaction with Ribophorin I and II present in the membrane of RER. The SRP is then
removed through the hydrolysis of GTP Now further protein synthesis begins and the protein enters
into the ER lumen through the passage or translocon present near the Ribophorin. These proteins
are then added with oligosaccharides and sent to Goligi for further modifications.
Functions
1. Formation of a skeletal frame work inside the cytoplasm.
2. RER is responsible for manufacturing and transport of membrane bound and secretory
proteins.
3. In leukocytes RER produces antibodies and in pancreas it is involved with insulin

production.
4. Glycosylation of proteins begins in RER.
5. Synthesis of fatty acids, phospholipids occur in SER
6. Enzymes present in SER of hepatocytes detoxify hydrophobic chemicals.
7. In muscle cells, SER known as ‘Sarcoplasmic reticulum’ sequesters Ca++ for muscle
contraction.
8. SER stores ions and is also involved with the synthesis of ascorbic acids and visual
pigments from vitamin A.
7.4.1.2. Golgi Apparatus :
Golgi apparatus also known as Golgi body, Golgi complex, Golgi material orGolgiosome
is named after the Italian Zoologist Camillo Golgi who in 1898 for the first time observed it. In
plants and lower invertebrates Golgi apparatus is known as dictyosome. It actually refers to
stacks of single membrane bound vesicles that are important in packaging macromolecules for
transport to elsewhere in the cell and out of the cell. Although it is characteristic feature of
eukaryotic cell, in some of the eukaryotic cell Golgi complex is not found, e.g. cells of fungi,
mature sieve tubes, mature sperms, RBC, male gametes of bryophytes and pteridophytes. The
number of Golgi bodies a cell contains ranges from 1 to a few in protists to 20 or more in animal
cells and several hundreds in plant cells. They are abundant in glandular cells responsible for
secretion.
Structure: The Golgi is

composed of membrane bound sacs
known as cisternae or saccules,
tubules arising from the periphery of
cisternae and vesicles surrounding the
main cisternae. About 5 to 8 sacs form
a cisterna, although, up to sixty sacs
have been reported. The tubules form
a highly branched anastomosing Golgi corrmlex
network. The vesicles bud off from the
cisternae is of two types: (i) Smooth Fig.7.16 : Golgi Apparatus
vesicles or secretory vesicles and

(ii) coated vesicles.
A Golgi apparatus has a distinct polarity with a front and a back having distinct membrane
compositions at the two ends. The front or receiving end or formation end is convex and is
called the cis face and the back or maturing end is concave and is called the trans face. The
cis face is located towards the Endoplasmic reticulum. Materials from ER move to cis face of
Golgi packed in transport vesicles that bud off from ER. These ER-synthesized molecules then
move from cisterna to cisterna of Golgi until they reach the trans face where they are discharged
out side in secretory vesicles. As they pass through the Golgi apparatus the materials are
variously modified. Mostly addition of short sugar chains (oligosaccharides) to proteins occur
resulting in the formation of glycoprotein. When sugar chains are added to lipids or sugar
chains of lipids are modified it results in the formation of glycolipids. Inside the Glogi apparatus
glycolipids and glycoproteins made in the ER are modified by enzymatic cleavage of one or
more sugars. The finished products are finally packed in membrane bound vesicles that pinch
off from the trans cisternae and move to other locations in the cell or out of the cell. For this
reason Golgi apparatus is also known as Delivery system of the cell.
Function
Some of the major functions of Golgi apparatus are:

1. Modifications of proteins and lipids to Glycoproteins and Glycolipids.
2. Synthesis of Proteoglycans molecules present in the extra cellular matrix of animals,
and is also a major site of carbohydrate synthesis.
3. Polysaccharides like glycosaminoglycans (GAGS) are synthesized in Golgi.
4. Phosphorylate certain molecules with Golgi resident kinases like Casein kinase. One
molecule that is phosphorylated in Golgi is Apolipoprotein found in blood serum as
VLDL (Very low density lipid).
5. Synthesis and secretion of cell wall materials like pectin and other carbohydrates.
6. Secretion of gum and mucilage.
7. Formation of lysosomes.
8. Transformation of one type of membrane to another.
9. Secretes antibodies, neuro transmitters.
10. Sorting and transporting proteins to different intracellular destination.
7.4.1.3. Lysosomes :
Lysosomes are polymorphic organelles of membranous bags of hydrolytic enzymes

used for the controlled intracellular digestion of macromolecules. Lysosomes were discovered
by Belgian biochemist Christian de Duve in 1955, though lysosomal enzymatic studies in liver
homogenates were carried out in 1949. Lysosomes were identified by electron microscopic
cytochemistry by Novikoff in 1956. Some 50 enzymes are known to be contained in different
types of lysosomes. They are all hydrolytic enzymes including proteases, nucleases,
glycosidases, lipases, phospholipases, phosphatases and sulfatases. All these enzymes are
acid hydrolases optimally active near pH. of 5 maintained within these organelles. The pH of
near 5 is maintained inside the lysosomes by a proton pump present in the membrane of
lysosome that pumps H+ or protons from cytoplasm into the lysosome. The membranes of
lysosomes are impermeable to the hydrolytic enzymes contained in them. If, however, leakage
of enzymes occur due to accidental damage to lysosomal membrane and these enzymes are
released to cytoplasm, the higher pH value of the cytoplasm render these enzymes inactive.
Due to the presence of this large number of hydrolases, lysosomes are called as “Suicidal
bags”.
Lysosomes are found in all eukaryotic cells. Some cells like pancreatic cells, liver cells,
spleen cells, leucocytes, meristematic cells of plants are used for study of lysosomes. The inter
communicative network of Golgi complex, ER, nuclear membrane and lysosomes form the
endomembrane system. Some regions of endomembrane system constituting more of Golgi
smooth free ribosomes

endoplsmic
nuclear Nuclear Rouch

Envelope Pore Endoplasmic
Reticulum
Fig.7.18 : Endo-membrane system of the cell showing inter relationship among ER, Golgi and lysosomes,
complex are often called as GERL (Golgi-ER-Lysosome Complex). Liver lysosomes are spherical
bodies / vesicles of 0.5 pt m in diameter with an electron dense core that is packed with hydrolases
which constitute 60% of the core by weight. The lysosomes are formed from the trans most
Golgi as enzyme packed vesicles called as primary lysosomes or protolysosomes. Lysosomal
enzymes are synthesized by ribosomes attached to ER. These enzymes then loaded inside
transport vesicles move to Golgi from ER. These enzymes have one oligosaccharide attached
to it. So all lysosomal enzymes are glycoproteins. The oligosaccharide part of the lysosomal
enzyme has one Mannose - Phosphate residue as a marker and this marker is essential for
packaging of lysosomal enzymes into Golgian vesicles.Golgian vesicles are clathrin (a type of
protein) coated vesicles which fuse with endosomes to produce lysosomes.
Two general classes of lysosomes are usually distinguished. Primary lysosomes -

which are newly formed and, therefore, not yet encountered the substrate for digestion and
secondary lysosomes or heterophagosomes which are membranous sacs of diverse
morphology that contain substrates and hydrolytic enzymes. Secondary lysosomes result from
repeated fusion of primary lysosomes with a variety of membrane bound substrates. The
secondary lysosomes, therefore, present a variety of morphology depending upon the
internalization and packaging of different substrates. So lysosomes are polymorphic - large
ones resulting from phagocytosis, small ones from endocytosis and so on. Secondary lysosomes
can be of different types: (i) Large digestive vacuoles result from phagocytosis of large bodies
like bacteria (ii) multivesicular bodies are membranous bags containing numerous vesicles
of ~50 nm in diameter and (iii) autophagic values or autophagosomes or cytolysosomes
are lysosomal structures containing intracellular membranous organelles such as mitochondria
or secretory vesicles for digestion.
Lysosomal disorder results in Hurler’s disease in man where bone deformities develop.
This is due to accumulation of large amount of mucopolysaccharides in the cell due to absence
of lysosomal activities.
Functions:
1. Digestion and turnover of intra and extra cellular constituents.
2. Programmed cell death during embryogenesis.
3. Digestion of phagocytosed micro organisms.
4. Principal site of cholesterol assimilation from endocytosed serum lipoprotein.
5. Removal of carcinogens from cells.
6. Help in bone formation from cartilage as it causes breakdown of existing matrix so that
it can be replaced by new one.
7.4.1.4. Vacuoles :
The vacuoles are non-cytoplasmic areas bounded by a single membrane bilayer present
in the cytoplasm. Large vacuoles are characteristic of matured plant cells. Young or growing
plant cell contains many small vacuoles which coalesce to form a large central vacuole. Similarly
animal cells have either many very small vacuoles or totally absent. In a mature plant cell the
central vacuole may occupy about 90% of the cell volume. As a result the cytoplasm is pressed
against the cell membrane as a thin layer and the nucleus becoming lateral. The, membrame
surrounding the vacuole is known as tonoplast and the aqueous solution inside is called cell
sap or vacuolar sap. This sap contains digestive enzymes and ions, metabolites and waste
products. The tonoplast is differentially permeable and regulates the movement of ions and
metabolites into the vacuole. Like the lysosomes the pH inside the vacuole is slightly lower
than surrounding cytoplasm. This lower pH inside the vacuole is maintained by pumping in of
hydrogen ions by hydrogen pump present in tonoplast membrane. High concentration of salts,
sugar and many water soluble pigments are present in vacuole. Pigments like anthocyanin
present in the vacuole gives the plant parts its specific colour. (Deep purple or red) The
vacuole originates from the fusion and enlargement of small vacuoles present in meristematic
cells which are believed to originate from endoplasmic reticulum.
Functions
1. Storage of reserve food like sucrose.
2. Stores and concentrates minerals.
3. As they contain solute in high concentration water enters the vacuole resulting in an
outward turgor pressure on the cytoplasm and the cell wall. This results in turgidity of
the cell.
4. Store waste products
5. Contain water-soluble pigments to impart coloration to the plant parts.
6. some plant vacuoles have hydrolytic enzymes acting at acidic pH. These vacuoles
function like lysosomes.
7. Secondary metabolites like tannin, latex etc. are stored in vacuoles.
8. Contractile vacuoles found in some protists and algal cells take part in osmoregulation
and excretion.
9. Gas vacuoles or pseudovacuoles or air vacuoles found in prokaryotes provide buoyancy

and also mechanical strength.
7.4.2. Mitochondrion :
Mitochondria (singular: mitochondrion) are membrane enclosed organelles found in

the cytoplasm of all eukaryotic cells. They are generally described as “Cellular Power Plants”
or “Power house of cell” as they generate most of the cell’s supply of ATP, used as a source of
chemical energy. Mitochondria were first observed by Koliker (1850) in striated muscles of
insects and Benda (1897) coined the present name (Gk. Mitos - thread, Khondrion- granule).
Number of mitochondria per cell varies widely with organism and tissue type. It can be only one
mitochondrion per cell as in certain algae (like green alga Microsterias), about twenty odd in
sperm cell, several hundreds in kidney cell to several thousands in some oocytes. In some
protozoans the number reaches even up to 500,000. Green plant cells containing chloroplasts
have less mitochondrion than non-green plant cells and animal cells. In unspecialized cells
they are randomly distributed throughout the cytoplasm but usually they are abundant in cells
and parts of the cells that are associated with active processes. For example, they are
concentrated around the base of flagellum; in cardiac muscle they surround the contractile
elements. Their number is quite high in germinating seeds. In absorptive and secretory cells
they lie in peripheral cytoplasm.
Mitochondria are commonly cylindrical or rod-like. They may also be spherical, tubular,
cylindrical, and filamentous or sausage shaped. In Chlorella the single mitochondrion is branched.
The shape may also depend on physiological conditions and may regularly change. The normal
size is 1 - 10 pm in length and 0.6 - 2.0 pm in diameter.
Mitochondrion is a double membranous structure and can be described as a large

wrinkled bag packed inside the smaller smooth bag. Because of the two membranes there are
five distinct compartments within the mitochondrion. They are: the smooth outer membrane,
the intermembrane space (the space between two membranes), the folded inner membrane ,
the cristae space (formed by infoldings of inner membrane) and the matrix (the space within the
inner membrane). The outer membrane enclosing the entire organelle is smooth, has a protein
to phospholipids ratio similar to eukaryotic ATP synthase particles

plasma membrane. It contains numerous
integral proteins called porins rendering it
permeable to molecules of 10 kilo Daltons or
less. Ions, nutrients. ATP, ADP etc. can pass
through the outer membrane. Some of the
enzymes of lipid synthesis are located in it.
Its protein content is less than that in the inner
membrance.
Fig.7.19 : Mitochondrion
The intermembrane space is the
space (6-10 nm) between the outer and inner membrane. It is also known as outer chamber or
perimitochondrial space. It contains some enzymes.
The inner mitochondrial membrane is folded forming a complex structure. It contains a

special type of phospholipids called cardiolipin for which it is not permeable to ions. It is freely
permeable only to oxygen, carbon dioxide and water. It contains proteins with four types of
functions, viz.
(1) Proteins that carry out oxidation - reduction reactions of respiratory chains, (2) ATP
synthesis proteins which make ATPs in the matrix, (3) specific transport proteins for passage of
metabolites into and out of matrix (4) Protein import machinery. The wrinkles or folds of the
inner membrane are organized into lamellae (layers) called the cristae (singular: crista). The
cristae greatly increase the total surface area of the membrane. By special techniques inner
and outer membranes can be separated to get a fraction containing only the inner membrane
and the matrix called “Mitoplasts”. The inner membrane has a series of small knob-like
elementary particles, Fo-F1 particles or Oxisomes. Each elementary particle or oxisome has
a base-piece (Fo), a stalk and a head (F^. The rectangular base-piece buried in the membrane
is about 11 nm by 1.5nm. The stalk is 5nm long and 3.5nm broad. The head is about 10 nm in
diameter. It functions as ATP- ase during oxidative phosphorylations, to synthesize ATP.
In a typical liver mitochondrion, the surface area of inner mitochondrial membrane

including the cristae is about five times that of outer membrane. Mitochondria of cells which
have greater demand for ATP, such as muscle cells contain more cristae than typical liver
mitochondria. Mitochondria as the sites of cellular respiration was first suggested by Kingsbury
(1912).
The mitochondrial Matrix is semi fluid and is contained, in the inner chamber. It houses
the enzymes responsible for citric acid cycle or Krebs cycle, and also contains dissolved oxygen,
water, carbon dioxide, the recyclable intermediates. In addition, the matrix also contains
mitochondrial ribosomes 55s to 70s in nature, tRNAs and several copies of mitochondrial DNA
(2-10 copies). The mitochondrial DNA makes the organelle semiautonomous. Some of the
matrix inclusions space or oxysomes
Fig.7.20 (A): L.S. of mitochondrian (diagrammatic)
Fig.7.20 : (B) Detailed structure of a crista (C) Structure of Fo-F, Particle
proteins required in mitochondria are synthesized by their own DNA. A human cell mitochondrion
has about 37 genes, out of which 24 are rRNA and t RNA genes and 13 are peptide genes.
The 13 mitochondrial peptides in humans are integrated into inner mitochondrial membrane,
along with other proteins encoded by nuclear genes. Mitochondria replicate their own DNA and
divide mainly in response to the energy needs of the cell. The mitochondrial genes are inherited
mainly through maternal inheritance. Mitochondrial genes lack introns (c.f. nuclear genes).
As the mitochondria have their own DNA, they are also responsible for inheritance of
certain characters. This type of inheritance being independent of nuclear genes is known as
cytoplasmic inheritance. Petite character in yeast and cytoplasmic male sterility in maize are
examples of mitochondrial inheritance.
Mitochondria are believed by many scientists to be bacterial endosymbionts of eukaryotic

cells. The most compelling evidences for such belief are:
• They have their own nucleic acids and ribosomes.

• They divide independent of cell division cycle.
• Similarity exists in bacterial and mitochondrial membranes.

• Both mitochondria and bacteria carry out energy conversion processes on the
inner side of the membranes.
Functions
1. Convert organic materials into cellular energy in the form of ATP, hence acts as
power house of the cell.
2. Synthesis of heme, steroids, and elongation of fatty acids.
3. Apoptosis - Programmed cell death.
4. Regulation of cellular redox-state.
5. Storage and release of calcium.
7.4.3. Ribosome :
Ribosomes are non-membranous, basophilic granules, rich in Ribonucleic acid and

distributed in the cytoplasm of both prokaryotes and eukaryotes. They were first isolated and
named by Palade (1955). So ribosomes are also called Palade’s particles. Ribosomes are
made up of rRNA and proteins and are the center of protein synthesis. These are the smallest
0
cell organelles with a diameter of about 150 - 300 /\. They occur either freely in the cytoplasm
or attached to the endoplasmic reticulum or nuclear membrane of eukaryotic cells. A large
number of ribosomes occur in a single cell. Each E.coil (colon bacterium) cell contains about
15,000 or more ribosomes making about a quarter of the dry weight of the cell.
Each ribosome has two subunits: a smaller subunit which fits like a cap over a larger
subunit (Fig.7.21) The two units associate in presence of Mg++ ion at and slightly above a
critical concentration of 0.0001 Mole. The two subunits dissociate below this critical concentration
of magnesium ion. As the ribosomes are isolated from cells by differential centrifugation (Refer
chapter 6) depending on their sedimentation coefficient(s)* ribosomes are of two types: the
70s ribosomes and 80s ribosome. 70s ribosomes are found in prokaryotic cell as well as
eukaryotic organelles like mitochondrion and chloroplast, 80s ribosomes are found in the
eukaryotic cells .
The 70s ribosome is constituted by 30s smaller subunit and 50s larger subunit. 80s
ribosome similarly is constituted by 40s smaller subunit and 60s larger subunit. During
protein synthesis many ribosomes arrange in a chain on a common messenger RNA (mRNA)
strand and are called as polysomes or polyribosomes.
Prokaryote ribosome Eukaryote ribosome
23s rRNA 16S rRNA 28S rRNA 18SrRNA
♦ ♦
32 proteins 21 proteins 50 proteins 33 proteins
♦
5S rRNA 5S rRNA* 5 8S rRNA
Fig. 7.22 : Ribosomes: comparative account
Ribosomes are chemically composed of ribosomal RNA (rRNA) and various types of
proteins (molecular weight ranging from 6000 to 75000). A prokaryotic 70S ribosome has the
rRNA - about 65% and protein about 35%, while the eukaryotic ribosomes have more protein
and less r RNA.
The 30s submit is composed of 16s r RNA (1500 nucleotides) and 21 different proteins
(s1 to s21), whereas 50S subunit contains 23s r RNA (3000 nucleotides), 5Sr RNA (120
nucleotides ) and more than 30 proteins (L1 to L34). In eukaryotes, 60s subunit contains 28s
*[Sedimentation co-efficient as a function of rpm and gravity is expressed in Svedberg units

abbreviated as ‘s’].
rRNA(5000nucleotides), 5.8S r RNA(160 nucleotides) and 5s r RNAand 50 proteins. The 40s

subunit of eukaryotic ribosome has 18s r RNA and 33 Proteins.
Ultra structure
The smaller subunit consists of a head, a base and a platform. The platform separates
head from base by a cleft. The larger subunit has a ridge, a central protuberance and a stalk.
The ridge is separated from central protuberance by a valley. When the two subunits. (Fig.7.21)
assemble I associate a tunnel occurs between the two subunits for smooth passage of mRNA.
Function: Ribosomes provide the sites for protein synthesis (translation). This is done:
(i) by accepting the correct new amino acid coming to it bound to transfer RNA (tRNA) at
A-site.
(ii) By forming peptide bonds between amino acids by peptidyl transferase activity. This
is done by the ribozyme (RNA - enzyme) activity of larger subunit site.
(iii) Translocation of growing peptide still attached to t RNA to ‘P - site I peptidyl site.
(iv) Exit to emptied tRNA from ‘E’ -site / exit site.
7.4.4. Plastids :
Plastids are major organelles found in plants including algae. The term plastid was
coined by E. Haeckel in 1866. These are double membrane organelles with their own DNA and
are responsible for photosynthesis, storage of starch and for synthesis of many classes of
molecules such as fatty acids and terpenes. Some protists like Euglena, Dinophyceae and
diatoms also have plastids. Plastids are the largest cell organelles. All plastids are derived
from proplastids, formerly known as eoplasts (eo-early). In plants plastids may differentiate
into several forms depending upon the types of function they need to play in the cell.
Undifferentiated proplastids may develop into any of the following forms:
• Chloroplasts : for photosynthesis. The chloroplast with nitrogen fixing genes

(nif genes) constitutes nitroplast.
• Chromoplasts: for pigment synthesis and storage. The pigments associated

with them are xanthophylls (yellow) and carotene (orange - red) as seen in
colored petals and fruits.
• Leucoplasts: for monoterpene synthesis. Leucoplasts sometimes differentiate

into more specific plastids like :
• Amyloplasts: for starch storage as in the case of potato tubers, wheat and rice
grains.
Elaioplasts: for storing fats as in the case of seeds of castor and peanuts.
• Proteinoplasts: for storing and modifying proteins. The aleuronoplasts of maize

is one such example.
Plastids have the ability to differentiate and rededifferentiate to different forms. The
chromoplasts may be developed either form leucoplasts or chloroplasts. The lamellae degenerate
partially or completely during chromoplast development. When green fruits ripen they become
variously colored due to transformation of green chloroplast to the colored chromoplasts.
Further in algae the term leucoplast (=leukoplast) is used for all unpigmented plastids.
Their function differs from the leucoplasts in plants. Etioplast, amyloplast and chromoplast are
found in higher plants but do not occur in algae. The chloroplast in algae other than green algae
is called chromatophores (e.g. rhodoplast in red algae and phoeoplasts in brown algae). The
plastids of algae may also differ from those of the plants in that they contain pyrenoids (Beyond
algae, Pyrenoids are also found in the chloroplasts of Anthoceros (Bryophyte) and Selaginella
(Pteridophyte).
Inheritance of Plastids: Mostly plastids are inherited through maternal inheritance or

cytoplasmic inheritance. Many gymnosperms, however, inherit plastids from male parent. In
algae also the plastid inheritance is from one parent only. The plastid DNAof the other parent
is thus completely lost.
Origin of plastids
Plastids are thought to have originated as endo-symbionts.Presence of plastid DNA
and their division independent of cell division cycle are some of the evidences of their endo-
symbiotic origin.Some dinofiagellates take up algae as food but retain the plastids of the digested
algae to profit from photosynthesis, (after a while the plastids are also digested). Apicomplexa,
the obligate parasitic protozoans which include the causative agents of malaria and many other
human or animal diseases also harbor a complex plastid called apicoplast. The apicoplast is
not capable of photosynthesis and is a promising target for antiparasitic drug development.
Such type of plastid also point to the endo-symbiotic origin.
Chloroplasts: Schimper (1883) coined the term chloroplast. These are the
photosynthetic pigment containing plastids found in green algae and plants. The shape, size
and number of the chloroplast vary greatly. In higher plants the chloroplasts are mainly ovoid,
spherical, discoid or lens-shaped. In algae, the shape shows a great variation. It is cup-shaped
in Chlorella and Chlamydomonas, girdle-shaped in Ulothrix, star-shaped in Zygnema, spiral
in Spirogyra, reticulate in Oedogonium and discoid in Vaucheria. Generally the chloroplast is
about 4-8p in size but in polyploids the size is bigger. In sciophytes (shade plants) chloroplasts
are bigger than in heliophytes (light plants). A single chloroplast per cell is found in some algae
like Chlamydomonas, Ulothrix, Chlorella etc. Two chloroplasts per cell are found in Zygnema
and 2-14 chloroplasts per cell are found in Spirogyra. In higher plants 20-40 chloroplasts per
cell have been reported.
Fig.7.23 : Detailed structure of chloroplast
Ultrastructure
Like Mitochondrion, the chloroplast is enclosed by two membranes. But the chloroplasts
are larger and more complex than the mitochondria. In addition to the outer and inner membranes
the chloroplasts also have a closed compartment of stacked membrane called grana (singular,
granum) that lie internal to the inner membrane. In one chloroplast there may be hundred or
more grana. Each granum contains from a few to several dozens disc-shaped structures called
thylakoids. The smaller thylakoids are placed one above the other like stacks of coins to form
the granum. The larger thylakoids are large membranous structures known as inter granal
lamellae or stroma lamellae or fret channels. Surrounding the thylakoid is a fluid matrix
called stroma. The dark reaction of photosynthesis occurs here. Stroma is a proteinaceous
matrix. The photosynthetic pigments are housed on the surface of thylakoids. The space between
the two membranes surrounding the chloroplast is known as periplastidial space. The algal
chloroplasts are agranal as they lack grana.
Like the mitochondrion the chloroplast also contains its own DNA. Plastid DNA exists as
large protein-DNA complex associated with the inner envelope and are called “plastid nucleoids’.
Each nucleoid particle may contain more than ten copies of the plastid DNA. The proplastid
contains a single nulcleoid located at the centre of the plastid. The developing plastid has
many nucleoids localized at the periphery of the plastid bound to the inner envelope. During
differentiation of proplastids to chloroplasts as also when plastids convert from one type to an
other, nucleoids change in morphology, size and location. The chloroplast DNA contain genes
for the synthesis of specific protein components necessary to accomplish photosynthetic
reactions. Majority of the proteins needed in chloroplasts are synthesized by nuclear genes
and imported into chloroplast. There are approximately 120 genes in chloroplast DNA of which
about 60 genes are involved in RNA transcription and translation including genes for rRNA,
tRNA, RNA polymerase subunits and ribosomal proteins. About 20 genes encode subunits of
chloroplast electron transport complexes and the ATPase complexes. The large subunits of
the photosynthetic enzyme RUBISCO are also encoded by chloroplast genome.
Chemical composition: Chloroplast is constituted by 45-50% proteins, 20-25%

phospholipids, 10% chlorophylls, 1-2% carotenes, RNA, DNA, enzymes, coenzymes,
magnesium, copper, iron, zinc and manganese.
7.4.5. Microbodies :
These are single unit membrane bound small spherical bodies. They have been
discovered with the help of electron microscope. The microbodies are lysosomes, peroxisomes,
sphaerosomes, glyoxysomes and lomasomes.
7.4.5.1. Peroxisomes :
Peroxisomes are a kind of micro bodies present in almost all the eukaryotic cells. Normally
they co-sediment with lysosome in density gradient centrifugation.Their existence as a separate
intracellular organelle became generally recognized only in 1960s by DeDuve et.al. Beaufaytt
and Berther (1963) gave the name peroxisome to it. It is a single membrane bound vesicle
with a diameter of about 0.5 pi m having a concentrated source of at least three oxidative
enzymes in liver cells: D-amino acid oxidase, urate oxidase and catalase. Small peroxisome
or microperoxisomes with a diameter of about 0.15 - 0.25 |i m are ubiquitous in mammalian
cells. Photosynthetic plant cells may have about 70 - 100 peroxisomes where it performs
photorespiration being associated with chloroplasts and mitochondria.
Like mitochondria peroxisome is a major site of oxygen utilization. In fact, peroxisomes

are thought to be the vestige of some ancient organelle involved in carrying out all kind of the
oxygen metabolism. Later on Mitochondria evolved with a mechanism of coupling oxygen
metabolism with ATP synthesis. The oxidative reaction carried out by peroxisomes are still
useful to cell despite the presence of the mitochondria.
It is thought that certain integral membrane proteins unique to the peroxisomes are
synthesized in the ER membrane to from a pre-organelle. This pre-organelle then forms a bud
from the region of smooth ER. Several major peroxisomal enzymes including catalase and
urate oxidase are synthesized in the cytosol and transported into peroxisome as it is forming.
Most of the mature peroxisomes remain attached to smooth ER by a thin sleeve like projection
(Fig.7.24).
Oxidative enzymes contained in peroxisomes remove hydrogen atoms from specific

substrates using molecular oxygen and forming hydrogen peroxide. Hydrogen peroxide is
toxic and is thus broken down to water and molecular oxygen by the catalase enzyme present
in peroxisomes.
Fig.7.24 : Electron micrograph of peroxisome (P) in a leaf
Oxidation
RH2+O2----------------- ► R+H2O2 (hydrogen peroxide)
Substrate
Other functions of peroxisomes include:

1. In photorespiration in C3 plants where glycolate from chloroplasts enter peroxisome get
oxidized with molecular O2 to form glyoxylate. Hydrogen peroxide is the by-product,
which is split by catalase. Glyoxlate is then converted to amino acid glycine that condenses
to form serine and CO2.
2. Long chain and branched fatty acids are broken down in peroxisome.
3. A special kind of peroxisomes called glyoxysomes is found in plant tissues like
germinating seeds. Here it serves to convert the fatty acids stored in the seed into
sugars needed for the young plants. This is accomplished through a series of reactions
called glyoxylate cycle. Two molecules of acetyl COA produced by fatty acid breakdown
in peroxisome, are used to make succinic acid which is converted to glucose.
4. In animal cells peroxisome detoxify a number of substances like phenols, methanol,
ethanol etc. The alcohol consumed by a person is partly detoxified in the liver cell
peroxisomes.
7.4.5.2. Sphaerosomes:
Sphaerosomes were previously considered as lysosomes of plant cell as they contain

enzymes most of which are identical to those of lysosomes. But, now it is known that
sphaerosomes contain some additional enzymes. These microbodies are small single unit
membrane bound vesicles of 0.2-0.8 p. m in diameter. Their main function is synthesis and
storage of fats and oils.
7.4.5.3. Lomasomes:
Lomasomes are small vesicles present between the cell wall and plasma membrane in
plant cells. They are associated with the synthesis of cell wall materials.
7.4.6. Cytoskeleton :
Cytoskeleton is a cellular ‘scaffold” of “Skeleton” contained in the cytoplasm of eukaryotic

cell.* This is a dynamic structure of extensive net-work acting as the skeleton and muscle of the
cell, for movement of stability. They are also involved with distribution and orientation of cell
organelles and cellular division. Eukaryotic cells contain three main kinds of cytoskeletal
filaments. They are Microfilaments, intermediate fiaments and microtubules.
Mircofilaments / Actin filaments
Microfilaments are long, narrow cylindrical protein filaments of about 7 nm in diameter.

Being the thinnest of the cytoskeletal filaments, they are called as microfilaments. These filaments
are formed by a family of proteins called actin proteins and for this reason these filaments are
also known as actin filaments. Monomers of actin protein form long thin chains like ‘strings of
pearls’. Two chains of actin closely twin around each other to form a filament. These filaments
are mostly concentrated below the plasma membrane, to maintain cellular shape and in some
cases form cytoplasmic protuberances (like pseudopodia and microvilli).
Functions
1. By forming a band below the plasma membrane they maintain the shape of the cell and
also provide strength to the cell.
2. Generate locomotion in some cells like WBC and amoeba (Pseudopodia formation)
3. Interact with myosin muscle fibers for muscle contraction.
4. Link trans membrane proteins (e.g. surface receptors) to cytoplasmic proteins.
5. Anchors centrosomes at the opposite poles of cell during cell division.
* (There are recent reports indicating the presence of cytoskeleton like protein structures in
prokaryotes. Tubulin like proteins FtsZ is the first protein to be identified in Prokaryotes. Though these
proteins form filaments like tubulin the filaments do not group into bundles. In the bacterium Caulobacter
crescentus one protein called crescentin is found which is related to intermediate filaments. This is
believed to maintain the cell shape like that of eukaryotic cytoskeleton.)
6. Cytoplsmic streaming movement is cause by the action of microfilaments.

7. Form cleavage furrows at the time of cytokinesis.
Intermediate filaments
These are filaments of 8 - 11 nanometers in diameter, more stable than actin filaments
and form heterogeneous constituents of cytoskeleton. These filaments are constituted by fibrous
protein molecules twined together in an overlapping arrangement. There are four types of
intermediate filaments:
Vimetins: common structural support of many cells. Provide mechanical strength to

muscle and other cells.
Keratin: Found in skin cells, hair and nails, form tonofibrils of desmosomes.
Neurofilaments: Found in axons and dendrons of nerve cells; strengthen the long axons
and dendrons of nerve cells; strengthen the long axons of neurons.
Hamin: gives structural support to nuclear envelope.
The nucleus in epithelia cells is held within the cell by a basket-like network of
intermediate filaments made up of keratins. Different kinds of epithelial cells use different
keratins to build up their intermediate filaments
Functions
1. Provide support and strength to cell membrane and nuclear envelope.
2. Form a skeletal network in the cytoplasm.
3. Found as constituents of hair, nail and skin (keratin).
4. Tonofibrils support the desmosomes.
5. Neurofilaments strengthen the axons.
6. Provide mechanical strength to muscle (vimetins)
Microtubules
Microtubules are thin, branched, hollow cylinders of about 20 - 25 nm in diameter and

several microns in length. They were first observed in nerve cells by De Roberties and Franchi
(1953). About a decade later these were studied in plant cells by Ledbetter and porter (1963).
Most commonly each microtubule is composed of a ring of about 11-13 longitudinal strands of
protein protofilaments (Fig. 7.25). The right encloses a central core of about 12 -15 nanometer.
The protofilaments are constituted by the polymerization of a and p tubulin protein subunits.
The tubulins continuously polymerize and depolymerize to present a dynamic structure. The
half-life of tubulin ranges from 10 minutes in nondividing cells to 20 seconds in dividing cells. In
many cells microtubules organize from nucleation centers near the centre of the cell and radiate
towards the periphery. Both the ends of microtubule possess distinct polarity and are designated
as “+’ end (away from nucleation centre) and end (toward the nucleation centre). The
microtubules grow at each end by polymerization of tubulin dimmers (of a and p tubulin)
powered by the hydrolysis of GTP and shrink at each end by depolymerization. However, both
processes always occur more rapidly at ‘Plus (+) ends’.
Functions
1. Maintain the form of the cells.
2. Constitute the axoneme of cilia and flagella responsible for their movements.
3. Constitute the mitotic spindle responsible for movement of chromosome during nuclear
division. (Alkaloids like colchicines and vinblastine inhibits microtubules assembly by binding
with tubulin).
4. Synthesis of the cell plate during cytokinesis of plant cell division.
5. Special motor proteins move cellular organelles around the cell on microtubules using
ATP. Kinesin protein move organelles toward plus end (periphery) and dyneins move
toward minus end. Charcot marie -tooth disease is a rare disorder due to mutation of
kinesin gene. In these patients axon-transport is defective accounting for muscle weakness.
7.4.7. CILIA and FLAGELLA :
Cilia and flagella are specially differentiated, fine, hairlike, filamentous extensions of
cytoplasm associated with either the locomotion of cells (e.g. sperms) or to move fluid past the
cells (e.g. ciliated epithelial cells). Both cilia and flagella are constructed from microtubules and
both are identical in their morphology and physiology. They differ in their lengths, numbers per
cell and patterns of movement. Flagella are longer (10 microns to several millimeters) where
as cilia are shorter (0.2 to 10 microns) in length. Only one or a pair of flagella are present in a
cell, whereas cilia are much more in umber per cell.
Each cilium or flagellum consists

of a shaft constituted by bundle of
microtubules called axoneme entirely
ensheathed by the extension of plasma
membrane. The axoneme is made of a
cylindrical array of 9 evenly spaced
microtubules each with a partial
microtubule attached to it. This gives the
structure of English numerical “8”
appearance. Two single microtubules run
up through the centre of the bundle of 9
microtubules so as to form a “9 +2”
arrangement. The motion of the cilia and
flagella is created by the microtubules
sliding past one another.
Each cilium or flagellum grows out
from, and remains attached to a basal
body or kinetosome or basal granule
embedded in the outer part of cytoplasm.
Basal bodies have the same structures
as the centriole, with triplets of microtubules present at the periphery without central fibril (9 + 0
arrangement)
Rootlets develop from the outer lower part of basal body to provide support to it. Rootlets
are striated fibrilar outgrowths made of bundles of microfilaments.
Some vertebrate cells carry a single cilium which lack the central pair of microtubules in
the axoneme (9+0 arrangement). These are called primary cilia. As they lack the central pair
of micro filaments, they cannot beat. These cilia are involved in sensory reception. The primary
cilium extending from apical surface of epithelial cells lining the kidney tubules monitor the flow
of fluid in Kidney tubules and act as Mechanoreceptors. Inherited defects in their formation
cause polycystic kidney disease in man. The primary cilium of olfactory neurons acts as
chemoreceptor in detecting odour. The outer segments of the rod-cells in the vertebrate retina
are derived from primary cilia acting as photoreceptors.
The movement or beats of cilia always involve two types of strokes - Power stroke and
recovery stroke (Fig.7.27) The power stroke is by a bending motion that moves the surrounding
fluid with a jerk in the direction of the stroke. As a result the cell moves in opposite direction.
The bending is achieved by the length-wise sliding of microtubule doublets along each other.
During the recovery stroke the cilium returns to its original position with a flexible and slow
movement without causing much disturbance in the surrounding fluid medium. This action is
Fig.7.27 : Cilliary and flagellar movement
analogous to rowing a boat where the ores provide backward stroke that propels the boat
forward and the ores are brought back to their original state by them above water. But the
flagellum shows a number of simultaneous undulating waves moving up from base to tip and
pulling the cell along instead of pushing it.
Functions
1. Motility: Protozoa and some have characteristic cilliary locomotion. Invertebrate larvae
move in water with the help of cilia. Sperms have flagella for movement.
2. Nutrition: Fresh water mussels, rotifers, herdmania, amphioxus etc. have characteristic
cilliary feeding.
3. Respiration: The activity of flagella and cilia cause water current that helps in gaseous
exchange.
4. Circulation: In many annelids and starfishes, movement of coelomic fluid is facilitated by

flagellar activity.
5. Excretion: Movement of material in uriniferous tubules of kidney and genital duct is aided
by cilia/flagella. Cilliated cells near the oral end of sea-anemones remove undesirable
particles.
6. Cillia and flagella act as sensory structures.

7.4.8. Centrioles :
T. Boweri (1888) coined the term centrosome to denote a clear region near interphase
nucleus. It is present in all animal cells and in some lower plant cells like fungi, bryophytes,
ferns, gymnosperms and algae (except red algae). Each centrosome consists of a pair of barrel
shaped centrioles arranged perpendicular to each other. The two centrioles of each set of
centrosome are known as diplosomes. Around the centrioles there is a clear area know as
centrosphere. These are essentially microtubule organising centres. In animal cells (and lower
plant cells) during cell division centrosomes occupy the poles, from which spindle fibres orient
in different directions.
7.4.9 Nucleus :
Nucleus (pl. nuclei; L. nucleus or nuculeus- kernel) is a double-membrane enclosed

organelle found in most eukaryotic cells, containing most of the cell’s genetic material. It as
nucleoproteins organized to chromatin, functioning to maintain the integrity and expression of
the genetic materials in order to control the metabolic activities of cells and transmission of
characters. Organized nucleus with a limiting membrane is absent in prokaryotic cell.
Nucleus was first described by Franz Bauer in 1802. But Scottish botanist Robert
Brown in 1831 described the nucleus in detail. He observed an opaque area in the cells of
outer layer of orchid flowers which he called areola or nucleus. In 1838 Matthias Schleiden
suggested a possible role of nucleus in generating new cells and introduced the name cytoblast-
meaning cell builders. Between 1876 and 1878 Oscar Hertwig published several papers showing
that an individual develops from a single nucleated cell which is formed by the fusion of sperm
nucleus with that of ovum. Edward Strasburger in 1884 reported the similar results in plants.
The function of the nucleus in cell division and as a carrier of genetic information became clear
only after the process of mitosis was discovered, and the Mendelian rules were rediscovered at
the beginning of the 20th century. Presence of hereditary information inside the nucleus was
demonstrated by Joachim Hammerling in 1953 in his experiment on single-celled alga
Acetabularia.
Nucleus is usually central in position but in plant cells, due to the presence of a large
central vacuole, it is pushed to the periphery. In green filamentous alga Spirogyra nucleus is
suspended in the central vacuole by cytoplasmic strands. In adipocytes nucleus is peripheral
and in glandular cells nucleus is basal. In a typical mammalian cell the average diameter of
nucleus is 11 to 22 pi m (micrometer) and it occupies about 10% of the total volume of a cell.
There are cells which do not have nuclei and are called anucleated cells e.g. human
RBC. The anucleated cells cannot divide to produce daughter cells. Mature human RBC in the
young stage contains nucleus and loses the same during the process of maturation. RBC or
erythrocytes undergo the process of erythropoiesis in the bone marrow where they lose nucleus
and other organelles. The nucleus is expelled from an erythroblast to form reticulocytes, which
is the immediate precursor of erythrocyte. Anucleated cells can also arise from defective cell
division in which one daughter cell is anucleate and the other is binucleate. Natural binucleate
condition of the cells is also seen in the case of a protist Paramaecium where out of the two
nuclei in the cell one controls the metabolic activities and the other possess the hereditary
information. Polynucleated cells contain multiple nuclei. In humans, the skeletal muscle cells
called myocytes, become polynucleate during development, the resulting arrangement of nuclei
near the periphery of the cell allows maximum intracellular space for myofibrils. The multinucleate
condition found in fungi and plants is a result of free nuclear division without cytokinesis (division
of cytoplasm) called coenocytic cells. Coenocyitic condition is due to the absence of septa or
partition walls. Fungi like Rhizopus and algae like Vaucheria have coenocytic conditions.
The shape of the nucleus depends on cell type. Generally spherical in shape, nucleus
can be oval or elliptical in plant cells due to the presence of large vacuole. It is disc shaped in
squamous epithelial cells, irregularly branched in silk-spinning cells of insects. The surface of
the nucleus is usually smooth but as in leucocytes, the surface can have infoldings giving the
nucleus a lobed appearance.
ULTRA STRUCTURE The nucleus of a non-dividing yet metabolically active cell is known
as interphase nucleus. Atypical interphase nucleus has five parts: nuclear envelope, nuclear
lamina, nuclear sap, chromatin and nucleolus.
The nuclear envelope consists of two membranes, each 70-90 X thick arranged parallel
to one another and separated by a perinuclear space of about 10 to 50 nm. It completely
Euchromatin Nuclear Pore
Perinulear space
Ribose
Heterochromatin
Perinucleolar
chromatin
Intranucleolar
Chromatin
Nuclear Envelope
Inner membrane
Endoplasmic Outer membrane

Reticulum
Nucleolus
Fig. 7.28 : Nucleus

encloses the nucleus separating its contents from the cytoplasm. The outer nuclear membrane
is continuous with the membrane of endoplasmic reticulum and similarly may be studded with
ribosomes at some places giving it a rough appearance. The inner nuclear membrane is smooth.
A large number of nuclear pores or perforations present on the nuclear envelope

provides for aqueous channels. These pores are composed of proteins collectively known as
nucleoporins. The pores are about 100nm in total diameter enclosing a passage of about 9
nm wide through which the molecules freely diffuse. The central passage through the pore is
reduced in width because of regulatory systems present within the centre of the pore. The
pores are about 125 million Daltons in molecular weight and consist of around 50 (in yeast) to
100 proteins (in vertebrates). The nucleus of a typical mammalian cell may have about 3000 to
4000 pores on its envelope, each of which has a eightfold-symmetric ring shaped structure at a
position where the inner and outer membranes fuse. Attached to the ring is a structure called
nuclear basket that extends into the nucleoplasm, and a series of filamentous extensions that
reach into the cytoplasm. Both these structures mediate binding to the nuclear transport proteins
called Karyopherins. Most proteins, ribosomal subunits and some RNAs are transported through
the pores in a process mediated by karyopherins. The karyopherins mediating movement out
of nucleus is called exportins and those into the nucleus are called importins. In some cases
(like mammals) the nuclear pores may have blebs or annuli. In such pores there are one
central ring surrounded by eight fold peripheral symmetric ring shaped structures.
Below the envelope, the nuclear matrix forms a dense fibrous network called nuclear
lamina, to provide structural support for nuclear envelope and anchoring sites for chromosomes
and nuclear pores. It is mostly composed of lamin proteins. Lamin monomers form two types of
intermediate filaments called lamin A and lamin B, which forms the mesh work of nuclear
lamina. The lamins are also found inside the nucleoplasm where they form another structure
called nucleoplasm veil. Here the lamin binds to chromatin. The interphase nucleus contains
an intact nuclear envelope, which breaks down during cell division by the depolymerization of
lamin and then reappear after nuclear division due to repolymerisation of lamins.
The nuclear sap or nucleoplasm is also known as karyolymph or karyoplasms. The

interphase nucleus is filled with a homogenous, transparent, semi fluid granular, acidophilic
ground substance known as nuclear sap. It contains enzymes required for synthesis and
maintenance of DNA, RNA and nucleoproteins, and also some proteins essential for spindle
formation during cell division. The chromatin materials are found scattered in the nucleoplasm.
One or more nucleolus is also found in the nucleoplasm.
The nucleus contains the hereditary materials, DNA in the form of DNA- protein and RNA
in thread like net work called chromatin network or chromatin reticulum. In 1882 Walter
Flemming used the term ‘chromatin network’ for the first time as it gets stained with some
basic dyes (chroma meaning colour). The composition and properties of chromatin vary from
one cell type to the other, during development of a specific cell type and also at different stages
Perinucleolar
Chromatin
Precursor)
Fig.7.29 : Detailed structure of a nucleolus
of the cell cycle. Besides DNA and proteins associated with packaging the DNA within the
nucleus, many enzymes are also associated with chromatin reticulum. They are the enzymes
involved in DNA transcription, replication and in post translational modifications of histone
proteins. Scaffold proteins encompass chromatin proteins such as insulators, domain boundary
factor and cellular memory module (MMs). Inter chromatin granule clusters also known as
spicing speckles associated with chromatin are rich in Sn RNPs (Small nuclear Ribonucleo
protein) and other splicing proteins necessary for pre-mRNA processing. The chromatin fibres
in the interphase nucleus are distributed throughout the nucleoplasm and are differentiated into
two regions : euchromatin and hetero chromatin. Euchromatin is less compact DNA for
which it stains lightly and is present in the form of diffused fibres. Heterochromatin is more
compact form of DNA for which it is darkly stained and is present in condensed, granular form.
The functional part of chromatin is found in the region of euchromatin to take part in transcription.
The heterochromatin is further categorised into facultative heterochromatin consisting of genes
that are organized as heterochromatin only in certain cell types or at certain stages of cell
development while constitutive heterochromatin is found in all cell types at all stages of
development. Constitutive heterochromatin form the structural components of chromosomes
like telomeres and centromeres. Interphase nucleus has chromatin organized into discrete
individual patches called chromosome territories and the active genes found in euchromatin
regions tend to be located towards the boundary of chromosome territory.
The nucleolus (plural- nucleoli) is a nonmembranous, densely stained sub organelle found
in the nucleus. It was first discovered by Fontana in 1781 and named by Bowman in 1940.
Generally 1 - 4 nucleoli are found in a nucleus but the number can be as hig as 1600 as in the
Oocytes of Xenopus. They are found attached to the nucleolar organizer region (NOR) of the
chromatin. The nucleolar organizer regions on DNA are constituted by tandem repeats for
transcription of rRNA. The main role of nucleolus is to process ribosomal RNAs and assembly
ribosomal components. The transcription, post-transcriptional processing and assembly of
rRNA occurs in the nucleolus aided by small nucleolar RNA (Sn RNA) molecules. According to
Wilson there are two kinds of nucleolus: Plasmosome - these are positive to acidic stains,
have transparent exterior and dense interior and karyosome: these are positive to basic dyes.
In some instances plasmosomes and karyosomes combine to form amphinuleoli (e.g. Molluscans
eggs). Fine structure of nucleolus includes three components - Granular portion, Fibrillar
portion and Amorophus Matrix.
A. Granular portion: This is the peripheral region of the nucleolus composed of granules
of size 150-250 The granules are composed of ribonucleic acid and protein. The nucleolus
is non membranous. The presence of granular portion makes the border of nucleolus distinct
from surrounding chromatin and nucleoplasm.
B. Firbrillar portion: This is also known as nucleolonema. Fibrils of ribonucleoproteins of

size 40 to 80 form a fine network. The number and size of the fibrillar components varies
with cellular activity and ribosome production.
C. Amorphous matrix: This is the electron dense, amorphous ground substance of

nucleolus. The matrix is first to disappear at the time of cell division. This region is also known
as pars amorpha.
Recent studies have indicated additional functions of nucleolus like

- Trafficking of various small RNAs
- Regulation of cell cycle
- Interaction with viral components
Regulation of tumor suppressor and oncogene activities
- Assembly of signal recognition particles.
- Control of ageing and modulating telomerase function.
Chromosome
Chromosomes (Gk. Chroma - colour, soma - body) are the deeply stained condensed
from of chromatin fibers formed during nuclear division. They are the bearers of hereditary
materials or genes. The name was given by German anatomist Heinrich Von Waldeyer in
1888. The chromosomal behavior in animal cells (Salamander) was described by Walter
Flemming in 1882. The chromosomes in their true sense (i.e. DNA complexed with histone
proteins) are found only in eukaryotic cells. Naked DNA (devoid of histone) found in prokaryotes
and RNA / DNA in viruses are also sometimes referred to as prokaryotic and viral chromosomes
respectively because of functional similarity.
The number of chromosomes per cell in eukaryotes varies from 2 (Ascaris) to more
than thousand (1600 in Aulacantha - a haploid protozoa). But the chromosome number is
generally fixed or constant for a species. The chromosomes are found in single set in haploid
forms and two sets in diploid forms. Diploid organisms having two sets of chromosomes produce
gametes (sperm and ovum) with only one set of chromosomes. The haploid set of chromosome
number is referred to as ‘n’ and the diploid set of chromosome number is referred to as ‘2n’. In
diploid cells each of the the chromosomes in the haploid set finds a partner or homologue in
other set. The homologous pair of chromosomes are identical in size and carry identical or
similar genes in the corresponding positions or loci. The general morphology of a set of
chromosomes is known as Karyotype and its diagrammatic presentation is known as idiogram.
During interphase the chromosomes are present in the nucleus as fine threads and
their shape is not clearly visible under light microscope. However, during cell divisions the
chromosomes are distinctly visible as the fine thread like chromatins get condensed to shorter
and thicker structures.
Gross Morphology: The metaphasic chromosome consists of two halves or chromatids.

The two chromatids are actually two daughter chromosomes yet to be separated. During cell division
each chromosome replicates into two and form two chromatids held together at a point called
centromere or primary constriction (Fig-7.12)
Fig 7.30 : Chromosome shape:

A. Telocentric, B. Acrocentric, C. Metacentric, D. Submetacentric
* Telocentric chromosomes are rarely found in the plants. Mark (1957) considered them as unstable
chromosomes causing genetic imbalance.
The two chromatids separate into two

poles during anaphase (next to metaphase). The
centromere or the primary constriction has a
darkly staining granule surrounded by a relatively
clear region. Spindle fieres formed during cell
division attach to the chromosomes at a
specialized structure in the centromere called
kinetochore. Usually there is one centromere
in a chromosome (chromosome is monocentric).
But di-or polycentric chromosomes are also there
in some species. Basing on the position of
centromere, four types of chromosomes are
found (fig.7.11). They are metacentric with
centrally located centromere, submetacentric
with centromere being one sided resulting in two
unequal chromosome arms ; acrocentric when
the centromere is close to one end of the
chromosome; telocentric* with terminal
centromere. Chromosomes may also be
acentric with complete absence of centromere.
When the two arms of chromosomes are equal as in metacentric chromosome it is said to be
isobrachial and otherwise it is heterobrachial. Some chromosomes may possess an additional
constriction called secondary constriction. Often, the chromosomes bear a small fragment or
rounded body separated by secondary constriction called satellite or trabant. These satellite
regions are without thymonucleic acid (Sine Acedo Thymonucleirico=SAT). The secondary
constrictions are associated with ribosomal RNA synthesis that induces the formation of nucleolus.
Hence this region is also called nucleolar organizing region.
The tips of the chromosome are called telomeres. Telomeres stabilize the chromosome.
Yeast telomere is about 100 base pair long and is constituted by repeated sequences of DNA.
According to classical cytogeneticists each chromatid is constituted by very thin and highly
coiled subunits called chromonemata. Cytologists observe the presence of certain bead-like
structures formed due to accumulation of chromatin material which are visible along the entire
length of the chromonema. These are called chromomeres and are believed to be the regions
representing genes. Contrary to the observations made under light microscope by classical
workers a chromosome is actually formed by direct condensation of a single chromatin.
Chemical composition
Chemically eukaryotic chromosomes are DNA associated with some amount of RNA
and proteins. The DNA-protein ratio is almost 1:2. Out of the proteins 70% are the basic
histone proteins and rest is acidic non-histone proteins. The histone proteins interact
specifically with each other and with DNA to give it a compact packaging. The non-histone
proteins that are found associated with chromatin fall into several functional categories like :
• chromatin-bound enzymes
• high mobility group (HMG) proteins
• transcription factors
• Scaffold proteins.
• Transition proteins (testis specific

proteins)
• Protamines (present in mature

sperm).
Unlike most other proteins which have an overall negative charge, the histones have
positive charge, owing to an abundance of basic amino acids viz., arginine and lysine.
NUCLEOSOME CONCEPT
The DNAs in eukaryotic chromosomes are very large molecules. Atypical human DNA
o
is 1.4 x 10 nucleotides (about 1100 Micrometer) long. This DNA is to be accommodated in a
functional state inside a cell which is much less in linear dimension than the DNA. Further, in one
eukaryotic cell there may be more than one chromosomes. This requires proper packaging of
DNA inside the chromosome in such a way that the DNA is not only in a compact state but also
remains functional. This is achieved by compacting of DNA with the help of histone proteins into
repeating units of nucleosomes. Roger Kornberg gave the concept of nucleosomes in 1974.
According to this concept five major types of histone proteins are found in eukaryotes. They are
H , H A, H B, H and H . Two molecules each of H A, H B, H and H together form an octamer
called as the core of the nucleosome or core particles or Nu-bodies. A DNA fragment of the
about 146 base pair wrap around the core 1.75 times and one molecule of H1 associate with it
at the point where the wrapping DNA strands emerge forming a chromatosome. The entire
DNA molecule is thus arranged into repeating units of nucleosomes looking like a chain of
beads under electron microscope. The gap between two repeated units of nucleosomes has
about 200 base pair long DNA known as linker DNA. According to A. Klug (Nobel Prize winner,
1982) this chain of nucleosomes is coiled into cylindrical solenoid fibril of 10nm.having about
six nucleosomes per turn. This is further coiled to super solenoid of 30nm that represents the
interphase chromatin. The chromonema as observed under light microscope is actually the
30nm fibril. During metaphase when the chromatin condenses to chromosome the 30nm fibrils
are more compactly arranged by radial looping of super solenoids into rosettes around a
preexisting scaffold protein (fig-7.33, 7.34).
B
Fig. 7.32 : Chromosomal organization A.Nucleosome Fig. 7.33 : Various steps in folding and
units, B. Nucleosome, C. Solenoid model packaging of the chromatin.
Sex Chromosome
Sex chromosome provide chromosomal basis of sex determination in animals. There is thus sexual
dimorphism in animals. They are also called allosomes, and, other chromosomes present along with
allosomes but do not determine sex are called autosomes. Two types of sex chromosomes are
found: X and Y. These two sex chromosomes differ in shape, size, DNA content and sedimentation
rate. In birds and lepidopteron they are called Z and l/IZ
Giant Chromosomes:
There are two types of giant chromosomes: (Polytene choromosomes: and lamp brush chromosomes).
Polytene chromosomes otherwise called salivary chromosomes are commonly found in the salivary glands
of insects. They are also found in antipodal cells (embryo sac), endosperm and suspensor cells of embryo.
These chromosomes can reach a length of 2000pm and can contain 1000 times more DNA than that of
normal chromosomes. These chromosomes are the result of repeated DNA replications without separation
of daughter DNA molecules. They can also be formed by somatic pairing of homologous chromosomes.
Lamp brush chromosomes occur in most oocytes and in alga like Acetabularia. These chromosomes
occur in pairs giving out lateral projections or loops giving them the appearance of lamp brush. They are
actually specially synapsed deplotene bivalents.
SAMPLE QUESTIONS
A. FILL IN THE BLANKS :

1. ----------is the cytoplasmic organelle, responsible for cellular respiration.
2. ----------proposed the unit membrane concept.
3. ----------is the largest cytoplasmic organelle in plant cell.
4. ----------is the smallest cytoplasmic organelle.
5. ----------is a vesicle containing digestive enzymes found in a cell.
6. Intracellular digestion is associated with-------------------
7. ------------- maintains the cytoplasmic continuity between neighboring cells.
8. Singer & Nicholson proposed the--------------------- model for plasma membrane.
9. Presence of DNA in chloroplast and mitochondria make them-------------------
10. Colored plastids found in flowering plants are known as-------------------------
11. A chromosome lacking a centromere is---------------------------
12. Prokaryotic cells contain------------- ribosomes.
13. Histone proteins are----------by nature.
14. The portion of DNA between two repeating units of nucleosomes is known as---------------- DNA.
15. When two solutes move across the cell membrane in opposite directions the transport is
known as--------------------------
B. MULTIPLE CHOICE QUESTIONS :

1. Which one of the following organelles is without membrane envelop?
a. Golgi complex b.ribosome c. peroxisome d. tonoplast
2. The fingures of cork cells as seen by Robert Hooke were phblished in his book
a. origin of species b. plant kingdom c. genera plantarum d. micrographia
3. Prokaryotic cell is that which has
a. premitive nucleus b. true nucleus c. two nuclei d. four nuclei
4. Which of the following cells does not contain a nucleus
a. yeast b. nerve cells c. mature WBC d. mature RBC
5. Protein and RNA are the principal constituents of
a. ribosome b. chromosome c. endoplasmic reticulum d. peroxisome.
6. 70s ribosomes are found in
a. mitochondria and bacteria b. mycoplasma and eukaryotic cell c.RBC and WBC d.
epidermal cells and hepatic cells.
7. Which of the following cell organelles is bound by a single unit membrane?

a. Golgi apparatus b. chloroplast c. mitochondrion d. lysosome
8. Which of the followings is the site of steroid synthesis/
a.rough endoplasmic reticulum b.ribosomes c. smooth endoplasmic reticulum
d. mitochondrion
9. The physical basis of life is
a.nucleus b.protoplasm c. cell d. food
10. Every living cell possesses
a. chloroplast b. cell membrane c. cell wall d. food vacuole.
11. The chemical substance most abundantly present in the middle lamella is
a. lignin b. suberin c. chitin d. pectin.
12. The latest model proposed to explain the structure of plasma membrane is
a. molecular model b. sandwich model c. unit membrane model d. fluid-mosaic model.
13. The peripheral proteins can be easily removed from the membrane by
a. the action of detergent b. solutions of high ionic strength.
c. keeping them in buffer d. enzyme action.
14. Tonoplast is a differentially permeable membrane surrounding
a. cytoplasm b. mitochondrion c. vacuole d. nucleus
15. F1 particles are present in
a. chloroplast b. mitochondrion c. dictyosome d. nucleus.
16. Double membrane is absent in
a. nucleus b. chloroplast c. mitochondrion d. lysosome
17. Polyribosomes are aggregation of
a. ribosomes on r-RNA b. only r-RNA c. peroxisomes d. ribosomes on m-RNA
18. Ribosomes are attached to ER through
a. ribophorins b. r-RNA c. t-RNA d. hydrostatic force
19. The cytoplasmic ribonucleoprotein that binds to free ribosomes so that protein synthesis
stops till ribosomes get associated with ER is known as
a. SPR b. SRP c. PRS d. PSR
20. Lysosomes are called “suicidal bag” because they have
a. hydrolytic enzymes b. parasitic activity c. anabolic enzymes d. oxidizing enzymes
21. In plant cells the vacuole contains
a. gases b.vacuum c. dissolved minerals d. only water
22. ATP, the energy currency of cell, is synthesized mostly in
a. ribosomes b. mitochondria c. lysosomes d. nucleus
23. Ribosomes are made up of

a. RNA and DNA b. DNA and proteins c. RNA and proteins d. RNA alone
24. When green tomatoes turn red
a. chromoplasts change to chloroplasts b. chloroplasts change to chromoplasts
b. new chromoplasts are synthesized d. new chloroplasts are synthesized
25. Thylakoids are seen in the plastids of
a. higher plants b. bacteria c. algae d. blue green algae
26. Foldings of inner mitochondrial membrane are called
a.cristae b. grana c. sacs d. dictyosomes
27. Ribosomes of prokaryotes are of
a. 30s type b. 50s type c. 70s type d. 80s type
28. If the ribosomes of a cell are destroyed or blocked, then
a. respiration will stop b.digestion will stop c. reproduction will stop
d. protein synthesis will stop
29. Site of formation of immature ribosomal sub-units in eukaryotic cell is
a. cytoplasm b. nucleus c. nucleolus d. nuclear pore complex
30. The main function of Golgi complex is
a. translocation b. fermentation c. protein glycosylation d. phosphorylation
31. peroxisomes contain
a. transferase enzymes b. hydrolytic enzymes c. isomerase enzymes d. oxidizing enzymes
32. Nucleoli are rich in
a. DNA and RNA b. DNA, RNA and proteins c. DNA d. RNA
33. Nucleus was first discovered by
a. Leewenhoek b.Schwann c. Robert Brown d. Robert Koch
34. Microtubules are made up of
a. myosin b.actin c. tubulin d. globulin
35. Centromere is a part of
a. ribosome b. chromosome c. spherosome d. glyoxisome
36. Chromosomes with equal arms are called
a. submetacentric b. polycentric c. acentric d. metacentric
37. The hydrophobic chemicals like pesticides and carcinogens are detoxified by enzymes
found in
a. a.mitochondrion b. lysosome c. Golgi d. SER
38. Which of the followings is a prokaryote
a. Agaricus b. Salmonella c. Volvox d. Saccharomyces.
I. Differentiate between
1. cell wall and plasma membrane
2. chloroplast and mitochondrion
3. cilia and flagella
4. cytoplasm and karyolymph
5. leucoplast and chloroplast

6. chromatin and chromosome
7. nucleus and nucleolus
8. SER and RER
9. intrinsic proteins and peripheral proteins
10. primary cell wall and secondary cell wall
II. Write notes on:

Cellwall, Mitochondrion, Plastids, Ribosome, ER, Golgi complex, Lysosome, Vacuole,
Flagella, Nuclear pore, Microtubules, Nucleosome, Unit membrane cocept
C. LONG ANSWER TYPE QUESTIONS :

1. What are chromosomes? Describe their structure and functions.
2. Explain the fluid-mosaic model of plasma membrane with suitable diagrams.
3. What are organelles? Give an account of principal organelles of a cell and mention their
functions.
4. What are the different types of plastids seen in plants? Describe the structure and function
of chloroplast.
CHEMICAL CONSTITUENTS OF CHAPTER
LIVING CELLS s
BIOMOLECLUS :
Cell is the basic structural and functional unit of organism. As described earlier cell is a
self contained unit. Every cell has the necessary metabolic machinery to meet its requirements.
Inspite of a great diversity among the living organisms, the construction pattern and the metabolic
activities of all kinds of cells are remarkably similar. Components of all kinds of cells are made
up of almost of the same six elements (C,H,O,N,P & S). About 5% of cellular materials also
consist of non-metals like chlorine, iodine and metals like calcium, phosphorus, sulphur,
potassium, sodium, magnesium and iron, which are known as minor elements. Carbon, oxygen,
hydrogen and nitrogen are called major elements. Other non-metals like silicon, boron, fluorine,
selenium and metals like copper, zinc, cobalt, molybdenum, chromium and aluminium are present
in very small amount and are known as trace elements. All the chemical compounds, ions and
elements together constitute the cellular pool. In the cellular pool, the chemicals occur in aqueous
and non-aqueous phases. In the aqueous phase soluble molecules like starch, amino acids,
fatty acids and inorganic salts form transparent homogeneous solution. Other molecules like
starch, proteins, nucleic acids etc. form colloidal solution. The non-aqueous phase contains
mainly the organic molecules, such as components of plasma membrane, cell-wall and cell
organelles. Depending upon their size, molecular weight and solubility, the constituents of cellular
pool are divided into micromolecules and macromolecules. The micro-molecules are of small
size, low melocular weight and high solubility. These include water, minerals, sugars and amino
acids. The macromolecules are of larger size, high molecular weight and have relatively less
solubility. They are formed by the polymerization of micromolecules. Polysaccharides, lipids,
proteins and nucleic acids are the common macromolecules. The cell inclusions or ergastic
substances or deutoplasmic substance include the reserve or storage substances, secretory
substances and excretory substances.
8.1. PROTEINS:
Proteins are polymers of aminoacids. Amino acids are linked covalently by peptide bonds
to from a polypetide and one or more polypeptides fold appropriately to form protein. In early
1950s, Frederick Sanger for the first time sequenced the insulin protein and then it became
clear that in a particular polypeptide, amino acids are arranged in specific sequence. All proteins
have well defined three dimensional structures or conformations. The conformation of a protein
is very important as it determines the protein function.
8.1.1. AminoAcids:
Amino acids are an important group of organic acids having

both an acidic carboxylic group (-COOH) and a basic amino (-
R—y—COOH
NH2) group.
NH2
The first carbon atom of an aminoacid is the part of carboxyl
group and the second carbon atom is known as a -carbon (alpha- M Qf gn Amjno Acjd
carbon) to which the four different groups are attached :
1) One hydrogen atom
2) One -COOH group with a potential negative charge (-COO-). The carboxylic
group is responsible for the acidic property of amino acids.
3) One -NH2 group with a potential positive charge (-NH+3). Proline is an aminoacid
where the amino group is not free but a part of a ring structure, hence it is referred
to as imino acid.
A variable side group (-R) that is different in different ch2

amino acids. In glycine, R is only an hydrogen atom
(H), and in alanine the R is a methyl group (-CH3).
Hence glycine having the simplest R-group is the
H
simplest amino acid. In other amino acids the R-group
Fig.8.2 : Proline
may be a straight or branched chain or a cyclic group.
The side chain further, may be polar (as in serine, glutamic acid) or non-polar (as in
alanine).
Except glycine, in all other amino acids four different groups are attached to the
oc-carbon atom making the a-carbon asymmetric. Because of the a symmetric a-
carbon all amino acids except glycine exists in two optically active froms : those having -NH2
group to the right are designated as D-forms and those having -NH2 group to left are L-forms.
Out of the many kinds of naturally occuring amino acids, only 20 different types of
amino acids and amides are found as constituents of proteins. Certain proteins also contain
some modified amino acids derived from the 20 standard amino acids. These derived amino
acids are known as non-standard amino acids. Hydroxyproline (derived from proline) and
hydroxylysine (derived from lysine) are non-standard amino acids found in high percentage in
collagen (an important structural proteins of animals).
The standard twenty amino acids found in proteins are grouped into seven different
categories.
1. Aliphatic amino acids : The hydrocarbon chain (R-group) is neutral, nonpolar as in

glycine, alanine, valine, leucine, isoleucine.
Chemical Constituents of Living Cells I 349
2. Hydroxy amino acids : The side chain having -OH group as in Serine, Threonine.
3. Sulphur containing amino acids: The side chain having sulphur group as in cystine,
methionine.
4. Dicarboxylic amino acids and amides : The side chain has extra carboxylic group
as in glutamic acid and aspartic acid. They are also known as acidic amino acids.
These amino acids also exist in their respective amide forms such as glutamine
and asparagine.
5. Basic amino acids : They have an additional amino group without forming amides.
These amino acids are diamino-mono carboxylic acids. Examples of such amino
acid are lysine, arginine and histidine.
6. Aromatic amino acids : They have a cyclic structure with a straight chain bearing
carboxylic and amino groups. Examples of such amino acids are Phenylalanine,
tyrosine, tryptophan.
7. Heterocylic amino acid : Here the nitrogen group is in the ring structure, ex
proline.
There are about 300 additional natural amino acids which are not found as constituents
of proteins but have some other roles in metabolism. These are known as non-protein amino
acids. Some examples of non-protein amino acids are :
L- ornithine and L-citrulline are metabolic intermediates in urea-cycle.
P - alanine, an isomer of alanine, occurs free in nature and also as a constitutent of an

important vitamin pantothenic acid and of co-enzyme A.
Functions
1. They are building blocks of proteins (both structural proteins and enzymes).
2. They serve as storage of nitrogen in the form of amides.
3. Amino acids like p -alanine takes part in the formation of vitamin pantothenic acid
and co-enzyme A.
4. Glycine, cysteine and glutamate form the co-enzyme glutathione.
5. Surplus amino acids are deaminated in liver to organic acids, which in turn are
changed to glucose (gluconeogeneiss) or used in metabolism.
Peptide Formation
A peptide formation occurs due to a condensation reaction between the carboxylic

(-COOH) group of one amino acid and amino (-NH2) group of another amino acid with the
elimination of a water molecule. This peptide bond is actually an amide bond of about 0.132
nm. Upon hydrolysis a peptide yields equal number of amino and carboxylic groups. A peptide
may be a dipeptide having only two amino acids or tripeptide having three amino acids and so
on. If there are a few amino acids in a peptide chain it is known as oligopeptide and if there
are many amino acids the peptide chain is a polypeptide. A peptide chain has an amino group
at one end which is knwon as amino terminus or N-terminus. At the other end it has a carboxylic
group and the end is known as carboxylic terminus or C-terminus.
Peptides participate in a number of biological activities :
1) In protein formation
2) As constituents of a group of compounds known as alkaloids
3) Serve as growth factors (ex- folic acid)
4) Peptide hormones are found in higher animals
5) Peptides like glutathione act as co-enzyme
8.1.2. Levels of Protein Structure :
Traditionally, it is considered that proteins have four

levels of structural organisation: primary, secondary, tertiary
and quaternary. With the increasing informations available
about proteins two additional levels of structures have been
distinguished by molecular biologists : motifs and domains.
Primary Structure :
It is the specific linear sequence of amino acid

residues making up a polypeptide chain. The sequence of
amino acids is determined by the nucleotide sequence of
the gene that encodes the protein. Only peptide bonds are
associated with the primary structure.
Secondary Structure
Secondary structure results from the hydrogen

bonding between the aminoacids of polypeptides. Two
patterns of hydrogen bonding occur in proteins. In one
pattern, hydrogen bonds are formed along a single
polypeptide chain, linking one amino acid to another, which
is four amino acids down the chain. This tends to pull the
chain into a coil, called alpha (a) helix. In another pattern,
hydrogen bonds are formed between amino acids across
two chains. Often many chains are linked in this pattern,
forming a pleated sheet like structure called beta (P) sheet. The two chains may be oriented in
a parallel or antiparallel manner forming parallel p-pleated sheets and antiparallel p-pleated
sheets respectively.
Tertiary structure :
Tertiary structure results from extensive folding of polypeptide chain into a complex,
rigid and globular structure. Most secondary structures fold compactly due to interactions between
amino acid residues present far apart. Ionic bonds between oppositely charged side groups
bring region into close proximity. Hydrogen bonds, hydrophobic interactions and disulfide linkage
also lock particular regions of proteins together.
Quaternary structure :
When two or more polypeptide chains associate to form a

functional protein, a quaternary structure results. Here, each
polypeptide in known as a subunit (protomer). When the subunits
are identical, the structure is homogenous. Enzyme phospholipase
has two identical subunits but each sub unit alone is catalytically
inactive. It is only when two subunits are joined as a dimer, a
functionally active enzyme is formed. Hemoglobin, is composed of
four subunits; two alpha (a) subunits and two beta (P) subunits. In
proteins with such quaternary/subunits structures, the interfaces
where the subunits contact one another are often nonpolar. These, Fig.8.4 : Globular protein
interfaces play key role in coordinating the activities of subunit. Loss
or change of activity in one of the subunits can have profound effect on the protein’s functioning.
In sickle cell hemoglobin a mutation alters only one amino acid of the subunit which results in
hemoglobin molecules to stick to one another resulting in sickle cell anemia.
Fig. 8.5 : A quaternary structure illustrated by

two interacting polypeptides (protomers)
Motifs
In a protein the elements of secondary structure sometimes combine in characterstic

ways called motif or “super secondary structure”. The motifs are specific regions on proteins to
bind to other structures such as nucleic acids.
Domains
Many proteins are encoded in sections by different exons. These sections typically of
100 to 200 aminoacids long encoded by different exons fold into structurally independent
functional units called domain. As the polypeptide chain folds, the domains fold into their proper
shape, each more or less independent of the others. Often the domains of a protein have quite
separate functions. For example, one domain of an enzyme many bind to a cofactor, while the
other to the substrate.
8.1.3. Classification of Proteins
Classification based on the source of proteins: Traditionally proteins are divided into
animal proteins and plant proteins depending on the sources from which they are obtained.
Animal proteins are considered betten than the plant proteins for human nutrition.
Classification based on the shape of protein : On the basis of shape of the protein
molecule there are two broad categories : globular protein and fibrous proteins.
Globular proteins
These are extensively folded and compact polypeptide possessing a relatively spherical
or ovoid shape. The globular proteins have axial ratio (length : width) of less than 10 (usually 3
or 4). They are usually soluble in water or aqueous media containing acids, bases, salts or
alcohol and diffuse readily. Almost all enzymes, protein hormones, blood transport proteins,
antibodies and nutrient storage proteins are globular proteins.
Fibrous proteins :
These proteins consist of long chain polypeptides held in groups by several forces like
intra-chain and inter-chain hydrogen bonds, disulfide bridges etc. They have axial ratio greater
than 10 and resemble long ribbons or fibres in shape. They are mainly of animal origin and
insoluble in all common solvents such as water, dilute acids, alkalies and salt solutions. They
serve as structural or protective proteins. There are three different conformations : (a) a-
keratin, (b) p-keratin and (c) collagen.
(a) a-Keratin (alpha keratin) : These are ectodermal proteins; form the major
constituents of epithelial tissues like skin, hair, feathers, horns nails, fur, claws
etc. It consists mostly of right handed a-helices. Each helix is stabilized by intra-
chain hydrogen bonds and inter-chain di-sulfide bridges. These proteins, therefore,
contain large amounts of sulfur in the form of cysteine amino acids. Human hair
has about 14% cysteine.
(b) P-Keratin (beta-keratin): It is found in silk fibre. Here, many parallel popypeptides
are held by inter-chain hydrogen bonds. Individual polypeptide are almost
completely stretched without any intra-chain hydrogen bonds. Hence the
polypeptides form pleated p -sheet. The adjacent polypeptides may run in the
same directions with their N-terminus and C-terminus on same sides or in opposite
direction. Accordingly they are termed as parallel or antiparallel p -sheets.
(c) Collagen: These are mesenchymal in origin and form the major protein components
of white connective tissues (tendons, cartilage) and bone. They contain three left
handed helical polypeptides, wound round each other forming a right handed
triple helix. More than half of the total proteins in mammalian body is collagen.
When acted upon by boiling water, dilute acids or alkalies produce soluble gelatins.
These are rich in hydroxyproline and poor in sulfur.
Classification based on composition :
There are two groups of proteins basing on the composition.
Simple proteins :
Proteins made exclusively of amino acids. No non-protein structure forms a part of the
protein. Majority of structural proteins and peptide hormones are simple proteins.
Conjugate proteins :
Functional proteins having non-protein components associated with them are known as
conjugate proteins. The non-protein part is essential for the functioning of the protein. Most of
the regulatory enzymes are conjugate proteins. Other examples are glycoproteins, lipoproteins,
phosphoproteins and metallo proteins.
Functions :
1. Structural proteins constitute the body of living organism. It forms the bulk of
intra-cellular and extra-cellular materials.
2. Specific proteins characterise specific cell types. For example actin and myosin
characterise muscles cells.
3. Structural, enzymatic and carriers proteins are the constituents of biological
membrances.
4. Cell surface proteins help in cell to cell interaction and tissue formation.
5. Some cell surface proteins act as signal receptors to coordinate cellular activities
in multicellular organisms.
6. Many peptide hormones regulate growth and metabolism.
7. Proteins like immunoglobin are involved in antigen-antibody reactions.
8. Biocatalysts or enzymes are mostly proteins.
9. Proteins like tubulin, actin, ankyrin and spectrin are involved in the formation of
cytoskelaton.
10. Histone proteins are responsible for packaging of DNA.
8.2. CARBOHYDRATES:
Carbohydrates are polyhydroxy aldehydes or ketones and the compounds derived from
these. These are compounds of carbon, hydrogen and oxygen atoms. The simplest forms of
carbohydrates have the empirical formula Cn(H2O)n where ‘n’ is a number. This formula indicates
as if the simplest carbohydrates are hydrates of carbon and hence the name is carbohydrates.
But, some carbohydrates do not have this empirical formula. Carbohydrates are otherwise
known as saccharides meaning sugar (derived from Greek- saccharon; Latin- saccharum;
Sanskrit- sarkara).
Broadly, carbohydrates are classified into three categories : (i) monosaccharides, (ii)
oligosaccharides, and (iii) polysaccharides.
(i) Monosaccharides
These are the simplest carbohydrates with single polyhydroxy aldehyde (aldose) or
ketone (ketose) units each. They cannot be further hydrolyzed into simpler monosaccharides.
Glucose is a single polyhydroxy aldehyde or aldose while fructose is a single polyhydroxy ketone
or ketose. The minimum number of carbon in a monosaccharide is three and it can go upto
seven. They have the empirical formula of Cn(H2O)n. The monosaccharides are named as trioses,
tetroses, pentoses, hexoses and heptoses depending on the presence of three, four, five, six or
seven carbon atoms respectively. Depending on the number of carbon atoms and types of
functional group (aldehyde/ketone) monosaccharides can be named as aldohexose (glucose)
or keto hexose (fructose), aldotriose or ketotriose, aldopentose or ketopentose etc.
SI. No. of Name based Name of the Monosaccharides

No. carbon on no. of Aldehyde form Ketone form Empirical
atoms cabron atoms (Aldose) (Ketose) Formula
1. 3 Triose Glyceraldehyde Dihydroxyacetone c3h6o3

(Aldotriose) (Ketotriose)
2. 4 Tertrose Erythrose Erythrulose c4h8o4
(Aldotetrose) (Ketotetrose)
3. 5 Pentose Ribose Ribulose c5h10o5
(Aldopentose) (Ketopentose)
4. 6 Hexose Glucose Fructose c6h12o6
(Aldohexose) (Ketohexose)
5. 7 Heptose Sedoheptulose c7h14o7
(Ketoheptose)
The hexose sugars are generally sweet in taste and crystalline in structure. Fructose, a
ketohexose is the sweetest sugar and is also known as fruit sugar as it is commonly found in
fruits except a few like grapes. Grapes contain glucose; hence glucose is known as grape
sugar (also as blood sugar as it occurs in blood). Fructose is also found in nectar and honey.
Similarly glucose is found in corn and is known as dextrose. Fructose is known as levulose.
The pentoses and hexoses can exist either in open chain structure or in ring structure.
Two types of ring structure are common with pentoses and hexose : These are pyranose from
and furanose form. Pyranose has a six membered ring with five carbon atom and one oxygen
atom. The furanose form has five membered ring with four carbon atoms and one oxygen
atoms. The rest of the carbon atoms remain out side the ring.
H26C-OH H26C-OH
H-2C-OH I
5C o
I
OH-3C-H
I
H-4C-OH
I
H-5C-OH
I
H2-6C-OH H OH
Open chain structure Gluco-pyranose Gluco-furanose

of glucose
In solution the pyranose forms of sugars are more stable than the fruranose forms.
Isomerism
Isomers are compounds having same molecular formulae but different molecular
structures. Monosaccharides show isomerism. The presence of an asymmetric carbon atom (a
carbon atom to which four different groups or atoms are attached) make possible the formation
of isomers of a compound. The isomers are of two types : structural isomers and sterioisomers.
Structural isomers have same molecular formula but different structures due to difference
in chain lengh (chain isomers), position of substituent groups (positional isomers) or different
functional groups. Glucose and fructose are structural (functional) isomers as both have same
molecular formula (C6H12O6) but have different functional groups, aldehyde and ketone
respectively.
Sterioisomers have same molecular formula, same structures but differ only in spatial
configuration. Optical isomers are one type of stereoisomers where the isomers appear as
mirror image of each other around the asymmetric carbon atom.
In glyceraldehyde the carbon atom number two is asymmetric. In D-glyceraldehyde the

OH-group is to the right side and H-group is to the left. In L-glyceraldehyde the OH-group is to
the left of the asymmetric carbon atom and H-group to the right. But there are sugars with two
or more asymmetric ccarbon atoms. In that case the orientation of - H and -OH group around
the lowermost asymmetric carbon atom (the penultimate carbon atom) is considered for
determination of D- and L-forms. These D-and L-forms are called enantiomers. The majority
of monosaccharides found in human body are D-type. Some sugars do occur naturally as L-
forms such as L-arabinose. The possible number of optical isomers formed by a monosaccharide
depend upon the number of asymmetric or chiral carbon atoms. Glucose has 4 asymmetric
carbon atoms hence can have 24 or 16 number of optical isomers. But in all these enantiomers
the D and L forms are designated depending upon the orientation of -H and - OH group around
5th carbon atom. So it will have 4x2 = 8 enantiomers.
H
I H
iC- O I
I C-O
I
h-2c-oh -C - H
I I
H-3C-0H -C - OH
I I
H H
D - glyceraldehyde L- glyceraldehyde
In ring forms the carbon atom number 1 is called anomeric carbon atoms The orientation
of-H and -OH groups around carbon atom 1 will give rise to two isomers known as anomers.
In one form the -OH group is below and this is the a-form and in other form the -OH group is
above and is called the 0- form.
Many monosaccharides can rotate plane polarized light to right (D, dextrorotatory, +) or
left side (L, levorotatory, -). Some monosaccharides are known as derived monosaccharides
as they are derivatives of monosaccharides. Deoxyribose sugar found in deoxyribonucleic acid
is an aldopentose with one oxygen atom less than ribose. Aminosugars are monosaccharides
having amino group (-NH2). Glucosamine is an aminosugar which forms chitin found in fungal
cell wall. There are sugar acids like glucuronic acid and galacturonic acid which occur in
mucopolysaccharides. Sugar alcohol like glycerol are involved in fat or lipid formation. Mannitol
is another sugar alcohol found as storage carbohydrates in some fruits and brown algae.
Monosaccharides are also reducing sugars as they posses free aldehyde or keto groups.
a -D- glucose P -D- glucose
(ii) Oligosaccharides
Oligosaccharides (oligo = a few) are carbohydrates formed by condensation products

of 2-9 monosaccharides. The monosaccharides are joined by glycosidic bonds, which is formed
when hydroxyl groups attached to two adjacent monosaccharides react and eleminate a molecule
of water. This is a condensation reaction forming C-O-C bond. The oligosaccharides can be
disaccharide (when two monosaccharides are involved, trisaccharides (when three mono
saccharides are involved), tetrasaccharides and so on. Smallest and commonest
oligosaccharides are disaccharides.
TABLE : Commonly occuring disaccharides.
SI.No. Name Monomers involved Occurence / common name
1. Maltose a-D. Glucose + a-D. Glucose Malt - Malt sugar

2. Lactose p -.D. Galactose + a-D. Glucose Milk - Milk Sugar
3. Sucrose a-D. Glucose + p -D. Fructose Sugar cane - Cane Sugar/

Table Sugar
(iii) Polysaccharides:
Polysaccharides, commonly called as glycans, are polymers of many (10 or more)

monosaccharides or their derivatives. When a polysaccharide contain a single type of
monosaccharides it is called homopolysaccharide and when it contains different types of
monosaccharides it is called heteropolysaccharide. Polysaccharides can be branched or
unbranched and may be structural polysaccharides or storage polysaccharides. Some important
polysaccharides are :
1. Starch : It is a polymer of a-D-glucose and is a homopolysaccharide. It is a storage

polysaccharide and is the most important resesrve food materials of higher plants. Natural
starch consists of two components : amylose and amylopectin. Amylose is a long
unbranched straight chain of a-D-glucose and amylopectin is a branched chain
polysaccharide of a-D-glucose.
2. Glycogen : - It is the major reserve food in animals and also in fungi. It is often referred
to as animal strach. It is a branched chain polymer of a-D-glucose like strach and
resembles the amylopection. But it has more glucose units per molecule and is about
1.5 times more branched. The chains are also shorter than amylopectin and, therefore,
molecule is more compact.
3. Cellulose : It is the most abundant biomolecule in the biosphere as it is the component of
cell-wall of higher plants. It is a structural homopolyaccharide composed of p - D-glucose.
4. Chitin : It is probably the second most abundant polysaccharide in the nature. It is a
structural homopolysaccharide found in fungal cell wall and exoskeleton of arthropods.
It is often known as fungus cellulose. It is polymer of nitrogen containing glucose derivative
known as N-acetyl glucosamine.
5. Inulin : It is a storage polysaccharide in the members of family Compositae. It is stored
in the tubers and roots of the plants. It is also found in onion and garlic. It is a polymer of
P -D-fructose.
6. Pectin - It is a structural homopolysaccharide of D-galacturonic acid. It is present in the
cell wall as a ground material in which the cellulose-hemicellulose net work is embedded.
It is also abundant in fruits like guava, apple, pear and tomato.
7. Hemicellulose : Xylans, xyloglucans and other related substances are collectively called
hemicellulose. They are not structurally related to cellulose. The hemicellulose can either
be homopolymers of pentoses (xylose, arabinose) or hexoses (mannose, galactose) as
well as sugar acids. The polymers of xylose (xylans) is considered as the representative
of hemicellulose and is the next most abundant polysaccharide along with chitin.
Hemicelluloses are structural components of plant cell walls.
8. Mucopolysaccharides : The polysaccharides forming slimy substances or mucilages
and composed of mixture of simple sugars and their derivatives such as amino sugars
and uronic sugars are called as mucopolysaccharides. Hyaluronic acid is the most
abundant member of mucopolysaccharides.
Reducing Sugars :
The sugars possesing free aldehyde groups or free keto groups posses reducing
properties. This reducing property is exhibited by Fehling’s test where the Cu2+ ion in Fehling’s
solution is reduced to Cu+ ion. All monosaccharides are reducing sugar. In disaccharides sucrose
is non reducing as the aldehyde group of glucose and keto group of fructose are involved in the
formation of glycosidic linkage. Other disaccharides like lactose, maltose etc. are reducing
sugars.
Artificial Sweetener: These are non-sugar sweetener mostly used by diabetics and health
conscious people. They have no nutritive value.
Saccharin (C6H5CH^ is the most widely used artificial sweetener.
Sucaryl Sodium is 30 times sweeter than sucrose/Monellin is a protein sweetener and 2,000
times sweeter than sucrose.
Functions :
1. Many monosaccharides like trioses, tetroses, pentosies are important metabolic

intermediates.
2. Pentoses like ribose and deoxyribose form parts of the ribonucleic acid and deoxyribonucleic
acid respectively.
3. Pentoses form the parts of co-enzymes like CoA, FAD, NAD, NADP and ATP etc.
4. Glucose is the blood sugar and fructose is the common fruit sugar.
5. Oligosaccharides forming the part of glycoprotein function as membrane component. These

oligosaccharides from the cell coat or glycocalyx.
6. In some plants like sugarcane disaccharides sucrose is the reserve food.
7. Polysaccharides like collulose, chitin and pectin are structural components of cell wall.
8. Starch, glycogen, innulin are storage polysaccharides.
8.3. LIPIDS :
Structure of Lipids
Unlike carbohydrates, which constitute a family of homogeneous compounds, lipids

form a very heterogeneous class of compounds of widely differing structures. Lipids may be
defined as compounds containing in their molecule an aliphatic chain (chain consisting of -
CH2-) of at least 4-carbon atom.
The term fats and oils denote mixtures of lipids which are respectively solid or liquid at
ordinary temperature. Simple lipids yield an alcohol and one or several fatty acids on hydrolysis
while complex lipids on hydrolysis liberate alcohol and fatty acids but also phosphoric acid,
carbohydrate etc.
Fatty acids
They are found in small quantities in free state, but in large quantities as part of lipids.
As a general rule, these are monocarboxylic, straight unbranched chain acids containing an
even number of carbon atoms (between 4 and 36). They may be saturated or unsaturated and
sometimes hydroxylated or branched.
1. Saturated fatty acids
The general formula is: CH3-(CH2)n-COOH. The most frequent are palmitic acid (C16) and
stearic acid (C18). Longer fatty acids (up to 36 carbon atoms) are present in numerous cells
(bacteria, unicellular eukaryotes, plants, vertebrates). They are generally present in some types
of lipids. Milk on the contrary, is rich in short-chain fatty acids.
2. Unsaturated fatty acids
These are fatty acids having one or more double bonds in their hydrocarbon chain.
a. Monounsaturated fatty acids (1 double bond) C H COOH

n 2n—1
Oleic acid (C18) has a double bond between carbon atoms C9 and C10 with a molecular
formula-
CH3-(CH2)7-CH=CH-(CH2)7-COOH The common sources of oleic acid are animal and

plant fats.
b. Polyunsaturated fatty acids (several double bonds)
In the most common of such acids, a methylene group separates the non-conjugated
double bonds, e.g. linoleic acid having the molecular formula-
CH3-(CH2)4-CH=CH-CH2-CH=CH-(CH2)7-COOH
In mammals, polyunsaturated fatty acids can have up to 22 carbon atoms and 6 double
bonds, but in plants these acids do not exceed 18 carbon atoms and 3 double bonds. Common
sources of linoleic acid plant based oils. They are also compnent of biological membranes.
An important physical property of fatty acids is that their melting points decrease with
increasing number of double bonds. For example, the melting point of stearic acid is 70°C
whereas that of oleic acid is 13°C and that of linoleic acid is -5.8°C.
3. Hydroxylated fatty acids
Plants can synthesize a series of hydroxylated fatty acids like ricinoleic acid with the
molecular formula-
CH3-(CH2)5-CH(OH)-CH2-CH=CH -(CH2)7-COOH
Some of these hydroxylated fatty acids lead to the formation of cutin that are found in the
cuticle of epidermal cells of plants. The common source of ricinoleic acid is castor oil.
4. Branched fatty acids
Example: 15-methylhexadecaenoic acid with a molecular formula-
(CH3)2-CH-(CH2)13-COOH
The above type of fatty acid is particularly abundant in Gram+ bacteria.
Polyisoprenic lipids
1. Polyisoprenic hydrocarbons
Avery large number of compounds present in plants are formed by the polymerization of
isoprene units, e. g. rubber is formed by the condensation of thousands of isoprene units.
Similarly the phytol chain, which is a part of the structure of chlorophyll pigment, is an acyclic
diterpene.
Some lipids can be considered as derivatives of isoprene (steroids, carotenoids).

2. Sterols and steroids
These compounds are derived from a polycyclic ring of cyclopentanophenanthrene. The

stereochemistry and nomenclature problems of steroids are very complex.
8.4. NUCLEIC ACID:
Nucleic acids are macromolecules present in all living cells either in free state, or in
combination with other substances. These are polymers consisting of units called nucleotides;
they are hence called polynucleotides. Nucleic acids are of two types:
1. Deoxyribonucleic Acid (DNA)
DNAs are found in the chromosomes in the nucleus of plant and animal cells. In
prokaryotes also DNA, forms the chromosomes. Some viruses, especially animal viruses have
it as their genetic material. Furthermore, it is also found in mitochondria of plant and animal
calls and in chloroplasts of photosynthetic organisms.
2. Ribonucleic Acid (RNA)
RNAs mainly found in the cytoplasm of cells. There are various types of RNAs (rRNA,
tRNAs, mRNA) involved in the expression of genetic information.
Each nucleotide in nucleic acids is composed of pentose sugar, pentose nitrogenous

base and phosphoric acid.
Pentose sugar
In ribonucleic acids, the sugar is ribose; in deoxyribonucleic acids it is deoxyribose.

These two sugars differ in their chemical nature on carbon 2 as shown below.
Nitrogenous base
All nitrogenous bases derive from two heterocyclic bases, purine and pyrimidine.
1. Purine base
Two principal purine bases found in deoxyribonucleic acids as well as ribonucleic acids
are adenine and guanine.
Adenine Guanine
2. Pyrimidine bases
Cytosine and uracil are found in ribonucleic acids; cytosine and thymine, in deoxyribonucleic
acids.
OH OH nh2
I
r T—CH3
fS
Uracil
N
HO —
V HO-k J
N
Cytosine
Thymine
Nucleosides
Nucleosides are formed from the linkage of a purine or pyrimidine base with ribose or
deoxyribose sugar. This linkage joins nitrogen 9 of the purine base, or nitrogen 1 of the pyrimidine
base with carbon 1 of pentose. The nucleosides are called ribonucleosides or
deoxyribonucleosides depending upon wheather ribose or deoxyribose sugars are bonded with
nitrogenous bases respectively. The following table indicates the nomenclature of the main
nucleosides.
Base Ribonucleoside Deoxyribonucleoside
Adenine Adenosine Deoxyadenosine
Guanine Guanosine Deoxyguanosine
Uracil Uridine Deoxyuridine
Cytosine Cytidine Deoxycytidine
Thymine ribothymidine Deoxythymidine
Nucleotides
Nucleotides are the phosphoric esters of nucleosides. Depending on the nature of the
pentose sugar one will have ribonucleotides and deoxyribonucleotides. A ribonucleoside has 3
positions of carbon, which can be phosphorylated (2’, 3’ and 5’) while a deoxyribonucleoside
can be phosphorylated only in two positions (3’ and 5’). This results in the formation of nucleosides
-monophosphate.
Uracil
Adenine
Cytosine
o OH
I
HO — P =o
I
O
I
Detailed structure of oligoribonucleotide
A second phosphate group can be bound to the phosphate of a nucleoside-monophosphate

to form a nucleoside-di-phosphate. Likewise a third phosphate group can also be attached to
the second forming nucleosides-tri-phosphate.
Primary structure of DNA
In deoxyribonucleic acids the nucleotides are joined by 3’-5’ phosphodiester bonds; in

other words each phosphate group (except those present at the end of chains) esterifies to the
3’ hydroxyl group of a pentose and to the 5’ hydroxyl group of the next pentose. Therefore the
polydeoxyribonucleotide chain consists of alternating deoxyribose and phosphate residues.
Secondary structure of DNA
DNA in solution state, takes the form of a secondary structure. Watson and Crick in 1953
proposed the secondary structure of DNA in the form of the famous double helix model for
which they shared the Nobel Prize in 1962 along with Wilkins. They worked out the double
helical model of DNA basing an the following observations made available to them.
a. It was known through base analyses that there is as much adenine as thymine and as
much guanine as cytosine (A/T and G/C = 1). Therefore, the sum of purines is equal to the
sum of pyrimidines (A+G = C+T). It is known as Chargaff’s rule.
b. X-ray diffraction studies (Wilkins, 1952), suggested a helical configuration.

According to this model, DNA has a double stranded structure where two
polydeoxyribonucleotide chains twisted around one another in a double helix. Both the heli
ces are held together by means of hydrogen bonds formed between the nitrogen bases. The
diameter of the DNA molecule is 20 A (2nm). The length of the DNA in one complete turn is
34A(3.4nm), which incorporates 10 base pairs. Therefore the distance between two adja
cent base pairs is 3.4 A
adenine thymine
H
Sugar phosphate
3.4 nm
backbones sugar
bases ---------- Sugar

Ac H cytosine
guanineo.x
two antiparallel I H.-Lc/Nx
znXc Xxn/h f Sugar
chains H-C | | ...0
sugar H 0.5 nm
Both the strands have sugar phosphate backbone and are antiparallel to one another.
The antiparallel nature is given by orientation of the deoxyribose sugarwhich is opposite in both
the strands. Therefore the 5th carbon atom of the sugar molecule, which is exposed at one end
of a strand (5' end), faces the 3rd carbon atom of the sugar in the opposite strand (3' end). The
strands are also complementary to each other. This nature is based on the purine-pyrimidine
links i.e. if one strand is having a purine base (adenine or guanine) other strand must have a
pyrimidine counterpart (cytosine or thymine) e.g. A = T and /G = C. In DNA the nucleosides are
joined by means of phosphodiester bonds.
RNA
RNA is a polynucleotide made of ribonucleotide units having ribose sugar, phosphoric acid
and one of the nitrogen bases (Adenine, Guanine, Cytosine, Uracil). It is single stranded.
Cellular RNAs are non-genetic and are of three types. DNA serves as the template for
the synthesis of these RNAs.
Messenger RNA (mRNA)
It is the RNA formed during the protein synthesis. Five to ten percent of cellular RNA is
of this type. The molecular weight of m RNA varies from 30000-1000000. It is short lived. DNA
transfers the genetic information to ribosome through this type of RNA during the protein
synthesis.
Ribosomal RNA (rRNA)

The most stable form of RNA in the cell is the r RNA. About 80% of cellular RNA is of this
type. The molecular weight of r RNA ranges from 40000-1000000. It may have some folds to
have a complex structure, r RNA units along with protein constitute the protein synthesizing
factory or the ribosome.
Transfer RNA (tRNA)
It is smallest form of RNA made of only 75
to 100 nucleotides. It is also known as the soluble
RNA. It forms about 10-15% of total cellular
RNA. The molecular weight of tRNA varies from
T'rC
25000-30000. It transfers the amino acids from loop
the cytoplasm to the ribosome.
In 1964 Holley gave the detailed structure
of tRNA through the ‘Clover leaf model’. In that
model it was proposed that tRNA has three loops
and a lump. The anticodon loop has the
complementary base sequence with respect to a
Anticodon loop
codon of mRNA facilitating the attachment oft RNA A simplified model of tRNA
with the iter. Other two hops aie TTC loop or
ribosomal binding loop and DHU loop or amino acyl synthetase binding loop. The 3’ end oft RNA
ends with CCA-OH, which acts as the amino acid attachment site. The other end ends with G.
8.5. ENZYMES :
Life, at its most basic level, is a chemical phenomenon or, more specifically, a biochemical
phenomenon. Living cells continuously carry out a large number of biochemical reactions to
sustain life process. Many of these reactions would occur too slowly or at imperceptible rates
unable to cope with the various activities associated with life. To overcome this, nature has
provided the living cells with powerful catalysts to greatly accelerate the rates of these biochemical
reactions. These biological catalysts are called enzymes.
In an enzyme catalyzed reaction, the reactant is called substrate and the product is
called product. For example, if A is converted into B by an enzyme catalyzed reaction, then A
is called the substrate of that enzyme and B is called the product.
A enzyme > B
catalyzed
Almost all enzymes catalyze reactions that are reversible. In that case which one is a
substrate and which one is a product is often arbitary. It depends upon the direction in which the
actual reaction is taking place in the cell. For example in the following reaction:
enzyme
AK B
catalyzed
if in the cell the reaction leads to the net production of B, then A is the substrate. But if
the reaction leads to the net production of A from B such as:
enzyme
B A
catalyzed
then B is the substrate of that enzyme. The enzyme may convert one or more substrates
into one or more products. Thus, the enzymes are accordingly said to catalyze monosubstrate,
bisubstrate or multisubstrate reactions.
Chemical Nature of Enzymes
The name “enzyme” was coined by Fredrich Wilhelm Kuhne in 1878. This name comes
from the Greek, “enzume” meaning “in yeast’. He emphasized that there is something in yeast,
which catalyzes the synthesis of ethanol from glucose, a process known as alcoholic fermentation.
However, Edward Buchner (1897) demonstrated that cell-free yeast extract can also carry out
the reactions of fermentation. Later, during 1905 - 1910, Arthur Harden and William Young
separated the cell-free yeast extract, by dialysis, into two fractions - a nondializable, heat labile
fraction which they named as zymase; and a dialyzable, heat stable fraction which they called
cozymase. It was later shown by others that zymase is a mixture of enzymes and that cozymase
is mixture of cofactors. The chemical nature of enzymes remained in dispute until 1926, when
James B. Sumner became successful in purifying and crystallizing the enzyme urease from
jack bean. His results established that the enzyme urease is a protein. Subsequently, John H.
Northrop and Wendell M. Stanley, purified and characterized a series of digestive enzymes.
They confirmed Sumner’s result and proved without doubt that enzymes are proteins. Northrop
and Stanley shared the 1947 Nobel Prize with Sumner for their work on enzymes. Since then
thousands of enzymes have been purified and characterized, and all enzymes are found to be
protein.
Until the 1980’s, all biological catalysts (enzymes) were believed to be proteins. However,
Tom Cech and Sidney Altman independently discovered that certain RNA molecules can be
effective catalysts. These RNA catalysts are known as ribozymes.
Although all enzymes are proteins made up of only amino acids, many enzymes depend
on the presence of smalll molecules termed as cofactors for their catalytic activity. In the
absence of cofactors such an enzyme is catalytically inactive. An enzyme plus cofactor complex
is called holoenzyme. An enzyme that has had its cofactor removed is called an apoenzyme.
The holoenzymes are catalytically active whereas apoenzymes are catatytically inactive.
Apoenzyme (inactive) + Cofactor = Holoenzyme (active)

Protein Nonprotein Complete
part of part of enzyme
enzyme enzyme
Cofactors may be of two groups: metal ions and small organic molecules. Many enzymes
require metal ion cofactors (also called metal ion activators) fortheir activity. A metal ion cofactor
may be transiently associated with the enzyme (e.g., Mg2+ requirement for hexokinase, puruvate
kinase etc) or is tightly bound to it (e.g., Zn2+ in carbonic anhydrase, Ni2+ in urease and Fe2+ in
catalase). An enzyme that has a tightly bound metal ion is known as a metalloenzyme. Cofactors
that are small organic molecules are called coenzymes. Coenzymes can be either transiently
associated with the enzyme, (e.g., NAD+/NADH in alcohol dehydrogenase and other
dehydrogenases, ATP in hexokinase etc) or are tightly bound to it. Tightly bound coenzymes
are called prosthetic groups (e.g., Fe-porphyrin in catalase, FAD/FADH2 in succinate
dehydragenase, biotin in pyruvate carboxylase etc).
Properties of Enzymes
Enzymes are biochemical catalysts. At this point it is necessary to refresh your mind as
to what catalysts are. Catalysts are chemical substances which in minute quantity accelerate
the rates of chemical reactions without themselves being altered, destroyed or used-up during
the course of the reaction and are recovered after the reaction is catalyzed. Going by this
definition, enzymes fall into the category of catalysts. However, enzymes (biological catalysts)
are very efficient catalysts, often far superior to ordinary chemical (non-biological) catalysts.
Enzymes differ from ordinary chemical catalysts in many other ways. All these are because of
their biological origin. The properties of enzymes and their differences or similarities with ordinary
chemical catalysts are discussed below.
Catalytic Power
Most of the reactions in biological systems do not take place in perceptible rates in the
absence of enzymes. Enzymes increase the rates of biochemical reactions by 106 to 1012 times
of the uncatalyzed reactions. For example, one molecule of carbonic anhydrase can hydrate
106 molecules of CO2 per second. This reaction is 107 times faster than the uncatalyzed reaction.
CO + H O <5rbonic anhydrase H m
Similarly, one molecule of catalase can decompose 105 molecules of H2O2 per second.
The enzyme catalase has iron in its active site which helps in the decomposition of H2O2. The
efficiency of catalase in decomposing H2O2 can be realized by comparing the decomposition of
H2O2 with iron salts. One mg of iron in catalase is as effective as 104 kg of inorganic iron in
decomposing H2O2.
catalase
2H2O2 ------------- > 2H2O + O2
These examples indicate the great catalytic power of enzymes compared with non-
biological catalysts.
Substrate Specificity
Enzymes are highly specific for the reactions they catalyze and for their choice of
substrates than that of chemical catalysts. They can discriminate between closely related
substances, i.e., they have high degree of substrate specificity. A modified substrate may not
be acted upon by the enzyme. For example, sucrase (also known as invertase) can hydrolyze
sucrose but not sucrose phosphate.
sucrase
Sucrose + H2O ---------------- * Glucose + Fructose
Similarly, the enzyme urease can hydrolyze urea to form ammonia and carbondioxide but cannot
hydrolyze a slightly modified form of urea (e.g., chlorinated form of urea).
urease
NH2-CO-NH2 + H2O ---------------- > 2NH3 + CO2
The above two enzymes show absolute specificity towards their respective substrates.
Some enzymes act on closely related substrates and catalyze reactions involving a
particular chemical group. For example, the enzyme hexokinase transfer phosphate group
from ATP to several different hexose sugars. Another example is the enzyme alcohol
dehydrogenase which catalyze the oxidation of ethanol as well as other alcohols. Such enzymes
exhibit group specificity.
A third group of enzymes exhibit stereo chemical specificity. These enzymes

discriminate between mirror images of the same substrates. For example, L-amino acid oxidase
catalyzes the oxidation of L-amino acids but does not act on its stereoisomer, D-amino acid.
Mild Reaction Conditions
Enzymes function in aqueous solutions under very mild conditions of temperature and
pH. There are exceptions, however. Some protein-digesting enzymes operate in vacuoles with
a pH near 4.0. And enzymes isolated from many thermophilic bacteria growing in hot springs
can remain active at temperatures close to 100°C. Most of the enzymes, however, catalyze
biochemical reactions under the conditions far milderthan those required for most of the chemical
reactions.
Enzymes, being protein in nature, are thermolabile. Most of the enzymes are denatured
and lose their activity beyond 40-45°C. At high temperature, the enzymes are inactivated probably
due to heat coagulation phenomenon or due to the change in the three dimentional structure of
enzyme protein.
Reversibility of Reaction
With very few exceptions, enzymes catalyze biochemical reactions which are reversible
in nature. Depending upon the cellular requirement, the reactions are catalyzed either in the
forward direction or in the backward direction. This is not the case with the chemical catalysts.
Enzymes like hexokinase and sucrase catalyze irreversible reactions. Carbonic anhydrase,
alcohol dehydrogenase, succinate dehydrogenase and many other enzymes catalyze reversible
reactions.
Capacity for Regulation
Enzymes regulate biochemical reactions to an extent not possible for chemical catalysts.
Enzymes follow several strategies to regulate biochemical reactions and metabolic pathways.
For example, enzymes can regulate metabolic pathways depending upon the requirement of
the final product of the pathway by the cell. If the final product of a metabolic pathway is not
required by the cell, then this product may inhibit the first enzyme of the pathway, thereby
preventing further formation of the product. This type of regulation is called feed back inhibition.
Factors Affecting Enzyme Activity
There are several factors that affect the rate of an enzyme catalyzed reaction as detailed
below:
Effect of Enzyme Concentration
At a fixed substrate concentration, an increase in enzyme concentration increases the

rate of an enzyme catalyzed reaction until the substrate concentration becomes the limiting
factor. When the substrate concentration is not limiting, the rate of an enzyme catalyzed reaction
is directly proportional to the enzyme concentration (Fig 8.1). The rate slows down when [S]
starts becoming the limiting factor. The rate remains unchanged at high [E] when [S] is the
limiting factor.
Effect of Substrate Concentration
At a fixed enzyme concentration, an increase in [S] is the limiting factor
substrate concentration increases the rate of an enzyme

catalyzed reaction until the enzyme concentration becomes
the limiting factor. When the enzyme concentration is not
limiting, the rate of an enzyme catalyzed reaction is directly
proportional to the substrate concentration (Fig.8.2). By
increasing [S], when [E] starts becoming the limiting factor,
the rate of the enzyme catalyzed reaction slows down. At
Enzyme concentration [E]
high [S], the rate remains unchanged because [E] becomes
Figure 8.1 : Plot of initial velocity, v
the limiting factor. versus enzyme concentration, [E] for
an enzyme-catalyzed reaction at a
fixed substrate concentration, [S]
Figure 8.2: Plot of initial velocity, v, versus substrate concentration, [S] for an enzyme-catalyzed
reaction at a fixed enzyme concentration, [EJ. Vmax is the maximal velocity of the reaction
when sustrate concentration is not limiting. Km, the Michaelic constant, is the value of [S]
which gives 1/2 Vmax. The curve of v versus [S] is part of a rectangular hyperbola.
Effect of pH
Enzymes, being proteins, are affected

by the changes in the pH of the reaction
medium. Most of the enzymes are, in fact,
active only within a narrow range of pH, typically
pH 5 to pH 9. The most favourable pH at which
an enzyme activity is the maximum is known
as the optimum pH for that enzyme. The
optimum pH value varies from enzyme to
enzyme. The pH affects the degree of ionization
of the side chains of the amino acid residues
of proteins and thereby their three dimensional
structure. Further more, ionization state of pH
amino acid side chains present in the active Fig.8.3 : The plot shows the variation of initial
velocity of an enzyme catalyzed reaction at
site of enzymes are responsible for the catalytic different pH value of the reaction mixture. The
activity of enzymes (see later in this shape of the plot and the optimum pH vary
from enzyme to enzyme.
chapter).The pH also affects the ionization
characteristics of the substrates and coenzymes, and thereby, their binding with the enzyme.
Thus pH of the reaction medium affects the catalytic activity of the enzyme. The catalytic activity
of the enzyme as a function of pH usually appears as a bell-shaped curve, (Fig.8.3).
Effect of Temperature
Like most of the chemical reactions,

the rate of an enzyme catalyzed reaction
increases with the increase in temperature of
the reaction medium. However, enzymes being
proteins are gradually denatured and lose their
activity at the temperature beyond 40 - 50°C.
Some enzymes, however, remain active even
at the temperature as high as 100°C. Each
enzyme has an optimum temperature at which
its activity is the maximum (Fig.8.4).
Effect of Inhibitors and Activators Figure 8.4 : The plot shows the effect of
temperature of the reaction mixture on the initial
Many molecules and ions, when velocity of an enzyme-catalyzed reaction. The
present in the reaction medium, affect the rate shape of the plot varies from enzyme to enzyme.
Some enzymes even show good activity at 90°C
of enzyme-catalyzed reactions. These and above.
substances bind to the enzyme or the enzyme
substrate complex, thereby, affecting the rate.
Substances which lower the reaction rate are called enzyme inhibitors and substances which
increase the rate are known as enzyme activators. Inhibitors and activators are very important
in the cellular regulation of enzymes.
Inhibitors can be classified as reversible or irreversible. Reversible inhibitors bind with

the enzyme by weak noncovalent bonds and can be removed by dialysis to restore the active
enzyme. On the other hand irreversible inhibitors bind with the enzyme by covalent bonds
and can not be removed from the enzyme by dialysis.
Mechanism of Enzyme Action

Enzymes, as explained before, acelerate the rates of biochemical reactions and show
great deal of substrate specificity. Therefore, any theory on the mechanism of enzymatic reaction
must take these two facts into account.
Activation Energy
The conversion of reactants to products in any chemical reaction is accompanied by
continuous change in energy. During the reaction pathway, the reactants pass through a transition
state. This transition state of the reactants has higher free energy than either the ground state
reactants or products. The difference in free energy between transition state and ground state
reactants is called the activation energy. Activation energy, thus, is the energy required to activate
the reactants to move them to the transition state. In the activation pathway, the transition state
has the maximum energy. As the reaction continues, the energy of the system decreases until
it reaches a new minimum in the products. The energy changes for a simple chemical reaction
as the function of the progress of the reaction (or reaction pathway) is graphically represented
in Figure 8.5.
The magnitude of the activation
energy influences the rate of the chemical
reaction - the higher the activation energy
(or energy barrier), the slower the reaction
rate. Catalysts speed up the reaction rate
by lowering the energy of activation required
for the reactants to reach the transition state.
Enzyme catalyzed reactions obey the same
laws of chemistry as the corresponding
uncatalyzed reactions. Similar to ordinary
chemical catalysts, enzymes also speed up
the rate of biochemical reactions by lowering
the energy of activation of the substrates to
reach the transition state. An enzyme lowers Fig. 8.5 : Plot shows the requirement of energy of
the activation energy by forming an enzyme activation for the enzyme catalyzed and uncatalyzed
reactions. Enzymes reduce the activation barrier for a
substrate complex and thereby increasing
reaction.
the reaction rate.
As shown in Figure 8.5, the difference in energy between the substrate and the product
is not altered by the enzyme. This difference in energy between the substrate and the product
determines the equilibrium point of the reaction. As with the chemical catalysts, enzymes do not
alter the equilibrium constant of the reaction they catalyze.
Formation of Enzyme-Substrate Complex
Enzyme catalyzes the conversion of the substrate molecule to form the product molecule.
To do this job of catalysis, the enzyme must interact with the substrate molecule. In fact, the first
step in an enzyme catalyzed reaction is the reversible binding of a substrate molecule (S) with
the enzyme molecule (E) to form an enzyme-substrate complex (ES) which then dissociates to
release the product molecule (P), and the enzyme becomes free.
E+ ES^^E + P
The free enzyme is then available to bind with another molecule of substrate to repeat
the reaction.
The site on the enzyme protein where the substrate binds and the catalysis occurs is
known as the active site of the enzyme. The active site takes up a relatively small portion of the
total volume of the enzyme. It is usually located in a cleft or pocket or a Pit in the folded three
dimensional structure of the enzyme protein molecule. The active site contains amino acid side
chains and/or cofactors that can function as catalysts. Common amino acid side chains present
in the active site are carboxylic (-COO-), amino (-NH2), sulfur (_S"), hydroxyl (-OH), imidazole
and other groups. The amino acid side chains present in the active site are different for different
enzymes. These amino acids in the active site need not be adjacent to one another in the linear
polypeptide. They are brought together into proximity by the folding of the linear protein molecule.
One or more of the amino acid side chains recognizes and binds the substrate with the enzyme
while other amino acid side chains catalyze the reaction once the substrate or substrates have
been bound. Thus the active site has substrate-binding site and catalytic site, which are
adjacent to each other in the active form of the enzyme. Sometimes the catalytic site is a part of
the substrate-binding site. The substrates are bound to the enzymes at the active site by one or
more of the relatively weak forces such as ionic bonds, hydrogen bonds, van der Waals attraction
and hydrophobic interactions.
Models for Enzyme-Substrate Complex
Based on the high specificity of binding of the substrate to the enzyme, two hypotheses
for the enzyme-substrate complex have been proposed:
Lock-and-Key hypothesis: Emil Fischer proposed this hypothesis in 1890 when the
chemical nature of the enzyme was not known. However, the experimental observations that
enzymes are very much specific to their substrate led him to propose the lock-and-key hypothesis.
He assumed that the substrate molecule must have complementary shape to fit closely with the
enzyme molecule in the same way as the key (substrate) fits into the lock (enzyme) as shown
in Figure 8.6. Some authors now prefer to rename the lock-and-key hypothesis as direct-fit
hypothesis for the reason you will be cleared in the following paragraph.
Active
Fig.8.6 : This shows the interaction of an enzyme (E) and a substrate (S), where the substrate fits
directly into the binding site of the enzyme to form ES complex. This is called lock-and-key mechanism
or direct fit mechanism.
Induced-Fit hypothesis: It is now well known that the three dimensional structure of
many enzymes are flexible. The binding of the substrate induces a conformational change in
the active site of the enzyme so that the substrate fits perfectly well with the enzyme to form the
ES complex (Fig.8.7). This was postulated by Daniel E. Koshland, Jr in 1958. Hexokinase is a
good example of an enzyme that exhibits this Substrate
type of conformational change (Fig. 8.8).
Catalysis
The details of the catalytic mechanism

differ from one type of enzyme to another.
But the facts discussed above are involved
in all enzyme catalysis. When E and S are
mixed, the S molecule comes into close
contact with the E molecule. A temporary Fig.8.7 : This shows the interaction of an enzyme (E)
and a substrate (S) where the substrate induces a
intermediate compound called ES complex conformational charge in the enzyme so that the
is formed. The S molecule is transformed into substrate can properly position itself on the enzyme to
form the ES complex. This is called induced fit
the P molecule by catalytic mechanisms which mechanism.
differ from enzyme to enzyme. The P moves
away from the E molecule. The E, now freed,
interacts with another S molecule to repeat
the process of catalysis.
Types of Enzymes
Enzymes are commonly named by

appending the suffix -ase to the name of the
substrate or the catalytic action of the
enzyme. Thus the enzyme which catalyzes
the hydrolysis of urea is named as urease
and the enzyme, which catalyzes the
oxidation of glucose is named as glucose
oxidase. But there are many enzyme names
which convey little or nothing about the nature
of the reactions they catalyze. For example,
the enzyme which catalyzes the
decomposition of H2O2 to H2O and O2 was
named as catalase, the name that tells
nothing about its nature or function. Many
enzymes are named even without the suffix -
ase. For example, the proteolytic enzyme
secreted by the pancreas is named as trypsin. Glucose—hexokinase complex
Fig.8.8 : This shows an example of induced-fit
With the discovery of large number of
hypothesis. The conformation of hexokinase changes
enzymes, their systematic nomenclature and markedly when it binds the substrate glucose. The two
lobes of the enzyme come closer together to surround
classification was needed, so that any given
the substrate molecule.
enzyme can be precisely identified. A scheme for the systematic functional classification and
nomenclature of enzymes was adopted in 1961 by the Enzyme Commission set up under the
auspices of the International Union of Biochemistry (IUB) and the International Union of Pure
and Applied Chemistry (IUPAC). The list of enzymes has since been modified, some enzymes
renamed and new enzymes added. At present there are about 3196 enzymes and the
responsibility of reviewing and adding new enzymes to the list now lies with the Nomenclature
Committee of the International Union of Biochemistry and Molecular Biology (NC- IUBMB).
Enzymes are now named and classified according to the nature of the biochemical
reaction they catalyze. The Commission on Enzymes has recognized six major classes of
enzymes basing on the type of reactions they catalyze.
Class 1. Oxidoreductases: These enzymes catalyze reactions in which one substrate is

oxidized and another substrate is reduced. Thus, these enzymes catalyze the transfer
of hydrogen, oxygen or electrons between the substrates for oxidation-reduction
reactions. The enzymes alcohol dehydrogenase and catalase belong to this class.
Class 2. Transferases: These are enzymes involved in the transfer of chemical groups such
as one-carbon groups (e.g., methyl group), aldehyde or ketonic groups, phosphoryl
groups etc from one substrate to another. The enzyme hexokinase and citrate
synthase belong to this class.
Class 3. Hydrolases: These enzymes catalyze the hydrolytic cleavage of C-O, C-N, C-C, P-
O and other single bonds. The enzymes sucrase, urease and phosphatase belong
to this class.
Class 4. Lyases: These enzymes catalyze the removal of groups, other than by hydrolysis or
oxidation-reduction reactions, often leaving a double bond. The enzymes fumarase
and isocitrate lyase belong to this class.
Class 5. Isomerases: These enzymes catalyze reactions involving intramolecular

rearrangement of groups in the substrate molecule to form a product which is a different
isomeric form of the substrate. The enzymes triose phosphate isomerase and
phosphoglycerate mutase belong to this class.
Class 6. Ligases (also known as Synthatases): These enzymes catalyze the joining or ligation
of two substrates at the expense of ATP (or other nucleoside triphosphates) hydrolysis.
The enzymes aminoacyl-tRNA synthetase and glutamine synthetase belong to
this class. Note here that some enzyme named as synthases (e.g. citrate synthase,
glutamate synthase) do not belong to this class.
SAMPLE QUESTIONS
1. Short Answer Type Questions :
A. Fill in the blanks :

1. D-glucose and L-glucose from a pair of-------------.
2. An aldehyde containing monosaccharide having six carbon atoms is generally called
as.
3. Inulin is found as a storage plysaccharide in the members offamily.
4. is known as imino acid.
5. The dervied aminoacids are also known asamino acids.
6. is the building block of nucleic acids.
7. The pentose sugar present in DNA is known as.
8. Butyric acid is the only fatty acid withnumber of carbons.
9. Tocopherols are known as Vitamins.
10. p -Carotene yields Vitamins.
B. Suggest one word expression for each of the following :

1. The polysaccharide found as reserve food in animal.
2. The compound rotating the plane of polarized light to the right.
3. The polysaccharide found in the exoskeleton of arthropods.
4. The branched strach is called as:
5. The secondary structure exhibited by silk protein.
6. A protein conformation having two or more subunits.
7. Compounds consisting of a N-base, pentose sugar and phosphoric acid.
8. Compounds obtained by esterification of alcohol group of glycerol with fatty acids.
C. Choose the correct option.

1. The name enzyme was coined by :
(a) Edward Buchner, (b) Arthuze Harden, (c) Fredrich Kunhe, (d) Names Summer
2. The first enzyme furified and crystalised :
(a) Urease, (b) Hexokinase, (c) Alcohol dehydrogenase, (d) Catalase.
3. Chemically ribozyme is.
(a) Protein, (b) RNA, (c) DNA, (d) Lipoprotein.
4. Which of the following is known as fruit sugar ?
(a) glucose (b) fructose (c) sucrose (d) maltose.
5. Which of the following elements is not present in nitrogenous bases found in nucleic
acids.
(a) Nitrogen (b) Hydrogen (c) Carbon (d) Phosphorous.
6. A nucleoside is a compound of
(a) N-base + sugar + phosphate (b) N-base + sugar
(c) N-base + phosphate (d) Sugar + phosphate.
7. Maltose is a disaccharide composed of
(a) D-Glucose & D-Glucose (b) D-Galactose & D-Glucose
(c) D-Glucose & D-fructose (d) D-Glucose and L-Glucose
8. Which of the following is a sulphur containing amino acids.
(a) methionine (b) Serine (c) Valine (d) Leucine
9. Name the hydroxy aminoacid from the followings
(a) Threonine (b) Tryptophan (c) Phenyl alanin (d) Valine.
10. Which one of the followings is a basic amino acid
(a) Lysine (b) Glycine (c) Tryptophan (d) Leucine.
11. Which one of the followings is an ectodermal protein
(a) Kertin (b) Antibodies (c) Storage proteins (d) Enzymes.
D. Write notes on :
I. Disaccharides. 2. Anomers. 3. Homopolysaccharides. 4. Mucopolysaccharides.
5. Quaternary structure of proteins. 6. Non-standard amino acids. 7. Non-protein amino
acids. 8. Classification of proteins based on shape. 9. Polyunsaturated fatty acids.
II. Chemical nature of enzyme. 12. Activation energy. 13. Activation energy. 14. Enzyme
substrate comtlex.
E. Long Answer Type Questions :

(a) Describe the structure of DNA.
(b) Describe the structures of different types of RNA.
(c) Describe the properties of enzymes indicating how they differ from chemical catalysts.
(d) Write the mechanism of enzyme actions.
CHAPTER
CELL DIVISION CYCLE
The most remarkable feature of the cells and the entire organism is their ability to
reproduce. The cells of an organism can grow only up to a limited extent and not beyond and,
therefore, growth can be accomplished only by cell division in multicellular organisms,. Every
organism starts its life from a single cell which divides and redivides to form tissues and organs.
The larger the organisms the more are the number of cells they have. There is no such thing
that the bigger animals or plants shall have large cells and the smaller ones have small cells.
The size of the cell is genetic character that seldom changes.
The cell after attaining a certain size

can duplicate itself. The simplest type of
cell reproduction is the division of a “parent”
cell into two “daughter” cells. This occurs
as part of the cell cycle, a series of events
that prepares a cell to divide followed by
the actual division process, called mitosis. Telophase
The eukaryotic cell cycle has at least four Anaphase

Metaphase '
stages (Fig.9.1). The chromosomes and
Prophase
the DNA they carry are copied during S
(Synthesis} phase. The M Phase is Fig. 9.1 : The interphase consisting of Gr S and G2
phase roughly doubles the cell mass. Replication of DNA
marked by changes at the chromosome
during S leaves the cell with double the number of
level, which is visible under microscope. chromosomes. In the mitotic (M) phase, the
chromosomes are evenly separated into two daughter
Both the M and S phases are preceded by
cells. The division process is completed after the division
two gap stages, the G1 phase and the G2 of cytoplasm into two equal halves.
phase respectively. During these gap
stages, m-RNA and proteins are made in sufficient quantity to be used to produce two equal
halves with complete chromosomal set-up in each.
9.1. MITOSIS (M Phase) :
While changes during interphase are biochemical and not visible, the M-Phase is clearly
visible under a microscope. This phase is divisible into Prophase, Metaphase, Anaphase and
Telophase, each phase being characterized by the morphological changes associated with
the chromosomes.
Cell Division Cycle I 379
g2 of interphase PROPHASE PROMETAPHASE

Centrosomes Chromatin Early mitotic Fragments Kinetochore
(with centriole pairs) (duplicated) of nuclear
Nonkinetochore
microtubules
Nucleolus Nuclear Plasma Chromosome, consisting Kinetochore

envelope membrane of two sister chromatids microtubule
METAPHASE ANAPHASE TELOPHASE AND CYTOKINESIS
Metaphase Cleavage Nucleolus

plate furrow
Nuclear
Daughter envelope
Spindle one spindle pole chromosomes forming
Fig 9.2 : Different stages of mitotic cell division (mitosis)
9.1.1. Prophase :
It is the longest phase of division. In the early part, the diffused chromatin of interphase
slowly condenses to form well-defined chromosomes. Later, the chromosomes are splitted
longitudinally to form two chromatids each. Both the chromatids are, however, associated at the
centromere region. Cytoplasmic microtubules are organized to form mitotic spindle near the
poles. In the final stage the nuclear membrane and nucleolus disappear and chromosomes are
found in the cytoplasm. In plants due to the complete absence of centriole, no astral arrangement
is seen and hence the spindle is called anastral spindle. In animals spindle formation is dependent
on centrioles, where each ‘centriole pair’ at the pole acts as mitotic center. Short microtubules
(astral rays) radiate from the centrioles and so the spindle is called astral spindle (aster means
star).
9.1.2. Metaphase :
This phase begins with the complete disappearance of the nuclear membrane. The
chromosomes get themselves arranged at the central part of the cell or the equatorial portion of
the spindle called as the equatorial plate or metaphasic plate. The orientation of the
chromosomes is such that their centromeres lie in the equatorial plate while the arms are
projected freely in the cytoplasm.
9.1.3. Anaphase :
In this phase, the centromere holding the chromatid pairs gets divided simultaneously.
Now the chromatids are called daughter chromosomes. Soon the daughter chromosomes repel
from each other and start moving in opposite direction towards the respective poles. The spindle
fibres help the movement of the chromosomes.
The spindle fibres are of three types viz. pole to pole, pole to centromere and centromere
to centromere. Together by contraction and expansion of spindle fibres of pole to centromere
and centromere to centromere respectively, the chromosomal movement is facilitated. During
the movement, the chromosome may assume the shape of V, J or I depending upon the
chromosome structure.
9.1.4. Telophase :
This phase starts after the full set of chromosomes reach the opposite poles. The spindle
fibres disappear and nuclear membranes are formed around the chromosome sets. The nucleolus
reappears in each nucleus forming two daughter nuclei in the cell.
At the end of M-phase, cytoplasm of the parent cell is divided into two halves by the
formation of a cell-plate in the middle in case of plant cells and simply by inward constrictions
on either side in case of animal cells. Some authors also call this division of cytoplasm as D-
phase but the process is called cytokinesis.
9.1.5. Amitosis :
There are many unicellular plants and animals that divide differently from the pattern
followed by mitosis. Such divisions go by the general name amitosis. In some algal and fungal
forms there is direct division of the cell nuclei. Also some old cells of higher plants show such
direct division of nuclei.
In some cases there is free nuclear division where the cells are not separated by cell
walls and several nuclei remain scattered in the cytoplasm of large cells. Such cells are called
coenocytic cells.
In yeast, the cells divide by a process called budding. Here the protoplast of parent cell
bulges out to which a daughter nucleus migrates later to form a daughter cell.
9.2. MEIOSIS :
This type of division is restricted to only the sex organs. In plants meiosis occurs in the
flowers in the anthers (male meiosis) and in the ovary (females meiosis) and in animals such
divisions occur in male and female gonads.
Meiosis is relatively long (a) (b)

Spermatogenesis Oogenesis
(sometimes very long) and complex
Germ cells (diploid) © (l||j) Germ cells (diploid)
where single diploid (2n) cells are
4— Mitosis 4
reduced to form haploid (n) cells or Spermatogonium (diploid) © Oogonium (diploid)
gametes. For example, if the somatic 1 Mitosis
Primary spermatocyte (xYYx)

cells of Allium cepa have 16 (diploid) /\ Meiosis
occurs
chromosomes in the nucleus, the meiotic secondary oocyte and
Secondary spermatocytes ( xY Yx ' polar body
products shall have 4 cells with 8 (haploid) n n (haploid)
I \ Meiosis II
chromosomes in each. All the sexually /l | \ occurs
Ootid and 3 polar bodies

reproducing plants and animals have this (haploid)
| c«4 I
type of cell division to produce gametes. i A A X I
Sperm cells if
The gametes of opposite sex (male and (haploid) Tj
Ovum
Ovum (egg)
(ec
®
(haploid)
female) unite to produce a zygotic cell,

which forms the first cell of a sporophyte.
A plant or an animal has a fixed number
Fig.9.3 : Meiosis (a) spermatogenesis,
of chromosomes in its nucleus and this (b) oogenesis in human
number is maintained for generations
through the process of meiosis, which reduce the number of chromosomes of the uniting gametes
to half before their union. The process of meiosis is completed through two major phases viz.
Meiosis - I and Meiosis-II.
9.2.1. Meiosis-I :
It consumes a lot of time and major events occur in this phase. This has been divided
into prophase-l, metaphase-l, anaphase-l and telophase-l with prophase-l taking the longest
duration among them. Prophase-l is sub-divided for convenience to Leptotene, Zygotene,
Pachytene, Diplotene and Diakinesis, based on the appearance of chromosomes during the
progress of meiosis. Each of the sub-stages has characteristic features of chromosomes, which
are normally clearly visible under microscope. Prophase-l is quickly followed by metaphase,
anaphase and telophase in succession to wind up the process of Meiosis-I resulting in two
cells. After a short gap, the cells enter the second phase of division, the Meiosis-ll that is more
or less similar to mitosis.
The end result is formation of 4 haploid cells from every meiocyte. Like mitosis, meiosis
- I is initiated only after S phase where the parental chromosomes are replicated to produce
identical sister chromatids. But the pattern of chromosome segregation in meiosis-l is dramatically
different from that in mitosis. The sequence is as follows in next page:
Prophase -1 :
Leptotene (Thin thread)
This is marked by an increase in nuclear volume. The chromosomes start to appear

clearly as a result of condensation and coiling of chromatin fibres. The appearance of
chromosomes here are like thin threads and hence the name. In some cases, there are certain
deeply stained regions along the length of the chromosome and such regions are called
‘chromomeres’. During this stage the nucleolus enlarges as RNA synthesis continues.
Zygotene (Yoked thread)
During this stage, the homologous chromosomes (one paternal and one maternal),
which are of identical size and structure pair in such a way that there is exact alignment of
portions of chromosomes including the genes. A cementing substance made of proteins help
binding the pair of chromosomes tightly. This pairing is called ‘synapsis’ and the cementing
material is called ‘synaptonemal complex’. The chromosomal pairs are called ‘bivalents’whose
number corresponds to the haploid chromosome number of any species.
Pachytene (Thick thread)
In this stage, the bivalents become more condensed and therefore thicker. In addition,
each chromosome becomes doubled and the bivalent turns to a ‘tetravalent’ with two paternal
sister chromatids and two maternal sister chromatids. Also in this stage, exchange of genetic
material occurs. This is made possible by the formation of a few breaks at identical site in the
chromatids. The broken segments then reunite with or without exchanges of chromatid segments.
The process of exchanges of

segments between non-sister
chromatids is of great genetic
consequence since it results in
reshuffling of parental genes
which are present in the
chromatids. This process is also
called ‘crossing over’.
Diplotene (Double thread)
With the condensation

process still continuing, the
tetravalents appear thicker. Now,
the pairing homologous units
undergo a process of repulsion and start moving apart. However, two non-sister chromatids are
held united at the points of exchanges. Such points are called chiasmata. It gives a characteristic
chromosomal configuration as given in the diagram.
Diakinesis (Double ending)
This stage is the last of pairing process and the end of prophase I. Here the chromosomes
appear very thick and they move away from each other and spread towards periphery. The
chiasmata found at the points of crossing over between chromatids undergo a process called
terminalization whereby some departing chromosomes are found held up only terminally as
shown in the diagram.
Telophase I and
Prophase I Metaphase I Anaphase I
Cytokinesis
Centrosome
(with centriole pair) Sister chromatids
remain attached
Centromere
Sister Chiasmata (with kinetochore)
chromatids
Spindle Metaphase
Homologous Homologous Cleavage

chromosomes chromosomes furrow
separate
Fragments Microtubule
of nuclear attached to
envelope kinetochore
Fig.9.6 : Stages of Meiosis I

This stage is also marked by the breakdown of the nucleolus and nuclear membrane
and organization of spindle at the poles.
Metaphase -1
Here the bivalent chromosomes align at the equatorial plate vegion of the spindle. In
contrast to mitosis, the centromeres of sister chromatids are adjacent to each other and oriented
in the same direction, while the centromeres of homologous chromosomes are pointed towards
opposite spindle poles. So, the microtubules from the same pole of the spindle attach to sister
chromatids, while microtubules from opposite poles attach to homologous chromosomes.
Anaphase -1
This phase is initiated after complete disruption of the chiasmata at which homologous
chromosomes are joined. The homologous chromosomes then separate while sister chromatids
remain joined at the centromeres.
Telophase - I
This marks the completion of meiosis and formation of two daughter cells that have
acquired one number of each homologous pair consisting of two sister chromatids.
9.2.2. Meiosis - II :
It is initiated immediately after cytokinesis (in some cases no cytokinesis occur at this
stage), before chromosomes have fully descended. In contrast to meiosis-l, this is just another
mitosis with prophase-ll, metaphase-ll, Anaphase-ll and Telophase-ll. At metaphase-ll, the
Prophase II Metaphase n Anaphase n Telophase II

Fig.9.5 : Metaphase, Anaphase, Telophase of Meiosis II (diagrammatic)
chromosomes align on the spindle with microtubules from opposite poles of the spindle attached
to the centromeres of sister chromatids. The link between the centromeres of sister chromatids
is broken in anaphase-ll and sister chromatids segregate to opposite poles. Cytokinesis occurs
after telophase-ll and now four haploid daughter cells are formed.
9.3. CONTROL OF CELL CYCLE :

One of the most exciting developments in contemporary cell biology is the discovery of
molecular mechanisms that control the progression of eukaryotic cells through the cell cycles
(mitotic and meiotic). It is now well established that there is a conserved set of protein kinases
in all eukaryotic cells which is involved in the process of triggering major cell cycle transitions.
There is in-built genetic mechanisms that prevent entry into next phase of the cell cycle until the
events of the earlier phase is completed.
Scientists have discovered signal systems that regulate progression through specific
control points in the division cycles. There are also checkpoints and feedback controls to
coordinate events during the progress of cell cycle. For example, once DNA replication is over,
initiation of a new S phase is prevented until the cell completes mitosis.
There are some drugs e.g. colchicine, which prevents the formation of spindle fibres
and thereby not allowing the chromosomes to move to opposite poles. This results in a cell with
double the number of chromosomes. Hence, the drug finds application is inducing polyploidy
(cells with multiple chromosome number).
9.4. SIGNIFICANCE OF CELL DIVISIONS :
9.4.1. Mitosis :
1. Growth: Mitotic cell division adds new cells and thus helps in growth of multicellular
organisms.
2. Vegitative and asexual propagation : This mode of reproduction is common for unicellular
organisms where the mitotic division helps in increasing the number of organisms.
Vegetative propagation in plants by tubers, buds and bulbils are also due to mitotic
division.
3. Tissue repair: Dead and damaged tissues are repaired by replacing dead cells with new
cells arising from mitotic divisions.
9.4.2. Meiosis :
1. Meiosis results in formation of gametes involved in sexual reproduction.
2. Crossing over between homologous chromosomes during prophase-1 of meiosis results
in new genetic recombinations.
3. It also helps to maintain the somatic chromosome number.
SAMPLE QUESTIONS
A. Very short type questions :
Choose the correct word :
1. During cell division, the replication of DNA occurs during
(a) M-phase, (b) S-phase (c) G-phase (d) Prophase
2. In male flowers, meiosis is seen in
(a) sepals, (b) androecium (c) petals, (d) gynoecium.
3. From every meiocyte the spores formed is (are) :
(a) One (b) two (c) four (d) eight
Express in one word
1. The pairing of homologous chromosome.
2. The points of exchange of chromosome segments.
3. The process of end of exchange of chromosomal segments.
4. The process of division of cytoplasm into two cells.
5. Cells with multiple chromosome numbers.
Fill in the Blanks
1. can disrupt spindle fibre and is also used to induce polyploidy.
2. Duringthe chromosomes are aligned at the equatiocial plate.
3. Where the cells are not separated by cell walls and nuclei lie scattered are called
condition.
4. In yeasts, the cells divide by.
5. During pachytenechromosomes pair.
B. Short type Questions.
1. Write short notes on
(a) Control of cell cycle, (b) Chromosomal pairing, (c) S-phase of cell cycle.
(d) Anaphase of mitosis, (e) Amitosis.
C. Long Type Questions.
1. Describe the phrophase -I of meiosis with suitable diagrams. What is the significance
of this type of division ?
2. Give an account of different phases a somatic cell undergoes during division process.
3. What is the significance of mitosis ? Give details of the phases in between two
successive M-phases.
4. Give major points of comparision between mitosis and meosis.
UNIMV : PLANT PHYSIOLOGY
CHAPTER
TRANSPORT IN PLANTS
10
10.1. MOVEMENT OF WATER, NUTRIENTS AND GASES
Plants require water, mineral nutrients, gases such as carbon dioxide and oxygen, and
sun light for their normal growth, development, reproduction and for survival. Generally, plants
absorb water and mineral nutrients from the soil by their highly ramified root system. These
absorbed water and mineral nutrients then move upward in the plant body through the xylem
tissue reaching almost all parts of the plant including the growing tip of a tall tree which may be
sometimes more than 370ft high. A large proportion of the absorbed water is lost to the
atmosphere in vapour form through the stomata present in leaves and young stem by a process
called transpiration. On the other hand, atmospheric C02 enters the leaves through the stomata.
Leaves fix the C02 into simple sugars using the energy of the sun in a complex process called
photosynthesis. Water and mineral nutrients have a role in this process. Photosynthates produced
by the leaves are transported both upward and downward direction by the phloem tissue reaching
different parts of the plant including the growing tip of the shoot and root where these are
utilized for the life processes. Photosynthates are also transported to the storage organ from
where these are later re-transported in all directions. Gases like CO2 for photosynthesis and O2
for respiration enter the plant by diffusion in the gaseous state and then transported within the
plant body both in gaseous and dissolved state. Like water in the vapour form, CO2 and O2 also
diffuse out of the leaves through the stomata under different situations. These transport of
substances involving the plant is shown in Figure 10.1.
From the above paragraph, it is clear that materials absorbed or produced by different
organs of the plant are transported to other parts of the plant and such transportation can be
upward, downward or lateral depending upon the type of material transported and tissue involved.
Transport in plants can occur in 3 levels: (1) Cellular transport - which involves the single cell,
e.g., uptake of water and mineral nutrients from soil solution into the cell, and movement of
water from leaf cells to the intercellular spaces, through the plasma membrane; (2) Cell to cell
transport - which probably takes place mostly by diffusion through plasmodesmata, e.g., water
and mineral ion transport between cortical cells of root, and transport of substances by an
active process requiring expenditure of metabolic energy as in case of phloem loading and
unloading during sugar transport. Both these transport processes are called short-distance
transport. (3) Long-distance transport - it includes transport of substances between the
roots and leaves, e.g., upward transport of water and mineral nutrients through the xylem, and
both downward and upward transport of organic and inorganic substances through the phloem.
Transport of substances within the plant body takes place in the dissolved state in the
medium of water. Plants continuously absorb water from the soil and lose a large portion of the
absorbed water to the atmosphere as water vapours. This continuous flow of water from soil to
the atmosphere through the plant body is what is known as the soil-plant-atmosphere-
continuum or SPAC. The upward flow of water in the xylem and downward flow of water in the
phloem distributes inorganic and organic nutrients respectively throughout the plant body. But
how does this water movement take place from soil to plant, within the plant up-hill and from
plant to the atmosphere? What is the driving force for this up-hill water movement? What is the
mechanism of phloem transport? While searching answers to these questions, we will find a
well coordinated physiological interdependence between these transport processes in plants.
Fig.10.1 : Uptake, transport and removal of substances in a plant.
10.2. SHORT DISTANCE TRANSPORT :
Movement of water, gases and dissolved substances into the cell from the environment
and from the cell to the environment is very important for cellular processes. Equally important
is the cell to cell movement of water and other substances within the plant. The barrier to such
movement is imposed by the cell membrane; water and the dissolved substances must move
across it to make transport effective. How do these substances move across the cell membrane?
Transport in Plants I 389
Some substances of biological importance move into the cell or out of it by simple diffusion
which is a passive process occurring down the concentration gradient of the substance. Some
proteins present in the cell membrane also mediate the transport of substances either passively
down the concentration gradient or actively against the concentration gradient using metabolic
energy. The extent to which membrane allows the movement of substances across it is called
membrane permeability, which is different for different ions and molecules.
10.2.1. Diffusion
Molecules and ions in solution are in constant random motion colliding with one another
also randomly. This random motion, however, results in net movement of molecules from one
region in solution to another. Diffusion is the spontaneous movement of molecules from region
of high concentration to the region of low concentration, i.e., down the chemical potential gradient.
For example, if some salt crystals are placed in the bottom of a beaker containing water, after
sometime the salt crystal become dissolved in water and uniformly distributed throughout the
medium (Fig. 10.2). Diffusion is a passive process, and is the most effective mode of transport
of water and substances dissolved in it across the cell membrane (Fig. 10.3) and also in the cell
cytosol. Diffusion of water across a selectively permeable barrier, such as a cell membrane, is
called osmosis, which will be discussed later in the chapter. The rate of diffusion is called as
flux density, which is the amount of a substance crossing a unit cross-sectional area per unit
time. Diffusion coefficient is a characteristic of a substance; it is a measure of how easily a
substance moves through a particular medium. Diffusion coefficient is inversely proportional to
molecular size and is dependent upon the nature of the medium and its temperature. Diffusion
rate increases with increase in temperature.
There are some transmembrane proteins called channels which mediate the passive
transport of solutes across the membrane. These channel proteins form a transmembrane
pore, the interior being lined with surface charges, through which solutes diffuse down their
concentration gradient (Fig. 10.3). The size of the pore and the nature of surface charges on its
interior lining make the channel very specific to solutes. Transport through channels is passive,
responsible mainly for the diffusion of ions and water. Diffusion through channels is faster than
the unaided simple diffusion through the lipid bilayer of the membrane. The channel pore is
regulated by a structure called gates which open and close the pore in response to signals
received from hormones, light, chemical modification of the protein (e.g., phosphorylation) and
membrane potential difference.
10.2.2. Facilitated diffusion
Facilitated diffusion is passive transport of solutes across a membrane mediated by a

transmembrane protein called carrier. Unlike channel proteins, the carrier proteins do not form
transmembrane pores through which diffusion of solutes could occur. Rather the solute to be
transported is initially bound to a specific site on the carrier protein which, in turn, releases the
solute on the other side of the membrane without the expenditure of metabolic energy. Binding
causes conformational change in the carrier protein which helps release the solute on the other
side of the membrane (Fig. 10.3). The presence of specific binding site makes the carrier
protein highiy specific for a particular solute to be transported across the membrane. In the
facilitated diffusion system, the net flux of the solute is down a chemical potential gradient
similar to simple diffusion. Transport of solutes across the cell membrane by facilitated diffusion
is faster than those expected for simple diffusion. The carriers exhibit a high degree of selectivity
for certain type of solutes. They become saturated when external concentration of solute
transported is raised sufficiently.
10.2.3. Active transport
The movement of solutes against a concentration gradient carried out by membrane

proteins using metabolic energy is called active transport. This can be either primary active
transport or secondary active transport depending upon the way energy is used. Membrane
proteins carrying out primary active transport hydrolyse ATP and use the released energy for
the transport of solutes (Fig. 10.3). These carrier proteins are called pumps. On the other
hand, carrier proteins carrying out secondary active transport use energy of the proton (H+)
gradient formed by a different process to transport solutes. Along with the transport of solutes,
proton is also transported down its concentration gradient and this process is known as
cotransport. There are two major types of cotransport: symport and antiport. When the proton
and the solute move in the same direction through the membrane, it is called symport. Antiports
move the proton and the solute in opposite direction (Fig. 10.4). When a solute is transported
across the cell membrane by a membrane protein independent of other solutes, the process is
called uniport.
Fig.10. 4 : Hypothetical model of cotransport - symport and antiport.
10.3. PLANT WATER RELATION
10.3.1. Imbibition
Imbibition is a physical process mainly concerned with adsorption of water. If a living

(e.g seed) or a dead plant (eg. dry wood) material is kept in water, it absorbs water and swells
up considerably leading to increase in volume. These substances (seeds, dry wood etc) are
called imbibants. The liquid (water) which is absorbed is termed as imbibed substance and the
phenomenon is referred to as imbibition. Imbibition may be defined as a physical process in
which living or dead materials take up water or liquid mainly by adsorption due to the presence
of hydrophilic colloids inside them through the submicroscopic capillaries present on their
general surface of the body. In plants, imbibition of water takes place by the constituents of cell
wall and protoplasm such as carbohydrates, proteins etc.
Conditions necessary for imbibition
(i) The existence of a diffusion pressure gradient between the imbibant and the
substance imbibed.
(ii) The existence of certain affinity between components of the imbibant and the imbibed
substance.
Dry plant materials and seeds possess too much negative water potential. As a result
water moves into them, when the plant materials are placed in water. The movement of water
into plant materials continues till a dynamic equilibrium is attained. An imbibant does not
necessarily imbibe all kinds of liquids. For example, dry plant materials immersed in ether do
not swell appreciably. However, rubber, a plant product does imbibe in ether and swell appreciably
if submerged in it. On the other hand rubber does not imbibe water. This shows, there exists
some affinity or attractive force between the imbibant (rubber) and the liquid ether. A considerable
amount of materials such as proteins, carbohydrates etc. occur as hydrophillic colloids inside
the cells. They have a strong affinity for water.
Imbibition Pressure :
It represents the pressure that an imbibant develops when submerged in water. This
pressure can be of tremendous magnitude. This fact becomes clear from the splitting of rock
brought about by inserting dry wooden stakes in the crevices of rock and soaking them with
water. Why does rock split ? Because too much imbibition pressure develops due to imbibition.
The imbibitional pressure also helps in breaking soil profiles by germinating seeds.
Factors affecting the rate of imbibition :
(i) Temperature : The rate of imbibition increases with the increase in temperature.
(ii) Concentration of the Solute : The presence of solutes in water affects the rate of
imbibition. The rate is more in pure water than in a solution. Increase in concentration
of the solute decreases imbibition. Imbibition totally ceases at a very high
concentration of solutes in external solution.
Biological importance of imbibition :
(i) Imbibition plays a key role in the initial stage of water absorption by the roots.
(ii) Imbibition initiates seed germination.
(iii) The imbibition force is useful in adhering water to the walls of xylem elements.
(iv) It helps fruits to retain water.
(v) It also plays a major role in young and actively growing tissues.
10.3.2. Water Potential
The water molecules possess free energy. The free energy is the energy of a system
available for doing work. Thus it is the energy that determines the direction in which physical
and chemical changes would occur. The chemical potential is the free energy per mole of any
substance. Chemical potential of water is of great importance in explaining movement of water

from soil to plant and within plant. Water potential may be defined as the difference in free
energy per mole, between pure water and osmotically constrained, matrically bound, or
pressurized water (e.g., solution) at the same temperature and pressure. Water potential is
denoted by the symbol v (Psi, a Greek letter) and is measured in terms of pressure e.g., in bars
or atmospheres or in megapascal (MPa).
The water potential of pure water is arbitarily set at zero. When a solute is added to pure
water, the water potential becomes negative as the free energy gets decreased. Thus the
water potential of all solutions is always less than zero (a negative value). When pure water is
compressed or heated the water potential becomes positive as the free energy increases. A
difference in water potential between two regions determines the movement of water. Water
moves from higher potential to lower potential. For example, if two regions (A& B) in an aqueous
system have water potentials vA and vB respectively, the difference in water potential will be :
Ary = v - v If vA is greater than v then Av will be positive and the water will move from A to
B region. If vB is greater than vA, Av will be negative and water will move from B to A.
If the two systems having different water potentials are separated by a semipermeable
membrane, the movement of water molecules always takes place from the system having higher
water potential (dilute solution) towards the system having lower water potential (concentrated
solution). The movement of water will continue till the water potentials of the two systems become
equal and a stage of equilibrium is reached. At this stage, the net movement of water molecules will
cease.
Components of water potential:
The water potential (v) of a living cell has three major component potentials such as
osmotic or solute potential (vs), pressure potential (v ) and matric potential (vm) Water
potential of a solution is actually the sum of all the above three potentials.
V = Vs + Vp +
(a) Solute potential (vs)
This is due to the presence of solutes in a solution. Solute potential is also otherwise
known as osmotic potential. The presence of solute in water lowers the value of water potential.
With increase in solute concentration, the value of solute potential decreases further. The value
of solute potential of a solution is same as that of osmotic pressure of that solution but with a
negative sign . For example, if osmotic presure is 0.5 atmosphere, then vs is -0.5 atmosphere
of the same solution.
(b) Pressure potential (y ):

The term pressure potential (y ) is the hydrostatic pressure that the protoplasm exerts
on the cell wall due to osmotic entry of water into the cell. It is the actual pressure exerted and
has positive value. It increases the free energy of water and this raises water potential (y). It is
equivalent to turgor pressure (TP).
(c) Matric Potential (ym):

The term matric (pl. matrices) is used for such surfaces which can adsorb water molecules,
e.g., cell walls, colloidal substances present in protoplasm, and soil particles etc. Matric potential
(ym) is the component of water potential influenced by the presence of a matrices in the solution
and has negative value. The in case of plant tissues and cells is often neglected because of
its insignificant low numerical value. Thus the equation can be written in simplified form as
follows:
V=VS + Vp
i.e., the water potential of a plant cell or any solution is the sum of solute potential and
pressure potential. When a cell is fully turgid, its water potential is the highest (=zero), so vs =
w (remember, w has negative value). When a cell is flaccid, the pressure potential is zero, so
V=V . The relationship between water potential and its components are presented in Figure
10.5.
Relative Cell Volume

Fig.10.5 : Relation between cell water potential (v) and its components, solute potential (vs) and pressure
potential (\|/p), and relative cell volume. This diagram with thermodynamic terminology is the modified version
of Fig. 10.8. Note that unlike as in Fig. 10.8., in this figure the values of y and vshave negative sign.
10.3.3. Osmosis
Osmosis is a physical process and is considered as a special type of diffusion. In osmosis,

only the solvent molecules move from their region of higher concentration to the region of their
lower concentration across a semipermeable membrane.
If there are two sugar solutions, solution A having greater concentration than solution B
and they are separated by a semipermeable membrane, then water will move from B to A as
there are more number of water molecules in B than that of A. This spontaneous movement of
water molecules from B to A is caused due to the phenomenon of “osmosis”. Thus, osmosis
can be defined as the movement of water (or any solvent) from a solution of lower concentration
to a solution of higher concentration when both the solutions are separated by a semipermeable
membrane.
Such membranes which only allow passage of solvent molecules (water) and do not
allow solute molecules to pass through it are called semipermeable membrane. Parchment
paper, fish bladder, white membrane of eggs, animals bladder etc. are the examples of
semipermeable membrane.
Osmosis can be demonstrated by a simple

experiment in the laboratory. Take a long stemmed thistle
funnel. Close the mouth of the funnel by stretching
parchment paper across it. Take sucrose solution in the
inverted thistle funnel and note the level of sucrose
solution in the stem of it. Now place the inverted thistle
funnel containing the solution in a beaker of water in a
vertical manner with the help of a stand as shown in the
Figure 10.6. Initially keep the height of sucrose solution
in the stem of the funnel and the height of water in the
beaker at the same level. After sometime the level of
the solution in the stem of thistle funnel will rise. This
rise of solution in the stem of thistle funnel is due to the
entry of water (solvent) molecules from the beaker into
the thistle funnel across parchment paper which is a
semipermeable membrane.
The pressure which develops in a solution when it is separated from its pure solvent by
a semipermeable membrane under ideal conditions of osmosis is called osmotic pressure. It
may be defined as the actual pressure which may be applied to the solution, when the solution
is separated from its pure solvent (water) by means of a semipermeable membrane, in order to
prevent the inflow of solvent to the solution. Osmotic pressure is measured in terms of atmosphere
or bars or megapascal (MPa) and is denoted by the symbol it. It is directly related to the
concentration of the solute; more the solute particle, more is the osmotic pressure. Increase in
temperature increases the osmotic pressure of the solution.
If a living plant cell or tissue is placed in water or hypotonic solution (whose osmotic
pressure is lower than that of cell sap), water enters into the cell by osmosis. This process is
called as endosmosis. As a result of entry of the water into the cell sap, a pressure is developed
inside the cell which presses the protoplasm aganist the cell wall and the cell becomes turgid.
This pressure is called as turgor pressure.
Similarly if a living plant cell or tissue is placed in a hypertonic solution (whose osmotic
pressure is higher than that of cell sap), the water comes out of the cell sap into outer solution
and the cell becomes flaccid. This process is called exosmosis.
Osmosis is of immense importance to plants as described as below.
(i) Large quantities of water are absorbed by root and root hairs from soil by osmosis.
(ii) The movement and distribution of water across the cells of the plant takes place by
the process of osmosis.
(iii) Endosmosis and exosmosis are responsible for opening and closing of the stomata.
The turgor of guard cells is absolutely essential for opening of stomata.
(iv) The form and shape of many cells and the keeping of the plasmamembrane near
the cell wall are dependent upon osmotic phenomena.
(v) High osmotic concentration increases the resistance of plants to freezing temperature
and desiccation.
(vi) In lower plants as well as in leaves and young stems of vascular plants, turgor
pressure provides mechanical strength.
(vii) Growth of young cells is brought about by the osmotic pressure and turgor pressure
of these cells.
(viii) Many plant movements involve changes in turgor which are brought about by
osmosis.
(ix) The various cell organelles such as chloroplasts, mitochondria etc. collapse if they
are not able to maintain a proper osmotic concentration of solutes.
Osmotic quantities of a plant cell and their relationship :
Osmotic pressure, turgor pressure and diffusion pressure deficit are the three osmotic
quantities of a plant cell because they control the osmotic behaviour of the cell.
Osmotic Pressure (OP)
Osmotic pressure of a solution (in water) is defined as the actual pressure which is to be
applied to it in order to prevent any inflow of water when the solution is kept separated from
pure water by a semipermeable membrane.
Turgor Pressure (TP)
When a plant cell is placed in water, water enters into the cell due to endosmosis. As
soon as the water enters into the cell, it exerts a pressure on cell inclusions and organelles and
ultimately on the cell wall. This pressure which develops in the cell wall due to osmotic entry of
water is called turgor pressure. The turgor pressure is variable. It is maximum when the cell is
fully turgid and is zero when the cell is flaccid.
Due to increase in turgor pressure, the cell wall stretches to-wards outside. Since the
cell wall provides a definite shape to the cell and is elastic in nature, it also exerts a pressure on
cell sap in opposite direction, equal to turgor pressure. The pressure exerted by the cell wall on
the cell sap is called wall pressure.(Figure 10.3) The wall pressure resists turgor pressure and
prevents bursting of cell wall.
Diffusion Pressure Deficit (DPD)
Liquids have diffusion pressure. A pure solvent is supposed to have maximum diffusion
pressure. When certain solute particles are added to the pure solvent, the diffusion pressure of
the solvent molecules in the resulting solution is decreased. The amount by which the diffusion
pressure of the molecules of solvent in a solution is lower than that in pure solvent at the same
temperature and atmospheric pressure is called the diffusion pressure deficit (DPD). Suppose
the diffusion pressure of the solvent molecules is X atmosphere and diffusion pressure of solvent
molecules in solution is Y atmosphere. Then the diffusion pressure deficit of the solvent molecules
in solution will be (X-Y) atmosphere. DPD is increased by the addition of solute, lowering of
temperature and pressure. The DPD of any cell is the measure of water absorbing capacity of
that cell. It is also called suction pressure. Thus suction pressure is a measure of the ability of
a cell to absorb water.
Each and every cell has certain values of TP, OP and DPD. When a cell is fully turgid, its
DPD becomes zero as it cannot absorb any more water. But at this stage the cell has OP and
TP because the cell contains dissolved solutes and their (OP, TP) values can not be zero.
These three quantities i.e. OP, TP and DPD are related in a plant cell as: D P D = OP - TP.
When a cell is placed in a hypertonic solution, the water from the cell cytoplasm goes
out by the process of exosmosis resulting in increase in the OP and decrease in TP of cell
cytoplasm. As a result of ex-osmosis, the cytoplasm contracts and moves away from the cell
wall. Such a cell is called plasmolysed cell and this stage as flaccid stage. When the cell
becomes completely plasmolysed, at that time the TP of the cell is reduced to zero. At that
stage, DPD = OP.
When a cell is placed in pure water, it becomes fully turgid, its DPD become zero, because
the cell no longer can absorb water. At that stage OP = TP. The relation of DPD, TP, Op and the
volume of the cell is expressed in Fig. 10.8.
Fig. 10.8 : Relationship between Diffusion Pressure Deficit (DPD), Osmotic Pressure (OP) and Turgor
Pressure (TP) in a cell. The dashed lines represent extrapolated values. See Fig. 10.5 for the differences in
the terminology.
10.3.4. Plamolysis
If a living plant cell containing sap is immersed in a hypertonic solution, then exosmosis
will take place, i.e. water will come out of the cell sap through the cell membrane into the outer
solution. Loss of water from the cell contents causes contraction of the protoplasm which moves
away from the cell wall and form an irregular mass at the centre or in one corner of the cell. This
phenonenon of shrinkage of the protoplasm which moves away from the cell wall by the influence
of certain hypertonic solution is called plasmolysis.
The stage at which the first sign of shrinkage of the cell contents from the cell wall
becomes detectable is referred to as incipient plasmolysis. The space in between the cell wall
and the cell membrane contains the hypertonic solution.
The various stages of plasmolysis can be seen under microscope (Fig. 10.9). Plasmolysis
is easily observed in cells containing colored protoplast (eg., epidermal cells of Rhoeo discolor)
since the presence of colors makes the shrinking protoplast easy to observe.
If a plasmolysed cell is immersed in pure water or in a hypotonic solution, endosmosis

takes place. The protoplasm and the cell as a whole attain their original shape and size. This
phenomenon is called deplasmolysis. It is the reverse of plasmolysis.
The importance and applications of plamolysis are:
(i) It signifies the semipermeable nature of the plasma membrane.
(ii) The appropiate osmotic concentration of cell sap and consequently the osmotic
pressure can be determined by plasmolysis.
(iii) It determines the living nature of the cell; since no plasmolysis can occur in dead
cells due to absence of semipermeable cytoplasmic membrane.
(iv) It is used for preservation of jams, jelly, prickles from the growth of fungi and bacteria
by the addition of concentrated sugar solutions.In concentrated sugar solution, the
organism will plasmolyse and die.
(v) The phenomenon is utilised in salting of meat and fishes to keep them unspoiled for
some period.
(vi) The phenomenon of deplasmolysis proves the healthy nature of the cell.
10.4. LONG DISTANCE TRANSPORT
10.4.1. Absorption of Water
The movement of water from the soil through the unicellular root hair and cells of epiblema
upto the metaxylem of root via cells of cortex, endoderims, pericycle etc. is defined as absorption
of water.
Importance of water in plant life :
Water plays a vital role in plant life which may be discussed as follows :
(i) Nearly 80% of the fresh weight of the plant tissues is comprised of water.
(ii) Water is absolutely essential for the protoplasm. The hydration of the protoplasm is
essential for its proper organisation and correct functioning of the cell organelles.
(iii) Water serves as a medium for the movement of various dissolved substances like
gases, minerals, organic solutes etc. in the xylem and phloem tissues.
(iv) Water takes direct part in many metabolic reactions taking place in the cell viz.
photolysis of water during photosynthesis, as reactant with hydrolytic enzymes.
(v) Absorption of water compensates the water loss by the plants caused due to
transpiration. Transpiration helps in thermoregulation in plants.
(vi) Water stabilizes structural organisation of a number of biomolecules.

(vii) Water molecules form shells around electrolytes, ions and hydrophilic
nonelectrolytes. This provides them sufficient space to function independently.
Availability of soil water
Plants absorb water from the soil by means of root hairs. The main source of water in
soil is rainfall. The total amount of water present in the soil is termed as holard. Out of this, the
available water to the plants is called the chesard and which can not be absorbed is termed as
echard. When rain falls on soil surface, a part of water drains away. It is known as run-away water
which is not available to plants. A part of rain water percolates downwards through large pores
between the soil particles under the influence of gravity which is called gravitational water. It
accumulates in the water table much below the reach of root system. This water is of no use to the
plants. However, a good amount of water is retained by the soil particles and is known as field
capacity moisture. This water may be present in three forms. Capillary water, hygroscopic
water and chemically combined water. Water which fills the spaces between noncolloidal soil
particles is known as capillary water. It is the available water for the plants. Roots and root hairs
enter into the capillaries of the soil particles to absorb this water. Water which is held by soil
particles of colloidal complex due to adhesive force constitutes hygroscopic water. Hygroscopic
water is of no use to plants. A small portion of water is chemically bound with the soil elements,
it mostly occurs in the form of oxides of aluminium, iron, silicon etc. This water is practically not
available to plants.
Water absorbing organs of the plant
Roots are the main water absorbing organs of the land plants and floating hydrophytes.
Certain epiphytic plants absorb water from atmosphere by their hygroscopic hanging roots
containing a special tissue called velamen. A root consists of five distinct regions based on their
function : root cap, meristematic zone or zone off cell division, zone of cell elongation, root hair
zone and zone of maturation (Fig.10.10).
Root cap : It is a multicellular cap like structure present at the tip of the root. It protects
the growing point of the root. Water of soil solution can not enter through root cap.
Meristematic zone : It lies just behind the root cap. It consists of small compactly arranged
thin walled isodiametric cells having conspicuous protoplast. It adds new cells to the root.
Absorption of water is restricted in this region because of dense protoplasm and lack of xylem
elements.
Zone of cell elongation : It lies behind the meristematic region. The zone consists of cells
which are elongating and is responsible for the increase in length of the root. Very slow entry of
water takes place in this region.
Root hair zone : It occurs just above the zone of cell elongation. Xylem and phloem
are well developed in this zone. This zone has thousand of root hairs. Maximum absorption
of water take place in this zone. Root hairs are tubular hair like extension of epiblema cells
which are closed at its tip. The root hairs project almost at right angles to the long axis of
the piliferous cells. Root hairs are meant for absorption of water. They enter into the
capillaries of soil particles. Due to high concentration of their cell sap and permeability of
cell wall and cell membrane, they draw water from the soil.
Zone of maturation : The rest of the root lying above root hair zone consists of mature
cells which impeds water uptake.
Mechanism of water absorption :
The absorption of water takes place by active and passive processes. In active process,
water is absorbed by the force developed in the root system. Active absorption generally takes
place in slowly transpiring and well-watered plants. In passive absorption process, the forces
responsible for the absorption of water develop in the shoot system, which are ultimately
transmitted to the root system. The roots play a passive role in this mechanism. Passive
absorption is, generally found in rapidly transpiring and ill-watered plants.
Active absorption of water: Two types of theories such as osmotic theory and non
osmotic theory have been proposed to explain active absorption of water by plants.
(i) Osmotic Theory : The osmotic theory explains that the root hairs act as osmometers
and there exists a typical condition so that water can move across osmotically from the soil
solution to the root cells. The theory assumes that translocation of water takes place by means
of diffusion along a gradient of decreasing water potential (\|/)- Absorption of water means
translocation of water from soil solution to the xylem of root. The xylem sap, according to this
theory, possesses a lower water potential (y) than that of soil solution. So water moves from
the soil to the root xylem by cells to cell osmosis.
(ii) Non-osmotic theory : The non-osmotic theory assumes that when the driving forces
are zero, water absorption takes place at the expenditure of metabolic energy released in
respiration. Thus this theory explains the absorption of water by roots when the water potential
of soil water is lower than that of the root hair cell sap. The non-osmotic active water uptake can
also be supported by the following facts (i) There is a correlation between the rate of water
absorption and respiration, (ii) Auxin-induced water uptake (iii) The factors such as low
temperature, oxygen tension and respiratory inhibitors which affect respiration rate and in turn
the absorption rate. The serious draw back of this theory is that it fails to explain the exact
manner of utilization of metabolic energy in the process of water uptake.
Passive Absorption : In case of passive absorption, the root system does not play a
significant role in absorption of water. It merely provides the surface for absorption of water.
The main driving force responsible for absorption of water originates in the aerial portion of the
plant. The water at the top of the plant develops a large tension or a negative hydrostatic
pressure due to loss of water by transpiration from leaves. This tension pulls water through the
xylem.
Water in the plant can be considered a continuous hydraulic system connecting the
water in the soil with the water vapour in the atmosphere. The upper terminus of water in the
plant system is represented by the meniscus of water in the substomatal cavities. The lower
terminus of water is represented by epiblemal cells and root hairs. The mesophyll cells within
the leaves are in direct contact with the atmosphere through an extensive system of air
spaces. Initially water evaporates from a thin film of water lining air spaces. Subsquently
water evaporates from the wall of mesophyll cells during transpiration. The water potential
of the cell wall decreases. Thus water is absorbed by the cell wall from the protoplasm
which in turn takes water from the vacuole of the cell. The water potential of the mesophyll
cell decreases due to loss of water. This mesophyle cell absorbs water from the adjoining
mesophyll cells and ultimately from the xylem or the veins of leaf. The tension developed
due to transpiration acts as a pull from above on the whole water column of the plant. The
tension is transmitted all the way down the unbroken water column through the stem to the
absorbing part of the root. Due to the rapid rate of transpiration, transport of water through
the whole system reflects a progressive decrease in water potential from soil to the
atmosphere. A water potential difference develops between the root and soil. Thus soil
water enters into root hairs and cells of epiblema and ultimately to xylem of roots via cortical
cells.
Water moves through soil predominantly by bulk flow driven by pressure gradient. As
plants absorb water from the soil, they deplete the soil water near the surface of the roots. This
depletion reduces i|/P in the water near the root surface. Also it establishes a pressure gradient
with respect to neighbouring regions of soil that have higher \|/P values. Because the water
filled pore spaces in the soil are interconnected, water moves to the root surface by bulk flow
through these channels down the pressure gradient.
In the passive mechanism, transpiration rate is very high and a large quantities of water
are absorbed at a relatively faster rate.The best evidence in support of passive absorption
comes from the experimental finding that the rate of absorption of water by a plant is
approximately equal to the rate of transpiration, provided water is available in optimum quantity
in the soil.
Path of water across the root:
If a potential gradient is established by any means, water moves centripetally across the
epiblema and root hairs and then through the cortex to the xylem via endodermis and pericycle.
The possible pathways of water transport across these regions are (Fig.10.11; Fig.10.12):
i. apoplast pathway
ii. symplast pathway
iii. transmembrane
pathway.
The apoplast consists of

nonliving components of the
root that roughly equates with
free space, that is, cell walls,
intercellular air spaces and the
xylem vessels. The symplast
consists of cytoplasm
interconnected by plasmodesmata. In the symplast pathway water moves from one cell to next
via plasmodesmata. In the transmembrane pathway water enters a cell on one side, exits the
cell on the other sides. In other words water crosses atleast two membranes for each cell in its
path (the plasmamembrane on entering and on exiting).
The initial flow of water across the surface layer of root upto innermost layer of cortex is
considered to be mainly through apoplast pathway. At the endodermis the apoplast pathway is
obstructed by the casparian strip. Thus the movement of water across the endodermis occurs
through the plasmamembrane. In certain cases poorly suberized passage cells allow the entry
of water across the endodermis. The vascular cylinder offers little resistance to the movement
of water from endodermis. Water on reaching the xylem is translocated upwards.
The important factors which affect the rate of absorption of water are of two types.
I. External envirnomental factors.
II. Plant factors or internal factors.
I. External environmental factors :
(i) Soil temperature: The variation of temperature affect the rate of absorption of water.
Water absorption is optimum within the temperature range of 20°C - 30°C. Any increase or
decrease in temperature beyond this range decreases the rate of absorption of water. Moderately
high temperature increases the rate of absorption of water and a very high temperature kills the
cell. Lowering of temperature reduces the absorption process due to (a) slower elongation of
root thus preventing its contact with new areas (b) decreased permeability of cell membrane (c)
increased viscosity of water and protoplasm (d) reduced rate of metabolic activities (e) reduced
rate of diffusion of soil water.
(ii) Availability of water: The rate of water absorption is generally influenced by the
available soil water, i.e., the range of water amount between the field capacity (actual water
holding capacity) and permanent wilting percentage (water loss that causes wilting at normal
conditions). Decrease in the soil water below the permanent wilting percentage causes
considerable decrease in the absorption of water. Appreciable increase in water beyond the
field capacity affects the aeration of soil and decreases the absorption rate.
(iii) Soil aeration : Water is absorbed more efficiently in a well aerated soil than in
poorly aerated soils. The deficiency of oxygen in soil inhibits the growth and metabolism of
roots. Besides an accumulation of CO2 in non-aerated soil increases the viscosity of protoplasts
and decreases the permeability of cell membrane. The above factors severely reduce the rate
of water absorption. These may be the reasons of plant death in flooded areas.
(iv) Concentration of soil solution : Water absorption depends upon the concentration
of the soil solution. If the concentration of soil solution is greater than the cell sap, roots become
unable to absorb water from soil. This is why the plants fail to grow in highly saline soil.
II. Plant factors or Internal Factors :
(i) Transpiration : High rate of transpiration increases the rate of water absorption
because of the development of water potential gradient between root system and leaves.The
water potential of leaves is lower than that of root system due to transpirational pull of water.
(ii) Metabolism : The metabolism of the root system and absorption of water by roots
are closely related. It is experimentally observed that factors inhibiting respiration such as poor
aeration, application of respiratory inhibitors etc. reduce the rate of absorption of water.
(iii) Root system : The efficiency of water

absorption depends upon the root system. The
presence of number of root hairs accounts for the
rate of absorption.
10.4.2. Translocation of water or Ascent of sap
The upward movement of water from the

metaxylem of roots upto the substomatal cavities of
leaves via xylem of the stem and veins of leaves is
called “ascent of sap” or conduction of water in an
upward direction (Fig. 10.13). It has been
experimentally verified that xylem is the main water
conducting tissue. Various theories have been
proposed to explain the mechanism involved in
ascent of sap. Some scientists are of the opinion that
living cells are actively involved in pumping water in
an upward direction while others explain the
mechanism of ascent of sap is independent of life
activity. The various theoris can be broadly dealt
under three headings.
I. Vital theories
II. Root pressure theory
III. Cohesion-tension theory

Fig.10.13 : Path of translocation of water.
I. Vital theories
All those theories which consider living cells to

be responsible to effect ascent of sap are dealt under
vital theories. Westermeir, Godlewski, Janse stated that
the living cells play an essential role in ascent of sap.
Godlewski proposed relay pump theory to

explain ascent of sap. According to him there was a
rhythmic change in the osmotic pressure of the living
cells of xylem parenchyma and medullary rays which
brought about a pumping action of water in an upward
direction. The tracheids and vessels acted as water
reservoirs. Janse supported Godlewski and showed
that if the lower portion of a branch was killed, the
leaves above were affected.
Sir J.C. Bose (1923) advocated pulsation theory

to explain ascent of sap. He experimented to prove
that the living cells of innermost layer of cortex lying just outside the endodermis were in a state
of rhythmic pulsations which caused the pumping of water from cell to cell in an upward direction
(Fig.10.14).
The vital theories are no more accepted as the possible

mechanism of ascent of sap as no adequate experimental proof
could be obtained in their support.
II. Root pressure theory
If the stem of a plant is cut near its base or incisions are

made in the stem, xylem sap is seen to flow out through them. This
phenomenon is called “exudation” or “bleeding”. Pristley explained
that this process of upward movement of water was due to a
hydrostatic pressure developed in the root system known as root
pressure. If a vertical tube is attached to a bleeding stump, a column
of sap will rise in it (Fig.10.15). Since the living roots are essential
for the development of root pressure, it seems most reasonable to
think that root pressure is an active process.
Kramer, Steward, Dixon and Joly have objected very strongly

the involvement of root presure in causing ascent of sap. It is true
that root pressure is a dynamic process, but in itself it is not sufficient to drive water in case of
tall trees ranging in height from 200 to 300 feet. Further root pressure has not been observed in
all plants. No or little root pressure is measurable in gymnosperms. Besides, root pressure has
been found to be lowest during summer when the rate of transpiration is very rapid, whereas, it
is highest in spring when the rate of transpiration is quite slow.
III. Transpiration pull and cohesion-tension theory
This theory was proposed by Dixon and Joly (1894) and has been supported by Curtis
and Clark (1951), Levitt (1969). The above theory is also konwn as Dixon theory of ascent of
sap. The theory assumes that water is pulled from up, but not pushed from below. The theory
has two essential features such as (i) cohesion of water and adhesion between water and
xylem tiusses, (iii) Transpiration pull.
(a) Cohesion of water and adhesion between water and xylem tissues
Cohesion is the phenomenon of attraction between similar molecules. The water

molecules remain attracted by the cohesive force and can not be easily separated from one
another. Further, there is attraction between water molecules and the inner wall of xylem ducts.
Then water column cannot be pulled away from the wall of xylem ducts due to strong adhesive
and cohesive properties of water and the continuity of water column is maintained from roots to
leaves.
The forces acting against the cohesive force of water and which try to break up the
water column in the plant are the weight of water column itself, the resistance encountered by
water in crossing the tissues of the root, the stem and the mesophyll cells of the leaf. All these
forces combined together have been found to be of the value of 50 atmosphere in tall trees. But
the magnitude of the cohesive force of water alone is about 300 atmosphere, which is sufficient
for maintaining the continuity of water column in plants.
(b) Transpiration pull
It is the pulling force responsible for lifting the water column. As water is lost in the form
of water vapour to atmosphere from the mesophyll cells by transpiration, a negative hydrostatic
pressure is created in the mesophyll cells which in turn draws water from veins of the leaves.
The negative tension is then gradually transmitted downwards via xylem tissues of the leaf,
stem and finally to the roots. As a result there is a continuous upward movement of water
column in the plant.
Thus, the transpiration pull acts as pull from above on the whole of water culumn of the
plant which draws water of xylem vessels of roots towards leaves i.e. in an upward direction.This
continous water column does not break because of the strong cohesive force between water
molecules and adhesive forces between water and xylem tissue. This is how ascent of sap
takes place in plant.
10.4.3. Transpiration
Plants absorb a large quantity of water, from soil by means of roots and root hairs.
However, only a small fraction (1-2%) of the absorbed water is utilised by the plants for its
metabolic activities. The remainder (98-99%) of absorbed water is lost to the atmosphere by
the physiological process known an transpiration. Transpiration is defined as the loss of water
in the form of water vapour from the internal tissues of living plants through the aerial parts of
plants such as leaves, green shoots etc. Transpiration occurs through two successive stages :
(i) At first water is lost from the mesophyll cells of the leaf into the intercellular spaces.
(ii) Subsquently water diffuses from the intercellular spaces into the outer atmosphere
in the form of water vapour either through the stomata or general surface of
epidermis of leaves.
Leaves and green shoots are the principal organs of transpiration. Transpiration may
occur through the cuticle, lenticels or stomata. Accordingly it is called cuticular, lenticular or
stomatai transpiration.
(i) Cuticular Transpiration : Cuticle is a layer of wax-like covering on the epidermis of

leaves and herbaceous stems. It is meant to check transpiration. However, some water may be
lost through it. Thus the loss of water in the form of water vapour through the cuticle is known as
cuticular transpiration. Cuticular transpiration accounts nearly 20 percent of the total water loss
by a plant.
(ii) Lenticular transpiration : Loss of

water in the form of water vapour taking place
through the lenticels present in woody stem
and fruits is called as lenticular transpiration.
It amounts 1-5 percent of the total water loss
by the plant. (Fig. 10.16)
(iii) Stomatai transpiration : Stomata are minute pores confined to epidermis of green
shoot and leaves. Opening and closing of stomata are controlled by guard cells. Maximum loss
(about 80 percent of the total water loss) of water from the plant tissues takes place through the
stomatai openings. The loss of water in the form of water vapour through the stomata of the
plants is known as stomatai transpiration.
Structure of stomata
Stomata are minute pores of elliptical shape surrounded by two specialised epidermal
cells known as guard cells. The guard cells are kidney shaped in dicots. The portion of guard
cell wall lying close to stomatai aperature is thick and inelastic. The remainder of the cell wall is
thin, elastic and permeable. Each guard cell has a cytoplasmic lining and a central vacuole
containing cell sap. Its cytoplasm contains a nucleus and a number of chloroplasts. The epidermal
cells surrounding guard cells are specialised and are known as subsidiary cells (Fig 10.17
A, B). They support the movement of guard cells. The size, shape and number of stomata of
guard cells vary from plant to plant.
General mechanics of opening and closing of stomata
Stomata generally open during

the day time or lighted hours and close
in the night.The opening and closing of
stomata are brought about by changes
in the volume and shape of the guard
cells. The expansion and contraction of
the guard cells is caused due to their
attainment of turgid and flaccid
conditions respectively (Fig. 10.18).
When the guard cells absorb water from
the surrounding cells, they become
turgid. As the turgidity increases, the
outer thin walls of guard cells stretch
outward. The outward bulging causes the pulling apart of the inelastic inner thick walls which
become concave in shape resulting in the opening of the stomata. When the guard cells become
flaccid by loss of water, the thick walls revert to their original position, narrowing the stoma and
ultimately closing it. This is the mechanics of guard cells.
The mechanism of stomatai opening and closing
Various theories have been put forwarded to explain opening and closing of stomata.
I. Theory of starch - glucose interconversion :
With the discovery of presence of phosphorylase enzyme in guard cells by Yin and Tung
(1948), Steward (1964) proposed the theory of starch-glucose interconversion (Fig. 10.19).
The following sequence of reactions occur at high pH in day time.
High pH
Starch + POr ------------------- > Glucose-1-P04
Phosphorylase
II. Glucose-1-PO, Ph^Phoglueomutase G|ucose.6.po
iii. Gluscoe-6-PO 4
Glucose +PO =4
Formation of glucose in the guard cells increases the turgor of guard cells. Thus stomata
gets opened in day time.
In night or dark condition the reverse reaction occurs and glucose is first converted
to glucose -1- PO4 with the help of ATP, and then to starch.
However, there are some objections to this

theory for which it is not universally accepted. The
objections are as follows :
(a) Sugar has never been observed to

accumulate in the guard cells when
starch disappears at the time of opening
of stomata. On the other hand starch
gets converted to organic acids.
(b) In monocotyledons, guard cells do not

synthesize starch.
(c) Stomatai closure occurs even at midday

although there is light and there is no Fig.10.19 : Starch-glucose interconversion
change in starch contents. during opening and closing of stomata
Potassium ion theory
Experimental evidences show that stomata also open even in CO2 free air as well as in
absence of light by increasing the K+ concentration in the guard cells. Imamura and Fujino
(1959) observed accumulation of K+ in the guard cells, and they proposed the K+ ion theory to
explain this.
The sequence of events taking place in guard cells are as follows:
1. Morning sunlight, particularly the blue light, is the cause behind stomatai opening.
Blue light activates H+-ATPases (proton pumps) of guard cell plasma membrane.
2. By using ATP, the pumps force H+ to the cell wall of guard cells, and as a result of
which the cell interior becomes rich in negative charges. The cell wall side of the
plasma membrane has high H+ concentration and the cytoplasmic side has negative
charges.
3. Due to such difference in charges across the membrane it is said to be hyper

polarised. This leads to opening of the K+- gated channels and K+ ions enter the
cell en masse. In a very short time of falling of blue light in gurard cell, it contains
more K+ ions as compared to negative ions.
4. Following this Cl- ions also enter the guard cells from the sorrounding cells.
5. Within the guard cells malic acid is formed from pyruvic acid which comes from
carbohydrate metabolism.
Phosphoenolpyruvic acid + HCC>3_ -> Oxaloacetic acid + Pi
Oxaloacetic acid + NAD(P)H -> Malic acid + NAD(P)+
Malic acid ionizes to malate2- and two H+
The above mentioned ions (K+, malate2" and Cl") are pumped into the vacuole. These
osmotically active solutes lower the water potential in guard cells. As a result of this water
enters guard cells due to endoosmosis, they become turgid and bulge away creating the
stomatai pore.
The sequence of events taking place during closing of stomata are :
1. At night photosynthesis stops, CO2 concentration builds up making substomatal
cavity acidic
2. Concentration of ABA (Abscisicacid) in guard cell increases resulting in opening of
Ca2+ - channels and increase of Ca2+ in cytoplasm
3. K+ efflux from guard cells takes place, following this water also leaves the guard
cells by exosmosis
4. Turgor pressure decreases and guard cells move inward closing the pore.
Stomatai opening in succulent plants :
In case of succulent plants like Opuntia, Bryophyllum sp. etc. stomata open at night
(called scotoactive opening) and close during day time. In these plants there is incomplete
oxidation of carbohydrates during night. This causes accumulation of organic acids without
liberation of CO2. The organic acids produced in night leads to their dissociation and increase in
H+ ion and the rest of the processes lead to stomatai opening. However, during daytime organic
acids are metabolized releasing CO2 plentily which keep the stomata closed. The day closing
and night opening of stomata solve the problem of water balance of succulents growing in dry
and hot habitats (see under photosynthesis)
Factors affecting the rate of Transpiration :
The rate of transpiration is affected by a number of internal (plant factor) and external
factors.
I. Internal or plant factors :
(i) Root - shoot ratio : If all other conditions are favourable for transpiration, the water
absorbing capacity of root surface and transpiring capacity of the leaf suface regulate the rate
of transpiration. If absorption surface is lower than transpiration surface, a water deficit results,
causing reduction in transpiration rate. In other words, a low root/shoot ratio decreases the rate
of transpiration.
(ii) Leaf area : The greater the leaf area, the higher will be the water loss due to
transpiration.
(iii) Stomatai frequency : Stomatai frequency means the total number of stomata per
unit leaf area. Stomatai frequency varies with different species. Greater the frequency of stomata,
higher is the rate of transpiration.
(iv) Structure of leaf : Presesnce of thick cuticle, wax layers, sunken stomata and
trichomes on the surface of leaves reduce the rate of transpiration.
II. External or Environmental factors
(i) Light - There is a close relationship between the opening of stomata and presence
of light. Light affects the rate of transpiration in two ways. Firstly, light causes stomata to open.
As a result the saturated interior cells of leaf are exposed to the outer atmosphere. Consquently,
the rate of transpiration is increased in bright sunlight. Secondly, it increases the temperature of
leaf and thus affects the rate of transpiration.
(ii) Wind - The increase in the wind velocity increases the rate of transpiration by
removing the water vapour of the atmosphere from the vicinity of transpiring surface and lowering
relative humidity.
(iii) Temperature - The increase in temperature increases the rate of transpiration.

This is due to increase in the rate of evaporation of water from cell surface and decrease in the
humidity of the external atmosphere. However, there is a limit in rise of temperature in relation
to loss of water by transpiration. At very high temperature, usually beyond 35°C the rate of
transpiration gradually falls due to inactivity of the protoplasm.
(iv) Humidity of the air - Humidity is expressed as the percentage of water vapour
present in the atmosphere. The relative humidity of the atmosphere affects the rate of transpiration
to a great extent because it influences the water potential gradient between the intercellular
spaces and outside atmosphere. The higher the relative humidity of the outside atmosphere
the lower will be the rate of transpiration. Conversely the lower the relative humidity of the
outside atmosphere the higher will be the rate of transpiration.
(v) Atmospheric pressure - The reduction of atmospheric pressure reduces the vapour
density of the external atmosphere. This allows more rapid diffusion of water. The plants growing
on hills show higher rate of transpiration because of low atmospheric pressure and thus they
develop xerophytic characters.
(vi) Water Supply - Deficiency of water in soil decreases the rate of transpiration. This
is due to low absorption of water from the soil.
Significance of Traspiration
Transpiration has of immense importance in plant life. Beneficial roles of transpiration

are:
(i) Gaseous exchange - Transpiration is essential in the life of land plants. It helps in
the absorption of carbon dioxide (CO2) from the atmosphere during photosynthesis as the
opening of stomata in day time facilitate gaseous exchange.
(ii) Cooling effect - The leaves absorb the radiant energy. Some of the light energy is
utilized in photosynthesis, rest is converted into heat energy resulting in an increase in leaf
temperture. However, rapid evaporation of water in the form of water vapour from the aerial
parts of the plant through transpiration brings down their temperature. Transpiration thus provides
a significant cooling effect which keeps the plant from being over heated.
(iii) Effect on mineral transport - Mineral salts remain dissolved in the soil water and
are absorbed by the roots. Minerals that are absorbed and accumulated in the xylem duct of the
root move up and are distributed in the plant by the transpirational pull of sap.
(iv) Effect on water movement - The absorbed water is transported from roots to
leaves through the xylem vessels which is greatly influenced by transpirational pull. Water loss
due to transpiration results in the development of low water potential in the leaf tissues. Thus
water moves from the xylem vessels to the leaf cells and helps in the ascent of sap.
(v) Development of mechanical tissues - Greater amount of transpiration helps in the

development of mechanical tissues in plants. The plants become healthier and more compact.
The cell walls become thick and cutinised and the plants are able to resist the attack of fungi
and bacteria.
(vi) Maintenance of turgidity- Transpiration maintains an optimum degree of turgor in

cells. Under favourable conditions plants absorb excess amount of water, which is given off by
transpiration to maintain the optimum turgor for better growth.
According to Curtis transpiration is a necessary evil because of the following facts :

(i) A large amount of absorbed water is lost during transpiration which is harmful to
plants.
(ii) Unnecessary wastage of energy takes place during the process of water absorption
which is lost due to transpiration.
(iii) When the rate of transpiration is high in plants growing in soil defcient in water, an
internal water deficit develops in plants which may affect metabolic process.
(iv) Many xerophytic plants undergo structural modifications and adaptations to check
transpiration.
Considering both the beneficial and harmful effects of transpiration, it may be concluded
that it is definitely advantageous inspite of its harmful features.
Antitranspirants
The term antitranspirant is used to desigante any material applied to plants for the purpose
of slowing down transpiration. Some of the main antitranspirants are colorless plastics, silicon
oil, low viscocity wax, phenyl mercuric acetate, abscisic acid, CO2etc. Colorless plastics, silicon
ils and low viscocity waxes constitute one group, as these are spread on the leaves with the
purpose of forming a film permeable to oxygen and carbondioxide but not to water. Carbondioxide
is an effective anti-transpirant. A little rise in CO2 concentration from the natural 0.02% to 0.05%
induces partial closure of stomata. To check transpiration in drought condition, dryice (solid
CO2) can be spread in the field. The advantage of antitranspring substances is to reduce the
transpiration rate without adversely affecting exchange of gases during photosynthesis,
respiration and growth. The application of antitranspirants is beneficial to agriculture for improving
crop productivity during drought situations.
10.4.4. Guttation
When conditions are such that the absorption of water greatly exceeds transpiration, the
excess of water escapes from the plant in the form of liquid trough structures called hydathodes
present at the vein ending margins of leaf. This type of exudation of water is called guttation.
The phenomenon of guttation is not universal, and is seen in some plants.
Guttation is mostly exhibited by herbaceous plants such as Balsam, Colocasia etc. growing
in moist, warm soil and humid conditions of atmosphere. It mostly takes place at night or early
in the morning, when there is no transpiration and root pressure is high. The fluid which oozes
out in guttation, contains a variety of dissolved inorganic and organic substances.
Guttation takes place

through structures called
hydathodes (Fig. 10.20). The
hydathodes remain open
whole day and night and are
conected with veins. Each
hydathode opens to the
exterior by a pore called
stoma. The stoma is
surrounded by two guard cells
and open internally into an air
chamber. Just below the air
chamber there is a group of parenchymatons cells with intercellular spaces called epithem. It
lies inside the leaf below the epidermis mostly towords the margin or tip of the leaf. The xylem
vessels and tracheids open just behind the epithem. The exudation of water in the form of liquid
drops takes place through stoma.
Guttation is caused due to a positive hydrostatic pressure (root pressure) which develops
in the xylem ducts of the root.
Differences between transpiration and guttation :
Transpiration
(i) It occurs through stomata, cuticle and lenticels.
(ii) Water is lost in the form of water vapour.
(iii) It occurs only in day time.
(iv) The stomata of leaves usually remain open during day and get closed at night.
(v) Water (inform of vapour) is pure and contains no salt.
(vi) Major loss of water takes place through stomata present in leaf surface.
(vii) It takes place in all higher terrestrial plants.
(viii) Transpiration controls the temperature of the plant.
(ix) Root pressure is not involved.
Guttation
(i) It occurs through hydathodes in the leaves.
(ii) It is exuded in the form of liquid.
(iii) It takes place either in the morning or during the night.
(iv) The hydathode remain open whole day and night.
(v) Oozed out water is not pure and contains disolved inorganic and organic substances.
(vi) It occurs through hydathodes present in the leaf margin.
(vii) It takes place mostly in herbaceous plants.
(viii) It does not control leaf temperature.
(ix) It takes place due to development of root pressure.
10.4.5. Uptake and Transport of Mineral Nutrients
Plants absorb most of their required mineral nutrients and water from soil solution by
roots and move them upward in the xylem for distribution throughout the aerial parts of the
plants.
Uptake of mineral nutrients in ionic form from soil solution is carried out by the entire root
surface; but uptake is more pronounced in root hair zone than in the meristem and elongation
zones. Mineral ion concentration in the soil solution is usually much lower than its concentration
inside the plant. Therefore, ion uptake by root cells require an expenditure of metabolic energy
provided by the hydrolysis of ATP, i.e., by an active process as discussed earlier. Some mineral
ions can be taken up by roots passively. Ion uptake by roots can be through the symplast or
through the apoplast. In the symplastic mode, ions cross the plasma membrane of the epidermal
cells, and, once inside, the ions diffuse radially in the cortex from one cell to the other through
the plasmodesmata connections finally reaching the endodermis. In the apoplastic mode, an
ion can diffuse in through the polysaccharide lattice of the cell wall between the epidermal cells
or may be carried in passively by the inward water flow. In the cortex, the ions and other solutes
may diffuse radially through the apoplast up to the endodermal layer. At the endodermal layer,
the apoplastic movement of nutrients is blocked by the Casparian strip, which is a ring present
in the radial walls of endodermal cells being impregnated with hydrophobic wax like substance,
suberin. Thus Casparian strips in the radial walls of endodermis separates the outer apoplast
from the inner apoplast and prevents any free flow of water, mineral ions, and other solutes
between the outer and inner apoplasts. Therefore, water and nutrients must enter the symplast
from outer apoplast before they can enter the stele. During this radial apoplastic movement,
these nutrients may cross the plasma membrane of the cortical cells at any point and then
reach the endodermal layer by symplastic mode.
Once inside the endodermis, ions continue to diffuse from cell to cell into the stele. Stele
consists of living xylem parenchyma and dead xylem tracheary elements (tracheids and vessel
elements). Being dead, xylem tracheary elements have no plasmodesmata or cytoplasmic
connections with xylem parenchyma. Therefore, ions which reached xylem parenchyma from
endodermal layer must leave the symplast by crossing the plasma membrane to be loaded into
the xylem tracheary elements (the inner apoplast). The plasma membrane of xylem parenchyma
has specialized transport proteins like channels, carriers and pumps which unload the solutes
from symplast to apoplast. The process by which solutes leave the xylem parenchyma cells
(symplast) and enter the xylem tracheary elements (apoplast) is called as xylem loading. After
entering the conducting tissue of xylem, the mineral nutrients move upward along with water
and reach the growing parts of plant as has been described for ascent of sap.
10.4.6. Transport of Food - Phloem Translocation
Photosynthetic products, particularly sugars, are synthesized in the mature leaves from
where these are translocated by the phloem tissue to the areas of growth, including shoot tips
and roots. On reaching the destination, sugars are used as substrate for respiration to provide
building material and energy for cell wall formation, growth and differentiation. In the root, the
metabolic energy is used for ion uptake from soil and for xylem loading. Sugars are also
translocated to various storage organs such as fruits, tubers, and storage stem and storage
roots. During germination of seeds or tubers, the stored sugars are retranslocated to form
different plant organs including the growth and differentiation of leaves to carryout photosynthesis
again. In deciduous plants, stored sugars of shoot and roots are retranslocated to be used for
new leaf formation. Along with sugars, other organic compounds (e.g., amino acids) and mineral
ions are also translocated. Thus, translocation through the phloem tissue is bidirectional whereas,
transport through xylem tissue, as discussed above, is unidirectional. The cells of phloem that
help transport sugars and other organic materials throughout the plant are the sieve elements,
which are living cells specialized for translocation unlike the conducting cells of xylem which are
dead cells. How do sugars from leaves are translocated to the roots and other organs? The
overall pattern of phloem transport is a source to sink movement of products of photosynthesis.
Sources include any exporting organ, typically a mature leaf, while sinks include
nonphotosynthetic organs such as roots, tubers, developing fruits and immature growing leaves.
Mechanism of Phloem Translocation
The pressure-flow hypothesis XYLEM PHLOEM
(also called as mass-flow or bulk-flow

Companion SOURCE
hypothesis).first proposed by Ernst (leaf cell)
Munch in 1930, is widely accepted
as the probable mechanism of
translocation in the phloem tissue.
Taking the translocation of sugars
from leaves (source) to the roots &eve-tube elements
(sink) as a specific example, as per Upward water Pressure (mass) flow of

movement ------ water carrying sugar
this hypothesis, a pressure gradient (ascent of sap) molecules.
is established as a consequence of
phloem loading of sugars in the
mature leaves and phloem unloading
at the root tissues. In the mature
leaves, sucrose, the transIocable
Companion
form sugar, is loaded into the sieve cell (root cell)
elements by an active process using

Fig. 10.21 : Pressure-flow mechanism of sugar translocation in
metabolic energy. This results in the phloem tissue from leaf (source) to root (sink) in plants based
increase in the osmotic pressure in on Munch’s hypothesis.
the sieve elements, causing a drop
in the water potential. Water from the surrounding xylem tissue enters the sieve elements,
causing the turgor pressure to increase in the source. In the roots, unloading of sucrose from
the sieve elements takes place leading to a lower osmotic pressure and the water potential of
the phloem tissue increases above that of the xylem tissue. In response to the water potential
gradient, water comes out of the phloem tissue causing the turgor pressure to decrease in the
sink. Thus a pressure gradient is established between the source and the sink, which drives the
water movement and the sugars dissolved in it. A schematic diagram is presented below
(Fig.10.21).
10.4.7. Diffusion of Gases into Plants
Plants require atmospheric gases like CO2 and O2 to perform two important physiological
processes, photosynthesis and respiration respectively. These gases enter the plants by diffusion
in gaseous state and then move within the plant both in gaseous state and in dissolved state.
During photosynthesis, atmospheric CO2 diffuses into the leaf through the stomatai pore in
gaseous state. Upon reaching the substomatal cavity, CO2 then diffuses in to the intercellular
air spaces between the mesophyll cells also in a gaseous state. Then CO2 enters the chloroplast
passing successively through the water layer of wet walls of mesophyll cells, plasmamembrane
and cytosol by diffusion in liquid phase. Oxygen, on the other hand, diffuses slowly in aqueous
solution. It reaches the mitochondria by gaseous diffusion through the net work of intercellular
air spaces found in plant tissues and also by diffusion in aqueous phase. In flooded soil, the
plant root may resort to anaerobic (fermentative) metabolism, e.g., in rice plant. In certain
mangrove plants, roots may protrude out of water or mudded soil as pneumatophores through
which O2 diffuses into the roots through gaseous pathway.
SAMPLE QUESTIONS
A. Multiple choice type :
1. When a cell becomes fully turgid being kept in water for sometime, which of its osmotic
components becomes zero?
(a) OP (a) Osmotic potential
(b) TP (b) Pressure potential
(c) DPD or (c) Water potential
(d) WP (d) Wall potential
2. When a cell becomes flaccid being kept in a solution for sometime, then:
(a) Pressure potential = zero
(b) Osmotic potential = zero
(c) Water potential = Pressure potential
(d) Pressure potential = Osmotic potential
3. When sucrose is dissolved in water, its water potential :
(a) increases (c) becomes zero
(b) decreases (d) is not affected
4. If a cell is placed in hypertonic solution , what will happen ?
(a) Endosmosis (c) Deplasmolysis
(b) Exosmosis (d) Nothing
5. If a cell volume decreases when placed in 0.25M sucrose solution , then the cell sap
concentration is
(a) Equal to 0.25 M (c) More than 0.25M
(b) Less than 0.25 M (d) Unpredictable
6. Root pressure is maximum when :
(a) Absorption of water is high and rate of transpiration is high
(b) Absorption of water is low and rate of transpiration is low
(c) Absorption of water is high and rate of transpiration is low
(d) Absorption of water is low and rate of transpiration is high
7. When starch is converted to glucose in guard cells,their water potential:
(a) increases (b) decreases
(c) becomes zero (d) is not affected
Ascent of sap in plants takes place through:
(a) xylem (b) phloem
(c) cambium (d) Both xylem and cambium
9. Ascent of sap in tall tree is best explained by:

(a) Root pressure (b) Cohesion-tension theory
(c) Capillary force (d) Imbibition
Which one is associated with stomatai regulation in plants ?
(a) K+ (b) Na+
(c) Mg++ (d) po4-
B. Fill in the blanks :

1. Stomata opens when guard cells become.
2. Water potential of leaves arethan that of roots during active transpiration.
3. Cohesion-tension theory of ascent of sap was proposed by.
4. The water coming out through hydathode contains.
5. Pulsation theory of ascent of sap was advocated by.
6. In a flaccid cell, y =.
7. Water potential of pure water is taken as.
8. The density of a substance (d) is related to its rate of diffusion (r) by the relation , r =.
9. A plant cell placed in water reaches its maximum volume when its vs =.
10. If v|zs of a solution kept in a beaker is -0.5 MPa , then its y =.
C. Short answer type :

I. Symplast 2. Apoplast
3. Root pressure 4. Transpirational pull
5. Mechanics of stomatai opening 6. Significance of transpiration
7. Hydathode 8. Stomata
9. Diffusion 10. Imbibition
II. Water potential 12. DPD
13. Turgor pressure
D. Long answer type :

1. Describe the mechanism of water absorption by plant roots .
2. Describe the factors affecting water absorption by plant roots.
3. Describe the transpirational pull and cohesion-tension theory of ascent of sap.
4. Write how potassium ions regulate the opening and closing of stomatai pore.
5. Describe the factors affecting the transpiration in plants.
6. What do you mean by water potential ? Describe its components.
7. Describe the relationship between DPD ,OP and TP of a cell.
8. Give an account of diffusion.
CHAPTER
MINERAL NUTRITION
11
All organisms are ultimately composed of several chemical elements. The final reservoirs
of these elements on earth are the rocks, soil, oceans and the atmosphere. Only the green plants
and certain microorganisms can primarily extract simple inorganic compounds and ions from the
environment without being dependent on other living orgnisms. For this reason these organisms
are called autotrophic or self-feeding. All inorganic requirements of plants except carbon, hydrogen
and oxygen, are obtained directly or indirectly from soil. In 1804, de Saussure for the first time
demonstrated that the inorganic elements contained in plant ash are obtained from the soil via the
root system. These elements are essential to the growth and development of the plant. As the
sources of these inorganic requirements are minerals, the elements are known as mineral nutrients
and the nutrition is called mineral nutrition. Scientific approach to determine the mineral content of
plants started by Sachs and Knop in 1830. Culturing the of plants in acqueous nutrient solution,
they prepared a list of elements essential to plant life.
Criteria of essentiality :
An essential element has following criteria :
(i) It is indispensable for the growth of the plant. The plant cannot complete its life
cycle without it.
(ii) The action of the element must be specific and should not be replaced by any other
element.
(iii) The element must be directly involved in the nutrition of the plant, i.e. it should be a
necessary component of an essential metabolite.
(iv) The absence or deficiency of the element should produce physical or physiological
disorders.
Out of 92 natural elements nearly 40 elements are found in the living cells, of which 17
elements have been found to be essential. They are carbon, hydrogen, oxygen, nitrogen, sulphur,
phosphorus, potassium, calcium, magnesium, iron, manganese, copper, zinc, boron,
molybdenum, chlorine and nickel. The other elements are called non-essential elements or
nutrients.
On the basis of the quantities required for plant growth and development, the essential
elements have been divided into two categories : macronutrients and micronutrients.
Mineral Nutrition I 423
Macronutrients
The mineral elements needed by plants in comparatively greater amounts or are found
in high quantities in plants are termed macronutrients. Of the 17 elements listed above, carbon,
hydrogen, oxygen, nitrogen, sulphur, phosphorous, potassium, magnesium and calcium are
known as macronutrients.
Micronutrients
The mineral elements needed by plants in small amounts or in traces are called
micronutrients. They are copper, boron, managanese, zinc, molybdneum, iron, chlorine and
nickel.
11.1. ROLE OF MINERAL ELEMENTSAND THEIR DEFICIENCY SYMPTOMS
11.1.1. Macronutrients
1. Carbon, Hydrogen and Oxygen :
Although these elements are not minerals in the true sense, they are still included in the
list as they are most essential for plant life. These three lements are also called framework
elements.
These elements are involved in the synthesis of compounds like carbohydrates, fats,
proteins, enzymes, organic acids, nucleic acids, hormones etc. In short they build up the
protoplasm. Plants absorb them from air and soil in the form of carbondioxide and water.
Deficiency of either water or carbon dioxide causes retradation of growth and ultimately death
of the plant.
2. Nitrogen :
The sources of nitrogen are soil and atmosphere. Nitrogen is absorbed from the soil in
the form of nitrates, nitrites and ammonium salts. Atmospheric nitrogen can be fixed and made
available to the plant by certain bacteria.
Specific role :
• It is important constituent of proteins, nucleic acids, porphyrins, alkaloids, some

vitamins, co-enzymes and chlorophyll. Porphyrins are important part of chlorophylls
and cytochromes. Thus it plays very important role in metabolism, growth,
reproduction and heredity.
Deficiency symptoms :
• Nitrogen deficiency causes yellowing i.e. chlorosis of leaves. Older leaves are
affected first.
• In some cases production and accumulation of anthocyanin pigment is found. As a
result a purplish coloration appears in stems, petioles, and the lower leaf surfaces.
• Flowering is suppressed or delayed.
• Plant growth remains stunted.
3. Phosphorus:
It is present in the soil in inorganic and organic forms. It is absorbed primarily as the
monovalent inorganic phosphate anions.
Specific role :
• It is a constituent of nucleic acids, phospholipids, NADP, ATP etc.
• Through nucleic acids and ATP, it plays important role in protein synthesis.
• Phospholipids along with proteins form important constituents of cell membranes.
• Phosphorus is also an essential part of all the sugar phosphates in photosynthesis

and other metabolic processes
• High amounts of phosphorus are found in the meristematic tissues.
• Phosphorus deficiency may cause premature leaf fall.
• Dead necrotic areas may be developed on the leaves, petioles or fruits.
• The plants show a general overall stunted appearance with often dark green
coloration.
4. Potassium :
It is absorbed in the form of K+ ions from the soil.
Specific Role :
• This element functions mostly as a catalytic agent in several enzymatic reactions,

e.g., pyruvate kinase
• It is essential for translocation of sugars.
• Stomatai opening in higher plants requires potassium.
• It has a definite role in the regulation of water relations of plant cells.
• It helps in transport of ions across cell membrances.
• It maintains hydration, permeability and reactive state of protoplasm.
Deficiency symptons :
• Mottled chlorosis of leaves occurs.
• Plant growth remains stunted with marked shortening of internodes.

• Potassium deficient cereal grains develop weak stalks and their roots become
susceptibe to root rotting organisms.
5. Calcium :
It is absorbed as divalent Ca2+ from soil.
Specific role :
• It is required for the formation of calcium pectinate, which is the important constituent
of middle lamella in cell wall.
• Calcium salt of lecithin, a lipid compound, is involved in the organisation of cell
membrane.
• Calcium ions protect plants from the injurious effects of hydrogen ions, high salt
concentration in the environment, and toxic effects of other ions in the environment.
• It serves as a cofactor or may act as an activator for certain enzymes like amylase,
ATPase etc.
• Calmodulin, a Ca++-binding protein, has a regulatory role in cells.
• Calcium deficiency causes stem collapse and subsequent termination of growth in
the apical meristematic regions of stem, leaf and root tips.
• Roots become short, stubby and brown.
• Chlorotic patches appear near the margin of younger leaves.
• Disfiguration of the growing shoot tips is characteristic of calcium deficient plants.
• Cell walls become rigid and brittle in calcium deficient plants.
6. Magnesium :
It is present in the soil in water soluble, exchangeable and fixed from. It is taken up by
plants as Mg++.
Specific role :
• Magnesium is a component of the chlorophyll structure.
• It plays an important role in binding ribosomal particles during protein synthesis.
• The release of energy in the hydrolysis of high energy compounds like ATP is greatly
influenced by Mg2+. It is a cofactor in all kinase reactions.
• Magnesium deficiency causes interveinal chlorosis of the leaves.
• Dead necrotic patches appear on the leaves.
• Anatomically magnesium deficiency causes extensive chlorenchyma development
and scanty pith formation.
7. Sulphur:
Sulphur is taken up by the plants from the soil as divalent sulphate anions (SO42-).
Specific role :
• Sulphur is important constituent of some amino acids (cystine, cysteine, methionine)
• It is a constituent of biotin, thiamine, coenzyme A and lipoic acid which are involved
in cellular metabolism.
• It is a constituent of volatile oils which give characteristic pungent adours to

cruciferous plants.
• Disulphide linkages help to stabilize the protein structure.
• Sulfhydryl groups are necessary for the activity of many enzymes.
• A deficiency of sulphur results in chlorosis or yellowing of the leaves. The younger

leaves are affected first.
• Tips and margins of the leaf roll inward.
• Sulphur deficiency results in marked decrease of stroma lamellaae and an increase

in grana stacking
11.1.2. Micronutrients or Trace elements :
1. Manganese:
Manganese exists in the soil as divalent, trivalent, and tetravalent forms, but it is absorbed
largely as the divalent manganous cation (Mn2+).
Specific functions :
• Manganese is involved in oxidation-reduction processes together with

decarboxylation and hydrolytic reactions.
• Photosystem II in chloroplast contains manganese protein.
• RNA polymerase has an absolute requirement for manganese.
• Manganese is the predominant metal ion of Krebs cycle reactions. It acts as an

activator for the enzymes nitrite reductase, hydroxyl amine reductase and indole-3-
acitic acid (auxin) oxidase.
• Manganese deficiency causes chlorotic and necrotic spots in the interveinal areas
of the leaf.
2. Boron :
Boron is absorbed by the plants from the soil as undissociated boric acid (H3BO3). The
essentiality of boron for all green plants is not absolute.
• In higher plants, boron is essential for sugar transport.
• Boron helps in germination and growth of pollen grains.
• Boron is concerned with the cell wall metabolism.
• Boron is essential for DNA synthesis.
Deficiency Symptons :
• Root tip elongation is inhibited.
• Shoot apices die.
• Nodule formation in legumes is inhibited.
• The branches at the end of twig form a rosette.
3. Molybdenum :
It is absorbed by the plants as molybdate ions.
• Molybdenum is found to be essential in nitrogen fixation by legumes.
• Molybdenum is a component of the enzyme nitrate reductase, nitrogenase etc.
• Molybdenum deficiency causes chlorotic interveinal mottling of the leaves with

marginal necrosis and infolding of leaves.
• Causes “white tail” disease in cauliflower.
• The flowers abscise before fruit setting.
4. Zinc:
Zinc is absorbed as divalent Zn2+ ion.
• Zinc is associated with the biosynthesis of indole-3-acetic acid (an auxin)
• Zn2+ is required for the activity of the enzyme phosphodiesterase and alcohol
dehydrogenase.
• Zn2+ induces synthesis of cytochrome.

• Growth is stunted in severe zinc deficiency.
• The leaves become smaller and the internodes shorten to give a rosette form.
5. Iron :
Iron is mainly absorbed by the plant in the ferrous form, but ferric ion may also be
absorbed. Acid soil favours availability of soluble forms of iron.
Specific role :
• It functions both as a structural component and as a co-factor for enzymatic reactions.
• It is an important constituent of iron-porphyrin containing proteins like cytochromes
peroxidases, catalases as well as in iron-sulfur proteins.lt is required for chlorophyll
biosynthesis.
• It is very important constituent of ferrodoxin (an iron-sulfur protein) which plays
important role in biological nitrogen fixation and primary photochemical reaction in
photosynthesis.
• Iron deficiency causes rapid chlorosis of the leaves which is interveinal. The deficient
symptom first appears in young leaves.
6. Copper:
It is absorbed as both monovalent and divalent cations.
• Copper is a component of cytochrome-c oxidase which in a terminal electron transport
chain component in mitochondria. It is also a component of plastocyanin (the mobile
electron donor of PSI) and the vitamine, cyanocobalamine.
• Copper is found in a group of enzymes in which oxygen is used directly in the
oxidation of substrate.
Deficiency Symptoms :
• Copper deficiency results in exanthema, a disease of fruit trees.
• Blackening of potato is also caused by copper deficiency.
7. Chlorine:
Chlorine is absorbed as Ch.
Specific function :
• Chlorine helps in the photooxidation of water in photosynthesis.
• It is required for the normal production of fruits.
• Leaves become wilted.
• Leaves develop bronze colour.
• Fruit formation is retarded.
8. Nickel:
Nickel is absorbed by plants in ionic form as Ni2+.
Specific function :
• Nickel is a component of enzymes like urease in higher plants and hydrogen-uptake
hydrogenase in microorganisms.
• Nickel deficiency causes urea to accumulate in leaf tips and leaf tip necrosis develops.
• Nickel dificient seeds are incapable of germination.
11.2. HYDROPONICS
Owing to the complex nature of soil, it is difficult to conduct experiments to determine

the elements essential for plants. Hydroponics is used to determine the essential elements
more easily and accurately. The technique of growing plants with their roots immersed in nutri
ent solution is called hydroponics. It was first developed and used extensively by Julius von
Sachs in 1860. The hydroponic solution must be well-aeretaed to provide oxygen for root
respiration. The pH of a nutrient solution must be maintained because it changes very often
with the uptake of ions by roots. Hoagland's solution and Evan's solution are often used for
hydroponics, where the concentration of nutrients is greater than that of the soil, and which
promotes rapid growth of the plants with nutrient depletion taking place quickly. So nutrients
must be added at intervals for keeping plants growing continuously.
As hydroponic solution is of known strength, eliminating a particular nutrient from it can

be used to know the role played by that particular element in the plant body. This also helps in
determining the deficiency symptoms or that particular element. Now-a-days, hydroponics is
used for growing salad crops like cucumber, lettuce and tomato. The nutrient film technique as
shown in the Figure 11.1 is used where the nutrient is continuously circulated allowing a
monitoring of the pH and solution composition.
11.3. NITROGEN METABOLISM
Nitrogen is an essential macroelement FOR plant growth. It is the main constituent of

proteins, enzymes, nucleic acids, hormones, alkaloids etc., which are used for the formation
and functions of cellular components. The main source of nitrogen is air which contains 78
percent nitrogen by volume. Most of the plants can not utilise atmospheric nitrogen in its gaseous
form. Only certain bacteria, including cyanobacteria can utilise the atmospheric nitrogen. These
organisms are termed as nitrogen fixing organisms. Plants utilize nitrogen only when the nitrogen
is fixed i.e., it is converted into nitrate (NO3~) and ammonium (NH4+) ions. The fixation of
atmospheric nitrogen (N2 ) into NO3~ and NH4+ with the help of microorganisms to make it
available for absorption by plants is called biological nitrogen fixation.
11.3.1. Biological nitrogen fixation
Biological nitrogen fixation is of two types - asymbiotic nitrogen fixation and symbiotic
nitrogen fixation.
11.3.1.1. Asymbiotic Nitrogen Fixation
The fixation of N2 by the microorganisms living freely i.e. outside the plant cell is called
asymbiotic or non-symbiotic biological nitrogen fixation. Free living bacteria and cyanobacteria
can fix nitrogen in the soil. The nitrogen fixing cyanobacteria are Anabaena, Nostoc, Spirulina,
Stigonema, Scytonema etc. These cyanobacteria have some thick walled cells called heterocysts
which fix atmospheric nitrogen. Some free living aerobic bacteria such as Azotobacter, Derxia
and anaerobic bacteria such as Clostridium, Desulphovibrio, Methanobacterium are capable of
nitrogen fixation. Besides, Rhodotorula, a yeast can fix atmospheric nitrogen in the soil.
Mechanism of Asymbiotic Nitrogen Fixation : J.E. Carnahan in 1960 first reported the
conversion of atmospheric nitrogen into ammonia by the free living nitrogen fixing bacteria,
Clostridium pasteurianum. The fixation of nitrogen takes place as follows : Phosphorolytic
breakdown of pyruvate results in the production of electrons, acetyl phosphate and hydrogen.
Ferredoxin accepts electrons coming from pyruvate and itself get reduced. Acetyl-phosphate
reacts with ADP to generate ATP. In the presence of reduced ferredoxin and ATP, molecular
nitrogen is adsorbed on the surface of the enzyme nitrogenase. Rduction of N2 to 2NH3 is a six-
electron transfer reaction which is ultimately provided by reduced ferroedoxin via the enzyme
nitrogenase enrgized by the hydrolysis of ATP (Fig. 11.2). The details of nitrogenase action is
shown in Fig. 11.5.
H3PO4
Fig.11.2 : Asymbiotic nitrogen fixation in free-living bacteria.

(Fp - flavoprotein; Fd - ferredoxin; N2ase - nitrogenase)
11.3.1.2. Symbiotic Nitrogen Fixation :
The fixation of free

nitrogen of air by
microorganisms living
symbiotically inside the plants
(roots) is called symbiotic
nitrogen fixation. The symbiotic
system consists of bacteria of
the genus Rhizobium infecting
the roots of many members of
the family Leguminosae, such
as peas, beans etc. to form
nitrogen fixing co-operative. The
actual site of nitrogen fixation is
the nodules formed on the roots
of the legume plants as a result
Fig.11.3 : Formation of infection thread and root nodule.
of the penetration of Rhizobium.
Neither organism alone is able to fix nitrogen. In the

initial stage, host cells recognise the correct strain of
symbiotic bacteria. The roots of leguminous plants
secrete some growth factors. As a result the bacteria
accumulate in the vicinity of plant roots (Fig. 11.3).
The bacteria, then, either penetrate the relatively soft
root hair tip or invade damaged or broken root hairs
and progress in as an infection thread. The infection
thread intrudes, settles and liberates its contents in
a cortical cell.The Rhizobia are liberated either
individually or in small groups enclosed by a
membrane bound vesicles and enter the plant cell.
The vesicles are termed as symbiosomes. The
bacterial cells induce the cortical cells to divide which
ultimately result in the formation of nodules. The
bacterial cell divides and attain enlargement to fix nitrogen in this area. At this stage the bacteria
are called endosymbionts orbacteriods. The nodules grow rapidly, pushing its way to the surface
of the root (Fig. 11.4). The nodule contains a red pigment leghemoglobin. The enzyme
nitrogenase is sensitive to O2. Leghemoglobin combines with O2 and prevent it reaching out
nitrogenase. The development of leghaemoglobin and nitrogen fixing capacity are outcome of
symbiotic interaction. The mature nodules remain connected with the root via vascular tissues
through which exchange of fixed nitrogen of the bacteriods and the nutrients of host takes
place.
Mechanism of Symbiotic Nitrogen Fixation
The root nodules of leguminous plant have a red pigment called leghemoglobin. It is a
reddish pigment found in cytoplasm of host cells. Leghemoglobin by combinig with O2 not only
protects the nitrogenase from damage by O2 but also maintains steady supply of O2 to nitrogen
fixing bacteria for respiration. The ATP generated in the process of respiration of bacteria is
used for nitrogen fixation. The bacteroids contain the enzyme nitrogenase. The free atmospheric
nitrogen is first bound to the enzyme surface and is not released until it is completely reduced
to ammonia. The nitrogenase enzyme complex is composed of two proteins (i) iron protein (Fe
protein) and (ii) iron molybdenum protein (MoFe protein). Fe protein has a reductase activity
while MoFe protein has nitrogenase activity. Photosynthates are transported to the nodule tissue,
where it is metabolized and ultimately reduces ferredoxin. Reduced ferredoxin transfers electron
to Fe protein which gets reduced. ATP hydrolysis within the Fe protein efficiently transfers
electron to MoFe protein. Reduced MoFe protein which has nitrogenase activity reduces N2 to
NH3. (Fig. 11.5).
As started earlier, reduction of N2 to NH3 is a six electron transfer process. The ultimate
source of electron and protons (H+) is carbohydrate translocated from leaves to nodule tissue.
The step-wise reduction of N2 to NH3 catalyzed by nitrogenase is shown below.
2H+ 2H+ 2H+

N = N —-------->
_
NH = NH —----------
-
► NH,-NH,—------------>2NH,
2 2
2e 2e 2e_ 3
Nitrogen Dimide Hydrazine Ammonia

(dinitrogen)
11.3.1.3. Nitrification
The organisms, either free-living or in symbiotic associations,which carry out biological

nitrogen fixation to form NH3 from N2, utilize the NH3 to produce their own cell’s nitrogen
components. The excess NH3 fixed may be excreted into the soil.However very little NH3 is
found in the soil. Infact in the soil NH3 is rapidly oxidized to nitrate ion (NO-3) and this NO-3 is the
main source of nitrogen for non-nitrogen fixing plants.
Two groups of soil-living bactria known as nitrifying bacteria,carry out the oxidation of
NH3to NO3-. One group, Nitrosomonas oxidizes NH3to NO2-while the other group, Nitrobacter,
oxidizes NO2- to NO3_.
7i H2 O + H+
Nitrosomonas / Nitrobacter „
NH3 + 1/2 O2-----------—------- 4 NO/ +1/2 O2 ---------------- >no3-
11.3.1.4. Nitrate and Ammonia Assimilation
Both NO3- and NH4+ (protonated form of NH3) are the sources of nitrogen for higher
plants, although the plants have a preferance for NO3-. NO3- is absorbed by the roots of plants
and is assimilated both in roots and shoots. NO3_ is first reduced to NO2"by the enzyme nitrate
reductase (NR) which is then reduced to NH4+ by the enzyme nitrite reductase (NiR) as per
following reactions:
NO3- + NAD(P)H + IT + 2e- NR » NO2" + NAD(P)+ + H2O
NO/ + 6 Fd(red) + 8H+ + 6e~ NiR > NH4+ + 6 Fd(ox) + 2H2O
NH4+ is toxic and does not accumulate in the tissue. NH4+ formed this way or by biological
nitrogen fixation is converted into amino acid and then into other nitrogenous compounds inside
the plant cells.
11.3.1.5. Denitrification
Some anaerobic soil bacteria, such as Pseudomonas and Denitrobacillus, convert nitrate
(NO/) to N2 and other gaseous nitrogen species (e.g., NO and N2O) by a process known as
denitrification. Denitrification occurs when these soil bacteria use NO/ as electron acceptor
instead of O2 during respiration. Denitrification proceeds through the following reaction sequence
by the soil denitrifying bacteria:
no3- -> no2- -> NO —> N2O -> N2

Nitrate Nitrite Nitric oxide Nitrous oxide Nitrogen
In this process the fixed nitrogen in the soil returns back into the atmosphere in the
gaseous forms of nitrogen (NO, N2O, N2).
11.4. NITROGEN CYCLE
Nitrogen exists in our environment in several forms as N2, NH3, NO/, NO/, NO, N2O and
as organic nitrogen. The continuous inter-conversion of these forms of nitrogen by physical and
biological processes is known as nitrogen cycle. The major steps in the nitrogen cycle are
described below.
Nitrogen fixation -It is the conversion of atmospheric nitrogen gas (N2) to form biologically
usable nitrogen compound. This can takes place by physical and biological processes.
Electrochemical and photochemical fixation by lightening forms NO/ by the oxidation of N2 by
O2 or O3. In the industrial fixation, N2 is converted to ammonia and nitrate salts and are used as
fertilizers. Biological N2 fixation forms NH4+ (protonated form of NH3) as has already been
described.
Nitrification - In this process NH3 is oxidized to NO/ and then to NO/ by nitrifying bacteria
as discussed earlier.
Assimilation - In this process NO3-, NO2_ and NH4+ are absorbed by the plants and are
utilized for the formation nitrogenous compounds such as amino acids, proteins, nucleic acids,
chlorophyll etc.
Ammoniafixation - This is a decaying process of dead organisms or their parts carried
out by decomposers like bacteria and fungi. The organic nitrogen compounds are converted to
NH3so that it can re-enter into the cycle.
Denitrification - This is a process by which NO3- is reduced by soil bacteria to form
gaseous nitrogen species, generally N2 or N2O, which are then escape into the atmosphere to
complete the cycle.
The steps of nitrogen cycle described above are shown in Fig. 11.6.
SAMPLE QUESTIONS
A. Choose the correction answer:
1. Most of the plants absorb nitrogen from soil in the form of.
(a) free N2 (b) Nitrites
(c) Nitrates (d) HNO3
2. Choose the micro-nutrient
(a) Sulphur (b) Manganese
(c) Calcium (d) Nitrogen
3. Choose the macronutrient
(a) Manganese (b) Phosphorus
(c) Zinc (d) Molybdanum
4. Symbiotic nitrogen fixation is done by
(a) Rhizobium (b) Clostridium
(c) Nostoc (d) Azotobacter
5. The enzyme responsible for nitrogen fixation requires.
(a) Fe and Mo (b) Mo and Ca
(c) Zn and Cu (d) Zn and Mn
6. Micro-organisms affect fertility of soil by
(a) Nitrogen fixation (b) Production of toxins
(c) Destroying harmful bacteria. (d) Retaining moisture
7. Maintenance of soil fertility without addition of nutrients is due to
(a) Activity of micro-organisms (b) Floods
(c) Favourable temperature (d) Standing crops
8. The root nodules formed in the leguminous plant have a red pigment called
(a) Hemoglobin (b) Phycocyanin
(c) Leghemoglobin (d) Chlorophyll
9. The process of conversion of ammonia into nitrate is called.
(a) Nitrification (b) Ammonification
(c) Transcription (d) Translation
10. The enzyme responsible for fixing nitrogen is called.
(a) Nitrate reductase (b) Nitrite reductase
(c) Nitrogenase (d) Aminoacid synthetase.
B. Write short notes on :
1. Essential elements
2. Hydroponics
3. Biological nitrogen fixation
4. Macronutrients
5. Micronutrients.
6. Asymbiotic nitrogen fixation.
7. Symbiotic nitrogen fixation.
8. Leghemoglobin
C. Differentiate between.
1. Macro-elements and micro elements.
2. Symbiotic and asymbiotic nitrogen fixation.

CHAPTER
PHTOSYNTHESIS
12
All forms of life in this earth depend on plants, directly or indirectly, for their food
requirements. Plants prepare their own food and serve other organisms. Heterotrophs depend
on plants for food which provide them both organic carbon and energy for growth and
development. Plants are unique in carrying out photosynthesis, the process in which carbon
dioxide with the help of water is reduced to carbohydrate by input solar energy. Photosynthesis
is the process through which solar energy is routed to the living world. It is most important for
two reasons, as the source of food for all and the oxygen released to the atmosphere makes
aerobic respiration possible. The coal deposits, the petroleum products, food, fuel, fibre, forage,
every biomass we talk about is the product of photosynthesis.
12.1. EARLY HISTORY:
In 1771, Joseph Priestley, an English chemist, performed experiments showing that

plants release a type of air that allows a candle to burn. He demonstrated this by putting a sprig
of mint into a transparent closed vessel with a burning candle until the flame went out. After
several days he extinguished candle again and it burned perfectly well in the air that previously
would not support it. In another experiment, conducted in 1772, Priestley observed that a mouse
kept in a transparent jar of air collapsed while a mouse kept with a plant in the same transparent
jar survived. These observations led Priestley to offer an interesting hypothesis that plants
restore to the air whatever breathing animals or burning candles remove. He named this as
“dephlogisticated air” which was later named as ‘oxygen’. Priestley’s work thus showed that
plants release oxygen into the atmosphere. Jan Ingenhousz, a Dutch physician, took Priestley’s
work further and demonstrated in 1779 that sunlight was necessary for photosynthesis and that
only the green parts of plants could release oxygen. During this period Jean Senebier, a Swiss
botanist and naturalist, discovered that CO2 is required for photosynthesis. Nicolas Theodore
de Saussure, a Swiss chemist and plant physiologist, showed that water is also required for
photosynthesis. Julius Robert von Mayer, a German physician and physicist, in 1845 proposed
that photosynthetic organisms convert light energy into chemical free energy.
By the end of the nineteenth century the key features of plant photosynthesis were
known. Plants could use light energy to make carbohydrates from CO2and water. Glucose, a
six carbon sugar, is often considered as an intermediate product of photosynthesis, the net
equation of photosynthesis is frequently written as:
Photosynthesis I 439
6CO2+ 12H2O + Light Energy —> C6H12O6 + 6O2+ 6H2O
Early scientists studying photosynthesis concluded that the O2 released by plants came
from CO2, which was thought to be split by light energy. In the 1930s, V. B. van Niel was aware
that some photosynthetic bacteria could use hydrogen sulfide (H2S) instead of water for
photosynthesis and that these organisms released sulfur instead of oxygen. Van Niel, among
others, concluded that photosynthesis is a redox (reduction-oxidation) process depending on
electron donor and acceptor reactions and that the O2 released during photosynthesis comes
from the photooxidation of water. The generalized equation for photosynthesis, thus, can be
written as :
6CO2 + 12H2A+ Light Energy —> C6H12O6 + 12A + 6H2O
In oxygenic photosynthesis, 12A is 6O2, whereas in anoxygenic photosynthesis, which

occurs in some photosynthetic bacteria, the electron donor can be an inorganic hydrogen donor,
such as H2S (in which case A is elemental sulfur) or an organic hydrogen donor such as succinate
(in which case, A is fumarate). Experimental evidence that molecular oxygen came from water
and not from CO2 was provided by Robert Hill in 1937. He demonstrated light-dependent O2
evolution in the absence of CO2 in isolated chloroplast thylakoids using artificial electron acceptors
such as iron salts. This has since been known as Hill reaction and the artificial electron acceptors
as Hill oxidants. Hill reaction, with iron salt as Hill oxidant, is usually written as:
isolated chloroplast thylakoid
4 Fe3+ + 2H O -------------------------------------------------- > 4 Fe2+ + O2 + 4 H+
light energy
More direct evidence for the evolution of molecular oxygen from water during
photosynthesis was provided by Ruben et al (1941) who used 18O enriched water for their
2
study on photosynthesis and demonstrated the evolution of 18O
2.
12.2. PHOTOSYNTHETIC ORGANISMS :
The organisms capable of synthesizing carbohydrate from carbon dioxide and other
inorganic raw materials using energy are termed as autotrophs. In contrast, animals and human
beings lack the ability to do so and are termed as heterotrophs.
Depending upon the source of energy utilized by the autotrophs for their organic synthesis,
these are further divided into photosynthetic autotrophs (or photoautotrophs) and
chemosynthetic autotrophs (or chemoautotrophs). Photoautotrophs use solar energy as
the primary energy source. They convert solar energy into chemical or bond energy of
carbohydrates through photosynthesis. Cyanobacteria, algae, bryophytes and all vascular plants
use water as the source of electron to reduce carbon dioxide and release oxygen to the
environment making it aerobic. This type of photosynthesis is known as oxygenic (/.e., oxygen
evolving) photosynthesis and the organisms doing so are known as oxygenic photosynthetic
organisms. Green bacteria and Green Sulfur Bacteria use light energy to extract electrons and
protons from molecules other than H2O and use those for the reduction of CO2. Since H2O is
not used as the reductant, no O2 is evolved during photosynthesis. This type of photosynthesis
is known as anoxygenic (/.e., non-oxygen-evolving) photosynthesis. The photosynthetic
bacteria are, therefore, also known as anoxygenic photosynthetic organisms.
Chemoautotrophs (none of which contain chlorophyll) obtain their energy for carbohydrate
synthesis from variety of inorganic compounds containing hydrogen, iron, sulfur and nitrogen.
In most cases these compounds combine with oxygen in the cells resulting in the production of
energy. Two groups of bacteria, called nitrifying bacteria, are well studied examples of
chemoautotrophs. One group, Nitrosomonas, converts ammonia to nitrite with O2 as the oxidizing
agent.
NH3 + 1/2 O2 -> NO; + H2O + H+ + Energy
The other group, Nitrobacter, oxidizes nitrite to nitrate.
NO/ + % O2 —> NO/ + Energy
The energy released during the oxidation of NH3 and NO/ is used for the reduction of
CO2 to carbohydrates and other carbon compounds.
12.3. PHOTOSYNTHETIC PIGMENTS :
Chlorophylls and carotenoids are the main photosynthetic pigments in plants. Both
chlorophyll-a and chlorophyll-^) are present in plants and green algae. As chlorophyll-a takes
part in photo-reaction and present in all oxygenic photoautotrophs, it is called the universal
pigment. Chlorophyll-b and carotenoids transfer their energy absorbed to the reaction center
(chl-a) for use in photosynthesis. For this reason, these are considered as accessory pigments.
Phycobiliproteins, namely phycoerythrin and phycocyanin, are the photosynthetic pigments in
red algae and cyanobacteria (blue-green algae) in addition to chlorophyll.
Carotenoids are broadly two types - carotenes and xanthophylls, p-carotene is the
abundant carotene present in all photosynthetic organisms while a-carotene is present only in
higher plants, lower vascular plants and bryophytes. The xanthophylls, such as lutein,
violoxanthine and neoxanthine, are present in higher plants. In other groups of photosynthetic
organisms, different other forms of xanthophylls are also present.
The structural formulae of some of the photosynthetic pigments are shown in Figure 1.
The basic structure of chlolorophyll is a porphyrin head and a long phytol tail. The porphyrin is
a cyclic tetrapyrrole formed by four pyrroles arranged in a cyclic fashion. Mg++is chelated in the
centre being covalently bonded to two N-atoms and coordinately bound to other two N-atoms of
the tetrapyrrole ring. The phytol tail is attached to the ring IV. In chlorophyll-a there is a methyl
residue (-CH3) in the ring II which is replaced by a formyl group (-CHO) in chlorophyll-/?.
Chlorophylls with their tail put themselves in thylakoid membrane. The carotenoids molecules
have ring structures at both the ends joined by similar type of central segment (Fig. 12.1). The
different carotenoids vary only in the structure of the rings.
12.4. PROCESS OF PHOTOSYNTHESIS - AN OVERVIEW :
The process of photosynthesis in plants and algae occurs in small organelles, known as
chloroplasts, which are located inside cells. The basic equation of photosynthesis appears
extremely simple. Water and carbon dioxide combine to form carbohydrates and molecular
oxygen, and this reaction is driven by light energy:
light energy
6CO2 + 6H2O --------------------------- » C6H12O6 + 6O2
However, the process of 2 NADPH + H*. CO?
photosynthesis is not as simple as it 2 NADF***-

Pignwnts
appears. It is carried out by a complex 8 photons /
3 ATP
series of reactions with high overall
Xi Excited ♦ 3PO2
efficiency. Pigments
[CHzOJ* HaO
Photosynthesis begins with the HP
absorption of light energy by j Photochemistry Electron transfer I
photosynthetic green pigments, called Light reaction
chlorophyll, located in membranous Fig.12.2 : Schematic presentation of light & dark

reactions of photosynthesis
structures, the thylakoids, in
chloroplasts. Light energy absorbed by accessory pigments is transferred to chlorophyll molecules
for use in photosynthesis. The absorbed light energy is used to oxidize water thereby releasing
oxygen. The resultant electrons and protons pass through a series of electron transport molecules
leading to the production of NADPH and ATP. These NADPH and ATP formed by action of
absorbed light then reduce carbon dioxide and convert it ultimately into carbohydrate by a
series of biochemical reactions taking place in the stroma of chloroplasts. These reaction steps
of photosynthesis, schematically shown in Figure 12.2, are traditionally divided into two types
of reactions for convenience of discussion: (1) Light reactions (also called light-dependent
reactions); and (2) Dark reactions (also called light-independent reactions).
12.5. LIGHT REACTIONS :
12.5.1.Light absorption :
Photosynthesis in plants is initiated by the absorption of light in the visible range

(wavelength 400 to 700 nm) by pigment molecules, mainly chlorophylls and carotenoids. Not all
wavelengths of light in the visible range are effective in photosynthesis. Absorption spectrum
(see Box I) of chlorophyll (Figure 12.3) indicates that light is mainly absorbed in the red and
blue parts of the spectrum. Therefore, light in the blue and red parts of spectrum are effective in
photosynthesis. Light moves in discrete particles, called as photons. The energy content of a
photon is called a quantum. The energy content of a photon varies with its wavelength; the
energy of photon is higher when its wavelength is shorter and vice versa. When a chlorophyll
molecule in its lowest energy or ground state absorbs a photon (represented by hv), the energy
of the photon is transferred to one of the electrons in the outermost orbit of chlorophyll molecule.
This electron, having higher energy level, is elevated to a higher orbit equivalent to its energy
level. The chlorophyll molecule is then said to be in a higher energy, or excited state as shown
below:
Chi + hv —> Chi*
ground state photon excited
chlorophyll (quantum) chlorophyll
Absorption of blue light excites the chlorophyll molecule to a higher energy state (called
as the second excited singlet state) than the absorption of red light because, as stated above,
the energy of a photon is higher when its wavelength is shorter. In the second excited singlet
state, the chlorophyll molecule is extremely unstable having the half-life of 10 12s. It very rapidly
gives up some of its energy to its surroundings as heat and comes to the first excited singlet
state. The chlorophyll molecule can directly enters into the first excited singlet state by the
absorption of a photon of red light. The first excited singlet state is much more stable than the
second excited singlet state; its half life is 10 9s. The excited chlorophyll in this state has the
inherent tendency of returning back to the ground state after dissipating the excess energy in
different ways (Figure.12.4).
Fig.12.3 : Absorption spectrum of chlorophyll-a, chlorophyll-b and lutein (a carotenoid)
1. The excited chlorophyll can return to its ground state by directly converting its
excitation energy into heat with no emission of a photon (called as radiation- less
transition). The heat is lost to the environment.
2. The excited chlorophyll can return to its ground state by releasing the excitation energy
in the form of light. This emission of light is called fluorescence. The wavelength of
fluorescent light is slightly longer (and, therefore, has lower energy) than the wavelength
of absorbed light which is required for attaining the first excited singlet state. This is
because part of the excitation energy is usually lost as heat before the fluorescent photon
is emitted. Therefore, chlorophyll fluoresces always in the red region of the spectrum
irrespective of whether blue or red light is absorbed. Chlorophyll fluoresces during energy
transition from first excited singlet state to ground state.
3. By releasing part of the excitation energy in the form of heat, the chlorophyll molecule
can attain an excitation state of lower energy, called as the triplet state. Triplet state can
Second excitation state

(second singlet)
t
1 . .
Absorption
blue
Heat
First excitation state

(first singlet)
>
o I
ZF
D)
u
i c 1
O ■Fl J-----------
c
LU 1
Absorption
1
Triplet
red
h
Chemical work
losphorescence
1 Fluorescence
Heat
Transfer
□Z \
1 /
1 \
1\
!▼...
Ground state
Fig. 12.4 : Excitation of chlorophyll and subsequent dissipation of excitation energy

not be reached directly from ground state by excitation. In the triplet state, spin of the
excited electron is reversed. The transition from singlet state to triplet state is, therefore,
called as the inter system crossing. As the probability of spin reversal is low, the triplet
state does not occur frequently. By emitting excitation energy in the form of light (called
as phosphorescence), or by heat loss, the chlorophyll molecule can return from the
triplet state to the ground state.
4. Chlorophyll in the first excited singlet state can return to the ground state by transferring
the excitation energy to a neighbouring molecule which requires lesser energy for
excitation. This energy transfer is very important during photosynthesis.
5. The fifth process is photochemistry in which the energy of excited chlorophyll is utilized
for chemical reactions. The chlorophyll molecule transfers the excited electron from the
first excited singlet state to an electron accepter. The electron accepter is reduced leaving
behind positively charged chlorophyll radical. This step is also known as charge
separation which constitute the most important step in photosynthesis.
Chi* + A ---------------------------- > Chl+ + A
BOX-I
Absorption and Action Spectrum
Light must first be absorbed in order

to interact with matter and only light that is
absorbed can be active in a photochemical
process. Absorption of the amount of light by
a molecule or substance in a nonabsorbing
solvent is measured as relative absorbance.
This is done with the help of an instrument
named as the spectrophotometer. A
molecule or substance absorbs different
wavelength of light to different extent. An Wavelength (nm)
absorption spectrum is a graph that shows Fig.BLir Absorption spectrum of
the relative absorption of light by a molecule photosynthetic pigments -and action
spectrum of photosynthesis
or substance plotted as a function of
wavelength. To explain this in a very simpler way, an absorption spectrum is a graph that
shows which wavelength of light is absorbed how much by a particular molecule or
substance. Every light-absorbing molecule has a characteristic absorption spectrum that
is often used as a key for its identification. The important photosynthetic pigments,
chlorophylls and carotenoids, have characteristic absorption spectra (Figure 12.3).
Chlorophylls absorb light in the visible range at wavelengths below 480 nm and between
550 and 700 nm but green light with

/Quantum yield
wavelengths between 480 and 550 nm are not 0-1
M-
0
absorbed. Plant chlorophylls and leaves appear 2 3
.S' -c
green to our eyes because they absorb light in S£ \___ - Absorption z\ \
5 o 0.05 \ spectrum / \\
the blue and red parts of the spectrum but green P
o
light is not absorbed and is reflected into our
n i i i
eyes. Carotenoids absorb light between 400 to 400 500 600 700
Wavelength (nm)
500 nm regions of the spectrum which give
carotenoids their characteristic orange colour. Fig.BI.2. Phenomenon of red drop.
Light must be absorbed in order to be effective in a photo process. Different

wavelengths of light are effective in a photo process to different extent. An action spectrum
is a graph that shows the effectiveness of light in inducing a particular process plotted as a
function of wavelength. To explain this in a very simpler way; an action spectrum is a graph
that shows which wavelength of light is effective how much in inducing a photo process.
Normally, the action spectrum for a light-dependent process closely resembles the absorption
spectrum of the molecule or substance which acts as the mediator for the photo process.
With reference to photosynthesis, the graph showing the effectiveness of different
wavelengths of light on the rate of photosynthesis is known as the action spectrum of
photosynthesis (Figure BI-1). The rate of photosynthesis is usually measured as the amount
of CO2 taken up or as the amount of O2 evolved. The action spectrum of photosynthesis
has pronounced peaks in the blue and red regions of the spectrum which correspond with
the absorption peaks for chlorophyll.
The action spectrum of photosynthesis in Figure BI-1 does not tell anything about
the efficacy of the absorbed photons of different wavelengths of light on the rate of
photosynthesis. This can be determined by expressing the photosynthesis rate as the
number of molecules O2 evolved or CO2 taken up per photon of light absorbed. This is
known as the quantum yield of photosynthesis. Quantum yield is a very important parameter
of the light reactions of photosynthesis and is defined as follows:
Number molecules of O2 evolved or CO2 taken up

Quantum yield = -------------------------------------------------------------------------
Total number of photons absorbed
The action spectrum of photosynthesis drawn by plotting quantum yield as the

function of different wavelengths of light (Figure BI-2) indicates that quantum yield is more
or less constant at different wavelengths of light. In other words, any photon absorbed by
chlorophyll is more or less equally effective in driving photosynthesis. However, there is a
sudden drop in the quantum yield of photosynthesis at wavelengths greater than 680 nm
(far-red light) even though light is still absorbed in that range of the spectrum. This drop in
the quantum yield of photosynthesis is known as the red drop. The phenomenon of red
drop was shown for the first time by R. Emerson and C.M. Lewis in 1943 in the green alga
Ch lore I la.
12.5.2. Electron transport:
Photo-induced charge separation, which

results in the reduction of an acceptor molecule
leaves behind an oxidized reaction centre chlorophyll
molecule. It is the beginning of flow of electron in
the photosynthetic electron transport chain. The
energy of one photon causes the release of one
electron from the excited chlorophyll molecule. This
charge separation effectively stores light energy as
redox energy and represents the actual conversion
of light energy to chemical energy. The chlorophyll
molecule involved in the primary photochemical
redox reaction is called as the reaction centre
chlorophyll.
Each reaction centre chlorophyll is associated with some 200 - 300 chlorophyll molecules
and accessory pigments such as carotenoids and xanthophylls. These pigment molecules
together form a broad surface to efficiently capture various wavelengths of light and the excitation
energy then pass from one pigment molecule to another until it eventually arrives at the reaction
centre chlorophyll. These associated pigment molecules are called as antenna. The antenna
along with the reaction centre chlorophyll molecule is known as photosystem (Figure 12.5).
The photosynthetic electron transport chain has two such photosystems (see Box II) known as
photosystem I (PS-I) and photosystem II (PS-II). The reaction centre chlorophyll of PS-I is
called P700 while that of PS-II is known as P680. These reaction centre chlorophylls absorb
maximally at 700 nm and 680 nm respectively.
BOX-II
Red Drop and Enhancement Effect
The phenomenon of red drop shown by Emerson and Lewis (see Box-I) was quite
puzzling. This is not due to decrease in light absorption because the quantum yield measures
only light that has actually been absorbed. This only indicates that light of wavelengths
greater than 680 nm is much less efficient than light of shorter wavelengths. In subsequent
experiments, Emerson and his colleagues measured photosynthesis using red and far-red
light after adjusting their fluence rates to give equal rates of photosynthesis. They observed
that the quantum yield obtained using both red and far-red light simultaneously was much
higher than the sum of the yields obtained with red and far-red light separately (Figure BII-
1). This phenomenon is known as Emerson enhancement effect or often as Emerson
effect.
These puzzling phenomena

of red drop and enhancement effect
led to the conclusion that two different
photosynthesis
Relative rate of
reaction centers or photochemical
events are involved in
photosynthesis. One event is driven
by red light (= 680 nm) and the other
driven by far-red light (>680 nm). lYY-.J
Jk ■
Optimal photosynthesis occurs when r
both events are driven Far-red off Red light Off Both lights Off
light on on on
simultaneously or in rapid
Time
succession. These two
Fig.BII.i. Emerson’s enhancement effect
photochemical events are now
known as Photosystem II and Photosystem I and they operate in series to carry out
photosynthesis optimally. Photosystem II absorbs red light of 680 nm well and is driven
very poorly by far-red light. On the other hand Photosystem I absorbs preferentially far-red
light of wavelengths greater than 680 nm.
PS-1 and PS-II operate in series in the photosynthetic electron transport chain. The
reaction centre chlorophylls of PS-1 and PS-II are special pairs of chlorophyll-a molecules.
Electron transport actually begins with arrival of excitation energy at the PS-II reaction centre
chlorophyll, P680. The excited P680 (written as P680*) passes an electron to the pheophytin
(Pheo), which is considered as the primary electron acceptor of PS-II. (Pheo is a form of
chlorophyll-a in which the magnesium has been replaced by two hydrogen atoms). The result of
this photo-oxidation event is the formation of P680+and Pheo (due to charge separation). The
electron flows from Pheo through plastoquinone (PQ) to another multiprotein complex,
cytochrome b6/f complex. From this complex the electrons are picked up by a copper-binding
protein, plastocyanin (PC).
P680+, formed by initial charge separation, is very strong oxidant and is able to extract
electrons from water. The electron that reduces P680+ is supplied by Yz which is called as the
first electron donor of PS-II. Yz is a tyrosine residue in the D1 protein of PS-II, which in turn
receives the electron from a cluster of four manganese ions bound to a small complex of
proteins called the oxygen-evolving complex (OEC). This complex is responsible for the splitting
(oxidation) of water by drawing electrons from water with the evolution of molecular oxygen and
the formation of H+. Photolysis of water takes place as per the following equation:
2H2O--------------------------- > O2 + 4H+ + 4e-
Light-driven charge separation similar to that involving PS-II reaction centre (P680) also
takes place in the reaction centre of PS-I. The PS-I reaction centre chlorophyll, P700, is first
excited to P700*, then photo-oxidized to P700+. The primary electron acceptor in PS-I is
special chlorophyll-a molecule (Ao) which then passes the electron to ferredoxin. Ferredoxin
A
P700
^Fe5B
^FNR
I
[ NADP+ ]
Cytochrome ;nadph]
b6f complex
Oxygen
evolving Photosystem I
complex
Photosystem II
STROMA
NADP+
nadph!
Reaction | Cyt b6f

center center
complex
@ synthase
LUMEN
Figure 12.6 : Photosynthetic electron transport in chloroplast thylakoid membrane. A - The Z-Scheme
and B - Topographic arrangement of electron transport chain components in the thylakoid membrane.
in turn reduces NADP+ to NADPH, a reaction mediated by the enzyme ferredoxin-NADP+-

oxidoreductase. The oxidized P700+ is reduced by withdrawing an electron from reduced
plastocyanin.
The complete photosynthetic electron transport chain in which there is a continuous

flow of electrons starting from water to NADP+, passing through the two different photosystems
and cytochrome b6/f complex is shown schematically in Figure 4.6. The scheme, in which the
components of the photosynthetic electron transport chain are arranged as per their redox
potential, is named as the Z-scheme because of its characteristic shape. (Figure 12.6 A) The
topographic arrangement of photosynthetic electron transport chain components in the thylakoid
membrane is shown in Figure 12.6 B.
12.5.3. Photophosphorylation and ATP synthesis :
NADPH is one of the main products of the

light reactions of photosynthesis. The other
important product is ATP. The formation of ATP
molecules coupled to the light-driven transfer of
electrons through the thylakoidal electron transfer
chain in the chloroplast is known as
photophosphorylation. When electron transport
takes place continuously from water to NADPH,
as shown in Figure 4.6, it is known as non-cyclic
or linear electron transport. The formation of ATP
in association with non-cyclic electron transport is
known as non-cyclic photophosphorylation. The
PS-I may transport electrons independent of PS-
II, a process known as the cyclic electron Fig.12.7 : Cyclic electron transport.
transport. In this case ferredoxin transfers the
electrons back to plastoquinone. The electron then returns to P700+ passing through cytochrome
b6/f complex and plastocyanin (Figure 12.7). This cyclic electron transport supports ATP synthesis,
a process known as cyclic photophosphorylation. This is thought to be an additional source
of ATP to support chloroplast activities. Cyclic photophosphorylation does not generate NADPH.
The molecular mechanism of ATP synthesis during photosynthesis in the thylakoid

membrane of chloroplasts can be explained through the chemiosmotic hypothesis. The detail
of this hypothesis is described in the chapter on respiration. The light-driven electron transport
creates a proton motive force across the thylakoid membrane. This proton motive force drives
the synthesis of ATP when the protons force their way into the stroma through an integral
thylakoid protein complex known as ATP synthase. This complex is also described in many text
books under the name CF0-CF1 particle (C for chloroplast) or coupling factor. It is estimated that
for 4 protons transported through ATP synthase, one ATP is synthesized. Because 12 protons
are transported for two pairs of electrons (derived from the splitting of two molecules of H2O)
transferred trough the photosynthetic electron transport chain, a total of 3 ATP molecules are
synthesized for the photooxidation of two molecules of H2O. For the splitting of one molecule of
H2O, one pair of electrons is transported and 1.5 ATP molecules are synthesized.
12.6. DARK REACTIONS :
The products of light reactions of photosynthesis, ATP and NADPH, are used for the
reduction of CO2 to carbohydrates by a series of enzyme catalyzed reactions in the stroma of
chloroplast.These stroma reactions are long thought to be independent of light and, as a
consequence, were referred to as the dark reactions of photosynthesis. However, it is now
established without any doubt that some of the enzymes of the carbon reduction reactions are
regulated by light. In darkness, about three enzymes including rubisco become inactivated and
lose their capacity of catalysis. In light, these enzymes become active and catalyze the reactions.
Therefore, CO2 reduction reactions are not independent of light and naming this biosynthetic
phase as dark reaction (or dark phase) is misleading. But for historical reasons and for ease
of discussions of the steps of photosynthesis, the terms dark reactions and light reactions
are still used in text books. But we should remember here that some steps of ‘light reactions’
are independent of light while some steps of ‘dark reactions’ are dependent upon light.
12.6.1. The C3 Cycle:
Green plants and algae reduce CO2 to carbohydrate in a series of reactions in a cyclic
manner which is known as Calvin cycle (Figure 12.8). This cycle is named after Melvin Calvin,
an American biochemist, who headed a research team to elucidate this pathway for which he
was awarded with a Nobel Prize in 1961. Since many other scientists of Calvin’s research team
also contributed significantly for the same, it is often named as Calvin-Benson cycle. However,
now people prefer to name this as photosynthetic carbon reduction (PCR) cycle or often as
reductive pentose phosphate (RPP) cycle. Calvin cycle is now commonly referred to as the
C3 cycle because the first stable product of the CO2 fixation reaction, 3-phosphoglyceric acid
(3-PGA), is a three-carbon molecule. For ease of understanding, the Calvin cycle can be
described under three reaction sequences: (a) carboxylation, (b) reduction, and (c)
regeneration.
(a) Carboxylation Phase : The PCR cycle begins with the carboxylation reaction in
which ribulose-1, 5-bisphosphate (RuBP) reacts with CO2 to yield two molecules of 3-
phosphoglyceric acid (3-PGA). This carboxylation reaction is catalyzed by the enzyme ribulose-
1, 5-bisphosphate carboxylase-oxygenase (rubisco). The first stable product of CO2 fixation
reaction in photosynthesis is 3-PGA. As 3-PGA is a 3-carbon compound, Calvin cycle is also
known as C3-cycle.
Sucrose &
ADP + Pj ATP
Fig.12.8 : Schematic presentation of of Calvin cycle
(b) Reduction Phase : In order for the Calvin cycle to operate continuously and reduce
CO2, the product of carboxylation reaction, 3-PGA, must be continuously removed and there
should be a mechanism for continuous supply of CO2 acceptor molecule, RuBP (Figure 12.8).
The 3-PGA is removed by its conversion to a triosephosphate, glyceraldehydes-3-phosphate
by a two step reaction. First 3-PGA is phosphorylated by reacting with ATP to form 1, 3-
bisphosphoglyceric acid. This reaction is catalyzed by the enzyme phosphoglycerate kinase. In
the second reaction, 1, 3-bisphosphoglyceric acid is reduced to glyceraldehyde-3-phosphate
(G-3-P) by NADPH with the release of one molecule of inorganic phosphate (Pi). This reaction
is catalyzed by the enzyme G-3-P dehydrogenase.
(c) Regeneration Phase : The product of reduction reaction, G-3-P, remains in

equilibrium with its isomer dihydroxyacetone-3-phosphate (DHAP), an isomerization reaction
catalyzed by the enzyme triosephosphate isomerase. G-3-P and DHAP together are referred to
as triosephosphates. A portion of the triosephosphate molecules through a series of reactions
are used to regenerate RuBP which is needed for the initial carboxylation reaction of Calvin
cycle. Regeneration of RuBP is crucial for the Calvin cycle to continue uninterrupted. Rest of
the triosephosphates is used through another series of reactions to form the final product of
photosynthesis, sucrose and starch.
Overall, 13 enzymes are required to catalyze the reactions of Calvin cycle (Figure12.9).
Each molecule of CO2 reduced in Calvin cycle requires 2 molecules of NADPH and 3 molecules
of ATP. To make one molecule of hexose-6-phosphate (H-6-P), the cycle has to reduce 6
molecules of CO2 using 12 molecules of NADPH and 18 molecules of ATP. The overall reaction
of Calvin cycle for the production of one molecule of hexose phosphate can be written as:
6CO2+ 11 H2o+ 12 NADPH + 18 ATP —> Hexose-6-P + 12 NADP++ 6 H++ 18 ADP + 17 Pi

(6) NADP+
Glyceraldehyde - 3 • phosphate "pool”
(6) NADPH
3-Phospho-
glycerate
F
(3) C02
(PGA)
(6) ADP Di hydroxy Di hydroxy

+ (6) Pj (DHAP)
Ribulose -1, acetone acetone
(3)
5 • bisphosphate phosphate
(DHAP)
phosphate
(DHAP)
I
Starch
&
Sucrose
Fructose - 1,
Ribulose - 5- 6 - bisphosphate
phosphate (w)
Sedoheptulose - 1
7 - bisphosphate
Erythrose - 4 -
Xylulose - 5 phosphate Fructose • 6 -
phosphate phosphate
Xylulose - 5 -
phosphate
Fig.12.9 : The Calvin Cycle. The numbers in parentheses indicate the number of molecules taking
part in the reaction. The numbers in the circles indicate the names of enzyms as follows -1: rubisco;
2: 3-phosphoglycerate kinase and glyceraldehyde-3-phosphate dehydrogenase; 3: aldolase;
4: fructorse-1,6-bisphosphatase; 5: transketolase; 6: aldolase; 7: sedoheptulose-1,7-bisphosphatase;
8&9: ribulose-5-phosphate epimerase; 10: ribose-5-phosphate isomerase; 11: ribulose-5-phosphate
kinase.
12.6.2. The C4 Pathway :
Plants that assimilate CO2 solely through

the Calvin cycle are generally known as C3 plants
because the first stable product of photosynthetic
CO2 fixation reaction is a 3-carbon compound, 3-
PGA. In certain tropical plants such as maize,
sugarcane, sorghum, amaranths etc. the first
stable product of photosynthetic CO2 fixation
reaction is oxaloacetic acid (OAA), a 4-carbon
compound. These plants are known as C4 plants
and they assimilate CO2 through a cycle of
reactions known as C4 cycle. Experiments initially
conducted by H.P. Kortschack and subsequently
by M.D. Hatch and C.R. Slack led to the
elucidation of this cycle for which it was earlier
known as Hatch-Slack-Kortschack (HSK) cycle
or, in many texts, simply as Hatch-Slack cycle.
C4 plants exhibit a number of specific anatomical, physiological and biochemical

characteristics not found in C3 plants. Leaves of most of the C4 plants have the presence of two
distinct photosynthetic tissues. In the leaves, the vascular bundles are quite close together and
each bundle is surrounded by a tightly fitted layer of cells called the bundle sheath (Figure
12.10). The mesophyll cells are loosely arranged between the vascular bundles. This type of
distinction between the mesophyll and bundle sheath photosynthetic cells is known as Kranz
anatomy.
The basic C4 cycle (Figure 12.11) consists of four phases:
(a) Carboxylation Phase : In the mesophyll cells, the fixation of CO2(as HCO3j takes
place by the carboxylation of phosphoenolpyruvate (PEP) forming oxaloacetic acid (OAA), a 4-
carbon compound. This carboxylation reaction is catalyzed by the enzyme PEP carboxylase.
(b) Transport Phase : OAA is converted into another 4-carbon compound (malic acid
and/or aspartic acid, depending upon plant species) which is transported to bundle sheath
cells.
(c) Decarboxylation Phase : The 4-carbon compound in the bundle sheath cells is
decarboxylated to generate CO2and a 3-carbon compound. The released CO2 is then reduced
to carbohydrate via the Calvin cycle which is operative in the bundle sheath cells but not in the
mesophyll cells in C4 plants.
(d) Transport and Regeneration Phase : The 3-carbon compound formed by the
decarboxylation reaction in bundle sheath cells is transported to the mesophyll cells where it is
converted back to PEP, the acceptor molecule of HCO3; utilizing photosynthetically generated
ATP.
The transport of metabolites between mesophyll and bundle sheath cells in stages (b)
and (d) above is driven by diffusion gradient along the number of plasmodesmata present
between these cells.
12.6.3. Crassulacean Acid Metabolism (CAM):
A third mechanism of CO2 fixation reactions is found in many plants growing in very dry
and often hot habitats. In these plants, stomata remain closed during the day time to minimize
water loss by transpiration which may, otherwise, be detrimental for the plants growing in dry
habitats. The stomata, however, remain open during the night time when air is cool and air
humidity is comparalively high . Through the open stomata during the night, not only CO2 enter
the leaves, the plants are also able to take some amount of water vapours from the atmosphere,
which are not possible during the day time. In order to adopt to such situation, these plants
developed a mechanism of fixing CO2, entering the leaves through diffusion, to form an organic
acid in the night time. During the following day, the organic acid is decarboxylated to release
CO2 which is then refixed by the normal photosynthetic process by the Calvin cycle to form
carbohydrates. This mechanism of photosynthetic CO2 fixation pathway was first elucidated in
plants belonging to the family Crassulaceae. Therefore, this pathway has been named as
Crassulacean Acid Metabolism (CAM) and also often described in many text books as CAM
pathway or CAM photosynthesis . However, CAM is not restricted to the family Crassulaceae
(Succulent plants like Kalanchoe, Opuntia, Bryophyllum etc.) but also found in pineapple, Agave,
vanilla and many other plants. The basic CAM pathway consists of four phases :
(a) Carboxylation phase (in the night): During the night, when the weather is cool and
humid, CO2 enters the leaves through the open stomata and is then taken up by
phosphoenolpyruvate (PEP) to from oxaloacetate. This carboxylation reaction is catalyzed by
the enzyme phosphoenolpyruvate carboxylase in the same way as in C4 metabolism. PEP is
formed from triose phosphates in the cytoplasm which are in turn formed from the metabolic
products of starch hydrolysis in the chloroplasts.
(b) Acidification phase (in the night): The oxaloacetate formed by the carboxylation
reaction is reduced to malate by malate dehydrogenase using NADH. Malate then enters the
vacuole and accumulate there as malic acid making the vacuolar content very acidic (pH about
3). This causes the nocturnal acidification of leaves.
(c) Decarboxylation and deacidification phase (in the following day): In the following
day, stomata close preventing loss of water and uptake of CO2. Leaf deacidification takes place
when vacuolar reserves of malic acid enters the chloroplast as malate and is decarboxylated by
NADP- malic enzyme forming pyruvate and CO2. Pyruvate is further metabolized in the
chloroplast to form starch.
(d) Carboxylation phase (in the following day) : The released CO2 fails to escape
from the leaves due to closed stomata. This CO2 is fixed by the enzyme rubisco to form 3-PGA
which is then further metabolized to form sugars by the Calvin cycle, as described earlier, and
finally stored as starch.
These phases of CAM are shown in Fig. 12.12.
12.7. PHOTORESPIRATION :
The first enzyme of Calvin cycle, rubisco, as the name indicates, has both carboxylase
and oxygenase activity. It means that rubisco catalyzes the fixation of both CO2 and O2. When
CO2 is fixed by the carboxylation reaction with RuBP, the product is 2 molecules of 3-PGA. But
when O2 is fixed by the oxygenation reaction with RuBP, one molecule of 3-PGA and one
molecule of phosphoglycolic acid are produced. Whether rubisco performs as carboxylation or
oxygenation reaction depends upon the ratio of CO2/O2. High ratio of CO2/O2 fixes CO2 while
low ratio fixes O2. Under normal atmospheric conditions of CO2and O2, some amount of O2 is
always fixed by rubisco reaction producing phosphoglycolic acid in the chloroplast.
Phosphoglycolic acid is subsequently metabolized in a series of reactions in the peroxisome
and mitochondrion that result in the release of CO2 and

recovery of the remaining carbon of phosphoglycolic
acid by the Calvin cycle. Thus during active
photosynthesis in light, apart from fixing CO2 by the
Calvin cycle, the leaves also consume O2 and release
CO2 similar to that happens during cellular respiration.
This light-dependent CO2 evolution and O2 consumption
is termed as photorespiration. The conventional
respiration (cellular respiration), in order to distinguish
it from photorespiration, is often named as the dark
respiration, even though it takes place both in light and
in darkness. Unlike dark respiration, which takes place
in the cytoplasm and mitochondrion, photorespiratory
metabolism is carried out involving three organelles such
as chloroplast, peroxisome and mitochondrion (Figure
12.13) . Photorespiration is prevalent in C3 plants and
by releasing CO2 it decreases the net fixation of CO2 in Fig.12.13 : Photorespiratory pathway
light during photosynthesis. Therefore, photorespiration
is considered as a wasteful process in C3 plants.
It can be recalled here that in C4 plants the product of carboxylation reaction in mesophyll
cells is transported to bundle sheath cells where it is decarboxylated releasing CO2. These
reactions serve as a CO2 concentrating mechanism in bundle sheath cells. Since rubisco is
present only in the bundle sheath cells, high CO2 concentration in these cells ensure that rubisco
functions as a carboxylase minimizing oxygenase activity. Thus in C4 plants photorespiration
does not occur or is suppressed. For this reason, the productivity of C4 plants is higher than the
C3 plants.
12.8. FACTORS AFFECTING PHOTOSYNTHESIS :
The environmental factors affecting the process of photosynthesis follow the law of
limiting factor as hypothesized by the British plant physiologist F. F. Blackman in 1905. According
to Blackman, when a process is influenced by a number of factors, the rate of the process is
limited by the slowest factor. For example, photosynthesis can be influenced by both CO2
concentration and light intensity. By increasing the CO2 concentration at a fixed intensity of
light, the rate of photosynthesis can be increased up to a particular concentration of CO2 after
which no further increase can be noticed. At this point by increasing the light intensity to another
fixed level, the rate of photosynthesis can be increased with increase in CO2 concentration. In
this example the intensity of light is the limiting factor for the rate of photosynthesis (Figure
12.14) . The implication of this hypothesis is that at any given time, photosynthesis can be
limited either by light intensity or by CO2 concentration, but not by both the factors.
There are several factors which

affect the rate of photosynthesis as
described below:
12.8.1. Light intensity :
The intensity of light influences the

rate of photosynthesis. When other factors
are not limiting, the rate of photosynthesis
increases almost linearly with increase in
light intensity (Figure 12.15). With further
increase in light intensity, the rate of
photosynthesis starts to level off and
reaches saturation indicating that factors
other than light intensity (CO2 in Figure
12.15) have become limiting to
photosynthesis. At extremely high light intensity, when leaves are unable to utilize all the
absorbed light, the rate of photosynthesis declines by a phenomenon called photoinhibition.
Photoinhibition is caused by the absorption of too much light which inactivates and damages
reaction centre of PSI I.
In the dark there is no

photosynthetic CO2 fixation (i.e. CO2
uptake) taking place by the leaves; rather
CO2 is given off by the plant because of
respiration. By convention, photosynthetic
carbon assimilation is considered as
negative at this situation (Fig. 12.15). As
the light intensity increases,
photosynthetic CO2 fixation increases until
it equals CO2 release by respiration. The
light intensity at which the rate of
photosynthetic CO2 uptake equals the
rate of respiratory CO2 release is known
as the light compensation point (Figure
12.15) . Plants do not survive below the
light compensation point.
12.8.2. Light quality :
Photosynthesis occurs only in the visible spectrum of light, the wavelength of which
ranges from about 400 nm to 750 nm. Different wavelengths of light, (i.e., different qualities of
light) are not equally effective in photosynthesis (see Box-I). Different plants show different rate
of photosynthesis under different quality of light.
12.8.3. Carbon dioxide :
Carbon dioxide is the key inorganic molecule required for photosynthesis. Photosynthesis
occurs at a very wide range of CO2 concentration. At very low CO2 concentration, photosynthesis
is strongly limited by the low CO2, while respiratory rate is unaffected. As a result, CO2 fixed by
photosynthesis is lower than the CO2 released by respiration. So there is a net efflux of CO2
from the plants. With the increase in CO2
concentration, the rate of photosynthesis
increases provided other factors are not
limiting. The CO2 concentration at which
the rate of CO 2 fixation by photosynthesis
equals the rate of CO2 release by
respiration is known as CO2
compensation point (Figure 4.16). In
C3 plants, increasing CO2 concentration
above the compensation point stimulates
photosynthesis over a wide
concentration range. On the other hand,
photosynthesis in C4 plants level off and
reach saturation at a lower CO2
concentration when compared with that
of C3 plants (Figure 12.16).
12.8.4. Water
Water is one of the raw materials used in photosynthesis. The amount of water utilized
in photosynthetic reactions is quite small. Therefore, water rarely becomes a limiting factor for
photosynthesis. However, water deficit stress reduces the rate of photosynthesis by affecting
the process indirectly. One of the indirect effects is the stomata closure which reduces the entry
of CO2 in the leaf cells.
SAMPLE QUESTIONS
A. Multiple-choice questions :
1. Oxygenic photosynthesis does not occurs in :
(a) Plants
(b) Green sulfur bacteria
(c) Bryophytes
(d) Cyanobacteria
2. Cyclic electron transfer around PS I results in the formation of:
(a) ATP (b) NADPH
(c) ATP and NADPH (d) ATP, NADPH and O2

3. In higher plant chloroplasts, the chlorophylls are located in :
(a) stroma (b) lumen of grana
(c) outer membrane (d) thylakid membrane

4. All algae generally have :
(a) Chlorophyll-a and chlorophyll-b
(b) Chlorophyll-a and 0-carotene
(c) Chlorophyll-b and 0-carotene
(d) Phycoerythrin and 0-carotene

5. In C-4 plants, the first stable product of CO2 fixation in mesophyll cells is :
(a) 3-Phosphoglycerate (b) Dihydroxyacetonephosphate
(c) Oxaloacetate (d) Phosphoenol pyruvate
6. During light absorption and emission by chlorophyll molecule, the length of fluroscent
light is :
(a) Longer than that of absorbed light
(b) Shorter than that of absorbed light
(c) Equal to that absorbed light
(d) Equal to that of phosphorescent light.
7. Electron donor to PSI is
(a) Cyt-b (b) Cyt-b6
(c) Ferredoxin (d) Plastocyanin
8. The reaction centre of PS II is :
(a) P (b) P
600 680
(c) P (d) P
700 750
9. The ions essential for photolysis of water during photosynthesis are :
(a) Mn++, Ca++and Cl (b) Mg++, Ca++ and Cl
(c) Cu++, Ca++and Mg++ (d) Fe++, Ca++and Mn++

The first reaction of photosynthesis is :
(a) Excitation of chlorophyll (b) Photolysis of water
(c) ATP formation (d) CO2 fixation.

(a) The graph showing the effectiveness of different wave lengths of light on the
photosynthetic activity of leaves is known as.
(b) In higher plants the reaction centre chlorophyll of PS I is.
(c) In C-4 plants rubisco is present in the chloroplasts ofcells.
(d) The accepter of CO2 during photosynthesis in bundle sheath cells of C-4 plants is
(e) Kranz type of leaf anatomy is seen inplants.
C. Short answer:
1. Absorption spectrum
2. Photosystem
3. Photolysis of water
4. Photophosphorylation
5. Photorespiration.
6. CAM Plants
D. Long answers :
1. Describe the light reaction of photosynthesis.
2. Explain different phases of Calvin cycle.
3. Explain different phases of C4-pathway.
4. What is photorespiration ? Give a brief idea about photorespiration.
5. Give an account of different factors affecting photosynthesis.
CHAPTER
RESPIRATION
13
The essential feature of photosynthesis, as discussed in the previous chapter, is the
conversion of solar energy into potential chemical energy which is stored in carbohydrates and
other carbon compounds. These carbon compounds are broken down inside the cell in a
controlled manner to release the stored chemical energy for utilization in various cellular functions.
This process is known as respiration or, more specifically, cellular respiration. Cellular
respiration is an oxidation process where the energy released is conserved as the high energy
terminal bonds of ATP that can be readily utilized by the cell to do work (Figure 13.1). The step
by step reactions of respiration also modify the carbohydrates to form the carbon skeletons that
make up the basic building blocks of cell structure.
Reactions releasing energy Intermediate energy-transfer Reactions consuming energy

compounds
Synthesis of biomolecules
Oxidation of
carbohydrates Osmotic work
(glucose)
Growth, differentiation,
development
Fats
Active absorption
Proteins Cyclosis
Translocation and
movement
Fig. 13.1 : The ATP cycle
The overall process of respiration and photosynthesis appears as reverse metabolic

processes and certain commonalities do exist between these processes. A comparative account
of some aspects of photosynthesis and respiration are given in Box I.
13.1. PROCESS OF RESPIRATION :
Respiration is the process of complete oxidation of carbon compounds to CO2 and H2O,
using molecular oxygen as the final electron acceptor, and the energy released being conserved
as the high energy terminal bonds of ATP. This process is also known as aerobic respiration,
since O2 is used as the final electron acceptor. Nearly all eukaryotic organisms including plants
and animals respire aerobically. In the absence of O2, yeasts, some bacteria, and even green
plants resort to incomplete oxidation of carbon compounds producing ethanol or lactic acid and
Respiration I 463
BOX-I
Comparison of some important aspects of the processes of photosynthesis and respiration
Photosynthesis Respiration
1. Takes place only in chlorophyll-containing cells 1. Takes place in all plant and animal cells
of plants
2. Takes place only in the presence of light 2. Takes place continuously both in light and in
dark
3. The raw materials for this process are CO2 and 3. The raw materials for this process are sugars
h2o and O2 (Other carbohydrates as well as fats
and proteins are used as raw materials when
soluble sugars are depleted)
4. The products of this process are sugars, water 4. The products of this process are CO2 and H2O
and O2( Soluble sugars are then used to produce
other carbohydrates and provide carbon skeleton
for the production of fats and proteins)
5. Synthesizes food materials 5. Oxidizes food materials
6. Converts light energy to chemical energy (ATP) 6. Releases energy from C-C bonds in usable form
and stores the energy in C-C bonds (ATP)
7. Results in an increase in dry mater 7. Results in a decrease in dry mater
much less amount of ATP than is produced during aerobic respiration. This process is termed
as fermentation. There are relatively a few other types of bacteria which respire in the absence
of O2, an inorganic compound being the terminal electron acceptor; this process is called
anaerobic respiration. Fermentation is also often referred to as anaerobic respiration.
Aerobic respiration is the most common type of respiration in nearly all eukaryotic
organisms. From a chemical standpoint, the overall process of aerobic respiration may be
stated as per the following general equation with glucose as the substrate:
C6H12O6 + 6O2 ---------- > 6CO2 + 6H2O + ENERGY

glucose oxygen carbon water ATP
dioxide
It may be noted here that this equation is written as a reversal of the equation for
photosynthesis. As in the case of photosynthesis, this equation is a mere representation of the
raw materials, necessary conditions, and the products of the respiratory reaction. It in no way
accounts for the large number of intermediate chemical reactions that actually occur during
cellular respiration. Direct oxidation of glucose by molecular oxygen, as shown in the equation
above, would release a large quantity of energy, all at once that would be sufficient to incinerate
the cell structure. Instead, during aerobic respiration the cell releases the large amount of free
energy from the oxidation of glucose in a series of step by step reactions in a controlled manner
in order to conserve this energy in metabolically useful forms (for example, ATP). These reactions
can be grouped into three major phases such as glycolysis, citric acid cycle, and respiratory
electron transport chain. The cellular site for glycolysis is the cytoplasm, whereas citric acid
cycle and respiratory electron transport chain occur in the mitochondrion.
Out of the three distinct phases of respiration, glycolysis is common to both aerobic and
anaerobic respiration. The product of glycolysis is pyruvate which is reduced to ethanol or lactic
acid in anaerobic respiration but is completely oxidized to CO2 and H2O through the citric acid
cycle and electron transport chain in aerobic respiration.
13.1.1. Glycolysis :
Glycolysis (Greek: glycos meaning sugar, and lysis meaning splitting) literally means
the splitting up of sugar. It represents a set of reactions in which glucose molecule is partially
oxidized into two molecules of pyruvates. The reactions of glycolysis occur in all living organisms
- both prokaryotes and eukaryotes. These reactions take place in the cytoplasm of cells and
do not require oxygen. The glycolytic pathway is also called the Embden-Meyerhoff pathway.
These biochemists charactrised the steps of glycolsis in the early 20th century.
Glycolysis is conveniently considered in two major groups of reactions. The first group is
a set of reactions by which glucose and fructose derived from storage carbohydrates are
converted to triosephosphates via fructose-1, 6-bisphosphate. This first group of reactions is
regarded as the preparatory (or investment) phase since energy in the form of ATP is consumed
during this phase. In the second set of reactions triosephosphates are converted to pyruvate,
which is the end product of glycolysis. This second set of reactions is known as pay-off (or
energy-conserving) phase, which is characterized by net gain of energy-rich molecules,
such as ATP and NADH. The reactions of glycolysis are shown in Figure 13.2.
The preparatory phase of glycolysis begins with the conversion of glucose to glucose
6-phosphate by the activity of the enzyme hexokinase (glucokinase). This phosphorylation
reaction, catalyzed by hexokinase, requires ATP and Mg++. Glucose 6-phosphate then
isomerizes to form fructose 6-phosphate being catalyzed by the enzyme hexosephosphate
isomerase. When fructose is the substrate, it is phosphorylated to fructose 6-phosphate by
the enzyme hexokinase (fructokinase) which requires ATP and Mg++ for its activity. The enzyme
phosphofructokinase, which also requires ATP and Mg++ for its activity, catalyzes the
phosphorylation of fructose 6-phosphate to form fructose-1,6-bisphosphate. This reaction is
essentially irreversible. In plants, an additional cytosolic enzyme, pyrophosphate (PPi)-
dependent phosphofructokinase is present which catalyzes the reversible inter conversion of
fructose 6-phosphate and fructose-1,6-bisphosphate. In the next step, fructose-1, 6-
bisphosphate aldolase catalyzes the conversion of fructose-1, 6-bisphosphate into two
triosephosphate molecules. One is glyceraldehyde 3-phosphate, which will proceed further
through glycolysis. Another is dihydroxyacetone phosphate, which unless otherwise used up,
is converted to glyceraldehyde 3-phosphate to proceed through glycolysis. Glyceraldehyde
Respiration I 465
Glucose
ATP
Hexokinase Mg++
. ADk
Glucose 6 phosphate
Phosphohexose
Mg++
isomerase a>
tn
(U
Fructose 6 phosphate .c
o_
ATP LU
o
Phosphofructokinase <
I
< ADP a.
Q
Fructose 1 : 6 bisphophate a.
Dihydroxyacetone w = Glyceraldehyde
3-phosphate Isomerase 3-ohosohate
Glyceraldehyde-3-phosphate
dehydrogenase
1, 3-bisphosphoglycerate
ADP
Phosphoglycerlc
acid kinase. Mg’’
ATP"
3-Phosphoglycerate
0)
tn
05
.c Phosphoglycero
LU a.
cn £ mutase
<
x
o
Q_ 2-Phosphoglycerate
++
Enolase
H.O
Phosphoenol pyruvate
ADP Mgi++
Pyruvate kinase
ATP “4
Pyruvate
Fig. 13.2 : Two phases of glycolysis

3-phosphate and dihydroxyacetone phosphate are inter-convertible, an equilibrium reaction

catalyzed by the enzyme triosephosphate isomerase.
In the pay-off phase of glycolysis, glyceraldehyde 3-phosphate dehydrogenase

catalyzes the oxidation of glyceraldehyde 3-phosphate to produce 1,3-bisphosphoglycerate
with the integration of one inorganic phosphate molecule. In this reaction NAD+ removes two
ITfrom glyceraldehydes 3-phosphate forming NADH + H+and sufficient free energy is released
to allow the phosphorylation (using inorganic phosphate) of glyceraldehyde 3-phosphate to
produce 1, 3-bisphosphoglycerate. In the next step, 1, 3-bisphosphoglycerate transfers the
phosphate on its carbon-1 to a molecule of ADP, yielding ATP and 3-phosphoglycerate. This
reaction is catalyzed by the enzyme phosphoglycerate kinase. This type of ATP synthesis,
involving the direct transfer of phosphate group from a substrate molecule to ADP to form
ATP, is traditionally referred to as substrate-level phosphorylation. The enzyme
phosphoglyceratemutase catalyzes the conversion of 3-phosphoglycerate to 2-
phosphoglycerate and then the enzyme enolase catalyzes the removal of water from 2-
phosphoglycerate forming phosphoenolpyruvate. The enolphosphate in phosphoenolpyruvate
has the properties of a high-energy bond. Pyruvate kinase irreversibly catalyzes the transfer
of phosphate group from phosphoenolpyruvate to ADP forming ATP and pyruvate.
Each glyceraldehyde 3-phosphate molecule, on being converted to pyruvate by a series

of reactions during the pay-off phase, produces 2 molecules of ATP and 1 molecule of NADH
+ H+. So one glucose molecule when converted to pyruvate by glycolysis can produce 4 molecules
of ATP and 2 molecules of NADH + H +. During the preparatory phase, activation of glucose (or
fructose) to form fructose-1, 6-bisphosphate uses 2 molecules of ATP. Hence, there is a net
gain of 2 molecules of ATP and 2 molecules of NADH + H+ when 1 molecule of glucose (or
fructose) is converted to 2 molecules of pyruvate during glycolysis.
13.1.2. Metabolic Fate of Pyruvate :
Pyruvate is the end product of glycolysis. The sequence of reactions leading to the
formation of pyruvate from glucose is the common pathway occurring during anaerobic and
aerobic respiration. Depending upon the absence or presence of molecular oxygen and the
cellular metabolic need, pyruvate takes up different routes for its metabolism (Figure 13.3).
In the absence of molecular oxygen, respiratory electron transport chain and oxidative
phosphorylation can not function in the mitochondrion because molecular oxygen is the terminal
electron acceptor for these two highly coordinated processes (see later in the chapter). As a
result the oxidation of NADH to form NAD+ does not take place. There are limited amount of
NAD+ available in the cell. Once all the NAD+ becomes tied up in the reduced state (NADH), the
reaction catalyzed by NAD+-dependent glyceraldehyde 3-phosphate dehydrogenase and,
therefore, glycolysis can not continue to operate. Under the situation of unavailability of molecular
oxygen, glycolysis is the main source of chemical energy (ATP) necessary for cell survival.
Respiration I 467
Consequently, NAD+ must be

regenerated for glycolysis to proceed.
To overcome this problem, different
organisms and different cell types
metabolize pyruvate by fermentation
pathways, which are localized in the
cytosol, to regenerate NAD+. Two
fermentation pathways are of prime
importance: alcohol fermentation and
lactic acid fermentation.
Under anaerobic conditions,

yeast and several other microorganisms
produce ethanol from pyruvate by
fermentation pathways. The first step is
the decarboxylation of pyruvate to produce acetaldehyde. This reaction is catalyzed by the
enzyme pyruvate decarboxylase. In the second step alcohol dehydrogenase catalyzes the
reduction of acetaldehyde to ethanol by NADH and regenerates NAD+. Higher plant tissues or
organs are often subjected to anaerobic conditions, for example, plant roots under flooded soil,
and produce ethanol from pyruvate. A variety of microorganisms reduce pyruvate to lactate by
a process called lactic acid fermentation. This reaction also takes place under anaerobic
conditions in some plant tissues and under oxygen limiting conditions in animal muscles. The
reduction of pyruvate by NADH to form lactate and regenerate NAD+ is catalyzed by the enzyme
lactate dehydrogenase.
Under aerobic conditions, pyruvate enters the mitochondrial matrix where it is

decarboxylated, oxidized, and the resultant acetyl group is transferred to coenzyme A (CoA) to
form acetyl CoA. In this oxidative decarboxylation reaction, catalyzed by pyruvate dehydrogenase
complex, NAD+ is reduced to NADH and CO2 is released.
Pyruvate + NAD+ + CoA —> Acetyl CoA+ CO2 + NADH + H +
The acetyl group of acetyl CoA then enters the citric acid cycle where it is completely
oxidized to release more energy than that is possible under anaerobic respiration. Thus the
reaction catalyzed by pyruvate dehydrogenase complex is the link between glycolysis and citric
acid cycle.
13.1.3. Citric Acid Cycle :

The German-born British biochemist Hans A. Krebs in 1937 discovered the citric acid
cycle (so named because citric acid is the early intermediate of the cycle) that usually occurs in
the mitochondria and oxidizes pyruvate to CO2 and H2O. The citric acid cycle is also known as
the tricarboxylic acid (TCA) cycle (because tricarboxylic acids, such citric acid and isocitric
Pyruvate
CoASH —---------- NAD+ Pyruvate
dehydrogenase
CO2 NADH + H +
Acetyl CoA CoASH

Citrate
Malate synthase
dehydrogenase Oxaloacetate
Citrate
NADH + H+
NAD+ Aconitase
Malate
Isocitrate
Isocitrate
+ dehydrogenase
Oxoglutarate
dehydrogenase
Fig.13.4 : Critic Acid Cycle (Krebs Cycle)
acid, are the early intermediates of the cycle) or the Krebs cycle, in honour of its discoverer.
Hans Krebs was awarded the Nobel Prize in physiology and medicine in 1953 for his discovery
of the citric acid cycle. The reactions of citric acid cycle are presented in Figure 13.4.
The citric acid cycle begins with the condensation of two-carbon acetyl group from
acetyl CoA with the four-carbon oxaloacetate to form the six-carbon citrate and CoA is released.
This irreversible reaction is catalyzed by the enzyme citrate synthase. Citrate is then isomerized
to isocitrate by the enzyme aconitase. The next two successive oxidative decarboxylation
reactions, each of which reduces one molecule of NAD+ to NADH and releases one molecule
of CO2, are catalyzed by isocitrate dehydrogenase and 2-oxoglutarate dehydrogenase complex,
respectively, yielding succinyl CoA. The latter reaction is similar to the one catalyzed by pyruvate
dehydrogenase complex in which 2-oxoglutarate is decarboxylated, oxidized and the resultant
succinate group is transferred to CoA to form succinyl CoA. The thioester bond of succinyl CoA
is rich in energy. This free energy is conserved in the terminal phosphoester bond of ATP (in
plants) or GTP (in animals, which can then be converted to ATP enzymatically, if required) by
substrate-level phosphorylation in a coupled reaction catalyzed by succinate thiokinase (also
known as succinyl CoA synthetase). The succinate formed is oxidized to fumarate by succinate
dehydrogenase, the only enzyme of Krebs cycle bound to inner mitochondrial membrane and
a component of mitochondrial electron transport chain. The FAD (flavin adenine dinucleotide)
is reduced to FADH2 is covalently bound to the active site of succinate dehydrogenase. In the
Respiration I 469
next reaction, catalyzed by fumarase, fumarate reacts with water to form L-malate. Malate is
then oxidized to regenerate oxaloacetate and NADH is formed from NAD+. This reaction is
catalyzed by the malate dehydrogenase. The oxaloacetate regenarated can now condense
with another molecule of acetyl CoA to continue the cycling of citric acid cycle.
In summary, stepwise oxidation of one molecule of acetyl CoA through the citric acid
cycle releases 2 molecules of CO2. The free energy released during the oxidation reactions is
conserved in the form of 3 molecules of NADH and 1 molecule of FADH2. One molecule of ATP
is also produced by the substrate-level phosphorylation. Two molecules of water are consumed
during the operation of the cycle. Although formation of acetyl CoA from pyruvate is not part of
the citric acid cycle, one should be reminded here that during this reaction 1 molecule of CO2
is released and one molecule of NADH is produced. Therefore, oxidation of one molecule of
pyruvate inside the mitochondrion produces, in total, 4 molecules of NADH, 1 molecule of
FADH2 and 1 molecule of ATP, and 3 molecules of CO2 are also released.
13.1.4. Electron transport chain :
The transfer of electrons from NADH and FADH2 to oxygen involves a sequence of
electron carriers arranged in an electron transport chain (Figure 13.5). The electron carriers
with their associated enzymes making up the electron transport chain are organized
predominantly into four large multimolecular complexes, numbered as complex Ito IV, and two
mobile carriers located in the inner mitochondrial membrane. Electrons from NADH enter the
electron transport chain through complex I, known as NADH-ubiquinone oxidoreductase. This
complex has a tightly bound flavin mononucleotide (FMN). This complex transfers the electron
received from NADH to ubiquinone. Ubiquinone also receives electrons from complex II
(succinate dehydrogenase). Succinate dehydrogenase oxidizes succinate to fumerate and the
ADP ♦ P, ATP
reducing equivalents are transferred to ubiquinone via FADH2 which is bound to complex II.
Ubiquinone is a mobile carrier highly soluble in lipid and diffuses freely in the hydrophobic
interior of the membrane. Upon receiving 2 electrons from NADH and 2 protons from the
matrix side of the membrane, ubiquinone is reduced to ubiquinol. Ubiquinol (the fully reduced
form of ubiquinone) then transfers the electrons to complex III and the protons (H+) are released
into the intermembrane space of the mitochondrion. Complex III is known as cytochrome c (cyt-
c) reductase and contains of cyt-b and cyt-c, and iron-sulphur protein. Complex III then passes
the electrons to cyt-c, which is a mobile electron carrier located on the outer surface (i.e., facing
the intermembrane space) of the inner mitochondrial membrane. Cyt-c, in turn, transfers the
electrons to complex IV, also known as cyt-c oxidase, which contains copper ion, and cyt-a and
cyt-a3. Electrons are transferred from cyt-c to cyt-a, then to cyt-a3 and finally to molecular oxygen
which is the terminal electron accepter in mitochondrial electron transport chain. As electrons
are transferred via complex IV, protons are simultaneously transferred from the matrix side of
the inner mitochondrial membrane to the intermembrane space of the mitochondrion.
13.1.5. Oxidative phosphorylation and ATP synthesis :
Passage of an electron pair down the electron transport chain releases free energy
which is used to phosphorylate ADP molecules with inorganic phosphate (Pi) and thus forms
ATP. The formation of ATP molecules coupled to the transfer of electrons, derived from the
oxidation of organic compounds, through the mitochondrial electron transport chain is called as
oxidative phosphorylation. The molecular mechanism of this ATP synthesis is best explained
through the chemiosmotic hypothesis proposed by Peter Mitchell in 1961. For this revolutionary
hypothesis, Peter Mitchell was awarded the Nobel Prize in chemistry in 1978. The essential
feature of this hypothesis is that during electron transport, a proton gradient is formed across
the membrane which results in the generation of a proton motive force. It is the proton motive
force of the gradient which drives the synthesis of ATP when protons force their way through an
integral membrane protein complex known as the coupling factor (Fig. 13.5).
Figure 13.5 shows the vectorial transfer of protons from the matrix side of the inner
mitochondrial membrane to the intermitochondrial space when electrons are transferred through
complexes I, III and IV. A total of 10 protons are transferred when two electrons are transported
from NADH to oxygen molecule via the components of the electron transport chain. For the
transport of electrons coming from succinate via FADH2 which bypasses complex I, 6 protons
are transported per two electrons transferred. This establishes a proton motive force across the
inner mitochondrial membrane. This proton motive force drives the synthesis of ATP when the
protons force their way into the matrix through an integral membrane protein complex known as
ATP synthase. This complexis also described in many text books under the name Fo-F1 particle
or coupling factor. It is estimated that for 3 protons transported through ATP synthase, one ATP
is synthesized. Because 10 protons are transported for each pair of electrons transferred trough
the chain, a total of approximately 3 ATP molecules are synthesized for each molecule of NADH
Respiration I 471
oxidized in the mitochondrial electron transport chain. For the oxidation of each molecule of
NADH formed in the cytoplasm during glycolysis and FADH2 formed inside mitochondria during
citric acid cycle, 2 molecules of ATP are formed since complex I is bypassed. A balance sheet
of total ATP formed for each molecule of glucose oxidized during cellular aerobic respiration is
shown in Table 13.1.
13.2. AMPHIBOLIC PATHWAY :
We have discussed in the previous pages that during respiratory metabolism, glucose
molecule is oxidized step-wise and the released energy is used by the organism for various
work including synthesis of biomolecules (see Fig. 13.1). Although glucose is the most favoured
substrate for respiration, other carbohydrates also used as respiratory substrates. Different
types of carbohydrates such as disaccharides (e.g., sucrose) and polysaccharides (e.g., starch
in plants and glycogen in animals) are enzymatically hydrolyzed to form the simplest form of
carbohydrate, the monosaccharides. The monosaccharides produced by hydrolysis of starch
(plant) or glycogen (animal) are glucose. Glucose-1-phosphate is also produced by the
phosphorolytic degradation of starch and maltose. Hydrolysis of sucrose produces the mixture
of glucose and fructose. Glucose, fructose and glucose-1-phosphate enter the first common
phase respiration known as glycolysis.
Fats are generally used as respiratory substrate after the exhaustion of carbohydrate
reserve. Fatty acids are oxidized to give acetyl CoA, which enters the respiratory metabolism
through the citric acid cycle. Proteins are used as respiratory substrates only when carbohydrate
and fat reserves are exhausted. Proteins are hydrolyzed to form amino acids which are then
deaminated to form ketoacids before entering into the citric acid cycle. The entry points of
different substrates of respiration into the respiratory metabolic pathways are shown in Fig.
13.6. Because carbohydrates, lipids and proteins are degraded during cellular respiration,
traditionally, respiratory metabolism is considered as catabolic process.
However, citric acid cycle has anabolic role as well. When required by the cell, the
intermediates of respiratory metabolism are diverted for the synthesis of various molecules
including the ones degraded by this pathway. Oxaloacetate is removed from citric acid cycle
for the synthesis of glucose when glucose is required by the cell and fats and proteins are
available. Citrate provides the precursors for the biosynthesis of fatty acids and sterols.
Oxaloacetate, phosphoenolpyruvate and 2-oxoglutarate provide the carbon skeletons for the
synthesis of various amino acids. Succinyl-CoA is withdrawn from citric acid cycle for the
synthesis of porphyrins, hemoglobin and chlorophyll. Purines and pyrimidines ultimately derived
their carbon skeleton from 2-oxoglutarate and oxaloacetate. The anabolic role of citric acid
cycle is shown in Fig. 13.7.
Because the respiratory metabolic pathway has both catabolic and anabolic roles in
cellular metabolism, this is called as amphibolic pathway. Citric acid cycle is a very good example
of amphibolic pathway.
Respiration I 473
TABLE-13.1
Balance sheet of ATP formation for the complete oxidation of one

molecule of glucose during aerobic respiration in plants.
Reaction ATP formed ATP consumed Net gain

Glycolysis
- 1 ATP
1. Glucose —> Glucose-6-P
- 1 ATP
2. Fructose 6-P—>Fructose-1,6-BisP
3. 1,3-Bisphospoglyceraldehyde > 2 NADH x 2 ATP = 4 ATP

1,3-Bisphosphoglycerate
4. 1,3-Bisphosphoglycerate—> 2 ATP
3- Phosphoglycerate
5. Phosphoenolpyruvate—> Pyruvate 2 ATP
Total for Glycolysis 8 ATP 2 ATP 6 ATP
6. Pyruvate —> Acetyl CoA 2 NADH x 3 ATP= 6 ATP - 6 ATP
Krebs cycle
7. Isocitrate—> 2-Oxoglutarate 2 NADH x 3 ATP = 6 ATP
8. 2-Oxoglutarate—>Succinyl CoA 2 NADH x 3 ATP = 6 ATP
9. Succinyl CoA—>Succinate 2 ATP
10. Succinates* Fumerate 2 FADH2 x 2 ATP = 4 ATP
11. Malates*Oxaloacetate 2 NADH x 3 ATP = 6 ATP
Total for Krebs cycle 24 ATP - 24 ATP
Grand Total 38 ATP 2 ATP 36 ATP
13.3. RESPIRATORY QUOTIENT :
During aerobic respiration, O2 is consumed and CO2 is released. The ratio of the amount
of CO2 evolved to the amount of O2 consumed in respiration is called the respiratory
quotient (RQ).
amount of CO, evolved
RQ = ---------------------------------------
amount of O2 consumed
The value of the RQ depends upon the type of substrate used for respiration. Generally
carbohydrates are used as the substrates for respiration. Complete oxidation of carbohydrates
during aerobic respiration consumes O2 and releases CO2 in equal amounts as per the following
equation:
C6H12O6 + 6O2 ----- > 6CO2 + 6H2O + ENERGY
Therefore, for carbohydrates the RQ is 1.
The chemical composition for fats differs from that of carbohydrates in that fats contain
considerably fewer oxygen atoms in proportion to atoms of carbon and hydrogen. The fatty
acids, which are formed by the hydrolysis of fats, are used as respiratory substrates. The
overall equation for the complete oxidation of a common fatty acid such as palmitic acid during
aerobic respiration is given below.
C16H32O2 + 23 O2--------> 16 CO2 + 16 H2O
The RQ of palmitic acid is 16 CO2 / 23 O2 = 0.696 (~0.7)
Proteins are composed of amino acids which in turn are composed of carbon, hydrogen,
oxygen, nitrogen and also sulfur. The respiratory quotient for protein varies from 0.8 to 0.9.
The value of RQ usually ranges from 1.0 (for pure carbohydrate oxidation) to ~0.7 (for
pure fat oxidation), the RQ value for proteins being 0.8 to 0.9.
Respiration I 475
SAMPLE QUESTIONS
A. Multiple-choice questions :
1. The first reaction step in glycolysis, that produces ATP, is catalyzed by the enzyme,
(a) Hexaokinase (b) Pyruvate kinase
(c) Phosphoglycerate kinase (d) Phosphofructokinase
2. The reaction which links glycolysis with Krebs cycle is catalyzed by :
(a) Glutamate dehydrogenase (b) Pyruvate dehydrogenase complex
(c) Citralilyase (d) Pyruvate kinase
3. Which of the following respiratory substrates produces per mole the highest number
of ATP molecules
(a) Glucose (b) Sucrose
(c) Strach (d) Fatty acid
4. The enzyme which splits 6-C compound to 3-C compound during glucolysis is :
(a) Fumarase (b) Aldolase
(c) Ligase (d) Carboxylase.
5. Glycolysis takes place in
(a) Nucleus (b) Vacuole
(c) Cytoplasm (d) Mitochondria
6. The respiratory quotient, when carbohydrates are used as respiratory substrate, is:
(a) 1.0 (b) 0.7
(c) 0.9 (d) 0.3

1. Anaerobic respiration is often known as.
2. The synthesis of ATP involving the direct transfer of phosphate group from a substrate
molecule to ADP is called as.
3. The formation of ethanol from pyrurate is catalyzed by the enzymesand alcohol
dehydrogenase.
4. The reactions of Krebs cycle takes place inside.
C. Short answer type questions :

1. Alcoholic fermentation.
2. Lactic acid fermentation
3. Substrate level phosphorylation
4. Chemiosmotic hypothesis
5. Respiratory Quotient
6. Oxidative phosphorylation.
D. Long answer type questions :

1. Describe the reaction steps of glycolysis.
2. Describe the metabolic fates of pyruvate.
3. Describe the reaction steps of Krebs cycle.
4. Describe the respiratory electron transport chain and explain the mechanism of
ATP synthesis.
PLANT GROWTH AND CHAPTER
DEVELOPMENT 14
14.1. SEED GERMINATION :
Germination is the process by which the dormant embryo wakes up. In all mature
angiospermic seeds, the embryo lies in a dormant state after fertilization and consequent
developments. During this period, the embryo exists at its minimal physiological activity. As
soon as the necessary conditions are created, the dormancy is broken and the phenomenan of
germination begins. Like all growth processes, the process of germination is irreversible. The
process of germination include all changes that take place from the time when the dry seed is
placed under suitable conditions to the time when the seedling becomes established in the soil
or any other substratum.
Generally, the radicle grows out first during germination and forms root. It is followed by
growth of plumule to form shoot. There are 3 different types of seed germination, (i) epigeal, (ii)
hypogeal, (iii) viviparous
(i) Epigeal germination
In this, the cotyledons are raised out of the soil and generally become green and
photosynthetic. In dicots, they are pushed up by rapid extension of hypocotyl before growth
of the epicotyl. Epigeal germination occurs in bean, caster, mustard, tamarind, sunflower
etc. (Fig.14.1)
Tap root
Fig.14.2 : Stages of hypogeal germination

of gram seed.
Plant Growth and Development I 477
(ii) Hypogeal germination
In this type of genmination, the cotyledons remain underground. Hypocotyl growth is

restricted. The epicotyl grows to raise the first leaves out of the soil. Hypogeal germination
occurs in dicotyledenous seeds of gram, pea, mango, ground nut etc and in monocotyledons
like rice, maize, wheat etc. (Fig. 14.2)
(iii) Viviparous germination
Generally seen in mangrove plants like Rhizophora, Sonneratia. These plants generally
grow in salty areas, sea coasts and deltas. Seeds cannot germinate in such habitats due to
excessive salt and deficiency of oxygen. In this type, seeds germinate while still attached to the
parent plant. The seed does not undergo dormancy. The embryo emerges out of the fruit with
a massive radicel pointing downwards. As the weight increases the seedling separates and
falls down into the mud. The lateral roots then develop from radicel to help anchorage of the
seedling (Fig. 14.3).
Fig. 14.3 : Stages of Viviparous germination.
Factors affecting seed germination :
For germination of any viable seed, the following conditions are necessary.
Water: Water is very essential for germination. No seed can germinate unless it gets
ample amount of water. As soon as the seed is soaked in water, it absorbs water to swell. When
the moisture content of the cells is increased, their physiological activities are accelerated. The
reserve food materials present either in the endosperm or the cotyledens of the seed are
hydrolysed to simpler forms and are made available to the embryo to initiate growth.
Oxygen : The availability of oxygen in sufficient quantity is also another important facter
in the germination. It is essential for respiration and all physiological activities. When a seed
absorbs water and becomes activated, the rate of aerobic respiration increases manifold and a
lot of oxygen is consumed.
Temperature : Like all other physiological activities, germination is affected by

temperature. There is minimum and a maximum temperature beyond which germination cannot
take place. Within this range, there is a certain optimum temperature where conditions for
germination is most congenial. This range varies from plant to plant. Seeds are not usually
expected to germinate below 0°C and above 50°C and the optimum temperature is 25-30°C.
Light: Light is not considered as an essential factor since germination takes place even
without light. Light affects the germination of different seeds in different ways. Generally, seeds
are categorised under three groups based on their response to light.
Positively photoblastic - These seeds would not germinate in the absence of light, e.g.,
lettuce.
Negatively photoblastic - These seeds germinate under the conditions of total darkness.
If kept under lighted conditions, they do not germinate, e.g., pumpkin.
Photoblastic neutral - These seeds germinate equally well under darkness as well as in
light conditions, e.g., cucumber, tomato.
Mechanism of germination :
When all factors necessary for germination(water, oxygen, temperature, light) are
available, then germination takes place. Take for example, cereal grains such as grain of maize.
Water penetrates the permeable seed coat and get into the seed, even into the embryo within
the seed. The embryo, then, becomes active and synthesizes mRNA which in turn synthesizes
various enzyme proteins. Gibberellic acid is discharged into the aleurone. In the aleurone,
gibberellic acid induces synthesis of a number of hydrolases which mobilize reserve materials.
For example, a-amylase is one of such enzymes which degrades starch. They also comprise
nucleases and proteases which breakdown nucleic acids and proteins, respectively. As a result
of the activity of nucleases, cytokinins contained in the nucleic acids are set free. The proteases
release amino acids including tryptophan from which IAA is formed.
Cytokinins and IAA now act on the embryo. The cytokinins induce cell division and IAA
cell elongation. The embryo so induced starts to grow and bursts its seed coat. It is helped also
by pectinases and cellulases. First the radicles appear out of the seed, then, the coleoptile. As
a result of gravity, IAA migrates underside of both the organs. This, in turn, leads to reactions
which are geotropically different owing to the different sensitivity of coleoptile and radicle. The
root turns downwards and is positively geotropic, the coleoptile turns upwards and is negatively
(3> (4)
HydrolaMs HydrotaWi
e^. a-Arnyteifl IVtNileflsei

<-* cytokinin?)
♦ faMMfltt
<—r*-lAA>
(5J
CytoKinin
Fig.14.4 : Stimulation of embryo to cell division, cell elongation and seedling formation
geotropic. As soon as the coleoptile has broken through the soil, its photosynthetic apparatus
differentiates. This marks the completion of the seedling stage (Fig-14.4)
14.2. GROWTH :
Growth is a typical characteristic of all living

organisms. It is a permanent and irreversible change in size,
length or volume and dry weight of an organ or its parts or
even of an individual cell. Generally, growth is associated
with high degree of metabolic activities which include both
anabolic and catabolic reactions. During growth the rate of
anabolism is more than catabolism.
Growth is unique in plants because the plants have

the capacity for unlimited growth throughout their life. In
plants growth is restricted to different meristems located in
specific positions. Meristematic cells are having the power
of active division which help the plant to grow. Thus plants
have the capacity for indeterminate growth; that is, they
grow more or less indefinitely. In some plants, such as corn Fig. 14.5 : Locations of root epical
meristem, shoot apical meristem and
and sunflower after flowering vegetative growth seases. vascular cambium. Arrows indicate
Such plants exhibit determinate growth. the direction of growth.
The meristems present in the apical positions of the root or shoot are responsible for
the increase in length, which attributes to the primary growth of the plant. In dicot plants, some
meristems appear later called lateral meristems (cambium) which also help in growth known as
secondary growth. This type of growth helps in increase in the girth of the plant (Fig. 14.5).
Measurement of Growth :
Rate of growth can be measured by

various ways. Any one of the following
measures can be suitably applied in
determining growth rate and total growth of
the individual organs of a plant or the entire
plant.
(a) Increase in weight; (b) Increase

in volume; (c) Increase in height; (d) Increase
in the number of cells produced; (e) Increase
in surface area.
The standard instruments like

auxanometer can be conviniently used to
measure (Fig. 14.6) the rate of growth. The
criterion used by this instrument is to
measure the growth by increase in length. The increase in size per unit time is referred to as
relative growth rate or RGR. It can be calculated from the growth curve. The increase in length
may not always be accompanied by an increase in weight or cell number. It may occur only due
to cell elongation. Therefore, RGR is commonly measured in terms of increase in dry weight.
Phases of Plant Growth :

The plant growth takes place in three different
phases i.e. meristematic (phase of cell division),
elongation (phase of elongation) and maturation (phase
of differentiation).
The meristematic phase is observed in the shoot
and root tips of the plants where meristems divide
constantly. Due to this, it is also called phase of cell
division. The cells formed in this phase show dense
protoplasm, prominent nucleus, thin cell walls with
plasmodesmata and high respiration rates.
The elongation phase is situated just next to the
meristematic zone (Fig. 14.7). The cells of this phase are
marked with the increase in number and size of vacuoles,
cell enlargement and new cell wall deposition.
The maturation phase is present next to the zone of elongation. In this phase the enlarged
cells undergo structural and physiological changes to differentiate into a particular or special
type of cell. During this phase the cells attain their maximum size in terms of wall thickening and
protoplasmic differentiations. After differentiation, the cells so formed remain unchanged till
the end of life.
Plant Growth Rates :
The organisms or the parts of an organism can produce more cells in a variety of ways.
The increase in growth per unit time is defined as the growth rate. This growth rate can be
defined mathematically i.e either arithmetical or geometrical (Fig. 14.8).
(a) Arithmetic growth : In this type the growth occurs at a constant rate from the
beginning and progresses arithmetically. After mitotic cell division only one of the daughter cells
divides continuously whereas other cell undergoes differentiation and becomes mature. If we
plot a graph to study the growth pattern in root elongation by taking length of the organ of plant
at Y axis against the time at X axis, a linear curve is obtained.
(b) Geometric growth : In this type every cell divides with all the daughters growing
and dividing again. The examples of plants and microorganisms can be considered to study the
pattern of geometrical growth.
©:
First division
of zygote
I
©“
I
© Geometric growth
—
Arithmetic growth Cells capable of division
O = Cells that lose capacity to divide
Fig 14.8 : Stages of embryonic development showing geometric and arithmetic growth phases.
Growth of a plant in early stage is slow, which gradually increases to a maximum and
then rapidly decreases which ultimately stops. This can be studied under three phases: (Fig. 14.9)
(i) Lag phase or initial slow phase of

growth rate.
(ii) Log phase or exponential phase

where growth rate becomes very
rapid. This period of rapid growth is
called the grand period of growth.
However, such a growth cannot be
sustained for long and growth reaches
to the next phase.
(iii) Stationary phase or steady state

growth where the rate of growth
remains almost static due to some Fig.14.9 : A Sigmoid curve to describe the
limiting factors such as space, food, general growth pattern of higher plants and
plant organs.
accumulation of toxins, etc.
If a graph will be plotted by taking these three phases, ‘S’ shaped curve or Sigmoid
growth curve will be resulted. But, a tree showing seasonal activities does not show a typical S-
shaped curve. In this, the curve will show small steps indicating stoppage and resumption of
growth every year.
One can compare quantitatively the growth of living system by two ways.
(i) Absolute growth rate : This is the measurement and comparison of total growth
per unit time.
(ii) Relative Growth Rate : The growth of the given system per unit time expressed
per unit initial parameter is called relative growth.
Growth per unit time
Relative Growth Rate =------------------------------------------- X 100
Initial size
Conditions of Growth :
There are many factors which affects the plant growth include:
(a) Nutrient supply : Green plants require several mineral ions and other essential
elements for normal growth and development. These nutrients come from the soil for
manufacturing of food. Growth ceases when the nutrient supply becomes limiting.
(b) Water: Water is a medium for all chemical reactions and physiological processes.
Water is essential for photosynthesis. Early growth which is due to the turgid conditions of the
cells require plenty of water. Under conditions of water scarcity, plant growth is severely impaired.
On the other hand, excess of water in the soil may cause waterlogging, resulting anaerobic
conditions in the roots Thus, growth is severely affected.
(c) Oxygen : Oxygen is necessary for cellular respiration in the plants. Food materials
are broken down in the process of respiration and energy is released in the form of ATP molecules.
This is the utilizable form of energy for the living cells. This energy is used for various activities
of the cell and directly take part in the growth processes.
(d) Temperature : Temperature of 25-30°C is optimum for the proper growth of most of
the plants. If there is any deviation from this range, there could be detrimental consequences
on the growth of the plant. For example: temperature above 45°C hinders plant growth due to
excessive transpiration, denaturation of enzymes and coagulation of protoplasm.
(e) Light: Light influences many physiological and growth processes of plants. Plants
which can grow well under bright, direct sunlight and grow poorly in shady conditions are called
photophilic plants. On the other hand, the plants capable of growing best under low light conditions
are photophobic plants.
Light has great morphological effect on the leaves and stems of the plants. Plants
growing in darkness are characterzied by long, succulent weak stems. The leaves become
underdeveloped, pale, yellowish, chorophyll deficient. This is called etiolation. Variations in the
intensity, quality and duration of light variously affect seed germination and flowering in different
plants. The effect of light on reproductive growth is called photoperiodism.
(f) Plant Growth Hormones : It has been established that the growth of the plant is
controlled by some organic compounds present in exceedingly minute quantity. These
compounds are called phytohormones or growth promoting substances.
14.3. DIFFERENTIATION, DEDIFFERENTIATION, REDIFFERENTIATION
This is a phenomenon where a cell changing from one cell type to another. During
plant cell development cells become specialized fora particular function. This process is called
plant cell differentiation. For example, tracheary element is formed by way of differentiation
where cells elongate and loose their protoplasm to form tracheids. The lignocellulosic secondary
cell wall develop which allows the tracheid to withstand tension and to carry water a long distance.
Chlorenchyma is a specialized form of tissue to perform photosynthesis which is developed
due to the formation of chloroplast in the living cells.
A differentiated cell can regain its capacity for cell division under certain conditions. This
phenomenon is called dedifferentiation. Formation of interfascicular cambium and cork
cambium from fully differentiated parenchyma cells is an example of dedifferentiation. A
dedifferentiated plant cell once again loses its capacity to divide and becomes mature (permanent)
to perform a specific function. This phenomenon is called redifferentiation.
14.4. DEVELOPMENT :
Development involves a sequence of events in the life of a cell, organ or organism. For
example: During the life of a plant, zygote develops to embryo, embryo to seedlings then juvenile
stage, maturation, flowering, seed formation and senescence. The conversion of each phase
into next involves development. The appearance of chloroplast in the cells when exposed to the
sunlight is also a type of development. Development ultimately leads to senescence and death
of the organism.
The sequence of developmental process in a higher plant cell is given in Fig. 14.10.
Mitotic cell division is followed by plasmatic growth, expansion (elongation), differentiation,
maturation, senescence and death. There is no clear cut demarcation as to where one process
ends and other begins. These processes are overlapping. After plasmatic growth and cell
expansion, one or both of the daughter cell s may undergo cell division again instead of
undergoing the developmental process.
Cell Division
--------------------------, SENESCENCE
I I Death <-----------------,
I
V
Plasmatic growth 1 Differentiation
MERISTEMATIC ------------------------- > ------------------------------ >
CELL I
>> MATURE
Expansion Maturation CELL
(Elongation)
Fig 14.10 : Sequence of developmental process in a plant cell
If we consider the general pattern of development in the life of a plant, this takes the
following route :
Seed germination -> Vegetative Phase Maturation Reproductive phase

Senescence Death
Always the process of development is not straight rather plants also show plasticity.
Due to this plasticity plants can deviate and follow different pathways to produce various structures
in response to the environment. Phenotypic plasticity is considered one of the major means by
which plants can cope with environmental factor variability. Example of plasticity is heterophylly
in plants. It means the appearance of different forms of leaves on the same plant like cotton,
coriander etc. These type of plants show variation in leaf shape in the juvenile stage and in
mature stage. Similarly, the difference in shapes of leaves can be observed in buttercup plant
growing in air and water (Fig. 14.11).
Fig 14.11 : Heterophylly in a. larkspur and b. buttercup
It is very clear now that the growth, differentiation and development are closely interrelated
in the life of a plant. However, development includes the growth and differentiation. There are
many intrinsic and extrinsic factors that influence the developmental stages of a plant. The
intrinsic factors include genetic (intracellular) and chemical substances like plant growth
regulators (intercellular). The extrinsic factors include, oxygen, CO2, temperature, nutrition, etc.
These factors very much influence the different sequence of events, such as, dormancy, seed
germination, flowering, plant movements, etc. during the development of plant.
14.6. GROWTH REGULATORS :
Growth regulators are the organic compounds synthesized in plants naturally and required
in very minute quantities. These compounds regulate one or more physiological activities at the
same site or away from its site of synthesis. These substances affect physiological activities of
plants which lead to promotion, inhibition and modification of growth. Hence, these are also
called plant growth regulators or phytohormones.
Basing on the action of these compounds on the plant system, the plant growth regulators
have been classified into the following:
(a) Growth Promoters : The chemicals which help in promoting the plant growth by
causing the cell division, cell enlargement, flowering, fruiting and seed formation e.g. Auxin,
Gibberellins and Cytokinin.
(b) Growth Inhibitors : The chemicals which help in inhibition of growth such as
dormancy and abscission, e.g. Abscisic Acid(ABA)
Another phytohormone ethylene does not fit into the above categories but as this is an
inhibitor of growth activities, this is popularly known as a plant growth inhibitor.
14.6.1. Auxin :
These were the first of the major plant hormones to be discovered. Auxins are a group
of phytohormones produced in the shoot and root apices and they migrate from the apex to the
zone of elongation. Auxin promote the growth along the longitudinal axis of the plant and hence
the name (auxein meaning to grow). The term, auxin was introduced by Kogi and Haagen-
Smith (1931). Went (1928) isolated auxin from the Avena coleoptile tips by a method called
Avena coleoptile or curvature test and concluded that no growth can occur without auxin.
Auxin was first isolated from the human urine sample. They occur in the growing apices
of the stems and roots from where they migrate to the site of action. The transportation of auxin
is predominantly polar. The auxins produced naturally in the plants include Indole -3-Acetic
Acid(IAA) and lndole-3-Butyric Acid(IBA). However, there are some synthetic auxins produced
artificially e.g. Napthalene Acetic Acid(NAA), 2.4-Dichloro phenoxy acetic acid (2,4-D), 2,4,5-
Tricholro phenoxy acetic acid (2,4,5-T).
Physiological effects and applications of auxin :
(i) Cell division and elongation : The primary physiological effects of auxin are cell
division and cell elongation in the shoots. It is important in the secondary growth
of stem and differentiation of xylem elements.
(ii) Apical Dominance : In many plants, if the terminal bud is intact and growing, the
growth of lateral buds just below it remains suppressed. Removal of the apical
bud results in the rapid growth of lateral buds. This phenomenon in which the
apical bud dominates over the lateral buds and does not allow the lateral buds to
grow is known as apical dominance.
Skoog and Thimmann (1948) pointed out that the apical dominance might
be under the control of auxin produced at the terminal bud and which is transported
downward through the stem to the lateral buds and prevents the growth. They
removed the apical bud and replaced it with agar block. This resulted in rapid
growth of lateral buds. But when they replaced the apical bud with agar block
containing auxin, the lateral buds remained suppressed and did not grow.
(iii) Abscission : Auxins prevent the formation of abscission layer which may otherwise
result in the abscission (premature fall) of leaves, flowers and fruits.
(iv) Root initiation : Auxin stimulates root initiation on stem cuttings. This is used as
arooting hormone in tissue culture. The commonly used rooting hormones are
NAA and IBA.
(v) Parthenocarpy : Auxin can induce the formation of parthenocarpic fruits (fruit
formation without pollination and fertilization). In parthenocarpic fruits, the
concentration of auxin in the ovaries is higher than in the ovaries of plants which
produce fruits by way of fertilization.
(vi) Weedicide : Some synthetic auxins are very useful for eradication of weeds from
the farmer’s fields. 2,4-D, 2,4,5-T are such auxins used as the weedicides at
higher concentrations.
14.6.2. Gibberellins :
A Japanese scientist Kurosawa found that the rice seedlings infected by the fungus
Gibberella fujikuroi grow taller and turned very thin and pale. These are the symptoms of bakanae
disease of rice. An active substance was isolated from the infected seedlings and named as
Gibberellin or gibberellic acid. It is now known that there are over 100 different gibberellins
have been isolated and chemically characterized. They all share gibbane ring structures and
are acidic in nature. They are denoted as GAr GA2, GA3 and so on. Among all available
gibberellins, GA3 is one of the first to be discovered and thoroughly the most intensively studied
form. No plant appears to possess all of the gibberellins, some have only been found in fungi
and some only in higher plants. Gibberellins are found in all parts of higher plants including
shoots, roots, leaves, flower, petals, anthers and seeds.
Physiological effects and applications of gibberellins :
(i) Seed germination: Certain light sensitive seeds e.g. Lettuce and tobacco show
poor germination in dark. Germination starts vigorously if these seeds are exposed
to light or red light. This requirement of light is overcome if the seeds are treated
with gibberellic acid in dark.
(ii) Stem and leaf growth: Gibberellins stimulate stem elongation and other aerial
parts. Therefore, these increase the size of stem and fruits.
(iii) Bolting : Gibberellins induce stem elongation in rossette plants like cabbage,
beet. In rossette plants, intermodal growth gets reduced and leaves develop
profusely. In these plants, just prior to the reproductive phase the internodes
elongate profusely causing a marked increase in stem height. This is called bolting.
The bolting can also be induced by the application of gibberellins.
(iv) Parthenocarpy : The growth of the fruit and the formation of parthenocarpic fruits
can be induced by gibberellin treatment. In many cases, e.g. pome and stone
fruits where auxins have failed to induce parthenocarpy, the gibberellins have
proven to be successful. Seedless and fleshy tomatoes and large sized seedless
grapes are produced by gibberellin treatments on commercial scale.
(v) Seed Germination : Gibberellins are known to break the seed dormancy. Seeds
which are light dependent for their germination, can be made to germinate by the
application of gibberellins in dark.
(vi) Bud dormancy : Application of gibberellins help in breaking the bud dormancy
though the external environmental conditions are not favourable.
(vii) Elongation of internodes : Gibberellins help in the elongation of internodes thus

help in overcoming genetic dwarfism e.g. dwarf maize, dwarf pea.
Carbohydrate in the form of sugar is deposited in sugarcane. The

internode length of the stem increases with the application of gibberellins, thus
the sugar deposition content increases in the crop.
14.6.3. Cytokinin :
Miller and his group (1955) isolated kinetin from the herring sperm DNA which had a
power of promoting cytokinesis. Because of its specific effect on cytokinesis (cell division), it
was called as cytokinins or kinetin. Kinetin (6-furfurylaminopurine) is a synthetic product and
does not occur naturally in plants. The term cytokinin was proposed by Letham (1963).
The first natural cytokinin was isolated from unripe maize grains or kernels known as
zeatin. It can also be isolated from coconut milk. After the discovery of zeatin, several naturally
occurring cytokinins and some synthetic compounds with the capacity to promote cell divison
have been identified. These are found to occur in the area where cell division occur like root
apex, shoot buds, young fruits, etc.Chemically these are modified purines, derived from tRNA
e.g., zeatin (Benzyl amino purine or BAP), di hydrozeatin, Isopentenyl adenine(IPA).
Physiological effects and applications of cytokinin:
(i) Cell Division : The most important biological effect of kinetin on plants is to induce
cell division. Cytokinin with a mild dose of Auxin can bring about cell division in
permanent cells.
(ii) Apical Dominance : The cytokinin are known to counteract the apical dominance.
This can initiate the lateral bud formation even in presence of apical buds.
(iii) Delay in Senescence (Richmond Lang effect) : Senescence is accompanied
by the loss of chlorophyll and active breakdown of proteins from the plant parts.
Application of cytokinin on the leaves and other organs delay the senescence by
controlling protein synthesis and nutrient mobilization. Commercially florists use
this for increasing the shelf life of the flowers.
(iv) Breaking Dormancy : Like gibberellins, the dormancy of certain light sensitive
seeds such as lettuce and tobacco can also be broken by kinetin treatment.
Besides, the cytokinin is very much useful in Plant Tissue Culture for
inducing morphogenesis and organogenesis.
14.6.4. Ethylene :
H.H.Cousins first observed that the unripe bananas kept near the ripe oranges made to
ripe because of some volatile substance emission. R. Gane (1934) clearly established that
ethylene is a natural product for ripening of fruits and responsible for first ripening of fruit.
Ethylene is a gas and is produced in very minute quantities in plant tissues. It is synthesized in
almost all plant parts like roots, leaves, flowers, fruits, tubers, seeds, etc. it is synthesized in the
plants from the amino acid methionine. It affects some physiological activities of the plants.
(i) It is more known as a fruit ripening hormone. Fruits such as apple, banana, tomato,
etc. when in contact with ethylene results in respiration climacteric (sudden sharp
rise in rate of respiration) and fruits ripen. Such fruits are climacteric fruits.
(ii) It is a very good feminizing agent i.e. it increases the number of female flowers
and fruits in some plants e.g. Cucumber.
(iii) This is known to inhibit flowering in plants. But in mango and pineapple, it is
known to induce flowering. Ethylene is commercially used to synchronize flowering
and fruit set in pineapple.
(iv) It is known to promote senescence of plant parts such as leaves, flowers.
(v) It is responsible for the abscission of leaves, flowers and fruits.
(vi) It inhibits longitudinal growth but stimulates transverse growth of seedlings.
(vii) It is helpful in breaking the dormancy of seeds in peanuts, barley and some cereals,
(viii) It induces the development of lateral roots and growth of root hairs.
(ix) It induces epinasty and geotropic movements in plants.
14.6.5. Abscissic acid :
F.T. Addicott (1963) first noticed an antagonistic substance to growth of young cotton
fruits, which was named later as Abscissic Acid(ABA). This is also called dormin, a naturally
occurring growth regulator found in a wide variety of plants. These are mostly found in dormant
buds and seeds. The known precursor of ABA is violaxanthin. This has the following physiological
role on the plants:
(i) The role of ABA in the closure of stomata in water stressed plants is established.
More befittingly this is called a stress hormone. It has also been suggested that
ABA causes closing of stomata by inhibiting ATP mediated H+/ K+ ion exchange
pumps in guard cells.
(ii) It acts as a growth inhibitor and induces dormancy of buds and seeds. It is called
dormin because of its nature to induce dormancy.
(iii) This promotes senescence by inhibiting the protein, RNA synthesis and causing
destruction of chlorophyll.
(iv) It inhibits gibberellins induced growth in various plants and is known to be a powerful
gibberellins antagoniser.
(v) It is known to inhibit the germination of seeds.
(vi) It regulates growth and ripening of fruits.
14.7. SEED DORMANCY :
Many angiospermic seeds cannot germinate immediately after their formation. They
have to undergo a period of dormancy or resting period. The period of dormancy is not constant
in all the plants. Most cereals are capable of germination immediately after harvesting but some
other seeds do not germinate until one year. Some plants do not need any resting period while,
in some plants, seeds fail to germinate even under suitable conditions of germination. This
state of inactivation of seeds may be due to some internal factors that inhibit the process of
germination. This is known as seed dermancy. The causes of seed dormancy and its release
mechanism vary in different seeds, being species specific.
Dormancy due to seed coat: The seed coat testa of many seeds is extremely hard and
tough. It offers mechanical resistance to germination. It is impermeable to water and oxygen.
Such seeds can germinate only if the seed coat is artificially removed either by chemical
treatment or by mechanical means. The mechanical method of removal of seed coat is called
scarification.
Dormancy due to the condition of the embryo : Dispersal of some seeds takes place
when their embryos are not mature. It may take sometime to mature and this is the cause of
dormancy. In some seeds, like those of rose, the embryo though fully developed is physiologically
immature at dispersal. The seeds germinate after a period of rest. Such seeds can be induced
to germinate early if they are stored in moist, well aerated and low temperature conditions - a
process called stratification.
Dormancy due to chemicals and growth regulators : Presence of some chemical

substances such as coumarin, phenolic acid, para ascorbic acid etc and hormones like abscissic
acid in the embryo, endosperm and seed coat induce dormancy and seeds do not germinate as
long as their concentation is high. Concentration of such inhibitors can be reduced by various
treatments such as exposure to fluctuating temperature, chilling, light, keeping under running
water, treatment of hydrated seeds with hormones like gibberellin and cytokinin or with certain
chemicals like potassium nitrate, thiourea etc.
14.8. VERNALIZATION :
In many plants, flowering is influenced also by temperature. In annuals, the flowering is

primarily affected by photoperiod. The effect of temperature is secondary to light. A biennial
plant, on the other hand, grows only vegetatively during the first season and will not initiate

1st Year Biology Part-1 Sc1 Biology1

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

1st Year Biology Part-1 Sc1 Biology1

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

1st Year Biology Part-1 Sc1 Biology1

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

BUREAU’S

HIGHER SECONDARY (+2)

Dr. Baman Chandra Acharya Dr. Subas Chandra Das

Dr. Pradeep Kumar Mohanty

ODISHA STATE BUREAU OF TEXTBOOK PREPARATION AND PRODUCTION

First Edition 2016

© Reserved by the Odisha State Bureau of Textbook Preparation and Production,

Type Setting, Design & Printing:

Price : ? 380/- (Rupees Three Hundred Eighty Only)

The Council of Higher Secondary Education, Odisha in its maiden attempt

It gives me immense pleasure to note the publication of Bureau's Higher

My sincere thanks to the Principal Secretary in the Department of Higher

The board of writers and reviewers acknowledge their gratitude to Odisha

Unit-I : DIVERSITY IN LIVING WORLD (Periods 10)

Unit-II : STRUCTURAL ORGANIZATION IN ANIMALS AND PLANTS (Periods 12)

Unit - III : CELL STRUCTURE AND FUNCTION (Periods 12)

Unit-V : HUMAN PHYSIOLOGY (Periods 30)

(NB: I b, c; II a; III and IV units are to be taught by Botany Faculty. I a, d; II b; V

Chapter -1 BIODIVERSITY 1 -14

1.1. WHAT IS LIVING?

Thus, some defining features of organisms are:

5. They respond to various environmental stimuli and thus possess consciousness.

1.3. NEED FOR CLASSIFICATION :

1.4. BINOMIAL NOMENCLATURE :

3. There is a space between the generic and specific names.

1.5. THREE DOMAINS OF LIFE :

According to the traditional system of classification introduced by Linnaeus, kingdom is

1.5.1. Domain Archaea :

1.5.2. Domain Bacteria :

1.5.3. Domain Eukaryota :

1.6. TAXONOMY AND SYSTEMATICS :

1.7. CONCEPT OF SPECIES AND TAXONOMICAL HIERARCHY :

An animal is placed in an appropriate taxonomic category, which is assigned a name.

1.7.1. Scheme of Classification :

1. Species (Plural; species): Species is defined as a group of individuals, which

6. Phylum or Division (Plural; phyla): Classes of different organisms having some

1.8. TOOLS FOR STUDY OF TAXONOMY :

Correct identification and classification of animals, plants and microbes is of vital

Taxonomic studies on various species of organisms bear great significance considering

1.8.2. Zoos (Zoological Parks) :

Fig. 1.2 : Nandankanan Zoological Park, Bhubaneswar

Fig. 1.3 : A herbarium sheet containing various plant specimens.

1.8.4. Botanical Gardens (Botanic Gardens) (Fig. 1.4):

1. Choose the correct answer:

(viii) Full form of ICBN is:

2. Answer the following :

(i) Name the author of the book ‘Systema Naturae’.

(ii) Under which domain comes the Kingdom Animalia?

(v) Which district Nanadankanan Biological Park is situated?

1. Answer the following in three sentences each :

(i) What is taxonomical hierarchy?

(ii) Explain the concept of species.

(iii) State the usefulness of taxonomic tools.

(v) What are the objectives of zoological parks?

2. Differentiate between two words in the following pairs of words :

2.1. TWO KINGDOM SYSTEM

3) The position of the prokaryotes was completely ignored.

2.2. THREE KINGDOM SYSTEM

1) Recognition of the importance of the micro-organisms in the living world.